AI Tipiṭaka Translations

Hide English Translation

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Dvemātikāpāḷi

Dvemātikāpāḷi

Bhikkhupātimokkhapāḷi

Bhikkhupātimokkhapāḷi

Pubbakaraṇaṃ-4

Pubbakaraṇaṃ-4

Sammajjanī padīpo ca, udakaṃ āsanena ca;

Sweeping, a lamp, and water, and a seat:
These are called "preliminary duties."

Pubbakiccaṃ-5

Pubbakiccaṃ-5

Chanda, pārisuddhi, utukkhānaṃ, bhikkhugaṇanā ca ovādo;

Declaration of consent, declaration of purity, announcement of the season, counting the bhikkhus, and exhortation:
These are called "preliminary business."

Pattakallaaṅgā-4

Pattakallaaṅgā-4

Uposatho, yāvatikā ca bhikkhū kammappattā;

The Uposatha, and as many bhikkhus as are qualified for the act;
And there are no offenses of the same kind;
This is called "being fit."

Pubbakaraṇapubbakiccāni samāpetvā desitāpattikassa samaggassa bhikkhusaṅghassa anumatiyā pātimokkhaṃ uddisituṃ ārādhanaṃ karoma.

Having completed the preliminary duties and preliminary business, with the consent of the Saṅgha of bhikkhus who have declared their offenses, we request the recitation of the Pātimokkha.

Nidānuddeso
Introduction

Suṇātu me bhante saṅgho? Ajjuposatho pannaraso, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho uposathaṃ kareyya, pātimokkhaṃ uddiseyya.

May the Saṅgha hear me, venerable sirs. Today is the fifteenth, the Uposatha day. If it seems fit to the Saṅgha, the Saṅgha should hold the Uposatha and recite the Pātimokkha.

Kiṃ saṅghassa pubbakiccaṃ? Pārisuddhiṃ āyasmanto ārocetha, pātimokkhaṃ uddisissāmi, taṃ sabbeva santā sādhukaṃ suṇoma manasi karoma. Yassa siyā āpatti, so āvikareyya, asantiyā āpattiyā tuṇhī bhavitabbaṃ, tuṇhībhāvena kho panāyasmante ‘‘parisuddhā’’ti vedissāmi. Yathā kho pana paccekapuṭṭhassa veyyākaraṇaṃ hoti, evamevaṃ evarūpāya parisāya yāvatatiyaṃ anusāvitaṃ hoti. Yo pana bhikkhu yāvatatiyaṃ anusāviyamāne saramāno santiṃ āpattiṃ nāvikareyya, sampajānamusāvādassa hoti. Sampajānamusāvādo kho panāyasmanto antarāyiko dhammo vutto bhagavatā, tasmā saramānena bhikkhunā āpannena visuddhāpekkhena santī āpatti āvikātabbā, āvikatā hissa phāsu hoti.

What is to be done by the Saṅgha as a preliminary? Let the venerable ones announce their purity. I will recite the Pātimokkha. May all of you listen carefully and pay attention. Whoever has an offense, let him declare it. If there is no offense, one should remain silent. By your silence, I shall understand that the venerable ones are completely pure. Just as there is an explanation for each individual question, so it is announced three times to this assembly. If any bhikkhu, while being announced to for the third time, remembers that he has an offense and does not declare it, he is guilty of intentional lying. Intentional lying, venerable sirs, has been declared by the Blessed One to be an obstructive factor. Therefore, a bhikkhu who remembers having committed an offense, desiring purification, should declare his offense. For by declaring it, he will be at ease.

Uddiṭṭhaṃ kho āyasmanto nidānaṃ. Tatthāyasmante pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, dutiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, tatiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, parisuddhetthāyasmanto, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmīti.

The introduction has been recited, venerable sirs. Therein I ask the venerable ones, are you completely pure? For the second time I ask, are you completely pure? For the third time I ask, are you completely pure? The venerable ones are completely pure, therefore you are silent. Thus, I understand it.

Nidānaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ.

The Introduction is finished.

Pārājikuddeso
Recitation of the Pārājikas

Tatrime cattāro pārājikā dhammā uddesaṃ āgacchanti.

Herein, these four pārājika Dhammas come up for recitation.

Methunadhamma sikkhāpadaṃ

The precept on sexual intercourse

1.Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno sikkhaṃ appaccakkhāya dubbalyaṃ anāvikatvā methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭiseveyya, antamaso tiracchānagatāyapi, pārājiko hoti asaṃvāso.

1. Whatever bhikkhu, having undertaken the training and the way of life of the bhikkhus, without renouncing the training, without declaring his weakness, should engage in sexual intercourse, even with a female animal, is defeated and no longer in affiliation.

Adinnādānasikkhāpadaṃ

The precept on taking what is not given

2.Yo pana bhikkhu gāmā vā araññā vā adinnaṃ theyyasaṅkhātaṃ ādiyeyya, yathārūpe adinnādāne rājāno coraṃ gahetvā haneyyuṃ vā bandheyyuṃ vā pabbājeyyuṃ vā corosi bālosi mūḷhosi thenosīti, tathārūpaṃ bhikkhu adinnaṃ ādiyamāno ayampi pārājiko hoti asaṃvāso.

2. Whatever bhikkhu should take, from a village or from the wilderness, something not given, which is considered theft; in such a case of taking what is not given, kings would arrest the thief and execute him, or imprison him, or banish him, saying, "You are a thief, you are a fool, you are an idiot, you are a stealer;" a bhikkhu taking such a thing not given is also defeated and no longer in affiliation.

Manussaviggahasikkhāpadaṃ

The precept on depriving a human being of life

3.Yo pana bhikkhu sañcicca manussaviggahaṃ jīvitā voropeyya, satthahārakaṃ vāssa pariyeseyya, maraṇavaṇṇaṃ vā saṃvaṇṇeyya, maraṇāya vā samādapeyya ‘‘ambho purisa kiṃ tuyhiminā pāpakena dujjīvitena, mataṃ te jīvitā seyyo’’ti, iti cittamano cittasaṅkappo anekapariyāyena maraṇavaṇṇaṃ vā saṃvaṇṇeyya, maraṇāya vā samādapeyya, ayampi pārājiko hoti asaṃvāso.

3. Whatever bhikkhu should intentionally deprive a human being of life, or should seek an assassin for him, or should speak in praise of death, or should incite him to die, saying, "My good man, what is the use of this miserable, evil life to you? Death is better for you than life," thus with his mind so resolved, with his thoughts so determined, in many ways should speak in praise of death, or should incite him to die, he also is defeated and no longer in affiliation.

Uttarimanussadhammasikkhāpadaṃ

The precept on claiming superior human states

4.Yo pana bhikkhu anabhijānaṃ uttarimanussadhammaṃ attupanāyikaṃ alamariyañāṇadassanaṃ samudācareyya ‘‘iti jānāmi, iti passāmī’’ti, tato aparena samayena samanuggāhīyamāno vā asamanuggāhīyamāno vā āpanno visuddhāpekkho evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘ajānamevaṃ āvuso avacaṃ jānāmi, apassaṃ passāmi, tucchaṃ musā vilapi’’nti, aññatra adhimānā, ayampi pārājiko hoti asaṃvāso.

4. Whatever bhikkhu, without full knowledge, should declare a superior human state, an attainment of special knowledge and vision suited to the noble ones, saying, "Thus I know, thus I see," and then at a later time, whether being examined or not being examined, being subject to punishment and desiring purification, should say, "I said 'I know' though not knowing, 'I see' though not seeing, I spoke falsely and emptily," unless it was due to excessive conceit, he also is defeated and no longer in affiliation.

Uddiṭṭhā kho āyasmanto cattāro pārājikā dhammā. Yesaṃ bhikkhu aññataraṃ vā aññataraṃ vā āpajjitvā na labhati bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ saṃvāsaṃ yathā pure, tathā pacchā, pārājiko hoti asaṃvāso. Tatthāyasmante pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, dutiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, tatiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, parisuddhetthāyasmanto, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmīti.

The four pārājika Dhammas have been recited, venerable sirs. If a bhikkhu commits any one of them, he does not have association with the bhikkhus, as before, so after, he is defeated and no longer in affiliation. Therein I ask the venerable ones, are you completely pure? For the second time I ask, are you completely pure? For the third time I ask, are you completely pure? The venerable ones are completely pure, therefore you are silent. Thus, I understand it.

Pārājikaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ.

The Pārājika is finished.

Saṅghādisesuddeso
Recitation of the Saṅghādisesas

Ime kho panāyasmanto terasa saṅghādisesā

These thirteen Saṅghādisesa Dhammas come up for recitation, venerable sirs.

Dhammā uddesaṃ āgacchanti.

Dhammas come up for recitation.

Sukkavissaṭṭhisikkhāpadaṃ

The precept on intentional emission of semen

1.Sañcetanikā sukkavissaṭṭhi aññatra supinantā saṅghādiseso.

1. Intentional emission of semen, except in a dream, is a Saṅghādisesa.

Kāyasaṃsaggasikkhāpadaṃ

The precept on bodily contact

2.Yo pana bhikkhu otiṇṇo vipariṇatena cittena mātugāmena saddhiṃ kāyasaṃsaggaṃ samāpajjeyya hatthaggāhaṃ vā veṇiggāhaṃ vā aññatarassa vā aññatarassa vā aṅgassa parāmasanaṃ, saṅghādiseso.

2. Whatever bhikkhu, being obsessed with a distorted mind, should engage in bodily contact with a woman, such as holding her hand, or holding her braid, or touching any of her limbs, is a Saṅghādisesa.

Duṭṭhullavācāsikkhāpadaṃ

The precept on obscene speech

3.Yo pana bhikkhu otiṇṇo vipariṇatena cittena mātugāmaṃ duṭṭhullāhi vācāhi obhāseyya yathā taṃ yuvā yuvatiṃ methunupasaṃhitāhi, saṅghādiseso.

3. Whatever bhikkhu, being obsessed with a distorted mind, should address a woman with lewd words, such as a young man would address a young woman with words pertaining to sexual intercourse, is a Saṅghādisesa.

Attakāmapāricariyasikkhāpadaṃ

The precept on soliciting sexual favors

4.Yo pana bhikkhu otiṇṇo vipariṇatena cittena mātugāmassa santike attakāmapāricariyāya vaṇṇaṃ bhāseyya ‘‘etadaggaṃ bhagini pāricariyānaṃ yā mādisaṃ sīlavantaṃ kalyāṇadhammaṃ brahmacāriṃ etena dhammena paricareyyā’’ti methunupasaṃhitena, saṅghādiseso.

4. Whatever bhikkhu, being obsessed with a distorted mind, should praise to a woman his own fitness for sexual services, saying, "This is the highest of services, sister, that one should attend upon a bhikkhu like me, virtuous, of good Dhamma, leading the holy life, with this Dhamma," with words pertaining to sexual intercourse, is a Saṅghādisesa.

Sañcarittasikkhāpadaṃ

The precept on acting as a go-between

5.Yo pana bhikkhu sañcarittaṃ samāpajjeyya itthiyā vā purisamatiṃ purisassa vā itthimatiṃ, jāyattane vā jārattane vā, antamaso taṅkhaṇikāyapi, saṅghādiseso.

5. Whatever bhikkhu should act as a go-between between a woman and a man, or between a man and a woman, whether as a wife or as a temporary liaison, even for a moment, is a Saṅghādisesa.

Kuṭikārasikkhāpadaṃ

The precept on building a hut

6.Saññācikāya pana bhikkhunā kuṭiṃ kārayamānena assāmikaṃ attuddesaṃ pamāṇikā kāretabbā, tatridaṃ pamāṇaṃ, dīghaso dvādasa vidatthiyo sugatavidatthiyā, tiriyaṃ sattantarā, bhikkhū abhinetabbā vatthudesanāya, tehi bhikkhūhi vatthu desetabbaṃ anārambhaṃ saparikkamanaṃ. Sārambhe ce bhikkhu vatthusmiṃ aparikkamane saññācikāya kuṭiṃ kāreyya, bhikkhū vā anabhineyya vatthudesanāya, pamāṇaṃ vā atikkāmeyya, saṅghādiseso.

6. When a bhikkhu is having a hut built with his own resources, it should be built to measure by a bhikkhu, without being assigned to anyone. Here is the measure: twelve spans in length by the Sugata's span, and seven spans across inside. The bhikkhus should be invited to point out the site. The site should be pointed out by those bhikkhus as being unobstructed and with space for passage all around. If a bhikkhu should have a hut built with his own resources on an obstructed site without space for passage all around, or should not invite the bhikkhus to point out the site, or should exceed the measure, it is a Saṅghādisesa.

Vihārakārasikkhāpadaṃ

The precept on building a monastery

7.Mahallakaṃ pana bhikkhunā vihāraṃ kārayamānena sassāmikaṃ attuddesaṃ bhikkhū abhinetabbā vatthudesanāya, tehi bhikkhūhi vatthu desetabbaṃ anārambhaṃ saparikkamanaṃ. Sārambhe ce bhikkhu vatthusmiṃ aparikkamane mahallakaṃ vihāraṃ kāreyya, bhikkhū vā anabhineyya vatthudesanāya, saṅghādiseso.

7. When a bhikkhu is having a large monastery built that is assigned to someone, the bhikkhus should be invited to point out the site. The site should be pointed out by those bhikkhus as being unobstructed and with space for passage all around. If a bhikkhu should have a large monastery built on an obstructed site without space for passage all around, or should not invite the bhikkhus to point out the site, it is a Saṅghādisesa.

Duṭṭhadosasikkhāpadaṃ

The precept on falsely accusing a bhikkhu

8.Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhuṃ duṭṭho doso appatīto amūlakena pārājikena dhammena anuddhaṃseyya ‘‘appeva nāma naṃ imamhā brahmacariyā cāveyya’’nti, tato aparena samayena samanuggāhīyamāno vā asamanuggāhīyamāno vā amūlakañceva taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ hoti, bhikkhu ca dosaṃ patiṭṭhāti, saṅghādiseso.

8. Whatever bhikkhu, being angry and displeased, should accuse another bhikkhu of a pārājika Dhamma without foundation, with the intention that he might thereby be expelled from the holy life, and then at a later time, whether being examined or not being examined, that charge is both groundless, and the bhikkhu persists in his anger, it is a Saṅghādisesa.

Aññabhāgiyasikkhāpadaṃ

The precept on partially distorting an accusation

9.Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhuṃ duṭṭho doso appatīto aññabhāgiyassa adhikaraṇassa kiñcidesaṃ lesamattaṃ upādāya pārājikena dhammena anuddhaṃseyya ‘‘appeva nāma naṃ imamhā brahmacariyā cāveyya’’nti, tato aparena samayena samanuggāhīyamāno vā asamanuggāhīyamāno vā aññabhāgiyañceva taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ hoti kocideso lesamatto upādinno, bhikkhu ca dosaṃ patiṭṭhāti, saṅghādiseso.

9. Whatever bhikkhu, being angry and displeased, taking up some slight reason connected with another kind of offense, should accuse another bhikkhu of a pārājika Dhamma, with the intention that he might thereby be expelled from the holy life, and then at a later time, whether being examined or not being examined, that charge is connected with another kind of offense, some slight reason has been taken up, and the bhikkhu persists in his anger, it is a Saṅghādisesa.

Saṅghabhedasikkhāpadaṃ

The precept on causing a schism in the Saṅgha

10.Yo pana bhikkhu samaggassa saṅghassa bhedāya parakkameyya, bhedanasaṃvattanikaṃ vā adhikaraṇaṃ samādāya paggayha tiṭṭheyya, so bhikkhu bhikkhūhi evamassa vacanīyo ‘‘māyasmā samaggassa saṅghassa bhedāya parakkami, bhedanasaṃvattanikaṃ vā adhikaraṇaṃ samādāya paggayha aṭṭhāsi, sametāyasmā saṅghena, samaggo hi saṅgho sammodamāno avivadamāno ekuddeso phāsu viharatī’’ti, evañca so bhikkhu bhikkhūhi vuccamāno tatheva paggaṇheyya, so bhikkhu bhikkhūhi yāvatatiyaṃ samanubhāsitabbo tassa paṭinissaggāya, yāvatatiyañce samanubhāsiyamāno taṃ paṭinissajjeyya, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ, no ce paṭinissajjeyya, saṅghādiseso.

10. Whatever bhikkhu should strive to cause a schism in a Saṅgha that is in concord, or should persist in upholding a matter that leads to schism, that bhikkhu should be addressed by the bhikkhus thus: "Venerable sir, do not strive to cause a schism in a Saṅgha that is in concord, nor persist in upholding a matter that leads to schism. Let the venerable sir be in concord with the Saṅgha, for a Saṅgha in concord, rejoicing together, without dispute, with a common recitation, dwells in comfort." If that bhikkhu, when he is being addressed by the bhikkhus in this way, should persist in upholding it, that bhikkhu should be formally admonished by the bhikkhus up to three times for the abandonment of that course. If, while being formally admonished up to three times, he should abandon it, that is good. If he should not abandon it, it is a Saṅghādisesa.

Bhedānuvattakasikkhāpadaṃ

The precept on supporting a schismatic

11.Tasseva kho pana bhikkhussa bhikkhū honti anuvattakā vaggavādakā eko vā dve vā tayo vā, te evaṃ vadeyyuṃ ‘‘māyasmanto etaṃ bhikkhuṃ kiñci avacuttha, dhammavādī ceso bhikkhu, vinayavādī ceso bhikkhu, amhākañceso bhikkhu chandañca ruciñca ādāya voharati, jānāti, no bhāsati, amhākampetaṃ khamatī’’ti, te bhikkhū bhikkhūhi evamassu vacanīyā ‘‘māyasmanto evaṃ avacuttha, na ceso bhikkhu dhammavādī, na ceso bhikkhu vinayavādī, māyasmantānampi saṅghabhedo ruccittha, sametāyasmantānaṃ saṅghena, samaggo hi saṅgho sammodamāno avivadamāno ekuddeso phāsu viharatī’’ti, evañca te bhikkhū bhikkhūhi vuccamānā tatheva paggaṇheyyuṃ, te bhikkhū bhikkhūhi yāvatatiyaṃ samanubhāsitabbā tassa paṭinissaggāya, yāvatatiyañce samanubhāsiyamānā taṃ paṭinissajjeyyuṃ, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ, no ce paṭinissajjeyyuṃ, saṅghādiseso.

11. If there should be bhikkhus who are supporters of that bhikkhu, following his lead, speaking on his side, one or two or three, and they should say: "Venerable sirs, do not say anything to this bhikkhu. This bhikkhu is a speaker on the Dhamma, this bhikkhu is a speaker on the Vinaya. This bhikkhu speaks with our consent and approval, he knows and speaks what is agreeable to us." Those bhikkhus should be addressed by the bhikkhus thus: "Venerable sirs, do not speak thus. This bhikkhu is not a speaker on the Dhamma, this bhikkhu is not a speaker on the Vinaya. May it not please the venerable ones to cause a schism in the Saṅgha. Let the venerable ones be in concord with the Saṅgha, for a Saṅgha in concord, rejoicing together, without dispute, with a common recitation, dwells in comfort." If those bhikkhus, when they are being addressed by the bhikkhus in this way, should persist in upholding it, those bhikkhus should be formally admonished by the bhikkhus up to three times for the abandonment of that course. If, while being formally admonished up to three times, they should abandon it, that is good. If they should not abandon it, it is a Saṅghādisesa.

Dubbacasikkhāpadaṃ

The precept on being difficult to speak to

12.Bhikkhu paneva dubbacajātiko hoti uddesapariyāpannesu sikkhāpadesu bhikkhūhi sahadhammikaṃ vuccamāno attānaṃ avacanīyaṃ karoti ‘‘mā maṃ āyasmanto kiñci avacuttha kalyāṇaṃ vā pāpakaṃ vā, ahampāyasmante na kiñci vakkhāmi kalyāṇaṃ vā pāpakaṃ vā, viramathāyasmanto mama vacanāyā’’ti, so bhikkhu bhikkhūhi evamassa vacanīyo ‘‘māyasmā attānaṃ avacanīyaṃ akāsi, vacanīyamevāyasmā attānaṃ karotu, āyasmāpi bhikkhū vadatu sahadhammena, bhikkhūpi āyasmantaṃ vakkhanti sahadhammena, evaṃ saṃvaddhā hi tassa bhagavato parisā yadidaṃ aññamaññavacanena aññamaññavuṭṭhāpanenā’’ti, evañca so bhikkhu bhikkhūhi vuccamāno tatheva paggaṇheyya, so bhikkhu bhikkhūhi yāvatatiyaṃ samanubhāsitabbo tassa paṭinissaggāya, yāvatatiyañce samanubhāsiyamāno taṃ paṭinissajjeyya, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ, no ce paṭinissajjeyya, saṅghādiseso.

12. If a bhikkhu should be of such a disposition that he is difficult to speak to, when the bhikkhus address him in accordance with the Dhamma concerning the training rules that come up in the recitation, he makes himself unspeakable to, saying: "Venerable sirs, do not say anything to me, either good or bad. I also will not say anything to the venerable ones, either good or bad. Refrain, venerable sirs, from speaking to me." That bhikkhu should be addressed by the bhikkhus thus: "Venerable sir, do not make yourself unspeakable to. Let the venerable sir make himself speakable to. Let the venerable sir also address the bhikkhus in accordance with the Dhamma, and the bhikkhus will address the venerable sir in accordance with the Dhamma, for in this way does the company of that Blessed One grow, that is to say, by mutual speaking and mutual raising up." If that bhikkhu, when he is being addressed by the bhikkhus in this way, should persist in upholding it, that bhikkhu should be formally admonished by the bhikkhus up to three times for the abandonment of that course. If, while being formally admonished up to three times, he should abandon it, that is good. If he should not abandon it, it is a Saṅghādisesa.

Kuladūsakasikkhāpadaṃ

The precept on corrupting families

13.Bhikkhu paneva aññataraṃ gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā upanissāya viharati kuladūsako pāpasamācāro, tassa kho pāpakā samācārā dissanti ceva suyyanti ca, kulāni ca tena duṭṭhāni dissanti ceva suyyanti ca, so bhikkhu bhikkhūhi evamassa vacanīyo ‘‘āyasmā kho kuladūsako pāpasamācāro, āyasmato kho pāpakā samācārā dissanti ceva suyyanti ca, kulāni cāyasmatā duṭṭhāni dissanti ceva suyyanti ca, pakkamatāyasmā imamhā āvāsā, alaṃ te idha vāsenā’’ti, evañca so bhikkhu bhikkhūhi vuccamāno te bhikkhū evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘chandagāmino ca bhikkhū, dosagāmino ca bhikkhū, mohagāmino ca bhikkhū, bhayagāmino ca bhikkhū tādisikāya āpattiyā ekaccaṃ pabbājenti, ekaccaṃ na pabbājentī’’ti, so bhikkhu bhikkhūhi evamassa vacanīyo ‘‘māyasmā evaṃ avaca, na ca bhikkhū chandagāmino, na ca bhikkhū dosagāmino, na ca bhikkhū mohagāmino, na ca bhikkhū bhayagāmino, āyasmā kho kuladūsako pāpasamācāro, āyasmato kho pāpakā samācārā dissanti ceva suyyanti ca, kulāni cāyasmatā duṭṭhāni dissanti ceva suyyanti ca, pakkamatāyasmā imamhā āvāsā, alaṃ te idha vāsenā’’ti, evañca so bhikkhu bhikkhūhi vuccamāno tatheva paggaṇheyya, so bhikkhu bhikkhūhi yāvatatiyaṃ samanubhāsitabbo tassa paṭinissaggāya, yāvatatiyañce samanubhāsiyamāno taṃ paṭinissajjeyya, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ, no ce paṭinissajjeyya, saṅghādiseso.

13. If a bhikkhu dwells dependent on a certain village or town, corrupting families, behaving in an evil way, and his evil behavior is both seen and heard, and the families are seen and heard to be corrupted by him, that bhikkhu should be addressed by the bhikkhus thus: "The venerable sir is corrupting families, behaving in an evil way, and the venerable sir's evil behavior is both seen and heard, and the families are seen and heard to be corrupted by the venerable sir. Depart, venerable sir, from this dwelling place, enough of your dwelling here." If that bhikkhu, when he is being addressed by the bhikkhus in this way, should speak thus to those bhikkhus: "The bhikkhus are biased by favoritism, the bhikkhus are biased by aversion, the bhikkhus are biased by delusion, the bhikkhus are biased by fear; on account of such an offense they expel some and do not expel others," that bhikkhu should be addressed by the bhikkhus thus: "Do not speak thus, venerable sir. The bhikkhus are not biased by favoritism, the bhikkhus are not biased by aversion, the bhikkhus are not biased by delusion, the bhikkhus are not biased by fear. The venerable sir is corrupting families, behaving in an evil way, and the venerable sir's evil behavior is both seen and heard, and the families are seen and heard to be corrupted by the venerable sir. Depart, venerable sir, from this dwelling place, enough of your dwelling here." If that bhikkhu, when he is being addressed by the bhikkhus in this way, should persist in upholding it, that bhikkhu should be formally admonished by the bhikkhus up to three times for the abandonment of that course. If, while being formally admonished up to three times, he should abandon it, that is good. If he should not abandon it, it is a Saṅghādisesa.

Uddiṭṭhā kho āyasmanto terasa saṅghādisesā dhammā nava paṭhamāpattikā, cattāro yāvatatiyakā. Yesaṃ bhikkhu aññataraṃ vā aññataraṃ vā āpajjitvā yāvatīhaṃ jānaṃ paṭicchādeti, tāvatīhaṃ tena bhikkhunā akāmā parivatthabbaṃ. Parivutthaparivāsena bhikkhunā uttari chārattaṃ bhikkhumānattāya paṭipajjitabbaṃ, ciṇṇamānatto bhikkhu yattha siyā vīsatigaṇo bhikkhusaṅgho, tattha so bhikkhu abbhetabbo. Ekenapi ce ūno vīsatigaṇo bhikkhusaṅgho taṃ bhikkhuṃ abbheyya, so ca bhikkhu anabbhito, te ca bhikkhū gārayhā, ayaṃ tattha sāmīci. Tatthāyasmante pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, dutiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, tatiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, parisuddhetthāyasmanto, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmīti.

Venerable ones, the thirteen Saṅghādisesa Dhammas have been recited, nine with initial offense, four requiring a third instance. If a bhikkhu, knowing, covers up one or another of these offenses, he must undergo parivāsa for that many days unwillingly. Having lived the period of parivāsa, the bhikkhu must further undertake mānatta for six nights. A bhikkhu who has completed mānatta should be rehabilitated by a Saṅgha of twenty bhikkhus, wherever such a group exists. If a Saṅgha of twenty bhikkhus, lacking even one, rehabilitates that bhikkhu, that bhikkhu is not rehabilitated, and those bhikkhus are blameworthy. This is the proper procedure in this case. I ask the venerable ones, are you pure in this matter? A second time I ask, are you pure in this matter? A third time I ask, are you pure in this matter? You are pure in this matter, venerable ones, therefore you are silent. Thus, I hold it.

Saṅghādiseso niṭṭhito.

The Saṅghādisesa is finished.

Aniyatuddeso
Aniyata Section

Ime kho panāyasmanto dve aniyatā dhammā

These two Aniyata Dhammas, venerable ones,

Uddesaṃ āgacchanti.

come up for recitation.

Paṭhamaaniyatasikkhāpadaṃ

First Aniyata training rule

1.Yo pana bhikkhu mātugāmena saddhiṃ eko ekāya raho paṭicchanne āsane alaṃkammaniye nisajjaṃ kappeyya, tamenaṃ saddheyyavacasā upāsikā disvā tiṇṇaṃ dhammānaṃ aññatarena vadeyya pārājikena vā saṅghādisesena vā pācittiyena vā, nisajjaṃ bhikkhu paṭijānamāno tiṇṇaṃ dhammānaṃ aññatarena kāretabbo pārājikena vā saṅghādisesena vā pācittiyena vā, yena vā sā saddheyyavacasā upāsikā vadeyya, tena so bhikkhu kāretabbo, ayaṃ dhammo aniyato.

1. Whatever bhikkhu should arrange to sit down alone with a woman in a secluded place that is suitable for sexual activity, should a trustworthy female lay follower see him and accuse him of one of three offenses: either a pārājika, a saṅghādisesa, or a pācittiya, and should the bhikkhu admit to sitting there, he is to be dealt with for one of three offenses: either a pārājika, a saṅghādisesa, or a pācittiya, according to whichever offense the trustworthy female lay follower accuses him of. This Dhamma is indefinite (aniyata).

Dutiyaaniyatasikkhāpadaṃ

Second Aniyata training rule

2.Na heva kho pana paṭicchannaṃ āsanaṃ hoti nālaṃkammaniyaṃ, alañca kho hoti mātugāmaṃ duṭṭhullāhi vācāhi obhāsituṃ, yo pana bhikkhu tathārūpe āsane mātugāmena saddhiṃ eko ekāya raho nisajjaṃ kappeyya, tamenaṃ saddheyyavacasā upāsikā disvā dvinnaṃ dhammānaṃ aññatarena vadeyya saṅghādisesena vā pācittiyena vā, nisajjaṃ bhikkhu paṭijānamāno dvinnaṃ dhammānaṃ aññatarena kāretabbo saṅghādisesena vā pācittiyena vā, yena vā sā saddheyyavacasā upāsikā vadeyya, tena so bhikkhu kāretabbo, ayampi dhammo aniyato.

2. However, the place is not secluded, nor is it suitable for sexual activity, but it is suitable for addressing a woman with lewd talk. Whatever bhikkhu should arrange to sit down alone with a woman in such a place, should a trustworthy female lay follower see him and accuse him of one of two offenses: either a saṅghādisesa or a pācittiya, and should the bhikkhu admit to sitting there, he is to be dealt with for one of two offenses: either a saṅghādisesa or a pācittiya, according to whichever offense the trustworthy female lay follower accuses him of. This Dhamma is also indefinite (aniyata).

Uddiṭṭhā kho āyasmanto dve aniyatā dhammā. Tatthāyasmante pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, dutiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, tatiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, parisuddhetthāyasmanto, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmīti.

The two Aniyata Dhammas have been recited, venerable ones. I ask the venerable ones, are you pure in this matter? A second time I ask, are you pure in this matter? A third time I ask, are you pure in this matter? You are pure in this matter, venerable ones, therefore you are silent. Thus, I hold it.

Aniyato niṭṭhito.

The Aniyata is finished.

Nissaggiyapācittiyā
Nissaggiya Pācittiyas

Ime kho panāyasmanto tiṃsa nissaggiyā pācittiyā

These thirty Nissaggiya Pācittiya Dhammas, venerable ones,

Dhammā uddesaṃ āgacchanti.

come up for recitation.

Kathinasikkhāpadaṃ

Kathina training rule

1.Niṭṭhitacīvarasmiṃ bhikkhunā ubbhatasmiṃ kathine dasāhaparamaṃ atirekacīvaraṃ dhāretabbaṃ, taṃ atikkāmayato nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

1. When the Kathina robe-cloth has been distributed, a bhikkhu is allowed to keep an extra robe for no more than ten days; to exceed that is a nissaggiya pācittiya.

Udositasikkhāpadaṃ

Udosita training rule

2.Niṭṭhitacīvarasmiṃ bhikkhunā ubbhatasmiṃ kathine ekarattampi ce bhikkhu ticīvarena vippavaseyya, aññatra bhikkhusammutiyā nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

2. When the Kathina robe-cloth has been distributed, should a bhikkhu spend even one night away from his three robes, except with the agreement of the bhikkhus, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya.

Akālacīvarasikkhāpadaṃ

Akala-civara training rule

3.Niṭṭhitacīvarasmiṃ bhikkhunā ubbhatasmiṃ kathine bhikkhuno paneva akālacīvaraṃ uppajjeyya, ākaṅkhamānena bhikkhunā paṭiggahetabbaṃ, paṭiggahetvā khippameva kāretabbaṃ, no cassa pāripūri, māsaparamaṃ tena bhikkhunā taṃ cīvaraṃ nikkhipitabbaṃ ūnassa pāripūriyā satiyā paccāsāya. Tato ce uttari nikkhipeyya satiyāpi paccāsāya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

3. When the Kathina robe-cloth has been distributed, should an unseasonal robe-cloth accrue to a bhikkhu, he may accept it if he wishes; having accepted it, he should have it made up quickly. If it is not completed, that bhikkhu may keep that robe-cloth laid aside for a month at most, in expectation of its completion, with hope. If he keeps it laid aside longer than that, even with hope, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya.

Purāṇacīvarasikkhāpadaṃ

Purana-civara training rule

4.Yo pana bhikkhu aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā purāṇacīvaraṃ dhovāpeyya vā rajāpeyya vā ākoṭāpeyya vā, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

4. Whatever bhikkhu should have an old robe washed, dyed, or carded by a bhikkhuni who is not a relative, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya.

Cīvarapaṭiggahaṇasikkhāpadaṃ

Civara-patiggahena training rule

5.Yo pana bhikkhu aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā hatthato cīvaraṃ paṭiggaṇheyya aññatra pārivattakā, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

5. Whatever bhikkhu should receive a robe from the hand of a bhikkhuni who is not a relative, except in exchange, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya.

Aññātakaviññattisikkhāpadaṃ

Annataka-viññatti training rule

6.Yo pana bhikkhu aññātakaṃ gahapatiṃ vā gahapatāniṃ vā cīvaraṃ viññāpeyya aññatra samayā, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ. Tatthāyaṃ samayo, acchinnacīvaro vā hoti bhikkhu, naṭṭhacīvaro vā, ayaṃ tattha samayo.

6. Whatever bhikkhu should ask a householder or his wife who is not a relative for a robe, except at the proper time, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya. Here this is the proper time: when a bhikkhu has his robe stolen or his robe is destroyed; this is the proper time in this case.

Tatuttarisikkhāpadaṃ

Tatuttari training rule

7.Tañce aññātako gahapati vā gahapatānī vā bahūhi cīvarehi abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāreyya, santaruttaraparamaṃ tena bhikkhunā tato cīvaraṃ sāditabbaṃ. Tato ce uttari sādiyeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

7. If a householder or his wife who is not a relative should invite a bhikkhu to accept an abundance of robes, that bhikkhu may accept no more than one upper and one lower robe. Should he accept more than that, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya.

Paṭhamaupakkhaṭasikkhāpadaṃ

Pathama-upakkata training rule

8.Bhikkhuṃ paneva uddissa aññātakassa gahapatissa vā gahapatāniyā vā cīvaracetāpannaṃ upakkhaṭaṃ hoti ‘‘iminā cīvaracetāpannena cīvaraṃ cetāpetvā itthannāmaṃ bhikkhuṃ cīvarena acchādessāmī’’ti, tatra ce so bhikkhu pubbe appavārito upasaṅkamitvā cīvare vikappaṃ āpajjeyya ‘‘sādhu vata maṃ āyasmā iminā cīvaracetāpannena evarūpaṃ vā evarūpaṃ vā cīvaraṃ cetāpetvā acchādehī’’ti kalyāṇakamyataṃ upādāya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

8. If a robe-cloth allowance is set aside for a bhikkhu by a householder or his wife who is not a relative, (thinking,) “Having bought a robe with this robe-cloth allowance, I will clothe such-and-such a bhikkhu with the robe,” and if that bhikkhu, not having been previously invited, should go to him and make a suggestion about the robe, (saying,) “It would be good if the venerable one, with this robe-cloth allowance, would buy such-and-such a robe and clothe me,” out of a desire for something fine, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya.

Dutiyaupakkhaṭasikkhāpadaṃ

Dutiya-upakkata training rule

9.Bhikkhuṃ paneva uddissa ubhinnaṃ aññātakānaṃ gahapatīnaṃ vā gahapatānīnaṃ vā paccekacīvaracetāpannāni upakkhaṭāni honti ‘‘imehi mayaṃ paccekacīvaracetāpannehi paccekacīvarāni cetāpetvā itthannāmaṃ bhikkhuṃ cīvarehi acchādessāmā’’ti, tatra ce so bhikkhu pubbe appavārito upasaṅkamitvā cīvare vikappaṃ āpajjeyya ‘‘sādhu vata maṃ āyasmanto imehi paccekacīvaracetāpannehi evarūpaṃ vā evarūpaṃ vā cīvaraṃ cetāpetvā acchādetha ubhova santā ekenā’’ti kalyāṇakamyataṃ upādāya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

9. If individual robe-cloth allowances are set aside for a bhikkhu by two householders or their wives who are not relatives, (thinking,) “Having bought individual robes with these individual robe-cloth allowances, we will clothe such-and-such a bhikkhu with the robes,” and if that bhikkhu, not having been previously invited, should go to them and make a suggestion about the robes, (saying,) “It would be good if the venerable ones, with these individual robe-cloth allowances, would both buy such-and-such robes and clothe me with one,” out of a desire for something fine, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya.

Rājasikkhāpadaṃ

Raja training rule

10.Bhikkhuṃ paneva uddissa rājā vā rājabhoggo vā brāhmaṇo vā gahapatiko vā dūtena cīvaracetāpannaṃ pahiṇeyya ‘‘iminā cīvaracetāpannena cīvaraṃ cetāpetvā itthannāmaṃ bhikkhuṃ cīvarena acchādehī’’ti. So ce dūto taṃ bhikkhuṃ upasaṅkamitvā evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘idaṃ kho, bhante, āyasmantaṃ uddissa cīvaracetāpannaṃ ābhataṃ, paṭiggaṇhātu āyasmā cīvaracetāpanna’’nti. Tena bhikkhunā so dūto evamassa vacanīyo ‘‘na kho mayaṃ, āvuso, cīvaracetāpannaṃ paṭiggaṇhāma, cīvarañca kho mayaṃ paṭiggaṇhāma kālena kappiya’’nti. So ce dūto taṃ bhikkhuṃ evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘atthi panāyasmato koci veyyāvaccakaro’’ti. Cīvaratthikena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā veyyāvaccakaro niddisitabbo ārāmiko vā upāsako vā ‘‘eso kho, āvuso, bhikkhūnaṃ veyyāvaccakaro’’ti. So ce dūto taṃ veyyāvaccakaraṃ saññāpetvā taṃ bhikkhuṃ upasaṅkamitvā evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘yaṃ kho, bhante, āyasmā veyyāvaccakaraṃ niddisi, saññatto so mayā, upasaṅkamatāyasmā kālena, cīvarena taṃ acchādessatī’’ti. Cīvaratthikena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā veyyāvaccakaro upasaṅkamitvā dvattikkhattuṃ codetabbo sāretabbo ‘‘attho me, āvuso, cīvarenā’’ti, dvattikkhattuṃ codayamāno sārayamāno taṃ cīvaraṃ abhinipphādeyya, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ, no ce abhinipphādeyya, catukkhattuṃ pañcakkhattuṃ chakkhattuparamaṃ tuṇhībhūtena uddissa ṭhātabbaṃ, catukkhattuṃ pañcakkhattuṃ chakkhattuparamaṃ tuṇhībhūto uddissa tiṭṭhamāno taṃ cīvaraṃ abhinipphādeyya, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ, tato ce uttari vāyamamāno taṃ cīvaraṃ abhinipphādeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ. No ce abhinipphādeyya, yatassa cīvaracetāpannaṃ ābhataṃ, tattha sāmaṃ vā gantabbaṃ, dūto vā pāhetabbo ‘‘yaṃ kho tumhe āyasmanto bhikkhuṃ uddissa cīvaracetāpannaṃ pahiṇittha, na taṃ tassa bhikkhuno kiñci atthaṃ anubhoti, yuñjantāyasmanto sakaṃ, mā vo sakaṃ vinassā’’ti, ayaṃ tattha sāmīci.

10. If a king or a royal official, a Brahmin or a householder should send a robe-cloth allowance by a messenger for a bhikkhu, (saying,) “Having bought a robe with this robe-cloth allowance, clothe such-and-such a bhikkhu with the robe,” and if that messenger should approach that bhikkhu and say thus, “Venerable sir, this robe-cloth allowance has been brought for the venerable one’s sake; may the venerable one accept the robe-cloth allowance,” that bhikkhu should say thus to that messenger, “We do not, friend, accept a robe-cloth allowance, but we do accept a robe when it is timely and allowable.” If that messenger should say thus to that bhikkhu, “Does the venerable one have anyone who acts as his agent?” A bhikkhu who needs a robe should point out an agent, either a ārāmika or a lay follower, (saying,) “This one, friend, is the agent for the bhikkhus.” If that messenger, having informed that agent, should approach that bhikkhu and say thus, “The agent whom the venerable one pointed out, I have informed him; may the venerable one approach him in due time; he will clothe you with a robe.” A bhikkhu who needs a robe should approach the agent and urge him two or three times, reminding him, “I need a robe, friend.” If, when he is urged and reminded two or three times, he produces that robe, that is good; if he does not produce it, he may stand silently intending (to get the robe) four, five, or six times at most. If, when he stands silently intending (to get the robe) four, five, or six times at most, he produces that robe, that is good; if, while trying harder than that, he produces that robe, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya. If he does not produce it, he himself should go or send a messenger to the place from where the robe-cloth allowance was brought, (saying,) “That robe-cloth allowance which you venerable ones sent for the bhikkhu’s sake, it is of no use to that bhikkhu; may the venerable ones use it for themselves; may your property not be lost.” This is the proper procedure in this case.

Kathinavaggo paṭhamo.

The first Kathina Vagga is finished.

Kosiyasikkhāpadaṃ

Kosiya training rule

11.Yo pana bhikkhu kosiyamissakaṃ santhataṃ kārāpeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

11. Whatever bhikkhu should have a rug made mixed with silk, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya.

Suddhakāḷakasikkhāpadaṃ

Suddhakalaka training rule

12.Yo pana bhikkhu suddhakāḷakānaṃ eḷakalomānaṃ santhataṃ kārāpeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

12. Whatever bhikkhu should have a rug made of pure black goat’s wool, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya.

Dvebhāgasikkhāpadaṃ

Dvebhaga training rule

13.Navaṃ pana bhikkhunā santhataṃ kārayamānena dve bhāgā suddhakāḷakānaṃ eḷakalomānaṃ ādātabbā, tatiyaṃ odātānaṃ, catutthaṃ gocariyānaṃ. Anādā ce bhikkhu dve bhāge suddhakāḷakānaṃ eḷakalomānaṃ, tatiyaṃ odātānaṃ, catutthaṃ gocariyānaṃ, navaṃ santhataṃ kārāpeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

13. When a bhikkhu is having a new rug made, two parts of pure black goat’s wool should be taken, a third of white, and a fourth of inferior. If a bhikkhu does not take two parts of pure black goat’s wool, a third of white, and a fourth of inferior, and has a new rug made, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya.

Chabbassasikkhāpadaṃ

Chabbassa training rule

14.Navaṃ pana bhikkhunā santhataṃ kārāpetvā chabbassāni dhāretabbaṃ, orena ce channaṃ vassānaṃ taṃ santhataṃ vissajjetvā vā avissajjetvā vā aññaṃ navaṃ santhataṃ kārāpeyya aññatra bhikkhusammutiyā, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

14. When a bhikkhu has had a new rug made, it is to be kept for six years. If he gives away that rug, whether he has given it away or not, and has another new rug made before six years have passed, except with the agreement of the bhikkhus, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya.

Nisīdanasanthatasikkhāpadaṃ

Nisidana-santhata training rule

15.Nisīdanasanthataṃ pana bhikkhunā kārayamānena purāṇasanthatassa sāmantā sugatavidatthi ādātabbā dubbaṇṇakaraṇāya. Anādā ce bhikkhu purāṇasantha tassa sāmantā sugatavidatthiṃ, navaṃ nisīdanasanthataṃ kārāpeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

15. When a bhikkhu is having a sitting-cloth made, a Sugata-span should be taken all around from the old sitting-cloth for the purpose of discolouring (the new one). If a bhikkhu does not take a Sugata-span all around from the old sitting-cloth and has a new sitting-cloth made, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya.

Eḷakalomasikkhāpadaṃ

Elakaloma training rule

16.Bhikkhuno paneva addhānamaggappaṭipannassa eḷakalomāni uppajjeyyuṃ, ākaṅkhamānena bhikkhunā paṭiggahetabbāni, paṭiggahetvā tiyojanaparamaṃ sahatthā haritabbāni asante hārake. Tato ce uttari hareyya, asantepi hārake, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

16. If goat’s wool should accrue to a bhikkhu travelling on a journey, the bhikkhu may accept it if he wishes; having accepted it, he may carry it himself for three yojanas at most if there is no one to carry it. If he carries it further than that, even if there is no one to carry it, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya.

Eḷakalomadhovāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

Elakaloma-dhovapana training rule

17.Yo pana bhikkhu aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā eḷakalomāni dhovāpeyya vā rajāpeyya vā vijaṭāpeyya vā, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

17. Whatever bhikkhu should have goat’s wool washed, dyed, or carded by a bhikkhuni who is not a relative, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya.

Rūpiyasikkhāpadaṃ

Rūpiya training rule

18.Yo pana bhikkhu jātarūparajataṃ uggaṇheyya vā uggaṇhāpeyya vā upanikkhittaṃ vā sādiyeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

18. Whatever bhikkhu should receive gold or silver, or have it received, or approve of it being kept in deposit, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya.

Rūpiyasaṃvohārasikkhāpadaṃ

Rūpiya-samvohara training rule

19.Yo pana bhikkhu nānappakārakaṃ rūpiyasaṃvohāraṃ samāpajjeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

19. Whatever bhikkhu should engage in various kinds of financial dealings, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya.

Kayavikkayasikkhāpadaṃ

Kaya-vikkaya training rule

20.Yo pana bhikkhu nānappakārakaṃ kayavikkayaṃ samāpajjeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

20. Whatever bhikkhu should engage in various kinds of buying and selling, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya.

Kosiyavaggo dutiyo.

The second Kosiya Vagga is finished.

Pattasikkhāpadaṃ

Patta training rule

21.Dasāhaparamaṃ atirekapatto dhāretabbo, taṃ atikkāmayato nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

21. An extra bowl may be kept for no more than ten days; to exceed that is a nissaggiya pācittiya.

Ūnapañcabandhanasikkhāpadaṃ

Unapañcabandhana training rule

22.Yo pana bhikkhu ūnapañcabandhanena pattena aññaṃ navaṃ pattaṃ cetāpeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ. Tena bhikkhunā so patto bhikkhuparisāya nissajjitabbo, yo ca tassā bhikkhuparisāya pattapariyanto, so tassa bhikkhuno padātabbo ‘‘ayaṃ te bhikkhu patto yāva bhedanāya dhāretabbo’’ti, ayaṃ tattha sāmīci.

22. Whatever bhikkhu should have a new bowl bought with a bowl that has less than five fastenings, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya. That bowl is to be forfeited by that bhikkhu to the Saṅgha. And whatever bowl is the last bowl belonging to that Saṅgha, that is to be given to that bhikkhu, (saying,) “This bowl, bhikkhu, is to be kept by you until it breaks.” This is the proper procedure in this case.

Bhesajjasikkhāpadaṃ

Bhesajja training rule

23.Yāni kho pana tāni gilānānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ paṭisāyanīyāni bhesajjāni, seyyathidaṃ – sappi navanītaṃ telaṃ madhu phāṇitaṃ, tāni paṭiggahetvā sattāhaparamaṃ sannidhikārakaṃ paribhuñjitabbāni, taṃ atikkāmayato nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

23. Those requisites which are suitable as medicine for sick bhikkhus, that is, ghee, fresh butter, oil, honey, and molasses: having accepted them, they may be used as stores for no more than seven days; to exceed that is a nissaggiya pācittiya.

Vassikasāṭikasikkhāpadaṃ

Vassika-satika training rule

24.‘‘Māso seso gimhāna’’nti bhikkhunā vassikasāṭikacīvaraṃ pariyesitabbaṃ, ‘‘addhamāso seso gimhāna’’nti katvā nivāsetabbaṃ. Orena ce ‘‘māso seso gimhāna’’nti vassikasāṭikacīvaraṃ pariyeseyya, orena‘‘ddhamāso seso gimhāna’’nti katvā nivāseyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

24.A bhikkhu should search for cloth for a rains-bathing cloth (vassikasāṭika) when "a month of the hot season remains," and having made it, should wear it when "half a month of the hot season remains." If he should search for cloth for a rains-bathing cloth when less than "a month of the hot season remains," or, having made it, should wear it when less than "half a month of the hot season remains," it is a nissaggiya pācittiya. (pāci. 239)

Cīvaraacchindanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Taking Back a Robe

25.Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhussa sāmaṃ cīvaraṃ datvā kupito anattamano acchindeyya vā acchindāpeyya vā, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

25.If a bhikkhu, having himself given a robe to a bhikkhu, then being angry and displeased, should take it back or have it taken back, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya.

Suttaviññattisikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Soliciting Thread

26.Yo pana bhikkhu sāmaṃ suttaṃ viññāpetvā tantavāyehi cīvaraṃ vāyāpeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

26.If a bhikkhu, having himself solicited thread, should have a robe woven by weavers, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya.

Mahāpesakārasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on a Great Request

27.Bhikkhuṃ paneva uddissa aññātako gahapati vā gahapatānī vā tantavāyehi cīvaraṃ vāyāpeyya, tatra ce so bhikkhu pubbe appavārito tantavāye upasaṅkamitvā cīvare vikappaṃ āpajjeyya ‘‘idaṃ kho, āvuso, cīvaraṃ maṃ uddissa viyyati, āyatañca karotha, vitthatañca, appitañca, suvītañca, suppavāyitañca, suvilekhitañca, suvitacchitañca karotha, appeva nāma mayampi āyasmantānaṃ kiñcimattaṃ anupadajjeyyāmā’’ti. Evañca so bhikkhu vatvā kiñcimattaṃ anupadajjeyya antamaso piṇḍapātamattampi, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

27.If, indeed, a householder or his wife, unknown [to a bhikkhu], should have a robe woven by weavers for the sake of a bhikkhu, and if that bhikkhu, without having been previously invited, should approach the weavers and make a suggestion concerning the robe, saying: "This robe, friends, is being woven for my sake. Make it long and wide, tight and well-woven, well-smoothed and well-finished. Perhaps we too might give the esteemed ones some small thing," and if that bhikkhu, having spoken thus, should give some small thing, even as little as a mouthful of alms food, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya.

Accekacīvarasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on an Emergency Robe

28.Dasāhānāgataṃ kattikatemāsikapuṇṇamaṃ bhikkhuno paneva accekacīvaraṃ uppajjeyya, accekaṃ maññamānena bhikkhunā paṭiggahetabbaṃ, paṭiggahetvā yāva cīvarakālasamayaṃ nikkhipitabbaṃ. Tato ce uttari nikkhipeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

28.If, indeed, an emergency robe should arise for a bhikkhu ten days before the Kattika full-moon of the third month, it should be accepted by the bhikkhu considering it an emergency, and having accepted it, it should be kept until robe-time. If he should keep it longer than that, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya.

Sāsaṅkasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Apprehension

29.Upavassaṃ kho pana kattikapuṇṇamaṃ yāni kho pana tāni āraññakāni senāsanāni sāsaṅkasammatāni sappaṭibhayāni, tathārūpesu bhikkhu senāsanesu viharanto ākaṅkhamāno tiṇṇaṃ cīvarānaṃ aññataraṃ cīvaraṃ antaraghare nikkhipeyya, siyā ca tassa bhikkhuno kocideva paccayo tena cīvarena vippavāsāya, chārattaparamaṃ tena bhikkhunā tena cīvarena vippavasitabbaṃ. Tato ce uttari vippavaseyya aññatra bhikkhusammutiyā, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

29.Now, at the Kattika full-moon in the rains, in whatever forest dwellings are regarded as causing apprehension and are dangerous, if a bhikkhu dwelling in such forest dwellings should, desiring, deposit one of the three robes in the inhabited area, and if there should be some reason for that bhikkhu to be separated from that robe, he may be separated from that robe for six nights at most. If he should be separated longer than that, except with the agreement of the bhikkhus, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya.

Pariṇatasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Appropriation

30.Yo pana bhikkhu jānaṃ saṅghikaṃ lābhaṃ pariṇataṃ attano pariṇāmeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

30.If a bhikkhu should knowingly appropriate for himself a gain belonging to the Sangha, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya.

Pattavaggo tatiyo.

The Third Chapter on Bowls.

Uddiṭṭhā kho āyasmanto tiṃsa nissaggiyā pācittiyā dhammā. Tatthāyasmante pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, dutiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, tatiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, parisuddhetthāyasmanto, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmīti.

The thirty nissaggiya pācittiya dhammas have been recited, venerable sirs. I ask you, venerable sirs, are you pure in this matter? I ask you a second time, venerable sirs, are you pure in this matter? I ask you a third time, venerable sirs, are you pure in this matter? You are pure in this matter, venerable sirs, therefore you are silent. Thus I understand it.

Nissaggiyapācittiyā niṭṭhitā.

The Nissaggiya Pācittiyas are Finished.

Suddhapācittiyā
The Suddha Pācittiyas

Ime kho panāyasmanto dvenavuti pācittiyā

These ninety-two pācittiya

Dhammā uddesaṃ āgacchanti.

Dhammas come to the recitation.

Musāvādasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Deliberate Lying

1.Sampajānamusāvāde pācittiyaṃ.

1.For deliberate lying, a pācittiya.

Omasavādasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Reviling

2.Omasavāde pācittiyaṃ.

2.For reviling, a pācittiya.

Pesuññasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Tale-Bearing

3.Bhikkhupesuññe pācittiyaṃ.

3.For tale-bearing about bhikkhus, a pācittiya.

Padasodhammasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Reciting the Dhamma

4.Yo pana bhikkhu anupasampannaṃ padaso dhammaṃ vāceyya, pācittiyaṃ.

4.If a bhikkhu should recite the Dhamma phrase by phrase to one who is not fully ordained, it is a pācittiya.

Paṭhamasahaseyyasikkhāpadaṃ

The First Training Rule on Sleeping Together

5.Yo pana bhikkhu anupasampannena uttaridirattatirattaṃ sahaseyyaṃ kappeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

5.If a bhikkhu should sleep together with one who is not fully ordained for more than two or three nights, it is a pācittiya.

Dutiyasahaseyyasikkhāpadaṃ

The Second Training Rule on Sleeping Together

6.Yo pana bhikkhu mātugāmena sahaseyyaṃ kappeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

6.If a bhikkhu should sleep together with a woman, it is a pācittiya.

Dhammadesanāsikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Teaching the Dhamma

7.Yo pana bhikkhu mātugāmassa uttarichappañcavācāhi dhammaṃ deseyya aññatra viññunā purisaviggahena, pācittiyaṃ.

7.If a bhikkhu should teach the Dhamma to a woman with more than five or six phrases, except with an intelligent man present, it is a pācittiya.

Bhūtārocanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Declaring a Superior Human State

8.Yo pana bhikkhu anupasampannassa uttarimanussadhammaṃ āroceyya, bhūtasmiṃ pācittiyaṃ.

8.If a bhikkhu should declare a superior human state to one who is not fully ordained, if it is factual, it is a pācittiya.

Duṭṭhullārocanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Declaring a Gross Offense

9.Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhussa duṭṭhullaṃ āpattiṃ anupasampannassa āroceyya aññatra bhikkhusammutiyā, pācittiyaṃ.

9.If a bhikkhu should declare a gross offense of a bhikkhu to one who is not fully ordained, except with the agreement of the bhikkhus, it is a pācittiya.

Pathavīkhaṇanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Digging the Earth

10.Yo pana bhikkhu pathaviṃ khaṇeyya vā khaṇāpeyya vā pācittiyaṃ.

10.If a bhikkhu should dig the earth or have it dug, it is a pācittiya.

Musāvādavaggo paṭhamo.

The First Chapter on Lying.

Bhūtagāmasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Injuring Plant Life

11.Bhūtagāmapātabyatāya pācittiyaṃ.

11.For injuring plant life, a pācittiya.

Aññavādakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Arguing

12.Aññavādake, vihesake pācittiyaṃ.

12.For arguing, for vexing, a pācittiya.

Ujjhāpanakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Criticizing

13.Ujjhāpanake, khiyyanake pācittiyaṃ.

13.For criticizing, for disparaging, a pācittiya.

Paṭhamasenāsanasikkhāpadaṃ

The First Training Rule on Lodgings

14.Yo pana bhikkhu saṅghikaṃ mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā bhisiṃ vā kocchaṃ vā ajjhokāse santharitvā vā santharāpetvā vā taṃ pakkamanto neva uddhareyya, na uddharāpeyya, anāpucchaṃ vā gaccheyya, pācittiyaṃ.

14.If a bhikkhu, having spread out or had spread out in the open air a Sangha's couch or chair or mattress or stuffed cushion, should depart without either putting it away or having it put away, or without asking leave, it is a pācittiya.

Dutiyasenāsanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Second Training Rule on Lodgings

15.Yo pana bhikkhu saṅghike vihāre seyyaṃ santharitvā vā santharāpetvā vā taṃ pakkamanto neva uddhareyya, na uddharāpeyya, anāpucchaṃ vā gaccheyya, pācittiyaṃ.

15.If a bhikkhu, having spread out or had spread out bedding in a Sangha's dwelling, should depart without either putting it away or having it put away, or without asking leave, it is a pācittiya.

Anupakhajjasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Discomfort

16.Yo pana bhikkhu saṅghike vihāre jānaṃ pubbupagataṃ bhikkhuṃ anupakhajja seyyaṃ kappeyya ‘‘yassa sambādho bhavissati, so pakkamissatī’’ti etadeva paccayaṃ karitvā anaññaṃ, pācittiyaṃ.

16.If a bhikkhu should knowingly, having made the reason just this, namely, "Whoever will be uncomfortable will leave," obtrude himself on a bed already occupied in a Sangha's dwelling, without any other reason, it is a pācittiya.

Nikkaḍḍhanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Dragging Out

17.Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhuṃ kupito anattamano saṅghikā vihārā nikkaḍḍheyya vā nikkaḍḍhāpeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

17.If a bhikkhu, being angry and displeased, should drag out or have dragged out a bhikkhu from a Sangha's dwelling, it is a pācittiya.

Vehāsakuṭisikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on an Upper Chamber

18.Yo pana bhikkhu saṅghike vihāre uparivehāsakuṭiyā āhaccapādakaṃ mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā abhinisīdeyya vā abhinipajjeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

18.If a bhikkhu should sit or lie down on a couch or chair with attached legs in an upper chamber in a Sangha's dwelling, it is a pācittiya.

Mahallakavihārasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Building a Large Dwelling

19.Mahallakaṃ pana bhikkhunā vihāraṃ kārayamānena yāva dvārakosā aggaḷaṭṭhapanāya ālokasandhiparikammāya dvatticchadanassa pariyāyaṃ appaharite ṭhitena adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ, tato ce uttari appaharitepi ṭhito adhiṭṭhaheyya, pācittiyaṃ.

19.In building a large dwelling, a bhikkhu should stand on harmless ground and prescribe for the extent of the door frame, the placing of the bolt, the window opening, and the overlapping of the thatch for two or three layers. If, even standing on harmless ground, he should prescribe for more than that, it is a pācittiya.

Sappāṇakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Living Things

20.Yo pana bhikkhu jānaṃ sappāṇakaṃ udakaṃ tiṇaṃ vā mattikaṃ vā siñceyya vā siñcāpeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

20.If a bhikkhu should knowingly sprinkle or have sprinkled water containing living things on grass or clay, it is a pācittiya.

Bhūtagāmavaggo dutiyo.

The Second Chapter on Plant Life.

Ovādasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Giving Advice

21.Yo pana bhikkhu asammato bhikkhuniyo ovadeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

21.If a bhikkhu should give advice to bhikkhunis without being appointed, it is a pācittiya.

Atthaṅgatasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Sunset

22.Sammatopi ce bhikkhu atthaṅgate sūriye bhikkhuniyo ovadeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

22.If a bhikkhu, even when appointed, should give advice to bhikkhunis after sunset, it is a pācittiya.

Bhikkhunupassayasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on a Bhikkhuni's Residence

23.Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhunupassayaṃ upasaṅkamitvā bhikkhuniyo ovadeyya aññatra samayā, pācittiyaṃ. Tatthāyaṃ samayo, gilānā hoti bhikkhunī, ayaṃ tattha samayo.

23.If a bhikkhu should go to a bhikkhuni's residence and give advice to bhikkhunis except at the proper time, it is a pācittiya. Herein, this is the proper time: if a bhikkhuni is ill, this is the proper time in that case.

Āmisasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Material Gain

24.Yo pana bhikkhu evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘āmisahetu therā bhikkhū bhikkhuniyo ovadantī’’ti, pācittiyaṃ.

24.If a bhikkhu should speak thus: "The elder bhikkhus give advice to bhikkhunis for the sake of material gain," it is a pācittiya.

Cīvaradānasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Giving a Robe

25.Yo pana bhikkhu aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā cīvaraṃ dadeyya aññatra pārivattakā, pācittiyaṃ.

25.If a bhikkhu should give a robe to a bhikkhuni who is not a relative, except in exchange, it is a pācittiya.

Cīvarasibbanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Sewing a Robe

26.Yo pana bhikkhu aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā cīvaraṃ sibbeyya vā sibbāpeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

26.If a bhikkhu should sew or have sewn a robe for a bhikkhuni who is not a relative, it is a pācittiya.

Saṃvidhānasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Arrangement

27.Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ saṃvidhāya ekaddhānamaggaṃ paṭipajjeyya antamaso gāmantarampi aññatra samayā, pācittiyaṃ. Tatthāyaṃ samayo, satthagamanīyo hoti maggo, sāsaṅkasammato, sappaṭibhayo, ayaṃ tattha samayo.

27.If a bhikkhu, having made an arrangement with a bhikkhuni, should set out on the same road for a distance of even another village, except at the proper time, it is a pācittiya. Herein, this is the proper time: if the road is subject to robbers, is regarded as causing apprehension, is dangerous, this is the proper time in that case.

Nāvābhiruhanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Embarking in a Boat

28.Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ saṃvidhāya ekaṃ nāvaṃ abhiruheyya uddhaṃgāminiṃ vā adhogāminiṃ vā aññatra tiriyaṃ taraṇāya, pācittiyaṃ.

28.If a bhikkhu, having made an arrangement with a bhikkhuni, should embark in the same boat, going upstream or downstream, except for crossing over directly, it is a pācittiya.

Paripācitasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Food Prepared by a Bhikkhuni

29.Yo pana bhikkhu jānaṃ bhikkhuniparipācitaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ bhuñjeyya aññatra pubbe gihisamārambhā, pācittiyaṃ.

29.If a bhikkhu should knowingly partake of alms food prepared by a bhikkhuni, except formerly with a householder's undertaking, it is a pācittiya.

Rahonisajjasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Private Sitting

30.Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ eko ekāya raho nisajjaṃ kappeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

30.If a bhikkhu should privately sit down alone with a bhikkhuni in a secluded place, it is a pācittiya.

Ovādavaggo tatiyo.

The Third Chapter on Advice.

Āvasathapiṇḍasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Alms-Food at a Rest House

31.Agilānena bhikkhunā eko āvasathapiṇḍo bhuñjitabbo. Tato ce uttari bhuñjeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

31.An alms-bowl of food at a rest-house should be eaten by a bhikkhu who is not ill. If he should eat more than that, it is a pācittiya.

Gaṇabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Eating in a Group

32.Gaṇabhojane aññatra samayā pācittiyaṃ. Tatthāyaṃ samayo, gilānasamayo, cīvaradānasamayo, cīvarakārasamayo, addhānagamanasamayo, nāvābhiruhanasamayo, mahāsamayo, samaṇabhattasamayo, ayaṃ tattha samayo.

32.For eating in a group, except at the proper time, a pācittiya. Herein, this is the proper time: a time of illness, a time of robe-giving, a time of robe-making, a time of going on a journey, a time of embarking in a boat, a great occasion, a monks' meal time, this is the proper time in that case.

Paramparabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Eating in a Succession

33.Paramparabhojane aññatra samayā pācittiyaṃ. Tatthāyaṃ samayo, gilānasamayo, cīvaradānasamayo, cīvarakārasamayo, ayaṃ tattha samayo.

33.For eating in a succession, except at the proper time, a pācittiya. Herein, this is the proper time: a time of illness, a time of robe-giving, a time of robe-making, this is the proper time in that case.

Kāṇamātusikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Kāṇamātā

34.Bhikkhuṃ paneva kulaṃ upagataṃ pūvehi vā manthehi vā abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāreyya, ākaṅkhamānena bhikkhunā dvattipattapūrā paṭiggahetabbā. Tato ce uttari paṭiggaṇheyya, pācittiyaṃ. Dvattipattapūre paṭiggahetvā tato nīharitvā bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ saṃvibhajitabbaṃ, ayaṃ tattha sāmīci.

34.If, indeed, a family should invite a bhikkhu who has approached their home to partake of cakes or barley-gruel, the bhikkhu may, if he wishes, accept two or three bowlfuls. If he should accept more than that, it is a pācittiya. Having accepted two or three bowlfuls, he should take it away from there and share it with the bhikkhus; in that case, this is proper behavior.

Paṭhamapavāraṇāsikkhāpadaṃ

The First Training Rule on Invitation

35.Yo pana bhikkhu bhuttāvī pavārito anatirittaṃ khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā khādeyya vā bhuñjeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

35.If a bhikkhu, having eaten, being invited, should partake of non-surplus food, either hard or soft, it is a pācittiya.

Dutiyapavāraṇāsikkhāpadaṃ

The Second Training Rule on Invitation

36.Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhuṃ bhuttāviṃ pavāritaṃ anatirittena khādanīyena vā bhojanīyena vā abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāreyya ‘‘handa bhikkhu khāda vā bhuñja vā’’ti jānaṃ āsādanāpekkho, bhuttasmiṃ pācittiyaṃ.

36.If a bhikkhu should invite a bhikkhu who has eaten, being invited, to partake of non-surplus food, either hard or soft, thinking, "Come, bhikkhu, eat or partake," knowing that it causes displeasure, if he eats, it is a pācittiya.

Vikālabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Untimely Eating

37.Yo pana bhikkhu vikāle khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā khādeyya vā bhuñjeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

37.If a bhikkhu should partake of food, either hard or soft, at the wrong time, it is a pācittiya.

Sannidhikārakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Stored-Up Food

38.Yo pana bhikkhu sannidhikārakaṃ khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā khādeyya vā bhuñjeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

38.If a bhikkhu should partake of food, either hard or soft, that has been stored up, it is a pācittiya.

Paṇītabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Choice Food

39.Yāni kho pana tāni paṇītabhojanāni, seyyathidaṃ – sappi, navanītaṃ, telaṃ, madhu, phāṇitaṃ, maccho, maṃsaṃ, khīraṃ, dadhi. Yo pana bhikkhu evarūpāni paṇītabhojanāni agilāno attano atthāya viññāpetvā bhuñjeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

39.Now, these are choice foods: ghee, fresh butter, oil, honey, molasses, fish, meat, milk, curds. If a bhikkhu, not being ill, should request such choice foods for his own use and partake of them, it is a pācittiya.

Dantaponasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Tooth-Cleansing

40.Yo pana bhikkhu adinnaṃ mukhadvāraṃ āhāraṃ āhareyya aññatra udakadantaponā, pācittiyaṃ.

40.If a bhikkhu should introduce into the mouth ungiven food, except for water and a tooth-cleaner, it is a pācittiya.

Bhojanavaggo catuttho.

The Fourth Chapter on Food.

Acelakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on a Naked Ascetic

41.Yo pana bhikkhu acelakassa vā paribbājakassa vā paribbājikāya vā sahatthā khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā dadeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

41.If a bhikkhu should give with his own hand food, either hard or soft, to a naked ascetic or to a wandering ascetic or to a female wandering ascetic, it is a pācittiya.

Uyyojanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Instigating

42.Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhuṃ ‘‘ehāvuso, gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā piṇḍāya pavisissāmā’’ti tassa dāpetvā vā adāpetvā vā uyyojeyya ‘‘gacchāvuso, na me tayā saddhiṃ kathā vā nisajjā vā phāsu hoti, ekakassa me kathā vā nisajjā vā phāsu hotī’’ti etadeva paccayaṃ karitvā anaññaṃ, pācittiyaṃ.

42. If a bhikkhu, saying to another bhikkhu, "Come, venerable, let's enter a village or town for alms," after having him give or not give (alms), should dismiss him, saying, "Go, venerable, conversation or sitting with you is not comfortable for me; conversation or sitting alone is comfortable for me," using this very reason and no other, it is a pācittiya.

Sabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Shared Meals

43.Yo pana bhikkhu sabhojane kule anupakhajja nisajjaṃ kappeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

43. If a bhikkhu makes it a practice to sit without being invited in a family where food is being served, it is a pācittiya.

Rahopaṭicchannasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Seclusion and Concealment

44.Yo pana bhikkhu mātugāmena saddhiṃ raho paṭicchanne āsane nisajjaṃ kappeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

44. If a bhikkhu makes it a practice to sit with a woman in a concealed place, it is a pācittiya.

Rahonisajjasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Secluded Sitting

45.Yo pana bhikkhu mātugāmena saddhiṃ eko ekāya raho nisajjaṃ kappeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

45. If a bhikkhu makes it a practice to sit alone with a woman in a secluded place, it is a pācittiya.

Cārittasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Conduct

46.Yo pana bhikkhu nimantito sabhatto samāno santaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchā purebhattaṃ vā pacchābhattaṃ vā kulesu cārittaṃ āpajjeyya aññatra samayā, pācittiyaṃ. Tatthāyaṃ samayo, cīvaradānasamayo, cīvarakārasamayo, ayaṃ tattha samayo.

46. If a bhikkhu, having been invited to a meal and being a participant in a group meal, without informing a bhikkhu who is present, goes on a round of visits to families before or after the meal, except at the proper time, it is a pācittiya. Here, this is the proper time: the time for giving robes, the time for making robes; this is the proper time in this case.

Mahānāmasikkhāpadaṃ

The Mahānāma Training Rule

47.Agilānena bhikkhunā catumāsappaccayapavāraṇā sāditabbā aññatra punapavāraṇāya, aññatra niccapavāraṇāya. Tato ce uttari sādiyeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

47. A sick bhikkhu should partake of the four-month allowable allowance, except for a renewed invitation, except for a permanent invitation. If he should partake of more than that, it is a pācittiya.

Uyyuttasenāsikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on an Army on the March

48.Yo pana bhikkhu uyyuttaṃ senaṃ dassanāya gaccheyya aññatra tathārūpappaccayā, pācittiyaṃ.

48. If a bhikkhu should go to see an army on the march, except for a reason of such a kind, it is a pācittiya.

Senāvāsasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on an Army Camp

49.Siyā ca tassa bhikkhuno kocideva paccayo senaṃ gamanāya, dirattatirattaṃ tena bhikkhunā senāya vasitabbaṃ. Tato ce uttari vaseyya, pācittiyaṃ.

49. If there should be some reason for that bhikkhu to go to the army, that bhikkhu should stay in the army for two or three nights. If he should stay longer than that, it is a pācittiya.

Uyyodhikasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Battle Array

50.Dirattatirattaṃ ce bhikkhu senāya vasamāno uyyodhikaṃ vā balaggaṃ vā senābyūhaṃ vā anīkadassanaṃ vā gaccheyya, pācittiyaṃ.

50. If a bhikkhu, staying in the army for two or three nights, should go to see a battle array, a muster of forces, an army formation, or a review of troops, it is a pācittiya.

Acelakavaggo pañcamo.

The Fifth Acelaka Chapter.

Surāpānasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Intoxicating Drinks

51.Surāmerayapāne pācittiyaṃ.

51. (In the drinking of) surā and meraya, it is a pācittiya.

Aṅgulipatodakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Finger Snapping

52.Aṅgulipatodake pācittiyaṃ.

52. (In) finger snapping, it is a pācittiya.

Hasadhammasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Playful Conduct

53.Udake hasadhamme pācittiyaṃ.

53. (In) playful conduct in water, it is a pācittiya.

Anādariyasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Disrespect

54.Anādariye pācittiyaṃ.

54. (In) disrespect, it is a pācittiya.

Bhiṃsāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Frightening

55.Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhuṃ bhiṃsāpeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

55. If a bhikkhu should frighten a bhikkhu, it is a pācittiya.

Jotisikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Fire

56.Yo pana bhikkhu agilāno visibbanāpekkho jotiṃ samādaheyya vā samādahāpeyya vā aññatra tathārūpappaccayā, pācittiyaṃ.

56. If a bhikkhu, not being ill and desiring to warm himself, should kindle a fire or have one kindled, except for a reason of such a kind, it is a pācittiya.

Nahānasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Bathing

57.Yo pana bhikkhu orenaddhamāsaṃ nahāyeyya aññatra samayā, pācittiyaṃ. Tatthāyaṃ samayo ‘‘diyaḍḍho māso seso gimhāna’’nti ‘‘vassānassa paṭhamo māso’’ iccete aḍḍhateyyamāsā uṇhasamayo, pariḷāhasamayo, gilānasamayo, kammasamayo, addhānagamanasamayo, vātavuṭṭhisamayo, ayaṃ tattha samayo.

57. If a bhikkhu should bathe more often than once every half-month, except at the proper time, it is a pācittiya. Here, this is the proper time: "A month and a half remains of the hot season," "The first month of the rains" — these two and a half months are the hot season, the time of burning heat, the time of sickness, the time of work, the time of travel on a journey, the time of wind and rain; this is the proper time in this case.

Dubbaṇṇakaraṇasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Discoloration

58.Navaṃ pana bhikkhunā cīvaralābhena tiṇṇaṃ dubbaṇṇakaraṇānaṃ aññataraṃ dubbaṇṇakaraṇaṃ ādātabbaṃ nīlaṃ vā kaddamaṃ vā kāḷasāmaṃ vā. Anādā ce bhikkhu tiṇṇaṃ dubbaṇṇakaraṇānaṃ aññataraṃ dubbaṇṇakaraṇaṃ navaṃ cīvaraṃ paribhuñjeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

58. When a bhikkhu obtains a new robe, one of the three methods of discoloration should be employed: blue, mud, or blackish. If a bhikkhu should use a new robe without employing one of the three methods of discoloration, it is a pācittiya.

Vikappanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Divesting

59.Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhussa vā bhikkhuniyā vā sikkhamānāya vā sāmaṇerassa vā sāmaṇeriyā vā sāmaṃ cīvaraṃ vikappetvā appaccuddhāraṇaṃ paribhuñjeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

59. If a bhikkhu, having divested a robe to a bhikkhu, a bhikkhunī, a female trainee, a novice, or a female novice, should use it without having it returned, it is a pācittiya.

Apanidhānasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Concealing

60.Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhussa pattaṃ vā cīvaraṃ vā nisīdanaṃ vā sūcigharaṃ vā kāyabandhanaṃ vā apanidheyya vā apanidhāpeyya vā antamaso hasāpekkhopi, pācittiyaṃ.

60. If a bhikkhu should conceal or have concealed a bhikkhu's bowl, robe, sitting cloth, needle case, or girdle, even for the sake of a joke, it is a pācittiya.

Surāpānavaggo chaṭṭho.

The Sixth Chapter on Intoxicating Drinks.

Sañciccasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Deliberate Killing

61.Yo pana bhikkhu sañcicca pāṇaṃ jīvitā voropeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

61. If a bhikkhu should deliberately deprive a living being of life, it is a pācittiya.

Sappāṇakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Water with Living Beings

62.Yo pana bhikkhu jānaṃ sappāṇakaṃ udakaṃ paribhuñjeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

62. If a bhikkhu should knowingly use water containing living beings, it is a pācittiya.

Ukkoṭanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Reopening

63.Yo pana bhikkhu jānaṃ yathādhammaṃ nihatādhikaraṇaṃ punakammāya ukkoṭeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

63. If a bhikkhu should knowingly reopen a case that has been settled according to the Dhamma, it is a pācittiya.

Duṭṭhullasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Serious Offense

64.Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhussa jānaṃ duṭṭhullaṃ āpattiṃ paṭicchādeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

64. If a bhikkhu should knowingly conceal a serious offense of another bhikkhu, it is a pācittiya.

Ūnavīsativassasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on One Under Twenty Years

65.Yo pana bhikkhu jānaṃ ūnavīsativassaṃ puggalaṃ upasampādeyya, so ca puggalo anupasampanno, te ca bhikkhū gārayhā, idaṃ tasmiṃ pācittiyaṃ.

65. If a bhikkhu should knowingly ordain a person who is under twenty years of age, that person is not ordained, and those bhikkhus are blameworthy; in this case, it is a pācittiya.

Theyyasatthasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on a Thief

66.Yo pana bhikkhu jānaṃ theyyasatthena saddhiṃ saṃvidhāya ekaddhānamaggaṃ paṭipajjeyya antamaso gāmantarampi, pācittiyaṃ.

66. If a bhikkhu should knowingly travel on the same road with a thief, having made an arrangement with him, even as far as another village, it is a pācittiya.

Saṃvidhānasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Arrangement

67.Yo pana bhikkhu mātugāmena saddhiṃ saṃvidhāya ekaddhānamaggaṃ paṭipajjeyya antamaso gāmantarampi, pācittiyaṃ.

67. If a bhikkhu should travel on the same road with a woman, having made an arrangement with her, even as far as another village, it is a pācittiya.

Ariṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ

The Ariṭṭha Training Rule

68.Yo pana bhikkhu evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘tathāhaṃ bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmi, yathā yeme antarāyikā dhammā vuttā bhagavatā, te paṭisevato nālaṃ antarāyāyā’’ti, so bhikkhu bhikkhūhi evamassa vacanīyo ‘‘māyasmā evaṃ avaca, mā bhagavantaṃ abbhācikkhi, na hi sādhu bhagavato abbhakkhānaṃ, na hi bhagavā evaṃ vadeyya, anekapariyāyenāvuso antarāyikā dhammā antarāyikā vuttā bhagavatā, alañca pana te paṭisevato antarāyāyā’’ti. Evañca so bhikkhu bhikkhūhi vuccamāno tatheva paggaṇheyya, so bhikkhu bhikkhūhi yāvatatiyaṃ samanubhāsitabbo tassa paṭinissaggāya. Yāvatatiyañce samanubhāsiyamāno taṃ paṭinissajjeyya, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. No ce paṭinissajjeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

68. If a bhikkhu should say this: "As I understand the Dhamma taught by the Blessed One, those things called obstructive by the Blessed One are not able to obstruct one who engages in them," that bhikkhu should be addressed thus by the bhikkhus: "Do not say so, venerable one; do not misrepresent the Blessed One, for it is not good to misrepresent the Blessed One; the Blessed One would not say so. In many ways, venerable one, obstructive things have been called obstructive by the Blessed One, and they are indeed able to obstruct one who engages in them." If that bhikkhu, being addressed thus by the bhikkhus, should persist in the same view, that bhikkhu should be formally admonished by the bhikkhus up to three times for the relinquishment of that view. If, being admonished up to three times, he should relinquish it, that is good. If he should not relinquish it, it is a pācittiya.

Ukkhittasambhogasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Association with One Suspended

69.Yo pana bhikkhu jānaṃ tathāvādinā bhikkhunā akaṭānudhammena taṃ diṭṭhiṃ appaṭinissaṭṭhena saddhiṃ sambhuñjeyya vā, saṃvaseyya vā, saha vā seyyaṃ kappeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

69. If a bhikkhu should knowingly associate with a bhikkhu who speaks thus, who does not act according to the Dhamma, and who has not relinquished that view, or live with him, or share the same lodging with him, it is a pācittiya.

Kaṇṭakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Kaṇṭaka Training Rule

70.Samaṇuddesopi ce evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘tathāhaṃ bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmi, yathā yeme antarāyikā dhammā vuttā bhagavatā, te paṭisevato nālaṃ antarāyāyā’’ti, so samaṇuddeso bhikkhūhi evamassa vacanīyo ‘‘māvuso, samaṇuddesa evaṃ avaca, mā bhagavantaṃ abbhācikkhi, na hi sādhu bhagavato abbhakkhānaṃ, na hi bhagavā evaṃ vadeyya, anekapariyāyenāvuso, samaṇuddesa antarāyikā dhammā antarāyikā vuttā bhagavatā, alañca pana te paṭisevato antarāyāyā’’ti, evañca so samaṇuddeso bhikkhūhi vuccamāno tatheva paggaṇheyya, so samaṇuddeso bhikkhūhi evamassa vacanīyo ‘‘ajjatagge te, āvuso, samaṇuddesa na ceva so bhagavā satthā apadisitabbo, yampi caññe samaṇuddesā labhanti bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ dirattatirattaṃ sahaseyyaṃ, sāpi te natthi, cara pire, vinassā’’ti. Yo pana bhikkhu jānaṃ tathānāsitaṃ samaṇuddesaṃ upalāpeyya vā, upaṭṭhāpeyya vā, sambhuñjeyya vā, saha vā seyyaṃ kappeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

70. If even a novice should say this: "As I understand the Dhamma taught by the Blessed One, those things called obstructive by the Blessed One are not able to obstruct one who engages in them," that novice should be addressed thus by the bhikkhus: "Do not say so, novice; do not misrepresent the Blessed One, for it is not good to misrepresent the Blessed One; the Blessed One would not say so. In many ways, novice, obstructive things have been called obstructive by the Blessed One, and they are indeed able to obstruct one who engages in them." If that novice, being addressed thus by the bhikkhus, should persist in the same view, that novice should be addressed thus by the bhikkhus: "From today, novice, you are neither to refer to that Blessed One as your Teacher, nor will you have that sharing of lodging for two or three nights with the bhikkhus that other novices obtain. Go away, disappear!" If a bhikkhu should knowingly wait upon, support, associate with, or share the same lodging with a novice who has been banished thus, it is a pācittiya.

Sappāṇakavaggo sattamo.

The Seventh Chapter on Water with Living Beings.

Sahadhammikasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Shared Dhamma

71.Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhūhi sahadhammikaṃ vuccamāno evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘na tāvāhaṃ, āvuso, etasmiṃ sikkhāpade sikkhissāmi, yāva na aññaṃ bhikkhuṃ byattaṃ vinayadharaṃ paripucchāmī’’ti, pācittiyaṃ. Sikkhamānena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā aññātabbaṃ paripucchitabbaṃ paripañhitabbaṃ, ayaṃ tattha sāmīci.

71. If a bhikkhu, being addressed by the bhikkhus on a matter pertaining to the Dhamma, should say this: "I will not train myself in this training rule, venerable ones, until I have asked another bhikkhu who is learned and a holder of the Vinaya," it is a pācittiya. A bhikkhu who is training himself, bhikkhus, should learn, should ask, should inquire; this is proper conduct in this case.

Vilekhanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Disparagement

72.Yo pana bhikkhu pātimokkhe uddissamāne evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘kiṃ panimehi khuddānukhuddakehi sikkhāpadehi uddiṭṭhehi, yāvadeva kukkuccāya vihesāya vilekhāya saṃvattantī’’ti, sikkhāpadavivaṇṇake pācittiyaṃ.

72. If a bhikkhu, while the Pātimokkha is being recited, should say this: "What is the use of these minor and insignificant training rules that are recited, which conduce only to worry, vexation, and disparagement?" (In) one who disparages the training rules, it is a pācittiya.

Mohanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Bewilderment

73.Yo pana bhikkhu anvaddhamāsaṃ pātimokkhe uddissamāne evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘idāneva kho ahaṃ jānāmi, ayampi kira dhammo suttāgato suttapariyāpanno anvaddhamāsaṃ uddesaṃ āgacchatī’’ti. Tañce bhikkhuṃ aññe bhikkhū jāneyyuṃ nisinnapubbaṃ iminā bhikkhunā dvattikkhattuṃ pātimokkhe uddissamāne, ko pana vādo bhiyyo, na ca tassa bhikkhuno aññāṇakena mutti atthi, yañca tattha āpattiṃ āpanno, tañca yathādhammo kāretabbo, uttari cassa moho āropetabbo ‘‘tassa te, āvuso, alābhā, tassa te dulladdhaṃ, yaṃ tvaṃ pātimokkhe uddissamānena sādhukaṃ aṭṭhiṃ katvā manasi karosī’’ti, idaṃ tasmiṃ mohanake pācittiyaṃ.

73. If a bhikkhu, while the Pātimokkha is being recited every half-month, should say this: "Only now do I know that this Dhamma is included in the Suttas, is contained in the Suttas, and is recited every half-month." If other bhikkhus should know of that bhikkhu that this bhikkhu has sat (and listened) two or three times while the Pātimokkha was being recited, how much more (often has he heard it than that)? And there is no release for that bhikkhu through ignorance. And the penalty he has incurred there must be imposed upon him according to the Dhamma, and further, bewilderment must be charged against him: "It is a loss to you, venerable one; it is ill-gained by you, that you do not carefully attend and apply your mind while the Pātimokkha is being recited." In this case of bewilderment, it is a pācittiya.

Pahārasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Striking

74.Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhussa kupito anattamano pahāraṃ dadeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

74. If a bhikkhu, being angry and displeased, should strike a bhikkhu, it is a pācittiya.

Talasattikasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Raising a Hand

75.Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhussa kupito anattamano talasattikaṃ uggireyya, pācittiyaṃ.

75. If a bhikkhu, being angry and displeased, should raise a hand against a bhikkhu, it is a pācittiya.

Amūlakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Unfounded Charge

76.Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhuṃ amūlakena saṅghādisesena anuddhaṃseyya, pācittiyaṃ.

76. If a bhikkhu should accuse a bhikkhu of an unfounded saṅghādisesa offense, it is a pācittiya.

Sañciccasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Deliberate Worry

77.Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhussa sañcicca kukkuccaṃ upadaheyya ‘‘itissa muhuttampi aphāsu bhavissatī’’ti etadeva paccayaṃ karitvā anaññaṃ, pācittiyaṃ.

77. If a bhikkhu should deliberately cause worry to a bhikkhu, thinking, "Thereby he will be uncomfortable even for a moment," using this very reason and no other, it is a pācittiya.

Upassutisikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Eavesdropping

78.Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhūnaṃ bhaṇḍanajātānaṃ kalahajātānaṃ vivādāpannānaṃ upassutiṃ tiṭṭheyya ‘‘yaṃ ime bhaṇissanti, taṃ sossāmī’’ti etadeva paccayaṃ karitvā anaññaṃ, pācittiyaṃ.

78. If a bhikkhu should stand eavesdropping on bhikkhus who are quarreling, disputing, and engaged in disagreements, thinking, "I will hear what they will say," using this very reason and no other, it is a pācittiya.

Kammappaṭibāhanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Rejecting Consent

79.Yo pana bhikkhu dhammikānaṃ kammānaṃ chandaṃ datvā pacchā khīyanadhammaṃ āpajjeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

79. If a bhikkhu, having given his consent to a lawful transaction, should afterwards adopt a discontented attitude, it is a pācittiya.

Chandaṃadatvāgamanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Departing Without Giving Consent

80.Yo pana bhikkhu saṅghe vinicchayakathāya vattamānāya chandaṃ adatvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkameyya, pācittiyaṃ.

80. If a bhikkhu, while a discussion of a judgment is in progress in the Saṅgha, should get up from his seat and depart without giving his consent, it is a pācittiya.

Dubbalasikkhāpadaṃ

The Dubbala Training Rule

81.Yo pana bhikkhu samaggena saṅghena cīvaraṃ datvā pacchā khīyanadhammaṃ āpajjeyya ‘‘yathāsanthutaṃ bhikkhū saṅghikaṃ lābhaṃ pariṇāmentī’’ti, pācittiyaṃ.

81. If a bhikkhu, after the Saṅgha has given a robe with the unanimous agreement of the Saṅgha, should afterwards adopt a discontented attitude, (saying,) "The bhikkhus dispose of the Saṅgha's gains as they please," it is a pācittiya.

Pariṇāmanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Appropriation

82.Yo pana bhikkhu jānaṃ saṅghikaṃ lābhaṃ pariṇataṃ puggalassa pariṇāmeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

82. If a bhikkhu should knowingly appropriate a gain belonging to the Saṅgha to an individual, it is a pācittiya.

Sahadhammikavaggo aṭṭhamo.

The Eighth Chapter on Shared Dhamma.

Antepurasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on the Inner Apartments

83.Yo pana bhikkhu rañño khattiyassa muddhābhisittassa anikkhantarājake aniggataratanake pubbe appaṭisaṃvidito indakhīlaṃ atikkāmeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

83. If a bhikkhu, in a king's residence where the king, a khattiya, has been consecrated by sprinkling, where the royal family has not yet departed, where the jewels have not yet been removed, should cross the threshold post without prior notice, it is a pācittiya.

Ratanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Jewels

84.Yo pana bhikkhu ratanaṃ vā ratanasammataṃ vā aññatra ajjhārāmā vā ajjhāvasathā vā uggaṇheyya vā uggaṇhāpeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ. Ratanaṃ vā pana bhikkhunā ratanasammataṃ vā ajjhārāme vā ajjhāvasathe vā uggahetvā vā uggahāpetvā vā nikkhipitabbaṃ ‘‘yassa bhavissati, so harissatī’’ti, ayaṃ tattha sāmīci.

84. If a bhikkhu should pick up or have picked up a jewel or what is considered a jewel, except in a monastery or dwelling place, it is a pācittiya. A jewel or what is considered a jewel should be picked up or have picked up by a bhikkhu in a monastery or dwelling place and put away (thinking), "Whoever it belongs to will take it," this is proper conduct in this case.

Vikālagāmappavesanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Entering a Village at the Wrong Time

85.Yo pana bhikkhu santaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchāvikāle gāmaṃ paviseyya aññatra tathārūpā accāyikā karaṇīyā, pācittiyaṃ.

85.If a bhikkhu, without asking a bhikkhu who is present, enters a village at an unseasonable time, unless there is such an emergency, it is a pācittiya.

Sūcigharasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sūcighara Training Rule

86.Yo pana bhikkhu aṭṭhimayaṃ vā dantamayaṃ vā visāṇamayaṃ vā sūcigharaṃ kārāpeyya, bhedanakaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

86.If a bhikkhu has a needle case made of bone, ivory, or horn, it is a pācittiya involving cutting.

Mañcapīṭhasikkhāpadaṃ

The Mañcapīṭha Training Rule

87.Navaṃ pana bhikkhunā mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā kārayamānena aṭṭhaṅgulapādakaṃ kāretabbaṃ sugataṅgulena aññatra heṭṭhimāya aṭaniyā. Taṃ atikkāmayato chedanakaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

87.When a bhikkhu is having a new couch or chair made, it should be made with legs eight aṅgulas high, measured by the Sugata-aṅgula, apart from the lower cross-piece. To exceed that is a pācittiya involving cutting.

Tūlonaddhasikkhāpadaṃ

The Tūlonaddha Training Rule

88.Yo pana bhikkhu mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā tūlonaddhaṃ kārāpeyya, uddālanakaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

88.If a bhikkhu has a couch or chair made that is stuffed with cotton, it is a pācittiya involving ripping out.

Nisīdanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Nisīdana Training Rule

89.Nisīdanaṃ pana bhikkhunā kārayamānena pamāṇikaṃ kāretabbaṃ, tatridaṃ pamāṇaṃ, dīghaso dve vidatthiyo sugatavidatthiyā, tiriyaṃ diyaḍḍhaṃ, dasā vidatthi. Taṃ atikkāmayato chedanakaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

89.When a bhikkhu is having a sitting cloth (nisīdana) made, it should be made to measure. Here is the measure for it: in length, two spans of the Sugata-span; across, one and a half; with a fringe, one span. To exceed that is a pācittiya involving cutting.

Kaṇḍuppaṭicchādisikkhāpadaṃ

The Kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi Training Rule

90.Kaṇḍuppaṭicchādiṃ pana bhikkhunā kārayamānena pamāṇikā kāretabbā, tatridaṃ pamāṇaṃ, dīghaso catasso vidatthiyo sugatavidatthiyā, tiriyaṃ dve vidatthiyo. Taṃ atikkāmayato chedanakaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

90.When a bhikkhu is having a cloth for covering a sore made (kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi), it should be made to measure. Here is the measure for it: in length, four spans of the Sugata-span; across, two spans. To exceed that is a pācittiya involving cutting.

Vassikasāṭikasikkhāpadaṃ

The Vassikasāṭika Training Rule

91.Vassikasāṭikaṃ pana bhikkhunā kārayamānena pamāṇikā kāretabbā, tatridaṃ pamāṇaṃ, dīghaso cha vidatthiyo sugatavidatthiyā, tiriyaṃ aḍḍhateyyā. Taṃ atikkāmayato chedanakaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

91.When a bhikkhu is having a rains-bathing cloth (vassikasāṭika) made, it should be made to measure. Here is the measure for it: in length, six spans of the Sugata-span; across, two and a half. To exceed that is a pācittiya involving cutting.

Nandasikkhāpadaṃ

The Nanda Training Rule

92.Yo pana bhikkhu sugatacīvarappamāṇaṃ cīvaraṃ kārāpeyya, atirekaṃ vā, chedanakaṃ pācittiyaṃ. Tatridaṃ sugatassa sugatacīvarappamāṇaṃ, dīghaso nava vidatthiyo sugatavidatthiyā, tiriyaṃ cha vidatthiyo, idaṃ sugatassa sugatacīvarappamāṇanti.

92.If a bhikkhu has a robe made the size of the Sugata's robe, or larger, it is a pācittiya involving cutting. Here is the Sugata's robe measure for the Sugata: in length, nine spans of the Sugata-span; across, six spans. This is the Sugata's robe measure for the Sugata.

Ratanavaggo navamo.

The Ninth Chapter on Jewels.

Uddiṭṭhā kho āyasmanto dvenavuti pācittiyā dhammā. Tatthāyasmante pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, dutiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, tatiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, parisuddhetthāyasmanto, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmīti.

The ninety-two pācittiya Dhammas have been recited, venerable sirs. I ask the venerable sirs about this: Are you blameless in this matter? And for the second time I ask: Are you blameless in this matter? And for the third time I ask: Are you blameless in this matter? You are blameless in this matter, venerable sirs; therefore you are silent. Thus, I will remember it.

Pācittiyā niṭṭhitā.

The Pācittiyas are finished.

Pāṭidesanīyā
Pāṭidesanīyas

Ime kho panāyasmanto cattāro pāṭidesanīyā

These four Pāṭidesanīya rules, venerable sirs,

Dhammā uddesaṃ āgacchanti.

come to the recitation.

Paṭhamapāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadaṃ

The First Pāṭidesanīya Training Rule

1.Yo pana bhikkhu aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā antaragharaṃ paviṭṭhāya hatthato khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā sahatthā paṭiggahetvā khādeyya vā bhuñjeyya vā, paṭidesetabbaṃ tena bhikkhunā ‘‘gārayhaṃ, āvuso, dhammaṃ āpajjiṃ asappāyaṃ pāṭidesanīyaṃ, taṃ paṭidesemī’’ti.

1.If a bhikkhu, having received with his own hand edible or staple food from the hand of a bhikkhunī who is unrelated, inside a house, should eat or consume it, that bhikkhu should confess: “A blameworthy and unsuitable Dhamma, requiring confession, has been committed by me, friends. I confess it.”

Dutiyapāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadaṃ

The Second Pāṭidesanīya Training Rule

2.Bhikkhū paneva kulesu nimantitā bhuñjanti, tatra ce sā bhikkhunī vosāsamānarūpā ṭhitā hoti ‘‘idha sūpaṃ detha, idha odanaṃ dethā’’ti. Tehi bhikkhūhi sā bhikkhunī apasādetabbā ‘‘apasakka tāva bhagini, yāva bhikkhū bhuñjantī’’ti. Ekassapi ce bhikkhuno na paṭibhāseyya taṃ bhikkhuniṃ apasādetuṃ ‘‘apasakka tāva bhagini, yāva bhikkhū bhuñjantī’’ti, paṭidesetabbaṃ tehi bhikkhūhi ‘‘gārayhaṃ, āvuso, dhammaṃ āpajjimhā asappāyaṃ pāṭidesanīyaṃ, taṃ paṭidesemā’’ti.

2.If bhikkhus are invited and are eating in a family, and there that bhikkhunī is standing conveying the sense, "Give soup here, give rice here," those bhikkhus should send that bhikkhunī away, "Step aside, sister, while the bhikkhus are eating." If it should not occur to even one bhikkhu to send that bhikkhunī away, "Step aside, sister, while the bhikkhus are eating," those bhikkhus should confess: “A blameworthy and unsuitable Dhamma, requiring confession, has been committed by us, friends. We confess it.”

Tatiyapāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadaṃ

The Third Pāṭidesanīya Training Rule

3.Yāni kho pana tāni sekkhasammatāni kulāni, yo pana bhikkhu tathārūpesu sekkhasammatesu kulesu pubbe animantito agilāno khādanīyaṃ vā, bhojanīyaṃ vā sahatthā paṭiggahetvā khādeyya vā, bhuñjeyya vā, paṭidesetabbaṃ tena bhikkhunā ‘‘gārayhaṃ, āvuso, dhammaṃ āpajjiṃ asappāyaṃ pāṭidesanīyaṃ, taṃ paṭidesemī’’ti.

3.Those families that are agreed upon as needing training: if a bhikkhu, in such families agreed upon as needing training, without being previously invited, and not being ill, should receive with his own hand edible or staple food and eat or consume it, that bhikkhu should confess: “A blameworthy and unsuitable Dhamma, requiring confession, has been committed by me, friends. I confess it.”

Catutthapāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadaṃ

The Fourth Pāṭidesanīya Training Rule

4.Yāni kho pana tāni āraññakāni senāsanāni sāsaṅkasammatāni sappaṭibhayāni, yo pana bhikkhu tathārūpesu senāsanesu pubbe appaṭisaṃviditaṃ khādanīyaṃ vā, bhojanīyaṃ vā ajjhārāme sahatthā paṭiggahetvā agilāno khādeyya vā, bhuñjeyya vā, paṭidesetabbaṃ tena bhikkhunā ‘‘gārayhaṃ, āvuso, dhammaṃ āpajjiṃ asappāyaṃ pāṭidesanīyaṃ, taṃ paṭidesemī’’ti.

4.Those forest dwelling places that are agreed upon as being dangerous and frightening: if a bhikkhu, in such dwelling places, without previously arranging it, should receive with his own hand edible or staple food in the monastery, and not being ill, should eat or consume it, that bhikkhu should confess: “A blameworthy and unsuitable Dhamma, requiring confession, has been committed by me, friends. I confess it.”

Uddiṭṭhā kho āyasmanto cattāro pāṭidesanīyā dhammā. Tatthāyasmante pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, dutiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, tatiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, parisuddhetthāyasmanto, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmīti.

The four Pāṭidesanīya Dhammas have been recited, venerable sirs. I ask the venerable sirs about this: Are you blameless in this matter? And for the second time I ask: Are you blameless in this matter? And for the third time I ask: Are you blameless in this matter? You are blameless in this matter, venerable sirs; therefore you are silent. Thus, I will remember it.

Pāṭidesanīyā niṭṭhitā.

The Pāṭidesanīyas are finished.

Sekhiyā
Sekhiyas

Ime kho panāyasmanto sekhiyā dhammā uddesaṃ āgacchanti.

These Sekhiya Dhammas, venerable sirs, come to the recitation.

Parimaṇḍalasikkhāpadaṃ

The Parimaṇḍala Training Rule

1.Parimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

1.I will wear the lower robe completely around me: a training to be done.

2.Parimaṇḍalaṃ pārupissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

2.I will wear the upper robe completely around me: a training to be done.

Suppaṭicchannasikkhāpadaṃ

The Suppaṭicchanna Training Rule

3.Suppaṭicchanno antaraghare gamissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

3.Well-covered, I will go into inhabited areas: a training to be done.

4.Suppaṭicchanno antaraghare nisīdissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

4.Well-covered, I will sit down in inhabited areas: a training to be done.

Susaṃvutasikkhāpadaṃ

The Susaṃvuta Training Rule

5.Susaṃvuto antaraghare gamissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

5.Well-controlled, I will go into inhabited areas: a training to be done.

6.Susaṃvuto antaraghare nisīdissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

6.Well-controlled, I will sit down in inhabited areas: a training to be done.

Okkhittacakkhusikkhāpadaṃ

The Okkhittacakkhu Training Rule

7.Okkhittacakkhu antaraghare gamissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

7.With downcast eyes, I will go into inhabited areas: a training to be done.

8.Okkhittacakkhu antaraghare nisīdissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

8.With downcast eyes, I will sit down in inhabited areas: a training to be done.

Ukkhittakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Ukkhittaka Training Rule

9.Na ukkhittakāya antaraghare gamissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

9.Not with uplifted robe, I will go into inhabited areas: a training to be done.

10.Na ukkhittakāya antaraghare nisīdissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

10.Not with uplifted robe, I will sit down in inhabited areas: a training to be done.

Parimaṇḍalavaggo paṭhamo.

The First Chapter on Completely Around.

Ujjagghikasikkhāpadaṃ

The Ujjagghika Training Rule

11.Na ujjagghikāya antaraghare gamissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

11.Not laughing, I will go into inhabited areas: a training to be done.

12.Na ujjagghikāya antaraghare nisīdissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

12.Not laughing, I will sit down in inhabited areas: a training to be done.

Uccasaddasikkhāpadaṃ

Uccasaddasikkhāpadaṃ

13.Appasaddo antaraghare gamissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

13.Quietly, I will go into inhabited areas: a training to be done.

14.Appasaddo antaraghare nisīdissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

14.Quietly, I will sit down in inhabited areas: a training to be done.

Kāyappacālakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Kāyappacālaka Training Rule

15.Na kāyappacālakaṃ antaraghare gamissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

15.Not shaking the body, I will go into inhabited areas: a training to be done.

16.Na kāyappacālakaṃ antaraghare nisīdissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

16.Not shaking the body, I will sit down in inhabited areas: a training to be done.

Bāhuppacālakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Bāhuppacālaka Training Rule

17.Na bāhuppacālakaṃ antaraghare gamissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

17.Not shaking the arms, I will go into inhabited areas: a training to be done.

18.Na bāhuppacālakaṃ antaragharenisīdissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

18.Not shaking the arms, I will sit down in inhabited areas: a training to be done.

Sīsappacālakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sīsappacālaka Training Rule

19.Na sīsappacālakaṃ antaraghare gamissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

19.Not shaking the head, I will go into inhabited areas: a training to be done.

20.Na sīsappacālakaṃ antaraghare nisīdissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

20.Not shaking the head, I will sit down in inhabited areas: a training to be done.

Ujjagghikavaggo dutiyo.

The Second Chapter on Laughing.

Khambhakatasikkhāpadaṃ

The Khambhakaṭa Training Rule

21.Na khambhakato antaraghare gamissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

21.Not leaning on a pillar, I will go into inhabited areas: a training to be done.

22.Na khambhakato antaraghare nisīdissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

22.Not leaning on a pillar, I will sit down in inhabited areas: a training to be done.

Oguṇṭhitasikkhāpadaṃ

The Oguṇṭhita Training Rule

23.Na oguṇṭhito antaraghare gamissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

23.Not with head covered, I will go into inhabited areas: a training to be done.

24.Na oguṇṭhito antaraghare nisīdissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

24.Not with head covered, I will sit down in inhabited areas: a training to be done.

Ukkuṭikasikkhāpadaṃ

The Ukkuṭika Training Rule

25.Na ukkuṭikāya antaraghare gamissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

25.Not squatting, I will go into inhabited areas: a training to be done.

Pallatthikasikkhāpadaṃ

The Pallatthika Training Rule

26.Na pallatthikāya antaraghare nisīdissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

26.Not sitting cross-legged, I will sit down in inhabited areas: a training to be done.

Sakkaccapaṭiggahaṇasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sakkaccapaṭiggahaṇa Training Rule

27.Sakkaccaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ paṭiggahessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

27.Respectfully, I will receive alms food: a training to be done.

Pattasaññīpaṭiggahaṇasikkhāpadaṃ

The Pattasaññīpaṭiggahaṇa Training Rule

28.Pattasaññī piṇḍapātaṃ paṭiggahessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

28.With attention on the bowl, I will receive alms food: a training to be done.

Samasūpakapaṭiggahaṇasikkhāpadaṃ

The Samasūpakapaṭiggahaṇa Training Rule

29.Samasūpakaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ paṭiggahessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

29.With balanced gravy, I will receive alms food: a training to be done.

Samatittikasikkhāpadaṃ

The Samatittika Training Rule

30.Samatittikaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ paṭiggahessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

30.Up to the rim, I will receive alms food: a training to be done.

Khambhakatavaggo tatiyo.

The Third Chapter on Leaning on a Pillar.

Sakkaccabhuñjanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sakkaccabhuñjana Training Rule

31.Sakkaccaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

31.Respectfully, I will eat alms food: a training to be done.

Pattasaññībhuñjanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Pattasaññībhuñjana Training Rule

32.Pattasaññī piṇḍapātaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

32.With attention on the bowl, I will eat alms food: a training to be done.

Sapadānasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sapadāna Training Rule

33.Sapadānaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

33.Serially, I will eat alms food: a training to be done.

Samasūpakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Samasūpaka Training Rule

34.Samasūpakaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

34.With balanced gravy, I will eat alms food: a training to be done.

Nathūpakatasikkhāpadaṃ

The Nathūpakata Training Rule

35.Na thūpakato omadditvā piṇḍapātaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

35.Not piling it up, pressing down, I will eat alms food: a training to be done.

Odanappaṭicchādanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Odanappaṭicchādana Training Rule

36.Na sūpaṃ vā byañjanaṃ vā odanena paṭicchādessāmi bhiyyokamyataṃ upādāyāti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

36.I will not cover curry or relish with rice, desiring more: a training to be done.

Sūpodanaviññattisikkhāpadaṃ

The Sūpodanaviññatti Training Rule

37.Na sūpaṃ vā odanaṃ vā agilāno attano atthāya viññāpetvā bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

37.Not being ill, I will not ask for curry or rice for my own sake and then eat it: a training to be done.

Ujjhānasaññīsikkhāpadaṃ

The Ujjhānasaññī Training Rule

38.Na ujjhānasaññī paresaṃ pattaṃ olokessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

38.Not with a disparaging thought, I will look at another's bowl: a training to be done.

Kabaḷasikkhāpadaṃ

The Kabaḷa Training Rule

39.Nātimahantaṃ kabaḷaṃ karissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

39.I will not make an overly large mouthful: a training to be done.

Ālopasikkhāpadaṃ

The Ālopa Training Rule

40.Parimaṇḍalaṃ ālopaṃ karissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

40.I will make a rounded mouthful: a training to be done.

Sakkaccavaggo catuttho.

The Fourth Chapter on Respectfully.

Anāhaṭasikkhāpadaṃ

The Anāhaṭa Training Rule

41.Na anāhaṭe kabaḷe mukhadvāraṃ vivarissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

41.Not before bringing the mouthful to the mouth, I will open the door of the mouth: a training to be done.

Bhuñjamānasikkhāpadaṃ

The Bhuñjamāna Training Rule

42.Na bhuñjamāno sabbahatthaṃ mukhe pakkhipissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

42.While eating, I will not put the whole hand in the mouth: a training to be done.

Sakabaḷasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sakabaḷa Training Rule

43.Na sakabaḷena mukhena byāharissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

43.Not with a mouthful in the mouth, I will speak: a training to be done.

Piṇḍukkhepakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Piṇḍukkhepaka Training Rule

44.Na piṇḍukkhepakaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

44.Not throwing lumps of food, I will eat: a training to be done.

Kabaḷāvacchedakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Kabaḷāvacchedaka Training Rule

45.Na kabaḷāvacchedakaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

45.Not biting off mouthfuls, I will eat: a training to be done.

Avagaṇḍakārakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Avagaṇḍakāraka Training Rule

46.Na avagaṇḍakārakaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

46.Not stuffing out the cheeks, I will eat: a training to be done.

Hatthaniddhunakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Hatthaniddhunaka Training Rule

47.Na hatthaniddhunakaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

47.Not shaking the hand (with food on it), I will eat: a training to be done.

Sitthāvakārakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sitthāvakāraka Training Rule

48.Na sitthāvakārakaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

48. A training should be undertaken: 'I will not eat making picking-at-food motions'.

Jivhānicchārakasikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on moving the tongue about

49.Na jivhānicchārakaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

49. A training should be undertaken: 'I will not eat moving the tongue about'.

Capucapukārakasikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on making smacking sounds

50.Na capucapukārakaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

50. A training should be undertaken: 'I will not eat making smacking sounds'.

Kabaḷavaggo pañcamo.

The fifth section on morsels.

Surusurukārakasikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on making a slurping sound

51.Na surusurukārakaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

51. A training should be undertaken: 'I will not eat making a slurping sound'.

Hatthanillehakasikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on licking the hand

52.Na hatthanillehakaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

52. A training should be undertaken: 'I will not eat licking the hand'.

Pattanillehakasikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on licking the bowl

53.Na pattanillehakaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

53. A training should be undertaken: 'I will not eat licking the bowl'.

Oṭṭhanillehakasikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on licking the lips

54.Na oṭṭhanillehakaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

54. A training should be undertaken: 'I will not eat licking the lips'.

Sāmisasikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on food-stained hands

55.Na sāmisena hatthena pānīyathālakaṃ paṭiggahessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

55. A training should be undertaken: 'I will not receive a water pot with a food-stained hand'.

Sasitthakasikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on food particles

56.Na sasitthakaṃ pattadhovanaṃ antaraghare chaḍḍessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

56. A training should be undertaken: 'I will not throw bowl-wash water with food particles inside the dwellings'.

Chattapāṇisikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on holding an umbrella

57.Na chattapāṇissa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

57. A training should be undertaken: 'I will not teach the Dhamma to one who is not ill while he is holding an umbrella'.

Daṇḍapāṇisikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on holding a stick

58.Na daṇḍapāṇissa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

58. A training should be undertaken: 'I will not teach the Dhamma to one who is not ill while he is holding a stick'.

Satthapāṇisikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on holding a knife

59.Na satthapāṇissa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

59. A training should be undertaken: 'I will not teach the Dhamma to one who is not ill while he is holding a knife'.

Āvudhapāṇisikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on holding a weapon

60.Na āvudhapāṇissa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

60. A training should be undertaken: 'I will not teach the Dhamma to one who is not ill while he is holding a weapon'.

Surusuruvaggo chaṭṭho.

The sixth section on surusuru.

Pādukasikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on wearing sandals

61.Na pādukāruḷhassa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

61. A training should be undertaken: 'I will not teach the Dhamma to one who is not ill while he is wearing sandals'.

Upāhanasikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on wearing shoes

62.Na upāhanāruḷhassa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

62. A training should be undertaken: 'I will not teach the Dhamma to one who is not ill while he is wearing shoes'.

Yānasikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on being in a vehicle

63.Na yānagatassa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

63. A training should be undertaken: 'I will not teach the Dhamma to one who is not ill while he is in a vehicle'.

Sayanasikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on lying down

64.Na sayanagatassa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

64. A training should be undertaken: 'I will not teach the Dhamma to one who is not ill while he is lying down'.

Pallatthikasikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on sitting with the legs crossed

65.Na pallatthikāya nisinnassa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

65. A training should be undertaken: 'I will not teach the Dhamma to one who is not ill while he is sitting with his legs crossed'.

Veṭhitasikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on having the head wrapped

66.Na veṭhitasīsassa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

66. A training should be undertaken: 'I will not teach the Dhamma to one who is not ill while he has his head wrapped'.

Oguṇṭhitasikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on having the head covered

67.Na oguṇṭhitasīsassa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

67. A training should be undertaken: 'I will not teach the Dhamma to one who is not ill while he has his head covered'.

Chamāsikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on the ground

68.Na chamāyaṃ nisīditvā āsane nisinnassa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

68. A training should be undertaken: 'I will not teach the Dhamma to one who is not ill while he is sitting on a seat and I am sitting on the ground'.

Nīcāsanasikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on a low seat

69.Na nīce āsane nisīditvā ucce āsane nisinnassa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

69. A training should be undertaken: 'I will not teach the Dhamma to one who is not ill while he is sitting on a high seat and I am sitting on a low seat'.

Ṭhitasikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on standing

70.Na ṭhito nisinnassa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

70. A training should be undertaken: 'I will not teach the Dhamma to one who is not ill while he is sitting and I am standing'.

Pacchatogamanasikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on going behind

71.Na pacchato gacchanto purato gacchantassa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

71. A training should be undertaken: 'I will not teach the Dhamma to one who is not ill while he is going in front and I am going behind'.

Uppathenagamanasikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on going off the path

72.Na uppathena gacchanto pathena gacchantassa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

72. A training should be undertaken: 'I will not teach the Dhamma to one who is not ill while he is going on the path and I am going off the path'.

Ṭhitouccārasikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on standing to excrete

73.Na ṭhito agilāno uccāraṃ vā passāvaṃ vā karissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

73. A training should be undertaken: 'I, not being ill, will not excrete or urinate while standing'.

Hariteuccārasikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on excreting on greenery

74.Na harite agilāno uccāraṃ vā passāvaṃ vā kheḷaṃ vā karissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

74. A training should be undertaken: 'I, not being ill, will not excrete or urinate or spit on greenery'.

Udakeuccārasikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on excreting in water

75.Na udake agilāno uccāraṃ vā passāvaṃ vā kheḷaṃ vā karissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

75. A training should be undertaken: 'I, not being ill, will not excrete or urinate or spit in water'.

Pādukavaggo sattamo.

The seventh section on footwear.

Uddiṭṭhā kho āyasmanto sekhiyā dhammā. Tatthāyasmante pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, dutiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, tatiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, parisuddhetthāyasmanto, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmīti.

The Sekhiya Dhammas have been recited, venerable sirs. I ask the venerable ones about this: Are you pure in this? A second time I ask: Are you pure in this? A third time I ask: Are you pure in this? You are pure in this, venerable sirs; therefore, you are silent. Thus, I understand it.

Sekhiyā niṭṭhitā.

The Sekhiya are finished.

Adhikaraṇasamathā
Adhikaranasamatha

Ime kho panāyasmanto satta adhikaraṇasamathā

These seven Adhikaranasamatha Dhammas come to the recitation, venerable sirs.

Dhammā uddesaṃ āgacchanti.

Dhammas come to the recitation.

Uppannuppannānaṃ adhikaraṇānaṃ samathāya vūpasamāya sammukhāvinayo dātabbo.

For the appeasement and settling of each and every Adhikaranas that have arisen, the Sammukhavinaya should be given.

Sativinayo dātabbo.

The Sativinaya should be given.

Amūḷhavinayo dātabbo.

The Amulhavinaya should be given.

Paṭiññāya kāretabbaṃ.

It should be settled by acknowledgement.

Yebhuyyasikā.

Yebhuyyasika.

Tassapāpiyasikā.

Tassapapiyasika.

Tiṇavatthārakoti.

Tinavattharaka.

Uddiṭṭhā kho āyasmanto satta adhikaraṇasamathā dhammā. Tatthāyasmante, pucchāmi kaccittha parisuddhā, dutiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, tatiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, parisuddhetthāyasmanto, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmīti.

The seven Adhikaranasamatha Dhammas have been recited, venerable sirs. I ask the venerable ones about this: Are you pure in this? A second time I ask: Are you pure in this? A third time I ask: Are you pure in this? You are pure in this, venerable sirs; therefore, you are silent. Thus, I understand it.

Adhikaraṇasamathā niṭṭhitā.

The Adhikaranasamatha are finished.

Uddiṭṭhaṃ kho āyasmanto nidānaṃ,

The Nidana has been recited, venerable sirs,

Uddiṭṭhā cattāro pārājikā dhammā,

The four Parajika Dhammas have been recited,

Uddiṭṭhā terasa saṅghādisesā dhammā,

The thirteen Sanghadisesa Dhammas have been recited,

Uddiṭṭhā dve aniyatā dhammā,

The two Aniyata Dhammas have been recited,

Uddiṭṭhā tiṃsa nissaggiyā pācittiyā dhammā,

The thirty Nissaggiya Pacittiya Dhammas have been recited,

Uddiṭṭhā dvenavuti pācittiyā dhammā,

The ninety-two Pacittiya Dhammas have been recited,

Uddiṭṭhā cattāro pāṭidesanīyā dhammā,

The four Patidesaniya Dhammas have been recited,

Uddiṭṭhā sekhiyā dhammā,

The Sekhiya Dhammas have been recited,

Uddiṭṭhā satta adhikaraṇasamathā dhammā, ettakaṃ tassa bhagavato suttāgataṃ suttapariyāpannaṃ anvaddhamāsaṃ uddesaṃ āgacchati, tattha sabbeheva samaggehi sammodamānehi avivadamānehi sikkhitabbanti.

The seven Adhikaranasamatha Dhammas have been recited. So much of this Suttagata, Suttapariyapanna of the Blessed One comes to the recitation every half-month; in this, you should all train yourselves, united, in harmony, without dispute.

Vitthāruddeso pañcamo.

The fifth, extended recitation.

Bhikkhupātimokkhaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ.

The Bhikkhu Patimokkha is finished.

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Homage to the Blessed One, the Arahant, the Perfectly Enlightened One

Bhikkhunīpātimokkhapāḷi

Bhikkhuni Patimokkha Pali

Pubbakaraṇaṃ-4

Preliminary acts-4

Sammajjanī padīpo ca, udakaṃ āsanena ca;

A broom and a lamp, and water with a seat;
It is called "Pubbakaran".

Pubbakiccaṃ-5

Preliminary duties-5

Chanda, pārisuddhi, utukkhānaṃ, bhikkhunigaṇanā ca ovādo;

Consent, purity, announcement of the season, counting of the bhikkhunis, and exhortation;
It is called "Pubbakicca".

Pattakallaaṅgā-4

Qualified-4

Uposatho, yāvatikā ca bhikkhunī kammappattā;

The Uposatha and however many bhikkhunis are qualified for the act;
And there are no shared offenses;
It is called "Pattakalla".

Pubbakaraṇapubbakiccāni samāpetvā desitāpattikassa samaggassa bhikkhunisaṅghassa anumatiyā pātimokkhaṃ uddisituṃ ārādhanaṃ karoma.

Having completed the preliminary acts and preliminary duties, with the approval of the Saṅgha of bhikkhunis who are in harmony and whose offenses have been declared, I request to recite the Patimokkha.

Nidānuddeso
Nidana

Suṇātu me ayye saṅgho, ajjuposatho pannaraso, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho uposathaṃ kareyya, pātimokkhaṃ uddiseyya.

May the Sangha listen to me, venerable ones. Today is the fifteenth, the Uposatha day. If it is the Sangha's readiness, may the Sangha observe the Uposatha, may recite the Patimokkha.

Kiṃ saṅghassa pubbakiccaṃ? Pārisuddhiṃ ayyāyo ārocetha, pātimokkhaṃ uddisissāmi, taṃ sabbāva santā sādhukaṃ suṇoma manasi karoma. Yassā siyā āpatti, sā āvikareyya, asantiyā āpattiyā tuṇhī bhavitabbaṃ, tuṇhībhāvena kho panāyyāyo, ‘‘parisuddhā’’ti vedissāmi. Yathā kho pana paccekapuṭṭhassā veyyākaraṇaṃ hoti, evamevaṃ evarūpāya parisāya yāvatatiyaṃ anusāvitaṃ hoti. Yā pana bhikkhunī yāvatatiyaṃ anusāviyamāne saramānā santiṃ āpattiṃ nāvikareyya, sampajānamusāvādassā hoti. Sampajānamusāvādo kho panāyyāyo, antarāyiko dhammo vutto bhagavatā, tasmā saramānāya bhikkhuniyā āpannāya visuddhāpekkhāya santī āpatti āvikātabbā, āvikatā hissā phāsu hoti.

What are the Sangha's preliminary duties? Let the venerable ones declare their purity. I will recite the Patimokkha. May all those present listen well and pay attention. One who has an offense should declare it. If there is no offense, one should remain silent. For by your silence, venerable ones, I will understand that you are "pure". Just as there is a reply to an individual question, so too, is this announced three times to this assembly. But if a bhikkhuni, being reminded while the announcement is being made three times, does not reveal an existing offense, she is one who speaks a deliberate lie. And speaking a deliberate lie, venerable ones, has been declared by the Blessed One to be a hindering Dhamma. Therefore, a bhikkhuni who remembers having committed an offense and desires purification should reveal the existing offense; for by revealing it, she will be at ease.

Uddiṭṭhaṃ kho, ayyāyo, nidānaṃ. Tatthāyyāyo pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, dutiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, tatiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, parisuddhetthāyyāyo, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmīti.

The Nidana has been recited, venerable ones. I ask the venerable ones about this: Are you pure in this? A second time I ask: Are you pure in this? A third time I ask: Are you pure in this? You are pure in this, venerable ones; therefore, you are silent. Thus, I understand it.

Nidānaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ.

The Nidana is finished.

Pārājikuddeso
Parajika

Tatrime aṭṭha pārājikā dhammā uddesaṃ āgacchanti.

Herein, these eight Parajika Dhammas come to the recitation.

Methunadhammasikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on sexual intercourse

1.Yā pana bhikkhunī chandaso methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭiseveyya, antamaso tiracchānagatenapi, pārājikā hoti asaṃvāsā.

1. Whatever bhikkhuni should intentionally engage in sexual intercourse, even with an animal, is defeated and no longer in affiliation.

Adinnādānasikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on taking what is not given

2.Yā pana bhikkhunī gāmā vā araññā vā adinnaṃ theyyasaṅkhātaṃ ādiyeyya, yathārūpe adinnādāne rājāno coraṃ gahetvā haneyyuṃ vā bandheyyuṃ vā pabbājeyyuṃ vā corāsi bālāsi mūḷhāsi thenāsīti, tathārūpaṃ bhikkhunī adinnaṃ ādiyamānā ayampi pārājikā hoti asaṃvāsā.

2. Whatever bhikkhuni should take, from a village or a wilderness, what is not given, which is reckoned as theft, in the way that kings, having caught a thief for that kind of taking what is not given, would execute him or imprison him or banish him, saying, 'You are a thief, you are a fool, you are deluded, you are a thief'; a bhikkhuni who takes what is not given of such a kind is also defeated and no longer in affiliation.

Manussaviggahasikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on causing the loss of human life

3.Yā pana bhikkhunī sañcicca manussaviggahaṃ jīvitā voropeyya, satthahārakaṃ vāssa pariyeseyya, maraṇavaṇṇaṃ vā saṃvaṇṇeyya, maraṇāya vā samādapeyya ‘‘ambho purisa, kiṃ tuyhiminā pāpakena dujjīvitena, mataṃ te jīvitā seyyo’’ti, iti cittamanā cittasaṅkappā anekapariyāyena maraṇavaṇṇaṃ vā saṃvaṇṇeyya, maraṇāya vā samādapeyya, ayampi pārājikā hoti asaṃvāsā.

3. Whatever bhikkhuni should intentionally deprive a human being of life, or search for an instrument of death for him, or speak in praise of death, or incite him to die, saying, 'My good man, what use is this wretched, miserable life to you? Death is better for you than life'; if, with such a mind and such an intention, she speaks in praise of death or incites him to die in various ways, she is also defeated and no longer in affiliation.

Uttarimanussadhammasikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on claiming superhuman attainments

4.Yā pana bhikkhunī anabhijānaṃ uttarimanussadhammaṃ attupanāyikaṃ alamariyañāṇadassanaṃ samudācareyya ‘‘iti jānāmi, iti passāmī’’ti, tato aparena samayena samanuggāhīyamānā vā asamanuggāhīyamānā vā āpannā visuddhāpekkhā evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘ajānamevaṃ, ayye, avacaṃ jānāmi, apassaṃ passāmi, tucchaṃ musā vilapi’’nti, aññatra adhimānā, ayampi pārājikā hoti asaṃvāsā.

4. Whatever bhikkhuni should declare, without full knowledge, a superhuman Dhamma, an attainment special to herself, saying, 'Thus I know, thus I see', and should later, at some other time, when she is being questioned or not being questioned, being convicted of that offense and desiring purification, say, 'I said that I know although I did not know, venerable ones; I said that I see although I did not see; I spoke empty lies'—unless it was through overestimation—she is also defeated and no longer in affiliation.

Ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalikāsikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on the area above the kneecaps

5.Yā pana bhikkhunī avassutā avassutassa purisapuggalassa, adhakkhakaṃ ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalaṃ āmasanaṃ vā parāmasanaṃ vā gahaṇaṃ vā chupanaṃ vā paṭipīḷanaṃ vā sādiyeyya, ayampi pārājikā hoti asaṃvāsā ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalikā.

5. Whatever bhikkhuni should consent to a caressing or fondling or grasping or touching or pressing of the area above the kneecaps by a male person who is not free from lust, that bhikkhuni is defeated and no longer in affiliation, the area above the kneecaps.

Vajjappaṭicchādikāsikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on concealing a fault

6.Yā pana bhikkhunī jānaṃ pārājikaṃ dhammaṃ ajjhāpannaṃ bhikkhuniṃ nevattanā paṭicodeyya, na gaṇassa āroceyya, yadā ca sā ṭhitā vā assa cutā vā nāsitā vā avassaṭā vā, sā pacchā evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘pubbevāhaṃ, ayye, aññāsiṃ etaṃ bhikkhuniṃ ‘evarūpā ca evarūpā ca sā bhaginī’ti, no ca kho attanā paṭicodessaṃ, na gaṇassa ārocessa’’nti, ayampi pārājikā hoti asaṃvāsā vajjappaṭicchādikā.

6. Whatever bhikkhuni, knowing that a bhikkhuni has fallen into a Parajika Dhamma, neither herself accuse her, nor inform the Sangha; and later, when that bhikkhuni has either remained in that state, or died, or left the Order, or been expelled, should say, 'Formerly, venerable ones, I knew that this bhikkhuni was such and such, but I neither accused her myself, nor informed the Sangha', that bhikkhuni is also defeated and no longer in affiliation, the concealer of a fault.

Ukkhittānuvattikāsikkhāpadaṃ

The training rule on following an expelled bhikkhuni

7.Yā pana bhikkhunī samaggena saṅghena ukkhittaṃ bhikkhuṃ dhammena vinayena satthusāsanena anādaraṃ appaṭikāraṃ akatasahāyaṃ tamanuvatteyya, sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi evamassa vacanīyā ‘‘eso kho, ayye, bhikkhu samaggena saṅghena ukkhitto, dhammena vinayena satthusāsanena anādaro appaṭikāro akatasahāyo, māyye, etaṃ bhikkhuṃ anuvattī’’ti, evañca sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi vuccamānā tatheva paggaṇheyya, sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi yāvatatiyaṃ samanubhāsitabbā tassa paṭinissaggāya, yāvatatiyaṃ ce samanubhāsiyamānā taṃ paṭinissajjeyya, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ, no ce paṭinissajjeyya, ayampi pārājikā hoti asaṃvāsā ukkhittānuvattikā.

7. Furthermore, if a bhikkhunī should follow a bhikkhu who has been suspended by the Saṅgha with agreement, according to the Dhamma, the Vinaya, and the Teacher’s instruction, being disrespectful, unresponsive, and unwilling to assist, that bhikkhunī should be addressed by the bhikkhunīs thus: “This bhikkhu, venerable, has been suspended by the Saṅgha with agreement, according to the Dhamma, the Vinaya, and the Teacher’s instruction, being disrespectful, unresponsive, and unwilling to assist. Do not, venerable, follow this bhikkhu.” And if that bhikkhunī, being spoken to by the bhikkhunīs, should persist in the same behavior, that bhikkhunī should be formally admonished by the bhikkhunīs up to three times for the abandonment of that behavior. If, while being formally admonished up to three times, she should abandon that behavior, that is good. If she should not abandon it, she also becomes pārājikā, not in communion, for following one who has been suspended.

Aṭṭhavatthukāsikkhāpadaṃ

The Eighth-Grounds Training Rule

8.Yā pana bhikkhunī avassutā avassutassa purisapuggalassa hatthaggahaṇaṃ vā sādiyeyya, saṅghāṭikaṇṇaggahaṇaṃ vā sādiyeyya, santiṭṭheyya vā, sallapeyya vā, saṅketaṃ vā gaccheyya, purisassa vā abbhāgamanaṃ sādiyeyya, channaṃ vā anupaviseyya, kāyaṃ vā tadatthāya upasaṃhareyya etassa asaddhammassa paṭisevanatthāya, ayampi pārājikā hoti asaṃvāsā aṭṭhavatthukā.

8. Furthermore, if a bhikkhunī, being uncontrolled, should consent to the holding of (her) hand by an uncontrolled individual, or should consent to the holding of the edge of (her) outer robe, or should stand (with him), or should converse (with him), or should go to a rendezvous, or should consent to the coming of a man, or should enter a hidden place, or should offer (her) body for that purpose, for the practice of that unrighteous act, she also becomes pārājikā, not in communion, on eight grounds.

Uddiṭṭhā kho, ayyāyo, aṭṭha pārājikā dhammā. Yesaṃ bhikkhunī aññataraṃ vā aññataraṃ vā āpajjitvā na labhati bhikkhunīhi saddhiṃ saṃvāsaṃ yathā pure, tathā pacchā, pārājikā hoti asaṃvāsā. Tatthāyyāyo, pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, dutiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, tatiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, parisuddhetthāyyāyo, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmīti.

The eight pārājikā Dhammas have been recited, venerable ones. If a bhikkhunī falls into any one of them, she does not obtain communion with the bhikkhunīs, either as before or later; she is pārājikā, not in communion. There, venerable ones, I ask you: Are you pure in this matter? A second time I ask: Are you pure in this matter? A third time I ask: Are you pure in this matter? You are pure in this matter, venerable ones; therefore, you are silent. Thus, I understand.

Pārājikaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ.

The Pārājika Section is Finished.

Saṅghādisesuddeso
Saṅghādisesa Recitation

Ime kho panāyyāyo sattarasa saṅghādisesā

These seventeen Saṅghādisesa Dhammas,

Dhammā uddesaṃ āgacchanti.

Venerable ones, come to the recitation.

Ussayavādikāsikkhāpadaṃ

The Inciting-to-Solicitation Training Rule

1.Yā pana bhikkhunī ussayavādikā vihareyya gahapatinā vā gahapatiputtena vā dāsena vā kammakārena vā antamaso samaṇaparibbājakenāpi, ayampi bhikkhunī paṭhamāpattikaṃ dhammaṃ āpannā nissāraṇīyaṃ saṅghādisesaṃ.

1. Furthermore, if a bhikkhunī should live inciting to solicitation (of material goods), (doing so) by a householder or a householder’s son or a slave or a hired worker or even by a wandering ascetic, this bhikkhunī incurs a first offense, a Dhamma that requires removal from the Saṅgha, a Saṅghādisesa.

Corīvuṭṭhāpikāsikkhāpadaṃ

The Thief-Rescuing Training Rule

2.Yā pana bhikkhunī jānaṃ coriṃ vajjhaṃ viditaṃ anapaloketvā rājānaṃ vā saṅghaṃ vā gaṇaṃ vā pūgaṃ vā seṇiṃ vā, aññatra kappā vuṭṭhāpeyya, ayampi bhikkhunī paṭhamāpattikaṃ dhammaṃ āpannā nissāraṇīyaṃ saṅghādisesaṃ.

2. Furthermore, if a bhikkhunī, knowingly, should rescue a thief subject to execution, it being known, without informing the king or the Saṅgha or a group or a guild or an association, except for a kappiya (allowable) reason, this bhikkhunī incurs a first offense, a Dhamma that requires removal from the Saṅgha, a Saṅghādisesa.

Ekagāmantaragamanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Going-to-Another-Village-Alone Training Rule

3.Yā pana bhikkhunī ekā vā gāmantaraṃ gaccheyya, ekā vā nadīpāraṃ gaccheyya, ekā vā rattiṃ vippavaseyya, ekā vā gaṇamhā ohiyeyya, ayampi bhikkhunī paṭhamāpattikaṃ dhammaṃ āpannā nissāraṇīyaṃ saṅghādisesaṃ.

3. Furthermore, if a bhikkhunī should go alone to another village, or should cross a river alone, or should spend the night away from (the monastery) alone, or should leave the group alone, this bhikkhunī incurs a first offense, a Dhamma that requires removal from the Saṅgha, a Saṅghādisesa.

Ukkhittakaosāraṇasikkhāpadaṃ

The Suspension-Revocation Training Rule

4.Yā pana bhikkhunī samaggena saṅghena ukkhittaṃ bhikkhuniṃ dhammena vinayena satthusāsanena anapaloketvā kārakasaṅghaṃ, anaññāya gaṇassa chandaṃ osāreyya, ayampi bhikkhunī paṭhamāpattikaṃ dhammaṃ āpannā nissāraṇīyaṃ saṅghādisesaṃ.

4. Furthermore, if a bhikkhunī should revoke the suspension of a bhikkhunī who has been suspended by the Saṅgha with agreement, according to the Dhamma, the Vinaya, and the Teacher’s instruction, without informing the acting Saṅgha, without the consent of the group, this bhikkhunī incurs a first offense, a Dhamma that requires removal from the Saṅgha, a Saṅghādisesa.

Bhojanapaṭiggahaṇapaṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ

The First Food-Receiving Training Rule

5.Yā pana bhikkhunī avassutā avassutassa purisapuggalassa hatthato khādanīyaṃ vā, bhojanīyaṃ vā sahatthā paṭiggahetvā khādeyya vā bhuñjeyya vā, ayampi bhikkhunī paṭhamāpattikaṃ dhammaṃ āpannā nissāraṇīyaṃ saṅghādisesaṃ.

5. Furthermore, if a bhikkhunī, being uncontrolled, having received chewable food or edible food from the hand of an uncontrolled individual, should chew or eat it, this bhikkhunī incurs a first offense, a Dhamma that requires removal from the Saṅgha, a Saṅghādisesa.

Bhojanapaṭiggahaṇadutiyasikkhāpadaṃ

The Second Food-Receiving Training Rule

6.Yā pana bhikkhunī evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘kiṃ te, ayye, eso purisapuggalo karissati avassuto vā anavassuto vā, yato tvaṃ anavassutā, iṅgha, ayye, yaṃ te eso purisapuggalo deti khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā, taṃ tvaṃ sahatthā paṭiggahetvā khāda vā bhuñja vā’’ti, ayampi bhikkhunī paṭhamāpattikaṃ dhammaṃ āpannā nissāraṇīyaṃ saṅghādisesaṃ.

6. Furthermore, if a bhikkhunī should say thus: “What will this individual do for you, venerable, whether controlled or uncontrolled? Since you are uncontrolled, come, venerable, whatever chewable food or edible food this individual gives you, receive and eat it with your own hand,” this bhikkhunī incurs a first offense, a Dhamma that requires removal from the Saṅgha, a Saṅghādisesa.

Sañcarittasikkhāpadaṃ

The Acting-as-Go-Between Training Rule

7.Yā pana bhikkhunī sañcarittaṃ samāpajjeyya itthiyā vā purisamatiṃ, purisassa vā itthimatiṃ, jāyattane vā jārattane vā antamaso taṅkhaṇikāyapi, ayampi bhikkhunī paṭhamāpattikaṃ dhammaṃ āpannā nissāraṇīyaṃ saṅghādisesaṃ.

7. Furthermore, if a bhikkhunī should engage in acting as a go-between, either for a woman towards a man or for a man towards a woman, either as a wife or as a mistress, even for a temporary arrangement, this bhikkhunī incurs a first offense, a Dhamma that requires removal from the Saṅgha, a Saṅghādisesa.

Duṭṭhadosasikkhāpadaṃ

The False-Accusation Training Rule

8.Yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhuniṃ duṭṭhā dosā appatītā amūlakena pārājikena dhammena anuddhaṃseyya ‘‘appeva nāma naṃ imamhā brahmacariyā cāveyya’’nti, tato aparena samayena samanuggāhīyamānā vā asa manuggāhīyamānā vā amūlakañceva taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ hoti, bhikkhunī ca dosaṃ patiṭṭhāti, ayampi bhikkhunī paṭhamāpattikaṃ dhammaṃ āpannā nissāraṇīyaṃ saṅghādisesaṃ.

8. Furthermore, if a bhikkhunī, being corrupt, out of hatred and ill-will, should accuse a bhikkhunī of a groundless pārājikā Dhamma, thinking, “Perhaps I may cause her to fall away from this Brahmacariya,” then at a later time, whether being cross-examined or not being cross-examined, that charge is groundless, and the bhikkhunī is established in hatred, this bhikkhunī incurs a first offense, a Dhamma that requires removal from the Saṅgha, a Saṅghādisesa.

Aññabhāgiyasikkhāpadaṃ

The Partial-Basis Training Rule

9.Yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhuniṃ duṭṭhā dosā appatītā aññabhāgiyassa adhikaraṇassa kiñcidesaṃ lesamattaṃ upādāya pārājikena dhammena anuddhaṃseyya ‘‘appeva nāma naṃ imamhā brahmacariyā cāveyya’’nti, tato aparena samayena samanuggāhīyamānā vā asamanuggāhīyamānā vā aññabhāgiyañceva taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ hoti. Kocideso lesamatto upādinno, bhikkhunī ca dosaṃ patiṭṭhāti, ayampi bhikkhunī paṭhamāpattikaṃ dhammaṃ āpannā nissāraṇīyaṃ saṅghādisesaṃ.

9. Furthermore, if a bhikkhunī, being corrupt, out of hatred and ill-will, taking up some small detail, a mere trace, of another aspect of a case, should accuse a bhikkhunī of a pārājikā Dhamma, thinking, “Perhaps I may cause her to fall away from this Brahmacariya,” then at a later time, whether being cross-examined or not being cross-examined, that case belongs to another aspect. A certain detail, a mere trace, has been taken up, and the bhikkhunī is established in hatred, this bhikkhunī incurs a first offense, a Dhamma that requires removal from the Saṅgha, a Saṅghādisesa.

Sikkhaṃpaccācikkhaṇasikkhāpadaṃ

The Renouncing-the-Training Training Rule

10.Yā pana bhikkhunī kupitā anattamanā evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘buddhaṃ paccācikkhāmi dhammaṃ paccācikkhāmi, saṅghaṃ paccācikkhāmi, sikkhaṃ paccācikkhāmi, kinnumāva samaṇiyo yā samaṇiyo sakyadhītaro, santaññāpi samaṇiyo lajjiniyo kukkuccikā sikkhākāmā, tāsāhaṃ santike brahmacariyaṃ carissāmī’’ti. Sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi evamassa vacanīyā ‘‘māyye kupitā anattamanā evaṃ avaca ‘buddhaṃ paccācikkhāmi, dhammaṃ paccācikkhāmi, saṅghaṃ paccācikkhāmi, sikkhaṃ paccācikkhāmi, kinnumāva samaṇiyo yā samaṇiyo sakyadhītaro, santaññāpi samaṇiyo lajjiniyo kukkuccikā sikkhākāmā, tāsāhaṃ santike brahmacariyaṃ carissāmī’ti, abhiramāyye, svākkhāto dhammo, cara brahmacariyaṃ sammā dukkhassa antakiriyāyā’’ti, evañca sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi vuccamānā tatheva paggaṇheyya, sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi yāvatatiyaṃ samanubhāsitabbā tassa paṭinissaggāya, yāvatatiyañce samanubhāsiyamānā taṃ paṭinissajjeyya, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ, no ce paṭinissajjeyya, ayampi bhikkhunī yāvatatiyakaṃ dhammaṃ āpannā nissāraṇīyaṃ saṅghādisesaṃ.

10. Furthermore, if a bhikkhunī, being angry and displeased, should say thus: “I renounce the Buddha, I renounce the Dhamma, I renounce the Saṅgha, I renounce the training. What are these female ascetics to me, these female ascetics who are daughters of the Sakyans? There are indeed other female ascetics who are conscientious, scrupulous, and desirous of training. I will live the Brahmacariya in their presence.” That bhikkhunī should be addressed by the bhikkhunīs thus: “Do not, venerable, being angry and displeased, speak thus: ‘I renounce the Buddha, I renounce the Dhamma, I renounce the Saṅgha, I renounce the training. What are these female ascetics to me, these female ascetics who are daughters of the Sakyans? There are indeed other female ascetics who are conscientious, scrupulous, and desirous of training. I will live the Brahmacariya in their presence.’ Take delight, venerable; the Dhamma is well-expounded. Live the Brahmacariya for the complete ending of suffering.” And if that bhikkhunī, being spoken to by the bhikkhunīs, should persist in the same behavior, that bhikkhunī should be formally admonished by the bhikkhunīs up to three times for the abandonment of that behavior. If, while being formally admonished up to three times, she should abandon that behavior, that is good. If she should not abandon it, this bhikkhunī incurs a Dhamma requiring up to three times (admonition), a Dhamma that requires removal from the Saṅgha, a Saṅghādisesa.

Adhikaraṇakupitasikkhāpadaṃ

The Offended-by-a-Case Training Rule

11.Yā pana bhikkhunī kismiñcideva adhikaraṇe paccākatā kupitā anattamanā evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘chandagāminiyo ca bhikkhuniyo, dosagāminiyo ca bhikkhuniyo, mohagāminiyo ca bhikkhuniyo, bhayagāminiyo ca bhikkhuniyo’’ti, sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi evamassa vacanīyā ‘‘māyye, kismiñcideva adhikaraṇe paccākatā kupitā anattamanā evaṃ avaca ‘chandagāminiyo ca bhikkhuniyo, dosagāminiyo ca bhikkhuniyo, mohagāminiyo ca bhikkhuniyo, bhayagāminiyo ca bhikkhuniyo’ti, ayyā kho chandāpi gaccheyya, dosāpi gaccheyya, mohāpi gaccheyya, bhayāpi gaccheyyā’’ti. Evañca sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi vuccamānā tatheva paggaṇheyya, sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi yāvatatiyaṃ samanubhāsitabbā tassa paṭinissaggāya, yāvatatiyañce samanubhāsiyamānā taṃ paṭinissajjeyya, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ, no ce paṭinissajjeyya, ayampi bhikkhunī yāvatatiyakaṃ dhammaṃ āpannā nissāraṇīyaṃ saṅghādisesaṃ.

11. Furthermore, if a bhikkhunī, being displeased and offended by some case, should say thus: “The bhikkhunīs are partial to desire, the bhikkhunīs are partial to hatred, the bhikkhunīs are partial to delusion, the bhikkhunīs are partial to fear,” that bhikkhunī should be addressed by the bhikkhunīs thus: “Do not, venerable, being displeased and offended by some case, speak thus: ‘The bhikkhunīs are partial to desire, the bhikkhunīs are partial to hatred, the bhikkhunīs are partial to delusion, the bhikkhunīs are partial to fear.’ A venerable one might be influenced by desire, might be influenced by hatred, might be influenced by delusion, might be influenced by fear.” And if that bhikkhunī, being spoken to by the bhikkhunīs, should persist in the same behavior, that bhikkhunī should be formally admonished by the bhikkhunīs up to three times for the abandonment of that behavior. If, while being formally admonished up to three times, she should abandon that behavior, that is good. If she should not abandon it, this bhikkhunī incurs a Dhamma requiring up to three times (admonition), a Dhamma that requires removal from the Saṅgha, a Saṅghādisesa.

Pāpasamācārapaṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ

The First Bad-Practice Training Rule

12.Bhikkhuniyo paneva saṃsaṭṭhā viharanti pāpācārā pāpasaddā pāpasilokā bhikkhunisaṅghassa vihesikā aññamaññissā vajjappaṭicchādikā, tā bhikkhuniyo bhikkhunīhi evamassu vacanīyā ‘‘bhaginiyo kho saṃsaṭṭhā viharanti pāpācārā pāpasaddā pāpasilokā bhikkhunisaṅghassa vihesikā aññamaññissā vajjappaṭicchādikā, viviccathāyye, vivekaññeva bhaginīnaṃ saṅgho vaṇṇetī’’ti, evañca tā bhikkhuniyo bhikkhunīhi vuccamānā tatheva paggaṇheyyuṃ, tā bhikkhuniyo bhikkhunīhi yāvatatiyaṃ samanubhāsitabbā tassa paṭinissaggāya, yāvatatiyañce samanubhāsiyamānā taṃ paṭinissajjeyyuṃ, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ, no ce paṭinissajjeyyuṃ, imāpi bhikkhuniyo yāvatatiyakaṃ dhammaṃ āpannā nissāraṇīyaṃ saṅghādisesaṃ.

12. If, moreover, bhikkhunīs live together in close association, of bad conduct, of bad repute, of bad renown, causing distress to the Saṅgha of bhikkhunīs, mutually envious, concealing each other’s faults, those bhikkhunīs should be addressed by the bhikkhunīs thus: “Sisters, you live together in close association, of bad conduct, of bad repute, of bad renown, causing distress to the Saṅgha of bhikkhunīs, mutually envious, concealing each other’s faults. Live separately, venerables; the Saṅgha praises separation for the sisters.” And if those bhikkhunīs, being spoken to by the bhikkhunīs, should persist in the same behavior, those bhikkhunīs should be formally admonished by the bhikkhunīs up to three times for the abandonment of that behavior. If, while being formally admonished up to three times, they should abandon that behavior, that is good. If they should not abandon it, these bhikkhunīs incur a Dhamma requiring up to three times (admonition), a Dhamma that requires removal from the Saṅgha, a Saṅghādisesa.

Pāpasamācāradutiyasikkhāpadaṃ

The Second Bad-Practice Training Rule

13.Yā pana bhikkhunī evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘saṃsaṭṭhāva, ayye, tumhe viharatha, mā tumhe nānā viharittha, santi saṅghe aññāpi bhikkhuniyo evācārā evaṃsaddā evaṃsilokā bhikkhunisaṅghassa vihesikā aññamaññissā vajjappaṭicchādikā, tā saṅgho na kiñci āha tumhaññeva saṅgho uññāya paribhavena akkhantiyā vebhassiyā dubbalyā evamāha – ‘bhaginiyo kho saṃsaṭṭhā viharanti pāpācārā pāpasaddā pāpasilokā bhikkhunisaṅghassa vihesikā aññamaññissā vajjappaṭicchādikā, viviccathāyye, vivekaññeva bhaginīnaṃ saṅgho vaṇṇetī’’’ti, sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi evamassa vacanīyā ‘‘māyye, evaṃ avaca, saṃsaṭṭhāva ayye tumhe viharatha, mā tumhe nānā viharittha, santi saṅghe aññāpi bhikkhuniyo evācārā evaṃsaddā evaṃsilokā bhikkhunisaṅghassa vihesikā aññamaññissā vajjappaṭicchādikā, tā saṅgho na kiñci āha, tumhaññeva saṅgho uññāya paribhavena akkhantiyā vebhassiyā dubbalyā evamāha – ‘bhaginiyo kho saṃsaṭṭhā viharanti pāpācārā pāpasaddā pāpasilokā bhikkhunisaṅghassa vihesikā aññamaññissā vajjappaṭicchādikā, viviccathāyye, vivekaññeva bhaginīnaṃ saṅgho vaṇṇetī’’’ti, evañca sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi vuccamānā tatheva paggaṇheyya, sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi yāvatatiyaṃ samanubhāsitabbā tassa paṭinissaggāya, yāvatatiyañce samanubhāsiyamānā taṃ paṭinissajjeyya, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ, no ce paṭinissajjeyya, ayampi bhikkhunī yāvatatiyakaṃ dhammaṃ āpannā nissāraṇīyaṃ saṅghādisesaṃ.

13. If a bhikkhunī should say thus: “You live together in close association, venerables; do not live separately. There are other bhikkhunīs in the Saṅgha who are of such conduct, of such repute, of such renown, causing distress to the Saṅgha of bhikkhunīs, mutually envious, concealing each other’s faults. The Saṅgha says nothing to them. It is to you alone that the Saṅgha speaks thus out of contempt, disrespect, impatience, weakness: ‘Sisters, you live together in close association, of bad conduct, of bad repute, of bad renown, causing distress to the Saṅgha of bhikkhunīs, mutually envious, concealing each other’s faults. Live separately, venerables; the Saṅgha praises separation for the sisters,’” that bhikkhunī should be addressed by the bhikkhunīs thus: “Do not, venerable, speak thus: ‘You live together in close association, venerables; do not live separately. There are other bhikkhunīs in the Saṅgha who are of such conduct, of such repute, of such renown, causing distress to the Saṅgha of bhikkhunīs, mutually envious, concealing each other’s faults. The Saṅgha says nothing to them. It is to you alone that the Saṅgha speaks thus out of contempt, disrespect, impatience, weakness: ‘Sisters, you live together in close association, of bad conduct, of bad repute, of bad renown, causing distress to the Saṅgha of bhikkhunīs, mutually envious, concealing each other’s faults. Live separately, venerables; the Saṅgha praises separation for the sisters.’” And if that bhikkhunī, being spoken to by the bhikkhunīs, should persist in the same behavior, that bhikkhunī should be formally admonished by the bhikkhunīs up to three times for the abandonment of that behavior. If, while being formally admonished up to three times, she should abandon that behavior, that is good. If she should not abandon it, this bhikkhunī incurs a Dhamma requiring up to three times (admonition), a Dhamma that requires removal from the Saṅgha, a Saṅghādisesa.

Saṅghabhedakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Saṅgha-Breaking Training Rule

14.Yā pana bhikkhunī samaggassa saṅghassa bhedāya parakkameyya, bhedanasaṃvattanikaṃ vā adhikaraṇaṃ samādāya paggayha tiṭṭheyya, sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi evamassa vacanīyā ‘‘māyyā, samaggassa saṅghassa bhedāya parakkami, bhedanasaṃvattanikaṃ vā adhikaraṇaṃ samādāya paggayha aṭṭhāsi, sametāyyā, saṅghena, samaggo hi saṅgho sammodamāno avivadamāno ekuddeso phāsu viharatī’’ti. Evañca sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi vuccamānā tatheva paggaṇheyya, sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi yāvatatiyaṃ samanubhāsitabbā tassa paṭinissaggāya, yāvatatiyañce samanubhāsiyamānā taṃ paṭinissajjeyya, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. No ce paṭinissajjeyya, ayampi bhikkhunī yāvatatiyakaṃ dhammaṃ āpannā nissāraṇīyaṃ saṅghādisesaṃ.

14. Furthermore, if a bhikkhunī should strive for the breaking up of a Saṅgha that is in concord, or should persist in upholding a matter that leads to division, that bhikkhunī should be addressed by the bhikkhunīs thus: “Do not, venerable, strive for the breaking up of a Saṅgha that is in concord, or persist in upholding a matter that leads to division. May the venerable one be reconciled with the Saṅgha; for a Saṅgha in concord, rejoicing, without dispute, being of one teaching, dwells in comfort.” And if that bhikkhunī, being spoken to by the bhikkhunīs, should persist in the same behavior, that bhikkhunī should be formally admonished by the bhikkhunīs up to three times for the abandonment of that behavior. If, while being formally admonished up to three times, she should abandon that behavior, that is good. If she should not abandon it, this bhikkhunī incurs a Dhamma requiring up to three times (admonition), a Dhamma that requires removal from the Saṅgha, a Saṅghādisesa.

Bhedānuvattakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Following-a-Divider Training Rule

15.Tassāyeva kho pana bhikkhuniyā bhikkhuniyo honti anuvattikā vaggavādikā ekā vā dve vā tisso vā, tā evaṃ vadeyyuṃ ‘‘māyyāyo, etaṃ bhikkhuniṃ kiñci avacuttha dhammavādinī cesā bhikkhunī, vinayavādinī cesā bhikkhunī, amhākañcesā bhikkhunī chandañca ruciñca ādāya voharati, jānāti, no bhāsati, amhākampetaṃ khamatī’’ti, tā bhikkhuniyo bhikkhunīhi evamassu vacanīyā ‘‘māyyāyo, evaṃ avacuttha, na cesā bhikkhunī dhammavādinī, na cesā bhikkhunī vinayavādinī, māyyānampi saṅghabhedo ruccittha, sametāyyānaṃ saṅghena, samaggo hi saṅgho sammodamāno avivadamāno ekuddeso phāsu viharatī’’ti, evañca tā bhikkhuniyo bhikkhunīhi vuccamānā tatheva paggaṇheyyuṃ, tā bhikkhuniyo bhikkhunīhi yāvatatiyaṃ samanubhāsitabbā tassa paṭinissaggāya, yāvatatiyañce samanubhāsiyamānā taṃ paṭinissajjeyyuṃ. Iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. No ce paṭinissajjeyyuṃ, imāpi bhikkhuniyo yāvatatiyakaṃ dhammaṃ āpannā nissāraṇīyaṃ saṅghādisesaṃ.

15. If, indeed, that same bhikkhuni has bhikkhunis who follow her, who are on her side, one, two, or three, they might say thus: “Revered ones, do not say anything to this bhikkhuni. This bhikkhuni is a speaker of the Dhamma, this bhikkhuni is a speaker of the Vinaya, and this bhikkhuni speaks, knows, and expresses taking our approval and liking; and this is pleasing to us.” These bhikkhunis should be told by the bhikkhunis thus: “Revered ones, do not speak thus. This bhikkhuni is not a speaker of the Dhamma, this bhikkhuni is not a speaker of the Vinaya. May the Sangha not be divided for the revered ones; may the revered ones be in harmony with the Sangha, for a Sangha in harmony, rejoicing, not quarreling, being of one purpose, dwells in comfort.” And if these bhikkhunis, being spoken to by the bhikkhunis thus, still persist in that same attitude, these bhikkhunis should be formally addressed by the bhikkhunis up to three times for the relinquishment of that attitude. If, being formally addressed up to three times, they should relinquish that attitude, that is skillful. If they should not relinquish it, these bhikkhunis also, having committed a dhamma that extends up to the third time, are subject to expulsion, entailing a Sanghādisesa.

Dubbacasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sikkhāpada on Being Difficult to Admonish

16.Bhikkhunī paneva dubbacajātikā hoti uddesapariyāpannesu sikkhāpadesu bhikkhunīhi sahadhammikaṃ vuccamānā attānaṃ avacanīyaṃ karoti ‘‘mā maṃ ayyāyo kiñci avacuttha kalyāṇaṃ vā pāpakaṃ vā, ahampāyyāyo, na kiñci vakkhāmi kalyāṇaṃ vā pāpakaṃ vā, viramathāyyāyo, mama vacanāyā’’ti, sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi evamassa vacanīyā ‘‘māyyā, attānaṃ avacanīyaṃ akāsi, vacanīyameva, ayyā, attānaṃ karotu, ayyāpi bhikkhuniyo vadatu sahadhammena, bhikkhuniyopi ayyaṃ vakkhanti sahadhammena, evaṃ saṃvaddhā hi tassa bhagavato parisā yadidaṃ aññamaññavacanena aññamaññavuṭṭhāpanenā’’ti. Evañca sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi vuccamānā tatheva paggaṇheyya, sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi yāvatatiyaṃ samanubhāsitabbā tassa paṭinissaggāya, yāvatatiyañce samanubhāsiyamānā taṃ paṭinissajjeyya, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. No ce paṭinissajjeyya, ayampi bhikkhunī yāvatatiyakaṃ dhammaṃ āpannā nissāraṇīyaṃ saṅghādisesaṃ.

16. If, indeed, a bhikkhuni is by nature difficult to admonish, when being spoken to by the bhikkhunis in accordance with the Dhamma regarding the sikkhāpadas that come up in the uddesa and pariyāpanna, she makes herself unadmonishable, saying: “Revered ones, do not say anything to me, either good or bad. I also will not say anything to the revered ones, either good or bad. Revered ones, desist from admonishing me.” That bhikkhuni should be told by the bhikkhunis thus: “Revered one, do not make yourself unadmonishable. Let the revered one make herself admonishable. Let the revered one also speak to the bhikkhunis in accordance with the Dhamma, and the bhikkhunis will speak to the revered one in accordance with the Dhamma, for in this way the following of that Blessed One grows, that is, by mutual admonishment and mutual assistance.” And if that bhikkhuni, being spoken to by the bhikkhunis thus, still persists in that same attitude, that bhikkhuni should be formally addressed by the bhikkhunis up to three times for the relinquishment of that attitude. If, being formally addressed up to three times, she should relinquish that attitude, that is skillful. If she should not relinquish it, this bhikkhuni also, having committed a dhamma that extends up to the third time, is subject to expulsion, entailing a Sanghādisesa.

Kuladūsakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sikkhāpada on Corrupting Families

17.Bhikkhunī paneva aññataraṃ gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā upanissāya viharati kuladūsikā pāpasamācārā, tassā kho pāpakā samācārā dissanti ceva suyyanti ca, kulāni ca tāya duṭṭhāni dissanti ceva suyyanti ca, sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi evamassa vacanīyā ‘‘ayyā, kho kuladūsikā pāpasamācārā, ayyāya kho pāpakā samācārā dissanti ceva suyyanti ca, kulāni cāyyāya, duṭṭhāni dissanti ceva suyyanti ca, pakkamatāyyā imamhā āvāsā, alaṃ te idha vāsenā’’ti. Evañca sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi vuccamānā tā bhikkhuniyo evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘chandagāminiyo ca bhikkhuniyo, dosagāminiyo ca bhikkhuniyo, mohagāminiyo ca bhikkhuniyo, bhayagāminiyo ca bhikkhuniyo, tādisikāya āpattiyā ekaccaṃ pabbājenti ekaccaṃ na pabbājentī’’ti, sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi evamassa vacanīyā ‘‘māyyā, evaṃ avaca, na ca bhikkhuniyo chandagāminiyo, na ca bhikkhuniyo dosagāminiyo, na ca bhikkhuniyo mohagāminiyo, na ca bhikkhuniyo bhayagāminiyo, ayyā kho kuladūsikā pāpasamācārā, ayyāya kho pāpakā samācārā dissanti ceva suyyanti ca, kulāni cāyyāya duṭṭhāni dissanti ceva suyyanti ca, pakkamatāyyā, imamhā āvāsā alaṃ te idha vāsenā’’ti. Evañca sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi vuccamānā tatheva paggaṇheyya, sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi yāvatatiyaṃ samanubhāsitabbā tassa paṭinissaggāya, yāvatatiyañce samanubhāsiyamānā taṃ paṭinissajjeyya, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. No ce paṭinissajjeyya, ayampi bhikkhunī yāvatatiyakaṃ dhammaṃ āpannā nissāraṇīyaṃ saṅghādisesaṃ.

17. If, indeed, a bhikkhuni dwells dependent upon some village or town, corrupting families, of evil conduct, and her evil conduct is both seen and heard, and families corrupted by her are both seen and heard, that bhikkhuni should be told by the bhikkhunis thus: “Revered one, you are corrupting families, of evil conduct, and your evil conduct is both seen and heard, and families corrupted by you are both seen and heard. Depart, revered one, from this dwelling; enough of dwelling here for you.” And if that bhikkhuni, being spoken to by the bhikkhunis thus, should say to those bhikkhunis thus: “The bhikkhunis are going by favoritism, the bhikkhunis are going by aversion, the bhikkhunis are going by delusion, the bhikkhunis are going by fear; they expel some for such an offense and do not expel others,” that bhikkhuni should be told by the bhikkhunis thus: “Revered one, do not speak thus. The bhikkhunis are not going by favoritism, the bhikkhunis are not going by aversion, the bhikkhunis are not going by delusion, the bhikkhunis are not going by fear. You, revered one, are corrupting families, of evil conduct, and your evil conduct is both seen and heard, and families corrupted by you are both seen and heard. Depart, revered one, from this dwelling; enough of dwelling here for you.” And if that bhikkhuni, being spoken to by the bhikkhunis thus, still persists in that same attitude, that bhikkhuni should be formally addressed by the bhikkhunis up to three times for the relinquishment of that attitude. If, being formally addressed up to three times, she should relinquish that attitude, that is skillful. If she should not relinquish it, this bhikkhuni also, having committed a dhamma that extends up to the third time, is subject to expulsion, entailing a Sanghādisesa.

Uddiṭṭhā kho ayyāyo sattarasa saṅghādisesā dhammā nava paṭhamāpattikā, aṭṭha yāvatatiyakā,

The seventeen Sanghādisesa dhammas have been recited, revered ones, nine with the first offense, eight that extend up to the third time.

Yesaṃ bhikkhunī aññataraṃ vā aññataraṃ vā āpajjati, tāya bhikkhuniyā ubhatosaṅghe pakkhamānattaṃ caritabbaṃ. Ciṇṇamānattā bhikkhunī yattha siyā vīsatigaṇo bhikkhunisaṅgho, tattha sā bhikkhunī abbhetabbā. Ekāyapi ce ūno vīsatigaṇo bhikkhunisaṅgho taṃ bhikkhuniṃ abbheyya, sā ca bhikkhunī anabbhitā, tā ca bhikkhuniyo gārayhā, ayaṃ tattha sāmīci. Tatthāyyāyo pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, dutiyampi, pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, tatiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, parisuddhetthāyyāyo, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmīti.

For a bhikkhuni who commits one or another of them, that bhikkhuni should undergo pakkhamānatta in both Sanghas. Having completed the manatta, that bhikkhuni should be reinstated in a Sangha of twenty bhikkhunis. If a Sangha of bhikkhunis numbering less than twenty should reinstate that bhikkhuni, that bhikkhuni is not reinstated, and those bhikkhunis are blameworthy; this is the proper procedure in that case. Here, revered ones, I ask you, are you pure in this matter? A second time I ask, are you pure in this matter? A third time I ask, are you pure in this matter? You are pure in this matter, revered ones; therefore you are silent. Thus I understand it.

Saṅghādiseso niṭṭhito.

The Sanghādisesa is finished.

Nissaggiya pācittiyā
Nissaggiya Pācittiyas

Ime kho panāyyāyo tiṃsa nissaggiyā pācittiyā

These thirty Nissaggiya Pācittiya dhammas, revered ones,

Dhammā uddesaṃ āgacchanti.

come up for recitation.

Pattasannicayasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sikkhāpada on Accumulating Bowls

1.Yā pana bhikkhunī pattasannicayaṃ kareyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

1.If any bhikkhuni should accumulate bowls, it is to be forfeited and entails expiation.

Akālacīvarabhājanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sikkhāpada on Dispensing Untimely Robes

2.Yā pana bhikkhunī akālacīvaraṃ ‘‘kālacīvara’’nti adhiṭṭhahitvā bhājāpeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

2.If any bhikkhuni, having designated an untimely robe as a "timely robe", should dispense it, it is to be forfeited and entails expiation.

Cīvaraparivattanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sikkhāpada on Exchanging Robes

3.Yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ cīvaraṃ parivattetvā sā pacchā evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘handāyye, tuyhaṃ cīvaraṃ, āhara metaṃ cīvaraṃ, yaṃ tuyhaṃ tuyhamevetaṃ, yaṃ mayhaṃ mayhamevetaṃ, āhara metaṃ cīvaraṃ, sakaṃ paccāharā’’ti acchindeyya vā acchindāpeyya vā, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

3.If any bhikkhuni, having exchanged a robe with a bhikkhuni, should later speak thus: "Come, revered one, your robe; bring me this robe, what is yours is yours, what is mine is mine, bring me this robe, return what is your own," and either seize it back or cause it to be seized back, it is to be forfeited and entails expiation.

Aññaviññāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sikkhāpada on Requesting One Thing and Requesting Another

4.Yā pana bhikkhunī aññaṃ viññāpetvā aññaṃ viññāpeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

4.If any bhikkhuni, having requested one thing, should request another thing, it is to be forfeited and entails expiation.

Aññacetāpana sikkhāpadaṃ

The Sikkhāpada on Having One Person Procure One Thing and Another Person Procure Another

5.Yā pana bhikkhunī aññaṃ cetāpetvā aññaṃ cetāpeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

5.If any bhikkhuni, having one person procure one thing, should have another person procure another thing, it is to be forfeited and entails expiation.

Paṭhamasaṅghikacetāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

The First Sikkhāpada on Having Something Procured with Sangha Property

6.Yā pana bhikkhunī aññadatthikena parikkhārena aññuddisikena saṅghikena aññaṃ cetāpeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

6.If any bhikkhuni should have something procured with Sangha property that is for one purpose and designated for another, it is to be forfeited and entails expiation.

Dutiyasaṅghikacetāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Second Sikkhāpada on Having Something Procured with Sangha Property

7.Yā pana bhikkhunī aññadatthikena parikkhārena aññuddisikena saṅghikena saññācikena aññaṃ cetāpeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

7.If any bhikkhuni should have something procured with Sangha property that is for one purpose and designated for another, with collusion, it is to be forfeited and entails expiation.

Paṭhamagaṇikacetāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

The First Sikkhāpada on Having Something Procured with Group Property

8.Yā pana bhikkhunī aññadatthikena parikkhārena aññuddisikena mahājanikena aññaṃ cetāpeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

8.If any bhikkhuni should have something procured with group property that is for one purpose and designated for another, belonging to the general public, it is to be forfeited and entails expiation.

Dutiyagaṇikacetāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Second Sikkhāpada on Having Something Procured with Group Property

9.Yā pana bhikkhunī aññadatthikena parikkhārena aññuddisikena mahājanikena saññācikena aññaṃ cetāpeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

9.If any bhikkhuni should have something procured with group property that is for one purpose and designated for another, belonging to the general public, with collusion, it is to be forfeited and entails expiation.

Puggalikacetāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sikkhāpada on Having Something Procured with Individual Property

10.Yā pana bhikkhunī aññadatthikena parikkhārena aññuddisikena puggalikena saññācikena aññaṃ cetāpeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

10.If any bhikkhuni should have something procured with individual property that is for one purpose and designated for another, with collusion, it is to be forfeited and entails expiation.

Pattavaggo paṭhamo.

The Bowl Chapter, the first.

Garupāvuraṇasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sikkhāpada on Heavy Cloth for a Covering

11.Garupāvuraṇaṃ pana bhikkhuniyā cetāpentiyā catukkaṃsaparamaṃ cetāpetabbaṃ. Tato ce uttari cetāpeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

11.When a bhikkhuni has heavy cloth for a covering procured, it should be procured to the extent of four aṃsas at most. If she should have it procured to a greater extent than that, it is to be forfeited and entails expiation.

Lahupāvuraṇasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sikkhāpada on Light Cloth for a Covering

12.Lahupāvuraṇaṃ pana bhikkhuniyā cetāpentiyā aḍḍhateyyakaṃsaparamaṃ cetāpetabbaṃ. Tato ce uttari cetāpeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

12.When a bhikkhuni has light cloth for a covering procured, it should be procured to the extent of three and a half aṃsas at most. If she should have it procured to a greater extent than that, it is to be forfeited and entails expiation.

Kathinasikkhāpadaṃ

The Kathina Sikkhāpada

13.Niṭṭhitacīvarasmiṃ bhikkhuniyā ubbhatasmiṃ kathine dasāhaparamaṃ atirekacīvaraṃ dhāretabbaṃ. Taṃ atikkāmentiyā, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

13.When the kathina has been withdrawn, a bhikkhuni may keep an extra robe for ten days at most. Exceeding that, it is to be forfeited and entails expiation.

Udositasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sikkhāpada on Being Separated

14.Niṭṭhitacīvarasmiṃ bhikkhuniyā ubbhatasmiṃ kathine ekarattampi ce bhikkhunī ticīvarena vippavaseyya, aññatra bhikkhunisammutiyā nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

14.When the kathina has been withdrawn, if a bhikkhuni should spend even one night separated from her three robes, except with the bhikkhunis' consent, it is to be forfeited and entails expiation.

Akālacīvarasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sikkhāpada on Untimely Robes

15.Niṭṭhitacīvarasmiṃ bhikkhuniyā ubbhatasmiṃ kathine bhikkhuniyā paneva akālacīvaraṃ uppajjeyya, ākaṅkhamānāya bhikkhuniyā paṭiggahetabbaṃ, paṭiggahetvā khippameva kāretabbaṃ, no cassa pāripūri, māsaparamaṃ tāya bhikkhuniyā taṃ cīvaraṃ nikkhipitabbaṃ ūnassa pāripūriyā satiyā paccāsāya. Tato ce uttari nikkhipeyya satiyāpi paccāsāya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

15.When the kathina has been withdrawn, if an untimely robe should arise for a bhikkhuni, the bhikkhuni, if she wishes, may accept it. Having accepted it, she should have it made quickly. If it is not completed for her, that bhikkhuni may keep that robe for a month at most, for the completion of what is lacking, with expectation. If she should keep it longer than that, even with expectation, it is to be forfeited and entails expiation.

Aññātakaviññattisikkhāpadaṃ

The Sikkhāpada on Requesting from Unknown People

16.Yā pana bhikkhunī aññātakaṃ gahapatiṃ vā gahapatāniṃ vā cīvaraṃ viññāpeyya aññatra samayā, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ. Tatthāyaṃ samayo acchinnacīvarā vā hoti bhikkhunī, naṭṭhacīvarā vā, ayaṃ tattha samayo.

16.If any bhikkhuni should request a robe from an unknown householder or his wife, except on the occasion of need, it is to be forfeited and entails expiation. Here this is the occasion of need: either the bhikkhuni's robe has been stolen, or her robe has been destroyed. This is the occasion of need in that case.

Tatuttarisikkhāpadaṃ

The Sikkhāpada on Taking More Than the Limit

17.Tañce aññātako gahapati vā gahapatānī vā bahūhi cīvarehi abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāreyya, santaruttaraparamaṃ tāya bhikkhuniyā tato cīvaraṃ sāditabbaṃ. Tato ce uttari sādiyeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

17.If that unknown householder or his wife should invite her to accept an abundance of robes, that bhikkhuni may accept from it as much cloth as is needed for an upper and lower robe. If she should accept more than that, it is to be forfeited and entails expiation.

Paṭhamaupakkhaṭasikkhāpadaṃ

The First Sikkhāpada on Cloth Procured in Advance

18.Bhikkhuniṃ paneva uddissa aññātakassa gahapatissa vā gahapatāniyā vā cīvaracetāpannaṃ upakkhaṭaṃ hoti ‘‘iminā cīvaracetāpannena cīvaraṃ cetāpetvā itthannāmaṃ bhikkhuniṃ cīvarena acchādessāmī’’ti. Tatra cesā bhikkhunī pubbe appavāritā upasaṅkamitvā cīvare vikappaṃ āpajjeyya ‘‘sādhu vata, maṃ āyasmā iminā cīvaracetāpannena evarūpaṃ vā evarūpaṃ vā cīvaraṃ cetāpetvā acchādehī’’ti kalyāṇakamyataṃ upādāya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

18.If, for a bhikkhuni, cloth procured in advance for the procuring of a robe is prepared for an unknown householder or his wife, (thinking): "Having had a robe procured with this cloth procured in advance for a robe, I will clothe the bhikkhuni of such-and-such a name with a robe," and if that bhikkhuni, not having been previously invited, should approach and make an issue about the robe, (saying): "It would be good if the venerable one, with this cloth procured in advance for a robe, having had such-and-such a robe procured, would clothe me," out of a desire for something fine, it is to be forfeited and entails expiation.

Dutiyaupakkhaṭasikkhāpadaṃ

The Second Sikkhāpada on Cloth Procured in Advance

19.Bhikkhuniṃ paneva uddissa ubhinnaṃ aññātakānaṃ gahapatīnaṃ vā gahapatānīnaṃ vā paccekacīvaracetāpannāni upakkhaṭāni honti ‘‘imehi mayaṃ paccekacīvaracetāpannehi paccekacīvarāni cetāpetvā itthannāmaṃ bhikkhuniṃ cīvarehi acchādessāmā’’ti. Tatra cesā bhikkhūnī pubbe appavāritā upasaṅkamitvā cīvare vikappaṃ āpajjeyya ‘‘sādhu vata maṃ āyasmanto imehi paccekacīvaracetāpannehi evarūpaṃ vā evarūpaṃ vā cīvaraṃ cetāpetvā acchādetha ubhova santā ekenā’’ti kalyāṇakamyataṃ upādāya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

19.If, for a bhikkhuni, cloths procured in advance for individual robes are prepared for two unknown householders or their wives, (thinking): "With these cloths procured in advance for individual robes, having had individual robes procured, we will clothe the bhikkhuni of such-and-such a name with robes," and if that bhikkhuni, not having been previously invited, should approach and make an issue about the robe, (saying): "It would be good if the venerable ones, with these cloths procured in advance for individual robes, having had such-and-such a robe procured, would clothe me, both being content with one," out of a desire for something fine, it is to be forfeited and entails expiation.

Rājasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sikkhāpada on Royalty

20.Bhikkhuniṃ paneva uddissa rājā vā rājabhoggo vā brāhmaṇo vā gahapatiko vā dūtena cīvaracetāpannaṃ pahiṇeyya ‘‘iminā cīvaracetāpannena cīvaraṃ cetāpetvā itthannāmaṃ bhikkhuniṃ cīvarena acchādehī’’ti. So ce dūto taṃ bhikkhuniṃ upasaṅkamitvā evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘idaṃ kho, ayye, ayyaṃ uddissa cīvaracetāpannaṃ ābhataṃ, paṭiggaṇhātāyyā cīvaracetāpanna’’nti. Tāya bhikkhuniyā so dūto evamassa vacanīyo ‘‘na kho mayaṃ, āvuso, cīvaracetāpannaṃ paṭiggaṇhāma, cīvarañca kho mayaṃ paṭiggaṇhāma kālena kappiya’’nti. So ce dūto taṃ bhikkhuniṃ evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘atthi panāyyāya, koci veyyāvaccakaro’’ti, cīvaratthikāya, bhikkhave, bhikkhuniyā veyyāvaccakaro niddisitabbo ārāmiko vā upāsako vā ‘‘eso kho, āvuso, bhikkhunīnaṃ veyyāvaccakaro’’ti. So ce dūto taṃ veyyāvaccakaraṃ saññāpetvā taṃ bhikkhuniṃ upasaṅkamitvā evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘yaṃ kho, ayye, ayyā veyyāvaccakaraṃ niddisi, saññatto so mayā, upasaṅkamatāyyā kālena, cīvarena taṃ acchādessatī’’ti. Cīvaratthikāya, bhikkhave, bhikkhuniyā veyyāvaccakaro upasaṅkamitvā dvattikkhattuṃ codetabbo sāretabbo ‘‘attho me, āvuso, cīvarenā’’ti, dvattikkhattuṃ codayamānā sārayamānā taṃ cīvaraṃ abhinipphādeyya, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ, no ce abhinipphādeyya, catukkhattuṃ pañcakkhattuṃ chakkhattuparamaṃ tuṇhībhūtāya uddissa ṭhātabbaṃ, catukkhattuṃ pañcakkhattuṃ chakkhattuparamaṃ tuṇhībhūtā uddissa tiṭṭhamānā taṃ cīvaraṃ abhinipphādeyya, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. Tato ce uttari vāyamamānā taṃ cīvaraṃ abhinipphādeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ. No ce abhinipphādeyya, yatassā cīvaracetāpannaṃ ābhataṃ, tattha sāmaṃ vā gantabbaṃ, dūto vā pāhetabbo ‘‘yaṃ kho tumhe āyasmanto bhikkhuniṃ uddissa cīvaracetāpannaṃ pahiṇittha, na taṃ tassā bhikkhuniyā kiñci atthaṃ anubhoti, yuñjantāyasmanto sakaṃ, mā vo sakaṃ vinassā’’ti, ayaṃ tattha sāmīci.

20. If a king, a royal official, a Brahmin, or a householder should send cloth-value for robes by a messenger, with the message, "Having had a robe made with this cloth-value for robes, clothe such-and-such a bhikkhuni with a robe," and if that messenger should approach that bhikkhuni and speak thus, "Venerable, this cloth-value for robes has been brought for the venerable one, accept the cloth-value for robes," that bhikkhuni should speak thus to that messenger: "We, friend, do not accept cloth-value for robes, but we do accept a robe at the proper time when it is allowable." If that messenger should say to that bhikkhuni, "Does the venerable one have any attendant?" A bhikkhuni who needs a robe, monks, should indicate an attendant, either a monastery attendant or a lay follower, saying, "This one, friend, is an attendant of the bhikkhunis." If that messenger, having informed that attendant, should approach that bhikkhuni and say, "The attendant whom the venerable one indicated, I have informed him; let the venerable one approach him at the proper time; he will clothe you with a robe," a bhikkhuni who needs a robe, monks, should urge the attendant two or three times, reminding him, "I need a robe, friend." If, when she is urging and reminding him two or three times, that robe is produced, that is skillful. If it is not produced, she may stand silently intending (to receive robe) near him four, five, or six times at most; if, when she is standing silently intending (to receive robe) near him four, five, or six times at most, that robe is produced, that is skillful. If, striving further than that, she should have that robe produced, it is to be forfeited and confessed. If it is not produced, she herself should go, or send a messenger to the place from which the cloth-value for robes was brought, (saying), "The cloth-value for robes that you venerable ones sent intending it for the bhikkhuni, it is of no benefit to that bhikkhuni. Let the venerable ones take back your own; let your own not be lost." This is proper behavior in that case.

Cīvaravaggo dutiyo.

The Second Chapter on Robes.

Rūpiyasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Money.

21.Yā pana bhikkhunī jātarūparajataṃ uggaṇheyya vā uggaṇhāpeyya vā upanikkhittaṃ vā sādiyeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

21. Whatever bhikkhuni should receive gold or silver, or have it received, or approve of it being kept in deposit, it is to be forfeited and confessed.

Rūpiyasaṃvohārasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Exchanging Money.

22.Yā pana bhikkhunī nānappakārakaṃ rūpiyasaṃvohāraṃ samāpajjeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

22. Whatever bhikkhuni should engage in various kinds of monetary exchange, it is to be forfeited and confessed.

Kayavikkayasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Buying and Selling.

23.Yā pana bhikkhunī nānappakārakaṃ kayavikkayaṃ samāpajjeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

23. Whatever bhikkhuni should engage in various kinds of buying and selling, it is to be forfeited and confessed.

Ūnapañcabandhanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on a Bowl with Fewer Than Five Bonds.

24.Yā pana bhikkhunī ūnapañcabandhanena pattena aññaṃ navaṃ pattaṃ cetāpeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ. Tāya bhikkhuniyā so patto bhikkhuniparisāya nissajjitabbo, yo ca tassā bhikkhuniparisāya pattapariyanto, so tassā bhikkhuniyā padātabbo ‘‘ayaṃ te bhikkhuni patto yāvabhedanāya dhāretabbo’’ti, ayaṃ tattha sāmīci.

24. Whatever bhikkhuni should obtain a new bowl in exchange for a bowl with fewer than five bonds, it is to be forfeited and confessed. That bowl is to be forfeited by that bhikkhuni to the bhikkhuni Sangha, and whatever bowl is the last in the bhikkhuni Sangha's allocation, that is to be given to that bhikkhuni, (saying), "This is your bowl, bhikkhuni, to be kept until it is broken." This is proper behavior in that case.

Bhesajjasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Medicine.

25.Yāni kho pana tāni gilānānaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ paṭisāyanīyāni bhesajjāni, seyyathidaṃ – sappi navanītaṃ telaṃ madhu phāṇitaṃ, tāni paṭiggahetvā sattāhaparamaṃ sannidhikārakaṃ paribhuñjitabbāni. Taṃ atikkāmentiyā, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

25. Those medicines that are allowable for sick bhikkhunis, that is, ghee, fresh butter, oil, honey, and molasses—having received these, they may be stored and used for at most seven days. If she should exceed that, it is to be forfeited and confessed.

Cīvaraacchindanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Taking Back a Robe.

26.Yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhuniyā sāmaṃ cīvaraṃ datvā kupitā anattamanā acchindeyya vā acchindāpeyya vā, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

26. Whatever bhikkhuni, having herself given a robe to a bhikkhuni, should, being angry and displeased, take it back or have it taken back, it is to be forfeited and confessed.

Suttaviññattisikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Requesting Thread.

27.Yā pana bhikkhunī sāmaṃ suttaṃ viññāpetvā tantavāyehi cīvaraṃ vāyāpeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

27. Whatever bhikkhuni should herself request thread and have a robe woven by weavers, it is to be forfeited and confessed.

Mahāpesakārasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on a Large Order.

28.Bhikkhuniṃ paneva uddissa aññātako gahapati vā gahapatānī vā tantavāyehi cīvaraṃ vāyāpeyya, tatra cesā bhikkhunī pubbe appavāritā tantavāye upasaṅkamitvā cīvare vikappaṃ āpajjeyya ‘‘idaṃ kho āvuso cīvaraṃ maṃ uddissa viyyati, āyatañca karotha, vitthatañca appitañca suvītañca suppavāyitañca suvilekhitañca suvitacchitañca karotha, appeva nāma mayampi āyasmantānaṃ kiñcimattaṃ anupadajjeyyāmā’’ti, evañca sā bhikkhunī vatvā kiñcimattaṃ anupadajjeyya antamaso piṇḍapātamattampi, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

28. If an unknown householder or his wife should have a robe woven by weavers intending it for a bhikkhuni, and if that bhikkhuni, without having been previously told, should approach the weavers and make stipulations about the robe, (saying), "This robe, friends, is being woven intending it for me; make it long and wide, tight and well-woven, well-smoothed and well-finished. Perhaps we also might give some small thing to the venerable ones," and if that bhikkhuni, having spoken thus, should give some small thing, even only the amount of alms-food, it is to be forfeited and confessed.

Accekacīvarasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on an Emergency Robe.

29.Dasāhānāgataṃ kattikatemāsikapuṇṇamaṃ bhikkhuniyā paneva accekacīvaraṃ uppajjeyya, accekaṃ maññamānāya bhikkhuniyā paṭiggahetabbaṃ, paṭiggahetvā yāva cīvarakālasamayaṃ nikkhipitabbaṃ. Tato ce uttari nikkhipeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

29. If an emergency robe should arise for a bhikkhuni within the ten days before the Kattika full-moon of the robe-month, it may be accepted by the bhikkhuni who considers it an emergency, and having accepted it, it may be kept until robe-time. If she should keep it longer than that, it is to be forfeited and confessed.

Pariṇatasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Transforming.

30.Yā pana bhikkhunī jānaṃ saṅghikaṃ lābhaṃ pariṇataṃ attano pariṇāmeyya, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

30. Whatever bhikkhuni should knowingly transform a gain belonging to the Sangha into her own, it is to be forfeited and confessed.

Pattavaggo tatiyo.

The Third Chapter on Bowls.

Uddiṭṭhā kho, ayyāyo, tiṃsa nissaggiyā pācittiyā dhammā. Tatthāyyāyo, pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, dutiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, tatiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, parisuddhetthāyyāyo, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmīti.

The thirty Nissaggiya Pacittiya Dhammas have been recited, venerable ones. Therein, venerable ones, I ask you, are you pure in this? A second time I ask, are you pure in this? A third time I ask, are you pure in this? You are pure herein, venerable ones, therefore you are silent. Thus I understand it.

Nissaggiyapācittiyā niṭṭhitā.

The Nissaggiya Pacittiyas are finished.

Suddhapācittiyā
The Suddha Pacittiyas

Ime kho panāyyāyo, chasaṭṭhisatā pācittiyā

These one hundred and sixty-six Pacittiya

Dhammā uddesaṃ āgacchanti.

Dhammas come to the recitation.

Lasuṇasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Garlic.

1.Yā pana bhikkhunī lasuṇaṃ khādeyya pācittiyaṃ.

1. Whatever bhikkhuni should eat garlic, it is a pācittiya.

Sambādhalomasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Dense Hair.

2.Yā pana bhikkhunī sambādhe lomaṃ saṃharāpeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

2. Whatever bhikkhuni should have dense hair removed, it is a pācittiya.

Talaghātakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Striking the Palms.

3.Talaghātake pācittiyaṃ.

3. For striking the palms, it is a pācittiya.

Jatumaṭṭhakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Playing Jatumaṭṭhaka.

4.Jatumaṭṭhake pācittiyaṃ.

4. For playing Jatumaṭṭhaka, it is a pācittiya.

Udakasuddhikasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on a Water-scoop.

5.Udakasuddhikaṃ pana bhikkhuniyā ādiyamānāya dvaṅgulapabbaparamaṃ ādātabbaṃ. Taṃ atikkāmentiyā pācittiyaṃ.

5. When a bhikkhuni is obtaining a water-scoop, it may be obtained to a maximum of two fingerbreadths. If she should exceed that, it is a pācittiya.

Upatiṭṭhanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Attending.

6.Yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhussa bhuñjantassa pānīyena vā vidhūpanena vā upatiṭṭheyya, pācittiyaṃ.

6. Whatever bhikkhuni should attend upon a monk who is eating, with drinking water or a fan, it is a pācittiya.

Āmakadhaññasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Raw Grain.

7.Yā pana bhikkhunī āmakadhaññaṃ viññatvā vā viññāpetvā vā bhajjitvā vā bhajjāpetvā vā koṭṭetvā vā koṭṭāpetvā vā pacitvā vā pacāpetvā vā bhuñjeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

7. Whatever bhikkhuni should herself request or have requested, fry or have fried, pound or have pounded, cook or have cooked raw grain, and eat it, it is a pācittiya.

Paṭhamauccārachaḍḍanasikkhāpadaṃ

The First Training Rule on Throwing Excrement.

8.Yā pana bhikkhunī uccāraṃ vā passāvaṃ vā saṅkāraṃ vā vighāsaṃ vā tirokuṭṭe vā tiropākāre vā chaḍḍeyya vā chaḍḍāpeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

8. Whatever bhikkhuni should throw or have thrown excrement, urine, rubbish, or leftovers behind a wall or behind a fence, it is a pācittiya.

Dutiyauccārachaḍḍanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Second Training Rule on Throwing Excrement.

9.Yā pana bhikkhunī uccāraṃ vā passāvaṃ vā saṅkāraṃ vā vighāsaṃ vā harite chaḍḍeyya vā chaḍḍāpeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

9. Whatever bhikkhuni should throw or have thrown excrement, urine, rubbish, or leftovers on greenery, it is a pācittiya.

Naccagītasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Dancing and Singing.

10.Yā pana bhikkhunī naccaṃ vā gītaṃ vā vāditaṃ vā dassanāya gaccheyya, pācittiyaṃ.

10. Whatever bhikkhuni should go to see dancing, singing, or instrumental music, it is a pācittiya.

Lasuṇavaggo paṭhamo.

The First Chapter on Garlic.

Rattandhakārasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Darkness at Night.

11.Yā pana bhikkhunī rattandhakāre appadīpe purisena saddhiṃ ekenekā santiṭṭheyya vā sallapeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

11. Whatever bhikkhuni should stay or converse alone with a man in the darkness at night without a lamp, it is a pācittiya.

Paṭicchannokāsasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on a Covered Place.

12.Yā pana bhikkhunī paṭicchanne okāse purisena saddhiṃ ekenekā santiṭṭheyya vā sallapeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

12. Whatever bhikkhuni should stay or converse alone with a man in a covered place, it is a pācittiya.

Ajjhokāsasallapanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Conversing in the Open.

13.Yā pana bhikkhunī ajjhokāse purisena saddhiṃ ekenekā santiṭṭheyya vā sallapeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

13. Whatever bhikkhuni should stay or converse alone with a man in the open, it is a pācittiya.

Dutiyikauyyojanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on a Second Emissary.

14.Yā pana bhikkhunī rathikāya vā byūhe vā siṅghāṭake vā purisena saddhiṃ ekenekā santiṭṭheyya vā sallapeyya vā nikaṇṇikaṃ vā jappeyya dutiyikaṃ vā bhikkhuniṃ uyyojeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

14. Whatever bhikkhuni should stay or converse alone with a man in a road, at a crossroads, or at a meeting place, or whisper in his ear, or send a second bhikkhuni as an emissary, it is a pācittiya.

Anāpucchāpakkamanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Departing Without Asking Leave.

15.Yā pana bhikkhunī purebhattaṃ kulāni upasaṅkamitvā āsane nisīditvā sāmike anāpucchā pakkameyya, pācittiyaṃ.

15. Whatever bhikkhuni, having gone to families in the forenoon, and having sat down on a seat, should depart without asking leave of the master of the house, it is a pācittiya.

Anāpucchāabhinisīdanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Sitting Down Without Asking Leave.

16.Yā pana bhikkhunī pacchābhattaṃ kulāni upasaṅkamitvā sāmike anāpucchā āsane abhinisīdeyya vā abhinipajjeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

16. Whatever bhikkhuni, having gone to families in the afternoon, should sit down or lie down on a seat without asking leave of the master of the house, it is a pācittiya.

Anāpucchāsantharaṇasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Spreading Out Without Asking Leave.

17.Yā pana bhikkhunī vikāle kulāni upasaṅkamitvā sāmike anāpucchā seyyaṃ santharitvā vā santharāpetvā vā abhinisīdeyya vā abhinipajjeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

17. Whatever bhikkhuni, having gone to families at the wrong time, should spread out or have spread out a bed, or sit down or lie down, without asking leave of the master of the house, it is a pācittiya.

Paraujjhāpanakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Causing Another to be Displeased.

18.Yā pana bhikkhunī duggahitena dūpadhāritena paraṃ ujjhāpeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

18. Whatever bhikkhuni should cause another to be displeased through being badly taught or badly supported, it is a pācittiya.

Paraabhisapanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Cursing Another.

19.Yā pana bhikkhunī attānaṃ vā paraṃ vā nirayena vā brahmacariyena vā abhisapeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

19. Whatever bhikkhuni should curse herself or another with hell or with the holy life, it is a pācittiya.

Rodanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Weeping.

20.Yā pana bhikkhunī attānaṃ vadhitvā vadhitvā rodeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

20. Whatever bhikkhuni should weep, striking herself repeatedly, it is a pācittiya.

Rattandhakāravaggo dutiyo.

The Second Chapter on Darkness at Night.

Naggasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Nudity.

21.Yā pana bhikkhunī naggā nahāyeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

21. Whatever bhikkhuni should bathe naked, it is a pācittiya.

Udakasāṭikasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on a Bathing Cloth.

22.Udakasāṭikaṃ pana bhikkhuniyā kārayamānāya pamāṇikā kāretabbā, tatridaṃ pamāṇaṃ, dīghaso catasso vidatthiyo sugatavidatthiyā, tiriyaṃ dve vidatthiyo. Taṃ atikkāmentiyā chedanakaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

22. When a bhikkhuni is having a bathing cloth made, it should be made according to the standard size. Herein this is the standard size: in length, four spans according to the Sugata's span; in width, two spans. If she should exceed that, it is to be cut down and it is a pācittiya.

Cīvarasibbanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Sewing a Robe.

23.Yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhuniyā cīvaraṃ visibbetvā vā visibbāpetvā vā sā pacchā anantarāyikinī neva sibbeyya, na sibbāpanāya ussukkaṃ kareyya aññatra catūhapañcāhā, pācittiyaṃ.

23. Whatever bhikkhuni, having unstitched or having had unstitched a robe for a bhikkhuni, should afterwards, without an intervening cause, neither sew it nor make an effort to have it sewn, except for four or five days, it is a pācittiya.

Saṅghāṭicārasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Wandering with a Double Robe.

24.Yā pana bhikkhunī pañcāhikaṃ saṅghāṭicāraṃ atikkāmeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

24. Whatever bhikkhuni should exceed the five-day limit for wandering with a double robe, it is a pācittiya.

Cīvarasaṅkamanīyasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on a Robe-token.

25.Yā pana bhikkhunī cīvarasaṅkamanīyaṃ dhāreyya, pācittiyaṃ.

25. Whatever bhikkhuni should keep a robe-token, it is a pācittiya.

Gaṇacīvarasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on a Group Robe.

26.Yā pana bhikkhunī gaṇassa cīvaralābhaṃ antarāyaṃ kareyya, pācittiyaṃ.

26. Whatever bhikkhuni should obstruct a gain of robes for the group, it is a pācittiya.

Paṭibāhanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Rejecting.

27.Yā pana bhikkhunī dhammikaṃ cīvaravibhaṅgaṃ paṭibāheyya, pācittiyaṃ.

27. Whatever bhikkhuni should reject a lawful distribution of robes, it is a pācittiya.

Cīvaradānasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Giving a Robe.

28.Yā pana bhikkhunī agārikassa vā paribbājakassa vā paribbājikāya vā samaṇacīvaraṃ dadeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

28. Whatever bhikkhuni should give a monk's robe to a householder, or to a male or female wanderer, it is a pācittiya.

Kālaatikkamanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Exceeding the Time.

29.Yā pana bhikkhunī dubbalacīvarapaccāsāya cīvarakālasamayaṃ atikkāmeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

29. Whatever bhikkhuni, expecting a poor robe (as a replacement), should exceed the time for robe-cloth, it is a pācittiya.

Kathinuddhārasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Withdrawing the Kathina.

30.Yā pana bhikkhunī dhammikaṃ kathinuddhāraṃ paṭibāheyya, pācittiyaṃ.

30. Whatever bhikkhuni should reject a lawful withdrawal of the kathina, it is a pācittiya.

Naggavaggo tatiyo.

The Third Chapter on Nudity.

Ekamañcatuvaṭṭanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Two Turning Over on One Bed.

31.Yā pana bhikkhuniyo dve ekamañce tuvaṭṭeyyuṃ, pācittiyaṃ.

31. If two bhikkhunis should turn over on one bed, it is a pācittiya.

Ekattharaṇatuvaṭṭanasikkhāpadaṃ

Ekattharaṇatuvaṭṭanasikkhāpadaṃ

32.Yā pana bhikkhuniyo dve ekattharaṇapāvuraṇā tuvaṭṭeyyuṃ, pācittiyaṃ.

32. If any bhikkhuni should weave two single-layer cloths to be used as a rain-cloth, it is a pācittiya.

Aphāsukaraṇasikkhāpadaṃ

Aphāsukaraṇasikkhāpadaṃ

33.Yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhuniyā sañcicca aphāsuṃ kareyya, pācittiyaṃ.

33. If any bhikkhuni intentionally causes discomfort to a bhikkhuni, it is a pācittiya.

Naupaṭṭhāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

Naupaṭṭhāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

34.Yā pana bhikkhunī dukkhitaṃ sahajīviniṃ neva upaṭṭhaheyya, na upaṭṭhāpanāya ussukkaṃ kareyya, pācittiyaṃ.

34. If any bhikkhuni, when a co-resident is suffering, neither attends to her nor makes an effort for her attendance, it is a pācittiya.

Nikkaḍḍhanasikkhāpadaṃ

Nikkaḍḍhanasikkhāpadaṃ

35.Yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhuniyā upassayaṃ datvā kupitā anattamanā nikkaḍḍheyya vā nikkaḍḍhāpeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

35. If any bhikkhuni, having given lodging to a bhikkhuni, being angry and displeased, should drive her out or have her driven out, it is a pācittiya.

Saṃsaṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ

Saṃsaṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ

36.Yā pana bhikkhunī saṃsaṭṭhā vihareyya gahapatinā vā gahapatiputtena vā, sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi evamassa vacanīyā ‘‘māyye, saṃsaṭṭhā vihari gahapatināpi gahapatiputtenāpi, viviccāyye, vivekaññeva bhaginiyā saṅgho vaṇṇetī’’ti. Evañca sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi vuccamānā tatheva paggaṇheyya, sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi yāvatatiyaṃ samanubhāsitabbā tassa paṭinissaggāya, yāvatatiyañce samanubhāsiyamānā taṃ paṭinissajjeyya, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. No ce paṭinissajjeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

36. If any bhikkhuni lives in close association with a householder or a householder’s son, that bhikkhuni should be addressed by the bhikkhunis thus: "Venerable, you live in close association with a householder or a householder’s son; venerable, the Sangha praises seclusion for a sister." If that bhikkhuni, being spoken to by the bhikkhunis in that way, persists in the same behavior, that bhikkhuni should be formally admonished by the bhikkhunis up to three times for the relinquishment of that behavior. If, while being formally admonished up to three times, she should relinquish that behavior, that is good. If she should not relinquish it, it is a pācittiya.

Antoraṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ

Antoraṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ

37.Yā pana bhikkhunī antoraṭṭhe sāsaṅkasammate sappaṭibhaye asatthikā cārikaṃ careyya, pācittiyaṃ.

37. If any bhikkhuni should wander in the inner country that is considered dangerous and alarming, without protection, it is a pācittiya.

Tiroraṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ

Tiroraṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ

38.Yā pana bhikkhunī tiroraṭṭhe sāsaṅkasammate sappaṭibhaye asatthikā cārikaṃ careyya, pācittiyaṃ.

38. If any bhikkhuni should wander in the outer country that is considered dangerous and alarming, without protection, it is a pācittiya.

Antovassasikkhāpadaṃ

Antovassasikkhāpadaṃ

39.Yā pana bhikkhunī antovassaṃ cārikaṃ careyya, pācittiyaṃ.

39. If any bhikkhuni should wander during the rainy season, it is a pācittiya.

Cārikanapakkamanasikkhāpadaṃ

Cārikanapakkamanasikkhāpadaṃ

40.Yā pana bhikkhunī vassaṃvuṭṭhā cārikaṃ na pakkameyya antamaso chappañcayojanānipi, pācittiyaṃ.

40. If any bhikkhuni, having spent the rains, does not set out on tour, even for at least five or six yojanas, it is a pācittiya.

Tuvaṭṭavaggo catuttho.

Tuvaṭṭavaggo catuttho.

Rājāgārasikkhāpadaṃ

Rājāgārasikkhāpadaṃ

41.Yā pana bhikkhunī rājāgāraṃ vā cittāgāraṃ vā ārāmaṃ vā uyyānaṃ vā pokkharaṇiṃ vā dassanāya gaccheyya, pācittiyaṃ.

41. If any bhikkhuni should go to see a royal palace, a picture gallery, a park, a garden, or a lotus pond, it is a pācittiya.

Āsandiparibhuñjanasikkhāpadaṃ

Āsandiparibhuñjanasikkhāpadaṃ

42.Yā pana bhikkhunī āsandiṃ vā pallaṅkaṃ vā paribhuñjeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

42. If any bhikkhuni should use a chair or a couch, it is a pācittiya.

Suttakantanasikkhāpadaṃ

Suttakantanasikkhāpadaṃ

43.Yā pana bhikkhunī suttaṃ kanteyya, pācittiyaṃ.

43. If any bhikkhuni should spin thread, it is a pācittiya.

Gihiveyyāvaccasikkhāpadaṃ

Gihiveyyāvaccasikkhāpadaṃ

44.Yā pana bhikkhunī gihiveyyāvaccaṃ kareyya, pācittiyaṃ.

44. If any bhikkhuni should perform a householder’s work, it is a pācittiya.

Adhikaraṇasikkhāpadaṃ

Adhikaraṇasikkhāpadaṃ

45.Yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhuniyā ‘‘ehāyye, imaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasamehī’’ti vuccamānā ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭissuṇitvā sā pacchā anantarāyikinī neva vūpasameyya, na vūpasamāya ussukkaṃ kareyya, pācittiyaṃ.

45. If any bhikkhuni, when a bhikkhuni says, “Come, venerable, let us settle this dispute,” and she agrees, saying, “Good,” but afterward, without any obstruction, neither settles it nor makes an effort to settle it, it is a pācittiya.

Bhojanadānasikkhāpadaṃ

Bhojanadānasikkhāpadaṃ

46.Yā pana bhikkhunī agārikassa vā paribbājakassa vā paribbājikāya vā sahatthā khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā dadeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

46. If any bhikkhuni should personally give solid food or staple food to a householder, a wandering ascetic, or a female wandering ascetic, it is a pācittiya.

Āvasathacīvarasikkhāpadaṃ

Āvasathacīvarasikkhāpadaṃ

47.Yā pana bhikkhunī āvasathacīvaraṃ anissajjetvā paribhuñjeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

47. If any bhikkhuni should use a robe designated for the guesthouse without relinquishing it, it is a pācittiya.

Āvasathavihārasikkhāpadaṃ

Āvasathavihārasikkhāpadaṃ

48.Yā pana bhikkhunī āvasathaṃ anissajjitvā cārikaṃ pakkameyya, pācittiyaṃ.

48. If any bhikkhuni should set out on tour without relinquishing the guesthouse, it is a pācittiya.

Tiracchānavijjāpariyāpuṇanasikkhāpadaṃ

Tiracchānavijjāpariyāpuṇanasikkhāpadaṃ

49.Yā pana bhikkhunī tiracchānavijjaṃ pariyāpuṇeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

49. If any bhikkhuni should learn a low art, it is a pācittiya.

Tiracchānavijjāvācanasikkhāpadaṃ

Tiracchānavijjāvācanasikkhāpadaṃ

50.Yā pana bhikkhunī tiracchānavijjaṃ vāceyya, pācittiyaṃ.

50. If any bhikkhuni should recite a low art, it is a pācittiya.

Cittāgāravaggo pañcamo.

Cittāgāravaggo pañcamo.

Ārāmapavisanasikkhāpadaṃ

Ārāmapavisanasikkhāpadaṃ

51.Yā pana bhikkhunī jānaṃ sabhikkhukaṃ ārāmaṃ anāpucchā paviseyya, pācittiyaṃ.

51. If any bhikkhuni should knowingly enter a park where there are bhikkhus, without asking permission, it is a pācittiya.

Bhikkhuakkosanasikkhāpadaṃ

Bhikkhuakkosanasikkhāpadaṃ

52.Yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhuṃ akkoseyya vā paribhāseyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

52. If any bhikkhuni should abuse or revile a bhikkhu, it is a pācittiya.

Gaṇaparibhāsanasikkhāpadaṃ

Gaṇaparibhāsanasikkhāpadaṃ

53.Yā pana bhikkhunī caṇḍīkatā gaṇaṃ paribhāseyya, pācittiyaṃ.

53. If any bhikkhuni, being angry, should revile a group, it is a pācittiya.

Pavāritasikkhāpadaṃ

Pavāritasikkhāpadaṃ

54.Yā pana bhikkhunī nimantitā vā pavāritā vā khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā khādeyya vā bhuñjeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

54. If any bhikkhuni, having been invited or requested, should eat or consume solid food or staple food, it is a pācittiya.

Kulamaccharinīsikkhāpadaṃ

Kulamaccharinīsikkhāpadaṃ

55.Yā pana bhikkhunī kulamaccharinī assa, pācittiyaṃ.

55. If any bhikkhuni should be possessive regarding families, it is a pācittiya.

Abhikkhukāvāsasikkhāpadaṃ

Abhikkhukāvāsasikkhāpadaṃ

56.Yā pana bhikkhunī abhikkhuke āvāse vassaṃ vaseyya, pācittiyaṃ.

56. If any bhikkhuni should spend the rains in a residence without bhikkhus, it is a pācittiya.

Apavāraṇāsikkhāpadaṃ

Apavāraṇāsikkhāpadaṃ

57.Yā pana bhikkhunī vassaṃvuṭṭhā ubhatosaṅghe tīhi ṭhānehi na pavāreyya diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

57. If any bhikkhuni, having spent the rains, does not invite criticism from the Sangha on both sides in three ways: by what has been seen, by what has been heard, or by suspicion, it is a pācittiya.

Ovādasikkhāpadaṃ

Ovādasikkhāpadaṃ

58.Yā pana bhikkhunī ovādāya vā saṃvāsāya vā na gaccheyya, pācittiyaṃ.

58. If any bhikkhuni should not go for instruction or for association, it is a pācittiya.

Ovādūpasaṅkamanasikkhāpadaṃ

Ovādūpasaṅkamanasikkhāpadaṃ

59.Anvaddhamāsaṃ bhikkhuniyā bhikkhusaṅghato dve dhammā paccāsīsitabbā uposathapucchakañca ovādūpasaṅkamanañca. Taṃ atikkāmentiyā pācittiyaṃ.

59. Every half-month, two things are to be expected by a bhikkhuni from the Bhikkhu Sangha: inquiry about the Uposatha and approaching for advice. In transgressing that, it is a pācittiya.

Pasākhejātasikkhāpadaṃ

Pasākhejātasikkhāpadaṃ

60.Yā pana bhikkhunī pasākhe jātaṃ gaṇḍaṃ vā rudhitaṃ vā anapaloketvā saṅghaṃ vā gaṇaṃ vā purisena saddhiṃ ekenekā bhedāpeyya vā phālāpeyya vā dhovāpeyya vā ālimpāpeyya vā bandhāpeyya vā mocāpeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

60. If any bhikkhuni, without informing the Sangha or the group, should, with a man, one-on-one, have an abscess or boil that has burst, cut open, split open, washed, smeared, bandaged, or unbandaged, it is a pācittiya.

Ārāmavaggo chaṭṭho.

Ārāmavaggo chaṭṭho.

Gabbhinīsikkhāpadaṃ

Gabbhinīsikkhāpadaṃ

61.Yā pana bhikkhunī gabbhiniṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

61. If any bhikkhuni should confer the Going-forth on a pregnant woman, it is a pācittiya.

Pāyantīsikkhāpadaṃ

Pāyantīsikkhāpadaṃ

62.Yā pana bhikkhunī pāyantiṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

62. If any bhikkhuni should confer the Going-forth on a woman who is in the lying-in period, it is a pācittiya.

Paṭhamasikkhamānasikkhāpadaṃ

Paṭhamasikkhamānasikkhāpadaṃ

63.Yā pana bhikkhunī dve vassāni chasu dhammesu asikkhitasikkhaṃ sikkhamānaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

63. If any bhikkhuni should confer the Going-forth on a sikkhamana who has not trained in the six rules for two years, it is a pācittiya.

Dutiyasikkhamānasikkhāpadaṃ

Dutiyasikkhamānasikkhāpadaṃ

64.Yā pana bhikkhunī dve vassāni chasu dhammesu sikkhitasikkhaṃ sikkhamānaṃ saṅghena asammataṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

64. If any bhikkhuni should confer the Going-forth on a sikkhamana who has trained in the six rules for two years, without the agreement of the Sangha, it is a pācittiya.

Paṭhamagihigatasikkhāpadaṃ

Paṭhamagihigatasikkhāpadaṃ

65.Yā pana bhikkhunī ūnadvādasavassaṃ gihigataṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

65. If any bhikkhuni should confer the Going-forth on a woman who has gone forth from the lay life and is less than twelve years old, it is a pācittiya.

Dutiyagihigatasikkhāpadaṃ

Dutiyagihigatasikkhāpadaṃ

66.Yā pana bhikkhunī paripuṇṇadvādasavassaṃ gihigataṃ dve vassāni chasu dhammesu asikkhitasikkhaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

66. If any bhikkhuni should confer the Going-forth on a woman who has gone forth from the lay life and is fully twelve years old, but has not trained in the six rules for two years, it is a pācittiya.

Tatiyagihigatasikkhāpadaṃ

Tatiyagihigatasikkhāpadaṃ

67.Yā pana bhikkhunī paripuṇṇadvādasavassaṃ gihigataṃ dve vassāni chasu dhammesu sikkhitasikkhaṃ saṅghena asammataṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

67. If any bhikkhuni should confer the Going-forth on a woman who has gone forth from the lay life and is fully twelve years old, and has trained in the six rules for two years, without the agreement of the Sangha, it is a pācittiya.

Paṭhamasahajīvinīsikkhāpadaṃ

Paṭhamasahajīvinīsikkhāpadaṃ

68.Yā pana bhikkhunī sahajīviniṃ vuṭṭhāpetvā dve vassāni neva anuggaṇheyya na anuggaṇhāpeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

68. If any bhikkhuni, having conferred the Going-forth on a co-resident, neither supports her nor has her supported for two years, it is a pācittiya.

Pavattinīnānubandhanasikkhāpadaṃ

Pavattinīnānubandhanasikkhāpadaṃ

69.Yā pana bhikkhunī vuṭṭhāpitaṃ pavattiniṃ dve vassāni nānubandheyya, pācittiyaṃ.

69. If any bhikkhuni should not attend upon a pavattini who has been given the Going-forth for two years, it is a pācittiya.

Dutiyasahajīvinīsikkhāpadaṃ

Dutiyasahajīvinīsikkhāpadaṃ

70.Yā pana bhikkhunī sahajīviniṃ vuṭṭhāpetvā neva vūpakāseyya na vūpakāsāpeyya antamaso chappañcayojanānipi, pācittiyaṃ.

70. If any bhikkhuni, having conferred the Going-forth on a co-resident, neither informs her nor has her informed, even for at least five or six yojanas, it is a pācittiya.

Gabbhinivaggo sattamo.

Gabbhinivaggo sattamo.

Paṭhamakumāribhūtasikkhāpadaṃ

Paṭhamakumāribhūtasikkhāpadaṃ

71.Yā pana bhikkhunī ūnavīsativassaṃ kumāribhūtaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

71. If any bhikkhuni should confer the Going-forth on a maiden who is less than twenty years old, it is a pācittiya.

Dutiyakumāribhūtasikkhāpadaṃ

Dutiyakumāribhūtasikkhāpadaṃ

72.Yā pana bhikkhunī paripuṇṇavīsativassaṃ kumāribhūtaṃ dve vassāni chasu dhammesu asikkhitasikkhaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

72. If any bhikkhuni should confer the Going-forth on a maiden who is fully twenty years old, but has not trained in the six rules for two years, it is a pācittiya.

Tatiyakumāribhūtasikkhāpadaṃ

Tatiyakumāribhūtasikkhāpadaṃ

73.Yā pana bhikkhunī paripuṇṇavīsativassaṃ kumāribhūtaṃ dve vassāni chasu dhammesu sikkhitasikkhaṃ saṅghena asammataṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

73. If any bhikkhuni should confer the Going-forth on a maiden who is fully twenty years old, and has trained in the six rules for two years, without the agreement of the Sangha, it is a pācittiya.

Ūnadvādasavassasikkhāpadaṃ

Ūnadvādasavassasikkhāpadaṃ

74.Yā pana bhikkhunī ūnadvādasavassā vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

74. If any bhikkhuni should confer the Going-forth on one who is less than twelve years old, it is a pācittiya.

Paripuṇṇadvādasavassasikkhāpadaṃ

Paripuṇṇadvādasavassasikkhāpadaṃ

75.Yā pana bhikkhunī paripuṇṇadvādasavassā saṅghena asammatā vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

75. If any bhikkhuni should confer the Going-forth on one who is fully twelve years old, without the agreement of the Sangha, it is a pācittiya.

Khiyyanadhammasikkhāpadaṃ

Khiyyanadhammasikkhāpadaṃ

76.Yā pana bhikkhunī ‘‘alaṃ tāva te, ayye, vuṭṭhāpitenā’’ti vuccamānā ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭissuṇitvā sā pacchā khiyyanadhammaṃ āpajjeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

76. If any bhikkhuni, when being told, "Enough, venerable, with the conferring of the Going-forth," agrees, saying, "Good," but afterward commits a fault that leads to expulsion, it is a pācittiya.

Paṭhamasikkhamānanavuṭṭhāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

Paṭhamasikkhamānanavuṭṭhāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

77.Yā pana bhikkhunī sikkhamānaṃ ‘‘sace me tvaṃ, ayye, cīvaraṃ dassasi, evāhaṃ taṃ vuṭṭhāpessāmī’’ti vatvā sā pacchā anantarāyikinī neva vuṭṭhāpeyya, na vuṭṭhāpanāya ussukkaṃ kareyya, pācittiyaṃ.

77. If any bhikkhuni, having said to a sikkhamana, "If you will give me a robe, venerable, then I will confer the Going-forth on you," afterward, without any obstruction, neither confers the Going-forth nor makes an effort to confer the Going-forth, it is a pācittiya.

Dutiyasikkhamānanavuṭṭhāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

Dutiyasikkhamānanavuṭṭhāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

78.Yā pana bhikkhunī sikkhamānaṃ ‘‘sace maṃ tvaṃ, ayye, dve vassāni anubandhissasi, evāhaṃ taṃ vuṭṭhāpessāmī’’ti vatvā sā pacchā anantarāyikinī neva vuṭṭhāpeyya, na vuṭṭhāpanāya ussukkaṃ kareyya, pācittiyaṃ.

78. If any bhikkhuni, having said to a sikkhamana, "If you will attend upon me for two years, venerable, then I will confer the Going-forth on you," afterward, without any obstruction, neither confers the Going-forth nor makes an effort to confer the Going-forth, it is a pācittiya.

Sokāvāsasikkhāpadaṃ

Sokāvāsasikkhāpadaṃ

79.Yā pana bhikkhunī purisasaṃsaṭṭhaṃ kumārakasaṃsaṭṭhaṃ caṇḍiṃ sokāvāsaṃ sikkhamānaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

79. If any bhikkhuni should confer the Going-forth on a sikkhamana who is intimate with a man or intimate with a boy, who is ill-tempered and resides in a place of sorrow, it is a pācittiya.

Ananuññātasikkhāpadaṃ

Ananuññātasikkhāpadaṃ

80.Yā pana bhikkhunī mātāpitūhi vā sāmikena vā ananuññātaṃ sikkhamānaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

80. If any bhikkhuni should confer the Going-forth on a sikkhamana without the permission of her parents or her husband, it is a pācittiya.

Pārivāsikasikkhāpadaṃ

Pārivāsikasikkhāpadaṃ

81.Yā pana bhikkhunī pārivāsikachandadānena sikkhamānaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

81. If any bhikkhuni should confer the Going-forth on a sikkhamana with the giving of pārivāsika approval, it is a pācittiya.

Anuvassasikkhāpadaṃ

Anuvassasikkhāpadaṃ

82.Yā pana bhikkhunī anuvassaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

82. If any bhikkhuni should confer the Going-forth every year, it is a pācittiya.

Ekavassasikkhāpadaṃ

Ekavassasikkhāpadaṃ

83.Yā pana bhikkhunī ekaṃ vassaṃ dve vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

83. If any bhikkhuni should confer the Going-forth on two in one year, it is a pācittiya.

Kumāribhūtavaggo aṭṭhamo.

Kumāribhūtavaggo aṭṭhamo.

Chattupāhanasikkhāpadaṃ

Chattupāhanasikkhāpadaṃ

84.Yā pana bhikkhunī agilānā chattupāhanaṃ dhāreyya, pācittiyaṃ.

84. If any bhikkhuni, being not ill, should wear an umbrella or shoes, it is a pācittiya.

Yānasikkhāpadaṃ

Yānasikkhāpadaṃ

85.Yā pana bhikkhunī agilānā yānena yāyeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

85. If any bhikkhuni, being not ill, should ride in a vehicle, it is a pācittiya.

Saṅghāṇisikkhāpadaṃ

Saṅghāṇisikkhāpadaṃ

86.Yā pana bhikkhunī saṅghāṇiṃ dhāreyya, pācittiyaṃ.

86. If any bhikkhuni should wear a corselet, it is a pācittiya.

Itthālaṅkārasikkhāpadaṃ

Itthālaṅkārasikkhāpadaṃ

87.Yā pana bhikkhunī itthālaṅkāraṃ dhāreyya, pācittiyaṃ.

87. Whatever bhikkhuni should wear a woman's ornament, pācittiya.

Gandhavaṇṇakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Perfume-Powder

88.Yā pana bhikkhunī gandhavaṇṇakena nahāyeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

88. Whatever bhikkhuni should bathe with perfume-powder, pācittiya.

Vāsitakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Scented Paste

89.Yā pana bhikkhunī vāsitakena piññākena nahāyeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

89. Whatever bhikkhuni should bathe with scented oil-cake, pācittiya.

Bhikkhuniummaddāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Having a Bhikkhuni Massaged

90.Yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhuniyā ummaddāpeyya vā parimaddāpeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

90. Whatever bhikkhuni should have a bhikkhuni massaged or kneaded, pācittiya.

Sikkhamānaummaddāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Having a Sikkhamānā Massaged

91.Yā pana bhikkhunī sikkhamānāya ummaddāpeyya vā parimaddāpeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

91. Whatever bhikkhuni should have a sikkhamānā massaged or kneaded, pācittiya.

Sāmaṇerīummaddāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Having a Sāmaṇerī Massaged

92.Yā pana bhikkhunī sāmaṇeriyā ummaddāpeyya vā parimaddāpeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

92. Whatever bhikkhuni should have a sāmaṇerī massaged or kneaded, pācittiya.

Gihiniummaddāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Having a Laywoman Massaged

93.Yā pana bhikkhunī gihiniyā ummaddāpeyya vā parimaddāpeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

93. Whatever bhikkhuni should have a laywoman massaged or kneaded, pācittiya.

Anāpucchāsikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Not Asking Permission

94.Yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhussa purato anāpucchā āsane nisīdeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

94. Whatever bhikkhuni should sit down on a seat in front of a bhikkhu without asking permission, pācittiya.

Pañhāpucchanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Asking Questions

95.Yā pana bhikkhunī anokāsakataṃ bhikkhuṃ pañhaṃ puccheyya, pācittiyaṃ.

95. Whatever bhikkhuni should ask a bhikkhu a question when he is not at leisure, pācittiya.

Asaṃkaccikasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Not Being Considerate

96.Yā pana bhikkhunī asaṃkaccikā gāmaṃ paviseyya, pācittiyaṃ.

96. Whatever bhikkhuni should enter a village without being considerate, pācittiya.

Chattupāhanavaggo navamo.

The Ninth Chapter on Sandals and Umbrellas

Musāvādasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Lying

97.Sampajānamusāvāde pācittiyaṃ.

97. For a deliberate lie, pācittiya.

Omasavādasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Reviling

98.Omasavāde pācittiyaṃ.

98. For reviling, pācittiya.

Pesuññasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Tale-Bearing

99.Bhikkhunipesuññe pācittiyaṃ.

99. For tale-bearing about bhikkhunis, pācittiya.

Padasodhammasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Teaching the Dhamma Word by Word

100.Yā pana bhikkhunī anupasampannaṃ padaso dhammaṃ vāceyya, pācittiyaṃ.

100. Whatever bhikkhuni should recite the Dhamma word by word to one who is not fully ordained, pācittiya.

Paṭhamasahaseyyasikkhāpadaṃ

The First Training Rule on Sleeping Together

101.Yā pana bhikkhunī anupasampannāya uttaridirattatirattaṃ sahaseyyaṃ kappeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

101. Whatever bhikkhuni should sleep together with one who is not fully ordained for more than two or three nights, pācittiya.

Dutiyasahaseyyasikkhāpadaṃ

The Second Training Rule on Sleeping Together

102.Yā pana bhikkhunī purisena sahaseyyaṃ kappeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

102. Whatever bhikkhuni should sleep together with a man, pācittiya.

Dhammadesanāsikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Teaching the Dhamma

103.Yā pana bhikkhunī purisassa uttarichappañcavācāhi dhammaṃ deseyya aññatra viññunā itthiviggahena, pācittiyaṃ.

103. Whatever bhikkhuni should teach the Dhamma to a man in more than five or six sentences, except with an intelligent woman, pācittiya.

Bhūtārocanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Declaring Superior Human Qualities

104.Yā pana bhikkhunī anupasampannāya uttarimanussadhammaṃ āroceyya, bhūtasmiṃ pācittiyaṃ.

104. Whatever bhikkhuni should declare a superior human quality to one who is not fully ordained, if it is true, pācittiya.

Duṭṭhullārocanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Declaring a Serious Offence

105.Yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhuniyā duṭṭhullaṃ āpattiṃ anupasampannāya āroceyya aññatra bhikkhunisammutiyā, pācittiyaṃ.

105. Whatever bhikkhuni should declare a serious offence of a bhikkhuni to one who is not fully ordained, except by agreement of the Bhikkhuni Sangha, pācittiya.

Pathavīkhaṇanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Digging the Ground

106.Yā pana bhikkhunī pathaviṃ khaṇeyya vā khaṇāpeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

106. Whatever bhikkhuni should dig the ground or have it dug, pācittiya.

Musāvādavaggo dasamo.

The Tenth Chapter on Lying

Bhūtagāmasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Destroying Plant Life

107.Bhūtagāmapātabyatāya pācittiyaṃ.

107. For destroying plant life, pācittiya.

Aññavādakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Arguing

108.Aññavādake, vihesake pācittiyaṃ.

108. For arguing and harassing, pācittiya.

Ujjhāpanakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Disparaging

109.Ujjhāpanake, khiyyanake pācittiyaṃ.

109. For disparaging and grumbling, pācittiya.

Paṭhamasenāsanasikkhāpadaṃ

The First Training Rule on Lodgings

110.Yā pana bhikkhunī saṅghikaṃ mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā bhisiṃ vā kocchaṃ vā ajjhokāse santharitvā vā santharāpetvā vā taṃ pakkamantī neva uddhareyya, na uddharāpeyya, anāpucchaṃ vā gaccheyya, pācittiyaṃ.

110. Whatever bhikkhuni, having spread out or having had spread out a Sangha's couch or chair or mattress or mat in the open, when leaving it, should neither remove it nor have it removed, or should go away without asking permission, pācittiya.

Dutiyasenāsanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Second Training Rule on Lodgings

111.Yā pana bhikkhunī saṅghike vihāre seyyaṃ santharitvā vā santharāpetvā vā taṃ pakkamantī neva uddhareyya, na uddharāpeyya, anāpucchaṃ vā gaccheyya, pācittiyaṃ.

111. Whatever bhikkhuni, having spread out or having had spread out a bed in a Sangha's dwelling, when leaving it, should neither remove it nor have it removed, or should go away without asking permission, pācittiya.

Anupakhajjasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Obstructing

112.Yā pana bhikkhunī saṅghike vihāre jānaṃ pubbupagataṃ bhikkhuniṃ anupakhajja seyyaṃ kappeyya ‘‘yassā sambādho bhavissati, sā pakkamissatī’’ti etadeva paccayaṃ karitvā anaññaṃ, pācittiyaṃ.

112. Whatever bhikkhuni should knowingly obstruct a bhikkhuni who arrived earlier in a Sangha's dwelling, and should make a bed thinking, "Whoever will be crowded will leave," with this as the sole reason, and no other, pācittiya.

Nikkaḍḍhanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Dragging Out

113.Yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhuniṃ kupitā anattamanā saṅghikā vihārā nikkaḍḍheyya vā nikkaḍḍhāpeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

113. Whatever bhikkhuni, being angry and displeased, should drag a bhikkhuni out of a Sangha's dwelling, or have her dragged out, pācittiya.

Vehāsakuṭisikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on a Loft-Hut

114.Yā pana bhikkhunī saṅghike vihāre uparivehāsakuṭiyā āhaccapādakaṃ mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā abhinisīdeyya vā abhinipajjeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

114. Whatever bhikkhuni should sit down or lie down on a couch or chair with damaged legs in a loft-hut in a Sangha's dwelling, pācittiya.

Mahallakavihārasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on a Large Dwelling

115.Mahallakaṃ pana bhikkhuniyā vihāraṃ kārayamānāya yāva dvārakosā aggaḷaṭṭhapanāya, ālokasandhiparikammāya dvatticchadanassa pariyāyaṃ appaharite ṭhitāya adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Tato ce uttari appaharitepi ṭhitā adhiṭṭhaheyya, pācittiyaṃ.

115. When a bhikkhuni is having a large dwelling made, it should be determined, standing within the ungreen area, for the sake of door sockets, fastening pins, and window-frame repairs, as much as a two- or three-layered covering. If she should determine anything further, even standing within the ungreen area, pācittiya.

Sappāṇakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Living Beings

116.Yā pana bhikkhunī jānaṃ sappāṇakaṃ udakaṃ tiṇaṃ vā mattikaṃ vā siñceyya vā siñcāpeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

116. Whatever bhikkhuni should knowingly pour or have poured water containing living beings, or grass, or clay, pācittiya.

Bhūtagāmavaggo ekādasamo.

The Eleventh Chapter on Plant Life

Āvasathapiṇḍasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Almsfood at a Guesthouse

117.Agilānāya bhikkhuniyā eko āvasathapiṇḍo bhuñjitabbo. Tato ce uttari bhuñjeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

117. A bhikkhuni who is not ill should eat only one portion of almsfood at a guesthouse. If she should eat more than that, pācittiya.

Gaṇabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Group Meals

118.Gaṇabhojane aññatra samayā pācittiyaṃ. Tatthāyaṃ samayo, gilānasamayo, cīvaradānasamayo, cīvarakārasamayo, addhānagamanasamayo, nāvābhiruhanasamayo, mahāsamayo, samaṇabhattasamayo, ayaṃ tattha samayo.

118. For group meals, except at the proper time, pācittiya. Herein, this is the proper time: the time of sickness, the time of robe-giving, the time of robe-making, the time of travelling a long distance, the time of embarking on a boat, a great occasion, the time of a meal for ascetics. This is the proper time therein.

Kāṇamātusikkhāpadaṃ

The Kāṇamātu Training Rule

119.Bhikkhuniṃ paneva kulaṃ upagataṃ pūvehi vā manthehi vā abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāreyya, ākaṅkhamānāya bhikkhuniyā dvattipattapūrā paṭiggahetabbā. Tato ce uttari paṭiggaṇheyya, pācittiyaṃ. Dvattipattapūre paṭiggahetvā tato nīharitvā bhikkhunīhi saddhiṃ saṃvibhajitabbaṃ, ayaṃ tattha sāmīci.

119. If indeed a family should invite a bhikkhuni who has approached their home to be offered cakes or barley flour, a bhikkhuni, if she wishes, may accept two or three bowlfuls. If she should accept more than that, pācittiya. Having accepted two or three bowlfuls, having taken it out from there, it should be shared with the bhikkhunis. This is the proper course of conduct therein.

Vikālabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Untimely Food

120.Yā pana bhikkhunī vikāle khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā khādeyya vā bhuñjeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

120. Whatever bhikkhuni should eat or consume chewable food or খাবার at an improper time, pācittiya.

Sannidhikārakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Storing Up

121.Yā pana bhikkhunī sannidhikārakaṃ khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā khādeyya vā bhuñjeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ.

121. Whatever bhikkhuni should eat or consume chewable food or খাবার that has been stored up, pācittiya.

Dantaponasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Tooth-Cleaning

122.Yā pana bhikkhunī adinnaṃ mukhadvāraṃ āhāraṃ āhareyya aññatra udakadantaponā, pācittiyaṃ.

122. Whatever bhikkhuni should bring unpermitted food into the mouth, except for water and a tooth-cleaner, pācittiya.

Uyyojanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Sending Away

123.Yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhuniṃ ‘‘ehāyye, gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā piṇḍāya pavisissāmā’’ti tassā dāpetvā vā adāpetvā vā uyyojeyya ‘‘gacchāyye, na me tayā saddhiṃ kathā vā nisajjā vā phāsu hoti, ekikāya me kathā vā nisajjā vā phāsu hotī’’ti etadeva paccayaṃ karitvā anaññaṃ, pācittiyaṃ.

123. Whatever bhikkhuni should say to a bhikkhuni, "Come, sister, we will enter a village or town for alms," and then, having given or not given to her, should send her away, saying, "Go, sister, conversation or sitting together with you is not comfortable for me; conversation or sitting together alone is comfortable for me," with this as the sole reason, and no other, pācittiya.

Sabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Sharing a Meal

124.Yā pana bhikkhunī sabhojane kule anupakhajja nisajjaṃ kappeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

124. Whatever bhikkhuni should sit in a house where a meal is being prepared without being invited, pācittiya.

Rahopaṭicchannasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Seclusion and Concealment

125.Yā pana bhikkhunī purisena saddhiṃ raho paṭicchanne āsane nisajjaṃ kappeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

125. Whatever bhikkhuni should sit together with a man in a secluded and concealed seat, pācittiya.

Rahonisajjasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Secluded Sitting

126.Yā pana bhikkhunī purisena saddhiṃ ekenekā raho nisajjaṃ kappeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

126. Whatever bhikkhuni should sit down alone with a man in a secluded place, pācittiya.

Bhojanavaggo dvādasamo.

The Twelfth Chapter on Food

Cārittasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Conduct

127.Yā pana bhikkhunī nimantitā sabhattā samānā santiṃ bhikkhuniṃ anāpucchā purebhattaṃ vā pacchābhattaṃ vā kulesu cārittaṃ āpajjeyya aññatra samayā, pācittiyaṃ. Tatthāyaṃ samayo, cīvaradānasamayo, cīvarakārasamayo, ayaṃ tattha samayo.

127. Whatever bhikkhuni, being invited and having agreed to take a meal, should engage in habitual visiting among families before or after the meal without informing a bhikkhuni, except at the proper time, pācittiya. Herein, this is the proper time: the time of robe-giving, the time of robe-making. This is the proper time therein.

Mahānāmasikkhāpadaṃ

The Mahānāma Training Rule

128.Agilānāya bhikkhuniyā catumāsappaccayapavāraṇā sāditabbā aññatra punapavāraṇāya, aññatra niccapavāraṇāya. Tato ce uttari sādiyeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

128. A bhikkhuni who is not ill may partake of an invitation for requisites for four months, except for a renewed invitation and except for a standing invitation. If she should partake of more than that, pācittiya.

Uyyuttasenāsikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on an Army Drawn Up

129.Yā pana bhikkhunī uyyuttaṃ senaṃ dassanāya gaccheyya aññatra tathārūpappaccayā, pācittiyaṃ.

129. Whatever bhikkhuni should go to see an army drawn up, except for a reason of such a kind, pācittiya.

Senāvāsasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on an Army Encampment

130.Siyā ca tassā bhikkhuniyā kocideva paccayo senaṃ gamanāya, dirattatirattaṃ tāya bhikkhuniyā senāya vasitabbaṃ. Tato ce uttari vaseyya, pācittiyaṃ.

130. If there should be some reason for that bhikkhuni to go to the army, that bhikkhuni may stay in the army for two or three nights. If she should stay more than that, pācittiya.

Uyyodhikasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on the Excitement of Battle

131.Dirattatirattaṃ ce bhikkhunī senāya vasamānā uyyodhikaṃ vā balaggaṃ vā senābyūhaṃ vā anīkadassanaṃ vā gaccheyya, pācittiyaṃ.

131. If a bhikkhuni staying in an army for two or three nights should go to see the excitement of battle, the alignment of forces, or a review of the troops, pācittiya.

Surāpānasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Intoxicating Drinks

132.Surāmerayapāne pācittiyaṃ.

132. For drinking intoxicants and fermented liquors, pācittiya.

Aṅgulipatodakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Finger-Snapping

133.Aṅgulipatodake pācittiyaṃ.

133. For finger-snapping, pācittiya.

Hasadhammasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Playfulness

134.Udake hasadhamme pācittiyaṃ.

134. For playfulness in the water, pācittiya.

Anādariyasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Disrespect

135.Anādariye pācittiyaṃ.

135. For disrespect, pācittiya.

Bhiṃsāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Frightening

136.Yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhuniṃ bhiṃsāpeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

136. Whatever bhikkhuni should frighten a bhikkhuni, pācittiya.

Cārittavaggo terasamo.

The Thirteenth Chapter on Conduct

Jotisikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on a Lamp

137.Yā pana bhikkhunī agilānā visibbanāpekkhā jotiṃ samādaheyya vā samādahāpeyya vā aññatra tathārūpappaccayā, pācittiyaṃ.

137. Whatever bhikkhuni, not being ill and not expecting to strain herself, should light or have a lamp lit, except for a reason of such a kind, pācittiya.

Nahānasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Bathing

138.Yā pana bhikkhunī orenaddhamāsaṃ nahāyeyya aññatra samayā, pācittiyaṃ. Tatthāyaṃ samayo ‘‘diyaḍḍho māso seso gimhāna’’nti ‘‘vassānassa paṭhamo māso’’ iccete aḍḍhateyyamāsā uṇhasamayo, pariḷāhasamayo, gilānasamayo, kammasamayo, addhānagamanasamayo, vātavuṭṭhisamayo, ayaṃ tattha samayo.

138. Whatever bhikkhuni should bathe more often than once every half-month, except at the proper time, pācittiya. Herein, this is the proper time: "A month and a half remains of the hot season," "The first month of the rains" – these two and a half months are the hot season, the time of burning heat, the time of sickness, the time of work, the time of travelling a long distance, the time of wind and rain. This is the proper time therein.

Dubbaṇṇakaraṇasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Discoloration

139.Navaṃ pana bhikkhuniyā cīvaralābhāya tiṇṇaṃ dubbaṇṇakaraṇānaṃ aññataraṃ dubbaṇṇakaraṇaṃ ādātabbaṃ nīlaṃ vā kaddamaṃ vā kāḷasāmaṃ vā. Anādā ce bhikkhunī tiṇṇaṃ dubbaṇṇakaraṇānaṃ aññataraṃ dubbaṇṇakaraṇaṃ navaṃ cīvaraṃ paribhuñjeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

139. When a bhikkhuni obtains a new robe, one of the three discolouring agents should be applied: blue, mud, or black dye. If a bhikkhuni should use a new robe without having applied one of the three discolouring agents, pācittiya.

Vikappanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Making a Gift and Taking it Back

140.Yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhussa vā bhikkhuniyā vā sikkhamānāya vā sāmaṇerassa vā sāmaṇeriyā vā sāmaṃ cīvaraṃ vikappetvā apaccuddhāraṇaṃ paribhuñjeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

140. Whatever bhikkhuni, having given a robe to a bhikkhu or a bhikkhuni or a sikkhamānā or a sāmaṇera or a sāmaṇerī, should use it without having taken it back, pācittiya.

Apanidhāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Hiding

141.Yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhuniyā pattaṃ vā cīvaraṃ vā nisīdanaṃ vā sūcigharaṃ vā kāyabandhanaṃ vā apanidheyya vā apanidhāpeyya vā antamaso hasāpekkhāpi, pācittiyaṃ.

141. Whatever bhikkhuni should hide or have hidden a bhikkhuni’s bowl or robe or sitting cloth or needle case or waistband, even for the sake of a joke, pācittiya.

Sañciccasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Deliberately

142.Yā pana bhikkhunī sañcicca pāṇaṃ jīvitā voropeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

142. Whatever bhikkhuni should deliberately deprive a living being of life, pācittiya.

Sappāṇakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Living Beings

143.Yā pana bhikkhunī jānaṃ sappāṇakaṃ udakaṃ paribhuñjeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

143. Whatever bhikkhuni should knowingly use water containing living beings, pācittiya.

Ukkoṭanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Training Rule on Threatening

144.Yā pana bhikkhunī jānaṃ yathādhammaṃ nihatādhikaraṇaṃ punakammāya ukkoṭeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

144. If a bhikkhuni, knowing that a case has been justly settled, bribes [someone] for a renewal [of the case], it is a pācittiya.

Theyyasatthasikkhāpadaṃ

Theft-intent Saṃgha Sikkhāpada

145.Yā pana bhikkhunī jānaṃ theyyasatthena saddhiṃ saṃvidhāya ekaddhānamaggaṃ paṭipajjeyya antamaso gāmantarampi, pācittiyaṃ.

145. If a bhikkhuni, knowingly making an arrangement with a thief, travels on the same road for a distance, even to another village, it is a pācittiya.

Ariṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ

Ariṭṭha Sikkhāpada

146.Yā pana bhikkhunī evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘tathāhaṃ bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmi, yathā yeme antarāyikā dhammā vuttā bhagavatā, te paṭisevato nālaṃ antarāyāyā’’ti. Sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi evamassa vacanīyā ‘‘māyye evaṃ avaca, mā bhagavantaṃ abbhācikkhi, na hi sādhu bhagavato abbhakkhānaṃ, na hi bhagavā evaṃ vadeyya, anekapariyāyenāyye antarāyikā dhammā antarāyikā vuttā bhagavatā, alañca pana te paṭisevato antarāyāyā’’ti. Evañca sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi vuccamānā tatheva paggaṇheyya, sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi yāvatatiyaṃ samanubhāsitabbā tassa paṭinissaggāya. Yāvatatiyañce samanubhāsiyamānā taṃ paṭinissajjeyya, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. No ce paṭinissajjeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

146. If a bhikkhuni should say, "As I understand the Dhamma taught by the Blessed One, those things that the Blessed One said are obstructive, are not sufficient to be obstructive for one who engages in them," that bhikkhuni should be addressed thus by the bhikkhunis: "Do not say so, venerable one, do not misrepresent the Blessed One, for it is not good to misrepresent the Blessed One, the Blessed One would not speak thus. In many ways, venerable one, obstructive things have been said to be obstructive by the Blessed One, and they are indeed sufficient to be obstructive for one who engages in them." If that bhikkhuni, being spoken to thus by the bhikkhunis, should persist in the same view, that bhikkhuni should be formally admonished by the bhikkhunis up to three times for the relinquishment of that view. If, while being formally admonished up to three times, she should relinquish that view, that is good. If she should not relinquish it, it is a pācittiya.

Jotivaggo cuddasamo.

The Fourteenth Jotivagga.

Ukkhittasambhogasikkhāpadaṃ

Suspended Communion Sikkhāpada

147.Yā pana bhikkhunī jānaṃ tathāvādiniyā bhikkhuniyā akaṭānudhammāya taṃ diṭṭhiṃ appaṭinissaṭṭhāya saddhiṃ sambhuñjeyya vā, saṃvaseyya vā, saha vā seyyaṃ kappeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

147. If a bhikkhuni, knowing that a bhikkhuni is of such a view and does not act according to the Dhamma and has not relinquished that view, associates with her, lives with her, or shares the same lodging, it is a pācittiya.

Kaṇṭakasikkhāpadaṃ

Kaṇṭaka Sikkhāpada

148.Samaṇuddesāpi ce evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘tathāhaṃ bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmi, yathā yeme antarāyikā dhammā vuttā bhagavatā, te paṭisevato nālaṃ antarāyāyā’’ti. Sā samaṇuddesā bhikkhunīhi evamassa vacanīyā ‘‘māyye, samaṇuddese evaṃ avaca, mā bhagavantaṃ abbhācikkhi, na hi sādhu bhagavato abbhakkhānaṃ, na hi bhagavā evaṃ vadeyya, anekapariyāyenāyye, samaṇuddese antarāyikā dhammā antarāyikā vuttā bhagavatā, alañca pana te paṭisevato antarāyāyā’’ti. Evañca sā samaṇuddesā bhikkhunīhi vuccamānā tatheva paggaṇheyya, sā samaṇuddesā bhikkhunīhi evamassa vacanīyā ‘‘ajjatagge te, ayye, samaṇuddese na ceva so bhagavā satthā apadisitabbo, yampi caññā samaṇuddesā labhanti bhikkhunīhi saddhiṃ dirattatirattaṃ sahaseyyaṃ, sāpi te natthi, cara pire, vinassā’’ti. Yā pana bhikkhunī jānaṃ tathānāsitaṃ samaṇuddesaṃ upalāpeyya vā, upaṭṭhāpeyya vā, sambhuñjeyya vā, saha vā seyyaṃ kappeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

148. If a samaṇuddesa should say, "As I understand the Dhamma taught by the Blessed One, those things that the Blessed One said are obstructive, are not sufficient to be obstructive for one who engages in them," that samaṇuddesa should be addressed thus by the bhikkhunis: "Do not say so, friend, samaṇuddesa, do not misrepresent the Blessed One, for it is not good to misrepresent the Blessed One, the Blessed One would not speak thus. In many ways, friend, samaṇuddesa, obstructive things have been said to be obstructive by the Blessed One, and they are indeed sufficient to be obstructive for one who engages in them." If that samaṇuddesa, being spoken to thus by the bhikkhunis, should persist in the same view, that samaṇuddesa should be addressed thus by the bhikkhunis: "From today onwards, friend, samaṇuddesa, neither may you call that Blessed One your teacher, nor will you have that sharing of lodging for two or three nights with the bhikkhunis which other samaṇuddesas obtain. Go away, disappear, perish!" If a bhikkhuni, knowing that a samaṇuddesa has been rejected in this way, waits upon her, supports her, associates with her, or shares the same lodging, it is a pācittiya.

Sahadhammikasikkhāpadaṃ

Sahadhammika Sikkhāpada

149.Yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi sahadhammikaṃ vuccamānā evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘na tāvāhaṃ, ayye, etasmiṃ sikkhāpade sikkhissāmi, yāva na aññaṃ bhikkhuniṃ byattaṃ vinayadharaṃ paripucchāmī’’ti, pācittiyaṃ. Sikkhamānāya, bhikkhave, bhikkhuniyā aññātabbaṃ paripucchitabbaṃ paripañhitabbaṃ, ayaṃ tattha sāmīci.

149. If a bhikkhuni, being addressed on a matter connected with the Dhamma by the bhikkhunis, should say, "I will not train myself in this training rule, venerable ones, until I have asked another bhikkhuni who is learned and a vinaya-holder," it is a pācittiya. A bhikkhuni, bhikkhus, should learn, should ask, should inquire. That is proper conduct in this matter.

Vilekhanasikkhāpadaṃ

Vilekhana Sikkhāpada

150.Yā pana bhikkhunī pātimokkhe uddissamāne evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘kiṃ panimehi khuddānukhuddakehi sikkhāpadehi uddiṭṭhehi, yāvadeva kukkuccāya vihesāya vilekhāya saṃvattantī’’ti, sikkhāpadavivaṇṇake pācittiyaṃ.

150. If a bhikkhuni should say, while the Pātimokkha is being recited, "What is the use of these minor and lesser training rules that are recited, which conduce only to scruples, vexation, and annoyance?" it is a pācittiya due to disparaging the training rules.

Mohanasikkhāpadaṃ

Mohana Sikkhāpada

151.Yā pana bhikkhunī anvaddhamāsaṃ pātimokkhe uddissamāne evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘idāneva kho ahaṃ, ayye, jānāmi ayampi kira dhammo suttāgato suttapariyāpanno anvaddhamāsaṃ uddesaṃ āgacchatī’’ti, tañce bhikkhuniṃ aññā bhikkhuniyo jāneyyuṃ nisinnapubbaṃ imāya bhikkhuniyā dvattikkhattuṃ pātimokkhe uddissamāne, ko pana vādo bhiyyo, na ca tassā bhikkhuniyā aññāṇakena mutti atthi, yañca tattha āpattiṃ āpannā, tañca yathādhammo kāretabbo, uttari cassā moho āropetabbo ‘‘tassā te, ayye, alābhā, tassā te dulladdhaṃ, yaṃ tvaṃ pātimokkhe uddissamāne na sādhukaṃ aṭṭhiṃ katvā manasi karosī’’ti, idaṃ tasmiṃ mohanake pācittiyaṃ.

151. If a bhikkhuni should say, while the Pātimokkha is being recited every half-month, "Only now, venerable ones, do I know that this Dhamma is included in the Suttas, is comprised in the Suttas, and comes up for recitation every half-month," and if other bhikkhunis know of her that this bhikkhuni has sat before while the Pātimokkha was being recited two or three times—how much more often [than that]!—there is no release for that bhikkhuni through ignorance, and whatever offense she has incurred there, she must be dealt with according to the Dhamma, and moreover, delusion must be imputed to her: "It is a loss to you, venerable one, it is ill-gotten by you, that you do not carefully attend and apply your mind when the Pātimokkha is being recited." In this case of delusion, it is a pācittiya.

Pahārasikkhāpadaṃ

Pahāra Sikkhāpada

152.Yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhuniyā kupitā anattamanā pahāraṃ dadeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

152. If a bhikkhuni, being angry and displeased, should strike a bhikkhuni, it is a pācittiya.

Talasattikasikkhāpadaṃ

Talasattika Sikkhāpada

153.Yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhuniyā kupitā anattamanā talasattikaṃ uggireyya, pācittiyaṃ.

153. If a bhikkhuni, being angry and displeased, should raise a palm-strike against a bhikkhuni, it is a pācittiya.

Amūlakasikkhāpadaṃ

Amūlaka Sikkhāpada

154.Yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhuniṃ amūlakena saṅghādisesena anuddhaṃseyya, pācittiyaṃ.

154. If a bhikkhuni should accuse a bhikkhuni of a saṅghādisesa offense without grounds, it is a pācittiya.

Sañciccasikkhāpadaṃ

Sañcicca Sikkhāpada

155.Yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhuniyā sañcicca kukkuccaṃ upadaheyya ‘‘itissā muhuttampi aphāsu bhavissatī’’ti etadeva paccayaṃ karitvā anaññaṃ, pācittiyaṃ.

155. If a bhikkhuni should intentionally cause worry to a bhikkhuni, thinking, "Even for a moment she will be uncomfortable," and with this as the only reason, and no other, it is a pācittiya.

Upassuti sikkhāpadaṃ

Upassuti Sikkhāpada

156.Yā pana bhikkhunī bhikkhunīnaṃ bhaṇḍanajātānaṃ kalahajātānaṃ vivādāpannānaṃ upassutiṃ tiṭṭheyya ‘‘yaṃ imā bhaṇissanti, taṃ sossāmī’’ti etadeva paccayaṃ karitvā anaññaṃ, pācittiyaṃ.

156. If a bhikkhuni should stand eavesdropping on bhikkhunis who are quarreling, disputing, and engaged in contention, thinking, "I will hear what they will say," and with this as the only reason, and no other, it is a pācittiya.

Diṭṭhivaggo pannarasamo.

The Fifteenth Diṭṭhivagga.

Kammappaṭibāhanasikkhāpadaṃ

Kammappaṭibāhana Sikkhāpada

157.Yā pana bhikkhunī dhammikānaṃ kammānaṃ chandaṃ datvā pacchā khīyanadhammaṃ āpajjeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

157. If a bhikkhuni, having given her consent to a lawful act, should afterwards show dissatisfaction, it is a pācittiya.

Chandaṃadatvāgamanasikkhāpadaṃ

Chandaṃadatvāgamana Sikkhāpada

158.Yā pana bhikkhunī saṅghe vinicchayakathāya vattamānāya chandaṃ adatvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkameyya, pācittiyaṃ.

158. If a bhikkhuni, while a matter of adjudication is being discussed in the Saṃgha, should leave her seat without giving her consent, it is a pācittiya.

Dubbalasikkhāpadaṃ

Dubbala Sikkhāpada

159.Yā pana bhikkhunī samaggena saṅghena cīvaraṃ datvā pacchā khīyanadhammaṃ āpajjeyya ‘‘yathāsanthutaṃ bhikkhuniyo saṅghikaṃ lābhaṃ pariṇāmentī’’ti, pācittiyaṃ.

159. If a bhikkhuni, after the Saṃgha has given a robe with unanimity, should afterwards show dissatisfaction, saying, "The bhikkhunis distribute the Saṃgha's gains according to favoritism," it is a pācittiya.

Pariṇāmanasikkhāpadaṃ

Pariṇāmana Sikkhāpada

160.Yā pana bhikkhunī jānaṃ saṅghikaṃ lābhaṃ pariṇataṃ puggalassa pariṇāmeyya, pācittiyaṃ.

160. If a bhikkhuni should knowingly divert a gain belonging to the Saṃgha to an individual, it is a pācittiya.

Ratanasikkhāpadaṃ

Ratana Sikkhāpada

161.Yā pana bhikkhunī ratanaṃ vā ratanasammataṃ vā aññatra ajjhārāmā vā ajjhāvasathā vā uggaṇheyya vā uggaṇhāpeyya vā, pācittiyaṃ. Ratanaṃ vā pana bhikkhuniyā ratanasammataṃ vā ajjhārāme vā ajjhāvasathe vā uggahetvā vā uggahāpetvā vā nikkhipitabbaṃ ‘‘yassa bhavissati, so harissatī’’ti, ayaṃ tattha sāmīci.

161. If a bhikkhuni should pick up or have picked up a jewel or what is considered a jewel, except in a monastery or dwelling place, it is a pācittiya. But a jewel or what is considered a jewel should be picked up by a bhikkhuni in a monastery or dwelling place and put away, [thinking,] "Whoever it belongs to will take it." That is proper conduct in this matter.

Sūcigharasikkhāpadaṃ

Sūcighara Sikkhāpada

162.Yā pana bhikkhunī aṭṭhimayaṃ vā dantamayaṃ vā visāṇamayaṃ vā sūcigharaṃ kārāpeyya, bhedanakaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

162. If a bhikkhuni should have a needle case made of bone, ivory, or horn, it is a pācittiya involving cutting.

Mañcapīṭhasikkhāpadaṃ

Mañcapīṭha Sikkhāpada

163.Navaṃ pana bhikkhuniyā mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā kārayamānāya aṭṭhaṅgulapādakaṃ kāretabbaṃ sugataṅgulena aññatra heṭṭhimāya aṭaniyā. Taṃ atikkāmentiyā chedanakaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

163. When a bhikkhuni is having a new couch or chair made, it should be made with legs eight aṅgulas [finger-breadths] long, according to the Sugata's aṅgula, apart from the lower cross-piece. To exceed that, it is a pācittiya involving cutting.

Tūlonaddhasikkhāpadaṃ

Tūlonaddha Sikkhāpada

164.Yā pana bhikkhunī mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā tūlonaddhaṃ kārāpeyya, uddālanakaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

164. If a bhikkhuni should have a couch or chair made stuffed with cotton, it is a pācittiya involving dismantling.

Kaṇḍuppaṭicchādisikkhāpadaṃ

Kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi Sikkhāpada

165.Kaṇḍuppaṭicchādiṃ pana bhikkhuniyā kārayamānāya pamāṇikā kāretabbā, tatridaṃ pamāṇaṃ, dīghaso catasso vidatthiyo sugatavidatthiyā, tiriyaṃ dve vidatthiyo. Taṃ atikkāmentiyā chedanakaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

165. When a bhikkhuni is having a kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi made, it should be made of the proper size. Here is the proper size: in length, four spans according to the Sugata's span; in width, two spans. To exceed that, it is a pācittiya involving cutting.

Nandasikkhāpadaṃ

Nanda Sikkhāpada

166.Yā pana bhikkhunī sugatacīvarappamāṇaṃ cīvaraṃ kārāpeyya, atirekaṃ vā, chedanakaṃ pācittiyaṃ. Tatridaṃ sugatassa sugatacīvarappamāṇaṃ, dīghaso nava vidatthiyo sugatavidatthiyā, tiriyaṃ cha vidatthiyo, idaṃ sugatassa sugatacīvarappamāṇanti.

166. If a bhikkhuni should have a robe made the size of the Sugata's robe, or larger, it is a pācittiya involving cutting. Here is the size of the Sugata's robe: in length, nine spans according to the Sugata's span; in width, six spans. This is the size of the Sugata's robe.

Dhammikavaggo soḷasamo.

The Sixteenth Dhammikavagga.

Uddiṭṭhā kho, ayyāyo, chasaṭṭhisatā pācittiyā dhammā. Tatthāyyāyo, pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, dutiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, tatiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, parisuddhetthāyyāyo, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmīti.

The 166 Pācittiya Dhammas have been recited, venerable ones. Therein I ask the venerable ones, are you pure in this matter? A second time I ask, are you pure in this matter? A third time I ask, are you pure in this matter? You are pure in this matter, venerable ones, therefore you are silent. Thus I understand this.

Pācittiyā niṭṭhitā.

The Pācittiyas are finished.

Pāṭidesanīyā
Pāṭidesanīyas

Ime kho panāyyāyo aṭṭha pāṭidesanīyā

These eight Pāṭidesanīya Dhammas come up for recitation, venerable ones.

Dhammā uddesaṃ āgacchanti.

  • *

Sappiviññāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

Sappiviññāpana Sikkhāpada

1.Yā pana bhikkhunī agilānā sappiṃ viññāpetvā bhuñjeyya, paṭidesetabbaṃ tāya bhikkhuniyā ‘‘gārayhaṃ, ayye, dhammaṃ āpajjiṃ asappāyaṃ pāṭidesanīyaṃ, taṃ paṭidesemī’’ti.

1. If a bhikkhuni, not being ill, asks for ghee and consumes it, that bhikkhuni should confess, "A blameworthy, unsuitable, Pāṭidesanīya Dhamma has been committed by me, venerable one, I confess it."

Telaviññāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

Telaviññāpana Sikkhāpada

2.Yā pana bhikkhunī agilānā telaṃ viññāpetvā bhuñjeyya…pe… taṃ paṭidesemīti.

2. If a bhikkhuni, not being ill, asks for oil and consumes it…pe… I confess it.

Madhuviññāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

Madhuviññāpana Sikkhāpada

3.Yā pana bhikkhunī agilānā madhuṃ viññāpetvā bhuñjeyya…pe… taṃ paṭidesemīti.

3. If a bhikkhuni, not being ill, asks for honey and consumes it…pe… I confess it.

Phāṇitaviññāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

Phāṇitaviññāpana Sikkhāpada

4.Yā pana bhikkhunī agilānā phāṇitaṃ viññāpetvā bhuñjeyya…pe… taṃ paṭidesemīti.

4. If a bhikkhuni, not being ill, asks for molasses and consumes it…pe… I confess it.

Macchaviññāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

Macchaviññāpana Sikkhāpada

5.Yā pana bhikkhunī agilānā macchaṃ viññāpetvā bhuñjeyya…pe… taṃ paṭidesemīti.

5. If a bhikkhuni, not being ill, asks for fish and consumes it…pe… I confess it.

Maṃsaviññāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

Maṃsaviññāpana Sikkhāpada

6.Yā pana bhikkhunī agilānā maṃsaṃ viññāpetvā bhuñjeyya…pe… taṃ paṭidesemīti.

6. If a bhikkhuni, not being ill, asks for meat and consumes it…pe… I confess it.

Khīraviññāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

Khīraviññāpana Sikkhāpada

7.Yā pana bhikkhunī agilānā khīraṃ viññāpetvā bhuñjeyya…pe… taṃ paṭidesemīti.

7. If a bhikkhuni, not being ill, asks for milk and consumes it…pe… I confess it.

Dadhiviññāpanasikkhāpadaṃ

Dadhiviññāpana Sikkhāpada

8.Yā pana bhikkhunī agilānā dadhiṃ viññāpetvā bhuñjeyya, paṭidesetabbaṃ tāya bhikkhuniyā ‘‘gārayhaṃ, ayye, dhammaṃ āpajjiṃ asappāyaṃ pāṭidesanīyaṃ, taṃ paṭidesemī’’ti.

8. If a bhikkhuni, not being ill, asks for yogurt and consumes it, that bhikkhuni should confess, "A blameworthy, unsuitable, Pāṭidesanīya Dhamma has been committed by me, venerable one, I confess it."

Uddiṭṭhā kho, ayyāyo, aṭṭha pāṭidesanīyā dhammā. Tatthāyyāyo, pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, dutiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, tatiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, parisuddhetthāyyāyo, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmīti.

The eight Pāṭidesanīya Dhammas have been recited, venerable ones. Therein I ask the venerable ones, are you pure in this matter? A second time I ask, are you pure in this matter? A third time I ask, are you pure in this matter? You are pure in this matter, venerable ones, therefore you are silent. Thus I understand this.

Pāṭidesanīyā niṭṭhitā.

The Pāṭidesanīyas are finished.

Sekhiyā
Sekhiyas

Ime kho panāyyāyo, sekhiyā dhammā uddesaṃ āgacchanti.

These Sekhiya Dhammas come up for recitation, venerable ones.

Parimaṇḍalasikkhāpadaṃ

Parimaṇḍala Sikkhāpada

1.Parimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

1. I will wear the lower robe completely around [the body], this is a training to be done.

2.Parimaṇḍalaṃ pārupissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

2. I will wrap the outer robe completely around [the body], this is a training to be done.

Suppaṭicchannasikkhāpadaṃ

Suppaṭicchanna Sikkhāpada

3.Suppaṭicchannā antaraghare gamissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

3. Well-covered, I will go in inhabited areas, this is a training to be done.

4.Suppaṭicchannā antaraghare nisīdissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

4. Well-covered, I will sit in inhabited areas, this is a training to be done.

Susaṃvutasikkhāpadaṃ

Susaṃvuta Sikkhāpada

5.Susaṃvutā antaraghare gamissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

5. Well-restrained, I will go in inhabited areas, this is a training to be done.

6.Susaṃvutā antaraghare nisīdissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

6. Well-restrained, I will sit in inhabited areas, this is a training to be done.

Okkhittacakkhusikkhāpadaṃ

Okkhittacakkhu Sikkhāpada

7.Okkhittacakkhunī antaraghare gamissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

7. With downcast eyes, I will go in inhabited areas, this is a training to be done.

8.Okkhittacakkhunī antaraghare nisīdissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

8. With downcast eyes, I will sit in inhabited areas, this is a training to be done.

Ukkhittakasikkhāpadaṃ

Ukkhittaka Sikkhāpada

9.Na ukkhittakāya antaraghare gamissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

9. Not with raised [robes], I will go in inhabited areas, this is a training to be done.

10.Na ukkhittakāya antaraghare nisīdissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

10. A training should be done: ‘I will not sit down in an inhabited area with body raised up.’

Parimaṇḍalavaggo paṭhamo.

The first Parimaṇḍala Vagga is finished.

Ujjagghikasikkhāpadaṃ

The Ujjagghika Sikkhāpada

11.Na ujjagghikāya antaraghare gamissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

11. A training should be done: ‘I will not go into an inhabited area laughing loudly (ujjagghikāya).’

12.Na ujjagghikāya antaraghare nisīdissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

12. A training should be done: ‘I will not sit down in an inhabited area laughing loudly (ujjagghikāya).’

Uccasaddasikkhāpadaṃ

Uccasaddasikkhāpadaṃ

13.Appasaddā antaraghare gamissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

13. A training should be done: ‘I will go quietly into an inhabited area.’

14.Appasaddā antaraghare nisīdissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

14. A training should be done: ‘I will sit quietly in an inhabited area.’

Kāyappacālakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Kāyappacālakasikkhāpada

15.Na kāyappacālakaṃ antaraghare gamissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

15. A training should be done: ‘I will not go into an inhabited area shaking the body (kāyappacālakaṃ).’

16.Na kāyappacālakaṃ antaraghare nisīdissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

16. A training should be done: ‘I will not sit down in an inhabited area shaking the body (kāyappacālakaṃ).’

Bāhuppacālakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Bāhuppacālakasikkhāpada

17.Na bāhuppacālakaṃ antaraghare gamissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

17. A training should be done: ‘I will not go into an inhabited area shaking the arms (bāhuppacālakaṃ).’

18.Na bāhuppacālakaṃ antaraghare nisīdissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

18. A training should be done: ‘I will not sit down in an inhabited area shaking the arms (bāhuppacālakaṃ).’

Sīsappacālakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sīsappacālakasikkhāpada

19.Na sīsappacālakaṃ antaraghare gamissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

19. A training should be done: ‘I will not go into an inhabited area shaking the head (sīsappacālakaṃ).’

20.Na sīsappacālakaṃ antaraghare nisīdissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

20. A training should be done: ‘I will not sit down in an inhabited area shaking the head (sīsappacālakaṃ).’

Ujjagghikavaggo dutiyo.

The second Ujjagghika Vagga is finished.

Khambhakatasikkhāpadaṃ

The Khambhakata Sikkhāpada

21.Na khambhakatā antaraghare gamissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

21. A training should be done: ‘I will not go into an inhabited area with arms akimbo (khambhakatā).’

22.Na khambhakatā antaraghare nisīdissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

22. A training should be done: ‘I will not sit down in an inhabited area with arms akimbo (khambhakatā).’

Oguṇṭhitasikkhāpadaṃ

The Oguṇṭhita Sikkhāpada

23.Na oguṇṭhitā antaraghare gamissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

23. A training should be done: ‘I will not go into an inhabited area with head covered (oguṇṭhitā).’

24.Na oguṇṭhitā antaraghare nisīdissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

24. A training should be done: ‘I will not sit down in an inhabited area with head covered (oguṇṭhitā).’

Ukkuṭikasikkhāpadaṃ

The Ukkuṭika Sikkhāpada

25.Na ukkuṭikāya antaraghare gamissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

25. A training should be done: ‘I will not go into an inhabited area squatting (ukkuṭikāya).’

Pallatthikasikkhāpadaṃ

The Pallatthika Sikkhāpada

26.Na pallatthikāya antaraghare nisīdissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

26. A training should be done: ‘I will not sit down in an inhabited area cross-legged (pallatthikāya).’

Sakkaccapaṭiggahaṇasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sakkaccapaṭiggahaṇa Sikkhāpada

27.Sakkaccaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ paṭiggahessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

27. A training should be done: ‘I will receive almsfood respectfully (sakkaccaṃ).’

Pattasaññinīpaṭiggahaṇasikkhāpadaṃ

The Pattasaññinīpaṭiggahaṇa Sikkhāpada

28.Pattasaññinī piṇḍapātaṃ paṭiggahessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

28. A training should be done: ‘I will receive almsfood focusing on the bowl (pattasaññinī).’

Samasūpakapaṭiggahaṇasikkhāpadaṃ

The Samasūpakapaṭiggahaṇa Sikkhāpada

29.Samasūpakaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ paṭiggahessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

29. A training should be done: ‘I will receive almsfood with balanced curry (samasūpakaṃ).’

Samatittikasikkhāpadaṃ

The Samatittika Sikkhāpada

30.Samatittikaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ paṭiggahessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

30. A training should be done: ‘I will receive almsfood in moderate portions (samatittikaṃ).’

Khambhakatavaggo tatiyo.

The third Khambhakata Vagga is finished.

Sakkaccabhuñjanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sakkaccabhuñjana Sikkhāpada

31.Sakkaccaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

31. A training should be done: ‘I will eat almsfood respectfully (sakkaccaṃ).’

Pattasaññinībhuñjanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Pattasaññinībhuñjana Sikkhāpada

32.Pattasaññinī piṇḍapātaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

32. A training should be done: ‘I will eat almsfood focusing on the bowl (pattasaññinī).’

Sapadānasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sapadāna Sikkhāpada

33.Sapadānaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

33. A training should be done: ‘I will eat almsfood in proper sequence (sapadānaṃ).’

Samasūpakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Samasūpaka Sikkhāpada

34.Samasūpakaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

34. A training should be done: ‘I will eat almsfood with balanced curry (samasūpakaṃ).’

Na thūpakatasikkhāpadaṃ

The Na Thūpakata Sikkhāpada

35.Na thūpakato omadditvā piṇḍapātaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

35. A training should be done: ‘I will not press down a heap and then eat almsfood.’

Odanappaṭicchādanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Odanappaṭicchādana Sikkhāpada

36.Na sūpaṃ vā byañjanaṃ vā odanena paṭicchādessāmi bhiyyokamyataṃ upādāyāti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

36. A training should be done: ‘I will not cover curry or sauce with rice, desiring more.’

Sūpodanaviññattisikkhāpadaṃ

The Sūpodanaviññatti Sikkhāpada

37.Na sūpaṃ vā odanaṃ vā agilānā attano atthāya viññāpetvā bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

37. A training should be done: ‘I will not, being not ill, ask for curry or rice for my own sake and then eat it.’

Ujjhānasaññinīsikkhāpadaṃ

The Ujjhānasaññinī Sikkhāpada

38.Na ujjhānasaññinī paresaṃ pattaṃ olokessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

38. A training should be done: ‘I will not look at another’s bowl with a mind of disdain (ujjhānasaññinī).’

Kabaḷasikkhāpadaṃ

The Kabaḷa Sikkhāpada

39.Nātimahantaṃ kabaḷaṃ karissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

39. A training should be done: ‘I will not make too large a mouthful (kabaḷaṃ).’

Ālopasikkhāpadaṃ

The Ālopa Sikkhāpada

40.Parimaṇḍalaṃ ālopaṃ karissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

40. A training should be done: ‘I will make a round mouthful (ālopaṃ).’

Sakkaccavaggo catuttho.

The fourth Sakkacca Vagga is finished.

Anāhaṭasikkhāpadaṃ

The Anāhaṭa Sikkhāpada

41.Na anāhaṭe kabaḷe mukhadvāraṃ vivarissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

41. A training should be done: ‘I will not open the mouth before the mouthful (kabaḷe) is brought (anāhaṭe).’

Bhuñjamānasikkhāpadaṃ

The Bhuñjamāna Sikkhāpada

42.Na bhuñjamānā sabbahatthaṃ mukhe pakkhipissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

42. A training should be done: ‘While eating, I will not put the whole hand into the mouth.’

Sakabaḷasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sakabaḷa Sikkhāpada

43.Na sakabaḷena mukhena byāharissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

43. A training should be done: ‘I will not speak with a mouthful (sakabaḷena) in the mouth.’

Piṇḍukkhepakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Piṇḍukkhepaka Sikkhāpada

44.Na piṇḍukkhepakaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

44. A training should be done: ‘I will not eat throwing morsels (piṇḍukkhepakaṃ).’

Kabaḷāvacchedakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Kabaḷāvacchedaka Sikkhāpada

45.Na kabaḷāvacchedakaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

45. A training should be done: ‘I will not eat biting off mouthfuls (kabaḷāvacchedakaṃ).’

Avagaṇḍakārakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Avagaṇḍakāraka Sikkhāpada

46.Na avagaṇḍakārakaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

46. A training should be done: ‘I will not eat filling the cheeks (avagaṇḍakārakaṃ).’

Hatthaniddhunakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Hatthaniddhunaka Sikkhāpada

47.Na hatthaniddhunakaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

47. A training should be done: ‘I will not eat shaking the hand (hatthaniddhunakaṃ).’

Sitthāvakārakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sitthāvakāraka Sikkhāpada

48.Na sitthāvakārakaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

48. A training should be done: ‘I will not eat scattering the remains (sitthāvakārakaṃ).’

Jivhānicchārakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Jivhānicchāraka Sikkhāpada

49.Na jivhānicchārakaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

49. A training should be done: ‘I will not eat sticking out the tongue (jivhānicchārakaṃ).’

Capucapukārakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Capucapukāraka Sikkhāpada

50.Na capucapukārakaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

50. A training should be done: ‘I will not eat making a smacking noise (capucapukārakaṃ).’

Kabaḷavaggo pañcamo.

The fifth Kabaḷa Vagga is finished.

Surusurukārakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Surusurukāraka Sikkhāpada

51.Na surusurukārakaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

51. A training should be done: ‘I will not eat making a slurping noise (surusurukārakaṃ).’

Hatthanillehakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Hatthanillehaka Sikkhāpada

52.Na hatthanillehakaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

52. A training should be done: ‘I will not eat licking the hand (hatthanillehakaṃ).’

Pattanillehakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Pattanillehaka Sikkhāpada

53.Na pattanillehakaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

53. A training should be done: ‘I will not eat licking the bowl (pattanillehakaṃ).’

Oṭṭhanillehakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Oṭṭhanillehaka Sikkhāpada

54.Na oṭṭhanillehakaṃ bhuñjissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

54. A training should be done: ‘I will not eat licking the lips (oṭṭhanillehakaṃ).’

Sāmisasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sāmisa Sikkhāpada

55.Na sāmisena hatthena pānīyathālakaṃ paṭiggahessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

55. A training should be done: ‘I will not receive a water pot with a soiled (sāmisena) hand.’

Sasitthakasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sasitthaka Sikkhāpada

56.Na sasitthakaṃ pattadhovanaṃ antaraghare chaḍḍessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

56. A training should be done: ‘I will not throw bowl-wash with remains (sasitthakaṃ) in an inhabited area.’

Chattapāṇisikkhāpadaṃ

The Chattapāṇi Sikkhāpada

57.Na chattapāṇissa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

57. A training should be done: ‘I will not teach Dhamma to one who is not ill and holding an umbrella (chattapāṇissa).’

Daṇḍapāṇisikkhāpadaṃ

The Daṇḍapāṇi Sikkhāpada

58.Na daṇḍapāṇissa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

58. A training should be done: ‘I will not teach Dhamma to one who is not ill and holding a stick (daṇḍapāṇissa).’

Satthapāṇisikkhāpadaṃ

The Satthapāṇi Sikkhāpada

59.Na satthapāṇissa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

59. A training should be done: ‘I will not teach Dhamma to one who is not ill and holding a knife (satthapāṇissa).’

Āvudhapāṇisikkhāpadaṃ

The Āvudhapāṇi Sikkhāpada

60.Na āvudhapāṇissa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

60. A training should be done: ‘I will not teach Dhamma to one who is not ill and holding a weapon (āvudhapāṇissa).’

Surusuruvaggo chaṭṭho.

The sixth Surusuru Vagga is finished.

Pādukasikkhāpadaṃ

The Pāduka Sikkhāpada

61.Na pādukāruḷhassa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

61. A training should be done: ‘I will not teach Dhamma to one who is not ill and wearing sandals (pādukāruḷhassa).’

Upāhanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Upāhana Sikkhāpada

62.Na upāhanāruḷhassa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

62. A training should be done: ‘I will not teach Dhamma to one who is not ill and wearing shoes (upāhanāruḷhassa).’

Yānasikkhāpadaṃ

The Yāna Sikkhāpada

63.Na yānagatassa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

63. A training should be done: ‘I will not teach Dhamma to one who is not ill and riding in a vehicle (yānagatassa).’

Sayanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Sayana Sikkhāpada

64.Na sayanagatassa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

64. A training should be done: ‘I will not teach Dhamma to one who is not ill and lying down (sayanagatassa).’

Pallatthikasikkhāpadaṃ

The Pallatthika Sikkhāpada

65.Na pallatthikāya nisinnassa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

65. A training should be done: ‘I will not teach Dhamma to one who is not ill and sitting cross-legged (pallatthikāya).’

Veṭhitasikkhāpadaṃ

The Veṭhita Sikkhāpada

66.Na veṭhitasīsassa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

66. A training should be done: ‘I will not teach Dhamma to one who is not ill and with head wrapped up (veṭhitasīsassa).’

Oguṇṭhitasikkhāpadaṃ

The Oguṇṭhita Sikkhāpada

67.Na oguṇṭhitasīsassa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

67. A training should be done: ‘I will not teach Dhamma to one who is not ill and with head covered (oguṇṭhitasīsassa).’

Chamāsikkhāpadaṃ

The Chama Sikkhāpada

68.Na chamāyaṃ nisīditvā āsane nisinnassa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

68. A training should be done: ‘I will not, sitting on the ground (chamāyaṃ), teach Dhamma to one who is not ill and sitting on a seat (āsane).’

Nīcāsanasikkhāpadaṃ

The Nīcāsana Sikkhāpada

69.Na nīce āsane nisīditvā ucce āsane nisinnassa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

69. A training should be done: ‘I will not, sitting on a low seat (nīce āsane), teach Dhamma to one who is not ill and sitting on a high seat (ucce āsane).’

Ṭhitāsikkhāpadaṃ

The Ṭhita Sikkhāpada

70.Na ṭhitā nisinnassa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

70. A training should be done: ‘I will not, while standing (ṭhitā), teach Dhamma to one who is sitting and not ill.’

Pacchatogacchantīsikkhāpadaṃ

Pacchatogacchantīsikkhāpada

71.Na pacchato gacchantī purato gacchantassa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

71. A training should be done: ‘I, walking behind (pacchato gacchantī), will not teach Dhamma to one walking in front (purato gacchantassa) who is not ill.’

Uppathenagacchantīsikkhāpadaṃ

The Uppathenagacchantī Sikkhāpada

72.Na uppathena gacchantī pathena gacchantassa agilānassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

72. A training should be done: ‘I, walking beside the path (uppathena gacchantī), will not teach Dhamma to one walking on the path (pathena gacchantassa) who is not ill.’

Ṭhitāuccārasikkhāpadaṃ

The Ṭhitāuccāra Sikkhāpada

73.Na ṭhitā agilānā uccāraṃ vā passāvaṃ vā karissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

73. A training should be done: ‘I will not, being not ill, pass excrement or urine while standing (ṭhitā).’

Hariteuccārasikkhāpadaṃ

The Hariteuccāra Sikkhāpada

74.Na harite agilānā uccāraṃ vā passāvaṃ vā kheḷaṃ vā karissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

74. A training should be done: ‘I will not, being not ill, pass excrement, or urine, or spit on green vegetation (harite).’

Udakeuccārasikkhāpadaṃ

The Udakeuccāra Sikkhāpada

75.Na udake agilānā uccāraṃ vā passāvaṃ vā kheḷaṃ vā karissāmīti sikkhā karaṇīyā.

75. A training should be done: ‘I will not, being not ill, pass excrement, or urine, or spit in water (udake).’

Pādukavaggo sattamo.

The seventh Pāduka Vagga is finished.

Uddiṭṭhā kho, ayyāyo, sekhiyā dhammā. Tatthāyyāyo, pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, dutiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, tatiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, parisuddhetthāyyāyo, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmīti.

The Sekhiya Dhammas, venerable ones, have been recited. I ask the venerable ones about this: Are you pure in this matter? And a second time I ask the venerable ones about this: Are you pure in this matter? And a third time I ask the venerable ones about this: Are you pure in this matter? You are pure in this matter, venerable ones, therefore you are silent. Thus, I will remember it.

Sekhiyā niṭṭhitā.

The Sekhiyas are finished.

Adhikaraṇasamathā
Adhikaraṇasamathā

Ime kho panāyyāyo, satta adhikaraṇasamathā

These seven Adhikaraṇasamathā

Dhammā uddesaṃ āgacchanti.

Dhammas, venerable ones, come to the recitation.

Uppannuppannānaṃ adhikaraṇānaṃ samathāya vūpasamāya sammukhāvinayo dātabbo.

The Sammukhāvinaya should be given for the appeasement and subsiding of arisen and arisen disputes.

Sativinayo dātabbo.

The Sativinaya should be given.

Amūḷhavinayo dātabbo.

The Amūḷhavinaya should be given.

Paṭiññāya kāretabbaṃ.

It should be settled by acknowledgement (paṭiññāya kāretabbaṃ).

Yebhuyyasikā.

According to the majority (yebhuyyasikā).

Tassapāpiyasikā.

Confession for the Tassapāpiyasikā.

Tiṇavatthārakoti.

Covering over with grass (tiṇavatthāraka).

Uddiṭṭhā kho ayyāyo satta adhikaraṇasamathā dhammā. Tatthāyyāyo pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, dutiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, tatiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, parisuddhetthāyyāyo, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmīti.

The seven Adhikaraṇasamathā Dhammas, venerable ones, have been recited. I ask the venerable ones about this: Are you pure in this matter? And a second time I ask the venerable ones about this: Are you pure in this matter? And a third time I ask the venerable ones about this: Are you pure in this matter? You are pure in this matter, venerable ones, therefore you are silent. Thus, I will remember it.

Adhikaraṇasamathā niṭṭhitā.

The Adhikaraṇasamathas are finished.

Uddiṭṭhaṃ kho ayyāyo nidānaṃ,

The Nidāna, venerable ones, has been recited.

Uddiṭṭhā aṭṭha pārājikā dhammā,

The eight Pārājika Dhammas have been recited.

Uddiṭṭhā sattarasa saṅghādisesā dhammā,

The seventeen Saṅghādisesa Dhammas have been recited.

Uddiṭṭhā tiṃsa nissaggiyā pācittiyā dhammā,

The thirty Nissaggiya Pācittiya Dhammas have been recited,

Uddiṭṭhā chasaṭṭhi satā pācittiyā dhammā,

The ninety-six Pācittiya Dhammas have been recited,

Uddiṭṭhā aṭṭha pāṭidesanīyā dhammā,

The eight Pāṭidesanīya Dhammas have been recited,

Uddiṭṭhā sekhiyā dhammā,

The Sekhiya Dhammas have been recited,

Uddiṭṭhā satta adhikaraṇasamathā dhammā, ettakaṃ tassa bhagavato suttāgataṃ suttapariyāpannaṃ anvaddhamāsaṃ uddesaṃ āgacchati, tattha sabbāheva samaggāhi sammodamānāhi avivadamānāhi sikkhitabbanti.

The seven Adhikaraṇasamatha Dhammas have been recited. This much of the Blessed One’s teaching, which is included in the Suttas, comes up for recitation every half-month. There, all should train in them harmoniously, rejoicingly, and without disputing.

Vitthāruddeso catuttho.

The fourth Extensive Recitation.

Bhikkhunipātimokkhaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ.

The Bhikkhunī Pāṭimokkha is concluded.

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Homage to that Blessed One, Worthy One, Perfectly Self-Enlightened One

Kaṅkhāvitaraṇī-aṭṭhakathā

Kaṅkhāvitaraṇī-aṭṭhakathā

Ganthārambhakathā
Introductory Words to the Text

Buddhaṃ dhammañca saṅghañca, vippasannena cetasā;

Having venerated the Buddha, the Dhamma, and the Sangha, with a clear mind,
Paying homage to those worthy of veneration, recipients of offerings and honor.

Theravaṃsappadīpānaṃ, thirānaṃ vinayakkame;

Having bowed with joined palms to the steadfast lions of the lineage of elders,
Who are firm in the discipline and are former teachers.

Pāmokkhaṃ anavajjānaṃ, dhammānaṃ yaṃ mahesinā;

The Pātimokkha, the foremost of the faultless Dhammas,
Was proclaimed by the Great Sage as the gateway to liberation.

Sūratena nivātena, sucisallekhavuttinā;

Requested by the wise, humble, and pure-minded Soṇatthera.

Tattha sañjātakaṅkhānaṃ, bhikkhūnaṃ tassa vaṇṇanaṃ;

For the sake of dispelling the doubts of those bhikkhus who have arisen with uncertainty there,
A complete and thorough exposition.

Mahāvihāravāsīnaṃ, vācanāmagganissitaṃ;

Based on the method of recitation of the residents of the Mahāvihāra,
Is beautifully called Kaṅkhāvitaraṇī.

Nidānavaṇṇanā

Explanation of the Introduction

pātimokkhanti paatimokkhaṃ atipamokkhaṃ atiseṭṭhaṃ atiuttamanti attho. Iti iminā vacanatthena ekavidhampi sīlaganthabhedato duvidhaṃ hoti. Tathā hi ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto viharatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.69; 3.75; vibha. 508) ca ‘‘ādimetaṃ mukhametaṃ pamukhametaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ, tena vuccati pātimokkha’’nti (mahāva. 135) ca ādīsu sīlaṃ pātimokkhanti vuccati, ‘‘ubhayāni kho panassa pātimokkhāni vitthārena svāgatāni hontī’’tiādīsu (pāci. 147; a. ni. 8.52; 10.33) gantho pātimokkhanti vuccati. Tatthasīlaṃyo naṃ pāti rakkhati, taṃ mokkheti mocayati āpāyikādīhi dukkhehi, attānuvādādīhi vā bhayehīti pātimokkhaṃ.Ganthopana tassa pātimokkhassa jotakattā pātimokkhanti vuccati. Ādimhi pana vutto vacanattho ubhinnampi sādhāraṇo hoti.

Pātimokkha: pātimokkhaṃ means exceeding pre-eminence, most excellent, and most supreme. Thus, by this expression, it is of one kind, but of two kinds in terms of the division of the text. As it is said, "He dwells restrained by the Pātimokkha-restraint" (Ma. Ni. 1.69; 3.75; Vibha. 508) and "This is the beginning, this is the face, this is the principal of skillful Dhammas, therefore it is called Pātimokkha" (Mahāva. 135), so sīla (virtue) is called Pātimokkha. But in "Both his Pātimokkhas are well-expounded in detail" (Pāci. 147; A. Ni. 8.52; 10.33) and so on, the text is called Pātimokkha. There, sīla (virtue) is Pātimokkha because it protects and liberates from sufferings such as those of the apāya realms, or from fears such as self-reproach. Gantho (the text), however, is called Pātimokkha because it is the indicator of that Pātimokkha. But the meaning of the word spoken at the beginning is common to both.

bhikkhupātimokkhaṃ,‘‘suṇātu me, ayye, saṅgho’’tiādikaṃ catūhi uddesaparicchedehi vavatthitaṃbhikkhunipātimokkhaṃ. Tattha bhikkhupātimokkhe pañca uddesā nāma nidānuddeso, pārājikuddeso, saṅghādisesuddeso, aniyatuddeso, vitthāruddesoti. Tattha nidānuddeso tāva ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho…pe… āvikatā hissa phāsu hoti, tatthāyasmante pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, dutiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, tatiyampi pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhā, parisuddhetthāyasmanto, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmī’’ti vatvā ‘‘uddiṭṭhaṃ kho āyasmanto nidāna’’ntiādinā nayena avasese sutena sāvite uddiṭṭho hoti. Pārājikuddesādīnaṃ paricchedā nidānassa ādito paṭṭhāya pārājikādīni osāpetvā yojetabbā. Vitthāro vitthāroyeva. ‘‘Avasesaṃ sutena sāvetabba’’nti (mahāva. 150; pari. 325) vacanato pana pārājikuddesādīsu yasmiṃ vippakate antarāyo uppajjati, tena saddhiṃ avasesaṃ sutena sāvetabbaṃ. Nidānuddese pana aniṭṭhite sutena sāvetabbaṃ nāma natthi. Bhikkhunipātimokkhe pana aniyatuddeso parihāyati, sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Evametesaṃ pañcahi ceva catūhi ca uddesaparicchedehi vavatthitānaṃ dvinnampi pātimokkhānaṃ ayaṃ vaṇṇanā bhavissati. Yasmā panettha bhikkhupātimokkhaṃ paṭhamaṃ, tasmā tassa tāva vaṇṇanatthamidaṃ vuccati.

Bhikkhupātimokkhaṃ: the Bhikkhupātimokkha, beginning with "May the Sangha listen to me, Venerables," is structured with four sections of recitation. Bhikkhunipātimokkhaṃ: the Bhikkhunīpātimokkha. There are five recitations in the Bhikkhupātimokkha, namely, the Nidānuddesa, the Pārājikuddesa, the Saṅghādisesuddesa, the Aniyatuddesa, and the Vitthāruddesa. There, the Nidānuddesa is recited in the manner beginning with "May the Sangha listen to me, Bhante…pe… because its disclosure is comfortable for him, therefore I ask the venerable ones, are you purified? A second time I ask, are you purified? A third time I ask, are you purified? You are purified here, venerable ones, therefore you are silent, thus I hold it," and ending with "The Nidāna has been recited, venerable ones" is completed by reciting the remainder of the Sutta. The divisions of the Pārājikuddesa and others should be connected by concluding the Pārājika and so on, starting from the beginning of the Nidāna. Vitthāro is indeed the detailed recitation. However, according to the statement "The remainder should be recited with the Sutta" (Mahāva. 150; Pari. 325), if an obstacle arises in any of the Pārājikuddesa and others, the remainder should be recited with the Sutta. But in the Nidānuddesa, there is nothing that needs to be recited with the Sutta if it is not completed. In the Bhikkhunīpātimokkha, however, the Aniyatuddesa is omitted; the rest is the same as stated above. Thus, this explanation will apply to both Pātimokkhas, which are structured with these five and four sections of recitation. Since the Bhikkhupātimokkha comes first in this text, this is said for the purpose of explaining it.

‘‘Suṇātu me’’tiādīnaṃ, padānaṃ atthanicchayaṃ;

The determination of the meaning of the words, beginning with "Suṇātu me,"
Bhikkhus who are accomplished in virtue and desirous of training, let them listen to me.

suṇātūtiidaṃ savanāṇattivacanaṃ.Meti yo sāveti, tassa attaniddesavacanaṃ.Bhanteti sagāravasappatissavacanaṃ.Saṅghoti puggalasamūhavacanaṃ. Sabbameva cetaṃ pātimokkhuddesakena paṭhamaṃ vattabbavacanaṃ. Bhagavatā hi pātimokkhuddesaṃ anujānantena rājagahe vuttaṃ, tasmā yo pātimokkhaṃ uddisati, tena sace saṅghatthero hoti, ‘‘āvuso’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sace navakataro hoti, pāḷiyaṃ (mahāva. 134) āgatanayeneva ‘‘bhante’’ti vattabbaṃ. Saṅghatthero vā hi pātimokkhaṃ uddiseyya ‘‘therādhikaṃ pātimokkha’’ntivacanato (mahāva. 154), navakataro vā ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yo tattha bhikkhu byatto paṭibalo, tassādheyyaṃ pātimokkha’’ntivacanato (mahāva. 155).

Suṇātu (let him hear): this is a word expressing the act of hearing. Me (to me): this is a word indicating oneself, the one who recites. Bhante (venerable sir): this is a respectful and courteous word. Saṅgho (the Sangha): this is a word for a group of individuals. All of this is the statement to be made first by the one who recites the Pātimokkha. Indeed, when the Blessed One allowed the recitation of the Pātimokkha, it was said in Rājagaha, therefore the one who recites the Pātimokkha, if he is a Thera of the Sangha, should say "Āvuso" (friend). If he is newer, he should say "Bhante" (venerable sir) in accordance with the way it comes in the Pāḷi (Mahāva. 134). Either a Thera of the Sangha might recite the Pātimokkha, because of the statement "The Pātimokkha is more for the Theras" (Mahāva. 154), or a newer one might, because of the statement "I allow, bhikkhus, that any bhikkhu there who is competent and capable may recite the Pātimokkha" (Mahāva. 155).

dakkhiṇeyyasaṅghoti aṭṭha ariyapuggalasamūho vuccati.Sammutisaṅghoti avisesena bhikkhusamūho, so idha adhippeto. So panesa kammavasena pañcavidho (mahāva. 388) hoti – catuvaggo pañcavaggo dasavaggo vīsativaggo atirekavīsativaggoti. Tatthacatuvaggenaṭhapetvā upasampadapavāraṇaabbhānāni sabbaṃ saṅghakammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati.Pañcavaggenaṭhapetvā majjhimesu janapadesu upasampadañca abbhānakammañca sabbaṃ saṅghakammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati.Dasavaggenaabbhānakammamattaṃ ṭhapetvā sabbaṃ saṅghakammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati.Vīsativaggenana kiñci saṅghakammaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati, tathāatirekavīsativaggena.So pana catuvaggādinā saṅghena kattabbaṃ kammaṃ ūnakatarena kātuṃ na vaṭṭati, atirekena pana vaṭṭatīti dassanatthaṃ vutto. Imasmiṃ panatthe catuvaggaṃ upādāya sabbopi sammutisaṅgho adhippeto.

Dakkhiṇeyyasaṅgho (the Sangha worthy of offerings) refers to the group of eight Ariya individuals. Sammutisaṅgho (the Sangha by convention) refers to the group of bhikkhus without distinction, and that is what is intended here. This is fivefold according to the act – a Sangha of four, a Sangha of five, a Sangha of ten, a Sangha of twenty, and a Sangha of more than twenty. There, the Sangha of four is fit to perform all Saṅghakammas except for the establishing of ordination, pavāraṇa, and the act of absolution. The Sangha of five is fit to perform all Saṅghakammas in the middle countries, except for the establishing of ordination and the act of absolution. The Sangha of ten is fit to perform all Saṅghakammas except for the act of absolution. The Sangha of twenty is not fit to perform any Saṅghakamma, nor is the Sangha of more than twenty. However, the act to be done by the Sangha of four or more is not fit to be done by a smaller number, but it is fit to be done by a larger number, and this is said to show that. In this meaning, however, the entire Sangha by convention, starting with the Sangha of four, is intended.

Ajjuposathoti ajja uposathadivaso, etena anuposathadivasaṃ paṭikkhipati.Pannarasoti iminā aññaṃ uposathadivasaṃ paṭikkhipati. Divasavasena hi tayo uposathā cātuddasiko pannarasiko sāmaggiuposathoti, evaṃ tayo uposathā vuttā. Tattha hemantagimhavassānānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ utūnaṃ tatiyasattamapakkhesu dve dve katvā chacātuddasikā,avasesā aṭṭhārasapannarasikāti evaṃ ekasaṃvacchare catuvīsati uposathā, idaṃ tāva pakaticārittaṃ. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sakiṃ pakkhassa cātuddase vā pannarase vā pātimokkhaṃ uddisitu’’nti (mahāva. 136) vacanato pana ‘‘āgantukehi āvāsikānaṃ anuvattitabba’’ntiādivacanato (mahāva. 178) ca tathārūpapaccaye sati aññasmimpi cātuddase uposathaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Purimavassaṃvuṭṭhānaṃ pana pubbakattikapuṇṇamā vā, tesaṃyeva sace bhaṇḍanakārakehi upaddutā pavāraṇaṃ paccukkaḍḍhanti, atha pubbakattikamāsassa kāḷapakkhacātuddaso vā, pacchimakattikapuṇṇamā vā, pacchimavassaṃvuṭṭhānañca pacchimakattikapuṇṇamā evāti ime tayo pavāraṇādivasāpi honti, idampi pakaticārittameva. Tathārūpapaccaye pana sati dvinnaṃ kattikapuṇṇamānaṃ purimesu cātuddasesupi pavāraṇaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Yadā pana kosambakakkhandhake (mahāva. 451) āgatanayena bhinne saṅghe osārite tasmiṃ bhikkhusmiṃ saṅgho tassa vatthussa vūpasamāya saṅghassa sāmaggiṃ karoti, tadā ‘‘tāvadeva uposatho kātabbo, pātimokkhaṃ uddisitabba’’nti (mahāva. 475) vacanato ṭhapetvā cātuddasapannarase, aññopi yo koci divasosāmaggiuposathadivasonāma hoti, purimavassaṃvuṭṭhānaṃ pana kattikamāsabbhantare ayameva sāmaggipavāraṇādivaso nāma hoti. Iti imesu tīsu divasesu ‘‘pannaraso’’tiiminā aññaṃ uposathadivasaṃ paṭikkhipati. Tasmā yvāyaṃ ‘‘ajjuposatho’’tivacanena anuposathadivaso paṭikkhitto, tasmiṃ uposatho na kātabboyeva. Yo panāyaṃ añño uposathadivaso, tasmiṃ uposatho kātabbo. Karontena pana sace cātuddasiko hoti, ‘‘ajjuposatho cātuddaso’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sace pannarasiko hoti, ‘‘ajjuposatho pannaraso’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sace sāmaggiuposatho hoti, ‘‘ajjuposatho sāmaggī’’ti vattabbaṃ.

Ajjuposatho (today is the Uposatha) means today is the Uposatha day, by this, it rejects a non-Uposatha day. Pannaraso (the fifteenth) by this, it rejects another Uposatha day. Indeed, according to the days, there are three Uposathas: the fourteenth, the fifteenth, and the sāmaggi Uposatha. Thus, three Uposathas are stated. There, in the third and seventh fortnights of the three seasons of the cold season, the hot season, and the rainy season, there are two each, making six cātuddasikā (fourteenth Uposathas), and the remaining eighteen are pannarasikā (fifteenth Uposathas). Thus, there are twenty-four Uposathas in one year; this is the natural practice. However, because of the statement "I allow, bhikkhus, to recite the Pātimokkha once in the fortnight, on the fourteenth or the fifteenth" (Mahāva. 136), and because of statements such as "Newcomers should follow the residents" (Mahāva. 178), it is fit to perform the Uposatha on another fourteenth as well, when there is such a reason. For those who have spent the Rains in the former residence, either the full moon of the first Kattika, or if they postpone the Pavāraṇa due to being disturbed by quarrelsome monks, then either the fourteenth of the dark fortnight of the first Kattika month, or the full moon of the later Kattika, and for those who have spent the Rains in the later residence, only the full moon of the later Kattika, these three are also Pavāraṇa days; this is also the natural practice. However, when there is such a reason, it is fit to perform the Pavāraṇa on the earlier fourteenths of the two Kattika full moons. But when the Sangha is divided in the way it comes in the Kosambaka Khandhaka (Mahāva. 451), when that bhikkhu is made to descend, and the Sangha makes harmony for the appeasement of that matter, then because of the statement "The Uposatha should be performed and the Pātimokkha should be recited at that very time" (Mahāva. 475), setting aside the fourteenth and fifteenth, any other day is called sāmaggiuposathadivaso (harmony Uposatha day). For those who have spent the Rains in the former residence, however, this same day within the month of Kattika is called the harmony Pavāraṇa day. Thus, in these three days, by this "pannaraso" (the fifteenth), it rejects another Uposatha day. Therefore, that non-Uposatha day which is rejected by the statement "ajjuposatho" (today is the Uposatha), the Uposatha should definitely not be performed on that day. But on that other Uposatha day, the Uposatha should be performed. However, when performing it, if it is a fourteenth, it should be said, "Today is the fourteenth Uposatha." If it is a fifteenth, it should be said, "Today is the fifteenth Uposatha." If it is a sāmaggi Uposatha, it should be said, "Today is the sāmaggi Uposatha."

Yadisaṅghassa pattakallanti ettha patto kālo imassa kammassāti pattakālaṃ, pattakālameva pattakallaṃ. Tadetaṃ idha catūhi aṅgehi saṅgahitaṃ. Yathāhu aṭṭhakathācariyā –

Yadi saṅghassa pattakalla (if it is the Sangha's proper time): here, pattakālaṃ means the time is appropriate for this act, the appropriate time itself is pattakallaṃ. This is included here with four factors. As the Aṭṭhakathā teachers say –

‘‘Uposatho yāvatikā ca bhikkhū kammappattā,

"As long as it is the Uposatha and as many bhikkhus are eligible for the act,
And there are no offenses of the same class;

uposathoti tīsu uposathadivasesu aññatarauposathadivaso. Tasmiñhi sati idaṃ saṅghassa uposathakammaṃ pattakallaṃ nāma hoti, nāsati. Yathāha ‘‘na ca, bhikkhave, anuposathe uposatho kātabbo, yo kareyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 183).

uposatho (the Uposatha) means any one of the three Uposatha days. Indeed, when that is present, this act of the Sangha is called the proper time, not when it is absent. As it is said, "Bhikkhus, the Uposatha should not be performed on a non-Uposatha day; whoever should do so, there is an offense of wrong-doing" (Mahāva. 183).

Yāvatikā ca bhikkhū kammappattāti yattakā bhikkhū tassa uposathakammassa pattā yuttā anurūpā, sabbantimena paricchedena cattāro pakatattā, te ca kho hatthapāsaṃ avijahitvā ekasīmāyaṃ ṭhitā.

Yāvatikā ca bhikkhū kammappattā (and as many bhikkhus are eligible for the act) means as many bhikkhus as are eligible, fit, and suitable for that Uposatha act, with the final limit being four who are proper, and who are standing within the same boundary without abandoning the reach of the hand.

baddhasīmānāma, ‘‘atikhuddakā, atimahatī, khaṇḍanimittā, chāyānimittā, animittā, bahisīme ṭhitā sammatā, nadiyā sammatā, samudde sammatā, jātassare sammatā, sīmāya sīmaṃ sambhindantena sammatā, sīmāya sīmaṃ ajjhottharantena sammatā’’ti imā hi ‘‘ekādasahi ākārehi sīmato kammāni vipajjantī’’ti (pari. 486) vacanato ekādasa vipattisīmāyo nāma. Tatthaatikhuddakānāma yattha ekavīsati bhikkhū nisīdituṃ na sakkonti.Atimahatīnāma yā antamaso kesaggamattenāpi tiyojanaṃ atikkamitvā sammatā.Khaṇḍanimittānāma aghaṭitanimittā vuccati, puratthimāya disāya nimittaṃ kittetvā anukkameneva dakkhiṇāya pacchimāya uttarāya disāya kittetvā puna puratthimāya disāya pubbakittitaṃ paṭikittetvā ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati, evaṃ akkhaṇḍanimittā hoti. Sace pana anukkamena āharitvā uttarāya disāya nimittaṃ kittetvā tattheva ṭhapeti, khaṇḍanimittā nāma hoti. Aparāpikhaṇḍanimittānāma yā animittupagaṃ tacasārarukkhaṃ vā khāṇukaṃ vā paṃsupuñjavālukapuñjānaṃ vā aññataraṃ antarā ekaṃ nimittaṃ katvā sammatā.Chāyānimittānāma pabbatacchāyādīnaṃ yaṃ kiñci chāyaṃ nimittaṃ katvā sammatā.Animittānāma sabbena sabbaṃ nimittāni akittetvā sammatā.Bahisīme ṭhitasammatānāma nimittāni kittetvā nimittānaṃ bahiṭhitena sammatā.Nadiyā samudde jātassare sammatānāma etesu nadiādīsu sammatā. Sā hi evaṃ sammatāpi ‘‘sabbā, bhikkhave, nadī asīmā, sabbo samuddo asīmo, sabbo jātassaro asīmo’’ti (mahāva. 147) vacanato asammatāva hoti.Sīmāya sīmaṃ sambhindantena sammatānāma attano sīmāya paresaṃ sīmaṃ sambhindantena sammatā. Sace hi porāṇakassa vihārassa puratthimāya disāya ambo ceva jambū cāti dve rukkhā aññamaññaṃ saṃsaṭṭhaviṭapā honti, tesu ambassa pacchimadisābhāge jambū, vihārasīmā ca jambuṃ anto katvā ambaṃ kittetvā baddhā hoti, atha pacchā tassa vihārassa puratthimāya disāya vihāre kate sīmaṃ bandhantā bhikkhū taṃ ambaṃ anto katvā jambuṃ kittetvā bandhanti, sīmāya sīmaṃ sambhinnā hoti.Sīmāya sīmaṃ ajjhottharantena sammatānāma attano sīmāya paresaṃ sīmaṃ ajjhottharantena sammatā. Sace hi paresaṃ baddhasīmaṃ sakalaṃ vā tassā padesaṃ vā anto katvā attano sīmaṃ sammannati, sīmāya sīmaṃ ajjhottharitā nāma hoti. Iti imā ekādasa vipattisīmāyo atikkamitvā sammatā.

Baddhasīmā (established boundary) namely, "too small, too large, with broken signs, with shadow signs, without signs, established standing outside the boundary, established in a river, established in the sea, established in a natural pool, established with a boundary overlapping a boundary, established with a boundary encroaching on a boundary." Indeed, these "eleven kinds of boundaries cause acts to fail" (Pari. 486), these are eleven kinds of defective boundaries. There, atikhuddakā (too small) means where twenty-one bhikkhus cannot sit. Atimahatī (too large) means that which is established exceeding three yojanas even by the tip of a hair. Khaṇḍanimittā (with broken signs) means with incomplete signs. Having marked the sign in the eastern direction, it is fit to mark it in sequence in the southern, western, and northern directions, and then having remarked it in the eastern direction, to establish it in the originally marked place; thus, it is with complete signs. But if, having brought it in sequence, one marks the sign in the northern direction and establishes it there, it is called with broken signs. Another khaṇḍanimittā (with broken signs) namely, that which is established with a tree containing heartwood or sapwood, a stump, or one of sand heap or gravel heap as one sign in between, close to an unmarked feature. Chāyānimittā (with shadow signs) means that which is established having made some shadow, such as the shadow of a mountain, a sign. Animittā (without signs) means that which is established without marking any signs at all. Bahisīme ṭhitasammatā (established standing outside the boundary) means that which is established by standing outside the signs after marking the signs. Nadiyā samudde jātassare sammatā (established in a river, sea, or natural pool) means that which is established in these rivers and so on. Indeed, even if it is established in this way, it is not established because of the statement "All rivers, bhikkhus, are without boundaries, all seas are without boundaries, all natural pools are without boundaries" (Mahāva. 147). Sīmāya sīmaṃ sambhindantena sammatā (established with a boundary overlapping a boundary) means that which is established with its boundary overlapping the boundary of others. If in an ancient monastery, in the eastern direction there are two trees, a mango and a jambu, with their branches intertwined, and in those trees, the jambu is in the western direction from the mango, and the monastery boundary is established with the jambu inside and marking the mango, then later, when a monastery is built in the eastern direction of that monastery, the bhikkhus, when establishing the boundary, establish it marking the jambu inside and marking the mango, it is with a boundary overlapping a boundary. Sīmāya sīmaṃ ajjhottharantena sammatā (established with a boundary encroaching on a boundary) means that which is established with its boundary encroaching on the boundary of others. If one establishes one's boundary including the established boundary of others in its entirety or a part of it, it is called with a boundary encroaching on a boundary. Thus, these eleven defective boundaries are those that are established transgressing these.

Tividhasampattiyuttāti nimittasampattiyā parisāsampattiyā kammavācāsampattiyā ca yuttā. Tatthanimittasampattiyā yuttānāma pabbatanimittaṃ, pāsāṇanimittaṃ, vananimittaṃ, rukkhanimittaṃ, magganimittaṃ, vammikanimittaṃ, nadinimittaṃ, udakanimittanti evaṃ vuttesu aṭṭhasu nimittesu tasmiṃ tasmiṃ disābhāge yathāladdhāni nimittupagāni nimittāni ‘‘puratthimāya disāya kiṃ nimittaṃ, pabbato, bhante, eso pabbato nimitta’’ntiādinā nayena sammā kittetvā sammatā. Tatrevaṃ saṅkhepato nimittupagatā veditabbā – suddhapaṃsusuddhapāsāṇaubhayamissakavasena hi tividhopipabbatohatthippamāṇato paṭṭhāya uddhaṃ nimittupago, tato omakataro na vaṭṭati.Pāsāṇanimitteayoguḷampi pāsāṇasaṅkhameva gacchati, tasmā yo koci pāsāṇo ukkaṃsavasena hatthippamāṇato omakataraṃ ādiṃ katvā heṭṭhimaparicchedena dvattiṃsapalaguḷapiṇḍaparimāṇo nimittupago, na tato khuddakataro. Piṭṭhipāsāṇo pana atimahantopi vaṭṭati.Vananimitteantosārehi vā antosāramissakehi vā rukkhehi catupañcarukkhamattampi vanaṃ nimittupagaṃ, tato ūnakataraṃ na vaṭṭati.Rukkhojīvantoyeva antosāro bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhito, antamaso ubbedhato aṭṭhaṅgulo, pariṇāhato sūcidaṇḍakappamāṇopi nimittupago, tato omakataro na vaṭṭati.Maggojaṅghamaggo vā hotu sakaṭamaggo vā, yo vinivijjhitvā dve tīṇi gāmakhettāni gacchati, tādiso jaṅghasatthasakaṭasatthehi valañjiyamānoyeva nimittupago, avalañjito na vaṭṭati.Vammikopana heṭṭhimaparicchedena taṃdivasaṃjāto aṭṭhaṅgulubbedho govisāṇamattopi vammiko nimittupago, tato omakataro na vaṭṭati. Yaṃ pana abaddhasīmālakkhaṇenadiṃvakkhāma, sā nimittupagā, aññā na vaṭṭati.Udakaṃyaṃ asandamānaṃ āvāṭapokkharaṇītaḷākajātassaraloṇisamuddādīsu ṭhitaṃ, taṃ ādiṃ katvā antamaso taṅkhaṇeyeva pathaviyaṃ khaṇite āvāṭake ghaṭehi āharitvā pūritampi yāva kammavācāpariyosānā saṇṭhamānakaṃ nimittupagaṃ, itaraṃ sandamānaṃ vā vuttaparicchedakālaṃ atiṭṭhantaṃ vā bhājanagataṃ vā na vaṭṭatīti.

Tividhasampattiyuttā means endowed with the three accomplishments: accomplishment of signs (nimitta), accomplishment of assembly (parisa), and accomplishment of the formal act (kammavācā). Therein, endowed with accomplishment of signs means, among the eight signs mentioned—mountain sign, rock sign, forest sign, tree sign, road sign, anthill sign, river sign, and water sign—those signs, in their respective directions, that have been properly determined and acknowledged by correctly declaring, in accordance with what has been obtained, regarding each sign, "What is the sign in the eastern direction, venerable sir? It is a mountain; this mountain is the sign," and so forth. Here, the things regarded as signs are to be understood in brief as follows: The mountain, even if threefold consisting of pure soil, pure rock, or a mixture of both, is regarded as a sign if it is from the size of an elephant upwards; anything smaller than that is not suitable. In the case of a rock sign, even an iron ball is included in the category of rock. Therefore, any rock, beginning with the size of an elephant in terms of excellence, and with a lower limit of the size of a lump of thirty-two palas, is regarded as a sign; anything smaller than that is not. However, a flat rock (piṭṭhipāsāṇa) is acceptable even if it is very large. In the case of a forest sign, even a forest consisting of four or five trees with heartwood or a mixture of trees with and without heartwood is regarded as a sign; anything less than that is not suitable. A tree, if it is a living tree with heartwood, standing firm on the ground, even if it is as small as eight finger-widths in height and the size of a needle-holder in circumference, is regarded as a sign; anything smaller than that is not suitable. A road, whether it is a footpath or a cart track, which clearly traverses two or three village fields, is regarded as a sign only if it is constantly frequented by pedestrians, pack animals, or carts; if it is not frequented, it is not suitable. However, an anthill, with a lower limit of eight finger-widths in height and the size of an ox's horn, even if it is formed on that very day, is regarded as a sign; anything smaller than that is not suitable. The river that we will describe in connection with unboundaried boundaries is regarded as a sign; other (rivers) are not suitable. Water, if it is standing still in a hollow, pond, lake, natural pool, saltwater sea, etc., beginning with that, even if it is something that has been dug in the ground at that very moment and filled with pots brought to the hollow, remains steady until the conclusion of the formal act, is regarded as a sign; other (water) that is flowing, or does not remain for the specified time, or is contained in a vessel is not suitable.

Parisāsampattiyā yuttānāma sabbantimena paricchedena catūhi bhikkhūhi sannipatitvā yāvatikā tasmiṃ gāmakhette baddhasīmaṃ vā nadisamuddajātassare vā anokkamitvā ṭhitā bhikkhū, te sabbe hatthapāse vā katvā chandaṃ vā āharitvā sammatā.

Endowed with accomplishment of assembly means that all the monks, assembled with a minimum of four monks, who are dwelling within that village field in a bounded boundary or who are dwelling without moving away from a river or natural pool originating in the sea, are acknowledged either by making them stay within arm's reach or by bringing their consent.

Kammavācāsampattiyāyuttānāma ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho, yāvatā samantā nimittā kittitā’’tiādinā (mahāva. 139) nayena vuttāya parisuddhāya ñattidutiyakammavācāya sammatā. Evaṃ ekādasa vipattisīmāyo atikkamitvā tividhasampattiyuttā nimittena nimittaṃ sambandhitvā sammatā sīmā ‘‘baddhasīmā’’ti veditabbā.Khaṇḍasīmā samānasaṃvāsasīmā avippavāsasīmāti tassāyeva pabhedo.

Endowed with accomplishment of the formal act means acknowledged by the pure ñattidutiyakammavācā that is stated in accordance with the method beginning with "Let the Sangha hear me, venerable sirs, the signs have been declared all around" (mahāva. 139). Thus, a boundary that has overcome the eleven kinds of defective boundaries and is acknowledged by connecting sign to sign, being endowed with the three accomplishments, is to be understood as a "bounded boundary" (baddhasīmā). Khaṇḍasīmā, samānasaṃvāsasīmā, avippavāsasīmā are subdivisions of that same boundary.

Abaddhasīmāpana gāmasīmā, sattabbhantarasīmā, udakukkhepasīmāti tividhā. Tattha yāvatā ekaṃ gāmakkhettaṃ, ayaṃgāmasīmānāma. Agāmake araññe samantā sattabbhantarāsattabbhantarasīmānāma. Tatthaagāmakaṃ nāma araññaṃviñjhāṭaviādīsu vā samuddamajjhe vā macchabandhānaṃ agamanapathesu dīpakesu labbhati.Samantā sattabbhantarāti majjhe ṭhitānaṃ sabbadisāsu sattabbhantarā vinibbedhena cuddasa honti. Tattha ekaṃ abbhantaraṃ aṭṭhavīsatihatthappamāṇaṃ hoti, ayañca sīmā parisāvasena vaḍḍhati, tasmā samantā parisāpariyantato paṭṭhāya abbhantaraparicchedo kātabbo. Sace pana dve saṅghā visuṃ uposathaṃ karonti, dvinnaṃ sattabbhantarānaṃ antare aññamekaṃ sattabbhantaraṃ upacāratthāya ṭhapetabbaṃ. Yā panesā ‘‘sabbā, bhikkhave, nadī asīmā’’tiādinā (mahāva. 147) nayena nadiādīnaṃ sīmabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipitvā puna ‘‘nadiyā vā, bhikkhave, samudde vā jātassare vā yaṃ majjhimassa purisassa samantā udakukkhepā, ayaṃ tattha samānasaṃvāsā ekūposathā’’ti vuttā ayaṃudakukkhepasīmānāma. Tattha yassā dhammikānaṃ rājūnaṃ kāle anvaḍḍhamāsaṃ anudasāhaṃ anupañcāhaṃ anatikkamitvā deve vassante valāhakesu vigatamattesu sotaṃ pacchijjati, ayaṃ nadisaṅkhyaṃ na gacchati. Yassā pana īdise suvuṭṭhikāle vassānassa catumāse sotaṃ na pacchijjati, yattha titthena vā atitthena vā sikkhākaraṇīye āgatalakkhaṇena timaṇḍalaṃ paṭicchādetvā antaravāsakaṃ anukkhipitvā uttarantiyā bhikkhuniyā ekadvaṅgulamattampi antaravāsako temiyati, ayaṃ samuddaṃ vā pavisatu taḷākaṃ vā, pabhavato paṭṭhāyanadīnāma.Samuddopākaṭoyeva. Yo pana kenaci khaṇitvā akato sayaṃjāto sobbho samantato āgatena udakena pūrito tiṭṭhati, yattha nadiyaṃ vuttappakāre vassakāle udakaṃ santiṭṭhati, ayaṃjātassaronāma. Yopi nadiṃ vā samuddaṃ vā bhinditvā nikkhantaudakena khato sobbho etaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ pāpuṇāti, ayampijātassaroyeva.

An unbounded boundary (abaddhasīmā), however, is of three kinds: village boundary (gāmasīmā), seven-leagues boundary (sattabbhantarasīmā), and water-casting boundary (udakukkhepasīmā). Therein, as far as a single village field extends, this is called a village boundary. In a non-village forest, a seven-leagues boundary all around is the boundary. Therein, a non-village forest (agāmakaṃ araññaṃ) can be found in the Vindhya forest (viñjhāṭavi) and other such places, or in islands in the middle of the sea where fishermen do not go. Samantā sattabbhantarā means that for those standing in the middle, there are fourteen leagues all around, with unobstructed passage. Therein, one league (abbhantara) is twenty-eight hatthas in extent, and this boundary increases according to the size of the assembly (parisa). Therefore, the limit of the league should be determined all around, starting from the edge of the assembly. But if two Sanghas perform the uposatha separately, another seven-leagues area should be established between the two seven-leagues areas for the sake of demarcation. But this which was said, rejecting the state of being a boundary for rivers etc., in accordance with the method beginning with "All rivers, monks, are non-boundaries" (mahāva. 147), and again, "Monks, in a river, or in the sea, or in a natural pool, whatever is the water-casting distance all around for a man of average strength, that is a samānasaṃvāsa and ekūposatha"—this is called a water-casting boundary. Therein, in the time of righteous kings, if the rain stops flowing after the clouds have disappeared, not exceeding half a month, ten days, or five days, this does not go under the count of a river. But if the stream does not stop flowing for four months of the rainy season in such a time of good rainfall, where, even if one bathes or does not bathe at a ford, and the edge of the lower garment is covered by the characteristics that have come to be, and the lower garment of a fully ordained nun, pulling it up, gets wet even by one or two finger-widths—whether this enters the sea or a lake, from its source, it is called a river. The sea is well-known. But that which has been dug by someone and not made naturally, a ditch (sobbha) that stands filled with water that has come from all around, where the water stands firm during the rainy season in the manner described for a river—this is called a natural pool (jātassara). Also, the ditch that is dug by water that has broken through a river or the sea and flows out, attains this characteristic; this too is indeed a natural pool.

Yaṃ majjhimassa purisassa samantā udakukkhepāti yaṃ ṭhānaṃ thāmamajjhimassa purisassa samantato udakukkhepena paricchinnaṃ, tattha yathā akkhadhuttā dāruguḷaṃ khipanti, evaṃ udakaṃ vā vālukaṃ vā hatthena gahetvā majjhimena purisena sabbathāmena khipitabbaṃ, tattha yattha evaṃ khittaṃ udakaṃ vā vālukaṃ vā patati, ayaṃudakukkheponāma.

Yaṃ majjhimassa purisassa samantā udakukkhepā means that the place that is delimited all around by the casting of water by a man of moderate strength—there, just as skilled gamblers throw a wooden ball, water or sand should be taken with the hand and thrown with all one's strength by a man of average strength. There, where the water or sand thus thrown falls, this is called water-casting (udakukkhepa).

Ayaṃ tattha samānasaṃvāsā ekūposathāti ayaṃ tesu nadiādīsu udakukkhepaparicchinnā sīmā samānasaṃvāsā ceva ekūposathā ca, ayaṃ pana etesaṃ nadiādīnaṃ antoyeva labbhati, na bahi. Tasmā nadiyā vā jātassare vā yattakaṃ padesaṃ pakativassakāle catūsu māsesu udakaṃ ottharati, samudde yasmiṃ padese pakativīciyo ottharitvā saṇṭhahanti, tato paṭṭhāya kappiyabhūmi, tattha ṭhatvā uposathādikammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Dubbuṭṭhikāle vā gimhe vā nadijātassaresu sukkhesupi sā eva kappiyabhūmi, sace pana sukkhe jātassare vāpiṃ vā khaṇanti, vappaṃ vā karonti, taṃ ṭhānaṃ gāmakkhettaṃ hoti. Yā panesā ‘‘kappiyabhūmī’’ti vuttā, tato bahi udakukkhepasīmā na gacchati, antoyeva gacchati, tasmā tesaṃ anto parisāpariyantato paṭṭhāya samantā udakukkhepaparicchedo kātabbo. Sace pana dve saṅghā visuṃ visuṃ uposathādikammaṃ karonti, dvinnaṃ udakukkhepānaṃ antare añño eko udakukkhepo upacāratthāya ṭhapetabbo. Ayañhi sattabbhantarasīmā ca udakukkhepasīmā ca bhikkhūnaṃ ṭhitokāsato paṭṭhāya labbhati. Paricchedabbhantare hatthapāsaṃ vijahitvā ṭhitopi paricchedato bahi aññaṃ tattakaṃyeva paricchedaṃ anatikkamitvā ṭhitopi kammaṃ kopeti, idaṃ sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu (mahāva. aṭṭha. 147) sanniṭṭhānaṃ. Evaṃabaddhasīmāveditabbā. Iti imaṃ baddhasīmābaddhasīmāvasena duvidhaṃ sīmaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘te ca kho hatthapāsaṃ avijahitvā ekasīmāyaṃ ṭhitā’’ti. Tesu hi catūsu bhikkhūsu ekasīmāyaṃ hatthapāsaṃ avijahitvā ṭhitesvevetaṃ saṅghassa uposathakammaṃ pattakallaṃ nāma hoti, na itarathā. Yathāha ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, catunnaṃ pātimokkhaṃ uddisitu’’nti (mahāva. 168).

Ayaṃ tattha samānasaṃvāsā ekūposathāti this boundary delimited by water-casting in those rivers etc. is both samānasaṃvāsa and ekūposatha; but this can only be found within those rivers etc., not outside. Therefore, in a river or natural pool, as much area as the water covers during the natural rainy season of four months; in the sea, in whatever area the natural waves surge and remain—from there onwards, the ground is allowable (kappiyabhūmi); it is permissible to perform the uposatha and other acts standing there. Even if the rivers and natural pools dry up during a time of drought or in the summer, that same (ground) is allowable. But if they dig a well or make a dam in a dried-up natural pool, that place becomes a village field. But this which has been said, "allowable ground," the water-casting boundary does not go outside that, it goes inside only. Therefore, within that, the delimitation of water-casting should be done all around starting from the edge of the assembly. But if two Sanghas perform the uposatha and other acts separately, another single water-casting should be established between the two water-castings for the sake of demarcation. For this seven-leagues boundary and water-casting boundary are obtained starting from the standing place of the monks. Even if one stands outside the delimitation, having abandoned arm's reach within the delimitation, one corrupts the act if one stands without exceeding another delimitation of that same amount; this is the conclusion in all the commentaries (mahāva. aṭṭha. 147). Thus, unbounded boundary is to be understood. Thus, with reference to this boundary being twofold by way of bounded and unbounded boundaries, this was said: "And these should be dwelling in the same boundary without abandoning arm's reach." For only when these four monks are dwelling in the same boundary without abandoning arm's reach does this act of uposatha of the Sangha become proper, not otherwise. As he said, "I allow, monks, the reciting of the Pātimokkha to four" (mahāva. 168).

Sabhāgāpattiyo ca na vijjantīti ettha yaṃ sabbo saṅgho vikālabhojanādinā sabhāgavatthunā lahukāpattiṃ āpajjati, evarūpā vatthusabhāgā ‘‘sabhāgā’’ti vuccati, vikālabhojanapaccayā āpannaṃ pana āpattisabhāgaṃ anatirittabhojanapaccayā āpannassa santike desetuṃ vaṭṭati. Sabhāgāpattiyā pana sati tehi bhikkhūhi eko bhikkhu sāmantā āvāsā sajjukaṃ pāhetabbo ‘‘gacchāvuso, taṃ āpattiṃ paṭikaritvā āgaccha, mayaṃ te santike āpattiṃ paṭikarissāmā’’ti, evañcetaṃ labhetha, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ, no ce labhetha, byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho, ayaṃ sabbo saṅgho sabhāgaṃ āpattiṃ āpanno, yadā aññaṃ bhikkhuṃ suddhaṃ anāpattikaṃ passissati, tadā tassa santike taṃ āpattiṃ paṭikarissatī’’ti (mahāva. 171) vatvā uposatho kātabbo. Sace pana vematiko hoti, ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho, ayaṃ sabbo saṅgho sabhāgāya āpattiyā vematiko, yadā nibbematiko bhavissati, tadā taṃ āpattiṃ paṭikarissatī’’ti vatvā uposatho kātabbo. Sace panettha koci taṃ sabhāgaṃ āpattiṃ desetuṃ vaṭṭatīti maññamāno ekassa santike deseti, desitā sudesitāva. Aññaṃ pana desanāpaccayā desako, paṭiggahaṇapaccayā paṭiggāhako cāti ubhopi dukkaṭaṃ āpajjanti, taṃ nānāvatthukaṃ hoti, tasmā aññamaññaṃ desetabbaṃ. Ettāvatā te dve nirāpattikā honti, tesaṃ santike sesehi sabhāgāpattiyo desetabbā vā ārocetabbā vā. Sace te evaṃ akatvā uposathaṃ karonti, ‘‘pārisuddhiṃ āyasmanto ārocethā’’tiādinā (mahāva. 134) nayena sāpattikassa uposathakaraṇe paññattaṃ dukkaṭaṃ āpajjanti. Sace sabbo saṅgho sabhāgāpattiyā sati vuttavidhiṃ akatvā uposathaṃ karoti, vuttanayeneva sabbo saṅgho āpattiṃ āpajjati, tasmā sabhāgāpattiyā sati saṅghassa pattakallaṃ nāma na hoti, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sabhāgāpattiyo ca na vijjantī’’ti. Etāsu hi sabhāgāpattīsu avijjamānāsu visabhāgāpattīsu vijjamānāsupi pattakallaṃ hotiyeva.

Sabhāgāpattiyo ca na vijjantīti Here, the slight offense that the entire Sangha incurs through partaking of food at the wrong time, etc., with a common object, such a shared object is called "sabhāga." But it is permissible to declare to one who has incurred (an offense) because of the condition of partaking of food at the wrong time, to one who has incurred (an offense) because of the condition of eating an excessive amount of non-surplus food. But when there is a sabhāgāpatti, one monk among those monks should be sent straight to a nearby monastery, (saying), "Go, friend, having rectified that offense, come back; we will rectify the offense with you." If he obtains it in this way, that is skillful. If he does not obtain it, a knowledgeable and capable monk should inform the Sangha: "Let the Sangha hear me, venerable sirs, this entire Sangha has incurred a sabhāga offense. Whenever it sees another monk who is pure and free from offense, it will rectify that offense with him" (mahāva. 171), and the uposatha should be performed after saying this. But if he is doubtful, the uposatha should be performed after saying, "Let the Sangha hear me, venerable sirs, this entire Sangha is doubtful about a sabhāga offense; whenever it becomes free from doubt, it will rectify that offense." If, however, someone here, thinking that it is permissible to declare that sabhāga offense, declares it to one person, it is indeed a well-declared (offense). However, due to the condition of declaring, the declarer incurs a dukkaṭa offense, and due to the condition of receiving, the receiver incurs a dukkaṭa offense; that is (an offense) with different bases. Therefore, they should declare to each other. By this much, those two become free from offense. To them, the remaining ones should declare or announce the sabhāga offenses. If they perform the uposatha without doing this, they incur the dukkaṭa offense that is prescribed for performing the uposatha while being with offense, in accordance with the method beginning with "Venerable sirs, announce your purity" (mahāva. 134). If the entire Sangha, with a sabhāgāpatti present, performs the uposatha without doing the procedure that has been described, the entire Sangha incurs an offense in the manner that has been described. Therefore, when there is a sabhāgāpatti, it is not proper for the Sangha; hence it was said, "And sabhāga offenses do not exist." Indeed, when these sabhāga offenses are non-existent, even when visabhāga offenses exist, it is still proper.

Vajjanīyā ca puggalā tasmiṃ na hontīti ‘‘na, bhikkhave, sagahaṭṭhāya parisāya pātimokkhaṃ uddisitabbaṃ, yo uddiseyya āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 154) vacanato gahaṭṭho, ‘‘na, bhikkhave, bhikkhuniyā nisinnaparisāya pātimokkhaṃ uddisitabba’’ntiādinā (mahāva. 183) nayena vuttā bhikkhunī, sikkhamānā, sāmaṇero, sāmaṇerī, sikkhāpaccakkhātako, antimavatthuajjhāpannako, āpattiyā adassane ukkhittako, āpattiyā appaṭikamme ukkhittako, pāpikāya diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissagge ukkhittako, paṇḍako, theyyasaṃvāsako, titthiyapakkantako, tiracchānagato, mātughātako, pitughātako arahantaghātako, bhikkhunidūsako, saṅghabhedako, lohituppādako, ubhatobyañjanakoti ime vīsati cāti ekavīsati puggalā vajjanīyā nāma, te hatthapāsato bahikaraṇavasena vajjetabbā. Etesu hi tividhe ukkhittake sati uposathaṃ karonto saṅgho pācittiyaṃ āpajjati, sesesu dukkaṭaṃ. Ettha catiracchānagatoti yassa upasampadā paṭikkhittā, titthiyā gahaṭṭheneva saṅgahitā. Etepi hi vajjanīyā nāma. Evaṃ pattakallaṃ imehi catūhi aṅgehi saṅgahitanti veditabbaṃ.

Vajjanīyā ca puggalā tasmiṃ na hontīti "Monks, the Pātimokkha should not be recited to an assembly together with householders; whoever recites it incurs a dukkaṭa offense" (mahāva. 154); because of this statement, a householder (gahattha); "Monks, the Pātimokkha should not be recited in an assembly where nuns are sitting," (mahāva. 183) and the nun stated in that method; a female trainee (sikkhamānā), a novice (sāmaṇera), a female novice (sāmaṇerī), one who has renounced the training (sikkhāpaccakkhātaka), one who has fallen into the last ground (antimavatthuajjhāpannaka), one who has been suspended for not seeing an offense (āpattiyā adassane ukkhittako), one who has been suspended for not making amends for an offense (āpattiyā appaṭikamme ukkhittako), one who has been suspended for not relinquishing a wicked view (pāpikāya diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissagge ukkhittako), a eunuch (paṇḍaka), one in communion with a thief (theyyasaṃvāsaka), one who has gone over to the sectarians (titthiyapakkantaka), one who is an animal (tiracchānagato), one who has killed his mother (mātughātako), one who has killed his father (pitughātako), one who has killed an arahant (arahantaghātako), one who has violated a nun (bhikkhunidūsako), one who has caused a schism in the Sangha (saṅghabhedako), one who has shed blood (lohiuppādako), one who is a hermaphrodite (ubhatobyañjana)—these twenty-one individuals are called "to be avoided" (vajjanīyā); they should be avoided by excluding them from arm's reach. Indeed, when there are these three kinds of suspended monks, the Sangha incurs a pācittiya offense while performing the uposatha, and in the remaining cases, a dukkaṭa offense. And here, tiracchānagato means one whose ordination has been rejected; sectarians are included with householders indeed. These too are called "to be avoided." Thus, it should be understood that being proper is encompassed by these four factors.

Saṅgho uposathaṃ kareyyātiiminā ye te aparepi tayo uposathā saṅghe uposatho, gaṇe uposatho, puggale uposathoti, evaṃ kārakavasena tayo uposathā vuttā, tesu itare dve paṭikkhipitvā saṅghe uposathameva dīpeti.Pātimokkhaṃ uddiseyyātiiminā ye te aparepi tayo uposathā suttuddeso, pārisuddhiuposatho, adhiṭṭhānauposathoti, evaṃ kattabbākāravasena tayo uposathā vuttā, tesu itare dve paṭikkhipitvā suttuddesameva dīpeti.Suttuddesonāma pātimokkhuddeso vuccati, so duvidho ovādapātimokkhuddeso ca āṇāpātimokkhuddeso ca. Tattha

Saṅgho uposathaṃ kareyyāti By this, he reveals only the uposatha of the Sangha (saṅghe uposatho), having rejected the other two uposathas among those other three uposathas—the uposatha by the Sangha, the uposatha by a group (gaṇe uposatho), and the uposatha by an individual (puggale uposatho)—thus, three uposathas that have been stated by way of the agent. Pātimokkhaṃ uddiseyyāti By this, he reveals only the reciting of the sutta, having rejected the other two uposathas among those other three uposathas—the reciting of the sutta (suttuddeso), the uposatha of purification (pārisuddhiuposatho), and the uposatha of determination (adhiṭṭhānauposatho)—thus, three uposathas that have been stated by way of the action to be done. Suttuddeso means that the reciting of the Pātimokkha is called (that); it is twofold: the reciting of the admonition Pātimokkha (ovādapātimokkhuddeso) and the reciting of the command Pātimokkha (āṇāpātimokkhuddeso). Therein,

‘‘Khantī paramaṃ tapo titikkhā…pe….

"Forbearing patience is the highest austerity…pe….

‘‘Sabbapāpassa akaraṇaṃ…pe….

"Non-doing of all evil…pe….

‘‘Anūpavādo anūpaghāto’’ti. (dī. ni. 2.90; dha. pa. 184, 183, 185)

"Not reviling, not harming" (dī. ni. 2.90; dha. pa. 184, 183, 185)

ovādapātimokkhaṃnāma, taṃ buddhā eva uddisanti, na sāvakā. ‘‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho’’tiādinā (mahāva. 134) nayena vuttaṃāṇāpātimokkhaṃnāma, taṃ sāvakā eva uddisanti, na buddhā. Idameva ca imasmiṃ atthe ‘‘pātimokkha’’nti adhippetaṃ.

is called admonition Pātimokkha; only Buddhas recite that, not disciples. What is stated in the method beginning with "Let the Sangha hear me, venerable sirs" (mahāva. 134) is called command Pātimokkha; only disciples recite that, not Buddhas. And this same is what is intended by "Pātimokkha" in this context.

pārisuddhiuposathotāva aññesañca santike, aññamaññañca ārocanavasena duvidho. Tattha yvāyaṃ aññesaṃ santike karīyati, sopi pavāritānañca appavāritānañca santike karaṇavasena duvidho. Tattha mahāpavāraṇāya pavāritānaṃ santike pacchimikāya upagatena vā anupagatena vā chinnavassena vā cātumāsiniyaṃ pana pavāritānaṃ santike purimikāya upagatena vā anupagatena vā chinnavassena vā kāyasāmaggiṃ datvā ‘‘parisuddho ahaṃ, bhante, ‘parisuddho’ti maṃ dhārethā’’ti tikkhattuṃ vatvā kātabbo, ṭhapetvā ca pana pavāraṇādivasaṃ aññasmiṃ kāle āvāsikehi uddiṭṭhamatte pātimokkhe avuṭṭhitāya vā ekaccāya vuṭṭhitāya vā sabbāya vā vuṭṭhitāya parisāya ye aññe samasamā vā thokatarā vā āgacchanti, tehi tesaṃ santike vuttanayeneva pārisuddhi ārocetabbā. Yo panāyaṃ aññamaññaṃ ārocanavasena karīyati, so ñattiṃ ṭhapetvā ca aṭṭhapetvā ca karaṇavasena duvidho. Tattha yasmiṃ āvāse tayo bhikkhū viharanti, tesu uposathadivase sannipatitesu ekena bhikkhunā ‘‘suṇantu me āyasmantā ajjuposatho cātuddaso’’ti vā ‘‘pannaraso’’ti vā vatvā ‘‘yadāyasmantānaṃ pattakallaṃ mayaṃ aññamaññaṃ pārisuddhiuposathaṃ kareyyāmā’’ti ñattiyā ṭhapitāya therena bhikkhunā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā ‘‘parisuddho ahaṃ, āvuso, ‘parisuddho’ti maṃ dhārethā’’ti (mahāva. 168) tikkhattuṃ vattabbaṃ. Itarehi ‘‘bhante’’ti vatvā evameva vattabbaṃ. Evaṃ ñattiṃ ṭhapetvā kātabbo. Yattha pana dve bhikkhū viharanti, tatra ñattiṃ aṭṭhapetvā vuttanayeneva pārisuddhi ārocetabbāti ayaṃpārisuddhiuposatho.

Pārisuddhiuposatha (Uposatha of Purity) is twofold, based on declaring it to others and declaring it mutually. Of these, that which is done to others is twofold, based on doing it to those who have invited (pavārita) and those who have not invited. There, having given group consent (kāyasamaggi) to those who have invited during the Mahāpavāraṇā, either by one who has observed the final Uposatha, or has not observed it, or who has cut short the rains residence (chinnavassa); or to those who have invited during the four-month period (cātumāsiniyaṃ), either by one who has observed the first Uposatha, or has not observed it, or who has cut short the rains residence, one should say three times, "I am pure, venerable sirs; please remember me as ‘pure’," and then it should be done. Moreover, except for the Pavāraṇā day, at any other time, when the Pātimokkha is recited by the resident monks, whether the assembly has not yet stood up, or one has stood up, or all have stood up, then any others who arrive, whether equal in seniority or younger, should declare their purity to those present in the manner described above. That which is done mutually by way of declaring is twofold, based on making a motion (ñatti) or not making a motion. There, in a monastery where three monks reside, when they have gathered on the Uposatha day, one monk should say, "May the venerable ones listen to me. Today is the fourteenth Uposatha," or "the fifteenth," and then, "If it is convenient for the venerable ones, we may perform the Pārisuddhiuposatha mutually," after making this motion, the senior monk, arranging the upper robe over one shoulder, squatting, raising his joined palms, should say three times, "I am pure, friend; please remember me as ‘pure’" (mahāva. 168). The others should reply, "Bhante," and say the same. Thus, it should be done after making a motion. But where two monks reside, there, without making a motion, the Pārisuddhi should be declared in the manner described above. This is the Pārisuddhiuposatha.

adhiṭṭhānuposathoti evaṃ kattabbākāravasena tayo uposathāti veditabbā. Ettāvatānava uposathādīpitā honti. Tesu divasavasena pannarasiko, kārakavasena saṅghuposatho, kattabbākāravasena suttuddesoti evaṃ tilakkhaṇasampanno uposatho idha niddiṭṭhoti veditabbo. Tasmiṃ pavattamāne uposathaṃ akatvā tadahuposathe aññaṃ abhikkhukaṃ nānāsaṃvāsakehi vā sabhikkhukaṃ āvāsaṃ vā anāvāsaṃ vā vāsatthāya aññatra saṅghena, aññatra antarāyā gacchantassa dukkaṭaṃ hoti.

Adhiṭṭhānuposatha (Uposatha of Determination): Thus, the three Uposathas are to be understood in terms of the manner in which they are to be performed. Thus, the nine Uposathas have been indicated. Of these, the Uposatha defined as the fifteenth in terms of the day, the Saṅghuposatha in terms of the performer, and the Suttuddesa in terms of the manner of performance—such an Uposatha, possessing these three characteristics, is what is intended here. While it is proceeding, if, without performing the Uposatha, on the day of the Uposatha, one goes to another monastery—whether occupied by non-monks (abhikkhukaṃ) with whom one is not in communion (nānāsaṃvāsakehi), or by monks (sabhikkhukaṃ)—or to a dwelling place (āvāsaṃ) or a non-dwelling place (anāvāsaṃ) for the purpose of residence, except by agreement of the Saṅgha or except in the case of an emergency, there is an offense of dukkaṭa.

Kiṃ saṅghassa pubbakiccanti ‘‘saṅgho uposathaṃ kareyyā’’ti evaṃ uposathakaraṇasambandheneva vuttassa saṅghassa uposathe kattabbe yaṃ taṃ ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, uposathāgāraṃ sammajjitu’’ntiādinā (mahāva. 159) nayena pāḷiyaṃ āgataṃ, aṭṭhakathāsu ca –

Kiṃ saṅghassa pubbakiccaṃ? (What is the preliminary duty of the Sangha?): What is that preliminary duty which is mentioned in connection with the performance of the Uposatha by the Saṅgha, which was stated in connection with the performance of the Uposatha by the Saṅgha as, “The Sangha should perform the Uposatha,” and which comes in the Pāli with the passage beginning, “I allow, monks, the sweeping of the Uposatha hall,” etc. (mahāva. 159), and in the commentaries as –

‘‘Sammajjanī padīpo ca, udakaṃ āsanena ca;

"A broom, a lamp, and water,
Along with a seat as well;
These are called the ‘preliminary preparations’
For observance of Uposatha."

‘‘Chandapārisuddhiutukkhānaṃ, bhikkhugaṇanā ca ovādo;

"Consent, purity, information about the seasons,
Counting the monks and giving the exhortation;
These are called the ‘preliminary duties’
For observance of Uposatha." (mahāva. aṭṭha. 168);

Evaṃ dvīhi nāmehi navavidhaṃ pubbakiccaṃ dassitaṃ, kiṃ taṃ katanti pucchati. Na hi taṃ akatvā uposathaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati, tasmā therena āṇattena agilānena bhikkhunā uposathāgāraṃ sammajjitabbaṃ, pānīyaṃ paribhojanīyaṃ upaṭṭhāpetabbaṃ, āsanaṃ paññāpetabbaṃ, padīpo kātabbo, akaronto dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati, therenāpi patirūpaṃ ñatvā āṇāpetabbaṃ.

Thus, the ninefold preliminary duty has been shown by these two terms; what is that which has been done? For it is not proper to perform the Uposatha without doing that. Therefore, by order of a senior monk, a monk who is not ill should sweep the Uposatha hall, prepare drinking water and water for use, arrange a seat, and light a lamp. If he does not do so, he incurs an offense of dukkaṭa. And the senior monk should order it, knowing what is suitable.

Chandapārisuddhīti ettha uposathakaraṇatthaṃ sannipatite saṅghe bahi uposathaṃ katvā āgatena sannipatitaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā kāyasāmaggiṃ adentena chando dātabbo. Yopi gilāno vā hoti kiccappasuto vā, tenāpi pārisuddhiṃ dentena chandopi dātabbo. Kathaṃ dātabbo? Ekassa bhikkhuno santike ‘‘chandaṃ dammi, chandaṃ me hara, chandaṃ me ārocehī’’ti (mahāva. 165) ayaṃ attho kāyena vā vācāya vā ubhayena vā viññāpetabbo, evaṃ dinno hoti chando. Akatūposathena pana gilānena vā kiccappasutena vā pārisuddhi dātabbā. Kathaṃ dātabbā? Ekassa bhikkhuno santike ‘‘pārisuddhiṃ dammi, pārisuddhiṃ me hara, pārisuddhiṃ me ārocehī’’ti (mahāva. 164) ayaṃ attho kāyena vā vācāya vā ubhayena vā viññāpetabbo, evaṃ dinnā hoti pārisuddhi, taṃ pana dentena chandopi dātabbo. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tadahuposathe pārisuddhiṃ dentena chandampi dātuṃ, santi saṅghassa karaṇīya’’nti (mahāva. 165). Tattha pārisuddhidānaṃ saṅghassapi attanopi uposathakaraṇaṃ sampādeti, na avasesaṃ saṅghakiccaṃ. Chandadānaṃ saṅghasseva uposathakaraṇañca sesakiccañca sampādeti, attano pana uposatho akatoyeva hoti. Tasmā pārisuddhiṃ dentena chandopi dātabbo. Pubbe vuttaṃ pana suddhikacchandaṃ vā imaṃ vā chandapārisuddhiṃ ekena bahūnampi āharituṃ vaṭṭati. Sace pana so antarāmagge aññaṃ bhikkhuṃ passitvā yesaṃ tena chando vā pārisuddhi vā gahitā, tesañca attano ca chandapārisuddhiṃ deti, tasseva sā āgacchati, itarā panabiḷālasaṅkhalikā chandapārisuddhināma hoti, sā nāgacchati, tasmā sayameva sannipatitaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā ārocetabbaṃ. Sace pana sañcicca nāroceti, dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati. Chandapārisuddhi pana tasmiṃ hatthapāsaṃ upagatamatteyeva āgatā hoti.

Chandapārisuddhi (Consent and Purity): Here, when the Saṅgha has assembled for the purpose of performing the Uposatha, one who has performed the Uposatha outside should go to the place of assembly and give consent (chanda) without giving group consent (kāyasamaggi). Also, one who is ill or preoccupied with work should give consent when giving purity (pārisuddhi). How should it be given? To one monk he should make known, either by body, speech, or both, the meaning, "I give consent; take my consent; report my consent" (mahāva. 165). Thus given, consent is given. But one who has not performed the Uposatha, being ill or preoccupied with work, should give purity. How should purity be given? To one monk he should make known, either by body, speech, or both, the meaning, "I give purity; take my purity; report my purity" (mahāva. 164). Thus given, purity is given, but one giving it should also give consent. For this was said by the Blessed One: "I allow, monks, on the day of the Uposatha, one who is giving purity to also give consent, as there are duties to be done by the Saṅgha" (mahāva. 165). There, the giving of purity accomplishes the performance of the Uposatha for both the Saṅgha and oneself, but not any remaining business of the Saṅgha. The giving of consent accomplishes the performance of the Uposatha and the remaining business for the Saṅgha, but one's own Uposatha is not performed. Therefore, one giving purity should also give consent. However, either the previously mentioned giving of purity along with consent or this consent and purity may be brought by one person to many. But if he sees another monk on the road, he gives the consent or purity he has received to them, both for himself and for those others. Then only his own comes, but the others is called biḷālasaṅkhalikā chandapārisuddhi (catena-like consent and purity), and it does not come; therefore, it should be reported by going to the place of assembly oneself. But if he intentionally does not report it, he incurs an offense of dukkaṭa. However, consent and purity have already come as soon as one comes within arms' reach.

Utukkhānanti ‘‘hemantādīnaṃ utūnaṃ ettakaṃ atikkantaṃ, ettakaṃ avasiṭṭha’’nti evaṃ utūnaṃ ācikkhanaṃ.Bhikkhugaṇanāti ‘‘ettakā bhikkhū uposathagge sannipatitā’’ti bhikkhūnaṃ gaṇanā. Idampi hi ubhayaṃ katvāva uposatho kātabbo.Ovādoti bhikkhunovādo. Na hi bhikkhunīhi yācitaṃ ovādaṃ anārocetvā uposathaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Bhikkhuniyo hi ‘‘sve uposatho’’ti āgantvā ‘‘ayaṃ uposatho cātuddaso pannaraso’’ti pucchitvā puna uposathadivase āgantvā ‘‘bhikkhunisaṅgho, ayya, bhikkhusaṅghassa pāde vandati, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācati, labhatu kira, ayya, bhikkhunisaṅgho ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti (cūḷava. 413) evaṃ ovādaṃ yācanti. Taṃ ṭhapetvā bālagilānagamiye añño sacepi āraññiko hoti, apaṭiggahetuṃ na labhati, tasmā yena so paṭiggahito, tena bhikkhunā uposathagge pātimokkhuddesako bhikkhu evaṃ vattabbo ‘‘bhikkhunisaṅgho, bhante, bhikkhusaṅghassa pāde vandati, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācati, labhatu kira, bhante, bhikkhunisaṅgho ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti. Pātimokkhuddesakena vattabbaṃ ‘‘atthi koci bhikkhu bhikkhunovādako sammato’’ti. Sace hoti koci bhikkhu bhikkhunovādako sammato, tato tena so vattabbo ‘‘itthannāmo bhikkhu bhikkhunovādako sammato, taṃ bhikkhunisaṅgho upasaṅkamatū’’ti (cūḷava. 413). Sace natthi, tato tena pucchitabbaṃ ‘‘ko āyasmā ussahati bhikkhuniyo ovaditu’’nti. Sace koci ussahati, sopi ca aṭṭhahi aṅgehi samannāgato, taṃ tattheva sammannitvā ovādapaṭiggāhako vattabbo ‘‘itthannāmo bhikkhu bhikkhunovādako sammato, taṃ bhikkhunisaṅgho upasaṅkamatū’’ti (cuḷava. 413). Sace pana koci na ussahati, pātimokkhuddesakena vattabbaṃ ‘‘natthi koci bhikkhu bhikkhunovādako sammato, pāsādikena bhikkhunisaṅgho sampādetū’’ti. Ettāvatā hi sikkhattayasaṅgahitaṃ sakalaṃ sāsanaṃ ārocitaṃ hoti. Tena bhikkhunā ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchitvā pāṭipadadivase bhikkhunīnaṃ ārocetabbaṃ.

Utukkhāna (Announcement of the Seasons): The announcement of the seasons is the declaring of the seasons, saying, "So much of the cold season, etc., has passed, so much remains." Bhikkhugaṇanā (Counting the Monks): The counting of the monks is the counting of how many monks have assembled in the Uposatha hall. For both of these should be done before the Uposatha is performed. Ovādo (Exhortation): Exhortation of the nuns. For it is not proper to perform the Uposatha without announcing the exhortation requested by the nuns. For the nuns come, saying, "Tomorrow is the Uposatha," and ask, "Is this Uposatha the fourteenth or fifteenth?" and then, again, on the Uposatha day, they come, saying, "The Bhikkhunī Saṅgha, venerable sirs, pays homage at the feet of the Bhikkhu Saṅgha, and requests the opportunity to receive exhortation; may the Bhikkhunī Saṅgha receive the opportunity to receive exhortation, venerable sirs" (cūḷava. 413). Except for one who is young, ill, or going on a journey, even if he is a forest dweller, he is not allowed to refuse. Therefore, the monk to whom it has been accepted should say this to the monk who is the Pātimokkha reciter in the Uposatha hall: "The Bhikkhunī Saṅgha, venerable sir, pays homage at the feet of the Bhikkhu Saṅgha, and requests the opportunity to receive exhortation; may the Bhikkhunī Saṅgha receive the opportunity to receive exhortation, venerable sir." The Pātimokkha reciter should say, "Is there any monk who is recognized as an exhorter of nuns?" If there is any monk recognized as an exhorter of nuns, then he should say to him, "The Bhikkhunī Saṅgha should approach the monk named so-and-so, who is recognized as an exhorter of nuns" (cūḷava. 413). If there is none, then he should ask, "Who among the venerable ones is capable of exhorting the nuns?" If someone is capable, and also possesses the eight qualities, then, having appointed him there, the acceptor of the exhortation should be told, "The Bhikkhunī Saṅgha should approach the monk named so-and-so, who is recognized as an exhorter of nuns" (cuḷava. 413). But if no one is capable, the Pātimokkha reciter should say, "Let the Bhikkhunī Saṅgha be satisfied with a pleasing discourse." For thus the entire dispensation, included in the three trainings, is announced. That monk, assenting with "Good," should announce it to the nuns on the following day.

Bhikkhunisaṅghenāpi tā bhikkhuniyo pesetabbā, gacchatha, ayyā, pucchatha ‘‘kiṃ, ayya, labhati bhikkhunisaṅgho ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti, tāhi ‘‘sādhu, ayye’’ti sampaṭicchitvā taṃ bhikkhuṃ upasaṅkamitvā evaṃ vattabbaṃ ‘‘kiṃ, ayya, labhati bhikkhunisaṅgho ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti. Tena vattabbaṃ ‘‘natthi koci bhikkhu bhikkhunovādako sammato, pāsādikena bhikkhunisaṅgho sampādetū’’ti, tāhi ‘‘sādhu ayyā’’ti sampaṭicchitabbaṃ. Idañca ekato āgatānaṃ dvinnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vā vasena vuttaṃ. Tāsu pana ekāya bhikkhuniyā vattabbañceva sampaṭicchitabbañca, itarā tassā sahāyikā. Sace pana bhikkhusaṅgho vā bhikkhunisaṅgho vā na pūrati, ubhayatopi vā gaṇamattameva puggalamattaṃ vā hoti.

The Bhikkhunī Saṅgha should send those nuns, saying, "Go, ladies, and ask, 'Is the Bhikkhunī Saṅgha allowed the opportunity to receive exhortation, venerable sirs?'" They, assenting with "Good, venerable ladies," should approach that monk and say thus: "Is the Bhikkhunī Saṅgha allowed the opportunity to receive exhortation, venerable sir?" He should say, "There is no monk who is recognized as an exhorter of nuns; let the Bhikkhunī Saṅgha be satisfied with a pleasing discourse." They should assent with "Good, venerable ladies." This has been said in the case of two or three coming together. But for one nun, both the saying and the assenting should be done, the others being her companions. But if the Bhikkhu Saṅgha or the Bhikkhunī Saṅgha is not complete, or if there is only a group of people or just individuals from both sides.

Tatrāyaṃ vacanakkamo – ‘‘bhikkhuniyo, ayya, bhikkhusaṅghassa pādevandanti, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācanti, labhantu kira, ayya, bhikkhuniyo ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti, ‘‘ahaṃ, ayya, bhikkhusaṅghassa pāde vandāmi, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācāmi, labhāmahaṃ, ayya, ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti, ‘‘bhikkhunisaṅgho, ayyā, ayyānaṃ pāde vandati, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācati, labhatu kira, ayyā, bhikkhunisaṅgho ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti. ‘‘Bhikkhuniyo, ayyā, ayyānaṃ pāde vandanti, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācanti, labhantu kira, ayyā, bhikkhuniyo ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti, ‘‘ahaṃ, ayyā, ayyānaṃ pāde vandāmi, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācāmi, labhāmahaṃ, ayyā, ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti, ‘‘bhikkhunisaṅgho, ayya, ayyassa pāde vandati, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācati, labhatu kira, ayya, bhikkhunisaṅgho ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti. ‘‘Bhikkhuniyo, ayya, ayyassa pāde vandanti, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācanti, labhantu kira, ayya, bhikkhuniyo ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti, ‘‘ahaṃ, ayya, ayyassa pāde vandāmi, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācāmi, labhāmahaṃ, ayya, ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti. Tenāpi bhikkhunā uposathakāle evaṃ vattabbaṃ ‘‘bhikkhuniyo, bhante, bhikkhusaṅghassa pāde vandanti, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācanti, labhantu kira, bhante, bhikkhuniyo ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti, ‘‘bhikkhunī, bhante, bhikkhusaṅghassa pāde vandati, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācati, labhatu kira, bhante, bhikkhunī ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti. ‘‘Bhikkhunisaṅgho, bhante, bhikkhuniyo, bhante, bhikkhunī bhante āyasmantānaṃ pāde vandati, vandanti, vandati, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācati, yācanti, yācati, labhatu kira, bhante, bhikkhunisaṅgho, labhantu kira, bhante, bhikkhuniyo, labhatu kira, bhante, bhikkhunī ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti. Uposathaggepi pātimokkhuddesakena vā ñattiṭṭhapakena vā itarena vā bhikkhunā sace sammato bhikkhu atthi, purimanayeneva ‘‘taṃ bhikkhunisaṅgho, taṃ bhikkhuniyo, taṃ bhikkhunī upasaṅkamatu, upasaṅkamantu, upasaṅkamatū’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sace natthi, ‘‘pāsādikena bhikkhunisaṅgho, bhikkhuniyo, bhikkhunī sampādetu, sampādentu, sampādetū’’ti vattabbaṃ. Ovādappaṭiggāhakena pāṭipade taṃ paccāharitvā tatheva vattabbaṃ, ayamettha saṅkhepavinicchayo. Evaṃ bhikkhunīhi yācitaṃ ovādaṃ ārocetvāva uposatho kātabbo. Tena vuttaṃ –

The formula for speaking is as follows: "The nuns, venerable sirs, pay homage at the feet of the Bhikkhu Saṅgha, and request the opportunity to receive exhortation; may the nuns receive the opportunity to receive exhortation, venerable sirs." "I, venerable sir, pay homage at the feet of the Bhikkhu Saṅgha, and request the opportunity to receive exhortation; may I receive the opportunity to receive exhortation, venerable sir." "The Bhikkhunī Saṅgha, venerable ladies, pays homage at the feet of the venerable ladies, and requests the opportunity to receive exhortation; may the Bhikkhunī Saṅgha receive the opportunity to receive exhortation, venerable ladies." "The nuns, venerable ladies, pay homage at the feet of the venerable ladies, and request the opportunity to receive exhortation; may the nuns receive the opportunity to receive exhortation, venerable ladies." "I, venerable ladies, pay homage at the feet of the venerable ladies, and request the opportunity to receive exhortation; may I receive the opportunity to receive exhortation, venerable ladies." "The Bhikkhunī Saṅgha, venerable sir, pays homage at the feet of the venerable sir, and requests the opportunity to receive exhortation; may the Bhikkhunī Saṅgha receive the opportunity to receive exhortation, venerable sir." "The nuns, venerable sir, pay homage at the feet of the venerable sir, and request the opportunity to receive exhortation; may the nuns receive the opportunity to receive exhortation, venerable sir." "I, venerable sir, pay homage at the feet of the venerable sir, and request the opportunity to receive exhortation; may I receive the opportunity to receive exhortation, venerable sir." That monk should also say thus at the time of the Uposatha: "The nuns, venerable sirs, pay homage at the feet of the Bhikkhu Saṅgha, and request the opportunity to receive exhortation; may the nuns receive the opportunity to receive exhortation, venerable sirs." "The nun, venerable sirs, pays homage at the feet of the Bhikkhu Saṅgha, and requests the opportunity to receive exhortation; may the nun receive the opportunity to receive exhortation, venerable sirs." "The Bhikkhunī Saṅgha, venerable sirs; the nuns, venerable sirs; the nun, venerable sir, pays homage, pay homage, pays homage at the feet of the venerable ones, and requests, requests, requests the opportunity to receive exhortation; may the Bhikkhunī Saṅgha, may the nuns, may the nun receive the opportunity to receive exhortation, venerable sirs." Even in the Uposatha hall, if there is a monk who is recognized by the Pātimokkha reciter, the motion maker, or another monk, it should be said in the same way as before, "Let the Bhikkhunī Saṅgha, let the nuns, let the nun approach him, approach him, approach him." If there is none, "Let the Bhikkhunī Saṅgha, the nuns, the nun be satisfied with a pleasing discourse." The acceptor of the exhortation, having brought it back on the following day, should say it in the same way. This is the concise determination in this matter. Thus, the Uposatha should be performed only after announcing the exhortation requested by the nuns. Therefore it was said:

‘‘Chandapārisuddhiutukkhānaṃ, bhikkhugaṇanā ca ovādo;

"Consent, purity, information about the seasons,
Counting the monks and giving the exhortation;
These are called the ‘preliminary duties’
For observance of Uposatha."

Pārisuddhiṃ āyasmanto ārocethāti attano parisuddhabhāvaṃ ārocetha, ‘‘pātimokkhaṃ uddisissāmī’’tiidaṃ pārisuddhiārocanassa kāraṇavacanaṃ. ‘‘Na ca, bhikkhave, sāpattikena pātimokkhaṃ sotabbaṃ, yo suṇeyya āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (cūḷava. 386) hi vacanato aparisuddhehi pātimokkhaṃ sotuṃ na vaṭṭati. Tena vuttaṃ – pārisuddhiṃ āyasmanto ārocetha, pātimokkhaṃ uddisissāmīti. Ettha siyā ‘‘saṅgho uposathaṃ kareyya, pātimokkhaṃ uddiseyyā’’ti (mahāva. 134) vuttattā idhāpi ‘‘pātimokkhaṃ uddisissatī’’ti vattabbaṃ, evañhi sati pubbenāparaṃ sandhiyatīti. Vuccate, vacanamattamevetaṃ na sandhiyati, lakkhaṇato pana sameti, saṅghassa sāmaggiyā, gaṇassa sāmaggiyā, puggalassa uddesā saṅghassa uddiṭṭhaṃ hoti pātimokkhanti idañhettha lakkhaṇaṃ, tasmā ‘‘pātimokkhaṃ uddisissāmī’’ti idamevettha vattabbaṃ.

Pārisuddhiṃ āyasmanto ārocethā (Venerable ones, declare your purity): Declare your state of purity, "I will recite the Pātimokkha"—this is the reason for the declaration of purity. For it is not proper for those who have committed an offense to listen to the Pātimokkha, because of the saying, "Monks, one who has an offense should not listen to the Pātimokkha; whoever should listen incurs an offense of dukkaṭa" (cūḷava. 386). Therefore it was said: Venerable ones, declare your purity; I will recite the Pātimokkha. Here, it may be argued that since it was said, "The Saṅgha should perform the Uposatha, should recite the Pātimokkha" (mahāva. 134), it should also be said here, "I will recite the Pātimokkha," for thus the latter is connected with the former. It is said, this is only a statement and is not connected, but it agrees in characteristic. The characteristic here is that the Pātimokkha is recited for the Saṅgha’s harmony, the group’s harmony, and the individual’s instruction. Therefore, "I will recite the Pātimokkha"—this alone should be said here.

Taṃ sabbeva santā sādhukaṃ suṇoma manasi karomāti nti pātimokkhaṃ.Sabbeva santāti yāvatikā tassā parisāya therā ca navā ca majjhimā ca.Sādhukaṃ suṇomāti aṭṭhiṃ katvā manasi karitvā sotadvāravasena sabbacetasā samannāharāma.Manasi karomāti ekaggacittā hutvā citte ṭhapeyyāma. Ettha ca kiñcāpi ‘‘pātimokkhaṃ uddisissāmī’’ti vuttattā ‘‘suṇotha manasi karothā’’ti vattuṃ yuttaṃ viya dissati, ‘‘saṅgho uposathaṃ kareyyā’’tiiminā pana na sameti. Samaggassa hi saṅghassetaṃ uposathakaraṇaṃ, pātimokkhuddesako ca saṅghapariyāpannova, iccassa saṅghapariyāpannattā ‘‘suṇoma manasi karomā’’ti idameva vattuṃ yuttaṃ.

Taṃ sabbeva santā sādhukaṃ suṇoma manasi karomāti means the Pātimokkha. Sabbeva santā means all those who are present in that assembly, whether they are elders, newly ordained, or of middle standing. Sādhukaṃ suṇomā means we pay careful attention, fixing our minds, directing our entire consciousness through the sense door of hearing. Manasi karomā means having a concentrated mind, we should keep it in our thoughts. Here, although it appears appropriate to say "listen and apply your minds" because it is stated that "I will recite the Pātimokkha," it does not align with "the Sangha should perform the Uposatha." For this Uposatha observance belongs to the united Sangha, and the one who recites the Pātimokkha is included within the Sangha; therefore, since he is included in the Sangha, it is appropriate to say, "suṇoma manasi karomā."

yassa siyā āpatti, so āvikareyyāti āha. Tatthayassa siyāti yassa channaṃ ākārānaṃ aññatarena āpannāpatti bhaveyya. Āpattiñhi āpajjanto alajjitā, aññāṇatā, kukkuccappakatatā, akappiye kappiyasaññitā, kappiye akappiyasaññitā, satisammosāti imehi chahākārehi (pari. 295) āpajjati.

Yassa siyā āpatti, so āvikareyyāti he says. There, yassa siyā means if anyone has committed an offense through any of the six ways. For one incurs an offense through these six ways (pari. 295): shamelessness, unknowingness, persistence in unease, regarding what is improper as proper, regarding what is proper as improper, and loss of mindfulness.

alajjitāyaāpajjati? Akappiyabhāvaṃ jānantoyeva madditvā vītikkamaṃ karoti.

One incurs an offense through shamelessness by knowingly transgressing, crushing the offense, even while knowing it is improper.

Vuttampi cetaṃ –

This also was said—

‘‘Sañcicca āpattiṃ āpajjati, āpattiṃ parigūhati;

"Intentionally commits an offense, conceals the offense;And goes to a wrong destination; such a person is called shameless." (pari. 359);

aññāṇatāyaāpajjati? Aññāṇapuggalo hi mando momūho kattabbākattabbaṃ ajānanto akattabbaṃ karoti, kattabbaṃ virādheti, evaṃ aññāṇatāya āpajjati.

One incurs an offense through unknowingness because an ignorant person, being dull and confused, not knowing what should and should not be done, does what should not be done and neglects what should be done; thus, one incurs an offense through unknowingness.

kukkuccappakatatāyaāpajjati? Kappiyākappiyaṃ nissāya kukkucce uppanne vinayadharaṃ pucchitvā kappiyaṃ ce, kattabbaṃ siyā, akappiyaṃ ce, na kattabbaṃ, ayaṃ pana ‘‘vaṭṭatī’’ti madditvā vītikkamatiyeva, evaṃ kukkuccappakatatāya āpajjati.

One incurs an offense through persistence in unease by consulting a Vinaya expert when unease arises regarding what is proper and improper; if it is proper, it should be done; if it is improper, it should not be done; but this person transgresses, crushing it, thinking "it is allowed"; thus, one incurs an offense through persistence in unease.

akappiye kappiyasaññitāyaāpajjati? Acchamaṃsaṃ ‘‘sūkaramaṃsa’’nti khādati, vikāle kālasaññāya bhuñjati, evaṃ akappiye kappiyasaññitāya āpajjati.

One incurs an offense by regarding what is improper as proper by eating raw meat thinking it is "pork," eating at the wrong time with the perception of it being the right time; thus, one incurs an offense by regarding what is improper as proper.

kappiye akappiyasaññitāyaāpajjati? Sūkaramaṃsaṃ ‘‘acchamaṃsa’’nti khādati, kāle vikālasaññāya bhuñjati, evaṃ kappiye akappiyasaññitāya āpajjati.

One incurs an offense by regarding what is proper as improper by eating pork thinking it is "raw meat," eating at the right time with the perception of it being the wrong time; thus, one incurs an offense by regarding what is proper as improper.

satisammosāāpajjati? Sahaseyyacīvaravippavāsādīni satisammosā āpajjati, iti imesaṃ channaṃ ākārānaṃ aññatarena ākārena āpannā yassa siyā sattannaṃ āpattikkhandhānaṃ aññatarā āpatti therassa vā navassa vā majjhimassa vāti attho.

One incurs an offense through loss of mindfulness by committing offenses such as sleeping together or being separated from one's robe due to loss of mindfulness; thus, if anyone has incurred an offense through any of these six ways, meaning any one of the seven categories of offenses, whether that person is an elder, newly ordained, or of middle standing.

So āvikareyyāti so taṃ āpattiṃ desetu vā pakāsetu vāti vuttaṃ hoti.Asantiyā āpattiyāti yassa pana evaṃ anāpannā vā āpattiṃ āpajjitvā ca pana vuṭṭhitā vā desitā vā ārocitā vā āpatti, tassa sā āpatti asantī nāma hoti, evaṃ asantiyā āpattiyā tuṇhī bhavitabbaṃ.Tuṇhībhāvena kho panāyasmante ‘‘parisuddhā’’ti vedissāmīti tuṇhībhāvenāpi hi kāraṇena ahaṃ āyasmante ‘‘parisuddhā’’icceva jānissāmīti.Yathā kho pana paccekapuṭṭhassa veyyākaraṇaṃ hotīti yathā ekeneko puṭṭho byākareyya, yathā ekeneko paccekapuṭṭho ‘‘maṃ esa pucchatī’’ti ñatvā byākareyyāti vuttaṃ hoti.

So āvikareyyāti so he should declare or reveal that offense, is what is said. Asantiyā āpattiyāti but for someone for whom there is no offense, or having committed an offense, has emerged from it, or confessed or declared that offense, for him that offense is said to be non-existent, thus one should remain silent when no offense exists. Tuṇhībhāvena kho panāyasmante parisuddhā'ti vedissāmīti I will know you to be pure by this very reason of your silence. Yathā kho pana paccekapuṭṭhassa veyyākaraṇaṃ hotīti just as if each individual were questioned and would explain, just as if each individual, being asked individually, knowing "he is asking me" would explain, is what is said.

Evamevaṃevarūpāya parisāya yāvatatiyaṃ anusāvitaṃ hotīti ettha ekacce tāva ācariyā evaṃ vadanti ‘‘evamevaṃ imissāya bhikkhuparisāya yadetaṃ ‘yassa siyā āpatti, so āvikareyya, asantiyā āpattiyā tuṇhī bhavitabbaṃ, tuṇhībhāvena kho panāyasmante parisuddhāti vedissāmī’ti tikkhattuṃ anusāvitaṃ, taṃ ekamekena ‘maṃ esa pucchatī’ti evaṃ jānitabbaṃ hotīti attho’’ti. Taṃ na yujjati, kasmā? Atthabyañjanabhedato. Anussāvanañhi nāma atthato ca byañjanato ca abhinnaṃ hoti ‘‘dutiyampi etamatthaṃ vadāmī’’tiādīsu (mahāva. 72; cūḷava. 3) viya, ‘‘yassa siyā’’tiādivacanattayaṃ pana atthatopi byañjanatopi bhinnaṃ, tenassa anussāvanattayaṃ na yujjati. Yadi cetaṃ yāvatatiyānussāvanaṃ siyā, nidānuddese aniṭṭhitepi āpatti siyā. Na ca yuttaṃ anāpattikkhette āpattiṃ āpajjituṃ.

Evamevaṃevarūpāya parisāya yāvatatiyaṃ anusāvitaṃ hotīti here, some teachers say: "Evamevaṃ, for this assembly of monks, this which is recited three times—'If anyone has an offense, let him declare it; if there is no offense, one should remain silent; by your silence I will know you are pure'—each one should understand that 'he is asking me'; this is the meaning." But that is not fitting. Why? Because of the difference in meaning and expression. For a recitation (anussāvana) should be identical in meaning and expression, like in "dutiyampi etamatthaṃ vadāmī" etc. (mahāva. 72; cūḷava. 3), but the three statements beginning with "yassa siyā" are different in both meaning and expression; therefore, it is not fitting for it to be a threefold recitation. And if this were a recitation up to the third time, there would be an offense even when the preamble is not finished. And it is not proper to incur an offense in a field where there is no offense.

Apare ‘‘anusāvita’’ntipadassa anusāvetabbanti atthaṃ vikappetvā ‘‘yāvatatiya’’ntiidaṃ upari uddesāvasāne ‘‘kaccittha parisuddhā…pe… tatiyampi pucchāmī’’ti etaṃ sandhāya vuttanti āhu. Tampi na yujjati, kasmā? Atthayuttīnaṃ abhāvato. Idañhi padaṃ keci ‘‘anusāveta’’nti sajjhāyanti, keci ‘‘anusāveta’’nti, taṃ ubhayaṃ vāpi atītakālameva dīpeti, na anāgataṃ. Yadi cassa ayaṃ attho siyā, ‘‘anusāvitaṃ hessatī’’ti vadeyya, evaṃ tāva atthābhāvato na yujjati. Yadi cetaṃ uddesāvasāne vacanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ siyā, ‘‘na āvikarissāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppādentassa nidāne samattepi vuttamusāvādo na siyā, kasmā? ‘‘Yāvatatiyaṃ anussāviyamāne’’tivacanato (mahāva. 134) ‘‘yāvatatiya’’nti idaṃ vacanameva niratthakaṃ siyā, kasmā? Nidānuddese yāvatatiyānussāvanassa abhāvatoti evaṃ yuttiabhāvato tampi na yujjati. ‘‘Yāvatatiyaṃ anusāvitaṃ hotī’’ti idaṃ pana lakkhaṇavacanamattaṃ, tena imamatthaṃ dasseti – idaṃ pātimokkhaṃ nāma yāvatatiyaṃ anussāviyati, tasmiṃ yāvatatiyaṃ anussāviyamāne yo saramāno santiṃ āpattiṃ nāvikaroti, tassa yāvatatiyānussāvanāvasāne sampajānamusāvādo hotīti.

Others, by interpreting the word "anusāvitaṃ" to mean "anusāvetabbaṃ" (should be recited), say that "yāvatatiyaṃ" (up to the third time) refers to the end of the recitation above, "kaccittha parisuddhā…pe… tatiyampi pucchāmī" (are you pure... I ask a third time). But that too is not fitting. Why? Because of the absence of meaning and reasoning. For some recite this word as "anusāveta," and some as "anusāveṭa," but both of these indicate the past tense, not the future. If this were its meaning, it should say "anusāvitaṃ hessatī" (it will be recited); thus, it is not fitting due to the absence of meaning. And if this were said in reference to the statement at the end of the recitation, there would be no lie even if one were to generate the thought "I will not declare it" when the preamble is completed. Why? Because of the statement "yāvatatiyaṃ anussāviyamāne" (mahāva. 134), the word "yāvatatiyaṃ" would be meaningless. Why? Because of the absence of a threefold recitation in the preamble; thus, it is not fitting due to the absence of reasoning. But "yāvatatiyaṃ anusāvitaṃ hotī" is merely a characteristic statement; therefore, it shows this meaning: This Pātimokkha is recited up to the third time, and in that recitation up to the third time, whoever, being mindful, does not declare an existing offense, for him, at the end of the threefold recitation, there is a conscious lie.

tatthāyasmante pucchāmītiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ panetaṃ pārājikādīnaṃ avasāne dissati, na nidānāvasāne. Kiñcāpi na dissati, atha kho uddesakāle ‘‘āvikatā hissa phāsu hotī’’ti vatvā ‘‘uddiṭṭhaṃ kho āyasmanto nidānaṃ, tatthāyasmante pucchāmī’’tiādinā nayena vattabbameva. Evañhi nidānaṃ suuddiṭṭhaṃ hoti, aññathā duuddiṭṭhaṃ. Imameva ca atthaṃ sandhāya uposathakkhandhake vuttaṃ ‘‘yāvatatiyaṃ anusāvitaṃ hotīti sakimpi anusāvitaṃ hoti, dutiyampi anusāvitaṃ hoti, tatiyampi anusāvitaṃ hotī’’ti (mahāva. 134). Ayamettha ācariyaparamparābhato vinicchayo.

Tatthāyasmante pucchāmītiādi (I ask you there) etc. is said. But this is seen at the end of the Pārājikas etc., not at the end of the preamble. Even though it is not seen, nevertheless, during the time of the recitation, after saying "āvikatā hissa phāsu hotī" (by declaring, there is ease for him), it should be asked in the manner of "uddiṭṭhaṃ kho āyasmanto nidānaṃ, tatthāyasmante pucchāmī" (the preamble has been recited, I ask you there) etc. For thus the preamble is well recited, otherwise it is poorly recited. And with this very meaning in mind, it is said in the Uposatha Khandhaka: "yāvatatiyaṃ anusāvitaṃ hotīti sakimpi anusāvitaṃ hoti, dutiyampi anusāvitaṃ hoti, tatiyampi anusāvitaṃ hotī" (mahāva. 134) (it is recited up to the third time, it is recited once, it is recited a second time, it is recited a third time). Here, this is the determination from the lineage of teachers.

Yo pana bhikkhu…pe… sampajānamusāvādassa hotīti sampajānamusāvādo assa hoti, tenassa dukkaṭāpatti hoti, sā ca kho pana na musāvādalakkhaṇena, ‘‘sampajānamusāvāde kiṃ hoti, dukkaṭaṃ hotī’’ti (mahāva. 135) iminā pana bhagavato vacanena vacīdvāre akiriyasamuṭṭhānāpatti hotīti veditabbā.

Yo pana bhikkhu…pe… sampajānamusāvādassa hotīti he has a conscious lie, therefore he incurs a ḍukkaṭa offense, and that, however, is not by way of the characteristic of a lie, but it should be understood that by the word of the Blessed One, "sampajānamusāvāde kiṃ hoti, ḍukkaṭaṃ hotī" (mahāva. 135) (what happens in a conscious lie, a ḍukkaṭa happens), it is an offense arising from non-action in the door of speech.

Vuttampi cetaṃ –

And this also was said—

‘‘Anālapanto manujena kenaci,

"Without being addressed by any man,
He speaks words not said by others;
He incurs a verbal offense, not a physical one,
This is a question pondered by the wise." (pari. 479);

Antarāyikoti vippaṭisāravatthutāya pāmojjādisambhavaṃ nivāretvā paṭhamajjhānādīnaṃ adhigamāya antarāyaṃ karoti.Tasmāti yasmā ayaṃ anāvikaraṇasaṅkhāto sampajānamusāvādo antarāyiko hoti, tasmā.Saramānenāti attani santiṃ āpattiṃ jānantena.Visuddhāpekkhenāti vuṭṭhātukāmena visujjhitukāmena.Santī āpattīti āpajjitvā avuṭṭhitā āpatti.Āvikātabbāti saṅghamajjhe vā gaṇamajjhe vā ekapuggale vā pakāsetabbā, antamaso anantarassāpi bhikkhuno ‘‘ahaṃ, āvuso, itthannāmaṃ āpattiṃ āpanno, ito vuṭṭhahitvā taṃ āpattiṃ paṭikarissāmī’’ti (mahāva. 170) vattabbaṃ. Sacepi vematiko hoti, ‘‘ahaṃ, āvuso, itthannāmāya āpattiyā vematiko, yadā nibbematiko bhavissāmi, tadā taṃ āpattiṃ paṭikarissāmī’’ti (mahāva. 169) vattabbaṃ.Āvikatā hissa phāsu hotītietthaāvikatāti āvikatāya, pakāsitāyāti attho. Alajjitātiādīsu (pari. 295) viya hi idampi karaṇatthe paccattavacanaṃ.ti nipātamattaṃ.Assāti etassa bhikkhuno.Phāsu hotīti paṭhamajjhānādīnaṃ adhigamāya phāsu hoti, avippaṭisāramūlakānaṃ pāmojjādīnaṃ vasena sukhappaṭipadā sampajjatīti attho.

Antarāyikoti because it is a cause of remorse, it obstructs the arising of joy etc., and makes an obstacle for the attainment of the first jhāna etc. Tasmāti because this conscious lie, which is the non-declaration, is an obstacle, therefore. Saramānenāti by one who is mindful, knowing of an existing offense in oneself. Visuddhāpekkhenāti by one who desires to emerge, who desires to be purified. Santī āpattīti an offense that has been committed but not emerged from. Āvikātabbāti should be declared in the midst of the Sangha, in the midst of a group, or to an individual, at least it should be said to the immediately following monk: "I, friend, have committed such and such an offense, having emerged from it, I will deal with that offense." (mahāva. 170) And if he is doubtful, it should be said: "I, friend, am doubtful about such and such an offense, when I become free from doubt, then I will deal with that offense." (mahāva. 169) Āvikatā hissa phāsu hotītiettha āvikatāti by declaring, by revealing, is the meaning. Just as in alajjitātiādīsu (pari. 295) (shamelessness etc.) this too is the individual number in the sense of the instrumental case. ti is merely a particle. Assāti of this monk. Phāsu hotīti there is ease for the attainment of the first jhāna etc., ease is accomplished because of joy etc. rooted in non-remorse, is the meaning.

Iti kaṅkhāvitaraṇiyā pātimokkhavaṇṇanāya

Thus, the Nidāna Vaṇṇanā is finished in the Kaṅkhāvitaraṇī Pātimokkha Commentary.

Nidānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Nidāna Vaṇṇanā is finished.

Pārājikakaṇḍo

Pārājika Section

tatrime cattārotiādi pārājikakaṇḍaṃ, tatthatatrāti tasmiṃ ‘‘pātimokkhaṃ uddisissāmī’’ti evaṃ vutte pātimokkhe.Imeti idāni vattabbānaṃ abhimukhīkaraṇaṃ.Cattāroti gaṇanaparicchedo.Pārājikāti evaṃnāmakā.Dhammāti āpattiyo.Uddesaṃ āgacchantīti sarūpena uddisitabbataṃ āgacchanti, na nidāne viya ‘‘yassa siyā āpattī’’ti sādhāraṇavacanamattena.

Tatrime cattārotiādi is the Pārājika Section. There, tatrāti in that Pātimokkha, having said, "pātimokkhaṃ uddisissāmī" (I will recite the Pātimokkha). Imeti a directing towards what is now to be said. Cattāroti a determination of number. Pārājikāti are so named. Dhammāti are offenses. Uddesaṃ āgacchantīti come to be recited by their own form, not by way of a general statement such as "yassa siyā āpattī" (if anyone has an offense), as in the preamble.

1. Paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā
1. Paṭhama Pārājika Vaṇṇanā

Yo panāti rassadīghādinā liṅgādibhedena yo koci.Bhikkhūti ehibhikkhuupasampadā, saraṇagamanūpasampadā, ovādappaṭiggahaṇūpasampadā, pañhābyākaraṇūpasampadā, aṭṭhagarudhammappaṭiggahaṇūpasampadā, dūtenūpasampadā, aṭṭhavācikūpasampadā, ñatticatutthakammūpasampadāti imāsu aṭṭhasu upasampadāsu ñatticatutthena upasampadākammena akuppena ṭhānārahena upasampanno. Tassa pana kammassa vatthuñattianussāvana sīmā parisāsampattivasena akuppatā veditabbā.

Yo panāti whoever, by way of short or long, or difference in gender etc. Bhikkhūti a monk ordained by ehibhikkhu upasampadā (ordination by "come monk"), saraṇagamanūpasampadā (ordination by taking refuge), ovādappaṭiggahaṇūpasampadā (ordination by accepting the advice), pañhābyākaraṇūpasampadā (ordination by answering questions), aṭṭhagarudhammappaṭiggahaṇūpasampadā (ordination by accepting the eight weighty rules), dūtenūpasampadā (ordination by a messenger), aṭṭhavācikūpasampadā (ordination by eight utterances), ñatticatutthakammūpasampadā (ordination by motion and three declarations), out of these eight ordinations, ordained by ñatticatutthakamma (motion and three declarations) that is unshakeable, worthy of its place. Here the unshakeability of that kamma (act) should be understood by way of the accomplishment of the object, motion, announcement, boundary, and assembly.

vatthūti upasampadāpekkho puggalo, so ṭhapetvā ūnavīsativassaṃ antimavatthuajjhāpannapubbaṃ, paṇḍakādayo ca ekādasa abhabbapuggale veditabbo. Tatthaūnavīsativassonāma paṭisandhiggahaṇato paṭṭhāya aparipuṇṇavīsativasso.Antimavatthuajjhāpannapubbonāma catunnaṃ pārājikānaṃ aññataraṃ ajjhāpannapubbo.Paṇḍakādayo vajjanīyapuggalakathāyaṃ vuttā. Tesu āsittapaṇḍakañca usūyapaṇḍakañca ṭhapetvā opakkamikapaṇḍako napuṃsakapaṇḍako paṇḍakabhāvapakkhe ṭhito pakkhapaṇḍako ca idha adhippeto.

Vatthūti is the person seeking ordination; he, excluding one who is less than twenty years old and one who has previously incurred an ultimate offense, and the eleven types of unfit individuals beginning with paṇḍaka should be understood. There, ūnavīsativassonāma means one whose twentieth year is not yet complete, counting from the moment of conception. Antimavatthuajjhāpannapubbonāma means one who has previously incurred any of the four pārājikas. Paṇḍakādayo (paṇḍaka etc.) have been stated in the discussion of individuals who should be avoided. Among them, excluding āsittapaṇḍaka and usūyapaṇḍaka, opakkamikapaṇḍako, napuṃsakapaṇḍako, pakkhapaṇḍako who remains in the state of a paṇḍaka, and pakkhapaṇḍaka are intended here.

Theyyasaṃvāsakopana tividho liṅgatthenako saṃvāsatthenako ubhayatthenakoti. Tattha yo sayaṃ pabbajitvā na bhikkhuvassāni gaṇeti, na yathāvuḍḍhaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vā sāmaṇerānaṃ vā vandanaṃ sādiyati, na āsanena paṭibāhati, na uposathādīsu sandissati, ayaṃ asuddhacittatāya liṅgamattasseva thenitattāliṅgatthenakonāma. Yo pana bhikkhūhi pabbajito sāmaṇero samāno kāsāyāni apanetvā tesu saussāhova methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevitvā puna nivāsetvā sāmaṇerabhāvaṃ paṭijānāti, ayaṃ bhikkhūhi dinnaliṅgassa apariccattattā na liṅgatthenako, na liṅgānurūpassa saṃvāsassa sāditattā nāpi saṃvāsatthenako. Antimavatthuajjhāpannakepi eseva nayo. Yo ca kho sāmaṇero samāno videsaṃ gantvā bhikkhuvassāni gaṇeti, yathāvuḍḍhaṃ vandanaṃ sādiyati, āsanena paṭibāhati, uposathādīsu sandissati, ayaṃ saṃvāsamattasseva thenitattāsaṃvāsatthenakonāma. Bhikkhuvassagaṇanādiko hi sabbopi kiriyabhedo imasmiṃ atthe ‘‘saṃvāso’’ti veditabbo. Sikkhaṃ paccakkhāya ‘‘na maṃ koci jānātī’’ti puna evaṃ paṭipajjantepi eseva nayo. Yo pana sayaṃ pabbajitvā vihāraṃ gantvā yathāvuḍḍhaṃ vandanaṃ sādiyati, āsanena paṭibāhati, bhikkhuvassāni gaṇeti, uposathādīsu sandissati, ayaṃ liṅgassa ceva saṃvāsassa ca thenitattāubhayatthenakonāma. Dhuranikkhepavasena kāsāyāni apanetvā antimavatthuṃ ajjhāpajjitvā puna tāni acchādetvā evaṃ paṭipajjantepi eseva nayo, ayaṃ tividhopi theyyasaṃvāsako idha adhippeto. Ṭhapetvā pana imaṃ tividhaṃ.

Theyyasaṃvāsakopana (one who lives in theft) is of three kinds: a thief of the appearance, a thief of the association, and a thief of both. There, one who, having gone forth on his own, does not count the years of being a monk, does not approve of the elder monks or novices being saluted according to seniority, does not ward off with a seat, does not attend the Uposatha etc., this one, because he steals only the appearance due to impure intention, is called liṅgatthenako (thief of the appearance). But a novice ordained by the monks, having removed the robes and with enthusiasm engaged in sexual intercourse and then having put them back on again and reaffirms the state of a novice, this one is not a thief of the appearance because the appearance given by the monks has not been abandoned, nor is he a thief of the association because the association appropriate to the appearance has not been approved of. The same method applies to one who has incurred an ultimate offense. But a novice, having gone to a foreign country, counts the years of being a monk, approves of being saluted according to seniority, wards off with a seat, attends the Uposatha etc., this one is called saṃvāsatthenako (thief of the association) because he steals only the association. For all the differences in behavior beginning with counting the years of being a monk should be understood as "association" in this context. The same method applies to one who, having renounced the training, conducts himself in this way again thinking "no one knows me." But one who, having gone forth on his own, goes to a monastery and approves of being saluted according to seniority, wards off with a seat, counts the years of being a monk, attends the Uposatha etc., this one is called ubhayatthenako (thief of both) because he steals both the appearance and the association. The same method applies to one who, having laid aside the robes due to abandoning the burden and incurred an ultimate offense and then having covered himself with them again, conducts himself in this way; this threefold theyyasaṃvāsako is intended here. But excluding this threefold one,

‘‘Rāja dubbhikkha kantāra-roga verī bhayena vā;

"Due to fear of the king, famine, wilderness, disease, or enemies;Or for the purpose of obtaining robes, whoever here takes on the appearance.

‘‘Saṃvāsaṃ nādhivāseti, yāva so suddhamānaso;

He does not partake in association, until he is pure in mind;That one is not called Theyyasaṃvāsako (one who lives in theft)." (mahāva. aṭṭha. 110);

titthiyapakkantakonāma. Ṭhapetvā pana manussajātikaṃ avaseso sabbopitiracchānagatonāma. Yena manussajātikā janetti sayampi manussabhūteneva sañcicca jīvitā voropitā, ayaṃmātughātakonāma.Pitughātakepi eseva nayo. Yena antamaso gihiliṅge ṭhitopi manussajātiko khīṇāsavo sañcicca jīvitā voropito, ayaṃarahantaghātakonāma. Yo pana pakatattaṃ bhikkhuniṃ tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ magge dūseti, ayaṃbhikkhunidūsakonāma. Yo devadatto viya sāsanaṃ uddhammaṃ ubbinayaṃ katvā catunnaṃ kammānaṃ aññataravasena saṅghaṃ bhindati, ayaṃsaṅghabhedakonāma. Yo devadatto viya duṭṭhacittena vadhakacittena tathāgatassa jīvamānakasarīre khuddakamakkhikāya pivanamattampi lohitaṃ uppādeti, ayaṃlohituppādakonāma. Yassa itthinimittuppādanakammato ca purisanimittuppādanakammato ca ubhato duvidhampi byañjanaṃ atthi, ayaṃubhatobyañjanakonāma. Iti ime terasa puggalā upasampadāya avatthū, ime pana ṭhapetvā aññasmiṃ upasampadāpekkhe sati upasampadākammaṃ vatthusampattivasena akuppaṃ hoti.

It is called titthiyapakkantaka. However, setting aside humans, all the rest are called tiracchānagato. When a mother of human birth is intentionally deprived of life by a human being, that person is called mātughātako. The same method applies to pitughātaka. When a khīṇāsava of human birth, even residing in lay life, is intentionally deprived of life, that person is called arahantaghātako. If someone defiles a fully ordained bhikkhuni on one of the three paths, that person is called bhikkhunidūsako. One who, like Devadatta, makes the Teaching into non-Dhamma, the Vinaya into non-Vinaya, and divides the Saṅgha by one of the four acts, is called saṅghabhedako. One who, with corrupted intentions and murderous thoughts, produces blood on the Tathāgata's living body, even to the amount that a small fly might drink, is called lohituppādako. One who has both kinds of sexual characteristics due to the production of female and male sexual features is called ubhatobyañjanako. Thus, these thirteen individuals are ineligible for ordination. However, if there is someone else seeking ordination besides these, the act of ordination is unshakeable in terms of the completeness of the object.

ñattisampattivasenaakuppaṃ hoti? Vatthusaṅghapuggalañattīnaṃ aparāmasanāni, pacchā ñattiṭṭhapanañcāti ime tāva pañca ñattidosā. Tattha ‘‘ayaṃ itthannāmo’’ti upasampadāpekkhassa akittanaṃvatthuaparāmasanaṃnāma. ‘‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho’’tiettha ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante’’ti vatvā ‘‘saṅgho’’ti abhaṇanaṃsaṅghaaparāmasanaṃnāma. ‘‘Itthannāmassa upasampadāpekkho’’ti upajjhāyassa akittanaṃpuggalaaparāmasanaṃnāma. Sabbena sabbaṃ ñattiyā anuccāraṇaṃñattiaparāmasanaṃnāma. Paṭhamaṃ kammavācaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā ‘‘esā ñattī’’ti vatvā ‘‘khamati saṅghassā’’ti evaṃ ñattikittanaṃpacchā ñattiṭṭhapanaṃnāma. Iti imehi dosehi vimuttāya ñattiyā sampannaṃ ñattisampattivasena akuppaṃ hoti.

How is it unshakeable in terms of ñattisampatti? These are the five faults of the ñatti: non-recitation of the object, Saṅgha, individual, and the ñatti itself, and stating the ñatti afterwards. Therein, not mentioning the name of the ordination candidate, saying "This is named so-and-so," is called vatthuaparāmasana. In the phrase "May the Saṅgha listen to me, venerable sirs," saying "May the Saṅgha listen to me, venerable sirs" but not uttering "Saṅgha" is called saṅghaaparāmasana. Not mentioning the preceptor, saying "So-and-so is the ordination candidate," is called puggalaaparāmasana. Not reciting the ñatti at all is called ñattiaparāmasana. Finishing the first motion and then saying, "This is the ñatti," and then saying, "Is it agreeable to the Saṅgha?" is called pacchā ñattiṭṭhapana. Thus, an ñatti free from these faults is complete and unshakeable in terms of the ñattisampatti.

Anussāvanavasenaakuppatāyapi vatthusaṅghapuggalānaṃ aparāmasanāni, sāvanāya hāpanaṃ, akāle sāvananti ime pañca anussāvanadosā. Tattha vatthādīnaṃ aparāmasanāni ñattiyaṃ vuttasadisāneva. Tīsu pana anussāvanāsu yattha katthaci etesaṃ aparāmasanaṃ aparāmasanameva. Sabbena sabbaṃ pana kammavācaṃ avatvā catukkhattuṃ ñattikittanameva, atha vā pana kammavācābbhantare akkharassa vā padassa vā anuccāraṇaṃ vā duruccāraṇaṃ vāsāvanāya hāpanaṃnāma. Sāvanāya anokāse paṭhamaṃ ñattiṃ aṭṭhapetvā anussāvanakaraṇaṃakāle sāvanaṃnāma. Iti imehi dosehi vimuttāya anussāvanāya sampannaṃ anussāvanasampattivasena akuppaṃ hoti.

Regarding unshakeability in terms of anussāvanavasena, these are the five faults of the proclamation (anussāvana): non-recitation of the object, Saṅgha, and individual, omission in the proclamation, and proclamation at the wrong time. Therein, the non-recitation of the object, etc., is similar to what was said regarding the ñatti. However, the non-recitation of these anywhere in the three proclamations is still non-recitation. However, not reciting the entire motion at all, but only reciting the ñatti four times, or not uttering or mispronouncing a letter or word within the motion, is called sāvanāya hāpana. Making the proclamation at the wrong time, establishing the first ñatti when it is not the occasion for proclamation, is called akāle sāvanaṃ. Thus, a proclamation complete and free from these faults is unshakeable in terms of anussāvanasampatti.

sīmāsampattivasenaakuppaṃ hoti. Yāvatikā bhikkhū kammappattā, tesaṃ anāgamanaṃ, chandārahānaṃ chandassa anāharaṇaṃ, sammukhībhūtānaṃ paṭikkosananti ime pana tayo parisādosā, tehi vimuttāya parisāya kataṃparisāsampattivasenaakuppaṃ hoti. Kāraṇārahattā pana satthu sāsanārahattāṭhānārahaṃnāma hoti. Iti yo iminā evaṃ akuppena ṭhānārahena ñatticatutthena upasampadākammena upasampanno, ayaṃ idha ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti adhippeto. Paṇṇattivajjesu pana aññepi saṅgahaṃ gacchanti.

It is unshakeable in terms of sīmāsampattivasena. The non-attendance of those bhikkhus who are eligible to act, the non-bringing of the consent of those who are entitled to give it, and the protesting of those who are present, these are the three faults of the assembly. What is done by an assembly free from these faults is unshakeable in terms of parisāsampattivasena. Being worthy of the cause and worthy of the Teacher’s Dispensation is called ṭhānārahaṃ. Thus, one who is ordained by this unshakeable and worthy procedure with a ñatticatuttha ordination act is what is meant here by "bhikkhu." However, others are also included among those to be excluded by regulation.

Bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāsājīvasamāpannoti yā bhikkhūnaṃ adhisīlasaṅkhātā sikkhā, tañca, yattha cete saha jīvanti, ekajīvikā sabhāgavuttino honti, taṃ bhagavatā paññattaṃ sikkhāpadasaṅkhātaṃ sājīvañca, tattha sikkhanabhāvena samāpannoti bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāsājīvasamaāpanno.Samāpannoti sikkhañca paripūrento sājīvañca avītikkamanto hutvā tadubhayaṃ upagatoti attho.Sikkhaṃ apaccakkhāya dubbalyaṃ anāvikatvāti yaṃ sikkhaṃ samāpanno, taṃ apaṭikkhipitvā, yañca sājīvaṃ samāpanno, tasmiṃ dubbalabhāvaṃ appakāsetvā. Tattha cittakhettakālapayogapuggalavijānanavasena sikkhāya paccakkhānaṃ ñatvā tadabhāvena apaccakkhānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Kathaṃ? Upasampannabhāvato cavitukāmatācitteneva hi sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na davā vā ravā vā bhaṇantassa. Evaṃcittavasenasikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena. Tathā ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmi, dhammaṃ paccakkhāmi, saṅghaṃ paccakkhāmi, sikkhaṃ, vinayaṃ, pātimokkhaṃ, uddesaṃ, upajjhāyaṃ, ācariyaṃ, saddhivihārikaṃ, antevāsikaṃ, samānupajjhāyakaṃ, samānācariyakaṃ, sabrahmacāriṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evaṃ vuttānaṃ buddhādīnaṃ cuddasannaṃ, ‘‘gihīti maṃ dhārehi, upāsako, ārāmiko, sāmaṇero, titthiyo, titthiyasāvako, asamaṇo, ‘asakyaputtiyo’ti maṃ dhārehī’’ti evaṃ vuttānaṃ gihiādīnaṃ aṭṭhannañcāti imesaṃ dvāvīsatiyā khettapadānaṃ yassa kassaci savevacanassa vasena tesu yaṃkiñci vattukāmassa yaṃkiñci vadato sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na rukkhādīnaṃ aññatarassa nāmaṃ gahetvā paccācikkhantassa. Evaṃkhettavasenapaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena.

Bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno means one who has undertaken the training consisting of the higher morality of the bhikkhus, and the livelihood by which they live together, sharing the same livelihood and having a common practice, which is the code of rules (sikkhāpada) established by the Blessed One. Samāpanno means one who has undertaken both the training and the livelihood, fulfilling the training and not transgressing the livelihood, meaning one who has approached both. Sikkhaṃ apaccakkhāya dubbalyaṃ anāvikatvā means without renouncing the training that one has undertaken, and without declaring weakness in the livelihood that one has undertaken. Therein, knowing the renunciation of the training in terms of mind, place, time, application, and person, and knowing the non-renunciation by the absence of that, should be understood. How so? Renunciation of the training occurs only with the thought of wanting to leave the state of being ordained, not when babbling under duress or out of fear. Thus, renunciation of the training occurs in terms of cittavasena, not by its absence. Likewise, for the fourteen instances of saying "I renounce the Buddha, I renounce the Dhamma, I renounce the Saṅgha, the training, the discipline, the Pātimokkha, the recitation, the preceptor, the teacher, the fellow resident, the novice, the co-preceptor, the co-teacher, the fellow brahmacārī," and for the eight instances of saying "Consider me a householder, a lay follower, a temple servant, a novice, a sectarian, a follower of a sectarian, a non-recluse, a non-Sakyan," renunciation of the training occurs for one who, wishing to utter any of these twenty-two field terms, utters anything with a complete statement, not for one who renounces while taking the name of a tree or something else. Thus, renunciation occurs in terms of khettavasena, not by its absence.

kālavasenaceva anāmaṭṭhakālavasenaca paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena.

Renunciation also occurs in terms of kālavasena both specified and unspecified, not by its absence.

Payogopana duvidho kāyiko ca vācasiko ca. Tattha ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’tiādinā (pārā. 51) nayena yāya kāyaci bhāsāya vacībhedaṃ katvā vācasikappayogeneva paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na akkharalikhanaṃ vā hatthamuddādidassanaṃ vā kāyappayogaṃ karontassa. Evaṃ vācasikappayogeneva paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena.

Application (payoga) is of two kinds: bodily and verbal. Therein, renunciation occurs only with a verbal application, having made a distinction of speech in any language according to the method "I renounce the Buddha," etc. (pārā. 51), not when making a bodily application by writing letters or showing hand gestures, etc. Thus, renunciation occurs only with a verbal application, not by its absence.

Puggalopana duvidho – yo ca paccakkhāti, yassa ca paccakkhāti. Tattha yo paccakkhāti, so sace ummattakakhittacittavedanāṭṭānaṃ aññataro na hoti. Yassa pana paccakkhāti, so sace manussajātiko hoti, na ca ummattakādīnaṃ aññataro, sammukhībhūto ca sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti. Na hi asammukhībhūtassa dūtena vā paṇṇena vā ārocanaṃ ruhati. Evaṃ yathāvuttapuggalavasena paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena.

Person (puggala) is of two kinds: the one who renounces and the one to whom he renounces. Therein, the one who renounces should not be one who is mad, deranged, of disturbed mind, or afflicted by pain. However, the one to whom he renounces should be a human being and not one who is mad, etc., and should be present in person for the renunciation of the training. Indeed, notification by messenger or letter to one who is not present does not hold. Thus, renunciation occurs in terms of the person as stated, not by its absence.

Vijānanampi niyamitāniyamitavasena duvidhaṃ. Tattha yassa yesaṃ vā niyametvā ‘‘imassa, imesaṃ vā ārocemī’’ti vadati, sace te yathā pakatiyā loke manussā vacanaṃ sutvā āvajjanasamaye jānanti, evaṃ tassa vacanānantarameva tassa ‘‘ayaṃ ukkaṇṭhito’’ti vā ‘‘gihibhāvaṃ patthayatī’’ti vā yena kenaci ākārena sikkhāpaccakkhānabhāvaṃ jānanti, paccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Atha aparabhāge ‘‘kiṃ iminā vutta’’nti cintetvā jānanti, aññe vā jānanti, apaccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Aniyametvā ārocentassa pana sace vuttanayena yo koci manussajātiko vacanatthaṃ jānāti, paccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Evaṃ vijānanavasena paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena. Yo pana antamaso davāyapi paccakkhāti, tena apaccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Iti imesaṃ vuttappakārānaṃ cittādīnaṃ vā vasena, sabbaso vā pana apaccakkhānena sikkhaṃ apaccakkhāya sikkhāpaccakkhānasseva ca atthabhūtaṃ ekaccaṃ dubbalyaṃ anāvikatvā.

Discernment (vijānana) is also of two kinds, specified and unspecified. Therein, if one specifies, "I am announcing to this one, or to these ones," and those humans in the world, according to their nature, know upon hearing the word at the time of adverting, then immediately after that word, they know the state of renunciation of the training in some way, such as "This one is disgusted" or "He desires the state of a householder," then the training is indeed renounced. But if they think, "What did he say?" and know later, or others know, then the training is not renounced. However, if one announces without specifying, the training is indeed renounced if any human being knows the meaning of the word in the manner stated. Thus, renunciation occurs in terms of discernment, not by its absence. But if one renounces even under duress, the training is not renounced. Thus, without renouncing the training by the absence of these aspects of mind, etc., or in every way, and without declaring some weakness that is the essence of renunciation of the training.

Methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭiseveyyāti etthamethunaṃ dhammanti rāgapariyuṭṭhānena sadisānaṃ ubhinnaṃ dhammaṃ.Paṭiseveyyāti paṭiseveyya ajjhāpajjeyya.Antamasoti sabbantimena paricchedena.Tiracchānagatāyapīti paṭisandhivasena tiracchānesu gatāyapi, ayamettha anupaññatti.Pārājiko hotīti parājito hoti, parājayaṃ āpanno.Asaṃvāsoti pakatattā bhikkhū saha vasanti etthāti ekakammādikova tividhopi vidhi saṃvāso nāma, so tena saddhiṃ natthīti asaṃvāso. Saṅghakammesu hi esa gaṇapūrakopi na hoti, ayaṃ tāva padavaṇṇanā.

Herein, methunaṃ dhamma means the similar nature of both, accompanied by passion. Paṭiseveyyā means should engage in, should commit. Antamaso means with the final limitation. Tiracchānagatāyapī means even to one gone to the animal realm in terms of rebirth; this is an additional rule here. Pārājiko hotī means is defeated, has met with defeat. Asaṃvāso means bhikkhus dwell together, and thus the threefold procedure, beginning with a shared act, is called dwelling together (saṃvāsa). That is not present with him, so it is asaṃvāsa. Indeed, he cannot even be a quorum filler in the Saṅgha's acts. This is the word definition.

Ayaṃ panettha vinicchayo – manussāmanussatiracchānagatavasena hi tisso itthiyo, tāsaṃ vaccamaggapassāvamaggamukhamaggavasena tayo tayo katvā nava maggā, tathā ubhatobyañjanakānaṃ. Purisānaṃ pana vaccamaggamukhamaggavasena dve dve katvā cha maggā, tathā paṇḍakānanti evaṃ tiṃsa maggā. Tesu attano vā paresaṃ vā yassa kassaci maggassa santhatassa vā asanthatassa vā, paresaṃ pana matānampi akkhāyitassa vā yebhuyyena akkhāyitassa vā pakativātena asaṃphuṭṭhe allokāse yo bhikkhu ekatilabījamattampi attano aṅgajātaṃ santhataṃ vā asanthataṃ vā sevanacittena paveseti, parena vā pavesiyamāne pavesanapaviṭṭhaṭṭhitauddharaṇesu yaṃkiñci sādiyati, ayaṃ pārājikāpattiṃ āpanno nāma hoti, ayaṃ tāvettha asādhāraṇavinicchayo. Sabbasikkhāpadānaṃ pana sādhāraṇavinicchayatthaṃ ayaṃ mātikā –

Herein, however, is the judgment: there are three kinds of females, human, non-human, and animal, with three openings each, vaginal, urinary, and oral, making nine openings; similarly for those of dual gender. However, for males, there are two openings each, urinary and oral, making six openings; similarly for eunuchs, thus making thirty openings. If a bhikkhu, with the intention of sexual intercourse, inserts even as much as a sesame seed's worth of his own sexual organ, whether covered or uncovered, into any of these openings, his own or another's, covered or uncovered, or into an opening of one who is dead, whether mostly decomposed or not, in an open space not touched by natural wind, or if he delights in any insertion, penetration, presence, or withdrawal when another inserts, then he incurs a pārājika offense. This is the extraordinary judgment here. Now, for the purpose of the common judgment of all the precepts, this is the framework—

Nidānaṃ puggalaṃ vatthuṃ, paññattividhimeva ca;

Origin, person, object,
Rule and mode of enactment too;

Samuṭṭhānavidhiṃ kiriyā-saññācittehi nānattaṃ;

Command, offense, non-offense, transgression, and factor itself;
Mode of arising, action, perception, difference in mind;

sattarasadhā,ṭhitaṃ sādhāraṇaṃ idaṃ;

Fault, type of act, likewise the threefold and twofold method;
The wise one, knowing this commonality, standing in seventeen ways,

nidānaṃnāma vesāli-rājagaha-sāvatthi-āḷavi-kosambi-sagga-bhaggānaṃ vasena sattavidhaṃ paññattiṭṭhānaṃ, idañhi sabbasikkhāpadānaṃ nidānaṃ.Puggalonāma yaṃ yaṃ ārabbha taṃ taṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ.Vatthunāma tassa tassa puggalassa ajjhācāro vuccati.Paññattividhinti paññattianupaññattianuppannapaññattisabbatthapaññattipadesapaññattisādhāraṇapaññatti asādhāraṇapaññattiekatopaññattiubhatopaññattivasena navavidhā paññatti. Tatthaanuppannapaññattināma anuppanne dose paññattā, sā aṭṭhagarudhammappaṭiggahaṇavasena (cūḷava. 403) bhikkhunīnaṃyeva āgatā, aññatra natthi. Vinayadharapañcamena (mahāva. 259) gaṇena upasampadā, gaṇaṅgaṇūpāhanā (mahāva. 259) dhuvanhānaṃ cammattharaṇanti etesaṃ vasena catubbidhāpadesapaññattināma. Majjhimadeseyeva hi etehi āpatti hoti, tesupi dhuvanhānaṃ paṭikkhepamattameva pātimokkhe āgataṃ, tato aññā padesapaññatti nāma natthi. Sabbānisabbatthapaññattiyeva honti,sādhāraṇapaññattidukañcaekatopaññattidukañca atthato ekaṃ, tasmā anuppannapaññattiñca sabbatthapaññattidukañca ekatopaññattidukañca ṭhapetvā sesānaṃ catassannaṃ paññattīnaṃ vasena sabbattha vinicchayo veditabbo.Āṇattāpattināpattivipattintietthaāṇattītiāṇāpanā vuccati.Āpattīti pubbappayogādivasena āpattibhedo.Anāpattīti ajānanādivasena anāpatti.Vipattīti sīlaācāradiṭṭhiājīvavipattīnaṃ aññatarā. Iti imāsaṃ āṇattādīnampi vasena sabbattha vinicchayo veditabbo.Aṅganti sabbasikkhāpadesu āpattīnaṃ aṅgaṃ veditabbaṃ.

nidānaṃ means the seven kinds of places of enactment in terms of Vesālī, Rājagaha, Sāvatthi, Āḷavī, Kosambī, Sagga, and Bhagga; this is the origin of all the precepts. Puggalo means the one in regard to whom that particular precept was enacted. Vatthu means the transgression of that particular person. Paññattividhi means the nine kinds of enactment: original rule (paññatti), additional rule (anupaññatti), enactment of what has not arisen (anuppannapaññatti), universal enactment (sabbattha paññatti), regional enactment (padesapaññatti), general enactment (sādhāraṇapaññatti), specific enactment (asādhāraṇapaññatti), one-sided enactment (ekato paññatti), and two-sided enactment (ubhato paññatti). Therein, anuppannapaññatti means enacted for faults that have not arisen, which applies only to bhikkhunis in terms of accepting the eight weighty rules (cūḷava. 403), and is not found elsewhere. Ordination by a group of five including a vinayadhara (mahāva. 259), footwear worn in a group (mahāva. 259), a covering of leather for a permanent bath, these four are padesapaññatti. Indeed, an offense arises by these only in the Middle Country, and of these, only the prohibition of permanent baths is found in the Pātimokkha; there is no other padesapaññatti. All are sabbatthapaññatti; both the sādhāraṇapaññatti pair and the ekato paññatti pair are one in meaning, therefore the judgment should be understood everywhere in terms of the four enactments remaining after setting aside the anuppannapaññatti, both sabbatthapaññatti pairs, and both ekato paññatti pairs. Āṇattāpattināpattivipatti: therein, āṇattī means command. Āpattī means the kinds of offenses in terms of prior action, etc. Anāpattī means non-offense in terms of non-awareness, etc. Vipattī means one of the moral transgression (sīlavipatti), behavioral transgression (ācāravipatti), view transgression (diṭṭhivipatti), or livelihood transgression (ājīvavipatti). Thus, the judgment should be understood everywhere in terms of these commands, etc. Aṅga means the factor of the offenses in all the precepts should be understood.

Samuṭṭhānavidhinti sabbāpattīnaṃ kāyo vācā kāyavācā kāyacittaṃ vācācittaṃ kāyavācācittanti imāni ekaṅgikadvaṅgikativaṅgikāni. Cha samuṭṭhānāni nāma yāni ‘‘sikkhāpadasamauṭṭhānānī’’tipi vuccanti. Tattha purimāni tīṇi acittakāni, pacchimāni sacittakāni. Tesu ekena vā dvīhi vā tīhi vā catūhi vā chahi vā samuṭṭhānehi āpattiyo samuṭṭhahanti, pañcasamuṭṭhānā nāma natthi. Tatthaekasamuṭṭhānānāma catutthena ca pañcamena ca chaṭṭhena ca samuṭṭhānena samuṭṭhāti, na aññena.Dvisamuṭṭhānānāma paṭhamacatutthehi ca dutiyapañcamehi ca tatiyachaṭṭhehi ca catutthachaṭṭhehi ca pañcamachaṭṭhehi ca samuṭṭhānehi, samuṭṭhāti, na aññehi.Tisamuṭṭhānānāma paṭhamehi ca tīhi, pacchimehi ca tīhi samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhāti, na aññehi.Catusamuṭṭhānānāma paṭhamatatiyacatutthachaṭṭhehi ca dutiyatatiyapañcamachaṭṭhehi ca samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhāti, na aññehi.Cha samuṭṭhānānāma chahipi samuṭṭhāti.

Samuṭṭhānavidhi means the body, speech, body-and-speech, body-and-mind, speech-and-mind, body-speech-and-mind of all offenses; these are the single, double, and triple origins. These six origins, which are also called "origins of the precepts," are all non-intentional, and the latter three are intentional. Offenses arise by one, two, three, four, or six origins; there is no five-origin case. Therein, ekasamuṭṭhānā arises by the fourth, fifth, and sixth origins, not by others. Dvisamuṭṭhānā arises by the first and fourth, second and fifth, third and sixth, fourth and sixth, and fifth and sixth origins, not by others. Tisamuṭṭhānā arises by the first three and the last three origins, not by others. Catusamuṭṭhānā arises by the first, third, fourth, and sixth, and the second, third, fifth, and sixth origins, not by others. Cha samuṭṭhānā arises by all six.

Evaṃ –

Thus—

ekasamuṭṭhānā,pañcadhādvisamuṭṭhitā;

ekasamuṭṭhānā is fivefold, dvisamuṭṭhitā;
ticaturo ṭhānā are each, chasamuṭṭhitā is onefold.

paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānānāma. Yā sacittakehi tīhi samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhāti, ayaṃadinnādānasamuṭṭhānānāma. Yā chahipi samuṭṭhāti, ayaṃsañcarittasamuṭṭhānānāma. Yā chaṭṭheneva samuṭṭhāti, ayaṃsamanubhāsanasamuṭṭhānānāma. Yā tatiyachaṭṭhehi samuṭṭhāti, ayaṃkathinasamuṭṭhānānāma. Yā paṭhamacatutthehi samuṭṭhāti, ayaṃeḷakalomasamuṭṭhānānāma. Yā dutiyapañcamehi samuṭṭhāti, ayaṃpadasodhammasamuṭṭhānānāma. Yā paṭhamatatiyacatutthachaṭṭhehi samuṭṭhāti, ayaṃaddhānasamuṭṭhānānāma. Yā catutthachaṭṭhehi samuṭṭhāti, ayaṃtheyyasatthasamuṭṭhānānāma. Yā pañcameneva samuṭṭhāti, ayaṃdhammadesanāsamuṭṭhānānāma. Yā acittakehi tīhi samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhāti, ayaṃbhūtārocanasamuṭṭhānānāma. Yā pañcamachaṭṭhehi samuṭṭhāti, ayaṃcorivuṭṭhāpanasamuṭṭhānānāma. Yā dutiyatatiyapañcamachaṭṭhehi samuṭṭhāti, ayaṃananuññātasamuṭṭhānānāmāti. Iti imassa samuṭṭhānavidhinopi vasena sabbattha vinicchayo veditabbo.

These are called the originations of the first Pārājika. That which arises from three originations based on conscious action is called the origination of taking what is not given. That which arises from all six originations is called the origination of acting as an intermediary. That which arises only from the sixth origination is called the origination of formal accusation. That which arises from the third and sixth originations is called the origination of the Kathina. That which arises from the first and fourth originations is called the origination of goat's hair. That which arises from the second and fifth originations is called the origination of the Padasodhana. That which arises from the first, third, fourth, and sixth originations is called the origination of the journey. That which arises from the fourth and sixth originations is called the origination of the band of thieves. That which arises only from the fifth origination is called the origination of teaching the Dhamma. That which arises from three originations based on unconscious action is called the origination of revealing a ghost. That which arises from the fifth and sixth originations is called the origination of inciting thieves. That which arises from the second, third, fifth, and sixth originations is called the origination of non-permission. Thus, everywhere the judgment should be understood based on this method of origination as well.

Kiriyāsaññācittehi nānattanti etehi kiriyādīhi sabbāpattīnaṃ nānābhāvaṃ ñatvā sabbattha vinicchayo veditabbo. Sabbāpattiyo hi kiriyāvasena pañcavidhā honti, seyyathidaṃ – atthāpatti kiriyato samuṭṭhāti, atthi akiriyato, atthi kiriyākiriyato, atthi siyā kiriyato siyā akiriyato, atthi siyā kiriyato siyā kiriyākiriyatoti. Tattha yā kāyena vā vācāya vā pathavikhaṇanādīsu (paci. 84) viya vītikkamaṃ karontassa hoti, ayaṃkiriyato samuṭṭhātināma. Yā kāyavācāhi kattabbaṃ akarontassa hoti paṭhamakathināpatti (pārā. 459 ādayo) viya, ayaṃakiriyato samuṭṭhātināma. Yā karontassa ca akarontassa ca hoti aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā hatthato cīvarappaṭiggahaṇāpatti (pārā. 508-511) viya, ayaṃkiriyākiriyatosamuṭṭhātināma. Yā siyā karontassa ca, siyā akarontassa ca hoti rūpiyappaṭiggahaṇāpatti (pārā. 582) viya, ayaṃsiyā kiriyato siyā akiriyato samuṭṭhātināma. Yā siyā karontassa ca siyā karontākarontassa ca hoti kuṭikārāpatti (pārā. 342 ādayo) viya, ayaṃsiyā kiriyato siyā kiriyākiriyato samuṭṭhātināma.

Difference due to action, perception, and mind: Knowing the difference in all offenses due to these action, etc., judgment should be made everywhere. For all offenses are fivefold in terms of action, that is: there is an offense that arises from action; there is one that arises from non-action; there is one that arises from action and non-action; there is one that arises from either action or non-action; there is one that arises from either action or action and non-action. Here, that which occurs for one who is committing a transgression through body or speech, like in the digging of the earth (paci. 84), is called arising from action. That which occurs for one who is not doing what should be done through body and speech, like the first Kathina offense (pārā. 459 ff.), is called arising from non-action. That which occurs for one who is doing and not doing, like the offense of receiving a robe from the hand of a nun who is not a relative (pārā. 508-511), is called arising from action and non-action. That which occurs for one who may be doing or may not be doing, like the offense of receiving money (pārā. 582), is called arising from either action or non-action. That which occurs for one who may be doing or may be doing and not doing, like the offense concerning the construction of a hut (pārā. 342 ff.), is called arising from either action or action and non-action.

saññāvimokkhā,itarānosaññāvimokkhā. Puna ca sabbāpi cittavasena duvidhā honti sacittakā acittakā cāti. Tattha yā sacittakasamuṭṭhānavaseneva samuṭṭhāti ayaṃsacittakā. Yā acittakena vā sacittakamissakena vā samuṭṭhāti ayaṃacittakā.

With release by perception and the other is without release by perception. Furthermore, all are twofold in terms of mind: with mind and without mind. Here, that which arises only through origination based on conscious action is with mind. That which arises through unconscious action or a mixture of conscious and unconscious action is without mind.

Vajjakammappabhedanti ettha sabbāpattiyo vajjavasena duvidhā honti lokavajjā paṇṇattivajjā cāti. Tattha yassā sacittakapakkhe cittaṃ akusalameva hoti, ayaṃlokavajjā,sesāpaṇṇattivajjā. Sabbā ca kāyakammavacīkammatadubhayavasena tividhā honti. Tattha kāyadvāre āpajjitabbākāyakammanti vuccati, vacīdvāre āpajjitabbāvacīkammanti vuccati, ubhayattha āpajjitabbākāyakammaṃ vacīkammañcāti, manodvāre āpatti nāma natthi. Iti iminā vajjakammappabhedenāpi sabbattha vinicchayo veditabbo.

Classification of offenses: Here, all offenses are twofold in terms of fault: offenses against the world and offenses against the Vinaya rules. Here, for that in the category of conscious action where the mind is only unwholesome, this is an offense against the world, the rest are offenses against the Vinaya rules. And all are threefold in terms of bodily action, verbal action, and both. Here, that which is incurred through the door of the body is called bodily action, that which is incurred through the door of speech is called verbal action, that which is incurred in both is called bodily action and verbal action, and there is no offense through the door of the mind. Thus, everywhere judgment should be understood by this classification of offenses.

Tikadvayavidhinti kusalattikavedanāttikavidhiṃ. Āpattiṃ āpajjamāno hi akusalacitto vā āpajjati kusalābyākatacitto vā, tathā dukkhavedanāsamaṅgī vā itaravedanādvayasamaṅgī vā. Evaṃ santepi sabbasikkhāpadesu akusalacittavasena ekaṃ cittaṃ, kusalābyākatacittavasena dve cittāni, sabbesaṃ vasena tīṇi cittāni. Dukkhavedanāvasena ekā vedanā, sukhaupekkhāvasena dve, sabbāsaṃ vasena tisso vedanāti. Ayameva pabhedo labbhati, na añño.

Method of the two triads: The method of the wholesome triad and the feeling triad. For one who is incurring an offense incurs it with an unwholesome mind or with a wholesome/indeterminate mind, and likewise is accompanied by painful feeling or by the other two feelings. Even so, in all precepts, there is one mind in terms of unwholesome mind, two minds in terms of wholesome/indeterminate mind, and three minds in terms of all. There is one feeling in terms of painful feeling, two in terms of pleasant/equanimous feeling, and three feelings in terms of all. Only this distinction is obtained, not another.

Lakkhaṇaṃ sattarasadhā, ṭhitaṃ sādhāraṇaṃ idaṃ, ñatvāti idaṃ nidānādivedanāttikapariyosānaṃ sattarasappakāraṃ lakkhaṇaṃ jānitvā yojeyya medhāvī.Tattha tattha yathārahanti paṇḍito bhikkhu tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sikkhāpade idaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ yathānurūpaṃ yojeyyāti attho. Taṃ pana ayojitaṃ dubbijānaṃ hoti, tasmā naṃ sabbasikkhāpadānaṃ asādhāraṇavinicchayapariyosāne imaṃ mātikaṃ anuddharitvāva yojetvā dassayissāma.

Knowing the characteristic in seventeen ways, this is common and established: Knowing this characteristic, which has seventeen aspects, from the beginning of the basis up to the feeling triad as the conclusion, the wise one should apply it. Appropriately in each case: The wise bhikkhu should apply this characteristic appropriately in each precept. But that which is not applied is difficult to understand, therefore, without extracting this matrix at the conclusion of the uncommon judgment of all the precepts, we will show it by applying it.

Anupaññattica nāmesā āpattikarā ca hoti aññavādakasikkhāpadādīsu (pāci. 95 ādayo) viya, anāpattikarā ca aññatra supinantātiādīsu (pārā. 236-237) viya, āpattiupatthambhakarā ca adinnādānādīsu (pārā. 91) viya, idha pana upatthambhakarāti veditabbā. Ito paraṃ pana yattha anupaññatti atthi, tattha ‘‘ayaṃ anupaññattī’’ti ettakameva dassayissāma. Ṭhapetvā pana anupaññattiṃ avasesā paññattiyevāti sabbattha vinicchayo veditabbo. Bhikkhuṃ ārabbha uppannavatthusmiṃyeva ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī chandaso methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭiseveyyā’’ti evaṃ bhikkhunīnampi paññattito sādhāraṇapaññatti. Āṇattiyā anāpajjanato anāṇattikaṃ. Bhikkhuṃ pana āṇāpento akappiyasamādānāpattito na muccati, methunarāgena kāyasaṃsagge dukkaṭaṃ, jīvamānakasarīrassa vuttappakāre magge sacepi tacādīni anavasesetvā sabbaso chinne nimittasaṇṭhānamattaṃ paññāyati, tattha antamaso aṅgajāte uṭṭhitaṃ anaṭṭhakāyappasādaṃ pīḷakaṃ vā cammakhilaṃ vā pavesentassāpi sevanacitte sati pārājikaṃ, naṭṭhakāyappasādaṃ sukkhapīḷakaṃ vā matacammaṃ vā lomaṃ vā pavesentassa dukkaṭaṃ, sace nimittasaṇṭhānamattampi anavasesetvā sabbaso maggo uppāṭito, tattha upakkamato vaṇasaṅkhepavasena thullaccayaṃ, tathā manussānaṃ akkhināsākaṇṇacchiddavatthikosesu satthakena katavaṇe vā, hatthiassādīnañca tiracchānānaṃ vatthikosanāsāpuṭesu thullaccayaṃ. Tiracchānānaṃ pana akkhikaṇṇanāsāvaṇesu ahimacchādīnaṃ pavesanappamāṇavirahite aṇunimitte sabbesañca upakacchakādīsu sesasarīresu dukkaṭaṃ. Matasarīre nimitte upaḍḍhakkhāyitato paṭṭhāya yāva na kuthitaṃ hoti, tāva thullaccayaṃ. Kuthite dukkaṭaṃ, tathā vaṭṭakate mukhe acchupantaṃ aṅgajātaṃ pavesentassa dukkaṭaṃ. Oṭṭhato bahi nikkhantajivhāya vā dantesu vā thullaccayaṃ. Nimittato bahi patitamaṃsapesiyaṃ dukkaṭanti ayamettha āpattibhedo.

And this Anupaññatti is both productive of offenses, like in the rules about instructing nuns, etc. (pāci. 95 ff.), and non-productive of offenses, like elsewhere in the case of dreams, etc. (pārā. 236-237), and supportive of offenses, like in the case of taking what is not given, etc. (pārā. 91), but here it should be understood as supportive. But hereafter, where there is an Anupaññatti, we will show only "this is an Anupaññatti". But apart from the Anupaññatti, the rest is only Paññatti, and everywhere judgment should be made accordingly. Regarding a matter that arises concerning a bhikkhu, "that any bhikkhuni should engage in sexual intercourse out of desire," thus, the rule is common to bhikkhunis as well due to the Paññatti. It is not commanded because of not commanding (anāṇattiyā anāpajjanato), therefore, it is uncommanded (anāṇattikaṃ). But a bhikkhu who commands it is not freed from the offense of undertaking what is unsuitable, and there is a dukkata for bodily contact with sexual desire. If, in the case of the body of a living being, in the aforementioned passage, even if after completely cutting off everything without leaving any skin, etc., only the form of the sexual organ is apparent, there is a pārājika even for one who inserts a boil or skin growth that has arisen on the sexual organ and that is a non-erogenous area, with the intention of sexual intercourse; there is a dukkata for one who inserts a dry boil or dead skin or hair that is an erogenous area. If, after completely cutting off everything without leaving even the form of the sexual organ, the passage is completely uprooted, there is a thullaccaya due to the closing of the wound from the initial attempt. Likewise, there is a thullaccaya in wounds made with a knife in the eyes, nose, ear holes, and genitals of humans, and in the genitals and nostrils of animals such as elephants and horses. But there is a dukkata in insignificant orifices in wounds of the eyes, ears, and noses of animals and reptiles, where there is no measure for insertion, and in all armpits, etc., and remaining parts of the body. In a dead body, there is a thullaccaya from the beginning of partial decay until it is not yet putrid. When putrid, there is a dukkata. Likewise, there is a dukkata for one who inserts the sexual organ that is reaching into a round mouth. There is a thullaccaya on the lips or teeth of a tongue extending out from the lips. There is a dukkata for a piece of flesh that has fallen outside the sexual organ. This is the distinction of offenses here.

Ajānantassa asādiyantassa ummattakassa khittacittassa vedanāṭṭassa ādikammikānañca anāpatti. Ettha pana yo niddaṃ okkantattā parena katampi upakkamaṃ na jānāti, so ajānanto. Yo jānitvāpi na sādiyati, so asādiyanto. Yo pittavasena atekicchaṃ ummādaṃ patto, so ummattako. Yakkhehi katacittavikkhepo khittacitto. Dvinnampi ca etesaṃ aggisuvaṇṇagūthacandanādīsu samappavattibhāvena ajānanabhāvova pamāṇaṃ. Yo adhimattavedanāya āturattā kiñci na jānāti, so vedanāṭṭo. Yo tasmiṃ tasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ ādibhūto, so ādikammiko. Ayaṃ pana anāpatti. Catūsu vipattīsu sīlavipatti. Tassā dve aṅgāni sevanacittañca maggena maggapaṭipādanañcāti. Samuṭṭhānādito idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dvivedananti, imāni ca samuṭṭhānādīni nāma āpattiyā honti, na sikkhāpadassa. Vohārasukhatthaṃ pana sabbaṭṭhakathāsu sikkhāpadasīsena desanā āgatā, tasmā aññesupi evarūpesu ṭhānesu byañjane ādaraṃ akatvā adhippetameva gahetabbaṃ.

There is no offense for one who does not know, one who does not consent, one who is insane, one whose mind is deranged, one who is afflicted by pain, and for the first offender. Here, one who does not know the attempt made by another because he has fallen asleep is one who does not know. One who does not consent even after knowing is one who does not consent. One who has reached incurable insanity due to a disturbance of bile is one who is insane. One whose mind is deranged by spirits is one whose mind is deranged. And for both of these, the state of not knowing is the standard, as in the case of engaging with fire, gold, excrement, sandalwood, etc. One who does not know anything because he is afflicted by excessive pain is one who is afflicted by pain. One who is the first to do so in that particular matter is the first offender. This is the non-offense. Among the four failures, it is the failure of virtue. It has two factors: the intention to engage and the practice of the path with the passage. From origination onwards, this precept is of the origination of the first Pārājika, is an action, is with release by perception, is with mind, is an offense against the world, is bodily action, is with unwholesome mind, is twofold. And these originations, etc., are names of the offense, not of the precept. However, in all the commentaries, the teaching comes under the heading of the precept for the sake of ease of expression, therefore, in other such places, one should take the intended meaning without paying attention to the literal wording.

Atthañhi nātho saraṇaṃ avoca;

For the World-Benefactor, the Great Sage, declared the meaning to be the refuge,
Not the literal wording.

Tasmā akatvā ratimakkharesu;

Therefore, without delighting in the letters,
One should fix one's mind on the meaning, O wise one.

Paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the First Pārājika is Concluded.

2. Dutiyapārājikavaṇṇanā
2. Commentary on the Second Pārājika

gāmā vā araññāvāti ettha sabbopi ekakuṭikādibhedo parikkhitto vā aparikkhitto vā samanusso vā amanusso vā antamaso atirekacātumāsaniviṭṭho yo koci satthopi ‘‘gāmo’’ti veditabbo. Ṭhapetvā gāmañca gāmūpacārañca avasesaṃ araññaṃ nāma. Tattha asammohatthaṃ gharaṃ gharūpacāro gāmo gāmūpacāroti ayaṃ vibhāgo veditabbo. Nibbakosassa hi udakapatanaṭṭhānabbhantaraṃgharaṃnāma. Yaṃ pana dvāre ṭhito mātugāmo bhājanadhovanaudakaṃ chaḍḍeti, tassa patanaṭṭhānañca mātugāmeneva antogehe ṭhitena pakatiyā bahi khittassa suppassa vā saṃmuñjaniyā vā patanaṭṭhānañca gharassa purato dvīsu koṇesu sambandhitvā majjhe rukkhasūcidvāraṃ ṭhapetvā gorūpānaṃ pavesananivāraṇatthaṃ kataparikkhepo ca ayaṃ sabbopigharūpacāronāma. Yaṃ pana sabbantimaṃ gharaṃ hoti, tassa gharassa tādise gharūpacāre ṭhitassa thāmamajjhimassa purisassa yathā taruṇamanussā attano balaṃ dassento bāhuṃ pasāretvā leḍḍuṃ khipanti, evaṃ khittassa leḍḍussa patanaṭṭhānabbhantaraṃgāmonāma. Tato aññassa leḍḍupātassa abbhantaraṃgāmūpacāronāma. Patitassa pana leḍḍuno pavattitvā gataṭṭhānaṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Parikkhittassa pana gāmassa parikkhepoyeva gāmassa paricchedo, tassa sace dve indakhilā honti abbhantarime indakhile ṭhitassa leḍḍupātabbhantaraṃgāmūpacāronāma. Padabhājanepi (pārā. 92) hi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Tattha yvāyaṃ aparikkhittassa gāmassa upacāro dassito, tassa vasena vikāle gāmappavesanādīsu āpatti paricchinditabbā. Iti imaṃ ṭhapetvā gāmañca gāmūpacārañca avasesaṃ imasmiṃ sikkhāpade araññaṃ nāma. Desanāmattameva cetaṃ ‘‘gāmā vā araññāvā’’ti. Ye pana imesaṃ paricchedadassanatthaṃ gharagharūpacāragāmūpacārā vuttā, tatopi pārājikavatthuṃ avaharantassa pārājikaṃ hotiyeva.

In a village or in the forest: Here, all places, whether enclosed or unenclosed, with or without humans, down to any group of dwellings established for more than four months, should be understood as "village". Apart from the village and the vicinity of the village, the remainder is called "forest". Here, for the sake of non-confusion, this distinction should be understood: house, vicinity of the house, village, vicinity of the village. For the interior of the place where water falls from the eaves is called house. Moreover, the place where a woman standing at the door throws out water used for washing dishes, and the place where a winnowing basket or broom, thrown naturally outward by a woman standing inside the house, falls, and the enclosure made in front of the house by connecting the two corners with a marker tree and a door in the middle to prevent the entry of cattle, all this is called the vicinity of the house. Moreover, the interior of the place where a clod of earth thrown by a strong middle-aged man standing in such a vicinity of the last house, as young men show their strength by stretching out their arms and throwing a clod of earth, falls is called village. The interior of another such clod-falling place is called vicinity of the village. But the place where the thrown clod rolls and goes should not be included. Moreover, for an enclosed village, the enclosure itself is the boundary of the village. If there are two boundary pillars, the interior of the place where a clod of earth thrown by a man standing at the inner boundary pillar falls is called vicinity of the village. Moreover, in the word analysis (Padabhajana) (pārā. 92), the meaning should be understood in this way. There, the offense of entering the village at the wrong time, etc., should be determined based on the vicinity of the unenclosed village that has been shown. Thus, apart from the village and the vicinity of the village, the remainder in this precept is called "forest". And this is only a form of expression, "in a village or in the forest". However, even from the house, vicinity of the house, village, and vicinity of the village that were mentioned for the purpose of showing the boundary of these, there is a pārājika for one who steals a pārājika object.

Adinnanti aññassa manussajātikassa santakaṃ.Theyyasaṅkhātanti etthathenoti coro, thenassa bhāvo theyyaṃ, avaharaṇacittassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Saṅkhā saṅkhātanti atthato ekaṃ, koṭṭhāsassetaṃ nāmaṃ ‘‘saññānidānā hi papañcasaṅkhā’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 880; mahāni. 109) viya. Theyyañca taṃ saṅkhātañcāti theyyasaṅkhātaṃ, theyyacittasaṅkhāto eko cittakoṭṭhāsoti attho. Karaṇatthe cetaṃ paccattavacanaṃ, tasmā theyyasaṅkhātenāti atthato daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yo ca theyyasaṅkhātena ādiyati, so yasmā theyyacitto hoti, tasmā byañjanaṃ anādiyitvā atthameva dassetuṃ ‘‘theyyacitto avaharaṇacitto’’ti (pārā. 92) evamassa padabhājanaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.

Not given: Belonging to another human being. Considered as theft: Here, thena means thief, the state of a thena is theyya, this is the name for the mind of stealing. Saṅkhā and saṅkhāta mean the same thing in meaning, this is the name for a division, as in "the number of proliferations is due to the cause of perception" (su. ni. 880; mahāni. 109) and so on. Theyyañca taṃ saṅkhātañca means theyyasaṅkhātaṃ, the meaning is one division considered as the mind of stealing. And this is the singular number in the sense of the instrument, therefore, it should be understood in meaning as theyyasaṅkhātena. And since one who takes with what is considered as theft has a mind of stealing, therefore, to show only the meaning without paying attention to the literal wording, the word analysis of this was said as "with a mind of stealing, with a mind of theft" (pārā. 92), it should be understood.

Ādiyeyyāti pañcavīsatiyā avahārānaṃ aññataravasena hareyya. Te pana avahārā pañca pañcakāni samodhānetvā sādhukaṃ sallakkhetabbā. Pañca pañcakāni nāma nānābhaṇḍapañcakaṃ ekabhaṇḍapañcakaṃ sāhatthikapañcakaṃ pubbapayogapañcakaṃ theyyāvahārapañcakanti. Tattha purimāni dve pañcakāni etasseva padassa padabhājane vuttānaṃ ‘‘ādiyeyya hareyya avahareyya iriyāpathaṃ vikopeyya ṭhānā cāveyyā’’ti imesaṃ padānaṃ vasena labbhanti. Tattha nānābhaṇḍapañcakaṃ saviññāṇakāviññāṇakavasena daṭṭhabbaṃ, itaraṃ saviññāṇakavaseneva. Kathaṃ?Ādiyeyyāti ārāmaṃ abhiyuñjati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Sāmikassa vimatiṃ uppādeti, āpatti thullaccayassa. Sāmiko ‘‘na mayhaṃ bhavissatī’’ti dhuraṃ nikkhipati, āpatti pārājikassa.Hareyyāti aññassa bhaṇḍaṃ haranto sīse bhāraṃ theyyacitto āmasati, dukkaṭaṃ. Phandāpeti, thullaccayaṃ. Khandhaṃ oropeti, pārājikaṃ.Avahareyyāti upanikkhittaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ ‘‘dehi me bhaṇḍa’’nti vuccamāno ‘‘nāhaṃ gaṇhāmī’’ti bhaṇati, dukkaṭaṃ. Sāmikassa vimatiṃ uppādeti, thullaccayaṃ. Sāmiko ‘‘na mayhaṃ bhavissatī’’ti dhuraṃ nikkhipati, pārājikaṃ.Iriyāpathaṃ vikopeyyāti ‘‘saha bhaṇḍahārakaṃ nessāmī’’ti paṭhamaṃ pādaṃ atikkāmeti, thullaccayaṃ. Dutiyaṃ pādaṃ atikkāmeti, pārājikaṃ.Ṭhānā cāveyyāti thalaṭṭhaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ theyyacitto āmasati, dukkaṭaṃ. Phandāpeti, thullaccayaṃ. Ṭhānā cāveti, pārājikaṃ. Evaṃ tāvanānābhaṇḍapañcakaṃveditabbaṃ. Sasāmikassa pana dāsassa vā tiracchānagatassa vā yathāvuttena abhiyogādinā nayena ādiyanaharaṇaavaharaṇairiyāpathavikopanaṭhānācāvanavasenaekabhaṇḍapañcakaṃveditabbaṃ.

Ādiyeyya means to take in any way of the twenty-five kinds of taking. These ways of taking, combining the five pentads, should be carefully considered. The five pentads are: the pentad of diverse goods (nānābhaṇḍapañcakaṃ), the pentad of single goods (ekabhaṇḍapañcakaṃ), the pentad of acting oneself (sāhatthikapañcakaṃ), the pentad of prior instigation (pubbapayogapañcakaṃ), and the pentad of thievish taking (theyyāvahārapañcakaṃ). Of these, the first two pentads can be obtained by means of the words "ādiyeyya hareyya avahareyya iriyāpathaṃ vikopeyya ṭhānā cāveyyā," which are mentioned in the word analysis of this very term. Here, the pentad of diverse goods should be regarded in terms of animate and inanimate things, while the other should be regarded only in terms of animate things. How? Ādiyeyya, he makes an attempt upon a monastery (ārāmaṃ abhiyuñjati), there is an offense of dukkata. He causes doubt in the owner (sāmikassa vimatiṃ uppādeti), there is an offense of thullaccaya. The owner, thinking "this will not be mine," relinquishes concern (dhuraṃ nikkhipati), there is an offense of pārājika. Hareyya, while carrying another's goods, with thievish intent, he touches the load on his head (sīse bhāraṃ theyyacitto āmasati), dukkata. He shakes it (phandāpeti), thullaccaya. He lowers it from his shoulder (kandhaṃ oropeti), pārājika. Avahareyya, when asked, "Give me the goods," regarding deposited goods (upanikkhittaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ), he says, "I am not taking them" (nāhaṃ gaṇhāmīti bhaṇati), dukkata. He causes doubt in the owner (sāmikassa vimatiṃ uppādeti), thullaccaya. The owner, thinking "this will not be mine," relinquishes concern (dhuraṃ nikkhipati), pārājika. Iriyāpathaṃ vikopeyya, thinking "I will carry it away together with the carrier of the goods" (saha bhaṇḍahārakaṃ nessāmīti), he takes the first step (paṭhamaṃ pādaṃ atikkāmeti), thullaccaya. He takes the second step (dutiyaṃ pādaṃ atikkāmeti), pārājika. Ṭhānā cāveyya, with thievish intent, he touches goods resting on the ground (thalaṭṭhaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ theyyacitto āmasati), dukkata. He shakes it (phandāpeti), thullaccaya. He moves it from its place (ṭhānā cāveti), pārājika. Thus, first of all, the pentad of diverse goods (nānābhaṇḍapañcakaṃ) should be understood. In the case of an owner's slave or animal, the pentad of single goods (ekabhaṇḍapañcakaṃ) should be understood by way of taking, carrying, removing, disrupting the posture, and moving from its place, according to what has been said, by the method of attempting, and so on.

sāhatthikapañcakaṃ? Sāhatthiko āṇattiko nissaggiyo atthasādhako dhuranikkhepoti. Tatthasāhatthikonāma parassa bhaṇḍaṃ sahatthā avaharati.Āṇattikonāma ‘‘asukassa bhaṇḍaṃ avaharā’’ti aññaṃ āṇāpeti.Nissaggiyonāma suṅkaghātakaparikappitokāsānaṃ anto ṭhatvā bahi pātanaṃ.Atthasādhakonāma ‘‘asukassa bhaṇḍaṃ yadā sakkoti, tadā taṃ avaharā’’ti aññaṃ āṇāpeti. Tattha sace paro anantarāyiko hutvā taṃ avaharati, āṇāpakassa āṇattikkhaṇeyeva pārājikaṃ. Parassa vā pana telakumbhiyā pādagghanakatelaṃ avassaṃ pivanakāni upāhanādīni pakkhipati, hatthato muttamatteyeva pārājikaṃ.Dhuranikkhepopana ārāmābhiyogaupanikkhittabhaṇḍavasena veditabbo. Tāvakālikabhaṇḍadeyyāni adentassāpi esevanayoti idaṃ sāhatthikapañcakaṃ.

sāhatthikapañcakaṃ? The pentad of acting oneself? Acting oneself (sāhatthiko), commissioning (āṇattiko), relinquishing (nissaggiyo), accomplishing the aim (atthasādhako), and abandoning responsibility (dhuranikkhepo). Here, acting oneself (sāhatthiko) means he himself takes away another's goods. Commissioning (āṇattiko) means he orders another, saying, "Take away the goods of so-and-so." Relinquishing (nissaggiyo) means standing inside places designated for customs evasion and throwing [goods] outside. Accomplishing the aim (atthasādhako) means he orders another, saying, "When he is able, then take away the goods of so-and-so." Here, if the other, without obstruction, takes it away, a pārājika occurs for the one who gave the order at the moment of commissioning. Or else, he puts footwear and other things that necessarily drink foot-washing oil into another's oil pot; a pārājika occurs as soon as it is released from the hand. Abandoning responsibility (dhuranikkhepo), however, should be understood in terms of attempting a monastery and deposited goods. This same method applies even to one who does not give temporary goods due; this is the pentad of acting oneself.

pubbapayogapañcakaṃ? Pubbapayogo sahapayogo saṃvidhāvahāro saṅketakammaṃ nimittakammanti. Tattha āṇattivasenapubbapayogoveditabbo. Ṭhānā cāvanavasena, khilādīni saṅkāmetvā khettādiggahaṇavasena casahapayogoveditabbo.Saṃvidhāvahāronāma ‘‘asukaṃ nāma bhaṇḍaṃ avaharissāmā’’ti saṃvidahitvā saṃmantayitvā avaharaṇaṃ. Evaṃ saṃvidahitvā gatesu hi ekenāpi tasmiṃ bhaṇḍe ṭhānā cāvite sabbesaṃ avahārā honti.Saṅketakammaṃnāma sañjānanakammaṃ. Sace hi purebhattādīsu yaṃkiñci kālaṃ paricchinditvā ‘‘asukasmiṃ kāle itthannāmaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avaharā’’ti vutto saṅketato apacchā apure taṃ avaharati, saṅketakārakassa saṅketakaraṇakkhaṇeyeva avahāro.Nimittakammaṃnāma saññuppādanatthaṃ akkhinikkhaṇādinimittakaraṇaṃ. Sace hi evaṃ katanimittato apacchā apure ‘‘yaṃ avaharā’’ti vutto, taṃ avaharati, nimittakārakassa nimittakaraṇakkhaṇeyeva avahāroti idaṃ pubbapayogapañcakaṃ.

pubbapayogapañcakaṃ? The pentad of prior instigation? Prior instigation (pubbapayogo), concurrent instigation (sahapayogo), arranged taking (saṃvidhāvahāro), agreed action (saṅketakammaṃ), and sign action (nimittakammaṃ). Here, prior instigation (pubbapayogo) should be understood in terms of ordering. Concurrent instigation (sahapayogo) should be understood in terms of moving from its place and in terms of removing stakes and taking fields, and so on. Arranged taking (saṃvidhāvahāro) means taking after arranging and agreeing, saying, "We will take away such-and-such goods." For when they have gone, having thus arranged, even if one person moves those goods from their place, taking has occurred for all of them. Agreed action (saṅketakammaṃ) means prearranged action. For if, having specified some time, whether before the meal or any other time, he is told, "At such-and-such a time, take away goods of such-and-such a kind," and he takes it away not later or earlier than the prearranged time, taking occurs for the one who made the agreement at the moment of making the agreement. Sign action (nimittakammaṃ) means making a sign, such as winking the eye, for the purpose of creating recognition. For if, having made a sign in this way, he is told, "Take away whatever [it is]," not later or earlier than the sign, he takes it away, taking occurs for the one who made the sign at the moment of making the sign; this is the pentad of prior instigation.

theyyāvahārapañcakaṃ? Theyyāvahāro pasayhāvahāro parikappāvahāro paṭicchannāvahāro kusāvahāroti. Tattha yo sandhicchedādīni katvā adissamāno avaharati, kūṭamānakūṭakahāpaṇādīhi vā vañcetvā gaṇhāti, tassevaṃ gaṇhato avahārotheyyāvahāroti veditabbo. Yo pana pasayha balakkārena paresaṃ santakaṃ gaṇhāti gāmaghātakādayo viya, attano pattabalito vā vuttanayeneva adhikaṃ gaṇhāti rājabhaṭādayo viya, tassevaṃ gaṇhato avahāropasayhāvahāroti veditabbo. Parikappetvā gahaṇaṃ panaparikappāvahāronāma. So bhaṇḍokāsavasena duvidho. Tatrāyaṃbhaṇḍaparikappo– sāṭakatthiko antogabbhaṃ pavisitvā ‘‘sace sāṭako bhavissati, gaṇhissāmi, sace suttaṃ, na gaṇhissāmī’’ti parikappetvā andhakāre pasibbakaṃ gaṇhāti, tatra ce sāṭako hoti, uddhāreyeva pārājikaṃ. Suttaṃ ce hoti, rakkhati. Bahi nīharitvā muñcitvā ‘‘sutta’’nti ñatvā puna āharitvā ṭhapeti, rakkhatiyeva. ‘‘Sutta’’nti ñatvāpi ‘‘yaṃ laddhaṃ, taṃ gahetabba’’nti gacchati, padavārena kāretabbo. Bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapetvā gaṇhāti, uddhāre pārājikaṃ. ‘‘Coro coro’’ti anubandho chaṭṭetvā palāyati, rakkhati. Sāmikā disvā gaṇhanti, rakkhati yeva. Añño ce koci gaṇhāti, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ. Sāmikesu nivattesu sayaṃ disvā paṃsukūlasaññāya ‘‘pagevetaṃ mayā gahitaṃ, mama dāni santaka’’nti gaṇhantassāpi bhaṇḍadeyyameva. Tattha yvāyaṃ ‘‘sace sāṭako bhavissati, gaṇhissāmī’’tiādinā nayena pavatto parikappo, ayaṃ bhaṇḍaparikappo nāma.

theyyāvahārapañcakaṃ? The pentad of thievish taking? Thievish taking (theyyāvahāro), forceful taking (pasayhāvahāro), planned taking (parikappāvahāro), concealed taking (paṭicchannāvahāro), and marker taking (kusāvahāro). Here, thievish taking (theyyāvahāro) should be understood as the taking that occurs when someone makes a break-in, and so on, and takes [something] unseen, or deceives [someone] with counterfeit measures, counterfeit coins, and so on, and takes [it] while thus taking. Forceful taking (pasayhāvahāro), however, is the taking that occurs when someone forcibly takes another's property, like village destroyers, and so on, or takes more than his due, using his power, like royal officers, and so on, in the way that has been said, while thus taking. Planned taking (parikappāvahāro), however, is planning to take. This is twofold, according to the place of the goods. Here, this is planning regarding goods (bhaṇḍaparikappo): a weaver enters an inner chamber, planning, "If there is cloth, I will take it; if there is thread, I will not take it," and takes a bundle in the darkness; if there is cloth there, a pārājika occurs as soon as he lifts it. If there is thread, he protects [himself]. Having taken it outside, released it, and knowing, "It is thread," then bringing it back and placing it [there], he still protects [himself]. Even knowing, "It is thread," if he goes thinking, "What has been gained should be taken," he should be made to do it by [making him take] a step. Having placed it on the ground, he takes it; a pārājika occurs upon lifting. If, while being chased with "Thief! Thief!," he runs away, he protects [himself]. If the owners see [him] and seize [him], he still protects [himself]. If someone else takes [it], it is a debt of goods. Even when the owners have returned, if he himself sees [it] and takes [it], thinking it is discarded rags, "I took this earlier; now it is mine," it is still only a debt of goods. Here, this planning that occurs in the way beginning with "If there is cloth, I will take it," is called planning regarding goods.

Okāsaparikappopana evaṃ veditabbo – ekacco pana parapariveṇādīni paviṭṭho kiñci lobhaneyyaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ disvā gabbhadvārapamukhaheṭṭhāpāsādadvārakoṭṭhakarukkhamūlādivasena paricchedaṃ katvā ‘‘sace maṃ etthantare passissanti, daṭṭhukāmatāya gahetvā vicaranto viya dassāmi, no ce passissanti, harissāmī’’ti parikappeti, tassa taṃ ādāya parikappitaparicchedaṃ atikkantamatte avahāro hoti. Iti yvāyaṃ vuttanayeneva pavatto parikappo, ayaṃ okāsaparikappo nāma. Evamimesaṃ dvinnampi parikappānaṃ vasena parikappetvā gaṇhato avahāro ‘‘parikappāvahāro’’ti veditabbo.

Planning regarding a place (Okāsaparikappo), however, should be understood thus: A certain person, having entered another's monastery enclosure, and so on, sees some desirable goods, and making a boundary in terms of the door of the room, the lower entrance, the door of the upper story, the storehouse, the base of a tree, and so on, plans, "If they see me within this boundary, I will show [myself] as wandering about, having taken [it] to look at, but if they do not see me, I will take it." Taking that, taking has occurred for him as soon as he crosses the planned boundary. Thus, this planning that occurs in the way that has been said is called planning regarding a place. Thus, taking while planning in terms of these two kinds of planning should be understood as "planned taking."

paṭicchannāvahāronāma. So evaṃ veditabbo – yo bhikkhu uyyānādīsu paresaṃ omuñcitvā ṭhapitaaṅgulimuddikādīni disvā ‘‘pacchā gaṇhissāmī’’ti paṃsunā vā paṇṇena vā paṭicchādeti, tassa ettāvatā uddhāro natthīti na tāva avahāro hoti. Yadā pana sāmikā vicinantā apassitvā ‘‘sve jānissāmā’’ti sālayāva gatā honti, athassa taṃ uddharato uddhāre avahāro. Paṭicchannakāleyeva ‘‘etaṃ mama santaka’’nti sakasaññāya vā ‘‘gatā dāni te, chaṭṭitabhaṇḍaṃ ida’’nti paṃsukūlasaññāya vā gaṇhantassa pana bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ. Tesu dutiyatatiyadivase āgantvā vicinitvā adisvā dhuranikkhepaṃ katvā gatesupi gahitaṃ bhaṇḍadeyyameva. Pacchā ñatvā codiyamānassa adadato sāmikānaṃ dhuranikkhepe avahāro hoti. Kasmā? Yasmā tassa payogena tehi na diṭṭhaṃ. Yo pana tathārūpaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ yathāṭhāne ṭhitaṃyeva appaṭicchādetvā theyyacitto pādena akkamitvā kaddame vā vālukāya vā paveseti, tassa pavesitamatteyeva avahāro.

Concealed taking (paṭicchannāvahāro) should be understood thus: A bhikkhu sees finger rings, and so on, that others have taken off and placed in gardens, and so on, and covers [them] with dust or a leaf, [thinking,] "I will take [them] later." Taking does not occur for him yet, as there is no lifting yet. But when the owners, searching, do not see [them] and have gone to their own dwellings, [thinking,] "We will know tomorrow," then taking occurs for him upon lifting, at the moment of lifting. However, if at the time of concealing he takes [it] with the perception that it is his own, [thinking,] "This is mine," or with the perception of discarded rags, [thinking,] "Now they are gone; this is discarded goods," it is a debt of goods. Even if, having come and searched on the second or third day, not seeing [it], they relinquish concern and go, the thing taken is still only a debt of goods. If, when later he is known and accused, he does not give [it] back, taking occurs upon the owners' relinquishing concern. Why? Because it was not seen by them due to his actions. However, if a bhikkhu, with thievish intent, steps on such goods while they are standing in their place, without concealing [them], or puts [them] into mud or sand, taking has occurred for him as soon as he puts [them] in.

kusāvahāronāma. Sopi evaṃ veditabbo – yo bhikkhu vilīvamayaṃ vā tālapaṇṇamayaṃ vā katasaññāṇaṃ yaṃkiñci kusaṃ pātetvā cīvare bhājīyamāne attano koṭṭhāsassa samīpe ṭhitaṃ appagghataraṃ vā mahagghataraṃ vā samasamaṃ vā agghena parassa koṭṭhāsaṃ haritukāmo attano koṭṭhāse patitaṃ kusaṃ parassa koṭṭhāse pātetukāmatāya uddharati, rakkhati tāva. Parassa koṭṭhāse pātite rakkhateva. Yadā pana tasmiṃ patite parassa koṭṭhāsato parassa kusaṃ uddharati, uddhatamatte avahāro. Sace paṭhamataraṃ parakoṭṭhāsato parassa kusaṃ uddharati, attano koṭṭhāse pātetukāmatāya uddhāre rakkhati, pātanepi rakkhati, attano koṭṭhāsato pana attano kusaṃ uddharato uddhāreyeva rakkhati, taṃ uddharitvā parakoṭṭhāse pātentassa hatthato muttamatte avahāro. Ayaṃ kusāvahāro. Iti yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘ādiyeyyāti pañcavīsatiyā avahārānaṃ aññataravasena hareyyā’’ti, tassattho pakāsito hoti.

Marker taking (kusāvahāro) should be understood thus: A bhikkhu drops a marker made of split bamboo or palm leaf or whatever, with an agreed-upon sign. When robes are being distributed, if he desires to take the share of another person, standing near his own share, whether it is of little value, great value, or equal in price, he lifts the marker that has fallen into his own share, desiring to drop it into the share of another person; he protects [himself] for now. He still protects [himself] when it is dropped into another's share. But when, upon its being dropped there, he lifts another person's marker from the share of another person, taking occurs at the moment of lifting. If he lifts another person's marker from another person's share earlier, he protects [himself] upon lifting, desiring to drop [it] into his own share, and he protects [himself] even upon dropping [it]. But when he lifts his own marker from his own share, he protects [himself] only upon lifting. Taking occurs as soon as it is released from the hand of one who lifts that and drops it into another's share. This is marker taking. Thus, the meaning of what was said, "ādiyeyyāti pañcavīsatiyā avahārānaṃ aññataravasena hareyyā," is made clear.

Yathārūpeti yādise.Adinnādāneti adinnassa parasantakassa gahaṇe.Rājānotiidaṃ bimbisāraṃyeva sandhāya vuttaṃ, aññe pana tathā kareyyuṃ vā na kareyyuṃ vāti te nappamāṇaṃ.Haneyyuṃti hatthādīhi vā potheyyuṃ, satthena vā chindeyyuṃ.Bandheyyuṃ vāti rajjubandhanādīhi bandheyyuṃ vā.Pabbājeyyuṃ vāti nīhareyyuṃ vā.Corosi bālosi mūḷhosi thenosīti imehi vacanehi paribhāseyyuṃ. Kīdisassa pana adinnassa ādāne rājāno evaṃ karonti? Pādassa vā pādārahassa vā.Tathārūpaṃ bhikkhu adinnaṃ ādiyamānoti tādisaṃ bhikkhu porāṇakassa kahāpaṇassa pādaṃ vā pādārahaṃ vā bhaṇḍaṃ adinnaṃ bhūmiādīsu yattha katthaci ṭhitaṃ yaṃkiñci sajīvanijjīvaṃ vuttappakārānaṃ avahārānaṃ yena kenaci avahārena avaharanto pārājiko hoti, ko pana vādo tato atirekatarasminti.

Yathārūpe means of what kind. Adinnādāne means in taking what has not been given, what belongs to another. Rājāno this was said referring to Bimbisāra alone; whether other kings would do so or not, they are immeasurable. Haneyyuṃ vā may strike with hands, and so on, or may cut with a weapon. Bandheyyuṃ vā may bind with rope bindings, and so on. Pabbājeyyuṃ vā may expel. Corosi bālosi mūḷhosi thenosī may reproach with these words, "You are a thief, you are foolish, you are deluded, you are a cheat." But for what kind of taking of what has not been given do kings do thus? For a quarter or what is worthy of a quarter. Tathārūpaṃ bhikkhu adinnaṃ ādiyamāno, such a bhikkhu taking what has not been given, a quarter or what is worthy of a quarter of an ancient kahāpaṇa, any living or non-living thing standing anywhere on the ground, and so on, taking it away by any of the kinds of taking that have been stated, is defeated, a pārājika; what need is there to say of something more excellent than that?

Rājagahe dhaniyattheraṃ ārabbha rañño dārūni adinnaṃ ādiyanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘gāmā vā araññā vā’’ti ayamettha anupaññatti, sādhāraṇapaññatti, sāṇattikaṃ, haraṇatthāya gamanādike pubbappayoge dukkaṭaṃ, āmasane dukkaṭaṃ, pārājikavatthuno phandāpane thullaccayaṃ. Ādiyantassa māsake vā ūnamāsake vā dukkaṭaṃ, atirekamāsake vā ūnapañcamāsake vā thullaccayaṃ, pañcamāsake vā atirekapañcamāsake vā pārājikaṃ. Sabbattha gahaṇakālavasena ca gahaṇadesavasena ca paribhogabhājanaparivattanādīhi ca parihīnāparihīnavasena vinicchayo veditabbo. Sakasaññissa, vissāsaggāhe, tāvakālike, petapariggahe, tiracchānagatapariggahe, paṃsukūlasaññissa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Sīlavipatti, aññassa manussajātikassa vasena parapariggahitaṃ, parapariggahitasaññitā, garuparikkhāro, theyyacittaṃ, vuttappakārānaṃ avahārānaṃ vasena avaharaṇañcāti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Adinnādānasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, tivedananti.

It was formulated regarding the incident of Thera Dhaniya in Rājagaha taking wood that had not been given from the king; "from a village or from the wilderness" is a secondary formulation here, a common formulation, a command; there is a dukkata for prior instigation, such as going for the sake of carrying; there is a dukkata for touching; there is a thullaccaya for shaking something that is the basis for a pārājika. For one who takes, there is a dukkata for a māsaka or less than a māsaka; there is a thullaccaya for more than a māsaka or less than five māsakas; there is a pārājika for five māsakas or more than five māsakas. Everywhere, the decision should be understood in terms of what is diminished and what is not diminished, in accordance with the time of taking, the place of taking, and the changes in consumable goods, and so on. There is no offense for one with his own perception, for taking in confidence, for something temporary, for a ghost's property, for an animal's property, for one with the perception of discarded rags, and for the insane, and so on. Loss of virtue (sīlavipatti), another person's belonging (aññassa manussajātikassa vasena parapariggahitaṃ), perception of another's belonging (parapariggahitasaññitā), a heavy furnishing (garuparikkhāro), thievish intent (theyyacittaṃ), and taking according to the kinds of taking that have been stated (vuttappakārānaṃ avahārānaṃ vasena avaharaṇañcāti)—these are the five factors here. It arises from taking what has not been given (adinnādānasamuṭṭhānaṃ), it is an action (kiriyaṃ), it is liberation by perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), it is with one's own mind (sacittakaṃ), it is a worldly offense (lokavajjaṃ), it is bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), it is verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), it is unwholesome consciousness (akusalacittaṃ), it is threefold (tivedananti).

Dutiyapārājikavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Second Pārājika is Finished.

3. Tatiyapārājikavaṇṇanā
3. Commentary on the Third Pārājika

sañciccāti saṃcetetvā saddhiṃ cetetvā. ‘‘Pāṇo’’tisaññāya saddhiṃyeva ‘‘vadhāmi na’’nti vadhakacetanāya cetetvā pakappetvā.Manussaviggahanti kalalato paṭṭhāya jīvamānakamanussajātikasarīraṃ.Jīvitāvoropeyyāti kalalakālepi tāpanamaddanehi vā bhesajjasampadānena vā tato vā uddhampi tadanurūpena upakkamena jīvitā viyojeyya. Imassa panatthassa āvibhāvatthaṃ pāṇo veditabbo, pāṇātipāto veditabbo, pāṇātipātī veditabbo, pāṇātipātassa payogo veditabbo. Tatthapāṇoti vohārato satto, paramatthato jīvitindriyaṃ.Pāṇātipātoti yāya cetanāya jīvitindriyupacchedakapayogaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti, sā cetanā.Pāṇātipātīti vuttacetanāya samaṅgipuggalo.Pāṇātipātassa payogoti pāṇātipātassa cha payogā sāhatthiko nissaggiyo āṇattiko thāvaro vijjāmayo iddhimayoti. Tatthasāhatthikoti sayaṃ mārentassa kāyena vā kāyappaṭibaddhena vā paharaṇaṃ.Nissaggiyoti dūre ṭhitaṃ māretukāmassa kāyena vā kāyappaṭibaddhena vā ususattiyantapāsāṇādīnaṃ nissajjanaṃ. Tattha ekeko uddissānuddissabhedato duvidho. Tattha uddissake yaṃ uddissa paharati, tasseva maraṇena kammabaddho. ‘‘Yo koci maratū’’ti evaṃ anuddissake pahārappaccayā yassa kassaci maraṇena kammabaddho. Ubhayatthāpi ca paharitamatte vā maratu, pacchā vā teneva rogena, paharitakkhaṇeyeva kammabaddho.Āṇattikoti ‘‘asukaṃ nāma mārehī’’ti aññaṃ āṇāpentassa āṇāpanaṃ.

Sañciccā means having intentionally, having intentionally together. Having intentionally conceived with the perception "it is a living being," with the intention to kill, thinking, planning, "I will kill." Manussaviggaha means the body of a human being, from the kalala stage onwards, that is alive. Jīvitā voropeyya means to separate from life, even in the kalala stage, by means of tormenting and crushing, or by administering medicine, or even after that, by undertaking similar actions appropriate to that stage. Here, to reveal the meaning of this, one should understand what life (pāṇa) is, what the act of taking life (pāṇātipāta) is, who is a taker of life (pāṇātipātī), and what the means of taking life (pāṇātipātassa payoga) are. There, pāṇa means, in conventional terms, a being; in ultimate terms, it is the life faculty (jīvitindriya). Pāṇātipāto means the intention with which one instigates an action that causes the cutting off of the life faculty; that intention. Pāṇātipātī means a person endowed with the aforementioned intention. Pāṇātipātassa payogo means the six means of taking life: by one's own hand (sāhatthiko), dispatched (nissaggiyo), commanded (āṇattiko), fixed (thāvaro), by knowledge (vijjāmayo), and by psychic power (iddhimayo). Among these, sāhatthiko means striking with one's own hand or with an instrument connected to the body, when killing oneself. Nissaggiyo means launching arrows, knives, machines, stones, etc., with the intention of killing someone at a distance, either with one’s own hand or with something connected to the body. In this case, each is twofold, distinguished by whether it is directed or undirected. Among these, in the directed case, one is bound by karma through the death of the very person one aims at. In the undirected case, aiming without specifying anyone, such as "Let anyone die," one is bound by karma through the death of whomever dies as a result of the impact. In both cases, whether the person dies immediately upon being struck or later from the same injury, one is bound by karma at the moment of impact. Āṇattiko means the act of commanding another, saying, "Kill so-and-so."

Tattha –

Therein –

Vatthu kālo ca okāso, āvudhaṃ iriyāpatho;

Object, time, place, weapon, posture;
Specific action, these six command regulators.

vatthūti puggalo. Yañhi puggalaṃ ‘‘mārehī’’ti āṇatto sace tameva māreti, āṇāpakassa āpatti. Atha aññaṃ māreti, taṃmaññamāno vā aññaṃ māreti, āṇāpako muccati. ‘‘Imaṃ mārehī’’ti āṇatte pana āṇāpakassa dukkaṭaṃ.Kāloti purebhattādikālo. Sace hi ‘‘purebhattaṃ mārehī’’ti āṇatto purebhattameva māreti, āṇāpakassa āpatti. Atha yaṃ purebhattaṃ niyāmitaṃ, tato pacchā vā pure vā māreti, āṇāpako muccati. Iminā nayena sabbattha vinicchayo veditabbo.Thāvaroti asaṃhārimena upakaraṇena māretukāmassa opātakkhaṇanaṃ apassenasaṃvidhānaṃ asiādīnaṃ upanikkhipanaṃ taḷākādīsu visasampayojanaṃ rūpūpahārotievamādi. Vuttanayeneva cetthāpi uddissānuddissabhedo veditabbo.Vijjāmayoti māraṇatthaṃ vijjāparijappanaṃ.Iddhimayoti kammavipākajāya iddhiyā payojanaṃ.

Vatthu means the individual. For if the individual whom one commands to "kill" is the very one who is killed, the commander incurs an offense. But if he kills another, or kills another mistaking him for that one, the commander is absolved. However, if commanded, "Kill this one," the commander incurs a dukkaṭa offense. Kālo means the time such as before the meal. If, when commanded, "Kill before the meal," he kills before the meal, the commander incurs an offense. But if he kills after or before the time specified for before the meal, the commander is absolved. In this manner, the judgment should be understood in all cases. Thāvaro means wanting to kill with irremovable instruments: digging a pit, arranging a snare, placing swords and so on, mixing poison in ponds and so on, impairment of the senses, and so forth. Here too, the distinction between directed and undirected should be understood in the manner stated above. Vijjāmayo means incantations of knowledge for the purpose of killing. Iddhimayo means using psychic power born of the result of karma.

Satthahārakaṃ vāssa pariyeseyyāti ettha haratīti hārakaṃ, kiṃ harati? Jīvitaṃ. Atha vā haritabbanti hārakaṃ, upanikkhipitabbanti attho. Satthañca taṃ hārakañcāti satthahārakaṃ.Assāti manussaviggahassa.Pariyeseyyāti yathā labhati, tathā kareyya, upanikkhipeyyāti attho. Etena thāvarapayogaṃ dasseti. Itarathā hi pariyiṭṭhimatteyeva pārājiko bhaveyya, na cetaṃ yuttaṃ. Padabhājane panassa byañjanaṃ anādiyitvā yaṃ ettha thāvarapayogasaṅgahitaṃ satthaṃ, tadeva dassetuṃ ‘‘asiṃ vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.Maraṇavaṇṇaṃ vā saṃvaṇṇeyyāti vācāya vā tālapaṇṇādīsu likhitvā vā ‘‘yo evaṃ marati, so dhanaṃ vā labhatī’’tiādinā nayena maraṇe guṇaṃ pakāseyya. Etena yathā ‘‘adinnādāne ādiyeyyā’’ti vuttattā pariyāyakathāya muccati, nayidha, evaṃ ‘‘saṃvaṇṇeyyā’’ti vacanato pana idha pariyāyakathāyapi na muccatīti ayamattho veditabbo.Maraṇāya vā samādapeyyāti ‘‘satthaṃ vā āharā’’tiādinā (pārā. 172) nayena maraṇatthāya upāyaṃ gāhāpeyya. Etena āṇattikappayogaṃ dasseti.Ambho purisāti ālapanametaṃ.Kiṃ tuyhiminātiādi saṃvaṇṇanākāranidassanaṃ.Iti cittamanoti iti citto iti mano. ‘‘Mataṃ te jīvitā seyyo’’tiettha vuttamaraṇacitto maraṇamanoti attho. Ettha ca ‘‘mano’’tiidaṃ cittassa atthadīpanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tenevassa padabhājane ‘‘yaṃ cittaṃ taṃ mano’’ti (pārā. 172) āha.Cittasaṅkappoti vicittasaṅkappo. Etthāpi iti-saddo āharitabbo. ‘‘Saṅkappo’’ti ca saṃvidahanamattassetaṃ nāmaṃ, na vitakkasseva. Tañca saṃvidahanaṃ imasmiṃ atthe saññācetanādhippāyehi saṅgahaṃ gacchati, tasmā ‘‘iti cittasaṅkappo’’ti ‘‘mataṃ te jīvitā seyyo’’tiettha vuttamaraṇasaññī maraṇacetano maraṇādhippāyoti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Padabhājanepi hi ayameva nayo dassito. Etena maraṇacittādīhi vinā ‘‘ekāhaṃ jīvitaṃ seyyo, vīriyamārabhato daḷha’’ntiādinā (dha. pa. 112) nayena dhammaṃ bhāsantassa saṃvaṇṇanā nāma na hotīti dasseti.Anekapariyāyenāti nānappakārena uccāvacena kāraṇena. Punamaraṇavaṇṇantiādi nigamanavacanaṃ.Pārājiko hotīti taṅkhaṇūpapannampi manussaviggahaṃ vuttanayena jīvitā voropento pārājiko hotīti.

Satthahārakaṃ vāssa pariyeseyyā here, hārakaṃ means one who carries; what does he carry? Life. Or, hārakaṃ means to be carried, meaning to set in place. Satthañca taṃ hārakañcāti satthahārakaṃ. Assā means of the human body. Pariyeseyyā means he should act in such a way as to obtain it, he should set it in place. This shows the fixed means (thāvarapayoga). Otherwise, he would incur a pārājika offense merely upon searching, but that is not right. In the word analysis, however, without focusing on its literal meaning, the text "asiṃ vā" etc. is stated in order to show only the weapon included in the fixed means (thāvarapayoga). Maraṇavaṇṇaṃ vā saṃvaṇṇeyyā means to describe the qualities of death, either verbally or by writing on palm leaves, in such a way as, "He who dies in this way obtains wealth," and so on. Here, it should be understood that, just as in the case of "adinnādāne ādiyeyyā" one is absolved by speaking indirectly, it is not so here; one is not absolved even by speaking indirectly, because of the word "saṃvaṇṇeyyā". Maraṇāya vā samādapeyyā means to induce a means for death in the manner of "satthaṃ vā āharā," etc. (pārā. 172) This shows the commanded means (āṇattikappayoga). Ambho purisā is an address. Kiṃ tuyhiminā etc. is an example of the manner of describing. Iti cittamano means thus thought, thus mind. The meaning is having the thought of death and the mind of death, as stated in "mataṃ te jīvitā seyyo." Here, "mano" is stated to clarify the meaning of citta. Therefore, in its word analysis, it says "yaṃ cittaṃ taṃ mano" (pārā. 172). Cittasaṅkappo means diverse intention. Here too, the word "iti" should be included. "Saṅkappo" is simply a name for the act of arranging, not just for thought (vitakka). And that arranging, in this context, includes perception (saññā), volition (cetanā), and disposition (adhippāya), therefore, "iti cittasaṅkappo" means here one should see the meaning as having the perception of death, the volition of death, the disposition towards death, as stated in "mataṃ te jīvitā seyyo". Indeed, in the word analysis, this very method is shown. This shows that describing dhamma in a manner such as "ekāhaṃ jīvitaṃ seyyo, vīriyamārabhato daḷha" (dha. pa. 112), without thoughts of death and so on, is not called description (saṃvaṇṇanā). Anekapariyāyenā means in various ways, by diverse causes. Again, maraṇavaṇṇaṃ etc. is a concluding statement. Pārājiko hotī means that one who separates a human body that has come into existence, in the manner stated, from life becomes pārājika.

asañciccāti ‘‘iminā upakkamena imaṃ māremī’’ti acetetvā katena upakkamena musalussāpanavatthusmiṃ (pārā. 180 ādayo) viya pare matepi anāpatti.Ajānantassāti ‘‘iminā ayaṃ marissatī’’ti ajānantassa upakkamena visagatapiṇḍapātavatthusmiṃ (pārā. 181) viya pare matepi anāpatti.Namaraṇādhippāyassāti maraṇaṃ anicchantassa upakkamena bhesajjavatthusmiṃ (pārā. 187) viya pare matepi anāpatti. Evaṃ asañciccātiādīsu vinicchayo veditabbo. Sīlavipatti, manussajātikapāṇo, pāṇasaññitā, vadhakacittaṃ, upakkamo, tena maraṇanti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Adinnādānasamauṭṭhānaṃ, kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.

Asañciccā means without intending, "by this action, I will kill this one," even if another dies as a result of the action, as in the case of the incident of releasing the pestle (musalussāpanavatthusmiṃ) (pārā. 180 ff), there is no offense. Ajānantassa means without knowing, "by this, this one will die," even if another dies as a result of the action, as in the case of the incident of poisoned alms-food (visagatapiṇḍapātavatthusmiṃ) (pārā. 181), there is no offense. Namaraṇādhippāyassā means without intending death, even if another dies as a result of the action, as in the case of the medicine incident (bhesajjavatthusmiṃ) (pārā. 187), there is no offense. Thus, judgment should be understood in the cases of asañciccā etc. Corruption of morality (sīlavipatti), a being of human kind (manussajātikapāṇo), perception of a being (pāṇasaññitā), intention to kill (vadhakacittaṃ), the action (upakkamo), death as a result of it (tena maraṇaṃ)—these are the five factors here. Rising from non-giving (adinnādānasamauṭṭhānaṃ), action (kiriyaṃ), release of perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional (sacittakaṃ), worldly offense (lokavajjaṃ), bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), unwholesome intention (akusalacittaṃ), painful feeling (dukkhavedananti).

Tatiyapārājikavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Third Pārājika is Concluded.

4. Catutthapārājikavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Fourth Pārājika

anabhijānanti sakasantāne anuppannattā attani atthibhāvaṃ ajānanto.Uttarimanussadhammanti uttarimanussānaṃ jhāyīnañceva ariyānañca dhammaṃ.Attupanāyikanti attani taṃ upaneti ‘‘mayi atthī’’ti samudācaranto, attānaṃ vā tattha upaneti ‘‘ahaṃ ettha sandissāmī’’ti samudācarantoti attupanāyiko, taṃ attupanāyikaṃ. Evaṃ katvā samudācareyyāti sambandho.Alamariyañāṇadassanantiettha mahaggatalokuttarapaññā jānanaṭṭhena ñāṇaṃ, cakkhunā ca diṭṭhamiva dhammaṃ paccakkhakaraṇato dassanatthena dassananti ñāṇadassanaṃ, ariyaṃ visuddhaṃ uttamaṃ ñāṇadassananti ariyañāṇadassanaṃ, alaṃ pariyattaṃ kilesaviddhaṃsanasamatthaṃ ariyañāṇadassanamettha jhānādibhede uttarimanussadhamme, alaṃ vā ariyañāṇadassanamassāti alamariyañāṇadassano, taṃ alamariyañāṇadassanaṃ.Samudācareyyāti vuttappakārametaṃ uttarimanussadhammaṃ attupanāyikaṃ katvā kāyena vā vācāya vā tadubhayena vā viññussa manussajātikassa āroceyya.Iti jānāmi iti passāmīti samudācaraṇākāradassanametaṃ, attupanāyikañhi katvā vinā aññāpadesena samudācaranto evaṃ samudācarati, tasmā yvāyaṃ padabhājane (pārā. 209) ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjiṃ, samāpajjāmi, samāpanno’’tiādibhedo vutto, so sabbo idheva saṅgahaṃ gacchatīti veditabbo. ‘‘Iti jānāmi iti passāmī’’ti hi vadanto na yidaṃ vacanamattameva vadati, atha kho ‘‘iminā ca iminā ca kāraṇena ayaṃ dhammo mayi atthī’’ti dīpeti, ‘‘samāpajji’’ntiādīni ca vadantena hi samāpajjanādīhi kāraṇehi atthitā dīpitā hoti, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yvāyaṃ padabhājane paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjiṃ, samāpajjāmi, samāpannotiādibhedo vutto, so sabbo idheva saṅgahaṃ gacchatī’’ti.Tato aparena samayenāti tato ārocitakālato aññatarasmiṃ kāle. Iti āpattipaṭijānanakāladassanametaṃ, ayaṃ pana ārocitakkhaṇeva āpattiṃ āpajjati. Āpattiṃ pana āpanno yasmā parena codito vā acodito vā paṭijānāti, tasmā ‘‘samanuggāhīyamāno vā asamanuggāhīyamāno vā’’ti vuttaṃ.Āpannoti ārocitakkhaṇeyeva pārājikaṃ āpanno.Visuddhāpekkhoti attano gihibhāvādikaṃ visuddhiṃ apekkhamāno icchamāno. Ayañhi yasmā pārājikaṃ āpanno, tasmā bhikkhubhāve ṭhatvā abhabbo jhānādīni adhigantuṃ, iccassa bhikkhubhāvo visuddhi nāma na hoti. Yasmā pana gihi vā upāsakārāmikasāmaṇerānaṃ vā aññataro hutvā dānādīhi saggamaggaṃ vā jhānādīhi mokkhamaggaṃ vā ārādhetuṃ bhabbo hoti, tasmāssa gihiādibhāvo visuddhi nāma hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘gihibhāvādikaṃ visuddhiṃ apekkhamāno’’ti.Evaṃ vadeyyāti evaṃ bhaṇeyya, kathaṃ? ‘‘Ajānamevaṃ, āvuso’’tiādiṃ. Tatthaajānanti ajānanto.Apassanti apassanto.Tucchaṃ musā vilapinti ahaṃ vacanatthavirahato tucchaṃ, vañcanādhippāyato musā vilapiṃ abhaṇinti vuttaṃ hoti.Aññatra adhimānāti yvāyaṃ tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā saṅkhāre sammasantassa āraddhavipassakassa apatte pattasaññitāsaṅkhāto adhimāno uppajjati, taṃ adhimānaṃ ṭhapetvā kevalaṃ pāpicchatāya yo samudācareyya, ayampi pārājiko hotīti attho.

Anabhijāna means not knowing its existence in oneself, because it has not arisen in one's own mind-stream. Uttarimanussadhamma means a quality of supranormal human beings, both those who meditate (jhāyīnaṃ) and the noble ones (ariyānaṃ). Attupanāyika means bringing it into oneself, declaring "it exists in me," or bringing oneself into it, declaring, "I appear in this," so attupanāyiko means one who brings into oneself, that attupanāyikaṃ. Thus, having done so, he should declare, is the connection. Alamariyañāṇadassanaṃ here, great and supramundane wisdom (paññā) is knowledge (ñāṇa) in the sense of knowing, and vision (dassana) in the sense of making the dhamma directly visible, as if seen with the eye; so ñāṇadassanaṃ is knowledge and vision, ariyaṃ ñāṇadassanaṃ is noble, pure, excellent knowledge and vision; alamariyañāṇadassanaṃ here means the supranormal human quality, in the divisions of jhāna etc., or alamariyañāṇadassano means one for whom noble knowledge and vision is sufficient, that alamariyañāṇadassanaṃ. Samudācareyyā means having made that supranormal human quality into an attupanāyika of the type mentioned, he should announce it with body, speech, or both, to a human being who is able to understand. Iti jānāmi iti passāmī this shows the manner of declaring, indeed, one who declares having made it an attupanāyika, without indirect expression, declares thus; therefore, all the distinctions stated in the word analysis (pārā. 209), such as "paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjiṃ, samāpajjāmi, samāpanno," are included here. For when saying "iti jānāmi iti passāmī," he does not speak merely these words, but rather, he indicates "this quality exists in me because of this and this reason," and indeed, by saying "samāpajji," etc., existence is indicated by the reasons of attainment and so on, therefore it is said "all the distinctions stated in the word analysis 'paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjiṃ, samāpajjāmi, samāpanno' are included here." Tato aparena samayenā means at another time from that time of announcement. This shows the time of confessing the offense; but he incurs the offense at the very moment of announcement. Since one who has incurred an offense confesses when questioned or not questioned by another, therefore it is said "samanuggāhīyamāno vā asamanuggāhīyamāno vā." Āpanno means having incurred the pārājika offense at the very moment of announcement. Visuddhāpekkho means expecting, desiring purification of his own state of being a householder, etc. For since he has incurred a pārājika offense, he is incapable of attaining jhāna etc. while remaining in the state of being a bhikkhu; therefore, his state of being a bhikkhu is not called purification. But since he is capable of arousing the path to heaven by means of giving etc., or the path to liberation by means of jhāna etc., after becoming a householder, or one of the lay followers, ārāmikas, or sāmaṇeras, therefore, his state of being a householder etc. is called purification. Therefore, it is said "expecting purification of his own state of being a householder, etc." Evaṃ vadeyyā means he should say thus, how? "Ajānamevaṃ, āvuso," etc. There, ajānantā means not knowing. Apassantā means not seeing. Tucchaṃ musā vilapiṃ means I spoke emptily, falsely, because of being devoid of the meaning of the words, with the intention of deceiving. Aññatra adhimānā means setting aside that adhimāna, which is reckoned as an attainment (patte pattasaññitāsaṅkhāto adhimāno), that arises in one who has started insight (āraddhavipassaka) contemplating formations after imposing the three characteristics (tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā) and consolidating, this also applies to one who declares solely out of evil desire; this also incurs a pārājika offense.

Vesāliyaṃ vaggumudātīriye bhikkhū ārabbha tesaṃ uttarimanussadhammārocanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘aññatra adhimānā’’ti ayamettha anupaññatti, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajji’’ntiādinā nayena vuttappakāraṃ asantaṃ jhānādidhammaṃ ārocentassa sace yassa kassaci āroceti, so manussajātiko hoti, anantarameva ‘‘ayaṃ jhānalābhī’’ti vā ‘‘ariyo’’ti vā yena kenaci ākārena tamatthaṃ jānāti, pārājikaṃ. Sace na jānāti, thullaccayaṃ. Sace pana ‘‘yo te vihāre vasi, so bhikkhu paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjī’’tiādinā (pārā. 220) nayena aññāpadesena ārocentassa jānāti, thullaccayaṃ. Sace na jānāti, dukkaṭaṃ. Adhimānena ārocentassa, anullapanādhippāyassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Sīlavipatti, uttarimanussadhammassa attani asantatā, pāpicchatāya tassa ārocanaṃ, anaññāpadeso, yassa āroceti, tassa manussajātikatā, taṅkhaṇavijānananti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādāne vuttasadisānevāti.

It was established regarding the bhikkhus in Vesālī, on the banks of the Vaggumudā River, concerning the incident of announcing supranormal human qualities, "aññatra adhimānā" this is an additional enactment here, a general enactment, not a command, if one who is announcing a jhāna etc. that does not exist in the manner stated, such as "paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajji," announces it to anyone, if that one is a human being and immediately knows that meaning in any way, such as "this one has attained jhāna" or "is a noble one," it is pārājika. If he does not know, it is a thullaccaya offense. But if, when announcing indirectly in the manner of "yo te vihāre vasi, so bhikkhu paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjī," (pārā. 220) etc., he knows, it is a thullaccaya offense. If he does not know, it is a dukkaṭa offense. There is no offense for one who announces with adhimāna, for one who has no intention of deceiving, or for the insane, etc. Corruption of morality (sīlavipatti), the absence of a supranormal human quality in oneself, announcing it out of evil desire, not indirectly, the one to whom he announces it is a human being, knowing it at that very moment—these are the five factors here. The rising, etc., are similar to those stated in non-giving (adinnādāne).

Catutthapārājikavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Fourth Pārājika is Concluded.

Uddiṭṭhākho āyasmanto cattāro pārājikā dhammātiidaṃ idha uddiṭṭhapārājikaparidīpanameva. Samodhānetvā pana sabbāneva catuvīsati pārājikāni veditabbāni. Katamāni catuvīsati? Pāḷiyaṃ āgatāni tāva bhikkhūnaṃ cattāri bhikkhunīnaṃ asādhāraṇāni cattārīti aṭṭha, tāni ekādasannaṃ paṇḍakādīnaṃ abhabbabhāvasaṅkhātehi ekādasahi pārājikehi saddhiṃ ekūnavīsati, gihibhāvaṃ patthayamānāya bhikkhuniyā vibbhantabhāvapārājikena saddhiṃ vīsati, aparānipi lambī, mudupiṭṭhiko, parassa aṅgajātaṃ mukhena gaṇhāti, parassa aṅgajāte abhinisīdatīti imesaṃ catunnaṃ vasena ‘‘cattāri anulomapārājikānī’’ti vadanti, iti imāni ca cattāri, purimāni ca vīsatīti samodhānetvā sabbāneva catuvīsati pārājikāni veditabbāni.Na labhati bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ saṃvāsanti uposathādibhedaṃ saṃvāsaṃ bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ na labhati.Yathā pure, tathā pacchāti yathā pubbe gihikāle anupasampannakāle ca, pacchā pārājikaṃ āpannopi tatheva asaṃvāso hoti, natthi tassa bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ uposathādibhedo saṃvāsoti.Tatthāyasmante pucchāmīti tesu catūsu pārājikesu āyasmante ‘‘kaccittha parisuddhā’’ti pucchāmi.Kaccitthāti kacci ettha, etesu catūsu pārājikesu kacci parisuddhāti attho. Atha vākaccittha parisuddhāti kacci parisuddhā attha, bhavathāti attho. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

Uddiṭṭhā kho āyasmanto cattāro pārājikā dhammā this is merely a declaration of the pārājikas that have been recited here. But by combining them, all twenty-four pārājikas should be understood. Which twenty-four? The four for bhikkhus and the four unique to bhikkhunīs that appear in the Pāḷi, are eight; those, together with the eleven pārājikas consisting of the states of being incapable of the eleven paṇḍakas etc., are nineteen; together with the pārājika of the bhikkhunī who desires to return to the state of being a householder, there are twenty; and others as well—lambi, mudupiṭṭhiko, he takes the sexual organ of another with his mouth, he sits upon the sexual organ of another, regarding these four they say "these are four anulomapārājikas," thus these four, and the previous twenty, by combining them all twenty-four pārājikas should be understood. Na labhati bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ saṃvāsaṃ he does not obtain association (saṃvāsaṃ) with the bhikkhus in the form of uposatha etc. Yathā pure, tathā pacchā just as before, in the state of being a householder and in the state of not being fully ordained, so too after incurring a pārājika offense, there is no association; there is no association with the bhikkhus in the form of uposatha etc. Tatthāyasmante pucchāmī regarding those four pārājikas, I ask the venerable ones, "kaccittha parisuddhā." Kaccitthā means "kacci ettha," in these four pārājikas, are you pure? Or, kaccittha parisuddhā means are you truly pure? The remainder is clear everywhere.

Kaṅkhāvitaraṇiyā pātimokkhavaṇṇanāya

The Pātimokkha Commentary that Dispels Doubts

Pārājikavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Pārājika Commentary is Concluded.

Saṅghādisesakaṇḍo

The Saṅghādisesa Section

Imekho panāti idāni vattabbānaṃ abhimukhīkaraṇaṃ.Āyasmantoti sannipatitānaṃ piyavacanena ālapanaṃ.Terasāti gaṇanaparicchedo.Saṅghādisesāti evaṃnāmakā.Dhammāti āpattiyo.Uddesaṃ āgacchantīti sarūpena uddisitabbataṃ āgacchanti, na nidāne viya ‘‘yassa siyā āpattī’’ti sādhāraṇavacanamattena.

Ime kho panā ti: Now, this is to bring forward what is to be said. Āyasmanto ti: An address to those assembled, using affectionate language. Terasā ti: A delimitation of number. Saṅghādisesā ti: These are so named. Dhammā ti: Offences. Uddesaṃ āgacchantī ti: They come to the state of being recited by name, not just by a general statement as in the Nidāna, "If there is an offense for someone."

1. Sukkavissaṭṭhisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. The Deliberate Emission of Semen Training Rule

Sukkavissaṭṭhīti sukkassa vissaṭṭhi, rāgūpatthambhādīsu yena kenaci aṅgajāte kammaññataṃ patte ārogyādīsu yaṃkiñci apadisitvā ajjhattarūpādīsu yattha katthaci mocanassādacetanāya nimitte upakkamantassa āsayadhātunānattato nīlādivasena (pārā. 239-240) dasavidhesu sukkesu yassa kassaci sukkassa ṭhānā cāvanāti attho.Aññatra supinantāti yā supine sukkavissaṭṭhi hoti, taṃ ṭhapetvā.Saṅghādisesoti yā aññatra supinantā sañcetanikā sukkavissaṭṭhi, ayaṃ saṅghādiseso nāma āpattinikāyoti attho. Vacanattho panettha saṅgho ādimhi ceva sese ca icchitabbo assāti saṅghādiseso. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti – imaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjitvā vuṭṭhātukāmassa yaṃ taṃ āpattivuṭṭhānaṃ, tassa ādimhi ceva parivāsadānatthāya, ādito sese majjhe mānattadānatthāya mūlāya paṭikassanena vā saha mānattadānatthāya, avasāne abbhānatthāya ca saṅgho icchitabbo, na hettha ekampi kammaṃ vinā saṅghena sakkā kātuṃ. Iti saṅgho ādimhi ceva sese ca icchitabbo assāti saṅghādisesoti.

Sukkavissaṭṭhī ti: Emission of semen; the discharge of semen from its place, of any semen among the ten kinds (pārā. 239-240) such as blue etc. due to the diversity of elements of intention, of one who, with lustful thoughts etc., aiming at a stimulus with the intention of enjoying the discharge, designating anything whatever among the limbs that have reached fitness, or among health etc. or in inner form etc., somewhere or other. Aññatra supinantā ti: Except that emission of semen which occurs in a dream. Saṅghādiseso ti: That deliberate emission of semen, except in a dream, this is an āpattinikāya named Saṅghādisesa. Here, the meaning of the term is: the Saṅgha is desirable at the beginning and at the end for him. What is said is this: for one who has committed this offense and desires to emerge from it, the emergence from the offense, for that, the Saṅgha is desirable at the beginning, for the purpose of granting parivāsa; from the beginning to the end, in the middle, for the purpose of granting mānatta, or for the purpose of granting mānatta together with reinstatement to the original position; and at the end, for the purpose of absolution; here, not even one act can be done without the Saṅgha. Thus, the Saṅgha is desirable at the beginning and at the end for him, therefore it is a Saṅghādisesa.

Sāvatthiyaṃ seyyasakaṃ ārabbha upakkamitvā asucimocanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘aññatra supinantā’’ti ayamettha anupaññatti, asādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ. Sace pana parena attano aṅgajāte upakkamaṃ kāretvā mocāpeti, āpajjatiyeva. Cetetvā antamaso ākāse kaṭikampanenapi nimitte upakkamantassa sace na muccati, thullaccayaṃ. Sace pana antamaso yaṃ ekā khuddakamakkhikā piveyya, tattakampi ṭhānato muccati, dakasotaṃ anotiṇṇepi saṅghādiseso. Ṭhānato pana cutaṃ avassameva dakasotaṃ otarati, tasmā ‘‘dakasotaṃ otiṇṇamatte bahi nikkhante vā anikkhante vā saṅghādiseso’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.237) aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ. Anupakkamantassa ca, amocanādhippāyassa ca, supinaṃ passantassa ca, ummattakādīnañca muttepi anāpatti. Sīlavipatti, cetanā, upakkamo, muccananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamapārājike vuttasadisānevāti.

It was promulgated in Sāvatthī concerning a lewd fellow, beginning with the subject of emitting impure matter; "except in a dream" is an anupaññatti here, a non-common promulgation, a non-command. But if, having someone else initiate the act on his organ, he causes emission, there is an offense indeed. If, intending with awareness, when initiating action on a stimulus, even by a flick of the loins in the air, it is not emitted, a thullaccaya. But if, even so much as a tiny fly could drink, is emitted from its place, a Saṅghādisesa even if the stream of water is not crossed. But what has moved from its place inevitably descends into the stream of water, therefore it is said in the commentaries that "a Saṅghādisesa occurs as soon as it has descended into the stream of water, whether it has gone out or not" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.237). There is no offense for one who does not initiate action, nor for one who has no intention to emit, nor for one who is dreaming, nor for an insane person etc., even when emission occurs. Loss of morality, intention, initiation of action, and emission, these are the three factors here. The origin etc. are similar to those stated in the first pārājika.

Sukkavissaṭṭhisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Deliberate Emission of Semen Training Rule Commentary is Concluded.

2. Kāyasaṃsaggasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. The Bodily Contact Training Rule

otiṇṇoti yakkhādīhi viya sattā anto uppajjantena rāgena vā otiṇṇo, kūpādīni viya sattā asamapekkhitvā rajjanīye ṭhāne rajjanto sayaṃ vā rāgaṃ otiṇṇo, kāyasaṃsaggarāgasamaṅgissetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Vipariṇatena cittenāti parisuddhabhavaṅgasantatisaṅkhātaṃ pakatiṃ vijahitvā aññathā pavattena, virūpaṃ vā pariṇatena yathā parivattamānaṃ virūpaṃ hoti, evaṃ vuttarāgavasena parivattetvā ṭhitena cittenāti attho.Mātugāmena saddhinti tadahujātāyapi jīvamānakamanussitthiyā saddhiṃ.Kāyasaṃsaggaṃ samāpajjeyyāti hatthaggahaṇādikaāyasampayogaṃ kāyamissībhāvaṃ samāpajjeyya.Hatthaggāhaṃ vātiādi panassa vitthārena atthadassanaṃ. Tatthahatthonāma kapparato paṭṭhāya yāva agganakhā.Veṇīnāma vinandhitvā vā avinandhitvā vā suddhakesehi vā nīlādivaṇṇasuttakusumakahāpaṇamālāsuvaṇṇacīrakamuttāvaḷiādīsu aññataramissehi vā katakesakalāpassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Veṇiggahaṇena cettha kesāpi gahitāyeva saddhiṃ lomehi. Iti vuttalakkhaṇassa hatthassa gahaṇaṃ hatthaggāho, veṇiyā gahaṇaṃ veṇiggāho. Avasesassa sarīrassa parāmasanaṃaññatarassa vā aññatarassa vā aṅgassa parāmasanaṃnāma. Yo taṃ hatthaggāhaṃ vā veṇiggāhaṃ vā aññatarassa vā aññatarassa vā aṅgassa parāmasanaṃ samāpajjeyya, tassa saṅghādiseso nāma āpattinikāyo hotīti.

Otiṇṇo ti: Overcome by lust, which arises within beings, like yakkhas etc., or himself overcome by lust, desiring in a desirable place without regard, like beings in wells etc., this is a designation for one possessing bodily contact lust. Vipariṇatena cittenā ti: By a mind that has turned otherwise, abandoning its natural state, reckoned as the pure bhavanga-continuum, or by a mind transformed in a distorted way; just as something being transformed becomes distorted, so too, by a mind that has remained transformed by way of the lust mentioned. Mātugāmena saddhiṃ ti: Together with a woman considered a human being who is still alive, even if just born. Kāyasaṃsaggaṃ samāpajjeyyā ti: Should engage in bodily contact, physical mingling, such as holding hands. Hatthaggāhaṃ vā ti: This is showing the meaning in detail. Here, hattho means from the wrist onwards, as far as the tips of the nails. Veṇī means a collection of hair, whether tied or untied, made of pure hair or mixed with something else such as blue-colored thread, flowers, kahāpaṇa garlands, golden ornaments, pearl necklaces etc.. The grasping of the braid here also includes the grasping of the hair along with the body hairs. Thus, the grasping of a hand having the stated characteristic is hatthaggāho, the grasping of a braid is veṇiggāho. The touching of the remaining body is called aññatarassa vā aññatarassa vā aṅgassa parāmasanaṃ. Whoever should engage in that grasping of a hand or grasping of a braid or touching of any other part of the body, for him there is an āpattinikāya named Saṅghādisesa.

Sāvatthiyaṃ udāyittheraṃ ārabbha kāyasaṃsaggasamāpajjanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, asādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, itthiyā itthisaññino antamaso lomena lomaṃ phusantassāpi, itthiyā vā phusiyamānassa sevanādhippāyena vāyamitvā phassaṃ paṭijānantassa saṅghādiseso. Ekena pana hatthena gahetvā dutiyena hatthena divasampi tattha tattha phusantassa ekāva āpatti, aggahetvā phusanto pana sace sīsato yāva pādā, tāva kāyato hatthaṃ amocentoyeva phusati, ekāva āpatti, pañcannaṃ aṅgulīnaṃ ekato gahaṇepi ekāyeva. Sace pana nānitthīnaṃ pañcaṅguliyo ekato gaṇhāti, pañca āpattiyo. Itthiyā vematikassa, paṇḍakapurisatiracchānagatasaññissa ca thullaccayaṃ, tathā kāyena kāyappaṭibaddhena, amanussitthipaṇḍakehi ca saddhiṃ kāyasaṃsaggepi. Manussitthiyā pana kāyappaṭibaddhena kāyappaṭibaddhādīsu, purisakāyaphusanādīsu ca dukkaṭaṃ. Itthiyā phusiyamānassa sevanādhippāyassāpi kāyena avāyamitvā phassaṃ paṭijānantassa, mokkhādhippāyena itthiṃ phusantassa, asañcicca, assatiyā, ajānantassa, asādiyantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Sīlavipatti, manussitthī, itthisaññitā, kāyasaṃsaggarāgo, tena rāgena vāyāmo, hatthaggāhādisamāpajjananti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamapārājike vuttasadisānevāti.

It was promulgated in Sāvatthī concerning the Venerable Udāyī, in connection with engaging in bodily contact, a non-common promulgation, a non-command; for one having woman-perception regarding a woman, even if touching hair with hair, or for a woman being touched, if consenting to the touch, striving with the intention of sexual intercourse, a Saṅghādisesa. But if, having grasped with one hand, he touches here and there with the second hand for an entire day, there is only one offense; but if touching without grasping, if he touches from the head down to the feet without removing his hand from the body, there is only one offense; there is only one offense even when grasping five fingers together. But if he does not grasp the five fingers of different women together, there are five offenses. A thullaccaya for one who is doubtful regarding a woman, or for one who has perception of a hermaphrodite or an animal; likewise for bodily contact with a body-part attached, or with a non-human female or hermaphrodites. But for bodily contact with a body-part attached etc. with a human female, or touching a man's body etc., a dukkaṭa. There is no offense for a woman being touched, consenting to the touch without striving with the body with the intention of sexual intercourse, or for one touching a woman with the intention of release, or unintentionally, unknowingly, unwittingly, without enjoying it, or for an insane person etc. Loss of morality, a human female, perception of a woman, lust for bodily contact, striving with that lust, engaging in hand-grasping etc., these are the five factors here. The origin etc. are similar to those stated in the first pārājika.

Kāyasaṃsaggasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Bodily Contact Training Rule Commentary is Concluded.

3. Duṭṭhullavācāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. The Obscene Speech Training Rule

Mātugāmanti duṭṭhullāduṭṭhullasaṃlakkhaṇasamatthaṃ manussitthiṃ.Duṭṭhullāhivācāhīti vaccamaggapassāvamaggemethunadhammappaṭisaṃyuttāhi vācāhi.Obhāseyyāti avabhāseyya, vaṇṇāvaṇṇayācanaāyācanapucchanapaṭipucchanaācikkhaṇānusāsanaakkosanavasena nānappakāraṃ asaddhammavacanaṃ vadeyya.Yathā tanti ettha nti nipātamattaṃ, yathā yuvā yuvatinti attho. Etena obhāsane nirāsaṅkabhāvaṃ dasseti.Methunupasaṃhitāhītiidaṃ duṭṭhullavācāya sikhāpattalakkhaṇadassanaṃ.Saṅghādisesoti dvinnaṃ maggānaṃ vasena vaṇṇāvaṇṇehi vā methunayācanādīhi vā ‘‘sikharaṇīsi, saṃbhinnāsi, ubhatobyañjanakāsī’’ti imesu tīsu aññatarena akkosavacanena vā mātugāmaṃ obhāsantassa saṅghādiseso nāma āpattinikāyo hotīti.

Mātugāmanti: A human female capable of distinguishing between what is obscene and not obscene. Duṭṭhullāhi vācāhī ti: With words connected to the urinary tract, the excretory tract, or sexual intercourse. Obhāseyyā ti: Should illuminate, should speak various kinds of unrighteous talk by way of praising, criticizing, asking, requesting, questioning, answering, declaring, instructing, or scolding. Yathā ta ti: Here, nti is merely a particle; yathā yuvā yuvatinti, meaning "just as a young man [relates to a] young woman." By this, he shows the state of being without hesitation in illuminating. Methunupasaṃhitāhī ti: This is showing the characteristic of the training laid down for obscene speech. Saṅghādiseso ti: For one illuminating a woman by way of praise or criticism based on the two tracts, or by requests for sexual intercourse etc., or by way of abusive language with one of these three: "you are a sikharaṇī, you are saṃbhinnā, you are an ubhatobyañjanakā", for him there is an āpattinikāya named Saṅghādisesa.

Sāvatthiyaṃ udāyittheraṃ ārabbha duṭṭhullavācāhi obhāsanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, asādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, itthiyā itthisaññino antamaso hatthamuddāyapi vuttanayena obhāsantassa sace sā tamatthaṃ tasmiṃyeva khaṇe jānāti, saṅghādiseso. Paṇḍake thullaccayaṃ. Tasmiṃyeva itthisaññino dukkaṭaṃ. Punappunaṃ obhāsantassa, sambahulā ca itthiyo ekavācāya obhāsantassa vācāgaṇanāya ceva itthigaṇanāya ca āpattiyo. Sace yaṃ itthiṃ obhāsati, sā na jānāti, thullaccayaṃ. Adhakkhakaṃ ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalaṃ ādissa vaṇṇādibhaṇanepi thullaccayaṃ. Paṇḍake dukkaṭaṃ, ubbhakkhakaṃ adhojāṇumaṇḍalaṃ kāyappaṭibaddhañca ādissa vaṇṇādibhaṇane sabbattha dukkaṭaṃ. Atthadhammaanusāsanipurekkhārānaṃ ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Sīlavipatti, manussitthī, itthisaññitā, duṭṭhullavācassādarāgo, tena rāgena obhāsanaṃ, taṅkhaṇavijānananti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Adinnādānasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dvivedananti.

It was promulgated in Sāvatthī concerning the Venerable Udāyī, in connection with illuminating with obscene speech, a non-common promulgation, a non-command; for one having woman-perception regarding a woman, even if illuminating with a hand gesture, in the manner stated, if she knows that meaning at that very moment, a Saṅghādisesa. A thullaccaya for a hermaphrodite. A dukkaṭa for one having woman-perception regarding that same hermaphrodite. For one illuminating repeatedly, or illuminating many women with one statement, there are offenses according to the count of statements and the count of women. If the woman whom he illuminates does not know, a thullaccaya. A thullaccaya also for speaking praise etc. directed at the upper kneecap. A dukkaṭa for a hermaphrodite, a dukkaṭa everywhere for speaking praise etc. directed at the lower kneecap or a body-part attached. There is no offense for those intending the teaching of the Dhamma or the meaning, or for an insane person etc. Loss of morality, a human female, perception of a woman, desire and delight in obscene speech, illuminating with that desire, knowing at that moment, these are the five factors here. The origin is from theft, an action, removal of perception, intentional, a worldly offense, a bodily action, a verbal action, unwholesome thought, a duality.

Duṭṭhullavācāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Obscene Speech Training Rule Commentary is Concluded.

4. Attakāmasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. The Soliciting for Favors Training Rule

Mātugāmassa santiketi duṭṭhullobhāsane vuttappakārāya itthiyā samīpe.Attakāmapāricariyāyāti methunadhammasaṅkhātena kāmena pāricariyā kāmapāricariyā, attano atthāya kāmapāricariyā attakāmapāricariyā, attanā vā kāmitā icchitāti attakāmā, sayaṃ methunarāgavasena patthitāti attho, attakāmā ca sā pāricariyā cāti attakāmapāricariyā, tassā attakāmapāricariyāya.Vaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyāti guṇaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ pakāseyya.Etadaggantiādi tassā attakāmapāricariyāya vaṇṇabhāsanākāranidassanaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ padasambandhavaseneva saṅkhepattho – yā mādisaṃ pāṇātipātādīhi virahitattāsīlavantaṃmethunadhammā virahitattābrahmacāriṃtadubhayenāpikalyāṇadhammaṃ etena dhammena paricareyyaabhirameyya, tassā evaṃ mādisaṃ paricarantiyā yā ayaṃ pāricariyā nāma, etadaggaṃ pāricariyānanti.Methunupasaṃhitena saṅghādisesoti evaṃ attakāmapāricariyāya vaṇṇaṃ bhāsanto ca ‘‘arahasi tvaṃ mayhaṃ methunadhammaṃ dātu’’ntiādinā methunappaṭisaṃyutteneva vacanena yo bhāseyya, tassa saṅghādiseso.

Mātugāmassa santike ti: Near a woman of the kind stated in the section on obscene illumination. Attakāmapāricariyāyā ti: Attendance consisting of desire, reckoned as sexual intercourse is kāmapāricariyā; attendance for one's own sake is attakāmapāricariyā; or attakāmā means desired or wished for by oneself, meaning desired by oneself by way of sexual lust; and that attendance is also attakāmapāricariyā, for that attakāmapāricariyā. Vaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyā ti: Should declare the qualities and benefits. Etadagga ti: This is a showing of the manner of speaking in praise of that soliciting for favors. Here, the summarized meaning is simply according to the connection of words—that she should attend on with this Dhamma and delight a sīlavantaṃ, virtuous due to being without killing etc., a brahmacāriṃ, practicing celibacy due to being without sexual intercourse, and also kalyāṇadhammaṃ, [possessing] wholesome qualities due to both; whatever attendance is that for her who attends on one such as me, this is the best attendance. Methunupasaṃhitena saṅghādiseso ti: And for one speaking in praise of soliciting for favors in this way with words connected to sexual intercourse, saying "you are worthy to give me sexual intercourse" etc., for him there is a Saṅghādisesa.

Sāvatthiyaṃ udāyittheraṃ ārabbha attakāmapāricariyāya vaṇṇabhāsanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, asādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, itthiyā itthisaññino antamaso hatthamuddāyapi vuttanayeneva attakāmapāricariyāya vaṇṇaṃ bhāsantassa sace sā tamatthaṃ tasmiṃyeva khaṇe jānāti, saṅghādiseso. No ce jānāti, thullaccayaṃ. Paṇḍake paṇḍakasaññinopi thullaccayaṃ. Tasmiṃyeva itthisaññino dukkaṭaṃ. Cīvarādīhi vatthukāmehi pāricariyāya vaṇṇaṃ bhāsantassa ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Sīlavipatti, manussitthī, itthisaññitā, attakāmapāricariyāya rāgo, tena rāgena vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ, taṅkhaṇavijānananti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni duṭṭhullobhāsane vuttasadisānevāti.

It was promulgated in Sāvatthī concerning the Venerable Udāyī, in connection with speaking in praise of soliciting for favors, a non-common promulgation, a non-command; for one having woman-perception regarding a woman, even if speaking in praise of soliciting for favors in the manner stated, even with a hand gesture, if she knows that meaning at that very moment, a Saṅghādisesa. If she does not know, a thullaccaya. A thullaccaya also for a hermaphrodite and for one having perception of a hermaphrodite. A dukkaṭa for one having woman-perception regarding that same hermaphrodite. There is no offense for one speaking in praise of attendance with material things such as robes etc., or for an insane person etc. Loss of morality, a human female, perception of a woman, desire for soliciting favors, speaking in praise with that desire, knowing at that moment, these are the five factors here. The origin etc. are similar to those stated in the section on obscene speech.

Attakāmasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Soliciting for Favors Training Rule Commentary is Concluded.

5. Sañcarittasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. The Go-Between Training Rule

sañcarittanti itthipurisānaṃ antare saṃcaraṇabhāvaṃ.Samāpajjeyyāti sammā paṭiggaṇhanavīmaṃsanapaccāharaṇāni karonto āpajjeyya.Itthiyā vātiādi samāpajjanākāradassanaṃ. Tatthaitthiyā vā purisamatinti purisena vā tassa mātāpitādīhi vā pesito purisassa matiṃ adhippāyaṃ itthiyā āroceyyāti attho.Purisassa vā itthimatinti itthiyā vā tassā mātāpitādīhi vā pesito itthiyā matiṃ adhippāyaṃ purisassa āroceyyāti attho.Jāyattane vā jārattane vāti jāyabhāve vā jārabhāve vā. Purisassa hi matiṃ itthiyā ārocento jāyattane āroceti, itthiyā matiṃ purisassa ārocento jārattane āroceti. Apica purisasseva matiṃ itthiyā ārocento jāyattane vā āroceti nibaddhabhariyabhāve, jārattane vā micchācārabhāve, tenevassa padabhājane (pārā. 302) ‘‘jāyattane vāti jāyā bhavissasi, jārattane vāti jārī bhavissasī’’ti vuttaṃ. Eteneva upāyena itthiyā matiṃ purisassa ārocanepi ‘‘pati bhavissasi, jāro bhavissasī’’ti vattabbatā veditabbā.Antamaso taṅkhaṇikāyapīti sabbantimena paricchedena yā ayaṃ taṅkhaṇe muhuttamatte saṃvasitabbato ‘‘taṅkhaṇikā’’ti vuccati, muhuttikāti attho. Tassāpi ‘‘muhuttikā bhavissasī’’ti evaṃ purisassa matiṃ ārocentassa saṅghādiseso, eteneva upāyena ‘‘muhuttiko bhavissasī’’ti evaṃ purisassa itthimatiṃ ārocentopi saṅghādisesaṃ āpajjatīti veditabbo.

Sañcaritta ti: The state of going between a woman and a man. Samāpajjeyyā ti: Should undertake, doing proper receiving, investigating, and returning, should incur. Itthiyā vā ti: This is showing the way of undertaking. Here, itthiyā vā purisamati ti: Meaning, he should announce the intention or purpose of the man to the woman, sent by the man or by his parents etc. Purisassa vā itthimati ti: Meaning, he should announce the intention or purpose of the woman to the man, sent by the woman or by her parents etc. Jāyattane vā jārattane vā ti: In the state of being a wife or in the state of being a mistress. For, announcing the intention of the man to the woman, he announces in the state of being a wife; announcing the intention of the woman to the man, he announces in the state of being a mistress. Moreover, announcing the intention of the man to the woman only, he announces in the state of being a wife, in the state of a permanent married relationship; or in the state of being a mistress, in the state of misconduct; therefore in the division of words, it is said that (pārā. 302) "jāyattane vāti: you will be a wife; jārattane vāti: you will be a mistress". By this same method, it should be understood that for announcing the intention of the woman to the man, one should say, "you will be a husband, you will be a lover". Antamaso taṅkhaṇikāyāpī ti: Even to the very last measure, she who is called "momentary" because she is to live together just for a moment, a muhuttika, meaning a short time. Announcing the intention of the man to her, even saying "you will be a muhuttikā", a Saṅghādisesa; in this same way, it should be understood that even for announcing the intention of the woman to the man, saying "you will be a muhuttiko", he incurs a Saṅghādisesa.

Sāvatthiyaṃ udāyittheraṃ ārabbha sañcarittasamāpajjanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘antamaso taṅkhaṇikāyapī’’ti ayamettha anupaññatti, sādhāraṇapaññatti, ‘‘paṭiggaṇhāti, vīmaṃsati, antevāsiṃ paccāharāpetī’’tiiminā (pārā. 338) nayena sāṇattikaṃ, aññatra nālaṃvacanīyāya yāya kāyaci itthiyā antamaso mātuyāpi purisamatiṃ ārocento ‘‘hohi kira bhariyā dhanakkītā’’ti vattukāmo sacepi chandavāsinīādīsu aññatarākārena ārocetvā tāya ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchitepi asampaṭicchitepi puna āgantvā yena pahito, tassa taṃ pavattiṃ āroceti, saṅghādisesaṃ āpajjati. Sā pana tassa bhariyā hotu vā, mā vā, akāraṇametaṃ. Sacepi yassā santikaṃ pesito, taṃ adisvā aññatarassa avassārocanakassa ‘‘ārocehī’’ti vatvā paccāharati, āpajjatiyeva. ‘‘Māturakkhitaṃ brūhī’’ti pesitassa pana gantvā aññaṃ piturakkhitādīsu aññataraṃ vadantassa visaṅketaṃ hoti, purisassa vā itthiyā vā vacanaṃ ‘‘sādhū’’ti kāyena vā vācāya vā ubhayena vā paṭiggaṇhitvā tassā itthiyā vā purisassa vā ārocetvā vā ārocāpetvā vā puna yena pesito, tassa taṃ pavattiṃ sayaṃ ārocentassa vā aññena ārocāpentassa vā saṅghādiseso. Ettāvatā hi ‘‘paṭiggaṇhāti, vīmaṃsati, paccāharatī’’tiidaṃ aṅgattayaṃ sampāditameva hoti, ito pana yehi kehici dvīhi aṅgehi, paṇḍake ca aṅgattayenāpi thullaccayaṃ. Ekena dukkaṭaṃ. Saṅghassa vā cetiyassa vā gilānassa vā kiccena gacchantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti.

Concerning the case of Venerable Udāyī in Sāvatthī, this rule was established regarding the act of acting as a go-between. The phrase, "even for a moment," is a subsequent amendment here, a general rule. According to the method in (pārā. 338), it is an offense requiring intention, and if, intending to say to any woman who is not canonically prohibited, even his own mother, "Be my wife, bought with wealth," he informs her in some way, such as through a prostitute, and she agrees or does not agree, and then he returns and informs the person who sent him of what happened, he commits a saṅghādisesa offense. Whether she becomes his wife or not is irrelevant. Even if he doesn't see the person to whom he was sent but says to someone who must necessarily be informed, "Tell her," and then returns, he commits an offense. But if, sent to say something to a woman protected by her mother, he goes and says something else, such as that she is protected by her father, there is no offense. If a man or woman receives the message with "good" either by body, speech, or both, and after informing that woman or man, or having someone else inform them, he then returns and informs the person who sent him, either personally or through another, of what happened, it is a saṅghādisesa. For to that extent, these three factors—"receives, investigates, and reports back"—are fulfilled. But with any two factors besides these, and with a eunuch even with all three factors, it is a thullaccaya offense. With one, it is a dukkaṭa. There is no offense for one who goes on business for the Sangha, a shrine, or a sick person, or for the insane, etc.

Sīlavipatti, yesu sañcarittaṃ samāpajjati, tesaṃ manussajātikatā, na nālaṃvacanīyatā,

Moral corruption; those with whom one engages in go-between activities must be human beings and not canonically prohibited.

Paṭiggaṇhanavīmaṃsanapaccāharaṇānīti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Chasamuṭṭhānaṃ, paṇṇattiṃ vā alaṃvacanīyabhāvaṃ vā ajānantassa kāyavikārena sāsanaṃ gahetvā tatheva vīmaṃsitvā tatheva paccāharantassa kāyato samuṭṭhāti. ‘‘Itthannāmā āgamissati, tassā cittaṃ jāneyyāthā’’ti kenaci vutte ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchitvā taṃ āgataṃ vatvā puna tasmiṃ purise āgate ārocentassa kāyena kiñci akatattā vācato samuṭṭhāti. Vācāya ‘‘sādhū’’ti sāsanaṃ gahetvā aññena karaṇīyena tassā gharaṃ gantvā aññattha vā gamanakāle taṃ disvā vacībhedena vīmaṃsitvā punapi aññeneva kāraṇena tato apakkamma kadācideva taṃ purisaṃ disvā ārocentassāpi vācato samuṭṭhāti. Paṇṇattiṃ ajānantassa pana khīṇāsavassāpi pituvacanena gantvā alaṃvacanīyaṃ mātarampi ‘‘ehi me pitaraṃ upaṭṭhāhī’’ti vatvā paccāharantassa kāyavācato samuṭṭhāti. Imāni tīṇi acittakasamuṭṭhānāni. Tadubhayaṃ pana jānitvā eteheva tīhi nayehi samāpajjantassa tāneva tīṇi tadubhayajānanacittena sacittakāni honti, kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, kusalādivasena cettha tīṇi cittāni, sukhādivasena tisso vedanāti.

Receiving, investigating, and reporting back: these are the five factors here. It has six sources of arising. For one who does not know the rule or the state of being canonically prohibited, if he takes the message with a bodily gesture, investigates it in the same way, and reports back in the same way, it arises from the body. If someone says, "A woman named so-and-so will come; find out her intentions," and he agrees with "good," and then, when she comes, he tells her and then informs that man when he comes, it arises from speech because he did not do anything with his body. If he takes the message with "good" by speech and, having gone to her house for some other business or seeing her while she is going somewhere else, investigates with a change of speech, and then, having left from there for another reason, sees that man sometime and informs him, it also arises from speech. But for one who does not know the rule, even if he is an arahant, if, at his father's command, he goes to his canonically prohibited mother and says, "Come, attend to my father," and then reports back, it arises from body and speech. These three are unintentional arisings. But if, knowing both, he engages in the same three ways with a mind that knows both, then those same three are intentional, a kriya, not associated with cessation of perception, unintentional, an offense by rule, a bodily action, a verbal action. Here, there are three types of consciousness in terms of wholesome etc., and three types of feeling in terms of pleasant etc.

Sañcarittasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Training Rule on Acting as a Go-between is Finished.

6. Kuṭikārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. The Commentary on the Training Rule on Building a Hut

saññācikāya panāti etthasaññācikānāma sayaṃ pavattitayācanā vuccati, tasmā saññācikāyāti attano yācanāyāti vuttaṃ hoti, sayaṃ yācitakehi upakaraṇehīti attho. Ettha ca yaṃkiñci parapariggahitakaṃ mūlacchedavasena yācituṃ na vaṭṭati, tāvakālikaṃ pana vaṭṭati. Sahāyatthāya kammakaraṇatthāya ‘‘purisaṃ dethā’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭati, purisattakarampi yācituṃ vaṭṭati,purisattakaronāma vaḍḍhakiādinā purisena kātabbaṃ hatthakammaṃ. Taṃ ‘‘purisattakaraṃ dehī’’ti vā ‘‘hatthakammaṃ dehī’’ti vā vatvā yācituṃ vaṭṭati. Hatthakammaṃ nāma kiñci vatthu na hoti, tasmā ‘‘kiṃ, bhante, āgatatthā’’ti pucchite vā apucchite vā yācituṃ vaṭṭati, viññattipaccayā doso natthi, migaluddakādayo pana sakakammaṃ na yācitabbā.Kuṭinti ullittādīsu aññataraṃ. Tatthaullittānāma ṭhapetvā thambhatulāpiṭṭhasaṅghāṭavātapānadhūmacchiddādibhedaṃ alepokāsaṃ avasese lepokāse kuṭṭehi saddhiṃ ghaṭetvā chadanassa anto sudhāya vā mattikāya vā littā.Avalittānāma tatheva vuttanayeneva chadanassa bahi littā.Ullittāvalittānāma tatheva chadanassa anto ca bahi ca littā.Kārayamānenāti sayaṃ vā karontena, āṇattiyā vā kārāpentena.Asāmikanti kāretā dāyakena virahitaṃ.Attuddesanti ‘‘mayhaṃ vāsāgāraṃ esā’’ti evaṃ attā uddeso etissāti attuddesā, taṃ attuddesaṃ.Pamāṇikā kāretabbāti pamāṇayuttā kāretabbā.Tatridaṃ pamāṇanti tassā kuṭiyā idaṃ pamāṇaṃ.Dīghasoti dīghato.Dvādasa vidatthiyo sugatavidatthiyātietthasugatavidatthināma idāni majjhimassa purisassa tisso vidatthiyo, vaḍḍhakihatthena diyaḍḍho hattho hoti. Minantena pana kuṭiyā bahikuṭṭe paṭhamaṃ dinnaṃ mahāmattikapariyantaṃ aggahetvā thusapiṇḍapariyantena dvādasa vidatthiyo minetabbā, sace thusapiṇḍakena anatthiko hoti, mahāmattikalepeneva niṭṭhāpeti, sveva paricchedo.Tiriyanti vitthārato.Sattantarāti kuṭṭassa bahiantaṃ aggahetvā abbhantarimena antena satta sugatavidatthiyo pamāṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Ettha ca kesaggamattampi dīghato hāpetvā tiriyaṃ, tiriyato vā hāpetvā dīghaṃ vaḍḍhetuṃ na vaṭṭati, ko pana vādo ubhatovaḍḍhane. Yā pana dīghato saṭṭhihatthāpi hoti, tiriyato tihatthā vā ūnakacatuhatthā vā, yattha pamāṇayutto mañco ito cito ca na parivaṭṭati, pacchimakoṭiyā catuhatthavitthārā na hoti, ayaṃ kuṭisaṅkhyaṃ na gacchati, tasmā vaṭṭati.Bhikkhūabhinetabbā vatthudesanāyāti yasmiṃ padese kuṭiṃ kāretukāmo hoti, taṃ sodhetvā padabhājane (pārā. 349) vuttanayena saṅghaṃ tikkhattuṃ yācitvā sabbe vā saṅghapariyāpannā saṅghena vā sammatā dve tayo bhikkhū tattha vatthudesanatthāya netabbā.Tehi bhikkhūhi vatthu desetabbaṃ anārambhaṃ saparikkamananti tehi bhikkhūhi kipillikādīnaṃ āsayādīhi terasahi, pubbaṇṇāparaṇṇanissitādīhi soḷasahi upaddavehi virahitattā anārambhaṃ, dvīhi vā catūhi vā balibaddhehi yuttena sakaṭena ekaṃ cakkaṃ nibbodakapatanaṭṭhāne ekaṃ bahi katvā āvijjhituṃ sakkuṇeyyatāya saparikkamananti sallakkhetvā sace saṅghapahonakā honti, tattheva, no ce, saṅghamajjhaṃ gantvā tena bhikkhunā yācitehi ñattidutiyena kammena vatthu desetabbaṃ.Sārambhe cetiādi paṭipakkhanayena veditabbaṃ.

saññācikāya pana: Here, saññācikā means a request initiated by oneself. Therefore, saññācikāya means by one's own request, meaning with materials requested by oneself. Here, it is not proper to request anything whatsoever that is possessed by another based on a permanent transfer, but it is proper to request it temporarily. It is proper to say, "Give me a man" for the sake of a friend or for doing work. It is also proper to request "purisattakaraṃ". Purisattakaro means manual work to be done by a man such as a carpenter. It is proper to request it by saying "Give me purisattakaraṃ" or "Give me manual work." Manual work is not an object, therefore it is proper to ask or request when asked "What is the purpose, venerable?" There is no offense because of the request. But hunters and the like should not be requested for their own work. Kuṭi means one of the types such as plastered. Here, ullittā means plastered inside, constructed by setting up pillars, beams, lintels, and joining the walls with spaces for windows and smoke holes, leaving unplastered spaces, and covering the inside of the roof with plaster or clay. Avalittā means plastered outside in the same way. Ullittāvalittā means plastered both inside and outside in the same way. Kārayamānenā: means either doing it oneself or having it done by command. Asāmikaṃ: means without a donor to take ownership. Attuddesaṃ: means "This is my dwelling," thus it is called attuddesaṃ, that attuddesaṃ. Pamāṇikā kāretabbā: should be made according to the measurements. Tatridaṃ pamāṇaṃ: This is the measurement of that hut. Dīghaso: in length. Dvādasa vidatthiyo sugatavidatthiyā: Here, sugatavidatthi means three spans of a modern average man, which is one and a half cubits by a carpenter's measure. When measuring, the twelve spans should be measured up to the pile of chaff, not including the edge of the outer wall of the hut where the clay is first applied; if he is not satisfied with the pile of chaff, he finishes it with the clay plaster itself; that is the limit. Tiriyaṃ: in width. Sattantarā: means the measurement is seven sugata spans inside, not including the outer edge of the wall. Here, it is not proper to increase the length by decreasing the width even by the size of a hair, or to increase the width by decreasing the length, let alone increasing both. But a hut that is sixty cubits long and three or less than four cubits wide, where a suitably sized couch cannot be turned around from one side to the other, and the width at the back end is not four cubits, does not count as a hut, therefore it is acceptable. Bhikkhū abhinetabbā vatthudesanāyā: The monks should be brought for the site dedication to the area where he wishes to build the hut, after cleaning the area and requesting the Sangha three times in the manner described in (pārā. 349). All the monks included in the Sangha or two or three monks appointed by the Sangha should be brought there for the site dedication. Tehi bhikkhūhi vatthu desetabbaṃ anārambhaṃ saparikkamanaṃ: The site should be dedicated by those monks, being free from the thirteen dangers such as ant hills and habitations of ants and the sixteen troubles such as being dependent on early and late crops, therefore being anārambhaṃ; and having considered it to be saparikkamanaṃ in that one wheel could be pierced and turned out so that a cart yoked with two or four oxen with one wheel at the place of the water outlet. If they are capable for the Sangha, then they should do it there itself, if not, having gone to the midst of the Sangha, the site should be dedicated by that monk with a formal motion and one proclamation after he has been requested. Sārambhe ce: etc., should be understood in the opposite way.

Āḷaviyaṃ āḷavike bhikkhū ārabbha saññācikāya kuṭikaraṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, asādhāraṇapaññatti, sāṇattikaṃ, ‘‘adesitavatthukaṃ pamāṇātikkantaṃ kuṭiṃ kāressāmī’’ti upakaraṇatthaṃ araññaṃ gamanato paṭṭhāya sabbapayogesu dukkaṭaṃ, ‘‘idāni dvīhi piṇḍehi niṭṭhānaṃ gamissatī’’ti tesu paṭhamapiṇḍadāne thullaccayaṃ, dutiyadānena lepe ghaṭite sace adesitavatthukā eva vā pamāṇātikkantā eva vā hoti, eko saṅghādiseso, dve ca dukkaṭāni. Ubhayavippannā, dve saṅghādisesā, dve ca dukkaṭāni. Sace pana dvārabandhaṃ vā vātapānaṃ vā aṭṭhapetvāva mattikāya limpati, ṭhapite ca tasmiṃ lepo na ghaṭiyati, rakkhati tāva. Puna limpantassa pana ghaṭitamatte saṅghādiseso. Sace taṃ ṭhapiyamānaṃ paṭhamadinnalepena saddhiṃ nirantarameva hutvā tiṭṭhati, paṭhamameva saṅghādiseso. Kevalaṃ sārambhāya dukkaṭaṃ, tathā aparikkamanāya. Vippakataṃ kuṭiṃ aññassa dadato ca, bhūmiṃ samaṃ katvā bhindantassa ca, leṇaguhātiṇakuṭipaṇṇacchadanagehesu aññataraṃ kārentassa, kuṭimpi aññassa vāsatthāya, vāsāgāraṃ ṭhapetvā uposathāgārādīsu aññataratthāya kārentassa ca ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Sīlavipatti, ullittādīnaṃ aññataratā, heṭṭhimapamāṇasambhavo, adesitavatthukatā, pamāṇātikkantatā, attuddesikatā, vāsāgāratā, lepaghaṭanāti imānettha cha vā satta vā aṅgāni. Chasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kiriyañca, kiriyākiriyañca. Idañhi vatthuṃ desāpetvā pamāṇātikkantaṃ vā karoto kiriyato samuṭṭhāti, adesāpetvā karoto kiriyākiriyato samuṭṭhāti. Sesamettha sañcaritte vuttasadisamevāti.

The rule was established in Āḷavī regarding the monks of Āḷavī concerning the case of cutting down a shrine tree; it is an unshared rule, requiring intention. From the moment of going to the forest for the materials, thinking "I will have a hut built without the site being designated or exceeding the measurements," there is a dukkaṭa for all the efforts. "Now it will be finished with two lumps of plaster"; at the first offering of plaster, there is a thullaccaya offense; at the second application of plaster, if it is indeed a hut where the site has not been designated or it exceeds the measurements, there is one saṅghādisesa and two dukkaṭas. If it is deficient in both ways, there are two saṅghādisesas and two dukkaṭas. But if, after setting up the door frame or window, he smears it with clay, and the plaster does not adhere to it after it has been set up, he protects it for a while. But when he smears it again, there is a saṅghādisesa as soon as it adheres. If that which is being set up remains continuously connected with the first applied plaster, there is a saṅghādisesa from the beginning. There is a dukkaṭa only for the disturbance, and likewise for the lack of examination. There is no offense for giving the completed hut to another, or for leveling and breaking up the ground, or for building any other type of dwelling such as a cave, a grass hut, or a leaf-covered house, or for building a hut for another to live in, or for building a dwelling for something other than living quarters, such as a Uposatha hall, or for the insane, etc. Moral corruption, being one of the plastered types, the possibility of the lower measurement, the site not being designated, exceeding the measurements, being for one's own use, being a dwelling, the plaster adhering: these are the six or seven factors here. It has six sources of arising, kriya and kriya-akriya. For one who has the site dedicated but makes it exceed the measurements, it arises from kriya; for one who does it without having it dedicated, it arises from kriya-akriya. The rest here is similar to what was said in the rule on acting as a go-between.

Kuṭikārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Training Rule on Building a Hut is Finished.

7. Vihārakārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. The Commentary on the Training Rule on Building a Vihāra

mahallakanti sasāmikabhāvena saññācitakuṭito mahantabhāvo etassa atthīti mahallako, yasmā vā vatthuṃ desāpetvā pamāṇātikkamenāpi kātuṃ vaṭṭati, tasmā pamāṇamahantatāyapi mahallako, taṃ mahallakaṃ. Yasmā panassa taṃ pamāṇamahantattaṃ sasāmikattāva labbhati, tasmā tadatthadassanatthaṃ ‘‘mahallako nāma vihāro sasāmiko vuccatī’’ti evamassa padabhājane (pārā. 367) vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ kuṭikārasikkhāpade vuttasadisaṃ, sasāmikabhāvamattameva hi viseso.

mahallakaṃ: Because it is larger than a self-requested hut with ownership, therefore it is mahallakaṃ. Or, because it is proper to make it exceed the measurements even after having the site designated, therefore it is also mahallakaṃ due to its large size, that mahallakaṃ. Since that large size of it is obtained only from its being owned, therefore, to show that meaning, it was said in the section on definitions (pārā. 367), "mahallakaṃ is said to be a vihāra that is owned." All the rest is similar to what was said in the training rule on building a hut; the only difference is that it is owned.

Kosambiyaṃ channattheraṃ ārabbha cetiyarukkhaṃ chedāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattabhāvo, akiriyamattato samuṭṭhānabhāvo, ekasaṅghādisesatā ca ettha viseso.

The establishment of the rule occurred in Kosambī regarding the monk Channa concerning the case of cutting down a shrine tree; the difference here is that it arises merely from non-performance and that there is one saṅghādisesa offense.

Vihārakārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Training Rule on Building a Vihāra is Finished.

8. Duṭṭhadosasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. The Training Rule on Falsely Accusing

duṭṭho dosoti dūsito ceva dūsako ca. Uppanne hi dose puggalo tena dosena dūsito hoti, pakatibhāvaṃ jahāpito, tasmā ‘‘duṭṭho’’ti vuccati. Parañca dūseti vināseti, tasmā ‘‘doso’’ti vuccati. Iti ‘‘duṭṭho doso’’ti ekassevetaṃ puggalassa ākāranānattena nidassanaṃ.Appatītoti nappatīto, pītisukhādīhi vivajjito, na abhisaṭoti attho.Amūlakenāti yaṃ codakena cuditakamhi puggale adiṭṭhaṃ assutaṃ aparisaṅkitaṃ, idaṃ etesaṃ dassanasavanaparisaṅkāsaṅkhātānaṃ mūlānaṃ abhāvato amūlakaṃ nāma. Taṃ pana so āpanno vā hotu, anāpanno vā, etaṃ idha appamāṇaṃ. Ettha caadiṭṭhaṃnāma attano pasādacakkhunā vā dibbacakkhunā vā adiṭṭhaṃ,assutaṃnāma tatheva kenaci vuccamānaṃ na sutaṃ,aparisaṅkitaṃnāma attano vā parassa vā diṭṭhasutamutavasena cetasā aparisaṅkitaṃ, iti evarūpena amūlakena.Pārājikenāti bhikkhuno anurūpesu ekūnavīsatiyā aññatarena, padabhājane (pārā. 386) pana pārājikuddese āgatāneva gahetvā ‘‘catunnaṃ aññatarenā’’ti vuttaṃ.Anuddhaṃseyyāti dhaṃseyya viddhaṃseyya padhaṃseyya abhibhaveyya. Taṃ pana anuddhaṃsanaṃ yasmā attanā codentopi parena codāpentopi karoti, tasmāssa padabhājane ‘‘codeti vā codāpeti vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha vatthusandassanā āpattisandassanā saṃvāsappaṭikkhepo sāmīcippaṭikkhepoti saṅkhepato catasso codanā. Tāsuvatthusandassanānāma ‘‘tvaṃ methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevī’’tiādinā nayena pavattā.Āpattisandassanānāma ‘‘tvaṃ methunadhammāpattiṃ āpanno’’tiādinā nayena pavattā.Saṃvāsappaṭikkheponāma ‘‘natthi tayā saddhiṃ uposatho vā pavāraṇā vā saṅghakammaṃ vā’’ti evaṃ pavatto. Ettāvatā pana sīsaṃ na eti, ‘‘assamaṇosī’’tiādīhi vacanehi saddhiṃ ghaṭiteyeva sīsaṃ eti.Sāmīcippaṭikkheponāma abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānaañjalikammasāmīcikammabījanikammādīnaṃ akaraṇaṃ, taṃ paṭipātiyā vandanādīni karoto ekassa akatvā sesānaṃ karaṇakāle veditabbaṃ. Ettāvatā ca codanā nāma hoti, āpatti pana sīsaṃ na eti. ‘‘Kasmā mama vandanādīni na karosī’’ti pucchite pana ‘‘assamaṇosī’’tiādivacanehi saddhiṃ ghaṭiteyeva sīsaṃ eti, tasmā yo bhikkhu bhikkhuṃ samīpe ṭhatvā ‘‘tvaṃ methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevī’’ti vā ‘‘assamaṇosī’’ti vā ādīhi vacanehi hatthamuddāya eva vā etamatthaṃ dīpento sayaṃ vā codeti, gahaṭṭhapabbajitesu vā aññatarena codāpeti, ayaṃ anuddhaṃseti nāma.Appeva nāma naṃ imamhā brahmacariyā cāveyyanti api eva nāma naṃ puggalaṃ imamhā seṭṭhacariyā apaneyyaṃ. ‘‘Sādhu vatassa sacāhaṃ imaṃ puggalaṃ imamhā brahmacariyā cāveyya’’nti iminā adhippāyena anuddhaṃseyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Etena ekaṃ cāvanādhippāyaṃ gahetvā avasesā akkosādhippāyo kammādhippāyo vuṭṭhānādhippāyo uposathaṭṭhapanādhippāyo pavāraṇaṭṭhapanādhippāyo anuvijjanādhippāyo dhammakathādhippāyoti satta adhippāyā paṭikkhittā honti.Tato aparena samayenāti yasmiṃ samaye anuddhaṃsito hoti, tato aññasmiṃ samaye.Samanuggāhīyamāno vāti anuvijjakena kiṃ te diṭṭhantiādinā nayena anuvijjiyamāno upaparikkhiyamāno.Asamanuggāhīyamāno vāti diṭṭhādīsu kenaci vatthunāvā anuvijjakādīsu yena kenaci puggalena vā avuccamāno. Imesaṃ pana padānaṃ parato ‘‘bhikkhu ca dosaṃ patiṭṭhātī’’ti iminā sambandho. Idañhi vuttaṃ hoti – evaṃ samanuggāhīyamāno vā asamanuggāhīyamāno vā bhikkhu ca dosaṃ patiṭṭhāti paṭicca tiṭṭhati paṭijānāti, saṅghādisesoti. Idañca amūlakabhāvassa pākaṭakāladassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Āpattiṃ pana anuddhaṃsitakkhaṇeyeva āpajjati.Amūlakañceva taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ hotīti ettha pana diṭṭhamūlādīnaṃ abhāvena amūlakaṃ, samathehi adhikaraṇīyabhāvena adhikaraṇaṃ. Yañhi adhikicca ārabbha paṭicca sandhāya samathā pavattanti, taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ. Idha pana pārājikasaṅkhātaṃ āpattādhikaraṇameva adhippetaṃ. Yadi hi taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ diṭṭhādīhi mūlehi amūlakañceva hoti, ayaṃ codetuṃ āgato bhikkhu ca dosaṃ patiṭṭhāti paṭicca tiṭṭhati, ‘‘tucchakaṃ mayā bhaṇita’’ntiādīni (pārā. 386) vadanto paṭijānāti, tassa bhikkhuno anuddhaṃsitakkhaṇeyeva saṅghādisesoti, ayaṃ sikkhāpadassa padānukkamena attho.

"Duṭṭho doso" means both corrupted and corrupting. When anger arises, a person is corrupted by that anger, caused to abandon their natural state; therefore, it is called "duṭṭho." And it corrupts and destroys others; therefore, it is called "doso." Thus, "duṭṭho doso" is a single person described in terms of differing characteristics. "Appatīto" means displeased, devoid of joy and happiness, not content. "Amūlakena" means that which the accuser has not seen, not heard, not suspected in the person being accused; because of the absence of these roots consisting of seeing, hearing, and suspecting, it is called "amūlaka." Whether he is guilty of that or not is irrelevant here. Here, "adiṭṭhaṃ" means not seen by one's own eye of confidence or by the divine eye; "assutaṃ" means not heard when someone is saying it; "aparisaṅkitaṃ" means not suspected in the mind, either by oneself or by another, based on what is seen, heard, or thought; thus, with such baselessness. "Pārājikena" means one of the nineteen offenses suitable for a bhikkhu; however, in the section on the Pārājika offenses in the Padabhājana (pārā. 386), only those mentioned in the Pārājika section are taken, and it is stated as "one of the four." "Anuddhaṃseyyā" means to destroy, to utterly destroy, to overwhelm, to overpower. Since this accusation is done by oneself when accusing or by instigating another to accuse, it is stated in the Padabhājana as "accuses or causes to accuse." Therein, accusation is briefly fourfold: pointing out the basis, pointing out the offense, rejecting association, and rejecting proper conduct. Among these, "vatthusandassanā" means proceeding in a manner such as "you engaged in sexual intercourse." "Āpattisandassanā" means proceeding in a manner such as "you have committed the offense of sexual intercourse." "Saṃvāsappaṭikkhepo" means proceeding thus: "there is no Uposatha, Pavāraṇā, or Sanghakamma with you." However, this alone does not constitute the offense; it only constitutes the offense when combined with statements such as "you are not a samaṇa." "Sāmīcippaṭikkhepo" means not doing acts of reverence, rising to greet, the Añjali gesture, proper conduct, acts of respect to superiors, etc.; this should be understood when one person is not shown the proper respect like bowing while the others are. This much is only accusation, but the offense is not constituted. However, if asked, "Why do you not show me proper respect, etc.?" and it is combined with statements such as "you are not a samaṇa," then the offense is constituted. Therefore, that bhikkhu who, standing near another bhikkhu, either accuses himself or causes another, among householders or renunciates, to accuse, indicating this matter with words such as "you engaged in sexual intercourse" or "you are not a samaṇa," or even with a hand gesture, is said to "anuddhaṃseti." "Appeva nāma naṃ imamhā brahmacariyā cāveyya" means perhaps he might cause that person to fall from this excellent conduct. It is said that one accuses with the intention of thinking, "It would be good if I could cause this person to fall from this holy life." With this, having taken one intention of causing to fall, the remaining seven intentions are rejected: the intention of scolding, the intention of punishment, the intention of expulsion, the intention of preventing Uposatha, the intention of preventing Pavāraṇā, the intention of investigation, and the intention of teaching the Dhamma. "Tato aparena samayenā" means at a time other than when he was accused. "Samanuggāhīyamāno vā" means being investigated or examined by an investigator with methods such as, "What did you see?" "Asamanuggāhīyamāno vā" means not being spoken to by anyone regarding what was seen, etc., or by any person regarding the investigators, etc. However, these words are connected to "bhikkhu ca dosaṃ patiṭṭhāti" later. For it is said thus: whether being investigated or not, the bhikkhu persists in the anger, stands upon it, acknowledges it, it is a Saṅghādisesa. And this is stated to show the time when the baselessness becomes apparent. But one incurs the offense at the very moment of accusation. "Amūlakañceva taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ hotī" means here, it is baseless due to the absence of seeing, etc., as roots, and it is a case (adhikaraṇaṃ) because it is subject to resolution (samatha). For that which is intentionally, concerning, regarding, and with reference to which resolutions (samathā) are undertaken is a case (adhikaraṇaṃ). Here, only the case of offense (āpattādhikaraṇaṃ) consisting of a Pārājika is intended. If that case is indeed baseless with roots of seeing, etc., then this bhikkhu who has come to accuse persists in the anger, stands upon it, acknowledges it, saying "I have spoken falsely," etc. (pārā. 386), that bhikkhu incurs a Saṅghādisesa at the very moment of accusation; this is the meaning of the training rule in the order of the words.

Rājagahe mettiyabhūmajake bhikkhū ārabbha amūlakena pārājikena anuddhaṃsanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, sāṇattikaṃ, katūpasampadaṃ suddhaṃ vā asuddhaṃ vā puggalaṃ yena pārājikena codeti, taṃ ‘‘ayaṃ anajjhāpanno’’ti ñatvā cāvanādhippāyena ‘‘karotu me āyasmā okāsaṃ, ahaṃ taṃ vattukāmo’’ti evaṃ okāsaṃ akāretvā codentassa sace so taṅkhaṇeyeva jānāti ‘‘maṃ codetī’’ti, vācāya vācāya saṅghādiseso ceva dukkaṭañca. Okāsaṃ kāretvā codentassa saṅghādisesoyeva. Hatthamuddāya sammukhā codentassāpi eseva nayo. Parammukhā codentassa pana sīsaṃ na eti. Attanā samīpe ṭhatvā aññaṃ bhikkhuṃ āṇāpeti, so tassa vacanena taṃ codeti, codāpakasseva vuttanayena āpattiyo. Atha sopi ‘‘mayā diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ atthī’’ti codeti, dvinnampi jānānaṃ tatheva āpattiyo. Akkosādhippāyena pana okāsaṃ akāretvā vadantassa vuttanayeneva pācittiyañceva dukkaṭañca. Okāsaṃ kāretvā vadantassa pācittiyameva. Kammādhippāyena asammukhā sattavidhampi kammaṃ karontassa dukkaṭameva. Vuṭṭhānādhippāyena ‘‘tvaṃ itthannāmaṃ āpattiṃ āpanno, taṃ paṭikarohī’’ti vadantassa, uposathaṃ vā pavāraṇaṃ vā ṭhapentassa ca okāsakammaṃ natthi, ṭhapanakkhettaṃ pana jānitabbaṃ, anuvijjakassāpi osaṭe vatthusmiṃ ‘‘atthetaṃ tavā’’ti anuvijjanādhippāyena vadantassa okāsakammaṃ natthi, dhammakathikassāpi ‘‘yo idañca idañca karoti, ayaṃ assamaṇo’’tiādinā nayena anodisakaṃ dhammaṃ kathentassa okāsakammaṃ natthi. Sace pana odissa niyametvā ‘‘asuko ca asuko ca assamaṇo anupāsako’’ti katheti, āsanato oruyha āpattiṃ desetvā gantabbaṃ. Ummattakādīnañca anāpatti, sīlavipatti, yaṃ codeti vā codāpeti vā, tassa ‘‘upasampanno’’ti saṅkhyupagamanaṃ, tasmiṃ suddhasaññitā, yena pārājikena codeti, tassa diṭṭhādivasena amūlakatā, cāvanādhippāyena sammukhācodanā, tassa taṅkhaṇavijānananti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāni. Vedanā panettha dukkhāyevāti.

This was promulgated in Rājagaha regarding the bhikkhus who were Mettiya and Bhūmajaka, concerning the matter of accusing with a baseless Pārājika. It is a general pronouncement, an injunction, applicable to one who has received ordination. Whomever he accuses with that Pārājika, knowing that "this one is not innocent," with the intention of causing him to fall, without having him make an opportunity, saying, "Venerable Sir, please give me an opportunity; I wish to speak about this," if he knows at that very moment "he is accusing me," it is both a Saṅghādisesa and a Dukaṭa with each word. If he accuses after making an opportunity, it is only a Saṅghādisesa. The same method applies to accusing face to face with a hand gesture. But if he accuses behind the back, the offense is not constituted. If he orders another bhikkhu while standing nearby, and that bhikkhu accuses him with his words, the offenses are as stated above only for the one who caused the accusation. Then if he also accuses, saying, "I have seen and heard it," the offenses are the same for both who know. However, if he speaks with the intention of scolding without making an opportunity, it is both a Pācittiya and a Dukaṭa in the manner stated above. If he speaks after making an opportunity, it is only a Pācittiya. If he performs any of the seven types of Kammā with the intention of punishment without being face-to-face, it is only a Dukaṭa. If he says with the intention of expulsion, "You have committed such and such an offense; remedy it," and when preventing the Uposatha or Pavāraṇā, there is no need for seeking permission; however, the place of prevention should be known. Likewise, for the investigator, when saying "this is yours" regarding an established matter with the intention of investigation, there is no need for seeking permission. Likewise, for the Dhamma speaker, when speaking the Dhamma without directing it at anyone in a manner such as "whoever does this and that is not a samaṇa," there is no need for seeking permission. But if he directs it at someone and specifies, "so and so is not a samaṇa, is not an upāsaka," he must descend from the seat and confess the offense before leaving. And there is no offense for the insane, etc. Moral failure. The assumption that he who accuses or causes to accuse is "ordained," the perception of purity in him, the baselessness of that Pārājika with which he accuses in terms of seeing, etc., accusing face to face with the intention of causing to fall, and his knowing it at that very moment—these are the five factors here. The origin, etc., are similar to those for taking what is not given. The feeling here is only painful.

Duṭṭhadosasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Corrupting Anger is Complete.

9. Aññabhāgiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

aññabhāgiyassātiādīsu aññabhāgassa idaṃ, aññabhāgo vā assa atthīti aññabhāgiyaṃ.Adhikaraṇanti ādhāro veditabbo, vatthu adhiṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Yo hi so aṭṭhuppattiyaṃ ‘‘dabbo mallaputto nāmā’’ti chagalako vutto. So yvāyaṃ āyasmato dabbassa mallaputtassa bhāgo koṭṭhāso pakkho manussajāti ceva bhikkhubhāvo ca, tato aññassa bhāgassa koṭṭhāsassa pakkhassa hoti tiracchānajātiyā ceva chagalakabhāvassa ca, so vā aññabhāgo assa atthi, tasmā aññabhāgiyasaṅkhyaṃ labhati. Yasmā ca tesaṃ ‘‘imaṃ mayaṃ dabbaṃ mallaputtaṃ nāma karomā’’ti vadantānaṃ tassa nāmakaraṇasaññāya ādhāro vatthu adhiṭṭhānaṃ, tasmā ‘‘adhikaraṇa’’nti veditabbo. Tañhi sandhāya ‘‘saccaṃ kira tumhe, bhikkhave, dabbaṃ mallaputtaṃ aññabhāgiyassa adhikaraṇassā’’tiādi (pārā. 391) vuttaṃ. Na vivādādhikaraṇādīsu aññataraṃ, kasmā? Asambhavato. Na hi mettiyabhūmajakā catunnaṃ adhikaraṇānaṃ kassaci aññabhāgiyassa adhikaraṇassa kiñcidesaṃ lesamattaṃ uppādiyiṃsu, na ca catunnaṃ adhikaraṇānaṃ leso nāma atthi. Jātilesādayo hi puggalānaṃyeva lesā vuttā, na vivādādhikaraṇādīnaṃ. Tañca ‘‘dabbo mallaputto’’ti nāmaṃ tassa aññabhāgiyādhikaraṇabhāve ṭhitassa chagalakassa koci deso hoti theraṃ pārājikena dhammena anuddhaṃsetuṃ lesamatto, ettha ca dissati apadissati ‘‘assa aya’’nti voharīyatītideso,jātiādīsu aññatarakoṭṭhāsassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Aññampi vatthuṃ lissati silissati vohāramatteneva īsakaṃ allīyatītileso,jātiādīnaṃyeva aññatarakoṭṭhāsassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Padabhājane (pārā. 393) pana yassa aññabhāgiyassa adhikaraṇassa kiñcidesaṃ lesamattaṃ upādāya pārājikena dhammena anuddhaṃseyya, taṃ yasmā aṭṭhuppattivaseneva āvibhūtaṃ, tasmā taṃ avibhajitvā yāni ‘‘adhikaraṇa’’nti vacanasāmaññato atthuddhāravasena pavattāni cattāri adhikaraṇāni, tesaṃ aññabhāgiyatā ca tabbhāgiyatā ca yasmā apākaṭā, jānitabbā ca vinayadharehi, tasmā tañca avasāne āpattaññabhāgiyena codanañca āvikātuṃ ‘‘aññabhāgiyassa adhikaraṇassāti āpattaññabhāgiyaṃ vā hoti adhikaraṇaññabhāgiyaṃ vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ, sesā vinicchayakathā aṭṭhame vuttasadisāyeva. Ayaṃ pana viseso – idaṃ aññabhāgiyassa adhikaraṇassa kiñcidesaṃ lesamattaṃ upādāya pārājikena dhammena anuddhaṃsanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, idha ca āpattaññabhāgiyacodanāya tathāsaññinopi anāpatti. Aṅgesu ca aññabhāgiyassa adhikaraṇassa kiñcidesaṃ lesamattaṃ upādiyanatā adhikāti.

In "aññabhāgiyassā" etc., "aññabhāgassa idaṃ," or "aññabhāgo vā assa atthīti aññabhāgiyaṃ" means pertaining to another part, or he has another part, therefore, it is "aññabhāgiyaṃ." "Adhikaraṇa" should be understood as the basis, the object, the foundation. For that goat named Dabba Mallaputta who was mentioned in the story of its origin, that part, portion, side, of the venerable Dabba Mallaputta, which is the human species and the state of being a bhikkhu, is other than the part, portion, side, of the animal species and the state of being a goat; or he has that other part; therefore, he obtains the designation "aññabhāgiya." And because the basis, object, foundation of the naming perception of those who say, "we will make this one named Dabba Mallaputta," therefore, it should be understood as "adhikaraṇa." With reference to that, it is said, "Is it true, bhikkhus, that you (accuse) Dabba Mallaputta concerning a related matter?" (pārā. 391). It is not one of the cases of dispute, etc. Why? Because it is impossible. For the Mettiya-Bhūmajaka bhikkhus did not produce any part or trace of any of the four cases concerning a related matter, nor is there any trace of the four cases. For traces like birth-trace, etc., are said to be only traces of individuals, not of cases of dispute, etc. And that name "Dabba Mallaputta," when that goat stood in the state of being a related matter, any part of it could be a trace to accuse the Thera with a Pārājika offense, and here it is seen, it is evident, it is referred to as "this one's." "Deso" this is a designation for another portion of birth, etc. And another thing, "lujjati silissati vohāramatteneva īsakaṃ allīyatīti leso," that which is broken, which is crushed, which merely adheres slightly through language is a "leso," this is a designation for another portion of just birth, etc. However, in the Padabhājana (pārā. 393), it is because it became apparent only through the story of its origin that whatever part or trace of a related matter one might take up and accuse with a Pārājika offense, therefore, without distinguishing that, the four cases which arise from the generality of the term "adhikaraṇa" in terms of drawing out the meaning, and because their being related or unrelated is not evident and should be known by those who uphold the Vinaya, therefore, in order to reveal that, the offense concerning a related matter, and the accusation, it is said "aññabhāgiyassa adhikaraṇassāti āpattaññabhāgiyaṃ vā hoti adhikaraṇaññabhāgiyaṃ vā," the rest of the discussion of resolution is similar to what was said in the eighth. However, this is the difference: this was promulgated concerning the matter of accusing with a Pārājika offense by taking up any part or trace of a related matter, and here there is no offense even for one who perceives it as such in the accusation of an offense concerning a related matter. And among the factors, what is additional is the taking up of any part or trace of a related matter.

Aññabhāgiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on a Related Matter is Complete.

10. Saṅghabhedasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Training Rule on Causing a Schism in the Sangha

samaggassa saṅghassāti sahitassa bhikkhusaṅghassa, cittena ca sarīrena ca aviyuttassāti attho. Tenevassa padabhājane (pārā. 412) ‘‘samaggo nāma saṅgho samānasaṃvāsako samānasīmāyaṃ ṭhito’’ti vuttaṃ. Samānasaṃvāsako hi samacittatāya cittena aviyutto hoti, samānasīmāyaṃ ṭhito kāyasāmaggidānato sarīrena aviyutto.Bhedāya parakkameyyāti ‘‘kathaṃ nāmāyaṃ bhijjeyyā’’ti bhedanatthāya vāyāmeyya.Bhedanasaṃvattanikaṃ vā adhikaraṇanti bhedanassa saṅghabhedassa atthāya saṃvattanikaṃ kāraṇaṃ. Imasmiñhi okāse ‘‘kāmahetu kāmanidānaṃ kāmādhikaraṇa’’nti ādīsu (ma. ni. 1.168, 178) viya kāraṇaṃ ‘‘adhikaraṇa’’nti adhippetaṃ. Taṃ bhedakaravatthuvasena aṭṭhārasavidhaṃ.Samādāyāti gahetvā.Paggayha tiṭṭheyyāti taṃ saṅghabhedassa atthāya saṃvattanikaṃ saṅghabhedanibbattisamatthaṃ kāraṇaṃ gahetvā dīpeyya ceva nappaṭinissajjeyya ca.Bhikkhūhi evamassa vacanīyoti ye taṃ paggayha tiṭṭhantaṃ sammukhā passanti, ye vā ‘‘asukasmiṃ nāma vihāre’’ti suṇanti, tehi sabbantimena paricchedena aḍḍhayojanamattaṃ gantvāpi yvāyaṃ anantare ‘‘māyasmā’’tiādivacanakkamo vutto, evamassa vacanīyo. Disvā vā sutvā vā avadantānaṃ dukkaṭaṃ. Ettha ca māiti padaṃ ‘‘parakkamī’’tipadena ‘‘aṭṭhāsī’’tipadena ca saddhiṃ ‘‘mā parakkami, mā aṭṭhāsī’’ti yojetabbaṃ.Sametāyasmā saṅghenāti āyasmā saṅghena saddhiṃ sametu samāgacchatu, ekaladdhiko hotūti attho. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Samaggo hi saṅgho…pe… viharatīti. Tatthasammodamānoti aññamaññasampattiyā suṭṭhu modamāno.Avivadamānoti ‘‘ayaṃ dhammo, nāyaṃ dhammo’’ti evaṃ na vivadamāno. Eko uddeso assātiekuddeso,ekato pavattapātimokkhuddesoti attho.Phāsu viharatīti sukhaṃ viharati. Evaṃ visumpi saṅghamajjhepi tikkhattuṃ vuccamānassa appaṭinissajjato dukkaṭaṃ.Evañca sotiādimhisamanubhāsitabboti samanubhāsanakammaṃ kātabbaṃ.Iccetaṃ kusalanti iti etaṃ paṭinissajjanaṃ kusalaṃ khemaṃ sotthibhāvo tassa bhikkhuno.No cepaṭinissajjeyya, saṅghādisesoti ettha samanubhāsanakammapariyosāne appaṭinissajjantassa saṅghādiseso. Sesaṃ uttānapadatthameva.

Samaggassa saṅghassā means of a united Sangha, a community of bhikkhus undivided in mind and body. Therefore, it is said in the section on padabhājana (pārā. 412), "A Sangha is called united when it shares the same dwelling, established within the same boundary." For one who shares the same dwelling is undivided in mind due to having the same thought; one who is established within the same boundary is undivided in body because he gives bodily harmony. Bhedāya parakkameyyā means should strive for the purpose of breaking, "How might this (Sangha) be broken?". Bhedanasaṃvattanikaṃ vā adhikaraṇa means a cause that conduces to the breaking, the schism of the Sangha. For in this instance, as with "because of desire, originating in desire, caused by desire" and so on (ma. ni. 1.168, 178), cause is intended by "adhikaraṇa." And that (cause) is eighteenfold in terms of the basis for division. Samādāyā means having taken up. Paggayha tiṭṭheyyā means having taken up that cause which conduces to the schism of the Sangha, which is capable of bringing about schism in the Sangha, he should both proclaim it and not relinquish it. Bhikkhūhi evamassa vacanīyo means those who see him standing holding to that (cause) in person, or those who hear, "In such and such a monastery," should go even half a yojanā, by the last reckoning, and say to him in this way, in the manner of speaking beginning with "May the venerable one...". There is a dukkata for those who do not speak, having seen or heard. Here, the word should be connected with the words "parakkami" and "aṭṭhāsī," as "mā parakkami, mā aṭṭhāsī" (do not strive, do not persist). Sametāyasmā saṅghenā means may the venerable one come together with the Sangha, may he be of one purpose. What is the reason? Because a united Sangha... dwells pleasantly. There, sammodamāno means greatly rejoicing in each other's attainments. Avivadamāno means not disputing, "This is the Dhamma, this is not the Dhamma." Eko uddeso assāti ekuddeso means having one recitation, having a single recitation of the Pātimokkha. Phāsu viharatī means dwells happily. Thus, because of not relinquishing (the cause) when being spoken to, even separately or in the midst of the Sangha, three times, there is a dukkata. In Evañca so, samanubhāsitabbo means the act of formal admonition should be done. Iccetaṃ kusalaṃ means thus, this relinquishing is skillful, safe, a state of well-being for that bhikkhu. No ce paṭinissajjeyya, saṅghādiseso means here, for one who does not relinquish (the cause) at the end of the act of formal admonition, there is a saṅghādisesa. The rest is only of obvious meaning.

yya-kārapattāya tatiyakammavācāya tañca dukkaṭaṃ te ca thullaccayā paṭippassambhanti, saṅghādisesoyeva tiṭṭhati. Asamanubhāsiyamānassa ca paṭinissajjantassa ca ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Sīlavipatti, bhedāya parakkamanaṃ, dhammakammena samanubhāsanaṃ, kammavācāpariyosānaṃ, appaṭinissajjananti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhānaṃ, akiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.

Through the attainment of yya-sound, that third passive construction, and that dukkata and those thullaccayas subside, (but) only the saṅghādisesa remains. There is no offense for one who relinquishes without being formally admonished, nor for the insane and so forth. Here, there are these four factors: violation of moral conduct, striving for division, formal admonition by way of a lawful act, completion of the kammavācā, and non-relinquishment. (The offense) arises from formal admonition; it is inaction, release by perception, intentional, a worldly offense, an act of body, an act of speech, unwholesome thought, and painful feeling.

Saṅghabhedasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Training Rule on Causing Schism in the Sangha is Finished.

11. Bhedānuvattakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
11. Commentary on the Training Rule on Following One Who Causes Schism

tasseva kho panāti yo saṅghabhedāya parakkamati, tasseva.Anuvattakāti tassa diṭṭhiṃ khantiṃ ruciṃ gahaṇena anupaṭipajjanakā. Vaggaṃ asāmaggipakkhiyavacanaṃ vadantītivaggavādakā. Yasmā pana tiṇṇaṃ uddhaṃ kammārahā na honti. Na hi saṅgho saṅghassa kammaṃ karoti, tasmā ‘‘eko vā dve vā tayo vā’’ti vuttaṃ.Jānāti noti amhākaṃ chandādīni jānāti.Bhāsatīti ‘‘evaṃ karomā’’ti amhehi saddhiṃ bhāsati.Amhākampetaṃ khamatīti yaṃ so karoti, etaṃ amhākampi ruccati.Sametāyasmantānaṃ saṅghenāti āyasmantānaṃ cittaṃ saṅghena saddhiṃ sametu samāgacchatu, ekībhāvaṃ gacchatūti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesaṃ padatthato uttānameva. Vinicchayakathāpettha dasame vuttasadisāyeva.

Tasseva kho panā means of that very one who strives for schism in the Sangha. Anuvattakā means those who behave in accordance with his view, acceptance, and preference by adopting them. Vaggavādakā means speaking words of faction, of disharmonious alignment. Since, however, more than three are not eligible for a kamma, for the Sangha does not perform a kamma on the Sangha, therefore it is said, "whether one, two, or three." Jānāti no means does he know our inclinations and so forth? Bhāsatī means "Let us do thus," he speaks with us. Amhākampetaṃ khamatī means that which he does, this is pleasing to us as well. Sametāyasmantānaṃ saṅghenā means may the minds of the venerable ones come together with the Sangha, may they attain oneness. The rest is only obvious in meaning. The discussion of adjudication here is just like that stated in the tenth.

Ayaṃ pana viseso – idaṃ rājagahe sambahule bhikkhū ārabbha devadattassa saṅghabhedāya parakkamantassa anuvattanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, aṅgesu ca yathā tattha parakkamanaṃ, evaṃ idha anuvattanaṃ daṭṭhabbanti.

However, this is the distinction: this was established in Rājagaha concerning many bhikkhus, on the occasion of Devadatta following one who was striving for schism in the Sangha; and among the factors, just as there is striving there, so here following should be seen.

Bhedānuvattakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Training Rule on Following One Who Causes Schism is Finished.

12. Dubbacasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
12. Commentary on the Training Rule on Being Difficult to Admonish

dubbacajātikoti dubbacasabhāvo, vattuṃ asakkuṇeyyoti attho.Uddesapariyāpannesūti uddese pariyāpannesu antogadhesu, ‘‘yassa siyā āpatti, so āvikareyyā’’ti evaṃ saṅgahitattā anto pātimokkhassa vattamānesūti attho.Sahadhammikaṃ vuccamānoti sahadhammikena vuccamāno, kāraṇatthe cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Pañcahi sahadhammikehi sikkhitabbattā, tesaṃ vā santakattā ‘‘sahadhammika’’nti laddhanāmena buddhapaññattena sikkhāpadena vuccamānoti attho.Viramathāyasmanto mama vacanāyāti yena vacanena maṃ vadatha, tato mama vacanato viramatha, mā maṃ taṃ vacanaṃ vadathāti vuttaṃ hoti.Vadatu saha dhammenāti sahadhammikena sikkhāpadena, sahadhammena vā aññenapi pāsādikabhāvasaṃvattanikena vacanena vadetu.Yadidanti vuddhikāraṇadassanatthe nipāto, tena yaṃ idaṃ aññamaññassa hitavacanaṃ, āpattito ca vuṭṭhāpanaṃ, tenaaññamaññavacanena aññamaññavuṭṭhāpanena. Evaṃ saṃvaddhāhi tassa bhagavato parisāti evaṃ parisāya vuddhikāraṇaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva. Vinicchayakathāpi dasame vuttasadisāyeva.

Dubbacajātiko means of a nature that is difficult to admonish, unable to be spoken to. Uddesapariyāpannesū means included in the statement, encompassed within, because it is included as, "Whoever has an offense, let him reveal it," thus meaning included within the Pātimokkha. Sahadhammikaṃ vuccamāno means being spoken to in accordance with the Dhamma, this is a locative in the sense of cause. Because of the need to train in accordance with five things that are in accordance with the Dhamma, or because they belong to those (five things), being spoken to in accordance with a training rule established by the Buddha that has obtained the name "in accordance with the Dhamma," is the meaning. Viramathāyasmanto mama vacanāyā means by that speech by which you speak to me, cease from speaking to me with that, do not speak that speech to me. Vadatu saha dhammenā means let him speak in accordance with the Dhamma, or let him speak with another speech that conduces to confidence. Yadidaṃ is a particle in the sense of showing the cause of increase, therefore by that mutual speaking of what is beneficial, and by the raising up from offenses, thus the Buddha's assembly has grown. In this way the cause of growth for the assembly is shown. The rest is only obvious in meaning. The discussion of adjudication is just like that stated in the tenth.

Ayaṃ pana viseso – idaṃ kosambiyaṃ channattheraṃ ārabbha attānaṃ avacanīyakaraṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, aṅgesu ca yathā tattha parakkamanaṃ, evaṃ idha avacanīyakaraṇatā daṭṭhabbāti.

However, this is the distinction: this was established in Kosambi concerning Thera Channa, on the occasion of making himself unadmonishable; and among the factors, just as there is striving there, so here the state of being unadmonishable should be seen.

Dubbacasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Training Rule on Being Difficult to Admonish is Finished.

13. Kuladūsakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
13. Commentary on the Training Rule on Corrupting Families

gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃvāti ettha nagarampi gāme antogadhameva.Upanissāya viharatītitattha paṭibaddhacīvarādipaccayatāya taṃ nissāya vasati. Pupphadānādīhi manussānaṃ saddhaṃ vināsento kulāni dūsetītikuladūsako. Mālāvaccharopanādayo pāpakā samācārā assātipāpasamācāro. So bhikkhūti so kuladūsako bhikkhu.Āyasmā khokuladūsako…pe… alaṃ te idha vāsenāti imināssa pabbājanīyakammārahataṃ dasseti. Pabbājanīyakammakato panesa yasmiṃ gāme vā nigame vā kuladūsakakammaṃ kataṃ, yasmiñca vihāre vasati, neva tasmiṃ gāme vā nigame vā carituṃ labhati, na vihāre vasituṃ.Evañca so bhikkhūtietthasoti pabbājanīyakammakato adhippeto. Chandena gacchantītichandagāmino,esa nayo sesesu.So bhikkhūti so ‘‘chandagāmino’’tiādīni vadamāno. Tassa vacanassa paṭinissaggāya evaṃ vacanīyo, na kuladūsananivāraṇatthāya. Kuladūsanakammena hi so āpajjitabbā āpattiyo pubbeva āpanno, evaṃ panassa visumpi saṅghamajjhepi vuccamānassa appaṭinissajjato aparaṃ dukkaṭaṃ.Evañca sotiādi ito pubbe vuttañca avuttañca sabbaṃ uttānatthameva. Vinicchayakathāpi dasame vuttasadisāyeva.

Gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃvā here, a city is also included within a village. Upanissāya viharatī means dwelling dependent on that place, because of the need for robes and other requisites that are connected to that place. Kuladūsako means one who corrupts families by destroying the faith of people through flower offerings and so forth. Pāpasamācāro means having evil conduct, such as arranging garlands and planting trees. So bhikkhū means that bhikkhu who is a corrupter of families. Āyasmā kho kuladūsako…pe… alaṃ te idha vāsenā means by this, he indicates that he is eligible for an act of expulsion. However, after an act of expulsion has been done, he is not allowed to wander in that village or town where the act of corrupting families was done, nor to dwell in the monastery. Evañca so bhikkhū here, so means one who has been subjected to an act of expulsion is intended. Chandena gacchantīti chandagāmino, this is the method for the rest. So bhikkhū means that one who is speaking the words "favoring by desire" and so on. He should be spoken to thus for the relinquishment of that speech, not for the prevention of corrupting families. For by the act of corrupting families, he has already incurred the offenses that are to be incurred, but because of not relinquishing when being spoken to thus, even separately or in the midst of the Sangha, there is another dukkata. Evañca so and so forth, all that has been said before and not said is only obvious in meaning. The discussion of adjudication is just like that stated in the tenth.

Ayaṃ pana viseso – idaṃ sāvatthiyaṃ assajipunabbasuke bhikkhū ārabbha chandagāmitādīhi pāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, aṅgesu ca yathā tattha parakkamanaṃ, evaṃ idha chandādīhi pāpanaṃ daṭṭhabbanti.

However, this is the distinction: this was established in Sāvatthi concerning the bhikkhus Assaji and Punabbasuka, on the occasion of evil grounds of favoring by desire and so forth; and among the factors, just as there is striving there, so here the evil of favoring by desire and so forth should be seen.

Kuladūsakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Training Rule on Corrupting Families is Finished.

Nigamanavaṇṇanā
Conclusion

Uddiṭṭhākho…pe… evametaṃ dhārayāmītiettha paṭhamaṃ āpatti etesantipaṭhamāpattikā,paṭhamaṃ vītikkamanakkhaṇeyeva āpajjitabbāti attho. Itare pana yathā tatiye ca catutthe ca divase hotīti ettha ‘‘tatiyako, catutthako’’ti vuccati, evaṃ yāvatatiye samanubhāsanakamme hontītiyāvatatiyakāti veditabbā.Yāvatīhanti yattakāni ahāni.Jānaṃ paṭicchādetīti jānanto paṭicchādeti. Tatthāyaṃ paṭicchādanalakkhaṇassa mātikā – āpatti ca hoti, āpattisaññī ca, pakatatto ca hoti, pakatattasaññī ca, anantarāyiko ca hoti, anantarāyikasaññī ca, pahu ca hoti, pahusaññī ca, chādetukāmo ca hoti, chādeti cāti. Tatthaāpatti ca hoti, āpattisaññī cāti yaṃ āpattiṃ āpanno, sā terasannaṃ aññatarā hoti, sopi ca tattha vatthuvasena vā ‘‘idaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti nāmamattavasena vā ‘‘ayaṃ itthannāmā āpattī’’ti āpattisaññīyeva hutvā ‘‘na dāni naṃ kassaci ārocessāmī’’ti evaṃ chādetukāmova dhuraṃ nikkhipitvā aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpeti, channā hoti āpatti. Sace panettha anāpattisaññī vā hoti, aññāpattikkhandhasaññī vā, vematiko vā, acchannāva hoti.Pakatattoti anukkhitto samānasaṃvāsako. So ce pakatattasaññī hutvā vuttanayeneva chādeti, channā hoti.Anantarāyikoti yassa dasasu rājacoraaggiudakamanussaamanussavāḷasarīsapajīvitabrahmacariyantarāyesu ekopi natthi, so ce anantarāyikasaññī chādeti, channā hoti.Pahūti yo sakkoti bhikkhuno santikaṃ gantuñceva ārocetuñca, so ce pahusaññī hutvā chādeti, channā hoti.Chādetukāmo ca hoti, chādeti cātiidaṃ uttānameva. Sacepi hi so sabhāgaṃ disvā ‘‘ayaṃ me upajjhāyo vā ācariyo vā’’ti lajjāya nāroceti, channāva hoti. Upajjhāyādibhāvo hi idha appamāṇaṃ, sabhāgamattameva pamāṇaṃ. Ayaṃ ‘‘jānaṃ paṭicchādetī’’tipadassa saṅkhepato atthavinicchayo.

Uddiṭṭhā kho…pe… evametaṃ dhārayāmī here, paṭhamāpattikā means the first offense, meaning to be incurred at the very first moment of transgression. But the others are to be understood as yāvatatiyakā, just as in "on the third and fourth day" here, it is said "third, fourth," so (here it means) they exist up to the third act of formal admonition. Yāvatīha means however many days. Jānaṃ paṭicchādetī means knowing, he conceals. There, this is the framework of the characteristic of concealment: there is an offense, and he perceives it as an offense; he is of normal status, and he perceives himself as being of normal status; he is without an intervening obstacle, and he perceives himself as being without an intervening obstacle; he is capable, and he perceives himself as capable; and he desires to conceal, and he conceals. There, āpatti ca hoti, āpattisaññī cā means the offense that he has incurred is one of the thirteen, and he himself, either in terms of the basis or in terms of merely the name, "This is not proper for bhikkhus," or having perceived it as "This is an offense of such and such a name," and desiring to conceal it, thinking, "Now I will not reveal it to anyone," he puts down the burden and causes the dawn to break, the offense is concealed. But if he perceives it as not an offense, or perceives it as another category of offense, or is doubtful, it is unconcealed. Pakatatto means not suspended, of shared residence. If he, perceiving himself as of normal status, conceals it in the manner stated, it is concealed. Anantarāyiko means one who does not have even one of the ten intervening obstacles of king, thief, fire, water, human, non-human, wild animal, snake, danger to life, and danger to the holy life; if he, perceiving himself as without an intervening obstacle, conceals it, it is concealed. Pahū means one who is able both to go to a bhikkhu and to reveal it; if he, perceiving himself as capable, conceals it, it is concealed. Chādetukāmo ca hoti, chādeti cā this is only obvious. For even if, seeing an equal, he does not reveal it out of shame, thinking, "This is my preceptor or teacher," it is concealed. For here the state of being a preceptor and so forth is immeasurable, only the equality is the measure. This is the concise determination of the meaning of the phrase "knowing, he conceals."

Tāvatīhanti tattakāni ahāni, paṭicchāditadivasato paṭṭhāya yāva ārocitadivaso, tāva divasapakkhamāsasaṃvaccharavasena yattako kālo atikkanto, tattakaṃ kālanti attho.Akāmā parivatthabbanti na kāmena na vasena, atha kho akāmena avasena parivāsaṃ samādāya vatthabbaṃ. Tattha paṭicchannaparivāso suddhantaparivāso samodhānaparivāso cāti tividho parivāso. Tatthapaṭicchannaparivāsotāva yathāpaṭicchannāya āpattiyā dātabbo. Kassaci hi ekāhappaṭicchannā āpatti hoti, kassaci dvīhādippaṭicchannā. Kassaci ekā āpatti hoti, kassaci dve vā tisso vā taduttari vā. Tasmā paṭicchannaparivāsaṃ dentena paṭhamameva vuttanayena paṭicchannabhāvaṃ ñatvā tato paṭicchannadivase ca āpattiyo ca sallakkhetvā sace ekā ekāhappaṭicchannā hoti, ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, ekaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjiṃ sañcetanikaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ ekāhappaṭicchanna’’nti evaṃ parivāsaṃ yācāpetvā khandhake (cūḷava. 98) āgatanayena kammavācaṃ vatvā parivāso dātabbo. Atha dvīhatīhādippaṭicchannā hoti, dvīhappaṭicchannaṃ tīhappaṭicchannaṃ catūhappaṭicchannaṃ pañcāhappaṭicchannaṃ…pe… cuddasāhappaṭicchannantievaṃ yāva cuddasadivasāni divasavasena yojanā kātabbā, pañcadasadivasappaṭicchannāyaṃ ‘‘pakkhappaṭicchanna’’nti yojanā kātabbā. Tato yāva ekūnatiṃsatimo divaso, tāva ‘‘atirekapakkhappaṭicchanna’’nti, tato māsappaṭicchannaṃ atirekamāsappaṭicchannaṃ dvemāsappaṭicchannaṃ atirekadvemāsappaṭicchannaṃ temāsappaṭicchannaṃ…pe… atirekaekādasamāsappaṭicchannanti evaṃ yojanā kātabbā. Saṃvacchare puṇṇe ‘‘ekasaṃvaccharappaṭicchanna’’nti, tato paraṃ atirekasaṃvaccharaṃ dvesaṃvaccharaṃ evaṃ yāva saṭṭhisaṃvaccharaatirekasaṭṭhisaṃvaccharappaṭicchannanti, tato vā bhiyyopi vatvā yojanā kātabbā.

Tāvatīha means so many days, from the day of concealment up to the day of revelation, however much time has passed, so much time in terms of days, fortnights, months, and years is the meaning. Akāmā parivatthabba means it should be dwelt without desire, without force, but rather dwelling having undertaken parivāsa without desire, without force. There, parivāsa is of three kinds: paṭicchannaparivāsa, suddhantaparivāsa, and samodhānaparivāsa. There, paṭicchannaparivāsa is to be given according to the offense that was concealed. For someone has an offense concealed for one day, someone has it concealed for two or more days. Someone has one offense, someone has two or three or more than that. Therefore, when giving paṭicchannaparivāsa, one should first know the state of being concealed in the manner stated, then having noted the days of concealment and the offenses, if there is one offense concealed for one day, having had him request parivāsa thus, "Venerable sir, I committed an intentional emission of semen, concealed for one day," the kammavācā should be spoken in the manner that has come in the Khandhaka (cūḷava. 98) and parivāsa should be given. But if it is concealed for two, three, or more days, it should be connected in terms of days as concealed for two days, concealed for three days, concealed for four days, concealed for five days... up to concealed for fourteen days. For an offense concealed for fifteen days, it should be connected as "concealed for a fortnight." Then up to the twenty-ninth day, it is "concealed for an extra fortnight," then concealed for a month, concealed for an extra month, concealed for two months, concealed for an extra two months, concealed for three months... up to concealed for an extra eleven months, it should be connected thus. When a year is full, it is "concealed for one year," then afterwards concealed for an extra year, concealed for two years, thus up to concealed for sixty years, concealed for an extra sixty years, and then it should be stated and connected even more than that.

nāmaṃduvidhaṃ sajātisādhāraṇaṃ sabbasādhāraṇañca, tattha saṅghādisesotisajātisādhāraṇaṃ,āpattītisabbasādhāraṇaṃ,tasmā ‘‘sambahulā āpattiyo āpajjiṃ ekāhappaṭicchannāyo’’ti evaṃ sabbasādhāraṇanāmavasenāpi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Idañhi parivāsādivinayakammaṃ vatthuvasena gottavasena nāmavasena āpattivasena ca kātuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Tattha sukkavissaṭṭhītivatthucevagottañca, saṅghādisesotināmañcevaāpattica, tattha ‘‘sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ kāyasaṃsagga’’ntiādivacanenāpi ‘‘nānāvatthukāyo’’tivacanenāpi vatthu ceva gottañca gahitaṃ hoti, ‘‘saṅghādiseso’’tivacanenāpi ‘‘āpattiyo’’tivacanenāpi nāmañceva āpatti ca gahitā hoti, tasmā etesu yassa kassaci vasena kammavācā kātabbā.

Name is twofold: sajātisādhāraṇa and sabbasādhāraṇa. Here, saṅghādisesa is sajātisādhāraṇa, and āpatti is sabbasādhāraṇa. Therefore, it is appropriate to say, "I have committed several offenses that were concealed for one day," using the name that is sabbasādhāraṇa. Indeed, this disciplinary action of parivāsa, etc., can be done based on the object (vatthu), lineage (gotta), name (nāma), and offense (āpatti). Here, emission of semen (sukkavissaṭṭhi) is both the object and the lineage. Saṅghādisesa is both the name and the offense. Therefore, by statements such as "emission of semen, bodily contact," and by statements such as "various objects," both the object and the lineage are taken. By statements such as "saṅghādisesa" and by statements such as "offenses," both the name and the offense are taken. Therefore, the formal announcement (kammavācā) should be done based on any of these.

Kammavācāpariyosāne ca sace appabhikkhuko āvāso hoti, sakkā ratticchedaṃ anāpajjantena vasituṃ, tattheva ‘‘parivāsaṃ samādiyāmi, vattaṃ samādiyāmī’’ti tikkhattuṃ vattaṃ samādātabbaṃ, samādiyitvā tattheva saṅghassa ārocetvā puna āgatāgatānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ārocentena vattabhedañca ratticchedañca akatvā parivasitabbaṃ. Sace na sakkā hoti parivāsaṃ sodhetuṃ, nikkhittavattena vasitukāmo hoti, tattheva saṅghamajjhe, ekapuggalassa vā santike ‘‘parivāsaṃ nikkhipāmi, vattaṃ nikkhipāmī’’ti parivāso nikkhipitabbo, ekapadenāpi cettha nikkhitto hoti parivāso, dvīhi pana sunikkhittoyeva, samādānepi eseva nayo. Nikkhittakālato paṭṭhāya pakatattaṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati, athānena paccūsasamaye ekena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ parikkhittassa vihārassa parikkhepato, aparikkhittassa parikkhepārahaṭṭhānato dve leḍḍupāte atikkamitvā mahāmaggato okkamma gumbena vā vatiyā vā paṭicchannaṭṭhāne nisīditvā antoaruṇeyeva vattaṃ samādiyitvā ārocetabbaṃ. Yampi aññaṃ bhikkhuṃ passati, tassāpi ārocetabbameva. Aruṇe uṭṭhite tassa santike vattaṃ nikkhipitvā vihāraṃ gantabbaṃ. Sace so pure aruṇeyeva kenaci karaṇīyena gato, vihāraṃ gantvā yaṃ sabbapaṭhamaṃ bhikkhuṃ passati, tassa ārocetvā nikkhipitabbaṃ. Evaṃ sallakkhetvā yāva rattiyo pūrenti, tāva parivatthabbaṃ, ayaṃ saṅkhepato paṭicchannaparivāsavinicchayo, vitthāro pana samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 97) vuttanayeneva veditabbo.

And at the conclusion of the formal announcement, if the dwelling is one with few monks, it is possible to live there without incurring a break in the nights. There, one should undertake the observance (vatta) three times, saying, "I undertake parivāsa; I undertake the observance." Having undertaken it, one should inform the saṅgha there and, again, inform the monks who arrive, observing parivāsa without violating the observances and without breaking the nights. If it is not possible to purify the parivāsa, and one wishes to live having relinquished the observance, there in the midst of the saṅgha, or in the presence of a single individual, one should relinquish the parivāsa, saying, "I relinquish parivāsa; I relinquish the observance." Here, the parivāsa is relinquished even with one statement, but with two, it is certainly well-relinquished. The same method applies to undertaking it. From the time of relinquishment, one stands in the position of normalcy (pakatattaṭṭhāne). Then, at dawn, together with one monk, having crossed two leḍḍupāta (stone’s throw) from the boundary of the monastery that has a boundary, or from the place suitable for a boundary if it does not have one, having descended from the main road, one should sit in a place covered by bushes or a fence. At the very break of dawn (antoaruṇe), one should undertake the observance and announce it. And if one sees another monk, one should announce it to him as well. When dawn has broken, one should relinquish the observance near him and go to the monastery. If he has gone due to some business even before dawn, one should go to the monastery and, having seen the first monk, announce it and relinquish it. Having considered this, one should live, until the nights are completed. This is a summary of the determination of concealed parivāsa. The detailed explanation, however, should be understood according to the method stated in the Samantapāsādikā Vinayasaṃvaṇṇanā (Cūḷava. aṭṭha. 97).

suddhantaparivāsonāma, so duvidhocūḷasuddhanto mahāsuddhantoti, duvidhopi cesa rattiparicchedaṃ sakalaṃ vā ekaccaṃ vā ajānantassa ca assarantassa ca tattha vematikassa ca dātabbo. Āpattipariyantaṃ pana ‘‘ettikā ahaṃ āpattiyo āpanno’’ti jānātu vā, mā vā, akāraṇametaṃ. Tassa dānavidhi khandhake āgato, vinicchayakathā pana vitthārato samantapāsādikāyaṃ (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 102) vuttā. Itaro panasamodhānaparivāsonāma, so tividho hoti odhānasamodhāno agghasamodhāno missakasamodhānoti. Tatthaodhānasamodhānonāma antarāpattiṃ āpajjitvā paṭicchādentassa parivutthadivase odhunitvā makkhetvā purimāya āpattiyā mūladivasaparicchede pacchā āpannaṃ āpattiṃ samodahitvā dātabbaparivāso vuccati.Agghasamodhānonāma sambahulāsu āpattīsu yā ekā vā dve vā tisso vā sambahulā vā āpattiyo sabbacirappaṭicchannāyo, tāsaṃ agghena samodhāya tāsaṃ rattiparicchedavasena avasesānaṃ ūnatarappaṭicchannānaṃ āpattīnaṃ dātabbaparivāso vuccati.Missakasamodhānonāma nānāvatthukāyo āpattiyo ekato katvā dātabbaparivāso vuccati, ayaṃ tividhepi samodhānaparivāse saṅkhepakathā, vitthāro pana samantapāsādikāyaṃ (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 102) vutto, idaṃ ‘‘parivatthabba’’nti padassa vinicchayakathāmukhaṃ.

Suddhanta-parivāsa is twofold: cūḷasuddhanta and mahāsuddhanta. Both of these should be given to one who does not know the entire or partial count of nights, who does not remember, and who is doubtful about it. Regarding the limit of the offenses, whether he knows "I have committed so many offenses" or not, this is not a reason. The method of giving it has come in the Khandhaka, but the discussion of determination is stated in detail in the Samantapāsādikā (Cūḷava. aṭṭha. 102). The other, samodhāna-parivāsa, is threefold: odhānasamodhāna, agghasamodhāna, and missakasamodhāna. Here, odhānasamodhāna is said to be the parivāsa that is to be given by deducting (odhunitvā) and adding (makkhetvā) the days lived in concealment when an offense is committed in between, combining the offense committed later with the count of the original offense. Agghasamodhāna is said to be the parivāsa that is to be given for the remaining less-concealed offenses, combining them with the value (aggha) of those offenses that were very long concealed, one, two, three, or many of them, based on the count of nights. Missakasamodhāna is said to be the parivāsa that is to be given by combining offenses of various objects into one. This is a summary discussion on these three types of samodhāna-parivāsa. The detailed explanation, however, is stated in the Samantapāsādikā (Cūḷava. aṭṭha. 102). This is the introductory discussion on the determination of the word "should live on parivāsa."

Uttari chārattanti parivāsato uttari cha rattiyo.Bhikkhumānattāyāti bhikkhūnaṃ mānabhāvāya, ārādhanatthāyāti vuttaṃ hoti.Paṭipajjitabbanti vattitabbaṃ. Bhikkhumānattañca panetaṃ paṭicchannāpaṭicchannavasena duvidhaṃ. Tattha yassa appaṭicchannāpatti hoti, tassa parivāsaṃ adatvā mānattameva dātabbaṃ, idaṃappaṭicchannamānattaṃ. Yassa paṭicchannā hoti, tassa parivāsapariyosāne dātabbaṃ mānattaṃpaṭicchannamānattanti vuccati, idaṃ idha adhippetaṃ. Ubhinnampi panetesaṃ dānavidhi vinicchayakathā ca samantapāsādikāyaṃ (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 102) vuttanayena veditabbā, ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepo. Sace ayaṃ vattaṃ nikkhipitvā paccūsasamaye samādātuṃ gacchati, sabbantimena paricchedena catūhi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ parivāse vuttappakāraṃ padesaṃ gantvā ‘‘mānattaṃ samādiyāmi, vattaṃ samādiyāmī’’ti samādiyitvā nesaṃ ārocetvā tato tesu gatesu vā agatesu vā purimanayena paṭipajjitabbaṃ.Yattha siyā vīsatigaṇoti ettha vīsatisaṅgho gaṇo assāti vīsatigaṇo.Tatrāti yatra sabbantimena paricchedena vīsatigaṇo bhikkhusaṅgho atthi, tattha.Abbhetabboti abhietabbo, sampaṭicchitabbo, abbhānakammavasena osāretabboti vuttaṃ hoti. Avhātabboti vā attho. Abbhānakammaṃ pana pāḷivasena khandhake (cūḷava. 100 ādayo) vinicchayavasena samantapāsādikāyaṃ vuttaṃ.Anabbhitoti na abbhito asampaṭicchito, akatabbhānakammoti vuttaṃ hoti. Anavhātoti vā attho.Te ca bhikkhū gārayhāti ye ūnabhāvaṃ ñatvā abbhenti, te bhikkhū ca garahitabbā, sātisārā sadosā dukkaṭaṃ āpajjantīti attho.Ayaṃ tattha sāmīcīti ayaṃ tattha anudhammatā lokuttaradhammaṃ anugatā ovādānusāsanī sāmīci dhammatā. Sesamettha vuttanayamevāti.

Uttari cha rattaṃ means six nights beyond parivāsa. Bhikkhumānattāyā means for the humility of the monks, it is said to be for the purpose of pleasing. Paṭipajjitabbaṃ means should conduct oneself. And this bhikkhumānatta is twofold, depending on whether it is concealed or not. Here, for one who has an unconcealed offense, mānatta itself should be given without giving parivāsa. This is appaṭicchanna-mānatta. For one who has a concealed offense, the mānatta to be given at the end of parivāsa is called paṭicchanna-mānatta. This is what is intended here. However, the method of giving and the discussion of determination for both of these should be understood according to the method stated in the Samantapāsādikā (Cūḷava. aṭṭha. 102). This is a summary here. If he, having relinquished the observance, goes at dawn to undertake it, having gone with four monks to the place described in parivāsa with the very last boundary, he should undertake it, saying, "I undertake mānatta; I undertake the observance," and having announced it to them, after they have left or not left, he should conduct himself in the previous manner. Yattha siyā vīsatigaṇo here, vīsatigaṇo means a group (gaṇo) is a saṅgha of twenty. Tatrā means where there is a group of twenty monks at the very last boundary. Abbhetabbo means should be invited, should be accepted, it is said to be absolved by the act of absolution (abbhānakamma). Or the meaning is should be called. The act of absolution, however, is stated in the Khandhaka in terms of the Pali (Cūḷava. 100 ff.) and in the Samantapāsādikā in terms of determination. Anabbhito means not invited, not accepted, it is said to be not having done the act of absolution. Or the meaning is not called. Te ca bhikkhū gārayhā means those monks who absolve knowing the deficiency should be reproached, are blameworthy, are faulty, and incur a dukkaṭa. Ayaṃ tattha sāmīcī means this there is propriety, conduct in accordance with the Dhamma, following the supramundane Dhamma, instruction and teaching is propriety, is the nature of Dhamma. The remainder here is just as stated before.

Kaṅkhāvitaraṇiyā pātimokkhavaṇṇanāya

End of the Saṅghādisesa Section in the Kaṅkhāvitaraṇī Pātimokkha Commentary

Saṅghādisesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Saṅghādisesa Commentary is Finished.

Aniyatakaṇḍo

The Aniyata Section

1. Paṭhamāniyatasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Commentary on the First Aniyata Training Rule

ime kho panātiādi vuttanayameva.Mātugāmenāti tadahujātāyapi jīvamānakamanussitthiyā.Eko ekāyāti eko bhikkhu mātugāmasaṅkhātāya ekāya itthiyā saddhiṃ.Rahoti cakkhussa raho. Kiñcāpi pāḷiyaṃ (pārā. 445) sotassa raho āgato, cakkhusseva pana raho ‘‘raho’’ti idha adhippeto. Sacepi hi pihitakavāṭassa gabbhassa dvāre nisinno viññū puriso hoti, neva anāpattiṃ karoti. Yattha pana sakkā daṭṭhuṃ, tādise antodvādasahatthepi okāse nisinno sacakkhuko vikkhittacittopi niddāyantopi anāpattiṃ karoti, samīpe ṭhitopi andho na karoti, cakkhumāpi nipajjitvā niddāyantopi na karoti, itthīnaṃ pana satampi na karotiyeva, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘rahoti cakkhussa raho’’ti.Paṭicchanne āsaneti kuṭṭādīhi paṭicchannokāse.Alaṃkammaniyeti kammakkhamaṃ kammayogganti kammaniyaṃ, alaṃ pariyattaṃ kammaniyabhāvāyāti alaṃkammaniyaṃ, tasmiṃ alaṃkammaniye. Yattha ajjhācāraṃ karontā sakkonti taṃ kammaṃ kātuṃ, tādiseti attho.Nisajjaṃ kappeyyāti nisajjaṃ kareyya, nisīdeyyāti attho. Ettha ca sayanampi nisajjāya eva saṅgahitaṃ.Saddheyyavacasāti saddhātabbavacanā, ariyasāvikāti attho.Nisajjaṃ bhikkhu paṭijānamānoti kiñcāpi evarūpā upāsikā disvā vadati, atha kho bhikkhu nisajjaṃ paṭijānamānova tiṇṇaṃ dhammānaṃ aññatarena kāretabbo, na appaṭijānamānoti attho.Yena vā sāti nisajjādīsu ākāresu yena vā ākārena saddhiṃ methunādīni āropetvā sā upāsikā vadeyya, paṭijānamānova tena so bhikkhu kāretabbo, evarūpāyapi hi upāsikāya vacanamattena ākārena na kāretabboti attho. Kasmā? Yasmā diṭṭhaṃ nāma tathāpi hoti, aññathāpīti.Ayaṃ dhammo aniyatoti tiṇṇaṃ āpattīnaṃ yaṃ āpattiṃ vā vatthuṃ vā paṭijānāti, tassa vasena kāretabbatāya aniyato.

Ime kho panā and so on, is just as said before. Mātugāmena means even with a woman born on that day, a living human female. Eko ekāyā means one monk with one woman designated as a female. Raho means secluded in terms of sight. Although seclusion in terms of hearing is mentioned in the Pali (Pārā. 445), seclusion only in terms of sight is intended here by "raho." Indeed, even if there is a knowledgeable person sitting at the door of a closed room, it does not incur an offense. But sitting in a place where it is possible to see, such as a space within twelve cubits, even with scattered mind or drowsing, it does not incur an offense for one with sight. Even standing nearby, a blind person does not incur an offense. Even one with sight, lying down and drowsing, does not incur an offense. Even a hundred women do not incur an offense. Therefore, it is said, "raho means secluded in terms of sight." Paṭicchanne āsane means in a covered space, covered by walls and so on. Alaṃkammaniye means capable of the act (kamma), suitable for the act is kammaniya, sufficient, adequate for the state of being suitable for the act is alaṃkammaniya, in that alaṃkammaniya. Where those committing misconduct are able to do that act, it means such. Nisajjaṃ kappeyyā means should make a sitting, should sit. And here, lying down is also included in sitting. Saddheyyavacasā means of credible speech, means a noble female disciple. Nisajjaṃ bhikkhu paṭijānamāno means although such a female lay follower sees and speaks, nevertheless, the monk should be made to confess the sitting with one of the three things, not without confessing, is the meaning. Yena vā sā means, in forms such as sitting, whatever the manner, having imputed sexual intercourse, etc., with whatever manner that female lay follower speaks, that monk should be made to confess with that, for even by the mere statement of such a female lay follower, he should not be made to confess with the manner, is the meaning. Why? Because what is seen can be so, but can also be otherwise. Ayaṃ dhammo aniyato means this rule is undetermined (aniyata) because he should be made to confess based on whichever offense or object he confesses.

Sāvatthiyaṃ udāyittheraṃ ārabbha mātugāmena saddhiṃ vuttappakāre āsane nisajjakappanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, asādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, methunadhammasannissitakilesasaṅkhātena rahassādena mātugāmassa santikaṃ gantukāmatāya akkhiañjanādito paṭṭhāya sabbapayogesu dukkaṭaṃ. Gantvā tasmiṃ vā nisinne itthī nisīdatu, tassā vā nisinnāya so nisīdatu, apacchā apurimaṃyeva ubho vā nisīdantu, ubhinnaṃ nisajjāya pācittiyaṃ. Sace pana kāyasaṃsaggaṃ vā methunaṃ vā samāpajjati, tesaṃ vasena kāretabbo. Nipajjanepi eseva nayo. Vuttappakāre purise nipajjitvā aniddāyante anandhe viññupurise upacāragate sati, ṭhitassa, arahopekkhassa, aññavihitassa ca nisajjanapaccayā anāpatti. Ummattakādīnaṃ pana tīhipi āpattīhi anāpatti. Siyā sīlavipatti, siyā ācāravipatti. Yaṃ pana āpattiṃ paṭijānāti, tassā vasena aṅgabhedo ñātabbo. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamapārājikasadisānevāti.

It was established in Sāvatthī, concerning the elder Udāyi, regarding the matter of making a sitting in a described seat with a woman. It is an unshared enactment, not by command, dukkaṭa in all efforts from applying eye-salve onwards, due to the desire to go to a woman with the secret pleasure that is associated with defilements connected with the act of sexual intercourse. Having gone and while he is sitting there, whether the woman sits, or while she is sitting, he sits, whether both sit simultaneously or not, there is a pācittiya for the sitting of both. But if he engages in bodily contact or sexual intercourse, he should be made to confess based on those. The same method applies to lying down. In a described man lying down, without sleeping, without being blind, with a knowledgeable person in proximity, for one who is standing, for one who is indifferent, for one who is engaged in something else, there is no offense due to the cause of sitting. However, there is no offense for the insane, etc., with all three offenses. There might be a loss of virtue, there might be a loss of conduct. However, the distinction of factors should be known based on whichever offense one confesses. The originations and so on, are similar to the first pārājika.

Paṭhamāniyatasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

End of the First Aniyata Training Rule Commentary.

2. Dutiyāniyatasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Commentary on the Second Aniyata Training Rule

Dutiye itthīpi purisopi yo koci viññū anandho abadhiro antodvādasahatthe okāse ṭhito vā nisinno vā vikkhittopi niddāyantopi anāpattiṃ karoti. Badhiro pana cakkhumāpi, andho vā abadhiropi na karoti. Pārājikāpattiñca parihāpetvā duṭṭhullavācāpatti vuttāti ayaṃ viseso. Sesaṃ purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Samuṭṭhānādīni panettha adinnādānasadisānevāti.

In the second, whether it is a woman or a man, anyone who is knowledgeable, not blind, not deaf, standing or sitting within twelve cubits, even scattered or drowsing, does not incur an offense. However, a deaf person, even with sight, or one who is both blind and deaf, does not incur an offense. The difference is that the offense of harsh speech is stated, excluding the offense of pārājika. The remainder should be understood in the same manner as before. The originations and so on here, are similar to theft.

Dutiyāniyatasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

End of the Second Aniyata Training Rule Commentary.

Uddiṭṭhā khotiādi sabbattha vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.

Uddiṭṭhā kho and so on, should be understood just as said everywhere.

Kaṅkhāvitaraṇiyā pātimokkhavaṇṇanāya

End of the Aniyata Commentary in the Kaṅkhāvitaraṇī Pātimokkha Commentary.

Aniyatavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Nissaggiya Section

Nissaggiyakaṇḍo

Ime kho panā and so on, should be understood just as said everywhere.

ime kho panātiādi sabbattha vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.

1. The Chapter on Robes

1. Cīvaravaggo

1. Commentary on the Kathina Training Rule
1. Kathinasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

niṭṭhitacīvarasminti sūcikammapariyosānena vā, ‘‘naṭṭhaṃ vā vinaṭṭhaṃ vā daḍḍhaṃ vā cīvarāsā vā upacchinnā’’ti (pārā. 463) imesu vā yena kenaci ākārena niṭṭhite cīvarasmiṃ, cīvarassa karaṇapalibodhe upacchinneti attho. Atthatakathinassa hi bhikkhuno yāva imehākārehi cīvarapalibodho na chijjati, tāva kathinānisaṃsaṃ labhati.Ubbhatasmiṃ kathineti yaṃ saṅghassa kathinaṃ atthataṃ, tasmiñca ubbhate. Tatrevaṃ saṅkhepato kathinatthāro ca ubbhāro ca veditabbo. Ayañhi kathinatthāro nāma bhagavatā purimavassaṃvuṭṭhānaṃ anuññāto, so sabbantimena paricchedena pañcannaṃ janānaṃ vaṭṭati, tasmā yattha cattāro vā tayo vā dve vā eko vā purimavassaṃ upagato, tattha pacchimavassūpagate gaṇapūrake katvā attharitabbaṃ, te ca gaṇapūrakāva honti, ānisaṃse na labhanti, tasmā sace purimavassaṃvuṭṭhānaṃ gahaṭṭhapabbajitesu yo koci dhammena samena cīvaraṃ deti ‘‘iminā kathinaṃ attharathā’’ti (mahāva. 306-309), taṃ khandhake vuttāya ñattidutiyakammavācāya kathinatthārārahassa bhikkhuno dātabbaṃ. Tena tadaheva pañca vā atirekāni vā khaṇḍāni chinditvā saṅghāṭi vā uttarāsaṅgo vā antaravāsako vā kātabbo, sesabhikkhūhipi tassa sahāyehi bhavitabbaṃ, sace katacīvarameva uppajjati, sundarameva. Acchinnāsibbitaṃ pana na vaṭṭati. Tena bhikkhunā sace saṅghāṭiyā attharitukāmo hoti, porāṇikaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ paccuddharitvā navaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā ‘‘imāya saṅghāṭiyā kathinaṃ attharāmī’’ti attharitabbaṃ. Uttarāsaṅgaantaravāsakesupi eseva nayo. Tato tena purimavassaṃvuṭṭhe antosīmāgate bhikkhū upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘atthataṃ, bhante, saṅghassa kathinaṃ, dhammiko kathinatthāro, anumodathā’’ti (pari. 413) vattabbaṃ, therānañca navānañca bahūnañca ekassa ca anurūpaṃ sallakkhetvā vattabbaṃ. Tehipi ‘‘atthataṃ, bhante, saṅghassa kathina’’nti vā ‘‘atthataṃ, āvuso, saṅghassa kathina’’nti vā vatvā ‘‘dhammiko kathinatthāro, anumodāmā’’ti vā ‘‘anumodāmī’’ti vā vattabbaṃ. Purimavassaṃvuṭṭhesupi ye anumodanti, tesaṃyeva atthataṃ hoti kathinaṃ. Te tato paṭṭhāya yāva kathinassubbhārā anāmantacāro, asamādānacāro, yāvadatthacīvaraṃ, gaṇabhojanaṃ, yo ca tattha cīvaruppādo, tasmiṃ āvāse saṅghassa uppannacīvarañcāti ime pañcānisaṃse labhanti, ayaṃ tāva kathinatthāro. Taṃ panetaṃ kathinaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhimā, bhikkhave, mātikā kathinassubbhārāya pakkamanantikā niṭṭhānantikā sanniṭṭhānantikā nāsanantikā savanantikā āsāvacchedikā sīmātikkamanantikā sahubbhārā’’ti (mahāva. 310) evaṃ vuttāsu aṭṭhasu mātikāsu aññataravasena uddharīyati, tattha vitthāravinicchayo samantapāsādikāyaṃ (mahāva. aṭṭha. 310) vuttanayena veditabbo. Iti ‘‘ubbhatasmiṃ kathine’’tiiminā sesapalibodhābhāvaṃ dasseti.

Niṭṭhitacīvarasminti: "In the finished robe" means either by the completion of the sewing or by the robe being finished in any way through these [circumstances]: "lost, destroyed, burned, or the hope for a robe is cut off" (pārā. 463). That is, the preoccupation with making the robe is interrupted. For a monk who has undertaken the kathina, as long as the preoccupation with the robe is not severed by these means, he receives the benefits of the kathina. Ubbhatasmiṃ kathine: "When the kathina is withdrawn" refers to when the kathina that was spread by the Sangha has been withdrawn. Here, the spreading and withdrawing of the kathina should be understood in brief in this way: This spreading of the kathina was allowed by the Blessed One after the completion of the rains residence, and it applies, in its final extent, to five people. Therefore, where four, three, two, or one have completed the earlier rains residence, then one who has undertaken the later rains residence should be made to complete the quorum and it should be spread. And these are only to complete the quorum, they do not receive the benefits. Therefore, if one who has completed the earlier rains residence, whether a householder or a renunciate, gives a robe righteously and fairly, saying, "Spread the kathina with this" (mahāva. 306-309), it should be given to a monk who is suitable for spreading the kathina, with a motion and a second motion as described in the Khandhaka. Then, on that very day, having cut five or more pieces, either the sanghati, the uttarasanga, or the antaravasa should be made. The remaining monks should also be his helpers. If a robe that is already made arises, it is excellent. However, one that is uncut and unsewn is not allowable. If that monk wishes to spread [the kathina] with the sanghati, having disestablished the old sanghati and established a new sanghati, he should spread [it], [thinking,] "With this sanghati, I will spread the kathina." The same method applies to the uttarasanga and the antaravasa. Then that monk who has completed the earlier rains residence should approach the monks within the boundary and say, "The kathina has been spread by the Sangha, reverends. The spreading of the kathina is according to the Dhamma. Approve of it" (pari. 413). He should consider what is suitable and say [this] to the elders, the new ones, the many, and the one. These should say, "The kathina has been spread by the Sangha, reverends," or "The kathina has been spread by the Sangha, friend," and, "The spreading of the kathina is according to the Dhamma. We approve," or "I approve." Among those who have completed the earlier rains residence, the kathina is considered spread only for those who approve. From then on, until the withdrawal of the kathina, they receive these five benefits: wandering without announcement, wandering without taking along, as many robes as one wants, group meals, and whatever robe-offering arises there, and also whatever robe arises for the Sangha in that monastery. This, in brief, is the spreading of the kathina. But that kathina is withdrawn in dependence on any one of the eight grounds stated thus: "These eight grounds exist, monks, for the withdrawal of the kathina: departing, conclusion of the period, completion, finalization, destruction, hearing of the news, cutting off hope, and transgressing the boundary, it is withdrawn" (mahāva. 310). There, the detailed decision should be understood according to the method stated in the Samantapasadika (mahāva. aṭṭha. 310). Thus, "ubbhatasmiṃ kathine" indicates the absence of remaining preoccupations.

Dasāhaparamanti dasa ahāni paramo paricchedo assātidasāhaparamo,taṃ dasāhaparamaṃ kālaṃ dhāretabbanti attho. Adhiṭṭhitavikappitesu apariyāpannattā atirekaṃ cīvarantiatirekacīvaraṃ,cīvaraṃ nāma khomaṃ kappāsikaṃ koseyyaṃ kambalaṃ sāṇaṃ bhaṅganti etesaṃ vā tadanulomānaṃ vā aññataraṃ ayamassa jāti, pamāṇato pana taṃ vikappanupagaṃ pacchimaṃ idha adhippetaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, āyāmato aṭṭhaṅgulaṃ sugataṅgulena caturaṅgulavitthataṃ pacchimaṃ cīvaraṃ vikappetu’’nti (mahāva. 358). Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘adhiṭṭhitavikappitesu apariyāpannattā’’ti, ettha ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ticīvaraṃ adhiṭṭhātuṃ na vikappetuṃ, vassikasāṭikaṃ vassānaṃ catumāsaṃ adhiṭṭhātuṃ tato paraṃ vikappetuṃ, nisīdanaṃ adhiṭṭhātuṃ na vikappetuṃ paccattharaṇaṃ adhiṭṭhātuṃ na vikappetuṃ, kaṇḍuppaṭicchādiṃ yāva ābādhā adhiṭṭhātuṃ tato paraṃ vikappetuṃ, mukhapuñchanacoḷakaṃ adhiṭṭhātuṃ na vikappetuṃ, parikkhāracoḷaṃ adhiṭṭhātuṃ na vikappetu’’nti (mahāva. 358) iminā nayena adhiṭṭhātabbavikappetabbatā jānitabbā. Tatthaticīvaraṃadhiṭṭhahantena rajitvā kappabinduṃ datvā pamāṇayuttameva adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ, tassa pamāṇaṃ ukkaṭṭhaparicchedena sugatacīvarato ūnakaṃ vaṭṭati, lāmakaparicchedena saṅghāṭiyā tāva uttarāsaṅgassa ca dīghato muṭṭhipañcakaṃ, tiriyaṃ muṭṭhittikaṃ, antaravāsako dīghato muṭṭhipañcako, tiriyaṃ dvihatthopi vaṭṭati. Vuttappamāṇato pana atirekañca ūnakañca ‘‘parikkhāracoḷa’’nti adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Tattha yasmā ‘‘dve cīvarassa adhiṭṭhānāni kāyena vā adhiṭṭheti, vācāya vā adhiṭṭhetī’’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā purāṇasaṅghāṭiṃ ‘‘imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ paccuddharāmī’’ti paccuddharitvā navaṃ hatthena gahetvā ‘‘imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti cittena ābhogaṃ katvā kāyavikāraṃ karontena kāyena vā adhiṭṭhātabbā, vacībhedaṃ katvā vācāya vā adhiṭṭhātabbā. Tatra duvidhaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ – sace hatthapāse hoti, ‘‘imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti vācā bhinditabbā. Atha antogabbhādīsu sāmantavihāre vā hoti, ṭhapitaṭṭhānaṃ sallakkhetvā ‘‘etaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti vācā bhinditabbā. Esa nayo uttarāsaṅge ca antaravāsake ca. Nāmamattameva hi viseso. Tasmā sabbāni saṅghāṭiṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ antaravāsakanti evaṃ attano attano nāmeneva adhiṭṭhātabbāni. Sace adhiṭṭhahitvā ṭhapitavatthehi saṅghāṭiādīni karoti, niṭṭhite rajane ca kappe ca ‘‘imaṃ paccuddharāmī’’ti paccuddharitvā puna adhiṭṭhātabbāni. Idañca pana ticīvaraṃ sukhaparibhogatthaṃ parikkhāracoḷaṃ adhiṭṭhātumpi vaṭṭati.

Dasāhaparamaṃ: Dasāhaparamo means that ten days is its ultimate limit; that is, it should be kept for a time of up to ten days. Atirekacīvaraṃ: "Extra robe" means a robe that is additional, since it is not subject to being established or disowned. Here, the subsequent robe that is subject to disowning is intended. For it was said, "I allow, monks, an extra robe that is eight fingerbreadths long and four fingerbreadths wide by the Sugata's finger to be disowned" (mahāva. 358). But as for what was said, "since it is not subject to being established or disowned," here, how things can and cannot be established and disowned should be known by this method: "I allow, monks, the three robes to be established but not disowned; the rains-bathing cloth to be established for four months of the rains and to be disowned after that; the sitting cloth to be established but not disowned; the covering cloth to be established but not disowned; the bandage-cloth to be established until sickness [arises] and to be disowned after that; the face-wiping cloth to be established but not disowned; the belongings-cloth to be established but not disowned" (mahāva. 358). There, when ticīvaraṃ, the three robes, are established, having dyed [them], made the marking spot, and [ensured they are] of a suitable size, they should be established. Its size, in its most excellent limit, is allowable as less than the Sugata's robe; in its meanest limit, the sanghati and the uttarasanga are five fists long and three fists wide, while the antaravasa is five fists long and even two cubits wide. But what is more or less than the stated size should be established as a "parikkhāracoḷa," belongings-cloth. Since it was said that "there are two establishments of a robe: one establishes it by the body or by speech," therefore, having disestablished the old sanghati, [thinking,] "I disestablish this sanghati," and having taken the new one in his hand, he should establish it either by body, by making a mental application and making a physical gesture, or he should establish it by speech, by making a verbal utterance. There, the establishment is twofold: if it is within arm's reach, the words "I establish this sanghati" should be uttered. But if it is in an inner chamber or in a nearby monastery, having noted the place where it is kept, the words "I establish this sanghati" should be uttered. This is the method for the uttarasanga and the antaravasa. Only the name is different. Therefore, all of them—the sanghati, uttarasanga, and antaravasa—should be established with their own names. If, having established [the cloth], he makes the sanghati and so on from cloths that have been kept [aside], when the dyeing and the marking spot are complete, having disestablished [it, thinking,] "I disestablish this," it should be established again. Moreover, these three robes can also be established as a belongings-cloth for the purpose of comfortable use.

Vassikasāṭikāanatirittapamāṇā nāmaṃ gahetvā vuttanayeneva cattāro vassike māse adhiṭṭhātabbā, tato paraṃ paccuddharitvā vikappetabbā, vaṇṇabhedamattarattāpi cesā vaṭṭati, dve pana na vaṭṭanti.Nisīdanaṃvuttanayena adhiṭṭhātabbameva, tañca kho pamāṇayuttaṃ ekameva, dve na vaṭṭanti.Paccattharaṇampiadhiṭṭhātabbameva, taṃ pana mahantampi ekampi bahūnipi vaṭṭanti, nīlampi pītakampi sadasampi pupphadasampīti sabbappakārampi vaṭṭati.Kaṇḍuppaṭicchādiyāva ābādho atthi, tāva pamāṇikā adhiṭṭhātabbā, ābādhe vūpasante paccuddharitvā vikappetabbā, sā ekāva vaṭṭati.Mukhapuñchanacoḷaṃadhiṭṭhātabbameva, taṃ pana ekampi bahūnipi mahantampi vaṭṭatiyeva.Parikkhāracoḷegaṇanā natthi, yattakaṃ icchati, tattakaṃ adhiṭṭhātabbameva.Thavikāpi parissāvanampivikappanupagaṃ pacchimapamāṇaṃ ‘‘parikkhāracoḷa’’nti adhiṭṭhātabbameva, bahūnipi ekato katvā ‘‘imāni cīvarāni parikkhāracoḷāni adhiṭṭhāmī’’tiādinā nayena adhiṭṭhātuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Mañcabhisi pīṭhabhisi bibbohanaṃ pāvāro kojavoti etesu pana senāsanaparikkhāratthāya dinnapaccattharaṇe ca adhiṭṭhānakiccaṃ natthiyeva. Sabbañca panetaṃ vuttappakārena adhiṭṭhitacīvaraṃ aññassa dānena, acchinditvā gahaṇena, vissāsaggāhena, hīnāyāvattanena, sikkhāpaccakkhānena, kālaṅkiriyāya, liṅgaparivattanena, paccuddharaṇenāti imehi aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi adhiṭṭhānaṃ vijahati. Ticīvaraṃ pana kaniṭṭhaṅgulinakhapiṭṭhippamāṇena chiddenāpi vijahati, tañca kho vinibbedheneva. Sace hi chiddassa abbhantare ekatantupi acchinno hoti, rakkhatiyeva. Tattha saṅghāṭiyā ca uttarāsaṅgassa ca dīghantato vidatthippamāṇassa tiriyantato aṭṭhaṅgulappamāṇassa padesassa orato chiddaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ bhindati, antaravāsakepi dīghantato etadeva pamāṇaṃ, tiriyantena pana caturaṅgulatā veditabbā. Tiṇṇannampi vuttokāsassa parato na bhindati, tasmā chidde jāte ticīvaraṃ atirekacīvaraṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati, sūcikammaṃ katvā puna adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Vassikasāṭikā vassānamāsātikkamenāpi, kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi ābādhavūpasamenāpi adhiṭṭhānaṃ vijahati. Tasmā sā tato paraṃ vikappetabbā. Vikappanalakkhaṇaṃ pana sabbacīvarānaṃ vikappanasikkhāpadeyeva vaṇṇayissāma. Kevalañhi imasmiṃ okāse yaṃ evaṃ anadhiṭṭhitaṃ avikappitañca, taṃ ‘‘atirekacīvara’’nti veditabbaṃ.

Vassikasāṭikā, the rains-bathing cloth, of not-too-large size, should be established for the four months of the rains in the manner stated, having taken its name. After that, it should be disestablished and disowned. Even if it is only slightly different in color, it is allowable, but two are not allowable. Nisīdanaṃ, the sitting cloth, should be established in the manner stated, and it should be of a suitable size and only one; two are not allowable. Paccattharaṇampi, the covering cloth, should also be established; it can be large or small, one or many; it can be blue, yellow, or of any color, even with flower designs; all kinds are allowable. Kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi, the bandage-cloth, should be established as long as the sickness exists, being of a suitable size. When the sickness has subsided, it should be disestablished and disowned; only one is allowable. Mukhapuñchanacoḷaṃ, the face-wiping cloth, should certainly be established; one, many, or even a large one are allowable. There is no limit in parikkhāracoḷe, belongings-cloth; as much as one wants can be established. Even a bag and a strainer, of the subsequent size that is not subject to disowning, should be established as a "parikkhāracoḷa." Even having made many into one, it is certainly allowable to establish them in the manner, "I establish these cloths as belongings-cloths," and so on. But in the case of a mattress cover, a seat cover, a pillow, a blanket, and a rug, and in the case of a covering cloth given for the purpose of bedding, there is no need for establishment. But all these robes that have been established in the manner stated lose their establishment through these eight reasons: giving them to another, taking them away without cutting [the bond], taking them through intimacy, reverting to a lower state, renouncing the training, death, change of gender, and disestablishment. But the three robes also lose their establishment through a hole the size of the back of the little fingernail, and that [happens] only through deliberate intent. For if even a single thread within the hole is uncut, it still protects [the establishment]. There, a hole within a space of a handspan from the length and eight fingerbreadths from the width of the hem of the sanghati and the uttarasanga breaks the establishment; for the antaravasa, the same measure applies to the length, but it should be known that the width is four fingerbreadths. It does not break [the establishment] beyond the stated space for all three. Therefore, when a hole arises, the three robes remain in the state of extra robes; having done sewing work, they should be established again. The rains-bathing cloth loses its establishment also through the passing of the months of the rains, and the bandage-cloth through the subsiding of the sickness. Therefore, after that it should be disowned. The characteristic of disowning, however, we will describe in the training rule for disowning all robes. Only in this context should it be known that whatever is unestablished and undisowned is an "extra robe."

Taṃ atikkāmayato nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyanti taṃ yathāvuttajātippamāṇaṃ cīvaraṃdasāhaparamaṃ kālaṃ atikkāmayato etthantare yathā atirekacīvaraṃ na hoti, tathā akrubbato nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ, tañca cīvaraṃ nissaggiyaṃ hoti, pācittiyaṃ āpatti cassa hotīti attho. Atha vā nissajjanaṃ nissaggiyaṃ, pubbabhāge kattabbassa vinayakammassetaṃ nāmaṃ, nissaggiyamassa atthīti nissaggiyamicceva. Kiṃ taṃ? Pācittiyaṃ. Taṃ atikkāmayato saha nissaggiyena nissaggiyavinayakammaṃ pācittiyaṃ hotīti ayamettha attho. Tañca panetaṃ cīvaraṃ yaṃ divasaṃ uppannaṃ, tassa yo aruṇo, so uppannadivasanissito, tasmā cīvaruppādadivasena saddhiṃ ekādase aruṇuggamane dasāhātikkamitaṃ hoti, taṃ gahetvā saṅghassa vā gaṇassa vā puggalassa vā nissajjitabbaṃ, tatrāyaṃ nayo – saṅghassa tāva evaṃ nissajjitabbaṃ ‘‘idaṃ me, bhante, cīvaraṃ dasahātikkantaṃ nissaggiyaṃ, imāhaṃ saṅghassa nissajjāmī’’ti nissajjitvā ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, ekaṃ nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ āpanno, taṃ paṭidesemī’’ti evaṃ āpatti desetabbā. Sace dve honti, ‘‘dve’’ti vattabbaṃ, sace taduttari, ‘‘sambahulā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Nissajjanepi sace dve vā bahūni vā honti, ‘‘imāni me, bhante, cīvarāni dasāhātikkantāni nissaggiyāni, imānāhaṃ saṅghassa nissajjāmī’’ti vattabbaṃ, pāḷiṃ vattuṃ asakkontena aññathāpi vattabbaṃ. Byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho, ayaṃ itthannāmo bhikkhu āpattiṃ sarati vivarati uttāniṃ karoti deseti, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, ahaṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno āpattiṃ paṭiggaṇheyya’’nti (cūḷava. 239), iminā lakkhaṇena āpattiṃ paṭiggaṇhitvā vattabbo ‘‘passasī’’ti, ‘‘āma passāmī’’ti, ‘‘āyatiṃ saṃvareyyāsī’’ti, ‘‘sādhu suṭṭhu saṃvarissāmī’’ti. Dvīsu pana sambahulāsu vā purimanayeneva vacanabhedo kātabbo. Desitāya āpattiyā ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho, idaṃ cīvaraṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno nissaggiyaṃ saṅghassa nissaṭṭhaṃ, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho imaṃ cīvaraṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno dadeyyā’’ti (pārā. 464) evaṃ nissaṭṭhacīvaraṃ dātabbaṃ, dvīsu bahūsu vā vacanabhedo kātabbo.

Taṃ atikkāmayato nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ: "To one who exceeds that, there is forfeiture and expiation." To one who exceeds the ten-day limit for that robe of the kind and size stated, there is forfeiture and expiation if he does not make an effort so that the extra robe is not there within this time. And that robe becomes forfeitable, and there is an offense of expiation for him, is the meaning. Or, nissajjanaṃ is forfeiture, this is the name for the disciplinary procedure that must be done in the preliminary part; nissaggiyamassa atthīti means it is forfeitable. What is that? Expiation. To one who exceeds that, there is a disciplinary procedure of forfeiture together with expiation; this is the meaning here. And that robe, on whatever day it arises, its dawn is considered to be dependent on the day of arising; therefore, with the arising of the robe, it has exceeded ten days with the rising of the eleventh dawn. Having taken that, it should be forfeited to the Sangha, the group, or the individual. There, this is the method: it should be forfeited to the Sangha thus: "This robe of mine, reverends, has exceeded ten days and is forfeitable. I forfeit this to the Sangha." Having forfeited [it], he should declare the offense thus: "I, reverends, have committed an offense of expiation involving forfeiture; I confess that." If there are two, he should say, "two"; if there are more than that, he should say, "several." In forfeiting also, if there are two or many, he should say, "These robes of mine, reverends, have exceeded ten days and are forfeitable; I forfeit these to the Sangha." If he is unable to say the Pali, he should say it otherwise. The Sangha should be informed by a competent monk thus: "Let the Sangha hear me, reverends. This monk named so-and-so remembers, reveals, discloses, and confesses an offense. If it seems fitting to the Sangha, I would accept the offense from the monk named so-and-so" (cūḷava. 239). Having accepted the offense with this characteristic, he should be asked, "Do you see [it]?" "Yes, I see [it]." "Will you restrain yourself in the future?" "Yes, well, I will restrain myself." But in the case of two or several, the difference in wording should be made in the same way as before. When the offense has been confessed, the robe that has been forfeited should be given [back, saying,] "Let the Sangha hear me, reverends. This robe of the monk named so-and-so is forfeited and given to the Sangha. If it seems fitting to the Sangha, the Sangha should give this robe to the monk named so-and-so" (pārā. 464). In the case of two or many, the difference in wording should be made.

Gaṇassa pana nissajjantena ‘‘imāha’’nti vā ‘‘imāni aha’’nti vā vatvā ‘‘āyasmantānaṃ nissajjāmī’’ti vattabbaṃ, āpattippaṭiggāhakenāpi ‘‘suṇantu me āyasmantā, ayaṃ itthannāmo bhikkhu āpattiṃ sarati…pe… deseti, yadāyasmantānaṃ pattakalla’’nti vattabbaṃ, cīvaradānepi ‘‘suṇantu me āyasmantā, idaṃ cīvaraṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno nissaggiyaṃ āyasmantānaṃ nissaṭṭhaṃ, yadāyasmantānaṃ pattakallaṃ, āyasmantā imaṃ cīvaraṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno dadeyyu’’nti (pārā. 466) vattabbaṃ, sesaṃ purimasadisameva. Puggalassa pana nissajjantena ‘‘imāha’’nti vā ‘‘imāni aha’’nti vā vatvā ‘‘āyasmato nissajjāmī’’ti vattabbaṃ, nissajjitvā ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, ekaṃ nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ āpanno, taṃ paṭidesemī’’ti evaṃ āpatti desetabbā. Sace pana navakataro hoti, ‘‘āvuso’’ti vattabbaṃ, tenāpi ‘‘passasī’’ti vā ‘‘passathā’’ti vā vutte ‘‘āma, bhante’’ti vā ‘‘āma āvuso’’ti vā vatvā ‘‘passāmī’’ti vattabbaṃ, tato ‘‘āyatiṃ saṃvareyyāsī’’ti vā ‘‘saṃvareyyāthā’’ti vā vutte ‘‘sādhu suṭṭhu saṃvarissāmī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Evaṃ desitāya āpattiyā ‘‘imaṃ cīvaraṃ āyasmato dammī’’ti dātabbaṃ, dvīsu tīsu vā pubbe vuttānusāreneva nayo veditabbo. Dvinnaṃ pana yathā gaṇassa, evaṃ nissajjitabbaṃ, tato āpattippaṭiggahaṇañca nissaṭṭhacīvaradānañca tesaṃ aññatarena yathā ekena puggalena, tathā kātabbaṃ, idaṃ pana sabbanissaggiyesu vidhānaṃ. Cīvaraṃ patto nisīdananti vatthumattameva hi nānaṃ, parammukhaṃ pana vatthu ‘‘eta’’nti nissajjitabbaṃ. Sace bahūni honti, ‘‘etānī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Nissaṭṭhadānepi eseva nayo. Nissaṭṭhavatthuṃ ‘‘dinnamidaṃ iminā mayha’’nti saññāya na paṭidentassa dukkaṭaṃ, tassa santakabhāvaṃ ñatvā lesena acchindanto sāmikassa dhuranikkhepena bhaṇḍaṃ agghāpetvā kāretabboti.

When relinquishing (the robe) to the Sangha, one should say, "imāha" or "imāni aha," and then, "āyasmantānaṃ nissajjāmī" should be said. The bhikkhu who accepts the offense should say, "suṇantu me āyasmantā, ayaṃ itthannāmo bhikkhu āpattiṃ sarati…pe… deseti, yadāyasmantānaṃ pattakallaṃ." And when giving a robe, one should say, "suṇantu me āyasmantā, idaṃ cīvaraṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno nissaggiyaṃ āyasmantānaṃ nissaṭṭhaṃ, yadāyasmantānaṃ pattakallaṃ, āyasmantā imaṃ cīvaraṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno dadeyyuṃ" (pārā. 466). The rest is just as previously described. When relinquishing to an individual, one should say, "imāha" or "imāni aha," and then, "āyasmato nissajjāmī." Having relinquished, one should confess the offense thus: "ahaṃ, bhante, ekaṃ nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ āpanno, taṃ paṭidesemī." But if he is newer, "āvuso" should be said. When he is asked, "passasī" or "passathā," he should reply, "āma, bhante" or "āma āvuso," and then say, "passāmī." Then, when told, "āyatiṃ saṃvareyyāsī" or "saṃvareyyāthā," he should reply, "sādhu suṭṭhu saṃvarissāmī." Having confessed the offense in this way, one should give the robe, saying, "imaṃ cīvaraṃ āyasmato dammī." The procedure for two or three (robes) should be understood as previously stated. For two (bhikkhus), relinquishment should be done as for the Sangha. Then, the acceptance of the offense and the giving of the relinquished robe should be done by one of them as if by a single individual; this is the procedure for all nissaggiya offenses. Only the items—robe, bowl, and sitting cloth—are different; however, an object turned away should be relinquished saying "etaṃ". If there are many, "etāni" should be said. The same procedure applies to giving away what has been relinquished. For one who does not acknowledge with the perception, "This was given to me by this person," there is a dukkaṭa offense. Knowing that it belongs to him, to deprive him of it by a trick, by delegating the responsibility to the owner, the item should be appraised and done.

Vesāliyaṃ chabbaggiye bhikkhū ārabbha atirekacīvaradhāraṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘dasāhaparama’’nti ayamettha anupaññatti, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, anissajjitvā paribhuñjantassa dukkaṭaṃ, yathā ca idha, evaṃ sabbattha, tasmā naṃ parato na vakkhāma. Dasāhaṃ anatikkantepi atikkantasaññino vematikassa ca dukkaṭaṃ. Atikkante anatikkantasaññinopi vematikassapi nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyameva, tathā anadhiṭṭhitāvikappitaaassajjitaanaṭṭhāvinaṭṭhaadaḍḍhāviluttesu adhiṭṭhitādisaññino. Antodasāhaṃ adhiṭṭhite vikappite vissajjite naṭṭhe vinaṭṭhe daḍḍhe acchinne vissāsena gāhite ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Ācāravipatti, yathā ca idaṃ, evaṃ ito parānipi, ubhatopātimokkhesupi hi pārājikāni ca saṅghādisesā ca sīlavipatti, sesāpattiyo ācāravipatti, ājīvavipatti vā diṭṭhivipatti vā kāci āpatti nāma natthi. Ājīvavipattipaccayā pana ṭhapetvā dubbhāsitaṃ cha āpattikkhandhā paññattā, diṭṭhivipattipaccayā pācittiyadukkaṭavasena dve āpattikkhandhā paññattāti, idamettha lakkhaṇaṃ, iti vipattikathā idheva niṭṭhitāti, na naṃ ito paraṃ vicārayissāma. Jātippamāṇasampannassa cīvarassa attano santakatā, gaṇanupagatā, chinnapalibodhabhāvo, atirekacīvaratā, dasāhātikkamoti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ, akiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.

Concerning the instance of the Chabbaggiya bhikkhus in Vesālī in relation to the rule about keeping extra robes, "dasāhaparama" is the anupaññatti here; it is a sādhāraṇapaññatti (general rule), anāṇattikaṃ (not an order). For one using it without relinquishing, there is a dukkaṭa offense. Just as here, so everywhere; therefore, we will not explain it further. Even if the ten days have not passed, if one perceives that they have passed or is doubtful, there is a dukkaṭa offense. If (the ten days) have passed, even if one perceives that they have not passed or is doubtful, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya offense, and likewise if one perceives as 'unheld' etc., when (the robe) is held, or perceived as 'unrejected' etc., when (the robe) is rejected. No offense is committed if, within the ten days, it is held, designated, relinquished, lost, destroyed, burnt, cut off, taken on trust or for the insane etc. Ācāravipatti: just as this is, so are the following. In both pātimokkhas, the pārājikas and saṅghādisesas are sīlavipatti (moral failure), the remaining offenses are ācāravipatti (failure of conduct). There is no offense called ājīvavipatti (livelihood failure) or diṭṭhivipatti (failure of view). However, setting aside dubbhāsita, six āpattikkhandhas (groups of offenses) are established due to ājīvavipatti, and two āpattikkhandhas in terms of pācittiya and dukkaṭa are established due to diṭṭhivipatti; this is the characteristic here. Thus, the discussion of failure is concluded here; we will not examine it further. The five factors here are: a robe of complete size, belonging to oneself, not included in the group, being free from obstructions, being an extra robe, and exceeding ten days. Regarding the origin of the Kathina: it is inaction, it is without perception-release, it is non-volitional, it is an offense by regulation, it is bodily action, it is verbal action, it is three-citta (produced by three mental acts), it is three-vedana (accompanied by three feelings).

Kathinasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Kathina Training Rule is Finished.

2. Udositasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Udosita Training Rule

niṭṭhitacīvarasmiṃ bhikkhunātiettha purimasikkhāpade viya atthaṃ aggahetvā niṭṭhite cīvarasmiṃ bhikkhunoti evaṃ sāmivasena karaṇavacanassa attho veditabbo. Karaṇavasena hi bhikkhunā idaṃ nāma kammaṃ kātabbaṃ, taṃ natthi, sāmivasena pana bhikkhuno cīvarasmiṃ niṭṭhite kathine ca ubbhate evaṃ imehi cīvaraniṭṭhānakathinubbhārehi chinnapalibodho ekarattampi ce bhikkhu ticīvarena vippavaseyyāti evaṃ attho yujjati. Tatthaticīvarenāti ticīvarādhiṭṭhānanayena adhiṭṭhitesu saṅghāṭiādīsu yenakenaci.Vippavaseyyāti viyutto vaseyya, ‘‘gāmo ekūpacāro nānūpacāro’’tiādinā (pārā. 477) nayena pāḷiyaṃ vuttānaṃ gāmanigamananivesanaudositaaṭṭamāḷapāsādahammiyanāvāsatthakhettadhaññakaraṇaārāmavihārarukkhamūlaajjhokāsappabhedānaṃ pannarasānaṃ nikkhepaṭṭhānānaṃ yatthakatthaci nikkhipitvā tesaṃ gāmādīnaṃ bahi hatthapāsātikkamena aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpeyyāti ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana samantapāsādikāyaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.473-477-8) vutto.Aññatra bhikkhusammutiyāti yaṃ saṅgho gilānassa bhikkhuno ticīvarena avippavāsasammutiṃ deti, taṃ ṭhapetvā aladdhasammutikassa bhikkhuno ekarattampi vippavāsato vuttanayeneva nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyanti veditabbaṃ, kevalaṃ idha ‘‘idaṃ me, bhante, cīvaraṃ rattivippavutthaṃ aññatra bhikkhusammutiyā nissaggiya’’ntiādinā nayena vacanabhedo hoti, ayaṃ pana viseso.

Here, in niṭṭhitacīvarasmiṃ bhikkhunā, without taking the meaning as in the previous training rule, the meaning of the instrumental case should be understood in a general way as "when the robe is finished for the bhikkhu." For, in the instrumental sense, it would mean that a certain action should be done by the bhikkhu, but that is not the case. However, in a general sense, it is fitting that the meaning is: when the Kathina is established and lifted, the bhikkhu, freed from obstructions by the Kathina being lifted after the robe is finished, should not dwell apart from the three robes even for one night. Here, ticīvarenā means with any one of the saṅghāṭi etc., that have been "held" in accordance with the method of holding the three robes. Vippavaseyyā means to dwell separated. The summary here is that, having placed (the robes) anywhere among the fifteen places for depositing (robes) mentioned in the Pali according to the method "the village is one boundary, not many boundaries" etc. (pārā. 477), i.e., village, town, settlement, lodging, rest house, upper room, mansion, dwelling, landing place, field, grain store, garden, monastery, tree root, open air, one should cause dawn to break beyond the reach of the hand from those villages etc. But the detailed meaning is stated in the Samantapāsādikā (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.473-477-8). Aññatra bhikkhusammutiyā means setting aside the sammuti (agreement) that the Sangha gives to a sick bhikkhu not to dwell apart from the three robes. It should be understood that for a bhikkhu who has not obtained the sammuti, there is a nissaggiya pācittiya offense for dwelling apart even for one night in the manner stated above. The only difference is in the wording, such as "idaṃ me, bhante, cīvaraṃ rattivippavutthaṃ aññatra bhikkhusammutiyā nissaggiya."

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahule bhikkhū ārabbha santaruttarena janapadacārikaṃ pakkamanavatthusmiṃ

Concerning the instance of several bhikkhus in Sāvatthī regarding the matter of going on pilgrimage in the countryside without an under-robe,

Paññattaṃ, ‘‘aññatra bhikkhusammutiyā’’ti ayamettha anupaññatti, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, avippavutthe vippavutthasaññino ceva vematikassa ca dukkaṭaṃ. Vippavutthe vippavutthasaññinopi avippavutthasaññinopi vematikassāpi nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ, tathā apaccuddhaṭaavissajjitādīsu ca paccuddhaṭavissajjitādisaññino. Antoaruṇe paccuddhaṭe pana paṭhamakathine vuttavissajjitādibhede ca anāpatti, tathā laddhasammutikassa vippavāse. Ābādhe pana vūpasante paccāgantabbaṃ, tattheva vā ṭhitena paccuddharitabbaṃ, athāpissa puna so vā añño vā ābādho kuppati, laddhakappiyameva. Adhiṭṭhitacīvaratā, anatthatakathinatā, aladdhasammutikatā, rattivippavāsoti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamakathine vuttappakārāneva. Kevalañhi tattha anadhiṭṭhānaṃ avikappanañca akiriyā, idha appaccuddharaṇaṃ, ayaṃ visesoti.

"aññatra bhikkhusammutiyā" is the anupaññatti (additional rule) established here; it is a sādhāraṇapaññatti (general rule), anāṇattikaṃ (not an order). For one who perceives that he has dwelled apart when he has not dwelled apart, and for one who is doubtful, there is a dukkaṭa offense. If one has dwelled apart, whether one perceives that one has dwelled apart, or perceives that one has not dwelled apart, or is doubtful, there is a nissaggiya pācittiya offense, and likewise if one perceives as 'un-recalled' etc., when (the robe) is recalled, or perceived as 'un-discharged' etc., when (the robe) is discharged. Within dawn, if it is recalled in the manner stated in the first kathina regarding the differences of discharged etc., there is no offense, and likewise, if one dwells apart having obtained sammuti. But when the illness subsides, one should return or, remaining there, one should recall (the robes). Or if that illness or another illness recurs, it is allowable. The four factors here are: being a held robe, the Kathina not being established, not having obtained sammuti, and dwelling apart for the night. The origin etc. are of the same kind as stated in the first Kathina. Only there, non-holding and non-designation are inaction; here, non-recalling is inaction; this is the difference.

Udositasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Udosita Training Rule is Finished.

3. Akālacīvarasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Akālacīvara Training Rule

niṭṭhitacīvarasmiṃ bhikkhunāti sāmivaseneva karaṇattho veditabbo.Akālacīvaraṃnāma yvāyaṃ ‘‘anatthate kathine vassānassa pacchimo māso, atthate kathine pañcamāsā’’ti (pārā. 649) cīvarakālo vutto, taṃ ṭhapetvā aññadā uppannaṃ, yañca kālepi saṅghassa vā ‘‘idaṃ akālacīvara’’nti, puggalassa vā ‘‘idaṃ tuyhaṃ dammī’’tiādinā nayena dinnaṃ, etaṃ akālacīvaraṃ nāma.Uppajjeyyāti evarūpaṃ cīvaraṃ attano bhāgapaṭilābhavasena saṅghato vā suttantikādigaṇato vā ñātito vā mittato vā paṃsukūlaṃ vā attano vā dhanena (pārā. 500), atha vā pana ‘‘aṭṭhimā, bhikkhave, mātikā cīvarassa uppādāya sīmāya deti, katikāya deti, bhikkhāpaññattikāya deti, saṅghassa deti, ubhatosaṅghassa deti, vassaṃvuṭṭhasaṅghassa deti, ādissa deti, puggalassa detī’’ti (mahāva. 379) imāsaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ mātikānaṃ aññatarato uppajjeyya. Ettha ca ‘‘sīmāya dammī’’ti evaṃ sīmaṃ parāmasitvā dentosīmāya detināma, esa nayo sabbattha. Ettha casīmāti khaṇḍasīmā upacārasīmā samānasaṃvāsasīmā avippavāsasīmā lābhasīmā gāmasīmā nigamasīmā nagarasīmā abbhantarasīmā udakukkhepasīmā janapadasīmā raṭṭhasīmā rajjasīmā dīpasīmā cakkavāḷasīmāti pannarasavidhā. Tatthaupacārasīmānāma parikkhittassa vihārassa parikkhepena, aparikkhittassa parikkhepārahaṭṭhānena paricchinnā. Api ca bhikkhūnaṃ dhuvasannipātaṭṭhānato vā pariyante ṭhitabhojanasālato vā nibaddhavasanakaāvāsato vā thāmamajjhimassa purisassa dvinnaṃ leḍḍupātānaṃ anto ‘‘upacārasīmā’’ti veditabbā. Sā pana āvāse vaḍḍhante vaḍḍhati, hāyante hāyati, yojanasatampi upacārasīmāva hoti. Tattha dinnalābho sabbesaṃ antosīmagatānaṃ pāpuṇāti, bhikkhunīnaṃ ārāmapavesanasenāsanāpucchanāni parivāsamānattārocanaṃ vassacchedanissayasenāsanaggāhādividhānanti idampi sabbaṃ imissāva sīmāya vasena veditabbaṃ.Lābhasīmāti yaṃ rājarājamahāmattādayo vihāraṃ kārāpetvā gāvutaṃ vā addhayojanaṃ vā yojanaṃ vā samantā paricchinditvā ‘‘ayaṃ amhākaṃ vihārassa lābhasīmā, yaṃ etthantare uppajjati, taṃ sabbaṃ amhākaṃ vihārassa demā’’ti ṭhapenti, ayaṃ lābhasīmā nāma. Kāsikosalādīnaṃ pana raṭṭhānaṃ anto bahū janapadā honti, tattha eko janapadaparicchedojanapadasīmā,kāsikosalādiraṭṭhaparicchedoraṭṭhasīmā,ekassa rañño āṇāpavattiṭṭhānaṃrajjasīmā,samuddantena paricchinno mahādīpo vā antaradīpo vādīpasīmā,ekacakkavāḷapabbataparikkhepabbhantaraṃcakkavāḷasīmā,sesā nidānakathāyaṃ vuttanayā eva. Tattha ‘‘khaṇḍasīmāya demā’’ti dinnaṃ khaṇḍasīmaṭṭhānaṃyeva pāpuṇāti, tato bahisīmāya sīmantarikaṭṭhānampi na pāpuṇāti. ‘‘Upacārasīmāya demā’’ti dinnaṃ pana antoparicchede khaṇḍasīmāsīmantarikāsu ṭhitānampi pāpuṇāti, samānasaṃvāsasīmāya dinnaṃ khaṇḍasīmāsīmantarikaṭṭhānaṃ na pāpuṇāti, avippavāsasīmālābhasīmāsu dinnaṃ tāsaṃ antogadhānaṃyeva pāpuṇāti, gāmasīmādīsu dinnaṃ tāsaṃ sīmānaṃ abbhantare baddhasīmaṭṭhānampi pāpuṇāti, abbhantarasīmāudakukkhepasīmāsu dinnaṃ tattha antogadhānaṃyeva pāpuṇāti, janapadasīmādīsu dinnampi tāsaṃ abbhantare baddhasīmaṭṭhānampi pāpuṇāti, tasmā yaṃ jambudīpe ṭhatvā ‘‘tambapaṇṇidīpe saṅghassa demā’’ti dīyati, taṃ tambapaṇṇidīpato ekopi gantvā sabbesaṃ saṅgaṇhituṃ labhati. Sacepi tattheva eko sabhāgo bhikkhu sabhāgānaṃ bhāgaṃ gaṇhāti, na vāretabbo. Yo pana vihāraṃ pavisitvā ‘‘asukasīmāyā’’ti avatvāva kevalaṃ ‘‘sīmāya dammī’’ti vadati, so pucchitabbo ‘‘sīmā nāma bahuvidhā, kataraṃ sandhāya vadasī’’ti, sace vadati ‘‘ahametaṃ bhedaṃ na jānāmi, sīmaṭṭhakasaṅgho gaṇhatū’’ti, upacārasīmaṭṭhehi bhājetabbaṃ.

niṭṭhitacīvarasmiṃ bhikkhunā The meaning of the instrumental case should be understood in a general way. Akālacīvaraṃ (untimely robe): The time for robes that is stated as "in the last month of the rains when the Kathina is unestablished, and five months when the Kathina is established" (pārā. 649), setting that aside, (a robe) arising at any other time, and that which is given even in season, either by the Sangha saying "this is an untimely robe" or to an individual saying "I give this to you" in this way, this is called an untimely robe. Uppajjeyyā (should arise): A robe of such a kind might arise to oneself from the Sangha, or from a group of Suttanta reciters etc., or from relatives, or from friends, by way of paṃsukūla (rag robe), or from one's own wealth (pārā. 500), or even from one of these eight causes: "These eight causes, monks, are for the arising of robes: one gives to the boundary, one gives to the agreement, one gives to the announcement of alms, one gives to the Sangha, one gives to both Sanghas, one gives to the Sangha that has spent the rains, one gives to the beginning, one gives to the individual" (mahāva. 379). Here, sīmāya deti (one gives to the boundary) means one gives specifying the boundary in this way. This is the method everywhere. Here, sīmā (boundary) is of fifteen kinds: khaṇḍasīmā (agreed boundary), upacārasīmā (conventional boundary), samānasaṃvāsasīmā (boundary of common dwelling), avippavāsasīmā (boundary of non-separation), lābhasīmā (boundary of gain), gāmasīmā (village boundary), nigamasīmā (town boundary), nagarasīmā (city boundary), abbhantarasīmā (inner boundary), udakukkhepasīmā (water-casting boundary), janapadasīmā (country boundary), raṭṭhasīmā (kingdom boundary), rajjasīmā (realm boundary), dīpasīmā (island boundary), cakkavāḷasīmā (world-system boundary). Among these, upacārasīmā (conventional boundary) is defined by the boundary of a delimited monastery, and in the case of an undelimited one, by a place suitable for delimitation. Moreover, from the permanent meeting place of the bhikkhus or from the dining hall located at the edge of the property or from a continuously inhabited dwelling, within the distance of two throws of a clod by a man of moderate strength, is known as the conventional boundary. That boundary increases as the dwelling increases, decreases as it decreases, and a hundred yojanas is still a conventional boundary. The gain given within it accrues to all those within the boundary. The rules for bhikkhunis, such as entering the monastery, inquiring about lodgings, announcing probation and mānatta, cutting off the rains-residence, taking dependence and lodgings, etc., all these should be understood as being based on this boundary. Lābhasīmā (boundary of gain) is when kings, royal ministers, etc., having built a monastery, circumscribe it on all sides by a gāvuta, half a yojana, or a yojana, and establish (a rule), "This is the boundary of gain for our monastery; whatever arises within this area, we will give it all to our monastery," this is called the boundary of gain. Within the kingdoms of Kāsī, Kosala, etc., there are many countries; among these, the delimitation of one country is the janapadasīmā (country boundary), the delimitation of the kingdom of Kāsī, Kosala, etc., is the raṭṭhasīmā (kingdom boundary), the area where the command of one king prevails is the rajjasīmā (realm boundary), a large island or a small island bounded by the ocean is the dīpasīmā (island boundary), and the area within the surrounding mountains of one cakkavāḷa (world-system) is the cakkavāḷasīmā (world-system boundary). The rest are the same as described in the introduction. Among these, what is given saying, "We give to the khaṇḍasīmā," accrues only to those within the khaṇḍasīmā; it does not accrue even to those within the external boundary (sīmantarikaṭṭhāna) outside that. However, what is given saying, "We give to the upacārasīmā," accrues even to those situated in the khaṇḍasīmā and the external boundary within the surrounding area, but what is given to the samānasaṃvāsasīmā (boundary of common dwelling) does not accrue to those in the khaṇḍasīmā and the external boundary. What is given in the avippavāsasīmā (boundary of non-separation) and the lābhasīmā (boundary of gain) accrues only to those included within them. What is given in the gāmasīmā (village boundary) etc., accrues even to the place where the boundary is fixed within those boundaries. What is given in the abbhantarasīmā (inner boundary) and the udakukkhepasīmā (water-casting boundary) accrues only to those included within them, and what is given in the janapadasīmā (country boundary) etc., accrues even to the place where the boundary is fixed within them. Therefore, if one, staying in Jambudīpa (India), gives saying, "We give to the Sangha in Tambapaṇṇidīpa (Sri Lanka)," even one person going from Tambapaṇṇidīpa can collect (the gift) for all. Even if there a monk on the same side were to receive the share of his fellow members, he should not be prevented. But one who enters the monastery and says only "I give to the boundary" without specifying "to such-and-such boundary," should be asked, "Boundaries are of many kinds; which one do you have in mind?" If he says, "I do not know this distinction; may the Sangha occupying the boundary receive it," it should be distributed by those occupying the conventional boundary.

Katikāyātiettha katikā nāma samānalābhakatikā. Sā pana evaṃ kātabbā, ekasmiṃ vihāre sannipatitehi bhikkhūhi yaṃ vihāraṃ saṅgaṇhitukāmā samānalābhaṃ kātuṃ icchanti, tassa nāmaṃ gahetvā ‘‘asuko nāma vihāro porāṇako appalābho’’ti yaṃ kiñci kāraṇaṃ vatvā ‘‘taṃ vihāraṃ iminā vihārena saddhiṃ ekalābhaṃ kātuṃ saṅghassa ruccatī’’ti tikkhattuṃ sāvetabbaṃ, ettāvatā tasmiṃ vihāre nisinnopi idha nisinnova hoti, tasmiṃ vihārepi evameva kātabbaṃ, ettāvatā idha nisinnopi tasmiṃ nisinnova hoti. Ekasmiṃ vihāre lābhe bhājiyamāne itarasmiṃ ṭhitassa bhāgaṃ gahetuṃ vaṭṭati.

Katikāyā (to the agreement): Here, katikā means the agreement for equal sharing of gains. That should be done as follows: The bhikkhus, having assembled in one monastery, desiring to take in another monastery and to make an equal sharing of gains, taking the name of that (monastery) and saying whatever reason, "The monastery named such-and-such is old and has little gain," it should be announced three times, "Does it please the Sangha to make that monastery share equally in gains with this monastery?" By that much, one sitting in that monastery is also considered to be sitting here, and in that monastery also it should be done in the same way, by that much, one sitting here is also considered to be sitting there. When a gain is being distributed in one monastery, it is proper for one staying in the other monastery to receive a share.

Bhikkhāpaññattiyāti ettha bhikkhāpaññatti nāma dāyakassa pariccāgapaññattiṭṭhānaṃ, tasmā ‘‘yattha mayhaṃ dhuvakārā karīyanti, tattha dammī’’ti vā ‘‘tattha dethā’’ti vā vutte yattha tassa pākavattaṃ vā vattati, yato vā bhikkhū niccaṃ bhojeti, yattha vā tena kiñci senāsanaṃ kataṃ, sabbattha dinnameva hoti. Sace pana ekasmiṃ dhuvakāraṭṭhāne thokatarā bhikkhū honti, ekameva vā vatthaṃ hoti, mātikaṃ āropetvā yathā so vadati, tathā gahetabbaṃ.

Bhikkhāpaññattiyā here means a designated place for the donor's offering. Therefore, if it is said, "I will give where my regular contributions are made," or "Give there," wherever his cooking takes place, or from where the bhikkhus are regularly fed, or where any lodging has been built by him, it is all considered given. But if there are only a few bhikkhus at one such regular donation place, or there is only one robe, having made a designation, it should be taken as he says.

Saṅghassa detīti ettha vihāraṃ pavisitvā ‘‘saṅghassa dammī’’ti dinnaṃ upacārasīmāgatānañca tato bahiddhāpi tehi saddhiṃ ekābaddhānañca pāpuṇāti, tasmā tesaṃ gāhake sati asampattānampi bhāgo dātabbo. Yaṃ pana bahi upacārasīmāya bhikkhū disvā ‘‘saṅghassā’’ti dīyati, taṃ ekābaddhaparisāya pāpuṇāti. Ye pana dvādasahi hatthehi parisaṃ asampattā, tesaṃ na pāpuṇāti.

Saṅghassa detī here means that, having entered the monastery and given something saying, "I give to the Saṅgha," it reaches those within the boundary of the residence and also those associated with them even outside of it. Therefore, if there is someone to receive for them, a share should be given even to those who have not arrived. But that which is given, seeing bhikkhus outside the boundary of the residence, saying "To the Saṅgha," that reaches the associated community. It does not reach those who are not within twelve cubits of the community.

Ubhatosaṅghassāti ettha pana yaṃ ubhatosaṅghassa dinnaṃ, tato upaḍḍhaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ, upaḍḍhaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ dātabbaṃ. Sacepi eko bhikkhu hoti, ekā vā bhikkhunī, antamaso anupasampannassāpi upaḍḍhameva dātabbaṃ. ‘‘Ubhatosaṅghassa ca tuyhañcā’’ti vutte pana sace dasa bhikkhū ca dasa bhikkhuniyo ca honti, ekavīsati paṭivīse katvā eko puggalassa dātabbo, dasa bhikkhusaṅghassa, dasa bhikkhunisaṅghassa ca, yena puggaliko laddho, so saṅghatopi attano vassaggena gahetuṃ labhati, kasmā? Ubhatosaṅghaggahaṇena gahitattā, ‘‘ubhatosaṅghassa ca cetiyassa cā’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Idha pana cetiyassa saṅghato pāpuṇakoṭṭhāso nāma natthi, ekapuggalassa pattakoṭṭhāsasamo eko koṭṭhāso hoti. ‘‘Bhikkhusaṅghassa ca bhikkhunīnañcā’’ti vutte pana na majjhe bhinditvā dātabbaṃ, bhikkhū ca bhikkhuniyo ca gaṇetvā dātabbaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhusaṅghassa ca bhikkhunīnañca tuyhañcā’’ti vutte puggalo visuṃ na labhati, pāpuṇakoṭṭhāsato ekameva labhati. ‘‘Cetiyassa cā’’ti vutte pana cetiyassa eko puggalapaṭivīso labbhati. ‘‘Bhikkhūnañca bhikkhunīnañcā’’ti vuttepi na majjhe bhinditvā dātabbaṃ, puggalagaṇanāya eva vibhajitabbaṃ, tehi saddhiṃ puggalacetiyaparāmasanaṃ anantaranayasadisameva, yathā ca bhikkhusaṅghaṃ ādiṃ katvā nayo nīto, evaṃ bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ ādiṃ katvāpi netabbo. ‘‘Bhikkhusaṅghassa ca tuyhañcā’’ti vuttepi puggalassa visuṃ na labbhati, cetiyassa pana labbhati. ‘‘Bhikkhūnañca tuyhañcā’’ti vuttepi visuṃ na labbhati, cetiyassa pana labbhatiyeva.

Ubhatosaṅghassā here means that which is given to both Saṅghas, half of it should be given to the bhikkhus and half to the bhikkhunīs. Even if there is one bhikkhu or one bhikkhunī, at least to one not yet fully ordained, half should still be given. But when it is said, "To both Saṅghas and to you," if there are ten bhikkhus and ten bhikkhunīs, having made twenty-one portions, one should be given to the individual, ten to the Bhikkhu Saṅgha, and ten to the Bhikkhunī Saṅgha. The individual who has received their personal share can take from the Saṅgha's share according to their seniority, why? Because it was taken with the mention of both Saṅghas. The same method applies even when it is said, "To both Saṅghas and to the Cetiya." Here, however, there is no portion accruing to the Cetiya from the Saṅgha's share; there is one share equal to the portion accruing to one individual. But when it is said, "To the Bhikkhu Saṅgha and to the Bhikkhunīs," it should not be divided in the middle and given; it should be given after counting the bhikkhus and bhikkhunīs. When it is said, "To the Bhikkhu Saṅgha and to the Bhikkhunīs and to you," the individual does not receive separately; they receive only one share from the accruing portion. But when it is said, "And to the Cetiya," the Cetiya receives one individual's share. When it is said, "To the bhikkhus and the bhikkhunīs," it should not be divided in the middle and given; it should be divided according to the count of individuals. The consideration of an individual or Cetiya with them is similar to the immediately preceding method. And just as the method has been carried out beginning with the Bhikkhu Saṅgha, so too should it be carried out beginning with the Bhikkhunī Saṅgha. When it is said, "To the Bhikkhu Saṅgha and to you," the individual does not receive separately, but it is received for the Cetiya. When it is said, "To the bhikkhus and to you," it is not received separately, but it is indeed received for the Cetiya.

Vassaṃvuṭṭhasaṅghassāti ettha sace vihāraṃ pavisitvā ‘‘vassaṃvuṭṭhasaṅghassa dammī’’ti vadati, ye tattha vassacchedaṃ akatvā purimavassaṃvuṭṭhā, tesaṃ bahi sīmaṭṭhānampi pāpuṇāti, na aññesaṃ. Sace pana bahiupacārasīmāyaṃ ṭhito ‘‘vassaṃvuṭṭhasaṅghassā’’ti vadati, yatthakatthaci vuṭṭhavassānaṃ sabbesaṃ sampattānaṃ pāpuṇāti. Atha ‘‘asukavihāre vassaṃvuṭṭhassā’’ti vadati, tattha vassaṃvuṭṭhānaṃyeva yāva kathinassubbhārā pāpuṇāti. Gimhānaṃ paṭhamadivasato paṭṭhāya evaṃ vadati, tatra sammukhībhūtānaṃ sabbesaṃ pāpuṇāti, na aññesaṃ.

Vassaṃvuṭṭhasaṅghassā here means that if, having entered the monastery, one says, "I give to the Saṅgha that has spent the rains," it reaches those who have spent the preceding rains there without breaking the rains-residence, even those outside the boundary of the residence, but not to others. But if, standing outside the boundary of the residence, one says, "To the Saṅgha that has spent the rains," it reaches all who have spent the rains wherever they may be, who have arrived. Then, if one says, "To those who have spent the rains in such-and-such monastery," it reaches only those who have spent the rains there until the dispensing of the Kathina. If one says so starting from the first day of the hot season, it reaches all those who are present, but not to others.

Ādissa detīti ādisitvā paricchinditvā deti, kathaṃ? Bhikkhū ajjatanāya vā svātanāya vā yāguyā nimantetvā te ghare yāguṃ pāyetvā ‘‘imāni cīvarāni yehi mayhaṃ yāgu pītā, tesaṃ dammī’’ti vadati, yehi nimantitehi yāgu pītā, tesaṃyeva pāpuṇāti, bhattakhajjakādīhi nimantitesupi eseva nayo.

Ādissa detī means giving by specifying and designating. How? Having invited bhikkhus for barley gruel for today or tomorrow, and having given them barley gruel at their house, one says, "I give these robes to those by whom my barley gruel was drunk." It reaches only those by whom the barley gruel was drunk, having been invited. The same method applies even when they are invited with food, snacks, etc.

Puggalassa detīti ‘‘idaṃ cīvaraṃ itthannāmassa dammī’’ti evaṃ parammukhā vā, pādamūle ṭhapetvā ‘‘idaṃ tumhāka’’nti evaṃ sammukhā vā detīti ayamettha saṅkhepakathā, vitthāro pana samantapāsādikāyaṃ vutto. Iti imāsaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ mātikāpadānaṃ vasena yaṃ akālacīvaralakkhaṇena paṭiladdhaṃ, taṃ sandhāya ‘‘akālacīvaraṃ uppajjeyyā’’ti vuttaṃ.

Puggalassa detī means giving to an individual, saying, "I give this robe to so-and-so," either out of their presence, or placing it at their feet and saying, "This is yours," thus in their presence. This is the concise explanation here, but the detailed explanation has been stated in the Samantapāsādikā. Thus, referring to what has been obtained by way of the unseasonable robe, based on the giving of these eight categories, it is said, "Should an unseasonable robe arise."

Ākaṅkhamānenāti icchamānena.Khippameva kāretabbanti sīghaṃ antodasāheyeva kāretabbaṃ.No cassa pāripūrīti no ce pāripūrī bhaveyya, yattakena kariyamānaṃ adhiṭṭhānacīvaraṃ pahoti, taṃ cīvaraṃ tattakaṃ na bhaveyya, ūnakaṃ bhaveyyāti attho.Satiyā paccāsāyāti ‘‘asukadivasaṃ nāma saṅgho cīvarāni labhissati, tato me cīvaraṃ uppajjissatī’’tiiminā nayena saṅghagaṇañātimittesu vā aññataraṭṭhānato, ‘‘paṃsukūlaṃ vā lacchāmī’’ti, ‘‘iminā vā kappiyabhaṇḍena cīvaraṃ gaṇhissāmī’’ti evaṃ vijjamānāya cīvarāsāya.Tato ce uttarīti māsaparamato ce uttari nikkhipeyya, nissaggiyanti attho. Yadi panassa mūlacīvaraṃ saṇhaṃ hoti, paccāsācīvaraṃ thūlaṃ hoti, na sakkā yojetuṃ, rattiyo ca sesā honti, na tāva māso pūrati, na akāmā cīvaraṃ kāretabbaṃ, aññaṃ paccāsācīvaraṃ labhitvā eva kālabbhantare kāretabbaṃ. Sace na labhati, paccāsācīvarampi parikkhāracoḷaṃ adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Atha mūlacīvaraṃ thūlaṃ hoti, paccāsācīvaraṃ saṇhaṃ, mūlacīvaraṃ parikkhāracoḷaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā paccāsācīvarameva mūlacīvaraṃ katvā ṭhapetabbaṃ, taṃ puna māsaparihāraṃ labhati, etenupāyena yāva na lacchati, tāva aññaṃ mūlacīvaraṃ katvā ṭhapetuṃ labbhati. Imassa ‘‘idaṃ me, bhante, akālacīvaraṃ māsātikkantaṃ nissaggiya’’nti (pārā. 500) iminā nayena nissajjanavidhānaṃ veditabbaṃ.

Ākaṅkhamānenā by one who desires. Khippameva kāretabba should be made quickly, even within ten days. No cassa pāripūrī if there should not be completeness, if there should not be enough of that robe by which a robe being made under determination is sufficient, if there should be less. Satiyā paccāsāyā with the expectation that, "On such-and-such a day, the Saṅgha will receive robes; then a robe will arise for me," in this way, from the Saṅgha, group, relatives, friends, or from any other place, "Or I will obtain a rags-robe," or "I will take a robe with this allowable item." Tato ce uttarī if he keeps it longer than a month, it is subject to forfeiture. But if his original robe is fine and the expected robe is coarse and cannot be joined, and nights remain and a month is not yet complete, the robe should not be made unwillingly; it should be made within the allowed time only after obtaining another expected robe. If he does not obtain it, the expected robe should also be determined as a belongings-cloth. Then, if the original robe is coarse and the expected robe is fine, having determined the original robe as a belongings-cloth, the expected robe itself should be kept, having made it the original robe; it again obtains a month's grace. By this method, for as long as he does not obtain it, it is permissible to keep making another original robe. For this, the procedure for forfeiting should be understood by this method: "This, venerable sir, is my unseasonable robe that has exceeded a month; it is to be forfeited" (pārā. 500).

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahule bhikkhū ārabbha akālacīvaraṃ paṭiggahetvā māsaṃ atikkamanavatthusmiṃ

Concerning many bhikkhus in Sāvatthī, regarding the case of accepting an unseasonable robe and exceeding a month.

Paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, ito paraṃ sabbaṃ paṭhamakathine vuttasadisameva. Kevalañhi tattha dasāhātikkamo, idha māsātikkamoti ayaṃ viseso. Sesaṃ tādisamevāti.

It was prescribed, a general prescription, not by command. Hereafter, everything is similar to what was stated in the first Kathina section. The only difference is that there is an exceeding of ten days there, and here there is an exceeding of a month. The rest is the same.

Akālacīvarasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Unseasonable Robe Training Rule is finished.

4. Purāṇacīvarasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. The Commentary on the Old Robe Training Rule

aññātikāyāti na ñātikāya, mātito vā pitito vā yāva sattamaṃ yugaṃ, tāva kenaci ākārena asambaddhāyāti attho.Bhikkhuniyāti sākiyāniyo viya suddhabhikkhusaṅghe vā ubhatosaṅghe vā upasampannāya.Purāṇacīvaranti rajitvā kappaṃ katvā ekavārampi nivatthaṃ vā pārutaṃ vā, yaṃ antamaso paribhogasīsena aṃse vā matthake vā katvā maggaṃ gato hoti, ussīsakaṃ vā katvā nipanno, etampi purāṇacīvarameva.Dhovāpeyya vāti sace ‘‘dhovā’’tivācāya vadati, kāyavikāraṃ vā karoti, hatthena vā hatthe deti, pādamūle vā ṭhapeti, antodvādasahatthe okāse ṭhatvā upari vā khipati, aññassa vā hatthe peseti, tāya dhotaṃ, dhovāpitameva hoti, rajāpanākoṭāpanesupi eseva nayo. Sikkhamānāya vā sāmaṇeriyā vā upāsikāya vā hatthe dhovanatthāya deti, sā sace upasampajjitvā dhovati, evampi nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ. Upāsakassa vā sāmaṇerassa vā hatthe dinnaṃ hoti, so ce liṅge parivatte upasampajjitvā dhovati, daharassa bhikkhussa vā dinnaṃ hoti, sopi liṅge parivatte dhovati, nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyameva, rajāpanākoṭāpanesupi eseva nayo. ‘‘Idaṃ me, bhante, purāṇacīvaraṃ aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā dhovāpitaṃ nissaggiya’’nti (pārā. 505) iminā panettha nayena nissajjanavidhānaṃ veditabbaṃ.

aññātikāyā means not a relative, one not connected in any way from the mother's side or the father's side, up to the seventh generation. Bhikkhuniyā means one who has received ordination either in the pure Bhikkhu Saṅgha or in both Saṅghas, like the Sākiyan nuns. Purāṇacīvara means an old robe, having been dyed, made allowable, and worn or used even once; whatever, at the very least, having made it on the shoulder or head with the intention of using it, one has gone on a path, or having made it a headrest, one has lain down; this too is an old robe. Dhovāpeyya vā if he speaks with the utterance "wash," or makes a bodily gesture, or gives it hand to hand, or places it at his feet, or stands within twelve cubits of space and throws it upwards, or sends it in another's hand, it is considered washed by her; the same method applies for dyeing and beating. If he gives it into the hand of a sikkhamānā, a sāmaṇerī, or a female lay follower for washing, if she becomes fully ordained and washes it, even so it is subject to forfeiture and entails expiation. If it is given into the hand of a male lay follower or a sāmaṇera, and he becomes fully ordained upon a change of gender and washes it, or it is given into the hand of a young bhikkhu, and he too washes it upon a change of gender, it is subject to forfeiture and entails expiation. The same method applies for dyeing and beating. Here the procedure for forfeiting should be understood by this method: "This, venerable sir, is my old robe that has been washed by a bhikkhunī who is not a relative; it is to be forfeited" (pārā. 505).

Sāvatthiyaṃ udāyittheraṃ ārabbha purāṇacīvaradhovāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, asādhāraṇapaññatti, sāṇattikaṃ ‘‘dhovā’’tiādikāya āṇattiyā, evaṃ āṇattāya ca bhikkhuniyā uddhanasajjanādīsu sabbappayogesu bhikkhuno dukkaṭaṃ. Dhovitvā ukkhittamattaṃ pana rattamattaṃ ākoṭitamattañca nissaggiyaṃ hoti, dhovanādīni tīṇipi dve vā kārāpentassa ekena vatthunā nissaggiyaṃ, itarehi dukkaṭaṃ. Sace pana ‘‘dhovā’’ti vuttā sabbānipi karoti, dhovanapaccayāva āpatti. ‘‘Imasmiṃ cīvare yaṃ kattabbaṃ, taṃ karohī’’ti vadato pana ekavācāya pācittiyena saddhiṃ dve dukkaṭāni, bhikkhunisaṅghavasena ekatoupasampannāya dhovāpentassa anissajjitvā paribhuñjantassa, aññassa vā santakaṃ nisīdanapaccattharaṇaṃ vā dhovāpentassa, ñātikāya aññātikasaññino ceva, vematikassa ca dukkaṭaṃ, aññātikāya ñātikasaññinopi vematikassāpi nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyameva. Ito paraṃ pana evarūpesu ṭhānesu ‘‘tikapācittiya’’nti vakkhāma, sace ñātikāya sahāyā aññātikā ‘‘dhovā’’ti avuttā vā dhovati, aparibhuttaṃ vā aññaṃ vā parikkhāraṃ dhovati, sikkhamānasāmaṇeriyo vā dhovanti, anāpatti, ummattakādīnaṃ anāpattiyeva. Purāṇacīvaratā, upacāre ṭhatvā aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā āṇāpanaṃ, tassā dhovanādīni cāti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Sañcarittasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.

It was prescribed in Sāvatthī concerning the elder Udāyi, regarding the case of having an old robe washed. An individual prescription, by command with the command "wash," etc. Thus, with this command, for the bhikkhu in all efforts, such as applying the lye and preparing it, there is a wrong-doing. However, as soon as it is raised after washing, or as soon as it is dyed, or as soon as it is beaten, it is subject to forfeiture. If he has three or two of the washings etc. done, there is a forfeiture with one item, for the others there is a wrong-doing. But if, having been told "wash," she does everything, there is an offense only because of the washing. However, for one who says, "Do what needs to be done to this robe," with one utterance, along with the expiation, there are two wrong-doings. For one who has it washed by one fully ordained as belonging to the Bhikkhunī Saṅgha, while using it without forfeiting it, or for having another's belonging, such as a sitting cloth or a spread, washed, for one who perceives a relative as a non-relative, and for one who is doubtful, there is a wrong-doing; for one who perceives a non-relative as a relative, and for one who is doubtful, it is subject to forfeiture and entails expiation. Hereafter, however, in such situations, we will say "triple expiation." If a non-relative, a friend of a relative, washes it without being told "wash," or washes another unconsumed belonging, or sikkhamānās or sāmaṇerīs wash it, there is no offense. For the insane, etc., there is no offense. Being an old robe, commanding a non-relative bhikkhunī while standing in the vicinity, and her washing etc., these are the three factors here. It arises from habitual conduct, it is an action, without intention of relinquishment, unintentional, an offense by regulation, a bodily action, a verbal action, tri-citta, three vedanās.

Purāṇacīvarasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Old Robe Training Rule is finished.

5. Cīvarappaṭiggahaṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. The Commentary on the Robe-Receiving Training Rule

aññātikāyātiidaṃ vuttanayameva, tasmā ito paraṃ katthaci na vicārayissāma.Cīvaranti channaṃ aññataraṃ vikappanupagaṃ, esa nayo sabbesu cīvarappaṭisaṃyuttasikkhāpadesu. Yattha pana viseso bhavissati, tattha vakkhāma.Paṭiggaṇheyyātiettha hatthena vā hatthe detu, pādamūle vā ṭhapetu, dhammakathaṃ kathentassa vatthesu khipiyamānesu upacāraṃ muñcitvāpi upari vā khipatu, sace sādiyati, paṭiggahitameva hoti. Yassa kassaci pana anupasampannassa hatthe pesitaṃ gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati, ‘‘paṃsukūlaṃ gaṇhissatī’’ti saṅkārakūṭādīsu ṭhapitampi paṃsukūlaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā gahetuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva.Aññatra pārivattakāti yaṃ ‘‘antamaso harīṭakakkhaṇḍampi datvā vā dassāmī’’ti ābhogaṃ katvā vā pārivattakaṃ gaṇhāti, taṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ antamaso vikappanupagaṃ paṭaparissāvanampi gaṇhantassa nissaggiyaṃ hoti. Tatra ‘‘idaṃ me, bhante, cīvaraṃ aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā hatthato paṭiggahitaṃ aññatra pārivattakā nissaggiya’’nti (pārā. 512) iminā nayena nissajjanavidhānaṃ veditabbaṃ.

aññātikāyā this is as stated before, therefore hereafter we will not investigate it anywhere. Cīvara one of the six not subject to disposal; this method is in all training rules related to robes. But where there will be a difference, there we will speak. Paṭiggaṇheyyā here, whether she gives it hand to hand, or places it at his feet, or while he is giving a Dhamma talk, when robes are being thrown among the clothes, even having given up the vicinity, or throws it upwards, if he approves, it is considered received. But it is permissible to take what has been sent into the hand of any not-fully-ordained person. It is permissible to take even a rags-robe placed in a heap of rubbish, etc., with the thought, "He will take a rags-robe," after having determined it as a rags-robe. Aññatra pārivattakā except for an exchange, that which he takes as an exchange after making a resolve, saying, "I will give or I will give at least a piece of harītakī fruit," setting that aside, even for one who takes something not subject to disposal, at the very least a cloth strainer, it is subject to forfeiture. There the procedure for forfeiting should be understood by this method: "This, venerable sir, is a robe received from the hand of a bhikkhunī who is not a relative, except as an exchange; it is to be forfeited" (pārā. 512).

Rājagahe udāyittheraṃ ārabbha cīvarappaṭiggahaṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘aññatra pārivattakā’’ti ayamettha anupaññatti, asādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, gahaṇatthāya hatthappasāraṇādippayoge dukkaṭaṃ, paṭilābhena nissaggiyaṃ hoti, nissajjitabbaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, ekatoupasampannāya ñātikāya ca aññātikasaññissa vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ. Vissāsaggāhe, tāvakālike, pattatthavikādimhi ca anadhiṭṭhātabbaparikkhāre, sikkhamānasāmaṇerīnaṃ hatthato gahaṇe, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Vikappanupagacīvaratā, pārivattakābhāvo, aññātikāya hatthato gahaṇanti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Sañcarittasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kiriyākiriyaṃ, sesaṃ catutthasadisamevāti.

It was prescribed in Rājagaha concerning the elder Udāyi, regarding the case of receiving a robe. "Aññatra pārivattakā" this is a subsequent prescription here, an individual prescription, not by command. For the effort of extending the hand, etc., for receiving, there is a wrong-doing. With the receiving, it is subject to forfeiture, it must be forfeited, triple expiation. For one fully ordained as belonging to one group, for one who perceives a relative as a non-relative, or for one who is doubtful, there is a wrong-doing. There is no offense in taking it in confidence, temporarily, for a bowl-bag etc., or for belongings not to be determined, from the hands of sikkhamānās and sāmaṇerīs, and for the insane, etc. Being a robe not subject to disposal, the absence of an exchange, taking it from the hand of a non-relative, these are the three factors here. It arises from habitual conduct, it is an action and non-action, the rest is similar to the fourth.

Cīvarappaṭiggahaṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Robe-Receiving Training Rule is finished.

6. Aññātakaviññattisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. The Commentary on the Requesting from Non-Relatives Training Rule

gahapatinti bhikkhūsu apabbajitamanussaṃ.Gahapatāninti bhikkhunīsu apabbajititthiṃ, esa nayo sabbesu gahapatippaṭisaṃyuttesu sikkhāpadesu.Viññāpeyyāti yāceyya vā yācāpeyya vā.Aññatra samayāti yo acchinnacīvaro vā hoti naṭṭhacīvaro vā, tassa taṃ samayaṃ ṭhapetvā aññasmiṃ viññāpanappayoge dukkaṭaṃ, paṭilābhena nissaggiyaṃ hoti. Tattha ‘‘idaṃ me, bhante, cīvaraṃ aññātakaṃ gahapatikaṃ aññatra samayā viññāpitaṃ nissaggiya’’nti (pārā. 524) iminā nayena nissajjanavidhānaṃ veditabbaṃ.

Gahapati means a layman who has not gone forth among the bhikkhus. Gahapatāni means a laywoman who has not gone forth among the bhikkhunis; this method applies to all training rules associated with gahapati. Viññāpeyyā means should ask or cause to be asked. Aññatra samayā means except for the time when one is without a robe or has lost a robe; setting aside that time, in another instance of requesting, there is a dukkata offense; with acquisition, it becomes an offense entailing forfeiture. Herein, "This robe of mine was requested from an unrelated gahapati, except for the proper time, thus it is subject to forfeiture" (pārā. 524); the procedure for forfeiture should be understood in this manner.

Sāvatthiyaṃ upanandaṃ ārabbha cīvaraviññāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ. ‘‘Aññatra samayā’’ti ayamettha anupaññatti, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, ñātake aññātakasaññino vematikassa ca dukkaṭaṃ. Samaye vā ñātakappavārite vā viññāpentassa, aññassa vā ñātakappavārite tassevatthāya viññāpentassa, attano dhanena gaṇhantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Vikappanupagacīvaratā, samayābhāvo, aññātakaviññatti, tāya ca paṭilābhoti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni catutthasadisānevāti.

It was established in Sāvatthī concerning Upananda in the matter of requesting robes. "Aññatra samayā" is the additional regulation here, a general regulation, not commanded, a threefold pācittiya; for one who mistakes a relative for a non-relative or is in doubt, there is a dukkata. There is no offense for one who requests during the proper time or when authorized by a relative, or when requesting for that purpose by someone else authorized by a relative, or when acquiring with one's own wealth, or for an insane person, etc. Being without a robe by choice, absence of the proper time, requesting from a non-relative, and acquisition through that: these are the four factors here. The origination, etc., are similar to the fourth.

Aññātakaviññattisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Requesting from Non-relatives is Concluded.

7. Tatuttarisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. The Explanation of the Training Rule on Requesting in Excess

tañceti taṃ acchinnacīvaraṃ vā naṭṭhacīvaraṃ vā.Abhihaṭṭhuntiabhīti upasaggo, haritunti attho, gaṇhitunti vuttaṃ hoti.Pavāreyyāti icchāpeyya, icchaṃ ruciṃ uppādeyya, ‘‘yāvattakaṃ icchasi, tāvattakaṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti evaṃ nimanteyyāti attho, yathā vā ‘‘nekkhammaṃ daṭṭhu khemato’’ti (su. ni. 426, 1104; cūḷani. jatukaṇṇīmāṇavapucchāniddesa 67) ettha disvāti attho, evamidhāpi ‘‘abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāreyyā’’ti upanetvā purato ṭhapento kāyena vā, ‘‘amhākaṃ dussakoṭṭhāgārato yattakaṃ icchatha, tattakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadanto vācāya vā abhiharitvā nimanteyyāti attho.Santaruttaraparamanti saantaraṃ uttaraṃ paramaṃ assa cīvarassāti santaruttaraparamaṃ, nivāsanena saddhiṃ pārupanaṃ ukkaṭṭhaparicchedo assāti vuttaṃ hoti.Tato cīvaraṃ sāditabbanti tato abhihaṭacīvarato ettakaṃ cīvaraṃ gahetabbaṃ, na tato paraṃ.

Tañce means that robe which is either torn or lost. Abhihaṭṭhuṃabhi is a prefix, meaning to bring, it means to take. Pavāreyyā means should invite, should create desire or inclination, meaning should invite, "Take as much as you wish," just as "nekkhammaṃ daṭṭhu khemato" (su. ni. 426, 1104; cūḷani. jatukaṇṇīmāṇavapucchāniddesa 67), here disvā means having seen; similarly here, "abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāreyyā" means bringing it near and placing it in front, either physically or saying with words, "Take as much as you wish from our storehouse of cloth," thus, having brought it near, he invites. Santaruttaraparamaṃ means santaraṃ, uttaraṃ, paramaṃ assa cīvarassa, santaruttaraparamaṃ, meaning having an inner robe, an outer robe, the highest limit for him.

Tatrāyaṃ vinicchayo – yassa adhiṭṭhitacīvarassa tīṇi naṭṭhāni, tena dve sāditabbāni, ekaṃ nivāsetvā ekaṃ pārupitvā aññaṃ sabhāgaṭṭhānato pariyesitabbaṃ. Yassa dve naṭṭhāni, tena ekaṃ sāditabbaṃ. Sace pana pakatiyāva santaruttarena carati, dve sāditabbāni, evaṃ ekaṃ sādiyanteneva samo bhavissati. Yassa tīsu ekaṃ naṭṭhaṃ, kiñci na sāditabbaṃ. Yassa pana dvīsu ekaṃ naṭṭhaṃ, ekaṃ sāditabbaṃ. Yassa ekaṃyeva hoti, tañca naṭṭhaṃ, dve sāditabbāni. Bhikkhuniyā pana pañcasu naṭṭhesu dve sāditabbāni, catūsu naṭṭhesu ekaṃ sāditabbaṃ, tīsu naṭṭhesu na kiñci sāditabbaṃ, ko pana vādo dvīsu vā ekasmiṃ vā. Yena kenaci hi santaruttaraparamatāya ṭhātabbaṃ, tato uttari viññāpanappayoge dukkaṭaṃ, paṭilābhena nissaggiyaṃ hoti. Tattha ‘‘idaṃ me, bhante, cīvaraṃ aññātakaṃ gahapatikaṃ tatuttari viññāpitaṃ nissaggiya’’nti (pārā. 524) iminā nayena nissajjanavidhānaṃ veditabbaṃ.

Tato cīvaraṃ sādhitabbaṃ means from the robe that was brought, so much robe should be acquired, not more than that. Herein is the judgment: For whom three robes that were determined are lost, two should be acquired; having worn one as the lower robe and one as the upper robe, another should be sought from a similar place. For whom two are lost, one should be acquired. But if he usually goes about with just an inner robe and an outer robe, two should be acquired; thus it will be the same as acquiring one. For whom one of the three is lost, nothing should be acquired. But for whom one of the two is lost, one should be acquired. For whom there is only one, and that is lost, two should be acquired. But for a bhikkhuni, when five are lost, two should be acquired; when four are lost, one should be acquired; when three are lost, nothing should be acquired; what need to say about when two or one is lost? By whatever means, one must remain with the limit of inner robe and outer robe, and for requesting beyond that, there is a dukkata offense; with acquisition, it becomes an offense entailing forfeiture. Herein, "This robe of mine was requested in excess from an unrelated gahapati, thus it is subject to forfeiture" (pārā. 524); the procedure for forfeiture should be understood in this manner.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye bhikkhū ārabbha bahucīvaraviññāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, ñātake aññātakasaññino vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ. Dve cīvarāni katvā ‘‘sesakaṃ āharissāmī’’ti vatvā gaṇhantassa, ‘‘sesakaṃ tuyhaṃyeva hotū’’ti vuttassa, na acchinnanaṭṭhakāraṇā dinnaṃ gaṇhantassa, vuttanayena ñātakappavārite viññāpentassa, attano dhanena gaṇhantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Tatuttaritā, acchinnādikāraṇatā, aññātakaviññatti, tāya ca paṭilābhoti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni catutthasadisānevāti.

It was established in Sāvatthī concerning the group-of-six bhikkhus, in the matter of requesting many robes, a general regulation, uncommanded, a threefold pācittiya; for one who mistakes a relative for a non-relative, or for one who is doubtful, there is a dukkata. There is no offense for one who makes two robes and says, "I will bring the remainder," and takes it, or if it is said, "Let the remainder be for you," or for one who takes what is given not due to a reason of tearing or loss, or for one who requests as authorized by a relative in the manner stated, or for one who acquires with one's own wealth, or for an insane person, etc. Being in excess, being without the cause of tearing, etc., requesting from a non-relative, and acquisition through that: these are the four factors here. The origination, etc., are similar to the fourth.

Tatuttarisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Requesting in Excess is Concluded.

8. Upakkhaṭasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. The Explanation of the Training Rule on a Robe Being Prepared

bhikkhuṃ paneva uddissāti ‘‘itthannāmassa bhikkhuno dassāmī’’ti evaṃ apadisitvā.Cīvaracetāpannanti hiraññādikaṃ cīvaramūlaṃ.Upakkhaṭaṃ hotīti sajjitaṃ hoti, saṃharitvā ṭhapitaṃ.Cetāpetvāti parivattetvā, kāretvā vā kiṇitvā vāti attho.Cīvarena acchādessāmīti vohāravacanametaṃ, itthannāmassa bhikkhuno dassāmīti ayaṃ panettha attho.Tatra ce soti yatra so gahapati vā gahapatānī vā, tatra so bhikkhu pubbe appavārito upasaṅkamitvā cīvare vikappaṃ āpajjeyya ceti ayamettha padasambandho.Vikappaṃ āpajjeyyāti visiṭṭhakappaṃ adhikavidhānaṃ āpajjeyya. Yathā pana tamāpajjati, taṃ dassetuṃsādhu vatātiādimāha. Tatthasādhūti āyācane nipāto.Vatāti parivitakke.Manti attānaṃ niddisati.Āyasmāti paraṃ ālapati.Evarūpaṃ vā evarūpaṃ vāti āyatādīsu aññataraṃ.Kalyāṇakamyataṃ upādāyāti sundarakāmataṃ visiṭṭhakāmataṃ cittena gahetvā, tassa ‘‘āpajjeyya ce’’tiiminā sambandho, sace pana evarūpaṃ āpajjantassa tassa vacanena yo paṭhamaṃ adhippetato mūlaṃ vaḍḍhetvā sundarataraṃ cetāpeti, tassa payoge bhikkhuno dukkaṭaṃ, paṭilābhena nissaggiyaṃ hoti. Tattha ‘‘idaṃ me, bhante, cīvaraṃ pubbe appavāritaṃ aññātakaṃ gahapatikaṃ upasaṅkamitvā vikappaṃ āpannaṃ nissaggiya’’nti (pārā. 529) iminā nayena nissajjanavidhānaṃ veditabbaṃ.

Bhikkhuṃ paneva uddissā means having designated, "I will give it to the bhikkhu named such-and-such." Cīvaracetāpannaṃ means the price of a robe, such as gold, etc. Upakkhaṭaṃ hotī means it is prepared, gathered and kept ready. Cetāpetvā means having exchanged, or having it made, or having bought it. Cīvarena acchādessāmī is a conventional expression; the meaning here is, "I will give it to the bhikkhu named such-and-such." Tatra ce so—where that gahapati or gahapatānī is, that bhikkhu, not previously invited, approaching, should make a stipulation regarding the robe: this is how the words are connected here. Vikappaṃ āpajjeyyā means should make a specific stipulation, a further arrangement. To show how he makes that, he says, beginning with sādhu vatā. Herein, sādhu is a particle of entreaty. Vatā is for deliberation. Maṃ refers to oneself. Āyasmā addresses another. Evarūpaṃ vā evarūpaṃ vā means one of the long, etc. Kalyāṇakamyataṃ upādāyā means having taken into the mind the desire for beauty, the desire for excellence; its connection is with "āpajjeyya ce," if, when one makes such a stipulation, with his words, one first increases the original intention and buys something more beautiful, for that action there is a dukkata offense for the bhikkhu; with acquisition, it becomes an offense entailing forfeiture. Herein, "This robe of mine was approached without prior invitation from an unrelated gahapati and a stipulation was made, thus it is subject to forfeiture" (pārā. 529); the procedure for forfeiture should be understood in this manner.

Sāvatthiyaṃ upanandaṃ ārabbha cīvare vikappaṃ āpajjanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, ñātake aññātakasaññino vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ. Mahagghaṃ cetāpetukāmaṃ appagghaṃ vā, eteneva mūlena ‘‘aññaṃ evarūpaṃ vā dehī’’ti vadantassa, vuttanayena ñātakappavārite viññāpentassa, attano dhanena gaṇhantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Cīvare bhiyyokamyatā, aññātakaviññatti, tāya ca paṭilābhoti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni catutthasadisānevāti.

It was established in Sāvatthī concerning Upananda, in the matter of making a stipulation regarding a robe, a general regulation, uncommanded, a threefold pācittiya; for one who mistakes a relative for a non-relative, or for one who is doubtful, there is a dukkata. For one who wishes to buy something expensive or something inexpensive, or for one who says with the same price, "Give me something else like this," there is an offense. There is no offense for one who requests as authorized by a relative in the manner stated, or for one who acquires with one's own wealth, or for an insane person, etc. Desire for something better in the robe, requesting from a non-relative, and acquisition through that: these are the three factors here. The origination, etc., are similar to the fourth.

Upakkhaṭasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on a Robe Being Prepared is Concluded.

9. Dutiyaupakkhaṭasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. The Explanation of the Second Training Rule on a Robe Being Prepared

Navame imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Idañhi purimassa anupaññattisadisaṃ, kevalaṃ tattha ekassa pīḷā katā, idha dvinnaṃ, ayamettha viseso, sesaṃ sabbaṃ purimasadisameva. Yathā ca dvinnaṃ, evaṃ bahūnaṃ pīḷaṃ katvā gaṇhatopi āpatti veditabbā. Nissajjanavidhāne ca ‘‘idaṃ me, bhante, cīvaraṃ pubbe appavārite aññātake gahapatike upasaṅkamitvā vikappaṃ āpannaṃ nissaggiya’’nti (pārā. 534) iminā nayena vacanabhedo ñātabboti.

In the ninth, the meaning should be understood in the same way. This is similar to the additional regulation of the previous one, only there, oppression was done to one person, here, to two; this is the difference here, the rest is all the same as the previous one. And just as for two, so also the offense should be understood for taking after oppressing many. And in the procedure for forfeiture, "This robe of mine was approached without prior invitation from an unrelated gahapati and a stipulation was made, thus it is subject to forfeiture" (pārā. 534); the difference in wording should be known in this way.

Dutiyaupakkhaṭasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Second Training Rule on a Robe Being Prepared is Concluded.

10. Rājasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. The Explanation of the Training Rule on Royal Property

rājabhoggoti rājato bhoggaṃ bhuñjitabbaṃ assa atthīti rājabhoggo, ‘‘rājabhogo’’tipi pāṭho, rājato bhogo assa atthīti attho.Cīvaracetāpannanti hiraññādikaṃ akappiyaṃ.Pahiṇeyyāti peseyya.Iminātiādi āgamanasuddhiṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Sace hi ‘‘idaṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno dehī’’ti peseyya, āgamanassa asuddhattā akappiyavatthuṃ ārabbha bhikkhunā kappiyakārakopi niddisitabbo na bhaveyya.Ābhatanti ānītaṃ.Na kho mayantiādi idaṃ kappiyavasena ābhatampi cīvaramūlaṃ īdisena dūtavacanena akappiyaṃ hoti, tasmā taṃ paṭikkhipitabbanti dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Suvaṇṇaṃ rajataṃ kahāpaṇo māsakoti imāni hi cattāri nissaggiyavatthūni, muttā maṇi veḷuriyo saṅkho silā pavāḷaṃ lohitaṅko masāragallaṃ satta dhaññāni dāsidāsakhettavatthupupphārāmaphalārāmādayoti imāni dukkaṭavatthūni ca attano vā cetiyasaṅghagaṇapuggalānaṃ vā atthāya sampaṭicchituṃ na vaṭṭanti, tasmā taṃ sādituṃ na vaṭṭatīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘na kho maya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.

Rājabhoggo means that which is to be enjoyed from the king, that has royal property; "rājabhogo" is also a reading, meaning that has property from the king. Cīvaracetāpannaṃ means the unallowable price of a robe, such as gold, etc. Pahiṇeyyā means should send. Iminā etc. is said to show the purity of arrival. For if he should send, "Give this to the bhikkhu named such-and-such," since the arrival is impure, even if the bhikkhu should designate a kappiya-kāraka concerning the unallowable object, it would not be proper. Ābhataṃ means brought. Na kho mayaṃ etc. is said to show that even the price of a robe brought in an allowable way becomes unallowable with such a message from the messenger, therefore it should be rejected. For gold, silver, kahāpana, and māsa: these four are objects entailing forfeiture; pearls, gems, beryl, conch, stone, coral, ruby, masāragalla, the seven grains, male and female slaves, fields, building sites, flower gardens, fruit gardens, etc.: these are objects entailing a dukkata, and it is not proper to accept them for oneself or for the sake of a cetiya, the Sangha, a group, or an individual; therefore, to show that it is not proper to approve of that, "na kho mayaṃ" etc. is said.

Cīvarañca kho mayaṃ paṭiggaṇhāmāti idaṃ pana attānaṃ uddissa ābhatattā vattuṃ vaṭṭati, tasmā vuttaṃ.Kālenāti yuttapattakālena, yadā no attho hoti, tadā kappiyaṃ cīvaraṃ paṭiggaṇhāmāti attho.Veyyāvaccakaroti kappiyakārako.Niddisitabbotiidaṃ ‘‘atthi panāyasmato koci veyyāvaccakaro’’ti kappiyavacanena vuttattā anuññātaṃ. Sace pana dūto ‘‘ko imaṃ gaṇhātī’’ti vā ‘‘kassa demī’’ti vā vadati, na niddisitabbo.Ārāmiko vā upāsako vātiidaṃ sāruppatāya vuttaṃ, ṭhapetvā pana pañca sahadhammike yo koci kappiyakārako vaṭṭati.Eso kho, āvusotiidaṃ bhikkhussa kappiyavacanadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, evameva hi vattabbaṃ, ‘‘etassa dehī’’tiādi na vattabbaṃ.Saññatto so mayāti āṇatto so mayā, yathā tumhākaṃ cīvarena atthe sati cīvaraṃ dassati, evaṃ vuttoti attho. Dūtena hi evaṃ ārociteyeva taṃ codetuṃ vaṭṭati, neva tassa hatthe datvā gatamattakāraṇena. Sace pana ‘‘ayaṃ veyyāvaccakaro’’ti sammukhā niddiṭṭho hoti, dūto ca sammukhā eva tassa hatthe cetāpannaṃ datvā ‘‘therassa cīvaraṃ kiṇitvā dehī’’ti gacchati, evaṃ ‘‘saññatto so mayā’’ti avuttepi codetuṃ vaṭṭati. Sace pana dūto gacchantova ‘‘ahaṃ tassa hatthe dassāmi, tumhe cīvaraṃ gaṇheyyāthā’’ti bhikkhuno vatvā vā gacchati, aññaṃ vā pesetvā ārocāpeti, evaṃ sati itarampi codetuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Desanāmattameva cetaṃ ‘‘dūtenā’’ti. Yopi attanā āharitvā evaṃ paṭipajjati, tasmimpi idameva lakkhaṇaṃ.Attho me, āvuso, cīvarenāti codanālakkhaṇanidassanametaṃ. Sace hi vācāya codeti, idaṃ vā vacanaṃ yāya kāyaci bhāsāya etassa attho vā vattabbo, ‘‘dehi me, āhara me’’tiādinā nayena pana vattuṃ na vaṭṭati.Abhinipphādeyyāti evaṃ vacībhedaṃ katvā tikkhattuṃ codayamāno paṭilābhavasena sādheyya.Iccetaṃ kusalanti etaṃ sundaraṃ.

Cīvarañca kho mayaṃ paṭiggaṇhāmā—this, however, may be said because it is brought designating oneself. Kālenā means at the proper time, when there is need for us, then we accept an allowable robe. Veyyāvaccakaro means a kappiya-kāraka. Niddisitabbo—this is allowed because it is said with the allowable words, "Is there any kappiya-kāraka for the venerable one?" But if the messenger says, "Who will take this?" or "To whom shall I give it?" he should not be designated. Ārāmiko vā upāsako vā—this is said because it is fitting, but setting aside the five co-religionists, any kappiya-kāraka is suitable. Eso kho, āvuso—this is said to show the allowable words of the bhikkhu; indeed, it should be said just like this, "Give it to this one," etc. should not be said. Saññatto so mayā means he is authorized by me, he has been told, "When you need a robe, he will give you a robe," this is the meaning. For after it has been announced in this way by the messenger, it is proper to urge him, not just because he has given it into his hand and left. But if "This is a veyyāvaccakaro" is designated in person, and the messenger, in person, gives the price into his hand and leaves, saying, "Buy a robe for the elder and give it to him," even without saying "saññatto so mayā," it is proper to urge him. But if the messenger, while going, says to the bhikkhu, "I will give it into his hand, you should take the robe," or sends another and has it announced, in that case too, it is indeed proper to urge the other. This is just a generalization, "by the messenger." For one who brings it himself and acts in this way, this same characteristic applies to him as well. Attho me, āvuso, cīvarenā—this is an example of the characteristic of urging. For if he urges with words, this word or its meaning should be spoken in any language, but it is not proper to say in the manner of "Give it to me, bring it to me," etc. Abhinipphādeyyā means having made such a verbal distinction, urging three times, he should accomplish it by means of acquisition. Iccetaṃ kusalaṃ—this is beautiful.

Chakkhattuparamanti bhāvanapuṃsakavacanametaṃ. Chakkhattuparamañhi tena cīvaraṃ uddissa tuṇhībhūtena ṭhātabbaṃ, na nisīditabbaṃ, na āmisaṃ paṭiggahetabbaṃ, na dhammo bhāsitabbo. ‘‘Kiṃkāraṇā āgatosī’’ti vutte pana ‘‘jānāhi, āvuso’’ti ettakameva vattabbaṃ. Sace nisajjādīni karoti, ṭhānaṃ bhañjati, āgatakāraṇaṃ vināseti, idaṃ kāyena codanāya lakkhaṇadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Ettha ca ukkaṭṭhaparicchedena tissannaṃ codanānaṃ channañca ṭhānānaṃ anuññātattā codanāya diguṇaṃ ṭhānaṃ anuññātaṃ hoti, tasmā sace codetiyeva, na tiṭṭhati, cha codanāyo labbhanti. Sace tiṭṭhatiyeva, na codeti, dvādasa ṭhānāni labbhanti. Sace ubhayaṃ karoti, ekāya codanāya dve ṭhānāni hāpetabbāni. Tattha yo ekadivasameva punappunaṃ gantvā chakkhattuṃ codeti, sakiṃyeva vā gantvā ‘‘attho me, āvuso, cīvarenā’’ti chakkhattuṃ vadati, tathā ekadivasameva punappunaṃ gantvā dvādasakkhattuṃ tiṭṭhati, sakiṃyeva vā gantvā tatra tatra ṭhāne tiṭṭhati, sopi sabbacodanāyo sabbaṭṭhānāni ca bhañjati, ko pana vādo nānādivasesu evaṃ karontassāti ayamettha vinicchayo. Ye pana kappiyakārake dāyako sayameva gantvā nisīdati te satakkhattumpi codetuṃ vaṭṭati. Yo pana ubhohi pi aniddiṭṭho mukhavevaṭikakappiyakārako ca parammukhakappiyakārako ca, so na kiñci vattabbo, evaṃ idha dasapi kappiyakārakā dassitā honti.

Chakkhattuparama means this is a neuter noun in the sense of cultivating virtue. For with "chakkhattuparama", when the donor remains silent, the monk should stand there intending to ask for a robe, and he should not sit down, nor accept food, nor preach the Dhamma. However, if asked, "Why have you come?" he should say only, "Know (this), āvuso." If he sits down, etc., he breaks the rule of remaining, and destroys the reason for coming. This is said to show the characteristic of censure through action. Here, because three censures and six standings are allowed by the extreme limit, the number of standings allowed is twice the number of censures. Therefore, if he only censures and does not remain standing, six censures are obtained. If he only remains standing and does not censure, twelve standings are obtained. If he does both, two standings must be deducted for one censure. Here, if someone goes again and again on the same day and censures six times, or goes only once and says six times, "I need a robe, āvuso," or if someone goes again and again on the same day and remains standing twelve times, or goes only once and stands in various places, even that person breaks all censures and all standings; what to say of someone doing so on different days? This is the judgment here. But for those donors who, acting as kappiyakārakas, go and sit down themselves, it is permissible to censure them even a hundred times. But the kappiyakāraka who is not designated by either (the monk or the donor), whether he is a mukhavevaṭikakappiyakāraka or a parammukhakappiyakāraka, should not be spoken to at all. Thus, here, ten types of kappiyakārakas are shown.

Tatoce uttarīti vuttacodanāṭhānaparimāṇato uttari.Nissaggiyanti uttari vāyāmamānassa sabbappayogesu dukkaṭaṃ, paṭilābhena nissaggiyaṃ hoti. Ettha ca ‘‘idaṃ me, bhante, cīvaraṃ atirekatikkhattuṃ codanāya atirekachakkhattuṃ ṭhānena abhinipphāditaṃ nissaggiya’’nti (pārā. 539) iminā nayena nissajjanavidhānaṃ veditabbaṃ.Yatassa cīvaracetāpannaṃ ābhatanti yato rājato vā rājabhoggato vā assa bhikkhuno cīvaracetāpannaṃ ānītaṃ, ‘‘yatvassā’’tipi pāṭho, ayameva attho.Tatthāti tassa rañño vā rājabhoggassa vā santikaṃ, samīpatthe hi idaṃ bhummavacanaṃ.Na taṃ tassa bhikkhuno kiñci atthaṃ anubhotīti taṃ cetāpannaṃ tassa bhikkhuno appamattakampi kammaṃ na nipphādeti.Yuñjantāyasmanto sakanti āyasmanto attano santakaṃ dhanaṃ pāpuṇantu.Mā vo sakaṃvinassāti tumhākaṃ santakaṃ mā vinassatu.Ayaṃ tattha sāmīcīti ayaṃ tattha anudhammatā lokuttaradhammaṃ anugatā, vattadhammatāti attho, tasmā evaṃ akaronto vattabhede dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati.

Tato ce uttarī means more than the stated measure of censure and standing. Nissaggiya means if he makes extra effort, there is a dukkaṭa for every attempt, and it becomes nissaggiya upon acquisition. Here, the method of relinquishment should be understood in this way: "This robe of mine, bhante, has been obtained by exceeding three censures and exceeding six standings; it is to be relinquished" (pārā. 539). Yatassa cīvaracetāpannaṃ ābhataṃ means from whatever king or royal treasury that money for the robe has been brought for that monk; "yatvassā" is also a reading, and this is the meaning. Tattha means to that king or royal treasury; this locative case indicates proximity. Na taṃ tassa bhikkhuno kiñci atthaṃ anubhotī means that money does not accomplish even a small task for that monk. Yuñjantāyasmanto sakaṃ means may the venerable ones obtain their own wealth. Mā vo sakaṃ vinassā means may your own property not be lost. Ayaṃ tattha sāmīcī means this is conformity there, following the supramundane Dhamma, meaning it is the proper course of conduct; therefore, one who does not do so incurs a dukkaṭa for a breach of conduct.

Sāvatthiyaṃ upanandaṃ ārabbha ‘‘ajjuṇho, bhante, āgamehī’’ti (pārā. 537) vuccamāno nāgamesi, tasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, ūnakesu codanāṭhānesu atirekasaññino vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ. Acodanāya laddhe, sāmikehi codetvā dinne, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Kappiyakārakassa bhikkhuno niddiṭṭhabhāvo, dūtena appitatā, tatuttarivāyāmo, tena vāyāmena paṭilābhoti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni catutthasadisānevāti.

In Sāvatthi, regarding Upananda, it was enacted in the situation where he was told, "Come for alms, bhante," (pārā. 537) but he did not come. It is a general enactment, not a command, and it is a triple pācittiya. For one who perceives an excess where there are deficient censures and standings, or for one who is doubtful, there is a dukkaṭa. There is no offense in what is obtained without censure, given after censuring by the owners, and for an insane person, etc. Here, these four factors (are present): the fact that the kappiyakāraka is not designated to the monk, it being given by a messenger, extra effort beyond that, and acquisition through that effort. The origin, etc., are similar to the fourth.

Rājasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Rāja (King) training rule is finished.

Cīvaravaggo paṭhamo.

The first chapter, the Robe Section, is finished.

2. Eḷakalomavaggo

2. The Eḷakalomavagga (Woolen Cloth Chapter)

1. Kosiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Kosiyasikkhāpada (Silk Training Rule)

kosiyamissakanti ekenāpi kosiyaṃsunā antamaso tassa karaṇaṭṭhāne vātavegena nipātitenāpi missīkataṃ.Santhatanti same bhūmibhāge kosiyaṃsūni uparūpari santharitvā kañjiyādīhi siñcitvā kattabbatālakkhaṇaṃ.Kārāpeyya nissaggiyanti karaṇakārāpanappayogesu dukkaṭaṃ, paṭilābhena nissaggiyaṃ hoti. Ettha ca ‘‘idaṃ me, bhante, kosiyamissakaṃ santhataṃ kārāpitaṃ nissaggiya’’nti (pārā. 544) iminā nayena nissajjanavidhānaṃ veditabbaṃ, imasseva vacanassa anusārena ito paraṃ sabbasanthataṃ veditabbaṃ. Sakkā hi ettāvatā jānitunti na taṃ ito paraṃ dassayissāma.

Kosiyamissaka means mixed with even a single silk thread, even if it fell by the force of the wind at the place where it was made. Santhata means spread out on a level ground, the silk threads are spread on top of each other and sprinkled with kañji, etc., having the characteristic of being suitable to be cut. Kārāpeyya nissaggiya means there is a dukkaṭa for the attempts of making and having it made, and it becomes nissaggiya upon acquisition. Here, the method of relinquishment should be understood in this way: "This silk-mixed spread, bhante, I had it made; it is to be relinquished" (pārā. 544). According to the direction of this very statement, all subsequent spreads should be understood. Because it is possible to understand with just this much, we will not show it beyond this.

Āḷaviyaṃ chabbaggiye ārabbha kosiyamissakaṃ santhataṃ kārāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, asādhāraṇapaññatti, attano atthāya kārāpanavasena sāṇattikaṃ, attanā vippakatapaayosāpananayena catukkapācittiyaṃ, aññassatthāya karaṇakārāpanesu aññena kataṃ paṭilabhitvā paribhuñjane ca dukkaṭaṃ. Vitānādikaraṇe, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Kosiyamissakabhāvo, attano atthāya santhatassa karaṇakārāpanaṃ, paṭilābho cāti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni dhovāpanasikkhāpade vuttanayenevāti.

In Āḷavī, regarding the group of six monks, it was enacted in the situation of having a silk-mixed spread made. It is not a general enactment; it is a command in the sense of having it made for oneself. It is a quadruple pācittiya according to the method of drying out what has been spoiled by oneself. There is a dukkaṭa for making and having it made for another, and for using what has been made by another after acquiring it. There is no offense in making a canopy, etc., and for an insane person, etc. Here, these three factors (are present): the state of being silk-mixed, the making and having a spread made for oneself, and the acquisition. The origin, etc., are just as stated in the training rule on washing.

Kosiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Kosiyasikkhāpada (Silk Training Rule) is finished.

2. Suddhakāḷakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Suddhakāḷakasikkhāpada (Pure Black Wool Training Rule)

suddhakāḷakānanti suddhānaṃ kāḷakānaṃ aññehi amissīkatānaṃ. Vesāliyaṃ chabbaggiye ārabbha tādisaṃ santhataṃ karaṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sesaṃ paṭhamasadisamevāti.

Suddhakāḷakānaṃ means pure black wool, unmixed with other (colors). In Vesālī, regarding the group of six monks, it was enacted in the situation of having such a spread made; the rest is just like the first.

Suddhakāḷakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Suddhakāḷakasikkhāpada (Pure Black Wool Training Rule) is finished.

3. Dvebhāgasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Dvebhāgasikkhāpada (Two-Thirds Training Rule)

dve bhāgāti dve koṭṭhāsā.Ādātabbāti gahetabbā.Gocariyānanti kapilavaṇṇānaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha vinicchayo – yattakehi kattukāmo hoti, tesu tulayitvā dve koṭṭhāsā kāḷakānaṃ gahetabbā, eko odātānaṃ, eko gocariyānaṃ. Ekassāpi kāḷakalomassa atirekabhāve nissaggiyaṃ hoti, ūnakaṃ vaṭṭati.

Dve bhāgā means two parts. Ādātabbā means to be taken. Gocariyānaṃ means the color of cow's fur. This is the judgment here: in whatever amount he intends to make (the spread), having weighed it, two parts should be taken of black wool, one of white, and one of the color of cow's fur. If even one hair of black wool is in excess, it becomes nissaggiya; less is allowable.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye ārabbha tādisaṃ santhataṃ karaṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, kiriyākiriyaṃ, sesaṃ paṭhamasadisamevāti. Imāni pana tīṇi nissajjitvā paṭiladdhānipi paribhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭanti.

In Sāvatthi, regarding the group of six monks, it was enacted in the situation of having such a spread made. It is an action (involving appropriateness and inappropriateness); the rest is just like the first. However, these three, even if relinquished and re-acquired, are not permissible to use.

Dvebhāgasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Dvebhāgasikkhāpada (Two-Thirds Training Rule) is finished.

4. Chabbassasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Chabbassasikkhāpada (Six-Year Training Rule)

orena ce channaṃ vassānanti channaṃ vassānaṃ orimabhāge, antoti attho.Aññatra bhikkhusammutiyāti yaṃ saṅgho gilānassa bhikkhuno santhatasammutiṃ deti, taṃ ṭhapetvā aladdhasammutikassa chabbassabbhantare aññaṃ santhataṃ karontassa nissaggiyaṃ hoti.

Orena ce channaṃ vassānaṃ means in the part before six years, meaning within the limit. Aññatra bhikkhusammutiyā means except for the Saṅgha's agreement given to a sick monk regarding a spread, it becomes nissaggiya for one who makes another spread within six years without having obtained agreement.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahule bhikkhū ārabbha anuvassaṃ santhataṃ kārāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘aññatra bhikkhusammutiyā’’ti ayamettha anupaññatti, sā yena laddhā hoti, tassa yāva rogo na vūpasammati, vūpasanto vā puna kuppati, tāva gatagataṭṭhāne anuvassampi kātuṃ vaṭṭati, aññassatthāya kāretuṃ, katañca paṭilabhitvā paribhuñjitumpi vaṭṭati, sesaṃ paṭhamasadisamevāti.

In Sāvatthi, regarding many monks, it was enacted in the situation of having a spread made every year. "Aññatra bhikkhusammutiyā" is an additional enactment here; for the one by whom it has been obtained, as long as the illness does not subside, or having subsided, flares up again, it is permissible to make (a spread) every year in the place he goes. It is also permissible to have it made for another, and to use what has been made after acquiring it; the rest is just like the first.

Chabbassasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Chabbassasikkhāpada (Six-Year Training Rule) is finished.

5. Nisīdanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Nisīdanasikkhāpada (Sitting Cloth Training Rule)

purāṇasanthataṃnāma yattha sakimpi nisinno vā hoti nipanno vā.Samantāti ekapassato vaṭṭaṃ vā caturassaṃ vā chinditvā gahitaṭṭhānaṃ yathā vidatthimattaṃ hoti, evaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Santharantena pana ekadese vā santharitabbaṃ, vijaṭetvā vā missakaṃ katvā santharitabbaṃ, evaṃ thirataraṃ hoti.Anādā ceti sati purāṇasanthate aggahetvā. Asati pana aggahetvāpi vaṭṭati, aññassatthāya kāretuṃ, katañca paṭilabhitvā paribhuñjitumpi vaṭṭati.

Purāṇasanthataṃ means where he has sat or lain down even once. Samantā means cutting away from one side, either round or square, the place taken should be such that it is the measure of a span. But in spreading (the new cloth), it should be spread in one part, or it should be spread after unraveling it and making it mixed; thus it becomes more firm. Anādā ce means without taking if there is an old spread. But if there is not, it is permissible even without taking; it is permissible to have it made for another, and to use what has been made after acquiring it.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahule bhikkhū ārabbha santhatavissajjanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sesaṃ tatiyasadisamevāti.

In Sāvatthi, regarding many monks, it was enacted in the situation of giving away a spread; the rest is just like the third.

Nisīdanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Nisīdanasikkhāpada (Sitting Cloth Training Rule) is finished.

6. Eḷakalomasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Eḷakalomasikkhāpada (Wool Gathering Training Rule)

addhānamaggappaṭipannassāti addhānasaṅkhātaṃ dīghamaggaṃ paṭipannassa, sabbañcetaṃ vatthumattadīpanameva, yattha katthaci pana dhammena labhitvā gaṇhato doso natthi.Tiyojanaparamanti gahitaṭṭhānato tiyojanappamāṇaṃ desaṃ.Sahatthāti sahatthena, attanā haritabbānīti attho.Asante hāraketi asanteyeva aññasmimpi hārake. Sace pana atthi, taṃ gāhetuṃ vaṭṭati. Attanā pana antamaso vātābādhappaṭikāratthaṃ suttakena abandhitvā kaṇṇacchidde pakkhittānipi ādāya tiyojanaṃ ekaṃ pādaṃ atikkāmentassa dukkaṭaṃ, dutiyapādātikkame nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

Addhānamaggappaṭipannassā means for one who has set out on a long journey; all this is only a showing of the material situation. However, there is no fault in taking it after obtaining it rightfully anywhere. Tiyojanaparamaṃ means a distance of three yojanas from the place where it was taken. Sahatthā means with one's own hand; it means they should be carried by oneself. Asante hārake means even when another carrier is not present. But if there is one, it is permissible to have him take it. However, for one who, even for the purpose of warding off wind or illness, takes it himself, even if tied with thread and put in the ear holes, and exceeds one foot beyond three yojanas, there is a dukkaṭa; with the exceeding of the second foot, there is a nissaggiya pācittiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ aññataraṃ bhikkhuṃ ārabbha tiyojanātikkamanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, asādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, ūnakatiyojane atirekasaññino vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ. Tiyojanaṃ haraṇapaccāharaṇe, vāsādhippāyena gantvā tato paraṃ haraṇe, acchinnaṃ vā nissaṭṭhaṃ vā paṭilabhitvā haraṇe, aññaṃ harāpane, antamaso suttakenapi baddhakatabhaṇḍaharaṇe, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Eḷakalomānaṃ akatabhaṇḍatā, paṭhamappaṭilābho, attanā ādāya vā aññassa ajānantassa yāne pakkhipitvā vā tiyojanātikkamanaṃ, āharaṇapaccāharaṇaṃ, avāsādhippāyatāti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.

In Sāvatthi, regarding a certain monk, it was enacted in the situation of exceeding three yojanas. It is not a general enactment, not a command, and it is a triple pācittiya. For one who perceives an excess where there are deficient three yojanas, or for one who is doubtful, there is a dukkaṭa. There is no offense in carrying (wool) within three yojanas and bringing it back, going with the intention of dwelling and then carrying it further, acquiring what has been cut or discarded and carrying it, having another carry it, carrying even a bundle tied with just a thread, and for an insane person, etc. Here, these five factors (are present): the fact that the wool is not made into a bundle, the first acquisition, exceeding three yojanas by carrying it oneself or placing it in the vehicle of another who does not know, the carrying and bringing back, and not intending to dwell (there). The origin of the wool, the action, there is no freedom from perception, it is unintentional, it is an offense by enactment, it is a bodily action, it is triple-citta, it is triple-vedana.

Eḷakalomasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Eḷakalomasikkhāpada (Wool Gathering Training Rule) is finished.

7. Eḷakalomadhovāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Eḷakalomadhovāpanasikkhāpada (Wool Washing Training Rule)

Sattame sakkesu chabbaggiye ārabbha eḷakalomadhovāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ. Tattha purāṇacīvaradhovāpane vuttanayeneva sabbopi vinicchayo veditabbo.

In the seventh, regarding the group of six monks in Sakka, it was enacted in the situation of washing wool. There, all the judgment should be understood in the same way as stated in the washing of an old robe.

Eḷakalomadhovāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Eḷakalomadhovāpanasikkhāpada (Wool Washing Training Rule) is finished.

8. Jātarūpasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Jātarūpasikkhāpada (Gold Training Rule)

jātarūparajatanti suvaṇṇañceva rūpiyañca, apica kahāpaṇo lohamāsakadārumāsakajatumāsakādayopi ye vohāraṃ gacchanti, sabbe te idha rajatantveva vuttā.Uggaṇheyya vāti attano atthāya diyyamānaṃ vā yatthakatthaci ṭhitaṃ vā nippariggahitaṃ disvā sayaṃ gaṇheyya vā.Uggaṇhāpeyya vāti tadeva aññena gāhāpeyya vā.Upanikkhittaṃ vā sādiyeyyāti ‘‘idaṃ ayyassa hotū’’ti evaṃ sammukhā vā, ‘‘asukasmiṃ nāma ṭhāne mama hiraññasuvaṇṇaṃ, taṃ tuyhaṃ hotū’’ti evaṃ parammukhā ṭhitaṃ vā kevalaṃ vācāya vā hatthamuddāya vā ‘‘tuyha’’nti vatvā pariccattaṃ yo kāyavācāhi appaṭikkhipitvā cittena adhivāseyya, ayaṃ ‘‘sādiyeyyā’’ti vuccati. Sace pana cittena sādiyati, gaṇhitukāmo hoti, kāyena vā vācāya vā ‘‘nayidaṃ kappatī’’ti paṭikkhipati, kāyavācāhi appaṭikkhipitvā suddhacitto hutvā ‘‘nayidaṃ amhākaṃ kappatī’’ti na sādiyati, vaṭṭati.Nissaggiyanti uggahaṇādīsu yaṃkiñci karontassa aghanabaddhesu vatthūsu vatthugaṇanāya nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ. Taṃ nissajjantena ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, rūpiyaṃ paṭiggahesiṃ, idaṃ me, bhante, nissaggiyaṃ, imāhaṃ saṅghassa nissajjāmī’’ti (pārā. 584) evaṃ saṅghamajjheyeva nissajjitabbaṃ. Sace tattha koci gahaṭṭho āgacchati, ‘‘idaṃ jānāhī’’ti vattabbo. ‘‘Iminā kiṃ āhariyyatū’’ti bhaṇante pana ‘‘idaṃ nāmā’’ti avatvā ‘‘sappiādīni bhikkhūnaṃ kappantī’’ti evaṃ kappiyaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ. Sace so āharati, rūpiyappaṭiggāhakaṃ ṭhapetvā sabbehi bhājetvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ. Rūpiyappaṭiggāhakassa pana yaṃ tappaccayā uppannaṃ, taṃ aññena labhitvā diyyamānampi antamaso tato nibbattarukkhacchāyāpi paribhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭati. Sace pana so kiñci āharituṃ na icchati, ‘‘imaṃ chaṭṭehī’’ti vattabbo. Sace yattha katthaci nikkhipati, gahetvā vā gacchati, na vāretabbo. No ce chaṭṭeti, pañcaṅgasamannāgato bhikkhu rūpiyachaṭṭako sammannitabbo. Tena animittaṃ katvāva gūthaṃ viya chaṭṭetabbaṃ. Sace nimittaṃ karoti, dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati.

Jātarūparajata: Gold and silver. Furthermore, coins, copper coins, māsaka of metal, māsaka of wood, māsaka of lacquer, etc., which are in circulation, all these are referred to here as silver. Uggaṇheyya vā: Should take it himself, seeing something given for his own benefit, or placed somewhere, or not designated as belonging to anyone. Uggaṇhāpeyya vā: Should cause another to take that same thing. Upanikkhittaṃ vā sādiyeyyā: If someone says, either in person, "May this belong to the venerable one," or indirectly, "In such and such a place is my gold and silver; may that belong to you," and it is relinquished merely by saying "yours" either verbally or with a gesture, if one mentally approves without rejecting it by body or speech, this is called "approving." But if one approves mentally, wanting to take it, but rejects it with body or speech, saying, "This is not allowable," or if, without rejecting it by body or speech, one has a pure mind and does not approve, thinking, "This is not allowable for us," that is allowable. Nissaggiya: Among the acts of taking, etc., whatever leads to the nissaggiya pācittiya due to the item classification of unattached items. That which is to be forfeited should be forfeited in the midst of the Sangha, saying, "Venerable sirs, I accepted silver; this, venerable sirs, is to be forfeited by me; I forfeit this to the Sangha" (pārā. 584). If a householder comes there, he should be told, "Understand this." If he asks, "What should be obtained with this?", one should indicate what is allowable, saying, "Ghee and so on are allowable for the monks," without specifying "this." If he brings something, it should be divided among all and used, except for the one who accepted the silver. However, anything arising as a result of that cause is not allowed to be used by the one who accepted the silver, even if someone else obtains it and offers it, not even the shade of a tree grown from it. But if he does not wish to bring anything, he should be told, "Throw this away." If he throws it away somewhere or takes it and goes away, he should not be prevented. If he does not throw it away, a monk possessing five qualities should be appointed as the silver-disposer. He should throw it away like excrement without making a sign. If he makes a sign, he incurs a dukkaṭa.

Rājagahe upanandaṃ ārabbha rūpiyappaṭiggahaṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, sāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, arūpiye rūpiyasaññino vematikassa vā, saṅghacetiyādīnaṃ atthāya gaṇhantassa, muttāmaṇiādippaṭiggahaṇe ca dukkaṭaṃ. Ratanasikkhāpadanayena nikkhipantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Jātarūparajatabhāvo, attuddesikatā, gahaṇādīsu aññatarabhāvoti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīsu siyā kiriyaṃ gahaṇena āpajjanato, siyā akiriyaṃ paṭikkhepassa akaraṇato, sesaṃ sañcaritte vuttanayamevāti.

It was prescribed in Rājagaha concerning the matter of accepting silver, regarding Upananda; it is a general rule, not commanded, a tikapācittiya; a dukkaṭa for one who perceives silver in something that is not silver or who is in doubt, for one who accepts it for the sake of the Sangha, a shrine, etc., and in the acceptance of pearls, gems, etc. No offense for one who disposes of it according to the rule for precious items, and for an insane person, etc. Being gold or silver, intending for oneself, and one of the acts of taking, etc.—these are the three factors here. Regarding origin, etc., it may be an action because of incurring the offense through taking, it may be a non-action because of not rejecting it; the rest is as stated in the section on conduct.

Jātarūpasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Jātarūpa Training Rule is Finished.

9. Rūpiyasaṃvohārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Commentary on the Training Rule on Transactions with Silver

nānappakārakanti katādivasena anekavidhaṃ.Rūpiyasaṃvohāranti jātarūparajataparivattanaṃ. Purimasikkhāpadena hi nissaggiyavatthudukkaṭavatthūnaṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ vāritaṃ, iminā parivattanaṃ. Tasmā dukkaṭavatthunā dukkaṭavatthukappiyavatthūni, kappiyavatthunā ca dukkaṭavatthuṃ parivattentassa dukkaṭaṃ. Nissaggiyavatthunā pana nissaggiyavatthuṃ vā dukkaṭavatthuṃ vā kappiyavatthuṃ vā, dukkaṭavatthukappiyavatthūhi ca nissaggiyavatthuṃ parivattentassa nissaggiyaṃ hoti, taṃ purimanayānusāreneva saṅghamajjhe nissajjitabbaṃ, nissaṭṭhavatthusmiñca tattha vuttanayeneva paṭipajjitabbaṃ.

Nānappakāraka: Of various kinds, in terms of activities, etc. Rūpiyasaṃvohāra: The exchanging of gold and silver. For the previous training rule prohibited the acceptance of items involving nissaggiya and dukkaṭa offenses, and this one prohibits the exchanging. Therefore, a dukkaṭa is incurred by exchanging items involving a dukkaṭa offense for allowable items, or by exchanging allowable items for items involving a dukkaṭa offense. However, a nissaggiya is incurred by exchanging an item involving a nissaggiya offense for an item involving a nissaggiya offense, an item involving a dukkaṭa offense, or an allowable item, or by exchanging items involving dukkaṭa offenses or allowable items for an item involving a nissaggiya offense; that should be forfeited in the midst of the Sangha according to the method previously stated, and one should conduct oneself with regard to the forfeited item in the manner stated there.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye ārabbha rūpiyasaṃvohāravatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, yaṃ attano dhanena parivatteti, tassa vā dhanassa vā rūpiyabhāvo ceva, parivattanañcāti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Kiriyaṃ, sesaṃ anantarasikkhāpade vuttanayamevāti.

It was prescribed in Sāvatthi concerning the matter of transactions with silver, regarding the Group-of-Six monks; it is a general rule, not commanded; being silver of one's own property with which one exchanges, and the act of exchanging—these are the two factors here. It is an action; the rest is as stated in the immediately preceding training rule.

Rūpiyasaṃvohārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Training Rule on Transactions with Silver is Finished.

10. Kayavikkayasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Commentary on the Training Rule on Buying and Selling

nānappakārakanti cīvarādīnaṃ kappiyabhaṇḍānaṃ vasena anekavidhaṃ.Kayavikkayanti kayañceva vikkayañca. ‘‘Iminā imaṃ dehi, imaṃ āhara, parivattehi, cetāpehī’’ti iminā hi nayena parassa kappiyabhaṇḍaṃ gaṇhanto kayaṃ samāpajjati, attano kappiyabhaṇḍaṃ dento vikkayaṃ samāpajjati. Tasmā ṭhapetvā pañca sahadhammike yaṃ evaṃ attano kappiyabhaṇḍaṃ datvā mātu santakampi kappiyabhaṇḍaṃ gaṇhāti, taṃ nissaggiyaṃ hoti. Vuttalakkhaṇavasena saṅghagaṇapuggalesu yassa kassaci nissajjitabbaṃ, ‘‘imaṃ bhuñjitvā vā gahetvā vā idaṃ nāma āhara vā karohi vā’’ti rajanādiṃ āharāpetvā vā dhamakaraṇādiparikkhāraṃ bhūmisodhanādiñca navakammaṃ kāretvā vā santaṃ vatthu nissajjitabbaṃ, asante pācittiyaṃ desetabbameva.

Nānappakāraka: Of various kinds, in terms of allowable goods such as robes, etc. Kayavikkaya: Buying and selling. Indeed, one completes buying when taking allowable goods from another in this way: "Give this for this; bring this; exchange; have it priced." One completes selling when giving one's own allowable goods. Therefore, setting aside the five co-residents in the Dhamma, it is a nissaggiya when one gives one's own allowable goods and takes allowable goods belonging even to one's mother. It should be forfeited to any Sangha, group, or individual according to the stated characteristics, "Use this, or take this, and bring or do such and such." After having dyes, etc., brought, or after having equipment for making robes, etc., or repairs done, such as ground-leveling for construction, the existing item should be forfeited. If there is no existing item, a pācittiya should be confessed.

Sāvatthiyaṃ upanandaṃ ārabbha kayavikkayavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘idaṃ kiṃ agghatī’’ti evaṃ agghaṃ pucchantassa, yassa hatthato bhaṇḍaṃ gaṇhitukāmo hoti, taṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ antamaso tasseva puttabhātukampi kappiyakārakaṃ katvā ‘‘iminā idaṃ nāma gahetvā dehī’’ti ācikkhantassa, ‘‘idaṃ amhākaṃ atthi, amhākañca iminā ca iminā ca attho’’ti evaṃ vatvā attano dhanena laddhaṃ gaṇhantassa, sahadhammikehi saddhiṃ kayavikkayaṃ karontassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Yaṃ attano dhanena parivatteti, yena ca parivatteti, tesaṃ kappiyavatthutā, asahadhammikatā, kayavikkayāpajjanañcāti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Sesaṃ rūpiyasaṃvohāre vuttanayamevāti.

It was prescribed in Sāvatthi concerning the matter of buying and selling, regarding Upananda; a dukkaṭa for one who asks the price, saying, "How much does this cost?"; setting aside the one from whose hand one wishes to take the goods, and making another, even a son or brother of that person, an allowable agent, and instructing, "Take such and such with this and give it"; for one who says, "We have this, and we need this and this with this," and takes something obtained with his own wealth; no offense for one who engages in buying and selling with co-residents in the Dhamma, and for an insane person, etc. Being allowable goods of one's own property with which one exchanges, not being a co-resident in the Dhamma, and incurring the offense of buying and selling—these are the three factors here. The rest is as stated in the training rule on transactions with silver.

Kayavikkayasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Training Rule on Buying and Selling is Finished.

Eḷakalomavaggo dutiyo.

The Second Chapter, on Woolen Cloth, is Finished.

3. Pattavaggo

3. The Chapter on Bowls

1. Pattasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Commentary on the Training Rule on Bowls

atirekapattoti anadhiṭṭhito ca avikappito ca, so ca kho ukkaṭṭhamajjhimomakānaṃ aññataro pamāṇayuttova, tassa pamāṇaṃ ‘‘aḍḍhāḷhakodanaṃ gaṇhātī’’tiādinā (pārā 602) nayena pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ vinicchayo – anupahatapurāṇasālitaṇḍulānaṃ sukoṭṭitaparisuddhānaṃ dve magadhanāḷiyo gahetvā tehi taṇḍulehi anuttaṇḍulamakilinnamapiṇḍikaṃ suvisadaṃ kundamakuḷarāsisadisaṃ avassāvitodanaṃ pacitvā niravasesaṃ patte pakkhipitvā tassa odanassa catutthabhāgappamāṇo nātighano nātitanuko hatthahāriyo sabbasambhārasaṅkhato muggasūpo pakkhipitabbo, tato ālopassa anurūpaṃ yāvacarimālopappahonakaṃ macchamaṃsādibyañjanaṃ pakkhipitabbaṃ, sappitelatakkarasakañjiyādīni pana gaṇanūpagāni na honti. Tāni hi odanagatikāneva, neva hāpetuṃ, na vaḍḍhetuṃ sakkonti, evametaṃ sabbampi pakkhittaṃ sace pattassa mukhavaṭṭiyā heṭṭhimarājisamaṃ tiṭṭhati, suttena vā hīrena vā chindantassa suttassa vā hīrassa vā heṭṭhimantaṃ phusati, ayaṃukkaṭṭhonāma patto. Sace taṃ rājiṃ atikkamma thūpīkataṃ tiṭṭhati, ayaṃukkaṭṭhomakonāma patto. Sace taṃ rājiṃ na sampāpuṇāti, antogadhameva hoti, ayaṃukkaṭṭhukkaṭṭhonāma patto. Ukkaṭṭhato upaḍḍhappamāṇomajjhimo. Majjhimapattato upaḍḍhappamāṇoomako. Tesampi vuttanayeneva bhedo veditabbo. Iccetesu navasu ukkaṭṭhukkaṭṭho ca omakomako cāti dve apattā, sesā satta pattā pamāṇayuttā nāma, ayametthasaṅkhepo, vitthāro pana samantapāsādikāyaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.598 ādayo) vutto, tasmā evaṃ pamāṇayuttaṃ samaṇasāruppena pakkaṃ ayopattaṃ vā mattikāpattaṃ vā labhitvā purāṇapattaṃ paccuddharitvā antodasāhe adhiṭṭhātabbo. Sace panassa mūlato kākaṇikamattampi dātabbaṃ avasiṭṭhaṃ hoti, adhiṭṭhānupago na hoti, appaccuddharantena vikappetabbo. Tattha paccuddharaṇādhiṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ cīvaravagge vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ, vikappanalakkhaṇaṃ parato vakkhāma. Sace pana koci apattako bhikkhu dasa patte labhitvā sabbe attanāva paribhuñjitukāmo hoti, ekaṃ pattaṃ adhiṭṭhāya puna divase taṃ paccuddharitvā añño adhiṭṭhātabbo, etenupāyena vassasatampi pariharituṃ sakkā. Yo panassa patto mukhavaṭṭito heṭṭhā dvaṅgulamattokāsato paṭṭhāya yatthakatthaci kaṅgusitthanikkhamanamattena chiddena chiddo hoti, so adhiṭṭhānupago na hoti. Puna chidde pākatike kate adhiṭṭhātabbo, sesaṃ adhiṭṭhānavijahanaṃ ticīvare vuttanayameva.

Atirekapatto: An extra bowl, that is, one that is neither authorized nor allocated, and that is suitable in size, being one of the best, middling, or inferior. Its size is stated in the Pali according to the method beginning with "it holds half an āḷhaka of rice" (pārā 602). Herein is the judgment: Taking two Magadha nāḷis of undamaged, old, well-milled, and pure rice, and cooking it into a very clear, dense lump resembling a heap of jasmine buds, without any unhusked grains and without draining the water, and placing it completely in the bowl, and then adding lentil soup, not too thick, not too thin, easy to handle, complete with all ingredients, equal to a quarter of the amount of rice; then adding fish, meat, or other relish appropriate to a mouthful, sufficient until the last mouthful. However, ghee, oil, buttermilk, juices, and porridge are not to be counted, for they merely serve to moisten the rice; they can neither decrease nor increase it. If all of this, when placed in the bowl, reaches the level of the lower line of the mouth rim of the bowl, touching the lower end of a thread or string when cutting it, this is called the best bowl. If it stands raised like a dome, exceeding that line, this is called the inferior best bowl. If it does not reach that line but remains within, this is called the superior best bowl. Half the size of the best bowl is the middling bowl. Half the size of the middling bowl is the inferior bowl. The distinction of these should also be understood in the manner stated. Thus, among these nine, the superior best and the inferior inferior are two bowls that are not bowls; the remaining seven bowls are called suitable in size. This is the summary here; however, the detailed explanation is given in the Samantapāsādikā (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.598 ff.). Therefore, having obtained a bowl of iron or clay, properly sized and suitable for a renunciant, and having disauthorized the old bowl within the ten days, it should be authorized. But if even a kākaṇika's worth remains to be given from its original value, it is not fit for authorization; it should be allocated without disauthorizing it. There, the characteristics of disauthorizing and authorizing should be understood in the manner stated in the chapter on robes, and the characteristics of allocating we will state later. If a monk who has no bowl obtains ten bowls, wishing to use all of them himself, he should authorize one bowl, and on the next day, disauthorizing that one, he should authorize another; in this way, he can use them even for a hundred years. However, a bowl that has a hole anywhere from two finger-breadths below the mouth rim that is big enough for husks and bits of rice to fall through is not fit for authorization. When the hole is naturally filled, it should be authorized again; the rest of the disauthorization and abandonment of authorization is as stated in the section on the three robes.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye ārabbha atirekapattadhāraṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, asādhāraṇapaññatti, sesavaṇṇanākkamo cīvaravaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva veditabboti.

It was prescribed in Sāvatthi concerning the matter of keeping extra bowls, regarding the Group-of-Six monks; it is not a general rule; the order of the remaining explanation should be understood in the manner stated in the first training rule of the chapter on robes.

Pattasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Training Rule on Bowls is Finished.

2. Ūnapañcabandhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Commentary on the Training Rule on a Bowl with Fewer than Five Bindings

ūnapañcabandhano,nāssa pañca bandhanāni pūrentīti attho, tena ūnapañcabandhanena, itthambhūtassa lakkhaṇe karaṇavacanaṃ. Tattha yasmā abandhanassāpi pañca bandhanāni na pūrenti sabbaso natthitāya, tenassa padabhājane ‘‘ūnapañcabandhano nāma patto abandhano vā ekabandhano vā’’tiādi (pārā. 613) vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ūnapañcabandhanenā’’ti ca vuttattā yassa pañcabandhano patto hoti pañcabandhanokāso vā, tassa so apatto, tasmā aññaṃ viññāpetuṃ vaṭṭati. Yasmiṃ pana patte mukhavaṭṭito heṭṭhā bhaṭṭhā dvaṅgulappamāṇā ekāpi rāji hoti, taṃ tassā rājiyā heṭṭhimapariyante pattavedhakena vijjhitvā pacitvā suttarajjukamakacirajjukādīhi vā tipusuttakena vā bandhitvā taṃ bandhanaṃ āmisassa alagganatthaṃ tipupaṭṭakena vā kenaci baddhasilesādinā vā paṭicchādetabbaṃ, so ca patto adhiṭṭhahitvā paribhuñjitabbo, sukhumaṃ vā chiddaṃ katvā bandhitabbo, phāṇitaṃ jhāpetvā pāsāṇacuṇṇena bandhitumpi vaṭṭati. Yassa pana dve rājiyo vā ekāyeva vā caturaṅgulā, tassa dve bandhanāni dātabbāni. Yassa tisso vā ekāyeva vā chaḷaṅgulā, tassa tīṇi. Yassa catasso vā ekāyeva vā aṭṭhaṅgulā, tassa cattāri. Yassa pañca vā ekāyeva vā dasaṅgulā, so baddhopi abaddhopi apattoyeva, añño viññāpetabbo, esa tāva mattikāpatte vinicchayo.

Ūnapañcabandhano: Meaning that it does not fulfill five bindings; by that, with a bowl that has fewer than five bindings; the instrumental case denotes the characteristic. Here, since even a bowl without any bindings does not fulfill five bindings because they are completely absent, therefore in the analysis of the term it is stated, "A bowl with fewer than five bindings means a bowl without bindings or with one binding, etc." (pārā. 613). And since it is stated "Ūnapañcabandhanena", a bowl with five bindings or space for five bindings is not a bowl; therefore, it is allowable to request another. However, in a bowl that has even one crack of about two finger-breadths below the mouth rim, that should be pierced with a bowl-boring tool at the lower end of that crack and bound with thread, string, mūñja string, etc., or with triple thread; and that binding should be covered with triple cloth or some adhesive, such as hardened clay, to prevent the sticking of food; and that bowl should be authorized and used. A fine hole can also be made and bound; it is also allowable to melt molasses and bind it with stone powder. For one that has two cracks or one crack of four finger-breadths, two bindings should be given. For one that has three cracks or one crack of six finger-breadths, three should be given. For one that has four cracks or one crack of eight finger-breadths, four should be given. For one that has five cracks or one crack of ten finger-breadths, whether bound or unbound, it is not a bowl; another should be requested. This, for now, is the judgment regarding clay bowls.

Yo ca tassā bhikkhuparisāyātiettha tehi bhikkhūhi pakatiyā eva attano attano adhiṭṭhitaṃ pattaṃ gahetvā sannipatitabbaṃ, tato sammatena pattaggāhāpakena pattassa vijjamānaguṇaṃ vatvā ‘‘bhante, imaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti thero vattabbo. Sace therassa so patto na ruccati, appicchatāya vā na gaṇhāti, vaṭṭati. Tasmiṃ pana anukampāya agaṇhantassa dukkaṭaṃ. Sace pana gaṇhāti, therassa pattaṃ dutiyattheraṃ gāhāpetvā eteneva upāyena yāva saṅghanavakā gāhāpetabbo, tena pariccattapatto panapattapariyantonāma,so tassa bhikkhuno padātabbo. Tenāpi so yathā viññāpetvā gahitapatto, evameva sakkaccaṃ paribhuñjitabbo. Sace pana taṃ jigucchanto adese vā nikkhipati, aparibhogena vā paribhuñjati, vissajjeti vā, dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati.

Yo ca tassā bhikkhuparisāyā: Here, those monks should gather, each naturally taking his own authorized bowl. Then, the bowl-receiver, approved by the Sangha, should state the existing qualities of the bowl and say to the Elder, "Venerable sir, please take this." If the Elder does not like that bowl, he does not take it because he is content with little; that is allowable. However, there is a dukkaṭa for one who does not take it out of compassion. If he takes it, the bowl of the Elder should be given to the second Elder, and in this way, it should be given to the newest monk in the Sangha. The bowl relinquished by him is called the bowl-recipient, it should be given to that monk. He too should use it respectfully, just as the bowl was requested and taken. But if he despises it, or puts it in an unsuitable place, or uses it without care, or discards it, he incurs a dukkaṭa.

Sakkesu chabbaggiye ārabbha bahū patte viññāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, abandhanena abandhanaṃ, ekabandhanaṃ, dubandhanaṃ, tibandhanaṃ, catubbandhanaṃ, abandhanokāsaṃ, ekadviticatubbandhanokāsaṃ cetāpeti, evaṃ ekekena pattena dasadhā dasavidhaṃ pattaṃ. Cetāpanavasena pana ekaṃ nissaggiyapācittiyasataṃ hoti. Naṭṭhapattassa, bhinnapattassa, attano ñātakappavārite, aññassa ca ñātakappavārite, tassevatthāya viññāpentassa, attano dhanena gaṇhato, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Adhiṭṭhānupagapattassa ūnapañcabandhanatā, attuddesikatā, akataviññatti, tāya ca paṭilābhoti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni dhovāpanasikkhāpade vuttanayānevāti.

Concerning the six monks of the Chabbaggiya group in Sakka, [this rule] was established in connection with requesting many bowls regarding the matter of solicitation. It is a general rule, not an order, and the binding is without a bond, with one bond, with two bonds, with three bonds, with four bonds, opportunity without a bond, opportunity with one, two, three, or four bonds. Thus, with each bowl, there are ten kinds, ten ways of [violating the rule] regarding bowls. However, based on the mode of causing [the making of bowls], there is one hundred [rules of] nissaggiya pācittiya. There is no offense for [a bowl that is] lost, for a broken bowl, for one requested by a relative who has been given authority, and for another relative who has been given authority, for the one requesting for the same purpose, for one taking it with his own wealth, and for the insane, etc. Regarding a bowl that does not accord with one's determination, it is deficient in five bonds, is for one's own sake, the request is not made, and there is gain from it; these are the four factors involved here. The origin, etc., are in the same manner as stated in the training rule on washing.

Ūnapañcabandhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Commentary on the Training Rule on Bowls Deficient in Five Bonds is Finished.

3. Bhesajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Commentary on the Training Rule on Medicines

paṭisāyanīyānīti paṭisāyitabbāni, paribhuñjitabbānīti attho. Etena sayaṃ uggahetvā nikkhittānaṃ sattāhātikkamepi anāpattiṃ dasseti, tāni hi paṭisāyituṃ na vaṭṭanti.Bhesajjānīti bhesajjakiccaṃ karontu vā, mā vā, evaṃ laddhavohārāni.Sappināma gavādīnaṃ sappi, yesaṃ maṃsaṃ kappati, tesaṃ sappi. Tathānavanītaṃ. Telaṃnāma tilasāsapamadhūkaeraṇḍakavasādīhi nibbattitaṃ.Madhunāma makkhikāmadhumeva.Phāṇitaṃnāma ucchurasaṃ upādāya pana apakkā vā avatthukapakkā vā sabbāpi ucchuvikati ‘‘phāṇita’’nti veditabbaṃ.Tāni paṭiggahetvāti tāni bhesajjāni paṭiggahetvā, na tesaṃ vatthūni. Etena ṭhapetvā vasātelaṃ yānettha yāvakālikavatthukāni, tesaṃ vatthūni paṭiggahetvā katāni sappiādīni sattāhaṃ atikkāmayatopi anāpattiṃ dasseti. Vasātelaṃ pana kāle paṭiggahitaṃ kāle nipakkaṃ kāle saṃsaṭṭhaṃ telaparibhogena paribhuñjituṃ anuññātaṃ, tasmā ṭhapetvā manussavasaṃ aññaṃ yaṃkañci vasaṃ purebhattaṃ paṭiggahetvā sāmaṃ pacitvā nibbattitatelampi sattāhaṃ nirāmisaparibhogena vaṭṭati. Anupasampannena pacitvā dinnaṃ pana tadahupurebhattaṃ sāmisampi vaṭṭati, aññesaṃ yāvakālikavatthūnaṃ vatthuṃ pacituṃ na vaṭṭatiyeva. Nibbattitasappi vā navanītaṃ vā pacituṃ vaṭṭati, taṃ pana tadahupurebhattampi sāmisaṃ paribhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭati. Purebhattaṃ paṭiggahitakhīrādito anupasampannena pacitvā katasappiādīni pana tadahupurebhattaṃ sāmisānipi vaṭṭanti, pacchābhattato paṭṭhāya anajjhoharaṇīyāni, sattāhātikkamepi anāpatti.Sannidhikārakaṃ paribhuñjitabbānīti sannidhiṃ katvā nidahitvā purebhattaṃ paṭiggahitāni tadahupurebhattaṃ sāmisaparibhogenāpi vaṭṭanti, pacchābhattato paṭṭhāya pana tāni ca, pacchābhattaṃ paṭiggahitāni ca sattāhaṃ nirāmisaparibhogena paribhuñjitabbānīti attho. ‘‘Paribhuñjitabbānī’’ti ca vacanato antosattāhe abbhañjanādīnaṃ atthāya adhiṭṭhahitvā ṭhapitesu anāpatti, yāvajīvikāni sāsapamadhūkaeraṇḍakaaṭṭhīni telakaraṇatthaṃ paṭiggahetvā tadaheva katatelaṃ sattāhakālikaṃ, dutiyadivase kataṃ chāhaṃ vaṭṭati, tatiyadivase kataṃ pañcāhaṃ, catutthapañcamachaṭṭhasattamadivase kataṃ tadaheva vaṭṭati. Sace yāva aruṇassa uggamanā tiṭṭhati, nissaggiyaṃ hoti, aṭṭhamadivase kataṃ anajjhoharaṇīyaṃ, anissaggiyattā pana bāhiraparibhogena vaṭṭati. Sacepi na karoti, telatthāya paṭiggahitasāsapādīnaṃ pana pāḷiyaṃ anāgatasappiādīnañca sattāhātikkame dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati. Sītudakena katamadhūkapupphaphāṇitaṃ pana phāṇitagatikameva, ambaphāṇitādīni yāvakālikāni. Yaṃ panettha sattāhakālikaṃ, taṃ nissaṭṭhaṃ paṭilabhitvāpi aruādīni vā makkhetuṃ, ajjhoharituṃ vā na vaṭṭati. Padīpe kāḷavaṇṇe vā upanetabbaṃ, aññassa bhikkhuno kāyikaparibhogaṃ vaṭṭati. Yaṃ pana nirapekkho pariccajitvā puna labhati, taṃ ajjhoharitumpi vaṭṭati. Visuṃ ṭhapitasappiādīsu, ekabhājane vā amissitesu vatthugaṇanāya āpattiyo.

Paṭisāyanīyānīti: “To be resorted to,” meaning to be consumed. This shows that even if more than seven days have passed for those [medicines] that were taken up by oneself and put away, there is no offense, for they are not suitable to be resorted to. Bhesajjānīti: “Medicines,” whether they perform the function of medicine or not, are things that are commonly referred to as such. Sappi means ghee from cows, etc., those whose meat is allowable, their ghee. Similarly, navanītaṃ means fresh butter. Telaṃ means oil produced from sesame, mustard, madhūka, castor oil, fat, etc. Madhu means only bee honey. Phāṇitaṃ means all sugarcane products, made by boiling sugarcane juice, whether boiled with ingredients or without ingredients, should be known as phāṇita. Tāni paṭiggahetvā means having accepted those medicines, not their ingredients. This shows that even if ghee, etc., made by setting aside fat and oil—whatever ingredients there are that are allowable for the duration of a watch—and accepting their ingredients, exceeds seven days, there is no offense. However, fat and oil, accepted at the proper time, prepared at the proper time, mixed at the proper time, are allowed to be consumed by using oil. Therefore, even oil made by setting aside human fat and any other fat, accepting it before the meal, and cooking it oneself, is allowable for seven days without meat. But if [it is] cooked and given by one who is not fully ordained, even with meat before the meal of that day, it is allowable, but it is not at all allowable to cook the ingredients of other things allowable for the duration of a watch. It is allowable to cook ghee or fresh butter that has been produced, but it is not allowable to consume it with meat even before the meal of that day. However, ghee, etc., made by one who is not fully ordained from milk, etc., accepted before the meal, even with meat before the meal of that day, are allowable, [but] from after the meal onwards they are not to be consumed; even if more than seven days have passed, there is no offense. Sannidhikārakaṃ paribhuñjitabbānīti: Having made a store, having put [them] away, those accepted before the meal are allowable even with meat before the meal of that day, but from after the meal onwards, both those and those accepted after the meal are to be consumed for seven days without meat, this is the meaning. And because of the word "paribhuñjitabbānī," there is no offense in keeping [them] having determined [to use them] within seven days for the purpose of anointing, etc.; [and for] things allowable for life, such as sesame, madhūka, castor oil seeds, having accepted [them] for the purpose of making oil, oil made on that very day is allowable for seven days, [oil] made on the second day is allowable for six days, [oil] made on the third day [is allowable for] five days, [oil] made on the fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh days is allowable on that very day. If it remains until the rising of dawn, it becomes nissaggiya; [oil] made on the eighth day is not to be consumed, but because it is not nissaggiya, it is allowable for external use. Even if he does not make [oil], if more than seven days pass for sesame, etc., accepted for the sake of oil, and also for ghee, etc., not mentioned in the Pāḷi, he incurs an offense of dukkata. However, phāṇita made with cold water and madhūka flowers is in the same category as phāṇita; mango phāṇita, etc., are allowable for life. Whatever here is allowable for seven days, even if it is relinquished and reacquired, is not allowable for anointing the eyes, etc., or for consuming. It should be brought to a lamp or to a dark color, [but] physical use is allowable for another monk. However, that which he abandons without expectation and then obtains again, that is allowable even to consume. Regarding ghee, etc., kept separately, or in one container, [but] unmixed, the offenses are according to the number of items.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahule bhikkhū ārabbha sattāhaṃ atikkamanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sesaṃ cīvaravaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva veditabbanti.

Established in Sāvatthi concerning many monks in connection with the matter of exceeding seven days. The rest should be understood in the same way as stated in the first training rule of the Civara Vagga.

Bhesajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Commentary on the Training Rule on Medicines is Finished.

4. Vassikasāṭikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Commentary on the Training Rule on the Rainy Season Cloth

māso seso gimhānanti catunnaṃ gimhamāsānaṃ eko pacchimamāso seso.Pariyesitabbanti gimhānaṃ pacchimamāsassa paṭhamadivasato paṭṭhāya yāva kattikamāsassa pacchimadivaso, tāva ‘‘kālo vassikasāṭikāyā’’tiādinā satuppādakaraṇena, saṅghassa pavāritaṭṭhānato, attano ñātakappavāritaṭṭhānato pana ‘‘detha me vassikasāṭikacīvara’’ntiādikāya viññattiyāpi pariyesitabbaṃ. Aññātakaappavāritaṭṭhāne satuppādaṃ karontassa vattabhede dukkaṭaṃ, yathā vā tathā vā ‘‘detha me’’tiādivacanena viññāpentassa aññātakaviññattisikkhāpadena nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.Katvā nivāsetabbanti gimhānaṃ pacchimaddhamāsassa paṭhamadivasato paṭṭhāya yāva kattikamāsassa pacchimadivaso, tāva sūcikammaniṭṭhānena sakimpi vaṇṇabhedamattarajanena kappabindukaraṇena ca katvā paridahitabbā. Ettāvatā gimhānaṃ pacchimo māso pariyesanakkhettaṃ, pacchimo addhamāso karaṇanivāsanakkhettampi, vassānassa catūsu māsesu sabbampi taṃ vaṭṭatīti ayamattho dassito hoti. Yo cāyaṃ gimhānaṃ pacchimo māso anuññāto, ettha katapariyesitampi vassikasāṭikaṃ adhiṭṭhātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sace tasmiṃ māse atikkante vassaṃ ukkaḍḍhiyati, puna māsaparihāraṃ labhati, dhovitvā pana nikkhipitvā vassūpanāyikadivase adhiṭṭhātabbā. Sace satisammosena vā appahonakabhāvena vā akatā hoti. Te ca dve māse vassānassa catumāsanti cha māse parihāraṃ labhati. Sace pana kattikamāse kathinaṃ atthariyati, aparepi cattāro māse labhati, evaṃ dasa māsā honti. Tato parampi satiyā paccāsāya taṃ mūlacīvaraṃ katvā ṭhapentassa ekamāsanti evaṃ ekādasa māse parihāraṃ labhati, ito paraṃ ekāhampi na labhati.

Māso seso gimhānaṃ means one last month remains of the four months of summer. Pariyesitabbaṃ: From the first day of the last month of summer until the last day of the month of Kattika, it should be sought, either by generating the intention [to make a rainy season cloth] during that time period called "the time for a rainy season cloth," etc., or by requesting “Give me a rainy season cloth,” etc., from a place authorized by the Sangha, or from a place authorized by a relative who has been given authority. If one generates the intention in a place not authorized by a relative, he incurs a dukkata for each utterance. When requesting with words like "Give me," etc., he incurs a nissaggiya pācittiya by the training rule on requesting from non-relatives. Katvā nivāsetabbaṃ: From the first day of the last half-month of summer until the last day of the month of Kattika, it should be made with the completion of needlework, and worn, even once with the alteration of color and by making a kappabindu. To this extent, the last month of summer is the period for seeking, the last half-month is also the period for making and wearing, and it is all allowable during all four months of the rainy season; this meaning is shown. And this last month of summer that is allowed, the rainy season cloth sought and made in this period is not allowable to be determined [for use]. If, when that month has passed, the rains are extended, he gets another month of grace; having washed it, however, it must be put away and determined [for use] on the day of entering the rains. If it has not been made due to forgetfulness or due to not being able to complete it, he gets a period of grace for six months, those two months [of summer] and the four months of the rains. If, however, the Kathina is spread in the month of Kattika, he gets another four months, thus there are ten months. Even after that, if he keeps that basic cloth made with the expectation of [using it] again, [he gets] one month, thus he gets a period of grace for eleven months, after that he does not get [even] one day.

Orena ce māsoseso gimhānanti gimhānaṃ pacchimamāsassa orimabhāge yāva hemantassa paṭhamadivaso, tāvāti attho.Pariyeseyyāti etesu sattasu piṭṭhisamayamāsesu aññātakaappavāritaṭṭhānato satuppādakaraṇena pariyesantassa nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ, viññāpentassa aññātakaviññattisikkhāpadena nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ, ñātakappavārite viññāpentassa tena sikkhāpadena anāpatti, satuppādaṃ karontassa iminā sikkhāpadena āpatti.Orenaddhamāso seso gimhānanti gimhānassa pacchimaddhamāsato orimabhāge ekasmiṃ addhamāse.Katvā nivāseyyāti etthantare dhammena uppannampi katvā nivāsentassa nissaggiyaṃ hoti.

Orena ce māso seso gimhānaṃ means in the part before the last month of summer, up to the first day of winter, this is the meaning. Pariyeseyyā: If he seeks, generating the intention in these seven intermediate months from a place not authorized by a relative, he incurs a nissaggiya pācittiya. If he requests, he incurs a nissaggiya pācittiya by the training rule on requesting from non-relatives. If he requests from a relative who has been given authority, there is no offense by that training rule, but he incurs an offense by this training rule for generating the intention. Orenaddhamāso seso gimhānaṃ means in one half-month before the last half-month of summer. Katvā nivāseyyā: If he wears [a rainy season cloth] that has arisen according to the Dhamma in this interval, it becomes nissaggiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye bhikkhū ārabbha vassikasāṭikapariyesanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, asādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, ūnakamāsaddhamāsesu atirekasaññino vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ, tathā satiyā vassikasāṭikāya naggassa kāyaṃ ovassāpayato. Pokkharaṇiyādīsu pana nhāyantassa vā acchinnacīvarassa vā naṭṭhacīvarassa vā ‘‘anivatthaṃ corā harantī’’ti evaṃ āpadāsu vā nivāsayato ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Ettha ca vassikasāṭikāya attuddesikatā, asamaye pariyesanatā, tāya ca paṭilābhoti imāni tāva pariyesanāpattiyā tīṇi aṅgāni. Sacīvaratā, āpadābhāvo, vassikasāṭikāya sakabhāvo, asamaye nivāsananti imāni nivāsanāpattiyā cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni dhovāpanasikkhāpade vuttanayānevāti.

Established in Sāvatthi concerning the Chabbaggiya monks in connection with the matter of seeking a rainy season cloth. It is not a general rule, it is not an order, it is a tikapācittiya. For one who thinks that [a month or half-month] is deficient, or for one who is in doubt, there is a dukkata. Likewise, if he lets the rain fall on his body naked with the rainy season cloth, [he incurs a dukkata]. However, there is no offense for one bathing in ponds, etc., or for one whose robe is torn, or for one whose robe is lost, or when there is danger such as "Thieves are carrying away [my robe] not worn," etc., or for one who is insane, etc., who are wearing [a robe]. And here, these are the three factors of the offense of seeking: the rainy season cloth is for one's own sake, seeking is out of season, and there is gain from it. These are the four factors of the offense of wearing: having a robe, absence of danger, the rainy season cloth is his own, and wearing it out of season. The origin, etc., are in the same manner as stated in the training rule on washing.

Vassikasāṭikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Commentary on the Training Rule on the Rainy Season Cloth is Finished.

5. Cīvaraacchindanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Commentary on the Training Rule on Taking Away a Robe

sāmaṃ cīvaraṃ datvāti veyyāvaccādīni paccāsisamāno sayameva datvā.Acchindeyyāti veyyāvaccādīni akarontaṃ disvā sakasaññāya acchindantassa vatthugaṇanāya āpattiyo.Acchindāpeyyātiettha pana ‘‘acchindā’’ti āṇattiyā dukkaṭaṃ, acchindesu yattakāni āṇattāni, tesaṃ gaṇanāya āpattiyo.

Sāmaṃ cīvaraṃ datvā means having given [the robe] oneself, expecting services, etc. Acchindeyyā means having seen [someone] not doing services, etc., if he takes it away with his own perception, the offenses are according to the number of items. Acchindāpeyyā: Here, however, there is a dukkata by the order "Take away," and there are offenses according to the number of orders given to those who take it away.

Sāvatthiyaṃ upanandaṃ ārabbha cīvaraacchindanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, sāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ. Anupasampanne upasampannasaññino, vematikassa, anupasampannasaññino vā, upasampannassāpi vikappanupagapacchimacīvaraṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ parikkhāraṃ, anupasampannassa ca yaṃkiñci acchindato vā dukkaṭaṃ. Tena tuṭṭhena vā kupitena vā dinnaṃ pana tassa vissāsaṃ vā gaṇhantassa ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Vikappanupagapacchimacīvaratā, sāmaṃ dinnatā, sakasaññitā, upasampannatā, kodhavasena acchindanaṃ vā acchindāpanaṃ vāti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāni aññatra vedanāya. Vedanā pana idha dukkhavedanāyevāti.

Established in Sāvatthi concerning Upananda in connection with the matter of taking away a robe. It is a general rule, it is an order, it is a tikapācittiya. For one who is not fully ordained, thinking that [someone] is fully ordained, or for one who is in doubt, or for one who thinks [someone] is not fully ordained, or for one who is fully ordained, having set aside the last robe that has not been given away in sharing, if he takes away another requisite, or for one who is not fully ordained, if he takes away anything, there is a dukkata. However, there is no offense for one giving [a robe] out of joy or anger, or for one accepting his confidence, or for one who is insane, etc. These are the five factors involved here: the last robe that has not been given away in sharing, having given [the robe] oneself, having one's own perception, being fully ordained, and taking away or causing to take away due to anger. The origin, etc., are similar to the case of not giving; except for feeling. Here, however, feeling is only painful feeling.

Cīvaraacchindanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Commentary on the Training Rule on Taking Away a Robe is Finished.

6. Suttaviññattisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Commentary on the Training Rule on Requesting Thread

suttanti chabbidhaṃ khomasuttādiṃ vā tesaṃ anulomaṃ vā.Viññāpetvāti cīvaratthāya yācitvā.Vāyāpeyyāti ‘‘cīvaraṃ me, āvuso, vāyathā’’ti akappiyāya viññattiyā vāyāpeyya.Nissaggiyanti evaṃ vāyāpentassa yo tantavāyo cīvaravāyanatthaṃ turivemasajjanādike payoge karoti, tassa sabbappayogesu dukkaṭaṃ, paṭilābhena nissaggiyaṃ hoti.

Suttaṃ means thread of six kinds, such as linen thread, etc., or what is in accordance with them. Viññāpetvā means having requested for the sake of a robe. Vāyāpeyyā means if he has [thread] woven with an unallowable request, saying "Weave a robe for me, friend." Nissaggiyaṃ: For the weaver who thus weaves, whatever effort the weaver makes in using the loom in weaving the robe, there is a dukkata for every effort, [and it is] nissaggiya with the gain.

Rājagahe chabbaggiye bhikkhū ārabbha cīvaravāyāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, viññāpitasuttaṃ viññāpitatantavāyena vāyāpentassa dīghato vidatthimatte tiriyañca hatthamatte vīte nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ. Iti yāva cīvaraṃ vaḍḍhati, tāva iminā pamāṇena āpattiyo vaḍḍhanti. Teneva pana aviññattiyā laddhasuttaṃ vāyāpentassa yathā pubbe nissaggiyaṃ, evaṃ idha dukkaṭaṃ. Teneva viññattañca aviññattañca vāyāpentassa sace vuttappamāṇena kedārabaddhaṃ viya cīvaraṃ hoti, akappiyasuttamaye paricchede pācittiyaṃ, itarasmiṃ tatheva dukkaṭaṃ. Tato ce ūnatarā paricchedā, sabbaparicchedesu dukkaṭāneva. Atha ekantarikena vā suttena dīghato vā kappiyaṃ tiriyaṃ akappiyaṃ katvā vītaṃ hoti, pubbe vuttappamāṇagaṇanāya dukkaṭāni. Eteneva upāyena kappiyatantavāyena akappiyasutte, kappiyākappiyehi tantavāyehi suttepi kappiye akappiye kappiyākappiye ca āpattibhedo veditabbo. Tikapācittiyaṃ, avāyāpite vāyāpitasaññino vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ. Cīvarasibbanaāyogakāyabandhanaaṃsabaddhakapattatthavikaparissāvanānaṃ atthāya suttaṃ viññāpentassa, ñātakappavāritehi kappiyasuttaṃ vāyāpentassa, aññassatthāya, attano dhanena, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti, cīvaratthāya viññāpitasuttaṃ, attuddesikatā, akappiyatantavāyena akappiyaviññattiyā vāyāpananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni dhovāpanasikkhāpade vuttanayānevāti.

Established in Rājagaha concerning the Chabbaggiya monks in connection with the matter of having a robe woven. It is a general rule, not an order, [it is] nissaggiya pācittiya if the requested thread is being woven by a weaver who has been requested, when it has passed one span in length and one hand in width across. Thus, as long as the robe grows, the offenses grow with this measure. However, for one having [thread] woven that was obtained without a request, just as before it was nissaggiya, so here it is a dukkata. For one having woven both requested and unrequested [thread], if the robe is like a paddy field bound by dikes with the stated measure, there is a pācittiya for a division made of unallowable thread, in the other case, it is just a dukkata. If the divisions are smaller than that, all the divisions are just dukkatas. But if allowable thread is made lengthwise and unallowable [thread] is made crosswise with one interval, and it has passed [the measure], there are dukkatas according to the calculation of the previously stated measure. In this same way, the distinction in offenses should be understood with a weaver who is allowable with unallowable thread, with weavers who are allowable and unallowable with allowable, unallowable, and allowable-unallowable thread. It is a tikapācittiya, there is a dukkata for one who thinks that [thread] has been woven when it has not been woven, or for one who is in doubt. There is no offense for one requesting thread for the sake of sewing a robe, a waistband, a shoulder strap, a bowl bag, or a strainer, for one having allowable thread woven by relatives who have been given authority, for the sake of another, with one's own wealth, and for one who is insane, etc. These are the three factors involved here: thread requested for the sake of a robe, being for one's own sake, having [it] woven by an unallowable weaver with an unallowable request. The origin, etc., are in the same manner as stated in the training rule on washing.

Suttaviññattisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Commentary on the Training Rule on Requesting Thread is Finished.

7. Mahāpesakārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Training Rule on Great Gifts

tatra ce so bhikkhūti yatra gāme vā nigame vā tantavāyā, tatra.Pubbe appavāritoti cīvarasāmikehi appavārito hutvā.Vikappaṃ āpajjeyyāti visiṭṭhakappaṃ adhikavidhānaṃ āpajjeyya. Idāni yenākārena vikappaṃ āpanno hoti, taṃ dassetuṃidaṃ kho, āvusotiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthaāyatanti dīghaṃ.Vitthatanti puthulaṃ.Appitanti ghanaṃ.Suvītanti suṭṭhu vītaṃ, sabbaṭṭhānesu samaṃ katvā vītaṃ.Suppavāyitanti suṭṭhu pavāyitaṃ, sabbaṭṭhānesu samaṃ katvā tante pasāritaṃ.Suvilekhitanti lekhaniyā suṭṭhu vilekhitaṃ.Suvitacchitanti kocchena suṭṭhu vitacchitaṃ, suṭṭhu niddhotanti attho.Piṇḍapātamattampīti ettha ca na bhikkhuno piṇḍapātadānamattena taṃ nissaggiyaṃ hoti, sace pana te tassa vacanena cīvarasāmikānaṃ hatthato suttaṃ gahetvā īsakampi āyataṃ vā vitthataṃ vā appitaṃ vā karonti, atha tesaṃ payoge bhikkhuno dukkaṭaṃ, paṭilābhena nissaggiyaṃ hoti.

Tatra ce so bhikkhū ti, that is, in whatever village or town there are weavers. Pubbe appavārito ti, having not been previously invited by the owners of the cloth. Vikappaṃ āpajjeyyā ti, would fall into a specific stipulation, a further specification. Now, to show in what manner he falls into the stipulation, idaṃ kho, āvuso ti etc. is said. There, āyataṃ ti, long. Vitthataṃ ti, wide. Appitaṃ ti, dense. Suvītaṃ ti, well woven, woven by making it even in all places. Suppavāyitaṃ ti, well spread, spread the threads by making them even in all places. Suvilekhitaṃ ti, well marked with a stylus. Suvitacchitaṃ ti, well brushed with a brush, meaning well cleaned. Piṇḍapātamattampī ti, here, even with just the alms-food offering, it does not become nissaggiya for the bhikkhu; but if they, by his word, take the thread from the hands of the cloth owners and make it even slightly long or wide or dense, then with their effort there is a dukkaṭa for the bhikkhu, and with the acquisition, it becomes nissaggiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ upanandaṃ ārabbha cīvare vikappaṃ āpajjanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, ñātake aññātakasaññino vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ. Ñātakappavāritānaṃ tantavāyehi, aññassa vā atthāya, attano vā dhanena, mahagghaṃ vāyāpetukāmaṃ appagghaṃ vāyāpentassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Aññātakaappavāritānaṃ tantavāye upasaṅkamitvā vikappamāpajjanatā, cīvarassa attuddesikatā, tassa vacanena suttavaḍḍhanaṃ, cīvarappaṭilābhoti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni dhovāpanasikkhāpade vuttanayānevāti.

It was established in Sāvatthī in connection with a matter of Upānanda falling into a stipulation regarding cloth. It is a general rule, not commanded, a three-fold pācittiya. For one who is uncertain in the perception of a known person as unknown, there is a dukkaṭa. There is no offense for those who are invited, for weavers, or for the sake of another, or with one’s own money, wanting to weave something expensive, weaving something inexpensive, and for the insane, etc. Approaching weavers who are unknown and uninvited and falling into a stipulation, the cloth being intended for oneself, the increase of thread by his word, the acquisition of the cloth—these are the four factors here. The origination, etc., are to be understood in the same way as stated in the training rule on washing.

Mahāpesakārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Great Request Training Rule is finished.

8. Accekacīvarasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Accekacīvarasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

dasāhānāgatanti dasa ahāni dasāhaṃ, tena dasāhena anāgatā dasāhānāgatā, dasāhena asampattāti attho, taṃ dasāhānāgataṃ, accantasaṃyogavasena bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ.Kattikatemāsikapuṇṇamanti paṭhamakattikapuṇṇamaṃ, idhāpi paṭhamapadassa anupayogatā purimanayeneva bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yato paṭṭhāya paṭhamappavāraṇā ‘‘dasāhānāgatā’’ti vuccati, sacepi tāni divasāni accantameva bhikkhuno accekacīvaraṃ uppajjeyya, ‘‘accekaṃ ida’’nti jānamānena bhikkhunā sabbampi paṭiggahetabbanti. Tena pavāraṇāmāsassa juṇhapakkhapañcamito paṭṭhāya uppannassa cīvarassa nidhānakālo dassito hoti. Kāmañcesa ‘‘dasāhaparamaṃ atirekacīvaraṃ dhāretabba’’ntiimināva siddho, aṭṭhuppattivasena pana apubbaṃ viya atthaṃ dassetvā sikkhāpadaṃ ṭhapitaṃ.Accekacīvaranti gamikagilānagabbhiniabhinavuppannasaddhānaṃ puggalānaṃ aññatarena ‘‘vassāvāsikaṃ dassāmī’’ti evaṃ ārocetvā dinnaṃ. Sace taṃ pure pavāraṇāya vibhajitaṃ, yena gahitaṃ, tena vassacchedo na kātabbo, karoti ce, taṃ cīvaraṃ saṅghikaṃ hoti.Yāva cīvarakālasamayanti anatthate kathine yāva vassānassa pacchimo māso, atthate kathine yāva pañca māsā, tāva nikkhipitabbaṃ.

Dasāhānāgataṃ ti, ten days is dasāhaṃ, not arrived by that ten days is dasāhānāgataṃ, not reached by ten days, that is the meaning; that dasāhānāgataṃ, the usage is in the sense of abundance by way of absolute connection. Kattikatemāsikapuṇṇamaṃ ti, the first Kattika full moon; here too, the non-usage of the first word is a usage in the sense of abundance in the same way as before. This is said: from when, starting from the first invitation, it is said "ten days not arrived," even if those days have completely passed and an accekacīvaraṃ arises for the bhikkhu, knowing "this is accekaṃ," all of it should be accepted by the bhikkhu. Thus, the time for storing the cloth that arose starting from the fifth day of the bright fortnight of the invitation month is shown. Although this is accomplished by "extra cloth is to be kept for at most ten days," the training rule was established showing a meaning as if unprecedented, however, due to arising. Accekacīvaraṃ ti, to one of the individuals: a traveler, a sick person, a pregnant woman, a newly inspired person, saying "I will give a rains-residence gift" and having announced thus it is given. If that is distributed before the invitation, the one by whom it was taken should not break the rains; if he does, that cloth belongs to the Saṅgha. Yāva cīvarakālasamayaṃ ti, until the time for cloth, in the absence of the laying down of the kathina, until the last month of the rains, in the presence of the laying down of the kathina, until five months, so long it should be stored.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahule bhikkhū ārabbha accekacīvarassa cīvarakālasamayaṃ atikkamanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sesamettha cīvaravaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva veditabbanti.

It was established in Sāvatthī in connection with many bhikkhus, regarding the matter of exceeding the time for cloth of accekacīvara. The rest here is to be understood in the same way as stated in the first training rule of the Cloth Chapter.

Accekacīvarasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Accekacīvara Training Rule is finished.

9. Sāsaṅkasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Sāsaṅkasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

upavassaṃ kho panāti etthaupavassanti upavassa, upavasitvāti vuttaṃ hoti, upasampajjantiādīsu (vibha. 570) viya hettha anunāsiko daṭṭhabbo, vassaṃ upagantvā vasitvā cāti attho. Imassa ca padassa ‘‘tathārūpesu bhikkhu senāsanesu viharanto’’tiiminā sambandho, idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – vassaṃ upagantvā vasitvā ca tato paraṃ pacchimakattikapuṇṇamapariyosānakālaṃ yāni kho pana tāni āraññakāni…pe… antaraghare nikkhipeyyāti. Tatthaāraññakānīti sabbapacchimāni āropitena ācariyadhanunā gāmassa indakhīlato paṭṭhāya pañcadhanusatappamāṇe padese katasenāsanāni. Sace pana aparikkhitto gāmo hoti, parikkhepārahaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya minetabbaṃ. Sace vihārassa parikkhepo vā aparikkhittassa yaṃ gāmato sabbapaṭhamaṃ senāsanaṃ vā cetiyaṃ vā bodhi vā dhuvasannipātaṭṭhānaṃ vā yāva, taṃ tāva pakatimaggena minetabbaṃ, aññaṃ maggaṃ kātuṃ, amaggena vā minetuṃ na vaṭṭati.Sāsaṅkasammatānīti corādīnaṃ niviṭṭhokāsādidassanena ‘‘sāsaṅkānī’’ti sammatāni, evaṃ saññātānīti attho. Saha paṭibhayenasappaṭibhayāni,corehi manussānaṃ hataviluttākoṭitabhāvadassanato sannihitabalavabhayānīti attho.

Upavassaṃ kho panā ti, here, upavassaṃ ti, approaching the rains, having resided, is said; here, the nasal consonant should be seen as in upasampajjantiādīsu (vibha. 570), meaning having gone to the rains and having resided. And of this word, there is a connection with "while dwelling in such kinds of bhikkhu lodgings;" this is said: having gone to the rains and having resided, and after that, until the end of the final Kattika full moon time, whatever those forest lodgings are…and should keep [the robe] inside the village. There, āraññakānī ti, all the furthest ones, lodgings made in a place measuring five hundred bow-lengths starting from the boundary pillar of the village with the teacher's bow set up. But if the village is unfenced, it should be measured starting from the place suitable for fencing. If the enclosure of the monastery or the first lodging or cetiya or Bodhi tree or permanent assembly place from the unfenced village extends so far, then that should be measured by the normal path; it is not proper to make another path, or to measure by a pathless route. Sāsaṅkasammatānī ti, agreed upon as "dangerous" due to seeing the dwelling places etc. of thieves etc., meaning thus known. Sappaṭibhayāni, with fear, meaning with imminent powerful fears due to seeing the fact that people have been robbed and plundered by thieves.

Antaraghare nikkhipeyyāti āraññakassa senāsanassa samantā sabbadisābhāgesu attanā abhirucite gocaragāme nikkhipeyya. Tañca kho satiyā aṅgasampattiyā, tatrāyaṃ aṅgasampatti – purimikāya upagantvā mahāpavāraṇāya pavārito hoti, idamekaṃ aṅgaṃ. Kattikamāsoyeva hoti, idaṃ dutiyaṃ aṅgaṃ. Pañcadhanusatikapacchimappamāṇayuttaṃ senāsanaṃ hoti, idaṃ tatiyaṃ aṅgaṃ. Ūnappamāṇe vā gāvutato atirekappamāṇe vā na labhati, yatra hi piṇḍāya caritvā bhuttavelāyameva puna vihāraṃ sakkā āgantuṃ, tadeva idhādhippetaṃ. Sāsaṅkasappaṭibhayameva hoti, idaṃ catutthaṃ aṅgaṃ hotīti.Kocideva paccayoti kiñcideva kāraṇaṃ.Tena cīvarenāti tena antaraghare nikkhittacīvarena.Vippavāsāyāti viyogavāsāya.Tato ce uttari vippavaseyyāti chārattato uttari tasmiṃ senāsane sattamaṃ aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpeyyāti attho, tathā asakkontena pana gāmasīmaṃ okkamitvā sabhāyaṃ vā yattha katthaci vā vasitvā cīvarappavattiṃ ñatvā pakkamituṃ vaṭṭati.Aññatra bhikkhusammutiyāti yaṃ saṅgho gilānassa bhikkhuno cīvarena vippavāsasammutiṃ deti, taṃ ṭhapetvā aladdhasammutikassa atirekachārattaṃ vippavasato nissaggiyaṃ hoti.

Antaraghare nikkhipeyyā ti, should keep it in the inhabited area in the gocara village agreeable to oneself in all directions around the forest lodging. And that, with the accomplishment of the factors of mindfulness; here, this is the accomplishment of the factors: having gone to the former, he has been invited at the Great Invitation, this is one factor. It is the month of Kattika, this is the second factor. There is a lodging endowed with the measure of five hundred bow-lengths to the furthest limit, this is the third factor. He does not obtain it in an inadequate measure or in an excessive measure from a gāvuta; for here, that alone is intended where, having gone for alms and having eaten, it is possible to come to the monastery again at mealtime. It is dangerous and fearful, this is the fourth factor. Kocideva paccayo ti, just some reason. Tena cīvarenā ti, with that cloth kept inside the village. Vippavāsāyā ti, for the sake of separation. Tato ce uttari vippavaseyyā ti, if he separates for more than six nights, it means he causes the seventh dawn to rise in that lodging; but if he is not able to do so, it is proper to cross the village boundary and dwell in the assembly hall or wherever and leave knowing the cloth situation. Aññatra bhikkhusammutiyā ti, except for that agreement of the Saṅgha that gives an agreement of separation with the cloth to a sick bhikkhu; for one who has not obtained agreement, if he separates for more than six nights, it is nissaggiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahule bhikkhū ārabbha cīvaravippavāsavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sesamettha cīvaravaggassa dutiyasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva veditabbanti.

It was established in Sāvatthī in connection with many bhikkhus regarding the matter of separation from cloth; the rest here is to be understood in the same way as stated in the second training rule of the Cloth Chapter.

Sāsaṅkasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Dangerous Training Rule is finished.

10. Pariṇatasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Pariṇatasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

saṅghikanti saṅghassa santakaṃ. So hi saṅghassa pariṇatattā hatthe anāruḷhopi ekena pariyāyena saṅghasantako hoti.Lābhanti labhitabbaṃ cīvarādivatthuṃ.Pariṇatanti ‘‘dassāma karissāmā’’ti vacībhedena vā hatthamuddāya vā saṅghassa ninnaṃ hutvā ṭhitaṃ.Attano pariṇāmeyyāti ‘‘idaṃ mayhaṃ dethā’’tiādīni vadanto attaninnaṃ kareyya. Sace pana saṅghassa dinnaṃ hoti, taṃ gahetuṃ na vaṭṭati, saṅghasseva dātabbaṃ. Pariṇataṃ pana sahadhammikānaṃ vā gihīnaṃ vā antamaso mātusantakampi attano pariṇāmentassa payoge dukkaṭaṃ, paṭilābhena nissaggiyaṃ hoti.

Saṅghikaṃ ti, belonging to the Saṅgha. For indeed, because it is allocated to the Saṅgha, even though it has not come into the hand, it belongs to the Saṅgha by one way. Lābhaṃ ti, an object to be obtained, such as cloth. Pariṇataṃ ti, having become inclined to the Saṅgha by the difference of speech "we will give, we will do" or by a hand gesture and remaining. Attano pariṇāmeyyā ti, should make it incline to himself, saying "give this to me" etc. But if it has been given to the Saṅgha, it is not proper to take it; it should be given to the Saṅgha itself. However, for one who makes something allocated to the Saṅgha incline to himself, even to a co-religionist or a householder, even to his mother, in the effort there is a dukkaṭa, and with the acquisition, it becomes nissaggiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye bhikkhū ārabbha pariṇāmanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, pariṇate vematikassa, apariṇate pariṇatasaññino ceva vematikassa ca, saṅghacetiyapuggalesu yassa kassaci pariṇataṃ aññasaṅghādīnaṃ pariṇāmentassa ca dukkaṭaṃ. Apariṇatasaññino, ‘‘kattha demā’’ti pucchite ‘‘yattha tumhākaṃ cittaṃ pasīdati, tattha detha, tumhākaṃ deyyadhammo paribhogaṃ vā labheyyā’’tiādīni vadantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Saṅghe pariṇatabhāvo, taṃ ñatvā attano pariṇāmanaṃ, paṭilābhoti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisānīti.

It was established in Sāvatthī in connection with the Group-of-Six bhikkhus, regarding the matter of allocation. It is a general rule, not commanded. For one who is uncertain about something allocated, and for one who is certain about something not allocated and for one who is uncertain, there is a dukkaṭa for one who allocates something allocated to the Saṅgha, cetiya, or individual to another Saṅgha etc. There is no offense for one who is uncertain about something not allocated, when asked "where should we give it?", saying "give it where your mind is pleased, may your gift-worthy object obtain use," etc., and for the insane, etc. The state of being allocated to the Saṅgha, knowing that, allocating it to oneself, acquisition—these are the three factors here. The origination, etc., are similar to not-giving-taking.

Pariṇatasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Allocated Training Rule is finished.

Pattavaggo tatiyo.

The Third Bowl Chapter.

Iti kaṅkhāvitaraṇiyā pātimokkhavaṇṇanāya

Thus ends the Nissaggiya Pācittiya explanation

Nissaggiyapācittiyavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

in the Kaṅkhāvitaraṇī Pātimokkha commentary.

Pācittiyakaṇḍo

Pācittiya Section

1. Musāvādavaggo

1. Musāvādavaggo

1. Musāvādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Musāvādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

sampajānamusāvādeti pubbepi jānitvā vacanakkhaṇepi jānantasseva musāvādabhaṇane. Bhaṇanañca nāma idha abhūtassa vā bhūtataṃ, bhūtassa vā abhūtataṃ katvā kāyena vā vācāya vā viññāpanappayogo, nimittatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Tasmā yo sampajānamusāvādaṃ vadati, tassa taṃnimittaṃ taṃhetu tappaccayā pācittiyaṃ hotīti evamettha aññesu ca īdisesu attho veditabbo.

Sampajānamusāvāde ti, in speaking falsehood when knowing even previously and knowing even at the moment of speaking. And here, speaking means the application of making what is untrue true or what is true untrue by body or speech, this is a collective noun in the sense of a cause. Therefore, for one who speaks falsehood knowingly, because of that cause, because of that reason, because of that condition, there is a pācittiya; thus here and in other similar cases, the meaning should be understood.

Sāvatthiyaṃ hatthakaṃ sakyaputtaṃ ārabbha avajānitvā paṭijānanādivatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, uttarimanussadhammārocanatthaṃ musā bhaṇantassa pārājikaṃ, amūlakena pārājikena anuddhaṃsanatthaṃ saṅghādiseso, saṅghādisesena anuddhaṃsanatthaṃ pācittiyaṃ, ācāravipattiyā anuddhaṃsanatthaṃ dukkaṭaṃ, ‘‘yo te vihāre vasī’’tiādinā (pārā. 220) pariyāyena uttarimanussadhammārocanatthaṃ paṭivijānantassa musā bhaṇite thullaccayaṃ, appaṭivijānantassa dukkaṭaṃ, kevalaṃ musā bhaṇantassa idha pācittiyaṃ. Anupadhāretvā sahasā bhaṇantassa, ‘‘aññaṃ bhaṇissāmī’’ti aññaṃ bhaṇantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Visaṃvādanapurekkhāratā, visaṃvādanacittena yamatthaṃ vattukāmo, tassa puggalassa viññāpanapayogo cāti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisānīti.

It was established in Sāvatthī in connection with Hatthaka the Sakyan son, regarding the matter of claiming what was not known, etc. It is a general rule, not commanded. For one who falsely speaks for the sake of declaring superior human qualities, there is a pārājika; for the purpose of not accusing with an unfounded pārājika, there is a saṅghādisesa; for the purpose of not accusing with a saṅghādisesa, there is a pācittiya; for the purpose of not accusing with a breach of conduct, there is a dukkaṭa. For one who knowingly falsely speaks for the sake of declaring superior human qualities by way of "who dwells in your monastery?" etc. (pārā. 220), there is a thullaccaya; for one who does not knowingly, there is a dukkaṭa; here, for one who simply speaks falsehood, there is a pācittiya. There is no offense for one who speaks hastily without considering, for one who speaks one thing saying "I will speak another," and for the insane, etc. The intention of deceiving, the application of informing that person of that which he wants to say with a deceiving mind—these are the two factors here. The origination, etc., are similar to not-giving-taking.

Musāvādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the False Speech Training Rule is finished.

2. Omasavādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Omasavādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

omasavādeti ovijjhanavacane, jātināmagottakammasippaābādhaliṅgakilesaāpattiakkosesu bhūtena vā abhūtena vā yena kenaci pārājikaṃ āpannaṃ vā anāpannaṃ vā yaṃkiñci bhikkhuṃ yāya kāyaci vācāya vā hatthamuddāya vā anaññāpadesena akkosanavacane pācittiyanti attho.

Omasavāde ti, in speaking disparagingly, in abuses of birth, name, clan, work, craft, disease, gender, defilement, offense, by whatever truth or untruth, by whatever speech, to whatever bhikkhu who has fallen into a pārājika or not, by whatever gesture, in abusive speech without indirect reference, the meaning is pācittiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye bhikkhū ārabbha omasanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tehiyeva dasahi akkosavatthūhi ‘‘santi idhekacce caṇḍālā’’tiādinā (pāci. 26) nayena aññāpadesaṃ katvā akkosantassa, ‘‘corosi gaṇṭhibhedakosī’’tiādīhi pāḷimuttakapadehi akkosantassa, yathā tathā vā anupasampannaṃ akkosantassa ca dukkaṭaṃ. Idha bhikkhunīpi anupasampannasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Anakkositukāmassa kevalaṃ davakamyatāya vadato sabbattha dubbhāsitaṃ. Atthadhammaanusāsanipurekkhārānaṃ, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Yaṃ akkosati, tassa upasampannatā, anaññāpadesena jātiādīhi akkosanaṃ, ‘‘maṃ akkosatī’’ti jānanā, atthapurekkhāratādīnaṃ abhāvoti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāni, vedanā pana idha dukkhāti.

It was established in Sāvatthī in connection with the Group-of-Six bhikkhus, regarding the matter of disparagement. It is a general rule, not commanded. For those who abuse by making an indirect reference in the manner of "there are some outcastes here" etc. (pāci. 26) with those same ten bases of abuse, for those who abuse with non-canonical words such as "you are a thief, a bag-cutter," and for those who abuse a non-ordained person in whatever way, there is a dukkaṭa. Here, a bhikkhunī also goes to the count of non-ordained. For one who speaks merely out of playfulness without wanting to abuse, there is a dubbhasita in all cases. There is no offense for those who intend instruction in the Dhamma, for the insane, etc. The fact that the one abuses is ordained, abusing with birth etc. without indirect reference, knowing "he is abusing me," the absence of intention etc.—these are the four factors here. The origination, etc., are similar to not-giving-taking, but here the feeling is painful.

Omasavādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Disparaging Speech Training Rule is finished.

3. Pesuññasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Pesuññasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

bhikkhupesuññeti bhikkhussa pesuññe, jātiādīhi akkosavatthūhi bhikkhū akkosantassa bhikkhuno sutvā vacanaṃ bhikkhuno piyakamyatāya vā bhedādhippāyena vā yo akkuddho, tassa bhikkhussa kāyena vā vācāya vā upasaṃhaṭe tasmiṃ pesuññakaraṇavacane pācittiyanti attho.

Bhikkhupesuññe ti, in tale-bearing of a bhikkhu, to a bhikkhu who is abusing bhikkhus with bases of abuse such as birth etc., hearing that bhikkhu's word, for the sake of pleasing that bhikkhu or with the intention of discord, in that action of tale-bearing applied to that bhikkhu who is not angry by body or speech, the meaning is pācittiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye bhikkhū ārabbha pesuññaupasaṃharaṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, vuttanayeneva aññāpadesena akkosantassa vacanūpasaṃhāre vā pāḷimuttakaakkosūpasaṃhāre vā anupasampannassa ca upasaṃhāre dukkaṭaṃ. Idhāpi bhikkhunī anupasampannaṭṭhāne ṭhitā. Na piyakamyatāya, na bhedādhippāyena kevalaṃ pāpagarahitāya vadantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Jātiādīhi anaññāpadesena akkosantassa bhikkhuno sutvā vacanaṃ bhikkhussa upasaṃharaṇaṃ, piyakamyatābhedādhippāyesu aññataratā, tassa vijānanāti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisānevāti.

This was promulgated in Sāvatthī concerning the group-of-six monks, in connection with the instigation and promotion of malicious talk. It is a general rule and not a command-based rule. According to the manner already stated, if one insults using indirect language, or with statements promoting insult, or with statements promoting insult to an unordained person, it is a dukkata. Here too, the bhikkhunī stands in the place of an unordained person. There is no offense for one who speaks not out of affection or with the intention to create dissension, but solely to censure evil, or for those who are insane, etc. In the case of a monk who insults another monk with direct references to birth, etc., without using indirect language, the three factors are: hearing the words, having the intention of affection or dissension, and understanding its meaning. The origination, etc., are similar to those for taking what is not given.

Pesuññasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Malicious Talk is Finished.

4. Padasodhammasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Training Rule on Teaching the Dhamma Syllable by Syllable

padaso dhammaṃ vāceyyāti saṅgītittayaṃ anāruḷhampi rājovādatikkhindriyacatuparivattananandopanandakulumpasuttamaggakathādidhammañca saṅgītittayamāruḷhaṃ tipiṭakadhammañca padaṃ padaṃ vāceyya, padānupadaanvakkharaanubyañjanesu ekekaṃ koṭṭhāsanti attho.Pācittiyanti etesu padādīsu bhikkhuñca bhikkhuniñca ṭhapetvā yaṃkañci koṭṭhāsaṃ avasesapuggalehi saddhiṃ ekato bhaṇantassa padādigaṇanāya pācittiyaṃ.

padaso dhammaṃ vāceyyā: "He should recite the Dhamma syllable by syllable," meaning he should recite the Dhamma—whether it is the three collections (saṅgīti) or Dhamma not included in the three collections, such as the Rājovāda, Tikhindriya, Catuparivattana, Nandopananda, Kulumpa Sutta, or Maggakatha—syllable by syllable, and the Tipiṭaka Dhamma included in the three collections, part by part. Here, a part (pada) means a single section, whether it be a word (pada), a following word (padānupada), a letter (akkhara), or a consonant (anubyañjana). Pācittiya: Among these parts, if, excluding a bhikkhu and a bhikkhunī, anyone pronounces any portion together with other individuals, there is a pācittiya for each counting of the parts.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye bhikkhū ārabbha padaso dhammavācanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ. Upasampanne anupasampannasaññino vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ. Anupasampannena saddhiṃ ekato uddesaggahaṇe, sajjhāyakaraṇe, tassa santike uddesaggahaṇe, yebhuyyena paguṇaganthaṃ bhaṇantassa, osārentassa ca khalitaṭṭhāne ‘‘evaṃ bhaṇāhī’’ti vacane ca ekato bhaṇantassāpi, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Anupasampannatā, vuttalakkhaṇaṃ dhammaṃ padaso vācanatā, ekato osāpanañcāti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Padasodhammasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.

This was promulgated in Sāvatthī concerning the group-of-six monks, in connection with reciting the Dhamma syllable by syllable. It is a general rule and not a command-based rule; it is a triple pācittiya. For an ordained person who perceives an unordained person as ordained or who is doubtful, there is a dukkata. There is no offense for one who takes up a lesson together with an unordained person, or studies, or takes up a lesson in his presence, or recites a commonly known text for the most part, or dictates a passage and says, "Recite it like this" when there is a mistake, or recites together, or for those who are insane, etc. The three factors here are: being an unordained person, reciting the Dhamma of the stated characteristic syllable by syllable, and reciting together. The origination of reciting the Dhamma syllable by syllable is action, without perception of release, unintentional, an offense by rule, a verbal action, triple-consciousness, and triple-feeling.

Padasodhammasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Teaching the Dhamma Syllable by Syllable is Finished.

5. Paṭhamasahaseyyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the First Training Rule on Sleeping Together

anupasampannenāti bhikkhuṃ ṭhapetvā antamaso pārājikavatthubhūtena tiracchānagatenāpi.Uttaridirattatirattanti dvinnaṃ vā tiṇṇaṃ vā rattīnaṃ upari.Sahaseyyanti sabbacchannaparicchanne yebhuyyena channaparicchanne vā senāsane pubbāpariyena vā ekakkhaṇena vā ekato nipajjanaṃ.Kappeyyāti vidaheyya sampādeyya. Tattha chadanaṃ anāhacca diyaḍḍhahatthubbedhena pākārādinā paricchinnampi sabbaparicchannamicceva veditabbaṃ, tasmā iminā lakkhaṇena samannāgato sacepi sattabhūmiko pāsādo ekūpacāro hoti, satagabbhaṃ vā catusālaṃ, yo tattha vā aññattha vā tādise tena vā aññena vā anupasampannena saha tisso rattiyo sayitvā catutthadivase atthaṅgate sūriye anupasampanne nipanne gabbhadvāraṃ pidhāya vā apidhāya vā nipajjati, paṭhamanipanno vā tasmiṃ nipajjante na vuṭṭhāti, tassa ubhinnaṃ uṭṭhahitvā nipajjanappayogagaṇanāya anupasampannagaṇanāya ca pācittiyaṃ. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana samantapāsādikāyaṃ (pāci. aṭṭha. 51) sabbappakārato vutto.

anupasampannena: "With one who is unordained," meaning excluding a bhikkhu, even an animal that is the basis for a defeat (pārājika). Uttaridirattatiratta: "For more than two or three nights," meaning above two or three nights. Sahaseyya: "Sleeping together," means lying down together in a dwelling that is entirely covered and enclosed, or mostly covered and enclosed, either sequentially or simultaneously. Kappeyyā: "Let him make allowable," meaning let him arrange or provide. Here, even if a place is enclosed by a wall, etc., to a height of two and a half lengths of the hand (addha hattha), without touching the roof, it should be understood as entirely enclosed. Therefore, if a building of seven stories meets these criteria, it is considered a single residence, or if it is a four-sided hall with a hundred chambers, and someone sleeps there or elsewhere with such an unordained person for three nights, and on the fourth day, when the sun has set, lies down while the unordained person is lying down, whether the chamber door is closed or open, or if the first person lying down does not get up when the other lies down, there is a pācittiya for both of them, counting the attempts at lying down and the counting of the unordained person. This is the summary here, but the detailed explanation is given in full in the Samantapāsādikā (pāci. aṭṭha. 51).

Āḷaviyaṃ sambahule bhikkhū ārabbha anupasampannena sahaseyyavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘uttaridirattatiratta’’nti ayamettha anupaññatti, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, upasampanne anupasampannasaññino vematikassa vā upaddhacchannaparicchannādīsu ca dukkaṭaṃ. Ūnakadirattatirattaṃ vasantassa, tatiyāya rattiyā purāruṇā nikkhamitvā puna vasantassa, sabbacchannasabbāparicchannādīsu vasantassa, itarasmiṃ nisinne nipajjantassa, nipanne vā nisīdantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Pācittiyavatthukasenāsanaṃ, tattha anupasampannena saha nipajjanaṃ, catutthadivase sūriyatthaṅgamananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasadisānevāti.

This was promulgated in Āḷavī concerning several monks, in connection with sleeping together with an unordained person. The phrase "uttaridirattatiratta" is an additional specification here. It is a general rule, not a command-based rule; it is a triple pācittiya. For an ordained person who perceives an unordained person as ordained or who is doubtful, and for dwellings that are partially covered and enclosed, etc., there is a dukkata. There is no offense for one who stays for less than two or three nights, or who leaves before dawn on the third night and stays again, or who stays in a place that is entirely covered and entirely unenclosed, etc., or who lies down when the other is sitting, or who sits down when the other is lying down, or for those who are insane, etc. The three factors here are: a dwelling that is the basis for a pācittiya, lying down there with an unordained person, and the setting of the sun on the fourth day. The origination, etc., are similar to those for goat's hair.

Paṭhamasahaseyyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the First Training Rule on Sleeping Together is Finished.

6. Dutiyasahaseyyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Second Training Rule on Sleeping Together

mātugāmenāti antamaso tadahujātāyapi manussitthiyā. Dissamānarūpā pana yakkhipetiyo paṇḍako methunavatthubhūtā ca tiracchānitthiyo idha dukkaṭavatthukā honti.

mātugāmena: "With a woman," meaning even a human female born that very day. However, female yakkhas whose form is visible, female ghosts, hermaphrodites, and female animals that are the basis for sexual intercourse are grounds for a dukkata here.

Sāvatthiyaṃ āyasmantaṃ anuruddhattheraṃ ārabbha mātugāmena sahaseyyavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sesaṃ anantarasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ aññatra rattiparicchedā, tatra hi catutthadivase āpatti, idha pana paṭhamadivasepīti.

This was promulgated in Sāvatthī concerning the venerable Anuruddha, in connection with sleeping together with a woman. The rest should be understood in the same way as stated in the immediately preceding training rule, except for the limit of nights. There, the offense occurs on the fourth day, but here, it occurs even on the first day.

Dutiyasahaseyyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Second Training Rule on Sleeping Together is Finished.

7. Dhammadesanāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Training Rule on Teaching the Dhamma

uttarichappañcavācāhītiettha eko gāthāpādo ekā vācāti evaṃ sabbattha vācāpamāṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.Dhammaṃ deseyyāti padasodhammasikkhāpade vuttalakkhaṇaṃ dhammaṃ vā aṭṭhakathādhammaṃ vā bhāseyya.Aññatra viññunā purisaviggahenāti vinā viññunā purisena. Manussaviggahaṃ gahetvā ṭhitena pana yakkhena vā petena vā tiracchānena vā saddhiṃ ṭhitāyapi dhammaṃ desetuṃ na vaṭṭati.Pācittiyanti dutiyāniyate vuttalakkhaṇena manussena vinā viññumanussitthiyā channaṃ vācānaṃ upari padādivasena dhammaṃ desentassa padādigaṇanāya, bahūnaṃ desayato mātugāmagaṇanāya ca pācittiyaṃ.

uttarichappañcavācāhī: Here, one line of a verse is considered one utterance (vācā); thus, the measure of utterance should be understood in this way throughout. Dhammaṃ deseyyā: "He should teach the Dhamma," meaning he should speak the Dhamma of the stated characteristic as in the training rule on teaching the Dhamma syllable by syllable, or the Dhamma of the commentary. Aññatra viññunā purisaviggahenā: "Except with an intelligent man," meaning without an intelligent man. It is not allowable to teach the Dhamma even if one is standing with a yakka, ghost, or animal that has taken a human form. Pācittiya: Without an intelligent human being as described in the Second Aniyata rule, if one teaches the Dhamma in terms of parts, etc., exceeding six utterances to an intelligent human female, there is a pācittiya for each counting of the parts, and when teaching to many, there is a pācittiya for each counting of the women.

Sāvatthiyaṃ udāyittheraṃ ārabbha mātugāmassa dhammadesanāvatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘aññatra viññunā’’ti ayamettha anupaññatti, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, amātugāme mātugāmasaññino vematikassa vā yakkhipetipaṇḍakamanussaviggahatiracchānitthīnaṃ desentassa ca dukkaṭaṃ. Chahi vācāhi, tato vā oraṃ desentassa, vuttalakkhaṇe vā purise sati, sayaṃ vā uṭṭhāya, puna nisīditvā mātugāmassa vā uṭṭhahitvā puna nisinnassa, aññassa vā mātugāmassa desayato, ‘‘dīghanikāyo nāma bhante kimatthiyo’’ti evaṃ pana puṭṭhe sabbampi dīghanikāyaṃ desentassa, aññassatthāya vuccamānaṃ mātugāme suṇante, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Vuttalakkhaṇassa dhammassa channaṃ vācānaṃ upari desanā, vuttalakkhaṇo mātugāmo, iriyāpathaparivattābhāvo, kappiyakārakassābhāvo, apañhāvissajjanāti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni padasodhammasadisāneva, kevalaṃ idha kiriyākiriyaṃ hotīti.

This was promulgated in Sāvatthī concerning the elder Udāyi, in connection with teaching the Dhamma to a woman. The phrase "aññatra viññunā" is an additional specification here. It is a general rule, not a command-based rule; it is a triple pācittiya. There is a dukkata for teaching to a non-woman, perceiving her as a woman, or to a doubtful case, or to a female yakka, ghost, hermaphrodite, animal in human form, or female animal. There is no offense for teaching with six utterances or less, or when the stated characteristic of a man is present, or if one gets up by oneself and sits down again, or if the woman gets up and sits down again, or if one teaches to another woman, or if one is asked, "Venerable sir, what is the meaning of the Dīgha Nikāya?" and teaches the entire Dīgha Nikāya, or if a woman hears something being said for the sake of another, or for those who are insane, etc. The five factors here are: teaching the Dhamma of the stated characteristic exceeding six utterances, a woman of the stated characteristic, absence of change in posture, absence of a provisioner, and answering a question. The origination, etc., are similar to those for teaching the Dhamma syllable by syllable, except that here it is action and inaction.

Dhammadesanāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Teaching the Dhamma is Finished.

8. Bhūtārocanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Training Rule on Claiming Special Knowledge

uttarimanussadhammanti catutthapārājike vuttalakkhaṇaṃ uttarimanussānaṃ jhāyīnañceva ariyānañca dhammaṃ.Bhūtasmiṃ pācittiyanti attani jhānādidhamme sati taṃ bhikkhuñca bhikkhuniñca ṭhapetvā aññassa ārocayato pācittiyaṃ.

uttarimanussadhamma: "Superior human state," meaning the state of superior human beings as defined in the Fourth Pārājika, the Dhamma of those who meditate and of the noble ones. Bhūtasmiṃ pācittiya: "If it is true, there is a pācittiya," meaning if one has a state of jhāna, etc., in oneself, there is a pācittiya for declaring it to another, excluding that bhikkhu or bhikkhunī.

Vesāliyaṃ vaggumudātīriye bhikkhū ārabbha tesaṃ bhūtārocanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, nippariyāyena attani vijjamānaṃ jhānādidhammaṃ ārocentassa sace yassa āroceti, so anantarameva ‘‘ayaṃ jhānalābhī’’ti vā ‘‘ariyo’’ti vā yena kenaci ākārena tamatthaṃ jānāti, pācittiyaṃ. No ce jānāti, dukkaṭaṃ. Pariyāyena ārocitaṃ pana jānātu vā, mā vā, dukkaṭameva. Tathārūpe kāraṇe sati upasampannassa ārocayato, ādikammikassa ca anāpatti. Yasmā pana ariyānaṃ ummattakādibhāvo natthi, jhānalābhino pana tasmiṃ sati jhānā parihāyanti, tasmā te idha na gahitā. Uttarimanussadhammassa bhūtatā, anupasampannassa ārocanaṃ, taṅkhaṇavijānanā, anaññāpadesoti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Bhūtārocanasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, kusalābyākatacittehi dvicittaṃ, sukhamajjhattavedanāhi dvivedananti.

This was promulgated in Vesālī, at Vaggumudātīriya, concerning the monks, in connection with their claiming special knowledge. It is a general rule, not a command-based rule. If one declares a state of jhāna, etc., existing in oneself without indirect language, and if the person to whom it is declared immediately knows that "this one has attained jhāna" or "is a noble one" in any way, there is a pācittiya. If he does not know, there is a dukkata. However, if it is declared indirectly, it is a dukkata whether he knows it or not. There is no offense for declaring it to an ordained person when there is such a reason, or for the first offender. Since noble ones do not become insane, etc., but those who have attained jhāna fall away from jhāna when that happens, they are not included here. The four factors here are: the truth of the superior human state, declaring it to an unordained person, immediate understanding, and absence of indirect language. The origination of claiming special knowledge is action, without perception of release, unintentional, an offense by rule, an action of body and speech, two-consciousness with wholesome and indeterminate consciousness, and two-feeling with pleasant and neutral feeling.

Bhūtārocanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Claiming Special Knowledge is Finished.

9. Duṭṭhullārocanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Training Rule on Revealing a Serious Offense

bhikkhussāti pārājikaṃ anajjhāpannassa.Duṭṭhullanti kiñcāpi dvinnaṃ āpattikkhandhānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ, idha pana saṅghādisesameva adhippetaṃ.Aññatra bhikkhusammutiyāti yaṃ saṅgho abhiṇhāpattikassa bhikkhuno āyatiṃ saṃvaratthāya āpattīnañca kulānañca pariyantaṃ katvā vā akatvā vā tikkhattuṃ apaloketvā katikaṃ karoti, taṃ ṭhapetvā, ayathākatikāya ‘‘ayaṃ asuciṃ mocetvā saṅghādisesaṃ āpanno’’tiādinā nayena vatthunā saddhiṃ āpattiṃ ghaṭetvā ārocentassa pācittiyaṃ.

bhikkhussa: "Of a monk," meaning one who has not committed a pārājika. Duṭṭhulla: "Serious," although this term is used for two groups of offenses, here it refers only to a saṅghādisesa. Aññatra bhikkhusammutiyā: "Except by agreement of the monks," meaning excluding the case where the Saṅgha, for the purpose of restraint in the future, having determined the extent of the offenses and their categories, or not, makes a formal act (katikaṃ) after announcing it three times to a monk who is a habitual offender. There is a pācittiya for declaring the offense, connecting the offense with the incident, by saying, "This one has emitted semen and has committed a saṅghādisesa," etc., in a manner not in accordance with the formal act.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye bhikkhū ārabbha duṭṭhullāpattiārocanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, aduṭṭhullāya duṭṭhullasaññino vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ, avasese cha āpattikkhandhe, anupasampannassa purimapañcasikkhāpadavītikkamasaṅkhātaṃ duṭṭhullaṃ vā itaraṃ aduṭṭhullaṃ vā ajjhācāraṃ ārocentassāpi dukkaṭameva. Vatthumattaṃ vā āpattimattaṃ vā ārocentassa, bhikkhusammutiparicchedaṃ anatikkamitvā ārocentassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Vuttalakkhaṇassa bhikkhuno savatthuko saṅghādiseso, anupasampannassa ārocanaṃ, bhikkhusammutiyā abhāvoti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāni, vedanā pana idha dukkhāyevāti.

This was promulgated in Sāvatthī concerning the group-of-six monks, in connection with revealing a serious offense. It is a general rule, not a command-based rule; it is a triple pācittiya. There is a dukkata for perceiving a non-serious offense as serious or for being doubtful. It is also a dukkata for declaring the remaining six groups of offenses, or for declaring to an unordained person a serious offense, counted as a transgression of the first five training rules, or any other offense, whether serious or not. There is no offense for declaring only the incident or only the offense, or for declaring without exceeding the scope of the monks' agreement, or for those who are insane, etc. The three factors here are: a saṅghādisesa with its basis committed by a monk of the stated characteristic, declaring it to an unordained person, and the absence of an agreement by the monks. The origination, etc., are similar to those for taking what is not given, but here the feeling is only painful.

Duṭṭhullārocanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Revealing a Serious Offense is Finished.

10. Pathavīkhaṇanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Training Rule on Digging the Ground

pathavinti duvidhā pathavī jātapathavī ajātapathavīti. Tatthajātapathavīsuddhamissapuñjavasena tividhā, tatthasuddhapathavīnāma pakatiyā suddhapaṃsu vā suddhamattikā vā.Missapathavīnāma yattha paṃsuto vā mattikāto vā pāsāṇasakkharakathalamarumbavālukāsu aññatarassa tatiyabhāgo hoti.Puñjapathavīnāma ‘‘atirekacātumāsaṃ ovaṭṭho paṃsupuñjo vā mattikāpuñjo vā’’ti (pāci. 86) vuttaṃ, vuttalakkhaṇena pana missakapuñjopi piṭṭhipāsāṇe ṭhitasukhumarajampi ca deve phusāyante sakiṃ tintaṃ catumāsaccayena tintokāso puñjapathavisaṅkhameva gacchati. Tividhāpi cesā pathavī uddhanapattapacanādivasena vā yathā tathā vā adaḍḍhā ‘jātapathavī’ti vuccati, daḍḍhā pana vuttappamāṇato adhikatarapāsāṇādimissā vāajātapathavīnāma hoti, ko pana vādo suddhapāsāṇādibhedāya. Tattha yā ‘jātapathavī’ti vuttā, ayaṃ akappiyapathavī. Yo bhikkhu taṃ evarūpaṃ pathaviṃ sayaṃ khaṇati, khaṇanabhedanavilekhanapacanādīhi vikopeti, tassa payogagaṇanāya pācittiyaṃ. Yo pana khaṇāpeti, vuttanayeneva vikopāpeti, tassa ‘‘imaṃ padesa’’nti vā ‘‘imaṃ pathavi’’nti vā evaṃ niyametvā ‘‘khaṇa, bhindā’’tiādinā nayena āṇāpentassa āṇattiyā dukkaṭaṃ, sakiṃ āṇatte divasampi khaṇante āṇāpakassa ekameva pācittiyaṃ, sace itaro punappunaṃ āṇāpeti, vācāya vācāya pācittiyaṃ.

pathavi: "Ground," there are two kinds of ground: natural ground and unnatural ground. Among them, natural ground (jātapathavī) is threefold based on whether it is a pure, mixed, or piled mass. Among them, pure ground (suddhapathavī) is naturally pure dust or pure clay. Mixed ground (missapathavī) is where one-third of the dust or clay consists of stone, gravel, potsherd, rough gravel, sand, or any other substance. Piled ground (puñjapathavī) is said to be "a pile of dust or clay that has been rained on excessively for four months" (pāci. 86). However, even a mixed pile of the stated characteristic and fine dust lying on a stone slab also falls into the category of piled ground, if it is wetted once when the gods cause rain and has the opportunity to be wetted after four months have passed. All three kinds of ground, whether upturned, overturned, cooked, or otherwise, if not burnt, are called 'natural ground'. Burnt ground or ground mixed with a greater proportion than the stated amount of stone, etc., is called unnatural ground (ajātapathavī); what need is there to mention the different kinds of pure stone, etc.? Among them, what is called 'natural ground' is unallowable ground. If a bhikkhu himself digs up such ground, disrupting it by digging, breaking, scratching, or cooking, there is a pācittiya for each attempt. But if he has someone else dig it up, disrupting it in the manner already stated, there is a dukkata for the command if he instructs, "Dig this place" or "Dig this ground" in this way, specifying it. If the other person digs even for a day after being instructed once, the one who gave the command has only one pācittiya. If the other person repeatedly gives the command, there is a pācittiya for each utterance.

Āḷaviyaṃ āḷavake bhikkhū ārabbha pathavikhaṇanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, sāṇattikaṃ, pathaviyā vematikassa, apathaviyā pathavisaññino ceva vematikassa ca dukkaṭaṃ. Okāsaṃ aniyametvā ‘‘pokkharaṇiṃ khaṇa, āvāṭaṃ khaṇa, kandaṃ khaṇā’’tiādīni bhaṇantassa, ātapena sussitvā phalitakaddamaṃ vā gokaṇṭakaṃ vā heṭṭhā pathaviyā asambaddhaṃ bhijjitvā patitanaditaṭaṃ vā mahantampi naṅgalacchinnamattikāpiṇḍantievamādīni sabbañca ajātapathaviṃ vikopentassa, ‘‘imassa thambhassa āvāṭaṃ jāna, mattikaṃ dehi, mattikaṃ āhara, paṃsunā me attho, mattikaṃ kappiyaṃ karohī’’ti bhaṇantassa, asañcicca rukkhādipavaṭṭanena bhindantassa, asatiyā pādaṅguṭṭhakādīhi vilekhantassa, jātapathavibhāvaṃ vā, ‘‘khaṇāmi vā aha’’nti ajānantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Jātapathavī, pathavisaññitā, khaṇanakhaṇāpanānaṃ aññataranti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāni, idaṃ pana paṇṇattivajjaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.

This was established in Āḷavī, regarding monks in Āḷavaka, concerning the matter of digging the earth; it is a general rule, an instruction, and for one who is doubtful about (digging on) earth, and for one who perceives (it as) not-earth but is doubtful (about whether it is earth), there is a dukkaṭa. For one who speaks without designating a spot, saying, "Dig a pond, dig a pit, dig a tuber," etc.; for one who disturbs all undeveloped earth, such as dried and cracked mud or gokaṇṭaka thorns due to the heat, or a riverbank that has broken off and fallen without being connected to the earth below, or even a large clod of earth cut by a plow, etc.; for one who says, "Know the pit for this pillar, give me soil, bring soil, I need dust, make the soil allowable"; for one who unintentionally breaks (earth) by the overturning of trees, etc.; for one who scratches with the big toe, etc., due to lack of mindfulness; for one who does not know that developed earth (is being dug), or that "I am digging," and for an insane person, etc., there is no offense. The three factors here are: developed earth, perception of (it as) earth, and either digging oneself or having it dug. The origin, etc., are similar to those for taking what is not given, but this is an offense by rule, is threefold (in intention), and threefold (in consequence).

Pathavīkhaṇanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Earth-Digging Training Rule is Finished.

Musāvādavaggo paṭhamo.

The First Chapter: Lying.

2. Bhūtagāmavaggo

2. The Chapter on the Group of Living Things

1. Bhūtagāmasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Training Rule on Injuring a Group of Living Things

bhūtagāmapātabyatāyāti ettha bhavanti ahesuñcāti bhūtā, jāyanti vaḍḍhanti jātā vaḍḍhitā cāti attho.Gāmoti rāsi, bhūtānaṃ gāmo, bhūtā eva vā gāmoti bhūtagāmo, patiṭṭhitaharitatiṇarukkhādīnametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Pātabyassa bhāvo pātabyatā, chedanabhedanādīhi yathāruci paribhuñjitabbatāti attho, tassaṃ bhūtagāmapātabyatāya, nimittatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ, bhūtagāmapātabyatāhetu bhūtagāmassa chedanādipaccayā pācittiyanti attho. Tasmā yo bhikkhu pathaviudakapākārādīsu yatthakatthaci jātaṃ asukkhaṃ antamaso atisukhumatiṇampi sāsapabījakasevālampi uddharaṇacchedanavijjhanādīhi vikopeti vā pathavikhaṇane vuttanayena vikopāpeti vā pācittiyaṃ āpajjati.

Here, in bhūtagāmapātabyatāyā, bhūtā means "things that have come into being," that is, things that are born and grow; things that have been born and grown. Gāma means a collection, a group of beings, or "beings themselves are a group," hence bhūtagāma, which is a designation for established green grass, trees, and the like. Pātabyatā is the state of being liable to destruction, meaning to use as desired by cutting, splitting, etc.; bhūtagāmapātabyatāya, this is a locative case used in the sense of cause; the meaning is that due to the destruction of a group of living things, due to cutting, etc., of a group of living things, there is a pācittiya. Therefore, whichever bhikkhu disturbs (a group of living things) by uprooting, cutting, piercing, etc., any undeveloped (plant) that has grown anywhere in the earth, water, walls, etc., even the finest blade of grass or duckweed the size of a mustard seed, or has another disturb (it) in the manner stated in (the section on) digging earth, incurs a pācittiya.

Āḷaviyaṃ āḷavake bhikkhū ārabbha rukkhachindanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, sāṇattikaṃ, bhūtagāmato viyojitamūlabījakhandhabījaphalubījaaggabījabījabījānaṃ aññataraṃ bhājanagataṃ vā rāsikataṃ vā bhūmiyaṃ ropitampi nikkhantamūlamattaṃ vā nikkhantaaṅkuramattaṃ vā sacepissa vidatthimattā pattavaṭṭi niggacchati, anikkhante vā mūle nikkhante vā mūle yāva aṅkuro harito na hoti, tāva taṃ vikopentassa dukkaṭaṃ, tathā bhūtagāmabījagāme vematikassa, abhūtagāmabījagāme bhūtagāmabījagāmasaññino ceva vematikassa ca. Ubhayattha pana atathāsaññissa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti, asañcicca asatiyā ajānitvā vā vikopentassa, ‘imaṃ rukkha’nti evaṃ aniyametvā ‘‘rukkhaṃ chinda, valliṃ chindā’’tiādīni bhaṇantassa, ‘‘imaṃ pupphaṃ vā phalaṃ vā jāna, imaṃ dehi, imaṃ āhara, iminā me attho, imaṃ kappiyaṃ karohī’’ti bhaṇantassa ca anāpatti. Evaṃ kappiyavacanena bhūtagāmato viyojitaṃ pana bījajātaṃ puna pi ‘‘kappiyaṃ karohī’’ti kāretvāva paribhuñjitabbaṃ. Evañhissa bījagāmaparimocanampi kataṃ hoti.

This was established in Āḷavī, regarding monks in Āḷavaka, concerning the matter of cutting trees; it is a general rule, an instruction; and for one who separates any one of the following from a group of living things—a root-seed, a stem-seed, a joint-seed, a fruit-seed, an tip-seed, a seed-from-a-seed—whether it is in a container or in a heap, or even if it is planted in the ground, (there is a dukkaṭa) as long as it is only the root that has emerged, or only the sprout that has emerged. If a sprout the size of a span emerges, a pattavaṭṭi sprout comes out; for one who disturbs it, whether the root has not emerged or the root has emerged, as long as the sprout is not green, there is a dukkaṭa. Likewise, for one who is doubtful about a group of living things and a seed-group, and for one who perceives (it as) not a group of living things or a seed-group but is doubtful (about whether it is a group of living things or a seed-group). But in both cases, for one who has a contrary perception, and for an insane person, etc., there is no offense; for one who unintentionally, mindlessly, or unknowingly disturbs (a group of living things). For one who speaks without specifying "this tree," saying, "Cut a tree, cut a vine," etc.; for one who says, "Know this flower or fruit, give this, bring this, I need this, make this allowable," there is no offense. However, a seed-product that has been separated from a group of living things in this way with "allowable" words should only be used again after having it made "allowable." In this way, the release of the seed-group would also be done.

Kappiyaṃ karontena pana agginā vā nakhena vā satthena vā kattabbaṃ, agginā karontena ca yena kenaci agginā ekadese phusantena ‘kappiya’nti vatvāva kātabbaṃ. Satthena karontena yassa kassaci tikhiṇasatthassa antamaso sūcinakhacchedanādīnampi tuṇḍena vā dhārāya vā vedhaṃ vā chedaṃ vā dassentena tatheva kātabbaṃ. Nakhena karontena ṭhapetvā gomahiṃsādīnaṃ khure yena kenaci apūtinā manussānaṃ vā tiracchānānaṃ vā nakhena antamaso chinditvā āhaṭenāpi satthe vuttanayeneva kātabbaṃ. Tattha sacepi bījānaṃ pabbatamatto rāsi, rukkhasahassaṃ vā chinditvā ekābaddhaṃ, ucchūnaṃ vā mahābhāro bandhitvā ṭhapito hoti, ekasmiṃ bīje vā rukkhasākhāya vā ucchumhi vā kappiye kate sabbaṃ kataṃ hoti. Ucchuṃ ‘‘kappiyaṃ karissāmī’’ti tehi saddhiṃ baddhaṃ dārukaṃ vijjhati, vaṭṭatiyeva. Sace pana yāya valliyā bhāro baddho, taṃ vijjhati, na vaṭṭati. Maricapakkādīhi missetvā bhattaṃ āharanti, ‘‘kappiyaṃ karohī’’ti vutte sacepi bhattasitthe vijjhati, vaṭṭatiyeva, tilataṇḍulesupi eseva nayo. Yāguyā pakkhittāni pana ekābaddhāni hutvā na santiṭṭhanti, tattha ekekaṃ vijjhitvāva kātabbaṃ. Kapiṭṭhaphalādīnaṃ anto miñjaṃ kaṭāhaṃ muñcitvā sañcarati, bhindāpetvā kappiyaṃ kāretabbaṃ. Ekābaddhā ce, kaṭāhepi kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Yaṃ pana phalaṃ taruṇaṃ hoti abījaṃ yañca nibbattabījaṃ bījaṃ apanetvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ, tattha kappiyakaraṇakiccaṃ natthi. Bhūtagāmo, bhūtagāmasaññitā, vikopanaṃ vā vikopāpanaṃ vāti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni pathavikhaṇanasadisānevāti.

But the one making it allowable should do it with fire, a nail, or a knife. When doing it with fire, it should be done only after touching one part with any fire and saying "allowable." When doing it with a knife, it should be done in the same way by showing a cut or incision with the tip or blade of any sharp knife, even for cutting fingernails or needles. When doing it with a nail, it should be done in the same way by placing it on the hoof of a cow, buffalo, etc., and cutting it with any non-putrid nail of humans or animals, even if it is brought after cutting. Here, even if there is a heap of seeds the size of a mountain, or a thousand trees are cut and tied together, or a large bundle of sugarcane is tied and placed, everything is considered done when the allowable is done on one seed, tree branch, or sugarcane. When one pierces a small piece of wood tied together with the sugarcane, thinking, "I will make the sugarcane allowable," it is valid. But if one pierces the vine with which the load is tied, it is not valid. When they bring food mixed with peppercorns, etc., if one pierces even the rice on the plate when told to "make it allowable," it is valid, and the same principle applies to sesame seeds and rice grains. However, things that are put in gruel do not stay bound together, so it must be done by piercing each one individually. For kapiṭṭha fruits, etc., if the pulp inside moves after the shell is removed, it should be made allowable after breaking it apart. If they are bound together, it is valid to do it even on the shell. But for a fruit that is young and seedless, and for one that has developed seeds, the seeds should be removed and then used; there is no need to make it allowable. The three factors here are: a group of living things, perception of (it as) a group of living things, and disturbing it or having it disturbed. The origin, etc., are similar to those for digging earth.

Bhūtagāmasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on (Injuring) a Group of Living Things is Finished.

2. Aññavādakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Training Rule on Making Evasive Statements

aññavādako,aññenaññaṃ paṭicaraṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Vihesatītivihesako,tuṇhībhāvassetaṃ nāmaṃ, tasmiṃ aññavādake vihesake.Pācittiyanti vatthudvaye pācittiyadvayaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmā yo bhikkhu sāvasesaṃ āpattiṃ āpanno saṅghamajjhe anuyuñjiyamāno taṃ na kathetukāmo aññena vacanena aññaṃ chādento tathā tathā vikkhipati, yo ca tuṇhībhāvena viheseti, tesaṃ yaṃ bhagavatā aññavādakakammañceva vihesakakammañca anuññātaṃ, tasmiṃ saṅghena kate puna tathā karontānaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

aññavādako, this is a name for one who deals with one thing by means of another. Vihesako means "one who harasses," this is a name for silence; in that evasive harasser. Pācittiya means a double pācittiya is stated in relation to the two grounds. Therefore, the bhikkhu who has incurred an offense with remainder, when questioned in the midst of the Saṅgha, being unwilling to speak about it, covers one thing with another statement, thus scattering (the issue), and whoever harasses by means of silence, if they do so again after the Saṅgha has carried out the acts of evasion and harassment that the Blessed One has allowed, (he incurs) a pācittiya.

Kosambiyaṃ channattheraṃ ārabbha aññenaññaṃ paṭicaraṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, dhammakamme tikapācittiyaṃ, adhammakamme tikadukkaṭaṃ, anāropite pana aññavādake vā vihesake vā tathā karontassa dukkaṭameva. Āpattiṃ āpannabhāvaṃ vā ajānantassa ‘‘kiṃ tumhe bhaṇathā’’ti pucchato, gelaññena vā, ‘‘saṅghassa bhaṇḍanādīni vā bhavissanti, adhammena vā vaggena vā nakammārahassa vā kammaṃ karissantī’’ti iminā adhippāyena na kathentassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Dhammakammena āropitatā, āpattiyā vā vatthunā vā anuyuñjiyamānatā, chādetukāmatāya aññenaññaṃ paṭicaraṇaṃ vā tuṇhībhāvo vāti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāni, idaṃ pana siyā kiriyaṃ, siyā akiriyaṃ, dukkhavedanañca hotīti.

This was established in Kosambī, regarding the Elder Channa, concerning the matter of dealing with one thing by means of another; it is a general rule, not an instruction; for a lawful act, there is a threefold pācittiya; for an unlawful act, there is a threefold dukkaṭa; but if one does so after an act of evasion or harassment has not been imposed, there is only a dukkaṭa. For one who does not know that he has incurred an offense and asks, "What are you saying?"; for one who does not speak because of illness, or with the intention that "there will be quarrels, etc., in the Saṅgha, or they will perform an unlawful act or with a faction or an unqualified person"; and for an insane person, etc., there is no offense. The three factors here are: having been subjected to a lawful act, being questioned about an offense or matter, and either dealing with one thing by means of another with the intention of concealing it, or silence. The origin, etc., are similar to those for taking what is not given, but this may be an action or a non-action, and there is painful feeling.

Aññavādakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Evasive Speech is Finished.

3. Ujjhāpanakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Training Rule on Reviling

ujjhāpanakaṃ. Yena ca tatheva vadantā khiyyanti, sabbattha tassa avaṇṇaṃ pakāsenti, taṃkhiyyanakaṃ,tasmiṃ ujjhāpanake khiyyanake.Pācittiyanti vatthudvaye pācittiyadvayaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmā yo sammatassa bhikkhuno ayasakāmatāya upasampannassa vadanto ujjhāpeti vā khiyyati vā, tassa pācittiyaṃ hoti.

ujjhāpanakaṃ: ujjhāpanaka. khiyyanakaṃ: That by which, when saying so, they are annoyed, everywhere they reveal his disparagement, that is khiyyanaka; in that reviling, annoying. Pācittiya: A double pācittiya is stated in relation to the two grounds. Therefore, the pācittiya occurs to the bhikkhu who, when speaking about an ordained bhikkhu who has been formally accepted, does so reviling or disparaging because of not liking him.

Rājagahe mettiyabhūmajake bhikkhū ārabbha ujjhāpanakhiyyanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, yaṃ tassa upasampannassa sammutikammaṃ kataṃ, tasmiṃ dhammakamme tikapācittiyaṃ, adhammakamme tikadukkaṭaṃ, anupasampannassa pana santike tathā bhaṇantassa, asammatassa ca avaṇṇaṃ yassa kassaci santike bhaṇantassa, anupasampannassa pana sammatassa vā asammatassa vā avaṇṇaṃ yassa kassacideva santike bhaṇantassa ca dukkaṭameva. Pakatiyāva chandādivasena karontaṃ ujjhāpentassa vā khiyyantassa vā, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Dhammakammena sammatatā, upasampannatā, agatigamanābhāvo, tassa avaṇṇakāmatā, yassa santike vadati, tassa upasampannatā, ujjhāpanaṃ vā khiyyanaṃ vāti imānettha cha aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāni, idaṃ pana dukkhavedanamevāti.

This was established in Rājagaha, regarding the Mettiya-Bhummajaka monks, concerning the matter of reviling and disparaging; it is a general rule, not an instruction; in that lawful act concerning which the act of formal acceptance has been performed for that ordained bhikkhu, there is a threefold pācittiya; for an unlawful act, there is a threefold dukkaṭa; but for one who speaks so in the presence of one who is not ordained, and for one who speaks disparagingly of one who is not formally accepted in the presence of anyone, and for one who speaks disparagingly of one who is formally accepted or not formally accepted in the presence of one who is not ordained, there is only a dukkaṭa. For one who naturally does so reviling or disparaging due to bias, etc., and for an insane person, etc., there is no offense. The six factors here are: having been formally accepted by a lawful act, having been ordained, absence of going to partiality, desire to disparage him, the one in whose presence he speaks being ordained, and reviling or disparaging. The origin, etc., are similar to those for taking what is not given, but this is only painful feeling.

Ujjhāpanakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Reviling is Finished.

4. Paṭhamasenāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the First Training Rule on Lodgings

saṅghikanti saṅghassa santakaṃ. Mañcādīsu yokoci mañcasaṅkhepena kato sabbopimañcoyeva,pīṭhepi eseva nayo. Yena kenaci pana coḷena vā kappiyacammena vā chaviṃ katvā ṭhapetvā manussalomaṃ tālīsapattañca yehi kehici lomapaṇṇatiṇavākacoḷehi pūretvā katasenāsanaṃbhisīti vuccati. Tattha nisīditumpi nipajjitumpi vaṭṭati, pamāṇaparicchedopi cettha natthi.Kocchaṃpana vākausīramuñjapabbajādīnaṃ aññataramayaṃ anto saṃvellitvā baddhaṃ heṭṭhā ca upari ca vitthataṃ paṇavasaṇṭhānaṃ majjhe sīhacammādiparikkhittaṃ hoti, akappiyacammaṃ nāmettha natthi. Senāsanañhi sovaṇṇamayampi vaṭṭati.Ajjhokāseti ettha ye avassikasaṅketā vassānamāsāti evaṃ asaññitā aṭṭha māsā, te ṭhapetvā itaresu catūsu māsesu sacepi devo na vassati. Tathāpi pakatiajjhokāse ca ovassakamaṇḍape ca santharituṃ na vaṭṭati. Yattha pana hemante vassati, tattha aparepi cattāro māse na vaṭṭati. Gimhe pana sabbattha vigatavalāhakaṃ visuddhaṃ nabhaṃ hoti, tasmā tadā kenacideva karaṇīyena gacchati, vaṭṭati. Kākādīnaṃ nibaddhavāsarukkhamūle pana kadācipi na vaṭṭati. Iti yattha ca yadā ca santharituṃ na vaṭṭati, taṃ sabbamidha ajjhokāsasaṅkhameva gatanti veditabbaṃ.

saṅghikaṃ means belonging to the Saṅgha. Whichever of the couches, etc., is made in the category of couches, all of it is a mañco, the same principle applies to pīṭha. But a seat made by stretching leather or allowable deer hide over it with any kind of cloth, and filling it with human hair and tālīsapatta, and any kind of hair, leaves, grass, bark, or cloth is called a bhisī. It is permissible to sit or lie on it, and there is no restriction on size here. Kocchaṃ, however, is made of any of the following: bast, usīra root, muñja grass, or pabbaja grass, rolled up inside and tied, wide at the bottom and top, shaped like a drum, surrounded in the middle by lion skin, etc.; there is nothing here that is non-allowable leather. Indeed, a seat made of gold is also permissible. Ajjhokāse: Here, the eight months that are not designated as places of shelter and rainy season months, leaving those aside, in the other four months, even if it does not rain, it is not permissible to spread (a seat) in a natural open space or in a rainy-season pavilion. But where it rains in the winter, it is not permissible for another four months. In the summer, however, the sky is clear everywhere without clouds, so it is permissible to go with any business. However, it is never permissible at the base of a tree where crows, etc., regularly roost. Thus, it should be understood that all the places and times where it is not permissible to spread (a seat) are included here under the term ajjhokāsa.

Santharitvāti tathārūpe ṭhāne attano vā parassa vā atthāya santharitvā. Aññassatthāya santhatampi hi yāva so tattha na nisīdati, ‘gaccha tva’nti vā na bhaṇati, tāva santhārakasseva bhāro.Santharāpetvāti anupasampannena santharāpetvā. Etadeva hi tassa palibodho hoti, upasampannena santhataṃ santhārakasseva bhāro, tañca kho yāva āṇāpako tattha na nisīdati, ‘gaccha tva’nti vā na bhaṇati. Yasmiñhi attanā santharāpite vā pakatisanthate vā upasampanno nisīdati, sabbaṃ taṃ nisinnasseva bhāro, tasmā santharāpitantveva saṅkhaṃ gacchati.Taṃ pakkamanto neva uddhareyya, na uddharāpeyyāti attanā vā uddharitvā patirūpe ṭhāne na ṭhapeyya, parena vā tathā na kārāpeyya.Anāpucchaṃ vā gaccheyyāti yo bhikkhu vā sāmaṇero vā ārāmiko vā lajjī hoti, attano palibodhaṃ viya maññati, tathārūpaṃ anāpucchitvā taṃ senāsanaṃ tassa aniyyātetvā nirapekkho gacchati, thāmamajjhimassa purisassa leḍḍupātaṃ atikkameyya, tassa ekena pādena leḍḍupātātikkame dukkaṭaṃ, dutiyapādātikkame pācittiyaṃ. Bhojanasālāya ṭhito pana ‘‘asukasmiṃ nāma divāvihāraṭṭhāne paññapetvā gacchāhī’’ti pesetvā tato nikkhamitvā aññattha gacchanto pāduddhārena kāretabbo.

Santharitvā: Having spread (a seat) in such a place, for one's own sake or for another's. Indeed, even if it is spread for another's sake, the burden remains with the one who spread it, until that person sits there or says "go away." Santharāpetvā: Having it spread by one who is not ordained. Indeed, this itself is an encumbrance for him; if it is spread by one who is ordained, the burden remains with the one who spread it, only until the one who ordered it sits there or says "go away." Indeed, wherever an ordained bhikkhu sits on something spread by himself or on a natural spreading, all of that burden is with the one who is sitting, therefore it is considered to have been spread. Taṃ pakkamanto neva uddhareyya, na uddharāpeyyā: He should neither remove it himself and place it in a suitable place, nor have another do so. Anāpucchaṃ vā gaccheyyā: Or the bhikkhu or novice or ārāmika who is conscientious thinks, "It is like my own encumbrance," and without asking such a person, without transferring that seat to him, he goes away unconcerned, if he exceeds a clod-throw's distance for a man of medium strength, there is a dukkaṭa for exceeding the clod-throw's distance with one foot, and a pācittiya for exceeding it with the second foot. However, one who is standing in the dining hall and sends (someone), saying, "Go and inform (someone) in such-and-such a place for a day's retreat," should be made to do it by lifting his feet (in that direction) after leaving there and going elsewhere.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahule bhikkhū ārabbha santhataṃ anuddharitvā anāpucchaṃ pakkamanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, puggalike tikadukkaṭaṃ, cimilikaṃ vā uttarattharaṇaṃ vā bhūmattharaṇaṃ vā taṭṭikaṃ vā cammakkhaṇḍaṃ vā pādapuñchanaṃ vā phalakapīṭhaṃ vā yaṃ vā panaññaṃ kañci dārubhaṇḍaṃ mattikābhaṇḍaṃ antamaso pattādhārakampi vuttalakkhaṇe ajjhokāse ṭhapetvā gacchantassa dukkaṭameva. Āraññakena pana asati anovassake sabbaṃ rukkhe laggetvāpi yathā vā upacikāhi na khajjati, evaṃ katvāpi gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Abbhokāsikena pana cīvarakuṭikaṃ katvāpi rakkhitabbaṃ. Attano santake, vissāsikapuggalike, uddharaṇādīni katvā gamane, otāpentassa, ‘‘āgantvā uddharissāmī’’ti gacchato, vuḍḍhatarā uṭṭhāpenti, amanusso tattha nisīdati, koci issaro gaṇhāti, sīhādayo taṃ ṭhānaṃ āgantvā tiṭṭhanti, evaṃ senāsanaṃ palibuddhaṃ hoti, tathā palibuddhe vā senāsane, jīvitabrahmacariyantarāyakarāsu āpadāsu vā gacchantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Mañcādīnaṃ saṅghikatā, vuttalakkhaṇe dese santharaṇaṃ vā santharāpanaṃ vā, apalibuddhatā, āpadāya abhāvo, nirapekkhatā, leḍḍupātātikkamoti imānettha cha aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamakathinasadisāneva, idaṃ pana kiriyākiriyanti.

This was established at Sāvatthī, concerning many bhikkhus, regarding the case of leaving without tidying up, without removing, without informing. It is a general rule, a non-commanded rule, a threefold pācittiya. For an individual, it is a threefold dukkaṭa. A cīmilikā, an upper spread, a ground spread, a mat, a piece of leather, a foot wiper, a wooden stool, or any other wooden item or clay item, even a bowl stand, if one places it in an open space as described and departs, it is a dukkaṭa. However, a forest dweller, if there is no rain, may hang everything on a tree, or do it in such a way that it is not eaten by white ants, and then it is permissible to leave. But one who dwells in the open should protect it even by making a dwelling of leaves. There is no offense for things that belong to oneself, for things belonging to a trusted individual, for leaving after having done the removing, etc., for one who is delayed, for one who leaves thinking, "I will come back and remove it," if elders remove it, if a non-human sits there, if some ruler takes it, if lions, etc., come and stay in that place, thus the dwelling becomes encumbered; likewise, in an encumbered dwelling, or in dangers that cause interruption to life or the holy life, or for the insane, etc. For couches, etc., being the property of the Saṅgha, in a place with the characteristics described, spreading or having spread [a covering], non-encumbrance, absence of danger, non-attachment, and exceeding the range of a clod of dirt, these are the six factors involved here. The origination, etc., are similar to the first kathina [chapter]. But this is action and inaction.

Paṭhamasenāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the First Dwelling-Place Training Rule is Finished.

5. Dutiyasenāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. The Explanation of the Second Dwelling-Place Training Rule

vihāreti gabbhe vā aññatarasmiṃ vā sabbaparicchanne vuttasenāsane.Seyyanti seyyā nāma bhisī cimilikā uttarattharaṇaṃ bhūmattharaṇaṃ taṭṭikā cammakkhaṇḍo nisīdanaṃ paccattharaṇaṃ tiṇasanthāro paṇṇasanthāroti vuttaṃ. Tatthacimilikānāma parikammakatāya bhūmiyā vaṇṇānurakkhaṇatthaṃ katā.Uttarattharaṇaṃnāma mañcapīṭhādīnaṃ upari attharitabbayuttakaṃ paccattharaṇaṃ.Bhūmattharaṇaṃnāma cimilikāya sati tassā upari, asati suddhabhūmiyaṃ attharitabbā kaṭasārakādi vikati.Taṭṭikānāma tālapaṇṇādīhi katataṭṭikā.Cammakkhaṇḍonāma yaṃkiñci cammaṃ, sīhacammādīnañhi pariharaṇeyeva parikkhepo, senāsanaparibhoge pana akappiyacammaṃ nāma natthi.Paccattharaṇaṃnāma pāvāro kojavoti ettakameva, sesaṃ pākaṭameva. Iti imāsu dasasu seyyāsu ekampi seyyaṃ attano vassaggena gahetvā vuttalakkhaṇe vihāre santharitvā vā santharāpetvā vā yo bhikkhu disaṃgamiko yathā ṭhapitaṃ upacikāhi na khajjati, tathā ṭhapanavasena neva uddhareyya, na uddharāpeyya, purimasikkhāpade vuttanayena anāpucchaṃ vā gaccheyya, tassa parikkhittassa ārāmassa parikkhepaṃ, aparikkhittassa upacāraṃ atikkamantassa paṭhamapāde dukkaṭaṃ, dutiyapāde pācittiyaṃ. Yattha pana upacikāsaṅkā natthi, tato anāpucchāpi gantuṃ vaṭṭati, āpucchanaṃ pana vattaṃ.

Vihāra means in a chamber or in any fully enclosed dwelling place as described. Seyya means a sleeping place, namely, a bhisī, a cīmilikā, an upper spread, a ground spread, a mat, a piece of leather, a seat, a coverlet, a spread of grass, a spread of leaves, as mentioned. Therein, cīmilikā means [something] made on prepared ground to protect the color. Uttarattharaṇa means a suitable coverlet to be spread over a couch or stool, etc. Bhūmattharaṇa means a product of split bamboo, etc., to be spread over the cīmilikā if there is one, or on the bare ground if there is not. Taṭṭikā means a mat made of palm leaves, etc. Cammakkhaṇḍa means any piece of leather. For lion skins, etc., the restriction is only for wearing; there is no unallowable leather for the use of a dwelling place. Paccattharaṇa means only a blanket or woolen rug; the rest is obvious. Thus, among these ten sleeping places, if a bhikkhu, having taken even one sleeping place with his rainy-season requisites, in a vihāra with the characteristics described, having spread it or having had it spread, being about to go on a journey, does not himself remove it, or have it removed, due to [the need] to place it so that it is not eaten by white ants, or goes away without informing [anyone], as stated in the previous training rule, on passing the boundary of an enclosed ārāma, [or] the vicinity of one not enclosed, there is a dukkaṭa at the first step, a pācittiya at the second step. But where there is no fear of white ants, it is permissible to go without informing [anyone]; however, informing is the proper course.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sattarasavaggiye bhikkhū ārabbha saṅghike vihāre seyyaṃ santharitvā anuddharitvā anāpucchā pakkamanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, puggalike tikadukkaṭaṃ, vuttalakkhaṇassa pana vihārassa upacāre bahi āsanne upaṭṭhānasālāya vā aparicchannamaṇḍape vā paricchanne vāpi bahūnaṃ sannipātabhūte rukkhamūle vā santharitvā vā santharāpetvā vā, mañcapīṭhañca vihāre vā vuttappakāre vihārūpacāre vā santharitvā vā santharāpetvā vā uddharaṇādīni akatvā gacchantassa dukkaṭameva. Attano santake, vissāsikapuggalike, uddharaṇādīni katvā, purimanayeneva palibuddhaṃ chaḍḍetvā gamane, yo ca ‘‘ajjeva āgantvā paṭijaggissāmī’’ti evaṃ sāpekkho nadipāraṃ vā gāmantaraṃ vā gantvā yatthassa gamanacittaṃ uppannaṃ, tattheva ṭhito kañci pesetvā vā āpucchati, nadipūrarājacorādīsu vā kenaci palibuddho na sakkoti paccāgantuṃ, tassa ca, āpadāsu ca, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Vuttalakkhaṇaseyyā, tassā saṅghikatā, vuttalakkhaṇe vihāre santharaṇaṃ vā santharāpanaṃ vā, apalibuddhatā, āpadāya abhāvo, anapekkhassa disāpakkamanaṃ, upacārasīmātikkamoti imānettha satta aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni anantarasikkhāpade vuttanayānevāti.

This was established at Sāvatthī, concerning the bhikkhus of the Group-of-Seventeen, regarding the case of spreading out bedding in a Saṅgha vihāra and leaving without removing it, without informing anyone. It is a general rule, a non-commanded rule, a threefold pācittiya; for an individual, a threefold dukkaṭa. However, in the vicinity of a vihāra with the characteristics described, outside nearby, in an assembly hall or an open pavilion, or even in an enclosed one, a place for many to gather, or at the foot of a tree, having spread [a sleeping place] or having had it spread, and also having spread or having had spread a couch or stool in a vihāra or in a place in the vicinity of a vihāra of the kind described, if one departs without doing the removing, etc., it is only a dukkaṭa. There is no offense for things that belong to oneself, for things belonging to a trusted individual, for leaving after having done the removing, etc., for abandoning it encumbered in the manner previously stated, and for one who, thinking, "I will come back and take care of it today," being thus attached, goes to the other side of a river or to another village, and then, when the thought of going arises, remains there and sends someone to inform [the Saṅgha], or is unable to return because he is encumbered by a river in flood, a king, thieves, etc.; for him, and in cases of danger, and for the insane, etc., there is no offense. A sleeping place of the characteristics described, its being the property of the Saṅgha, spreading or having spread [a covering] in a vihāra with the characteristics described, non-encumbrance, absence of danger, going forth on a journey without attachment, and transgression of the boundary of the vicinity, these are the seven factors involved here. The origination, etc., are as stated in the immediately preceding training rule.

Dutiyasenāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Second Dwelling-Place Training Rule is Finished.

6. Anupakhajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. The Training Rule on Encroaching

jānanti ‘‘anuṭṭhāpanīyo aya’’nti jānanto, tenevassa padabhājane ‘‘vuḍḍho’ti jānāti, ‘gilāno’ti jānāti, ‘saṅghena dinno’ti jānātī’’ti (pāci. 121) vuttaṃ. Vuḍḍho hi attano vuḍḍhatāya anuṭṭhāpanīyo, gilāno gilānatāya, saṅgho pana bhaṇḍāgārikassa vā dhammakathikavinayadharagaṇavācakācariyānaṃ vā bahūpakārataṃ guṇavisiṭṭhatañca sallakkhetvā dhuvavāsatthāya vihāraṃ sallakkhetvā sammannitvā deti, tasmā yassa saṅghena dinno, sopi anuṭṭhāpanīyo.Pubbupagatanti pubbaṃ upagataṃ.Anupakhajjāti mañcapīṭhānaṃ vā tassa vā bhikkhuno pavisantassa vā nikkhamantassa vā upacāraṃ anupavisitvā. Tattha mañcapīṭhānaṃ tāva mahallake vihāre samantā diyaḍḍho hattho upacāro, khuddake yato pahoti, tato diyaḍḍho hattho, tassa pana pavisantassa pādadhovanapāsāṇato yāva mañcapīṭhaṃ, nikkhamantassa mañcapīṭhato yāva passāvaṭṭhānaṃ, tāva upacāro.Seyyaṃ kappeyyāti tassa sambādhaṃ kattukāmatāya tasmiṃ upacāre dasasu seyyāsu ekampi santharantassa vā santharāpentassa vā dukkaṭaṃ, tattha nisīdantassa vā nipajjantassa vā pācittiyaṃ, dvepi karontassa dve pācittiyāni, punappunaṃ karontassa payogagaṇanāya pācittiyaṃ.

Jānaṃ means knowing, "This one should not be moved," for in this very division of the text, it is stated, "He knows he is old, he knows he is ill, he knows he has been given [the dwelling] by the Saṅgha" (pāci. 121). For an old man should not be moved because of his old age, a sick man because of his sickness, but the Saṅgha, considering the great usefulness and superior qualities of the treasurer or the Dhamma-speaker, the Vinaya-holder, the reciter of groups, or the teachers, and having considered [the vihāra] for a permanent dwelling, allocates it having decided [on it]; therefore, he to whom it has been given by the Saṅgha also should not be moved. Pubbupagataṃ means one who has previously arrived. Anupakhajjā means without entering into the vicinity of the couches or of that bhikkhu when he is entering or leaving. Therein, for the couches, etc., in a large vihāra, the vicinity is a cubit and a half all around; in a small one, it is from where it can be, plus a cubit and a half; for him entering, the vicinity is from the foot-washing stone up to the couch; for him leaving, the vicinity is from the couch up to the place for urinating. Seyyaṃ kappeyya means that for the purpose of making it cramped for him, in that vicinity, by spreading or having spread even one of the ten sleeping places, there is a dukkaṭa; by sitting or lying down there, there is a pācittiya; by doing both, there are two pācittiyas; by doing it repeatedly, there is a pācittiya for each effort.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye bhikkhū ārabbha anupakhajja seyyakappanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, puggalike tikadukkaṭaṃ, vuttūpacārato vā bahi, upaṭṭhānasālādike vā, vihārassa upacāre vā, santharaṇasantharāpanesupi nisajjasayanesupi dukkaṭameva. Attano vā, vissāsikassa vā santake pana vihāre santharantassa, yo ca gilāno vā sītuṇhapīḷito vā pavisati, tassa ca, āpadāsu ca, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Saṅghikavihāratā, anuṭṭhāpanīyabhāvajānanaṃ, sambādhetukāmatā, upacāre nisīdanaṃ vā nipajjanaṃ vāti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamapārājikasadisāneva, idaṃ pana dukkhavedanamevāti.

This was established at Sāvatthī, concerning the bhikkhus of the Group-of-Six, regarding the case of encroaching upon [another's space] by preparing a sleeping place. It is a general rule, a non-commanded rule, a threefold pācittiya; for an individual, a threefold dukkaṭa. Outside the vicinity described, or in an assembly hall, etc., or in the vicinity of a vihāra, for spreading, having spread, sitting, and lying down, there is only a dukkaṭa. There is no offense for one who spreads [a sleeping place] in a vihāra that belongs to himself or to a trusted individual, or for one who is ill or afflicted by heat or cold and enters, or in cases of danger, or for the insane, etc. The [dwelling's] being a Saṅgha vihāra, knowing that [the bhikkhu] should not be moved, intending to cause crowding, sitting or lying down in the vicinity, these are the four factors involved here. The origination, etc., are similar to the first pārājika, but this is only painful feeling.

Anupakhajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Encroaching is Finished.

7. Nikkaḍḍhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. The Training Rule on Dragging Out

kupitoti kuddho.Anattamanoti atuṭṭhacitto.Nikkaḍḍheyya vā nikkaḍḍhāpeyya vā pācittiyanti ettha ye anekabhūmakā pāsādā, anekakoṭṭhakāni vā catussālāni, tādisesu senāsanesu gahetvā antarā aṭṭhapetvā ekeneva payogena atikkāmentassa ekaṃ pācittiyaṃ, ṭhapetvā ṭhapetvā nānāpayogehi atikkāmentassa dvāragaṇanāya pācittiyāni, hatthena anāmasitvā ‘nikkhamā’ti vatvā vācāya nikkaḍḍhantassāpi eseva nayo. Nikkaḍḍhāpentassa pana ‘nikkaḍḍhā’ti āṇattamatte dukkaṭaṃ, sakiṃ āṇatte pana tasmiṃ bahukepi dvāre nikkhamante itarassa ekameva pācittiyaṃ. Sace pana ‘‘ettakāni dvārāni nikkaḍḍhāhī’’ti vā, ‘‘yāva mahādvāraṃ, tāva nikkaḍḍhāhī’’ti vā evaṃ niyametvā āṇatto hoti, dvāragaṇanāya pācittiyāni.

Kupito means angry. Anattamano means displeased in mind. Nikkaḍḍheyya vā nikkaḍḍhāpeyya vā pācittiyaṃ means here, in such dwellings as multi-storied buildings, or four-sided halls with many apartments, for one who takes [a bhikkhu] and, placing him in between, removes him with a single effort, there is one pācittiya; for one who removes him, placing him each time with various efforts, there are pācittiyas according to the number of doorways; the same method applies for one who drags him out by saying "Get out" without touching him with his hand. However, for one who has [another] drag him out, there is a dukkaṭa at the mere command "Drag him out," but even if he exits through many doorways after a single command, there is only one pācittiya for the other. But if he is commanded with a specification, "Drag him out through so many doorways" or "Drag him out as far as the main doorway," there are pācittiyas according to the number of doorways.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye bhikkhū ārabbha bhikkhuṃ saṅghikā vihārā nikkaḍḍhanavatthusmiṃ

This was established at Sāvatthī, concerning the bhikkhus of the Group-of-Six, regarding dragging a bhikkhu out of a Saṅgha vihāra.

Paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, sāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, puggalike tikadukkaṭaṃ, tassa parikkhāranikkaḍḍhane, upaṭṭhānasālādikā vihārūpacārā tassa vā tassa parikkhārassa vā nikkaḍḍhane, anupasampannassa pana anupasampannaparikkhārassa vā vihārā vā vihārūpacārā vā nikkaḍḍhane nikkaḍḍhāpane ca dukkaṭameva. Tañca kho asambaddhesu parikkhāresu parikkhāragaṇanāya veditabbaṃ. Attano vā, vissāsikassa vā santakā vihārā nikkaḍḍhane, sakalasaṅghārāmatopi bhaṇḍanakārakassa vā tassa parikkhārassa vā nikkaḍḍhane nikkaḍḍhāpane vā, attano vasanaṭṭhānato alajjissa, ummattakassa, na sammāvattantānaṃ antevāsikasaavihārikānaṃ, tesaṃ parikkhārassa vā nikkaḍḍhane ca, sayaṃ ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Saṅghikavihāro, upasampannassa bhaṇḍanakārakabhāvādivinimuttatā, kopena nikkaḍḍhanaṃ vā nikkaḍḍhāpanaṃ vāti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāni, idaṃ pana dukkhavedananti.

It is a general rule, a commanded rule, a threefold pācittiya; for an individual, a threefold dukkaṭa. For dragging out his requisites, for dragging out the vihāra vicinity such as the assembly hall, etc., or for dragging out that or those requisites, and for dragging out an unordained person or the requisites of an unordained person from a vihāra or the vicinity of a vihāra, there is only a dukkaṭa, for both dragging out and having [him] dragged out. And that should be understood as [counted] according to the number of requisites in the case of detached requisites. There is no offense for dragging out [someone] from a vihāra belonging to oneself or to a trusted individual, or for dragging out a quarrelsome person or his requisites from the entire Saṅgha monastery, or for having [him] dragged out, or for one who is shameless from his own dwelling place, for the insane, for the trainee-resident and co-resident who do not behave properly, or for dragging out their requisites, and for the insane, etc., themselves. A Saṅgha vihāra, an ordained person's being free from being quarrelsome, etc., dragging out or having [him] dragged out in anger, these are the three factors involved here. The origination, etc., are similar to taking what is not given, but this is only painful feeling.

Nikkaḍḍhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Dragging Out is Finished.

8. Vehāsakuṭisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. The Training Rule on a Raised Hut

uparivehāsakuṭiyāti upari acchannatalāya dvibhūmikakuṭiyā vā tibhūmikakuṭiyā vā, padabhājane pana idha adhippetaṃ kuṭiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘majjhimassa purisassa asīsaghaṭṭā’’ti (pāci. 131) vuttaṃ.Āhaccapādakanti aṅge vijjhitvā pavesitapādakaṃ.Abhinisīdeyyāti abhibhavitvā ajjhottharitvā nisīdeyya, bhummatthe vā etaṃ upayogavacanaṃ, mañce vā pīṭhe vā nisīdeyya vā nipajjeyya vāti attho.Abhīti idaṃ pana padasobhaṇatthe upasaggamattameva, tasmā yo bhikkhu vuttalakkhaṇāya vehāsakuṭiyā sabbantimena paricchedena yāva pamāṇamajjhimassa purisassa sabbaso heṭṭhimāhi tulāhi sīsaṃ na ghaṭṭeti, ettakaṃ uccāya tulānaṃ upari ṭhapite āhaccapādake mañce vā pīṭhe vā nisīdati vā nipajjati vā, tassa anupakhajjasikkhāpade vuttanayena payogagaṇanāya pācittiyaṃ.

Uparivehāsakuṭiyā means a two-storied or three-storied hut with a roofed upper level; however, in the division of the text, in order to show the hut intended here, it is stated, "Not touching the head of a man of medium height" (pāci. 131). Āhaccapādakaṃ means with legs fixed by piercing [the supports]. Abhinisīdeyyā means should sit having dominated, having overwhelmed; or this is an instrumental usage in the sense of location; the meaning is should sit or lie down on a couch or stool. Abhī is only a particle, merely a prefix, for the sake of elegance of the word; therefore, for a bhikkhu who sits or lies down on a couch or stool placed on legs fixed to an upper level of a vehāsa kuṭi with the characteristics described, where the uppermost limit does not touch the head in any way of a man of medium height in measure with the lowest beams, for so high [as that] of the beams, there is a pācittiya for each effort, in the manner stated in the training rule on encroaching.

Sāvatthiyaṃ aññataraṃ bhikkhuṃ ārabbha uparivehāsakuṭiyā āhaccapādakaṃ mañcaṃ pīṭhaṃ sahasā abhinisīdanaabhinipajjanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, puggalike tikadukkaṭaṃ, attano vā, vissāsikassa vā santake vihāre, avehāsakuṭiyā, sīsaghaṭṭāya, yassa vā heṭṭhā dabbasambhārādīnaṃ nikkhittattā aparibhogaṃ hoti, uparitalaṃ vā padarasañcitaṃ sudhādiparikammakataṃ vā, tattha āhaccapādake nisīdantassa, yo ce tasmiṃ vehāsaṭṭhepi āhaccapādake ṭhito kiñci gaṇhāti vā laggati vā, yassa ca paṭāṇī dinnā hoti, pādasīsānaṃ upari āṇī pavesitā, tattha nisīdantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Saṅghiko vihāro, asīsaghaṭṭā vehāsakuṭi, heṭṭhā saparibhogaṃ, apaṭāṇidinne āhaccapādake nisīdanaṃ vā nipajjanaṃ vāti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasadisānīti.

This was established at Sāvatthī, concerning a certain bhikkhu, regarding suddenly sitting or lying down on a couch or stool with attached legs in a raised hut. It is a general rule, a non-commanded rule, a threefold pācittiya; for an individual, a threefold dukkaṭa. In a vihāra that belongs to oneself or to a trusted individual, in a non-vehāsa kuṭi, when the head touches [the ceiling], or when the upper level is not for use because goods, supplies, etc., have been placed underneath, or the upper floor is covered with plaster or decorated with stucco, for one who sits on legs fixed [to the supports] there, and also for one who, standing in that vehāsa, takes or touches something on legs fixed [to the supports], and for one to whom a prop has been given, a peg inserted above the feet or the head, for one who sits there, and for the insane, etc., there is no offense. A Saṅgha vihāra, a vehāsa kuṭi where the head does not touch [the ceiling], the lower level being for use, sitting or lying down on legs fixed [to the supports] without a prop having been given, these are the four factors involved here. The origination, etc., are similar to eḷaka wool.

Vehāsakuṭisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on the Raised Hut is Finished.

9. Mahallakavihārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. The Training Rule on a Large Dwelling Place

mahallakanti sassāmikaṃ.Vihāranti ullittāvallittaṃ.Yāva dvārakosātiettha dvārakoso nāma ukkaṭṭhaparicchedena piṭṭhasaṅghāṭassa sāmantā aḍḍhateyyahattho padeso.Aggaḷaṭṭhapanāyāti sakavāṭakassa dvārabandhassa niccalabhāvatthāya. Kavāṭañhi lahuparivattakaṃ vivaraṇakāle bhittiṃ āhanati, pidahanakāle dvārabandhaṃ. Tena āhanena bhitti kampati, tato mattikā calati, calitvā sithilā vā hoti patati vā, tenāha bhagavā ‘‘yāva dvārakosā aggaḷaṭṭhapanāyā’’ti. Tattha kiñcāpi ‘‘idaṃ nāma kattabba’’nti neva mātikāyaṃ, na padabhājane vuttaṃ, aṭṭhuppattiyaṃ pana ‘‘punappunaṃ chādāpesi, punappunaṃ lepāpesī’’ti (pāci. 134) adhikārato yāva dvārakosā aggaḷaṭṭhapanāya punappunaṃ limpitabbo vā lepāpetabbo vāti evamattho daṭṭhabbo.Ālokasandhiparikammāyātietthaālokasandhīti vātapānakavāṭakā vuccanti. Te vivaraṇakāle vidatthimattampi atirekampi bhittippadesaṃ paharanti, upacāro panettha sabbadisāsu labbhati, tasmā sabbadisāsu kavāṭavitthārappamāṇo okāso ālokasandhiparikammatthāya limpitabbo vā lepāpetabbo vāti ayamettha adhippāyo.

Mahallakaṃ means with an owner.Vihāra means plastered and re-plastered.Yāva dvārakosāti: here, dvārakoso means, by the height limit, an area around the back of the doorframe of one and a half hattha. Aggaḷaṭṭhapanāyāti: for the stability of the door-leaf of one’s own doorframe. The door-leaf, being easily turned, strikes the wall when opening, and the doorframe when closing. By that striking, the wall trembles, and from that, the plaster moves, and having moved, either loosens or falls. Therefore, the Blessed One said, “Yāva dvārakosā aggaḷaṭṭhapanāyā”. Here, although it is not stated in the Mātikā nor in the word-explanation “This must be done,” in the origin story (pāci. 134), due to the authority of “He repeatedly had it roofed, repeatedly had it plastered,” it should be understood that up to the dvārakoso, for the setting of the bolt, it should be repeatedly plastered or had plastered. Ālokasandhiparikammāyāti: Here, ālokasandhī means window-shutters. When opened, they strike the wall area by a span or more. Treatment is available in all directions here. Therefore, the space equal to the width of the shutter in all directions should be plastered or had plastered for the purpose of repairing the window joints. This is the intention here.

dvatticchadanassātiādimāha. Tatthadvatticchadanassa pariyāyanti chadanassa dvattipariyāyaṃ,pariyāyaṃvuccati parikkhepo, parikkhepadvayaṃ vā parikkhepattayaṃ vā adhiṭṭhātabbanti attho.Appaharite ṭhitenāti aharite ṭhitena.Haritanti cettha sattadhaññādibhedaṃ pubbaṇṇaṃ, muggamāsatilakulatthaalābukumbhaṇḍādibhedañca aparaṇṇaṃ adhippetaṃ. Yaṃ tasmiṃ khette vuttaṃ na tāva sampajjati, vasse pana patite sampajjissati, tampi haritasaṅkhameva gacchati. Tasmā tasmiṃ ṭhatvā adhiṭṭhahanto dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati. Appaharite ṭhatvā adhiṭṭhahantassāpi ayaṃ paricchedo, piṭṭhivaṃsassa vā kūṭāgārathūpikāya vā passe nisinno puriso chadanamukhavaṭṭiantena olokento yasmiṃ bhūmibhāge ṭhitaṃ bhikkhuṃ passati, yasmiñca ṭhito taṃ upari nisinnakaṃ tatheva ullokento passati, tasmiṃ ṭhātabbaṃ, tassa anto aharitepi ṭhātuṃ na labhati.Tato ce uttarīti maggena chādiyamāne tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ, pariyāyena chādiyamāne tiṇṇaṃ pariyāyānaṃ upari iṭṭhakasilāsudhāhi chādiyamāne iṭṭhakasilāsudhāpiṇḍagaṇanāya, tiṇapaṇṇehi chādiyamāne paṇṇagaṇanāya ceva tiṇamuṭṭhigaṇanāya ca pācittiyaṃ.

dvatticchadanassāti etc., was said. There, dvatticchadanassa pariyāyaṃ means two or three layers of roofing; pariyāyaṃ means surrounding, two surroundings or three surroundings should be determined. That is the meaning. Appaharite ṭhitenāti: by one standing in a non-green area. Here, harita means green, divided into seven types of grains etc., and aparaṇṇa, divided into mung beans, black beans, sesame, horse gram, gourds, pumpkins, etc. What is sown in that field does not yet come to fruition, but when rain falls, it will come to fruition; that too goes into the category of green. Therefore, one incurs a dukkaṭa offense when determining while standing there. Even when determining while standing in a non-green area, this is the limit: a person sitting on the side of a spine-wall or the pinnacle of a storied building, looking with the edge of his face at the bhikkhu standing on whatever part of the ground, and the bhikkhu standing there, looking upwards at the one sitting above, can stand in that place. One is not allowed to stand inside that, even in a non-green area. Tato ce uttarīti: when roofing with paths, above three paths; when roofing with layers, above three layers; when roofing with bricks, stones, or mortar, by counting lumps of bricks, stones, or mortar; and when roofing with grass or leaves, by counting leaves as well as counting handfuls of grass, there is a pācittiya offense.

Kosambiyaṃ channattheraṃ ārabbha punappunaṃ chādāpanalepāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, ūnadvattipariyāye atirekasaññino vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ. Setavaṇṇādikaraṇe, dvattipariyāye vā ūnakadvattipariyāye vā, leṇaguhātiṇakuṭikādīsu, aññassatthāya, attano dhanena kārentassa, vāsāgāraṃ ṭhapetvā sesāni adhiṭṭhahantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Mahallakavihāratā, attano vāsāgāratā, uttari adhiṭṭhānanti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni sañcaritte vuttanayānevāti.

It was prescribed in Kosambi concerning the repeated roofing and plastering in relation to the elder Channa, a general prescription, not by order, a triple pācittiya, a dukkaṭa for one who is doubtful or perceives an excess when there are less than two or three layers. No offense for doing white-washing etc., for two or three layers or less than two or three layers, in caves, huts, grass huts, etc., for the sake of another, for one having it done with one’s own wealth, for one determining the remaining dwelling places except for the dwelling, and for the insane etc. Being a dilapidated dwelling, being one's own dwelling, determining further: these are the three factors here. Arising etc. are as stated in the section on wandering.

Mahallakavihārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the training rule on dilapidated dwellings is finished.

10. Sappāṇakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. The Training Rule on Living Beings

jānaṃ sappāṇakanti ‘‘sappāṇakaṃ eta’’nti disvā vā sutvā vā yena kenaci ākārena jānanto.Siñceyya vā siñcāpeyya vāti tena udakena sayaṃ vā siñceyya, aññaṃ vā āṇāpetvā siñcāpeyya. Tattha dhāraṃ avicchinditvā siñcantassa ekasmiṃ ghaṭe ekāva āpatti, vicchindantassa payogagaṇanāya āpattiyo. Mātikaṃ pamukhaṃ karoti, divasampi sandatu, ekāva āpatti. Tattha tattha bandhitvā aññato nentassa payogagaṇanāya āpattiyo. Bahukampi tiṇapaṇṇasākhādiṃ ekappayogena udake pakkhipantassa ekāva āpatti, ekekaṃ pakkhipantassa payogagaṇanāya āpattiyo. Idañca yaṃ evaṃ pakkhipiyamāne pariyādānaṃ gacchati, āvilaṃ vā hoti, yathā pāṇakā maranti, tādisaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na mahāudakaṃ. Siñcāpane āṇattiyā dukkaṭaṃ, ekāṇattiyā bahukampi siñcatu, āṇāpakassa ekameva pācittiyaṃ.

Jānaṃ sappāṇakaṃ means knowing by some means, either by seeing or hearing, "This has living beings." Siñceyya vā siñcāpeyya vā: either he himself irrigates with that water, or orders another and has it irrigated. There, for one irrigating without interrupting the stream, there is only one offense for one pot; for one interrupting, there are offenses according to the number of efforts. If he makes the Mātikā the main thing, even if it flows for a day, there is only one offense. There, for one tying it up and taking it elsewhere, there are offenses according to the number of efforts. For one throwing even a lot of grass, leaves, branches, etc., into the water with one effort, there is only one offense; for one throwing each one, there are offenses according to the number of efforts. And this is said with reference to that which, when thrown in that way, reaches its limit, or becomes turbid, so that living beings die, not with reference to a large amount of water. In having it irrigated, there is a dukkaṭa offense for the order; even if many irrigate with one order, there is only one pācittiya offense for the one who ordered.

Āḷaviyaṃ āḷavake bhikkhū ārabbha siñcanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, sāṇattikaṃ, appāṇake sappāṇakasaññino, ubhosu vematikassa dukkaṭaṃ. Appāṇakasaññino, asañcicca assatiyā vā siñcantassa, ajānantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Udakassa sappāṇakatā, ‘‘siñcanena pāṇakā marissantī’’ti jānanaṃ, tañca udakaṃ tādisameva, vinā vadhakacetanāya yena kenaci karaṇīyena tiṇādīnaṃ siñcananti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāni, idaṃ pana paṇṇattivajjaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.

It was prescribed in Āḷavī concerning the act of irrigating in relation to the Āḷavaka monks, a general prescription, by order, a dukkaṭa for one who perceives living beings in what is without living beings, or who is doubtful about both. No offense for one who perceives what is without living beings, for one irrigating unintentionally or through inattentiveness, for one who does not know, and for the insane etc. The water having living beings, knowing that "living beings will die by irrigating," and that water being of such a kind, irrigating grass etc. by any deed without the intention to kill: these are the four factors here. Arising etc. are similar to those of taking what is not given, but this is an offense by prescription, triple-consciousness, triple-vedana.

Sappāṇakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the training rule on living beings is finished.

Bhūtagāmavaggo dutiyo.

The second chapter, Bhūtagāmavagga.

3. Ovādavaggo

3. Ovādavagga

1. Ovādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. The Explanation of the Ovāda Training Rule

asammatoti yā aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatassa bhikkhuno bhagavatā ñatticatutthena kammena (pāci. 146) bhikkhunovādakasammuti anuññātā, tāya asammato.Ovadeyyāti bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ vā sambahulā vā ekaṃ bhikkhuniṃ vā ‘‘vassasatūpasampannāya bhikkhuniyā tadahupasampannassa bhikkhuno abhivādanaṃ paccuṭṭhānaṃ añjalikammaṃ sāmīcikammaṃ kātabba’’nti ādike (cūḷava. 403) aṭṭha garudhamme ovādavasena osārento ovadeyya.Pācittiyanti ovādapariyosāne pācittiyaṃ.

Asammatoti: one who is not authorized by the Buddha with a ñatticatuttha-kamma (pāci. 146) for a bhikkhu endowed with eight qualities by which authorization to admonish bhikkhunis is permitted. Ovadeyyāti: may admonish a bhikkhuni-sangha, a group of bhikkhunis, or a single bhikkhuni, imparting instruction in the manner of admonishment on the eight garudhammas, such as "a bhikkhuni ordained for a hundred years should pay homage, rise up, salute, and perform proper conduct towards a bhikkhu ordained on that day" (cūḷava. 403). Pācittiyaṃti: at the conclusion of the admonishment, there is a pācittiya offense.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye bhikkhū ārabbha ovadanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, asādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, aññena vā dhammena bhikkhunīsu upasampannamattaṃ vā ovadato dukkaṭaṃ. Sammatassāpi tañce sammutikammaṃ adhammakammaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ adhammakamme adhammakammasaññino vagge bhikkhunisaṅghe ovadato tikapācittiyaṃ, tathā vematikassa dhammakammasaññino cāti nava pācittiyāni, samaggepi bhikkhunisaṅghena vāti adhammakammavasena aṭṭhārasa. Sace pana taṃ dhammakammaṃ hoti, ‘‘dhammakamme dhammakammasaññī samaggaṃ bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ samaggasaññī ovadatī’’ti (pāci. 151) idaṃ avasānapadaṃ ṭhapetvā teneva nayena sattarasa dukkaṭāni, ‘‘samaggamhāyyā’’ti ca vutte aññaṃ dhammaṃ, ‘‘vaggamhāyyā’’ti ca vutte aṭṭha garudhamme bhaṇantassa, ovādañca aniyyātetvā aññaṃ dhammaṃ bhaṇantassa dukkaṭameva. Yo pana dhammakamme dhammakammasaññī samaggaṃ bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ samaggasaññī ovadati, garudhammapāḷiṃ uddesaṃ deti, paripucchaṃ deti, ‘‘osārehi ayyā’’ti vuccamāno osāreti, pañhaṃ puṭṭho katheti, bhikkhunīnaṃ suṇamānānaṃ aññassatthāya bhaṇati, sikkhamānāya vā sāmaṇeriyā vā bhaṇati, tassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Asammatatā, bhikkhuniyā paripuṇṇūpasampannatā, ovādavasena aṭṭhagarudhammabhaṇananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni padasodhammasadisānevāti.

It was prescribed in Sāvatthī concerning the act of admonishing in relation to the Chabbaggiya monks, a non-general prescription, not by order, a dukkaṭa for one who admonishes bhikkhunis who are ordained only through another Dhamma. If even the authorized one's act of authorization is an unlawful act, there is a triple pācittiya for admonishing the bhikkhuni sangha in the group perceiving an unlawful act in that unlawful act, and similarly for one who is doubtful and perceives a lawful act, thus nine pācittiyas, and eighteen through unlawful acts even with a harmonious bhikkhuni sangha. But if that is a lawful act, keeping this final phrase, “dhammakamme dhammakammasaññī samaggaṃ bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ samaggasaññī ovadatīti (pāci. 151)”, by that same method, there are seventeen dukkaṭas, and when saying “samaggamhāyyā”, speaking about another dhamma; and when saying “vaggamhāyyā”, speaking about the eight garudhammas; and only a dukkaṭa for speaking about another dhamma without having announced the admonishment. But no offense for one who, in a lawful act, perceiving a lawful act, admonishes a harmonious bhikkhuni sangha perceiving harmony, gives an introduction to the garudhamma text, gives an explanation, instructs when being told "admonish, ayyā", answers when asked a question, speaks for the sake of another when bhikkhunis are listening, or speaks to a sikkhamānā or sāmaṇerī, and for the insane etc. Being unauthorized, the bhikkhuni being fully ordained, speaking the eight garudhammas in the manner of admonishment: these are the three factors here. Arising etc. are similar to those of the word-explanation-Dhamma.

Ovādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Ovāda Training Rule is finished.

2. Atthaṅgatasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. The Training Rule on After Sunset

ovadeyyāti aṭṭhagarudhammehi vā aññena vā dhammena ovadantassa sammatassāpi pācittiyameva.

Ovadeyyāti: even for an authorized one, there is only a pācittiya for admonishing with the eight garudhammas or another dhamma.

Sāvatthiyaṃ āyasmantaṃ cūḷapanthakaṃ ārabbha atthaṅgate sūriye ovadanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, asādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, sūriye atthaṅgate atthaṅgatasaññino vematikassa vā, ekatoupasampannaṃ ovadantassa ca dukkaṭaṃ. Purimasikkhāpade viya uddesādinayena anāpatti. Atthaṅgatasūriyatā, paripuṇṇūpasampannatā, ovadananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni padasodhammasadisānevāti.

It was prescribed in Sāvatthī concerning the act of admonishing after sunset in relation to the venerable Cūḷapanthaka, a non-general prescription, not by order, a triple pācittiya, a dukkaṭa for one who is doubtful or perceives that the sun has set when the sun has set, and for one who admonishes one who is ordained on one side. No offense by way of introduction etc. as in the previous training rule. The sun having set, being fully ordained, admonishing: these are the three factors here. Arising etc. are similar to those of the word-explanation-Dhamma.

Atthaṅgatasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the training rule on after sunset is finished.

3. Bhikkhunupassayasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. The Training Rule on the Bhikkhuni Residence

bhikkhunupassayanti bhikkhuniyā ekarattaṃ vasanaṭṭhānampi.Ovadeyyāti idha garudhammehi ovadantasseva pācittiyaṃ. Sace pana asammato hoti, dve pācittiyāni. Sace pana sūriyepi atthaṅgate ovadati, tīṇi honti. Sammatassa pana rattiṃ ovadantassapi dve eva honti. Sammatattā hi bhikkhussa garudhammovādamūlakaṃ pācittiyaṃ natthi.Gilānāti na sakkoti ovādāya vā saṃvāsāya vā gantuṃ.

Bhikkhunupassayaṃti: even a place where bhikkhunis stay for one night. Ovadeyyāti: here, there is only a pācittiya for admonishing with the garudhammas. But if he is unauthorized, there are two pācittiyas. But if he admonishes even after the sun has set, there are three. But for an authorized one, there are only two even when admonishing at night. For a bhikkhu, there is no pācittiya based on admonishing with the garudhammas because he is authorized. Gilānāti: unable to go for admonishment or association.

Sakkesu chabbaggiye bhikkhū ārabbha bhikkhunupassayaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ovadanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘aññatra samayā’’ti ayamettha anupaññatti, asādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, anupasampannāya upasampannasaññino vematikassa vā, ekatoupasampannaṃ yena kenaci, itaraṃ aññena dhammena ovadantassa ca dukkaṭaṃ. Samaye, anupasampannāya, purimasikkhāpade viya uddesādinayena ca anāpatti. Upassayūpagamanaṃ, paripuṇṇūpasampannatā, samayābhāvo, garudhammehi ovadananti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamakathinasadisāni, idaṃ pana kiriyaṃ hotīti.

It was prescribed among the Sakyans concerning the act of going to a bhikkhuni residence and admonishing in relation to the Chabbaggiya monks, "except at the proper time" is the additional rule here, a non-general prescription, not by order, a triple pācittiya, a dukkaṭa for one who perceives one who is not fully ordained as fully ordained or who is doubtful, and for one who admonishes one who is ordained on one side with some other Dhamma. No offense at the proper time, for one who is not fully ordained, and by way of introduction etc. as in the previous training rule. Going to the residence, being fully ordained, absence of proper time, admonishing with the garudhammas: these are the four factors here. Arising etc. are similar to the first kathina, but this is a deed.

Bhikkhunupassayasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the training rule on the bhikkhuni residence is finished.

4. Āmisasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. The Training Rule on Material Gain

āmisahetūti cīvarādīnaṃ aññatarahetu.Bhikkhūti sammatā bhikkhū idhādhippetā.Pācittiyanti evarūpe bhikkhū avaṇṇakāmatāya evaṃ bhaṇantassa pācittiyaṃ.

Āmisahetūti: for the sake of any of the requisites such as robes etc. Bhikkhūti: here, authorized bhikkhus are intended. Pācittiyaṃti: for a bhikkhu of such a kind, there is a pācittiya offense for speaking in this way out of a desire to disparage.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye bhikkhū ārabbha ‘‘āmisahetu ovadantī’’ti bhaṇanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, asādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, dhammakamme tikapācittiyaṃ, adhammakamme tikadukkaṭaṃ, asammataṃ upasampannañca, anupasampannañca sammataṃ vā asammataṃ vā evaṃ bhaṇantassa dukkaṭameva. Tattha yo bhikkhu kāle sammutiṃ labhitvā sāmaṇerabhūmiyaṃ saṇṭhito, ayaṃ sammato nāma anupasampanno. Pakatiyā cīvarādihetu ovadantaṃ pana evaṃ bhaṇantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Upasampannatā, dhammena laddhasammutitā, anāmisantaratā, avaṇṇakāmatāya evaṃ bhaṇananti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāni, idaṃ pana dukkhavedanamevāti.

It was prescribed in Sāvatthī concerning the act of saying "they admonish for the sake of material gain" in relation to the Chabbaggiya monks, a non-general prescription, not by order, a triple pācittiya in a lawful act, a triple dukkaṭa in an unlawful act, and only a dukkaṭa for one who is unauthorized and fully ordained, and for one who says this way whether authorized or unauthorized, ordained or not ordained. There, a bhikkhu who obtains authorization in time and remains in the stage of a novice is called authorized but not fully ordained. However, no offense for one who naturally speaks in this way about one who admonishes for the sake of robes etc., and for the insane etc. Being fully ordained, having obtained authorization by Dhamma, not being for the sake of material gain, speaking in this way out of a desire to disparage: these are the four factors here. Arising etc. are similar to those of taking what is not given, but this is only painful feeling.

Āmisasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the training rule on material gain is finished.

5. Cīvaradānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. The Training Rule on Giving Robes

Pañcame sāvatthiyaṃ aññataraṃ bhikkhuṃ ārabbha cīvaradānavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sesakathāmaggo panettha cīvarappaṭiggahaṇasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Tatra hi bhikkhu paṭiggāhako, idha bhikkhunī, ayaṃ viseso, sesaṃ tādisamevāti.

In the fifth, it was prescribed in Sāvatthī concerning the act of giving robes in relation to a certain bhikkhu, the path of the remaining story should be understood in the same way as stated in the training rule on accepting robes. There, the bhikkhu is the receiver, here, a bhikkhuni, this is the difference, the rest is the same.

Cīvaradānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the training rule on giving robes is finished.

6. Cīvarasibbanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. The Training Rule on Sewing Robes

cīvaranti nivāsanapārupanupagaṃ.Sibbeyya vā sibbāpeyyā vāti ettha sayaṃ sibbantassa sūciṃ pavesetvā pavesetvā nīharaṇe pācittiyaṃ, satakkhattumpi vijjhitvā sakiṃ nīharantassa ekameva pācittiyaṃ. ‘Sibbā’ti vutto pana sacepi sabbaṃ sūcikammaṃ niṭṭhāpeti, āṇāpakassa ekameva pācittiyaṃ. Atha ‘‘yaṃ ettha cīvare kattabbaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ tava bhāro’’ti vutto niṭṭhāpeti, tassa ārāpathe ārāpathe pācittiyaṃ. Āṇāpakassa ekavācāya sambahulānipi, punappunaṃ āṇattiyaṃ pana vattabbameva natthi.

Cīvaraṃti: for wearing and covering. Sibbeyya vā sibbāpeyya vā: Here, for one sewing oneself, there is a pācittiya offense for each insertion and removal of the needle; for one piercing even a hundred times and removing it once, there is only one pācittiya. But when told “sew”, even if he finishes all the needlework, there is only one pācittiya for the one who ordered. Then, if being told "whatever is to be done here on the robe, all that is your responsibility" and he finishes it, there is a pācittiya at each stitch. For the one who ordered, there can be many with one utterance, but there is no need to speak about repeated orders.

Sāvatthiyaṃ udāyittheraṃ ārabbha cīvarasibbanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, asādhāraṇapaññatti, sāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, ñātikāya aññātikasaññino vā vematikassa vā, ekatoupasampannāya sibbantassa ca dukkaṭaṃ. Aññaṃ thavikādiparikkhāraṃ sibbantassa, ñātikāya, sikkhamānasāmaṇerīnañca cīvarampi sibbantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā santakatā, nivāsanapārupanupagatā, vuttalakkhaṇaṃ sibbanaṃ vā sibbāpanaṃ vāti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni sañcarittasadisānevāti.

Established in Sāvatthī concerning the matter of robe-sewing, related to the Elder Udāyi, it is an extraordinary rule, unactionable, a three-fold pācittiya, for a relative, or one who is uncertain or perceives a non-relative as a relative, and a dukkaṭa for one who sews for a fully ordained bhikkhunī. There is no offense for sewing other requisites like bags, for a relative, or for a female trainee (sikkhamāna) or a female novice (sāmaṇerī), or even for sewing a robe, or for an insane person, etc. For a non-relative bhikkhunī, the items must be owned by her, not intended as under or outer garments, and the sewing or having sewn must match the description given. These are the three factors involved here. The arising and so on are similar to those regarding association.

Cīvarasibbanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Robe-Sewing Training Rule is Complete.

7. Saṃvidhānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Arrangement Training Rule

saṃvidhāyāti saṃvidahitvā, gamanakāle saṅketaṃ katvāti attho.Ekaddhānamagganti ekaṃ addhānasaṅkhātaṃ maggaṃ, ekato vā addhānamaggaṃ.Satthagamanīyoti satthena saddhiṃ gantabbo, sesaṃ uttānapadatthameva. Ayaṃ panettha vinicchayo – akappiyabhūmiyaṃ saṃvidahantassa saṃvidahanapaccayā tāva dukkaṭaṃ. Tattha ṭhapetvā bhikkhunupassayaṃ antarārāmaṃ āsanasālaṃ titthiyaseyyañca sesā akappiyabhūmi, tattha ṭhatvā saṃvidahantassāti attho. Saṃvidahitvā pana ‘‘ajja vā sve vā’’ti niyamitaṃ kālaṃ visaṅketaṃ akatvā, dvāravisaṅketaṃ pana maggavisaṅketaṃ vā katvāpi bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ gacchantassa yāva āsannassāpi aññassa gāmassa ‘‘ayaṃ imassa upacāro’’ti manussehi ṭhapitaṃ upacāraṃ na okkamati, tāva anāpatti. Taṃ okkamantassa pana paṭhamapāde dukkaṭaṃ, dutiyapāde pācittiyaṃ, iti gāmūpacārokkamanagaṇanāya pācittiyāni. Addhayojanātikkame pana gāme asati addhayojanagaṇanāya pācittiyaṃ.

saṃvidhāyā: having made arrangements, meaning having made an agreement for the journey. Ekaddhānamaggaṃ: a path considered as one stretch, or a path for a single journey. Satthagamanīyo: to be traveled together with a caravan. The rest is straightforward in meaning. Here is the ruling on this matter: for one making arrangements in an inappropriate location, there is a dukkaṭa merely due to the act of arranging. Except for a bhikkhunī's residence, an inner monastery, a hall, and a heretical resting place, the rest are inappropriate locations, meaning arranging while being in those places. However, if after making arrangements, one goes together with a bhikkhunī without setting a specific time like “today or tomorrow” and without cancelling the agreement, even if the agreement regarding the gate or the route is cancelled, as long as one does not cross the boundary established by people marking "this is the boundary of this village," even to a nearby village, there is no offense. But upon crossing that boundary, there is a dukkaṭa for the first step and a pācittiya for the second step; thus, pācittiyas accumulate with each crossing of the village boundary. However, if there is no village and one exceeds half a yojana, there is a pācittiya for every half yojana.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye bhikkhū ārabbha ekaddhānamaggappaṭipajjanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘aññatra samayā’’ti ayamettha anupaññatti, asādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, asaṃvidahite saṃvidahitasaññino vematikassa vā, yo ca bhikkhuniyā asaṃvidahantiyā kevalaṃ attanāva saṃvidahati, tassa dukkaṭaṃ. Samaye saṃvidahitvāpi gacchantassa, attanā asaṃvidahantassa, visaṅketena vā, āpadāsu gacchantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Dvinnampi saṃvidahitvā maggappaṭipatti, avisaṅketatā, samayābhāvo, anāpadā, gāmantarokkamanaṃ vā addhayojanātikkamo vāti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Ekatoupasampannādīhi pana saddhiṃ mātugāmasikkhāpadena āpatti, addhānasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.

Established in Sāvatthī concerning the matter of traveling on a single route, related to the Group-of-Six bhikkhus, the phrase "except in times of emergency" is the additional allowance here; it is an extraordinary rule, unactionable, a three-fold pācittiya, for one who perceives that no arrangement has been made when an arrangement has been made, or for one who is uncertain, and a dukkaṭa for one who makes arrangements only for oneself when the bhikkhunī has not made arrangements. There is no offense for one who travels after making arrangements during a time of emergency, for one who does not make arrangements for oneself, with a cancellation of the arrangement, in situations of danger, or for an insane person, etc. Traveling on the same route after making arrangements between both parties, non-cancellation of the arrangement, absence of an emergency, no danger, crossing into another village, or exceeding half a yojana—these are the five factors involved here. However, with those who are fully ordained, the offense is determined by the training rule regarding women; the arising is from the journey, it is an action, without release from perception, unintentional, an offense by rule, a bodily action, a verbal action, three mental states, and three kinds of feeling.

Saṃvidhānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Arrangement Training Rule is Complete.

8. Nāvābhiruhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Boat-Embarking Training Rule

saṃvidhāyāti kīḷāpurekkhāro saṃvidahitvā, abhiruhanakāle saṅketaṃ katvāti attho.Uddhaṃgāmininti kīḷāvasena uddhaṃ nadiyā paṭisotaṃ gacchantiṃ.Adhogāmininti tatheva adho anusotaṃ gacchantiṃ. Yaṃ pana titthappaṭipādanatthaṃ uddhaṃ vā adho vā haranti, ettha anāpatti.Aññatra tiriyaṃ taraṇāyāti upayogatthe nissakkavacanaṃ, yā tiriyaṃ taraṇā, taṃ ṭhapetvāti attho.Pācittiyanti sagāmakatīrapassena gamanakāle gāmantaragaṇanāya, agāmakatīrapassena vā yojanavitthatāya nadiyā majjhena vā gamanakāle addhayojanagaṇanāya pācittiyaṃ, samudde pana yathāsukhaṃ gantuṃ vaṭṭati.

saṃvidhāyā: having made arrangements with the intention of amusement, meaning having made an agreement at the time of embarking. Uddhaṃgāminiṃ: going upstream against the current of the river in a playful manner. Adhogāminiṃ: similarly, going downstream with the current. However, there is no offense if one is being transported upstream or downstream for the purpose of reaching a landing place. Aññatra tiriyaṃ taraṇāya: the word "nissakka" is used in the sense of utility, meaning except for crossing directly. Pācittiyaṃ: a pācittiya accrues while traveling along the bank of a village, based on counting the distance between villages, or while traveling along the bank of a non-village area or in the middle of a river that is a yojana wide, based on counting half-yojanas. However, in the ocean, it is permissible to travel as one pleases.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye bhikkhū ārabbha nāvābhiruhanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘aññatra tiriyaṃ taraṇāyā’’ti ayamettha anupaññatti, sesaṃ anantarasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva veditabbanti.

Established in Sāvatthī concerning the matter of embarking on a boat, related to the Group-of-Six bhikkhus; the phrase "except for crossing directly" is the additional allowance here, the rest should be understood in the same manner as stated in the immediately preceding training rule.

Nāvābhiruhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Boat-Embarking Training Rule is Complete.

9. Paripācitasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Food-Prepared Training Rule

bhikkhuniparipācitanti bhikkhuniyā paripācitaṃ, neva tassa nāttano ñātakappavāritānaṃ gihīnaṃ santike bhikkhussa guṇaṃ pakāsetvā ‘‘detha ayyassa, karotha ayyassā’’ti evaṃ nipphāditaṃ laddhabbaṃ katanti attho.Pubbe gihisamārambhāti etthasamārambhoti samāraddhaṃ, paṭiyāditassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Gihīnaṃ samārambho gihisamārambho, bhikkhuniyā paripācanato pubbe paṭhamataraṃyeva yaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ atthāya gihīnaṃ paṭiyāditabhattaṃ, ñātakappavāritānaṃ vā santakaṃ, taṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ jānaṃ bhuñjantassa pācittiyanti attho. Tañca kho ajjhoharaṇagaṇanāya, paṭiggahaṇe panassa dukkaṭaṃ.

bhikkhuniparipācitaṃ: prepared by a bhikkhunī, meaning that which should not be obtained by a bhikkhu through revealing his virtues to laypeople who are neither his relatives nor those who have been given permission, by saying, "Give to the venerable one, do for the venerable one," and thereby having it produced and acquired. Pubbe gihisamārambhā: here, samārambho means prepared, this is a name for something prepared. Gihīnaṃ samārambho is gihisamārambho, meaning that which was prepared by laypeople for the sake of bhikkhus even before the bhikkhunī prepared it, or that which belongs to relatives or those given permission; the meaning is that one who knowingly consumes anything other than that incurs a pācittiya. And that applies to each mouthful; however, there is a dukkaṭa for accepting it.

Rājagahe devadattaṃ ārabbha bhikkhuniparipācitapiṇḍapātabhuñjanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘aññatra pubbe gihisamārambhā’’ti ayamettha anupaññatti, asādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, ekatoupasampannāya paripācitaṃ bhuñjantassa, aparipācite paripācitasaññino, ubhayattha vematikassa ca dukkaṭaṃ. Ubhayattha aparipācitasaññino, gihisamārambhe, sikkhamānasāmaṇerādīhi paripācite, pañca bhojanāni ṭhapetvā avasese, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Bhikkhuniyā paripācitatā, paripācitabhāvajānanaṃ, gihisamārambhābhāvo, odanādīnaṃ aññataratā, tassa ajjhoharaṇanti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamapārājikasaasāni, idaṃ pana paṇṇattivajjaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.

Established in Rājagaha concerning the matter of eating alms food prepared by a bhikkhunī, related to Devadatta, the phrase "except when previously prepared by laypersons" is the additional allowance here; it is an extraordinary rule, unactionable, and a dukkaṭa for one who eats food prepared by a fully ordained bhikkhunī, for one who perceives unprepared food as prepared, and for one who is uncertain in either case. There is no offense for one who perceives it as unprepared in either case, for that which was previously prepared by laypersons, for that which was prepared by a female trainee or novice, for anything other than the five staple foods, or for an insane person, etc. The factors here are five: being prepared by a bhikkhunī, knowing that it is prepared, the absence of prior preparation by laypersons, being one of the staple foods such as rice, and the consumption of it. The arising and so on are similar to those of the first pārājika, but this is an offense by rule, involves three mental states, and three kinds of feeling.

Paripācitasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Food-Prepared Training Rule is Complete.

10. Rahonisajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Secluded-Sitting Training Rule

Dasame sabbopi kathāmaggo dutiyaaniyate vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Idañhi sikkhāpadaṃ dutiyaaniyatena ca upari upanandassa catutthasikkhāpadena ca ekaparicchedaṃ, aṭṭhuppattivasena pana visuṃ paññattanti.

In this tenth training rule, all the discussion should be understood in the same manner as stated in the second indefinite rule. This training rule is essentially identical in scope with the second indefinite rule and the fourth training rule concerning Upananda, but it was established separately due to differences in the initial cause.

Rahonisajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Secluded-Sitting Training Rule is Complete.

Ovādavaggo tatiyo.

The Third Advice Chapter.

4. Bhojanavaggo

4. Food Chapter

1. Āvasathasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Rest-House Training Rule

agilānenāti addhayojanampi gantuṃ samatthena.Ekoti ekadivasiko.Āvasathapiṇḍoti ‘‘imesaṃ vā ettakānaṃ vā’’ti ekaṃ pāsaṇḍaṃ vā, ‘‘ettakamevā’’ti evaṃ bhattaṃ vā anodissa sālādīsu yattha katthaci puññakāmehi paññattaṃ bhojanaṃ.Bhuñjitabboti ekakulena vā nānākulehi vā ekato hutvā ekasmiṃ vā ṭhāne, nānāṭhānesu vā ‘‘ajja ekasmiṃ, sve ekasmi’’nti evaṃ aniyataṭṭhāne vā paññatto ekasmiṃ ṭhāne ekadivasameva bhuñjitabbo.Tato ce uttarīti dutiyadivasato paṭṭhāya tasmiṃ vā ṭhāne aññasmiṃ vā ṭhāne tesaṃ santakassa paṭiggahaṇe dukkaṭaṃ, ajjhohāre ajjhohāre pācittiyaṃ.

agilānenā: by one who is not ill, able to go even half a yojana. Eko: one, meaning for one day. Āvasathapiṇḍo: food provided by meritorious individuals in halls or wherever else, without specifying "for these individuals" or "for so many," or without limiting it to "only this much." Bhuñjitabbo: is to be eaten for one day only in one place, whether provided by one family or many families gathered together in one place or in various places, or in a non-specific place with arrangements like "today in one place, tomorrow in another." Tato ce uttarī: from the second day onwards, for accepting food belonging to them in that place or in another place, there is a dukkaṭa for accepting it, and a pācittiya for each mouthful consumed.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye bhikkhū ārabbha anuvasitvā āvasathapiṇḍabhuñjanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘agilānenā’’ti ayamettha anupaññatti, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, gilānassa agilānasaññino vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ. Gilānassa gilānasaññino, yo ca sakiṃ bhuñjati, gacchanto vā antarāmagge ekadivasaṃ, gataṭṭhāne ekadivasaṃ, paccāgantopi antarāmagge ekadivasaṃ, āgataṭṭhāne ekadivasaṃ, gamissāmī’ti ca bhuñjitvā nikkhanto kenaci upaddavena nivattitvā khemabhāvaṃ ñatvā gacchanto puna ekadivasaṃ bhuñjati, yassa vā sāmikā nimantetvā denti, yo vā bhikkhūnaṃyeva uddissa paññattaṃ, na yāvadatthaṃ paññattaṃ, ṭhapetvā vā pañca bhojanāni aññaṃ bhuñjati, tassa ca, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Āvasathapiṇḍatā, agilānatā, anuvasitvā paribhojananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasikkhāpadasadisānīti.

Established in Sāvatthī concerning the matter of eating rest-house food after staying overnight, related to the Group-of-Six bhikkhus; the phrase "agilānenā" is the additional allowance here, it is a common rule, unactionable, a three-fold pācittiya, and a dukkaṭa for one who is ill but perceives himself as not ill, or for one who is uncertain. There is no offense for one who is ill and perceives himself as ill, for one who eats only once, for one who eats for one day while traveling on the road, one day at the destination, and one day again while returning on the road, and one day at the place of origin; for one who, having gone out intending to travel and having eaten, is turned back by some disturbance, and then, knowing that it is safe, eats again for one day while traveling; for one whose hosts invite and give; for that which is designated for bhikkhus alone, not intended to last until the end of need; for one who eats something other than the five staple foods; and for an insane person, etc. The factors here are three: it being rest-house food, not being ill, and consuming it after staying overnight. The arising and so on are similar to those of the goat-hair training rule.

Āvasathasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Rest-House Training Rule is Complete.

2. Gaṇabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Group-Meal Training Rule

gaṇabhojaneti gaṇassa bhojane. Idha cagaṇoti cattāro vā tatuttari vā bhikkhū, tesaṃ nimantanato vā viññattito vā laddhe odanādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññatarabhojaneti attho. Tatthāyaṃ vinicchayo – sace hi koci cattāro bhikkhū upasaṅkamitvā yena kenaci vevacanena vā bhāsantarena vā pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ nāmaṃ gahetvā ‘‘odanena nimantemi, odanaṃ me gaṇhathā’’tiādinā nayena nimanteti, te ce evaṃ ekato vā nānāto vā nimantitā ekato vā nānāto vā gantvā ekato gaṇhanti, pacchā ekato vā nānāto vā bhuñjanti, gaṇabhojanaṃ hoti. Paṭiggahaṇameva hettha pamāṇaṃ. Sace odanādīnaṃ nāmaṃ gahetvā ekato vā nānāto vā viññāpetvā ca gantvā ca ekato gaṇhanti, evampi gaṇabhojanameva. Tassa duvidhassāpi evaṃ paṭiggahaṇe dukkaṭaṃ, ajjhohāre ajjhohāre pācittiyaṃ. Gilānasamayādīsu yadā pādānampi phalitattā na sakkā piṇḍāya carituṃ, ayaṃgilānasamayo. Atthatakathinānaṃ pañca māsā, itaresaṃ kattikamāsoti ayaṃcīvaradānasamayo. Yadā yo cīvare kariyamāne kiñcideva cīvare kattabbaṃ kammaṃ karoti, ayaṃcīvarakārasamayo. Yadā addhayojanampi gantukāmo vā hoti gacchati vā gato vā, ayaṃaddhānagamanasamayo. Nāvābhiruhanasamayepi eseva nayo. Yadā gocaragāme cattāro bhikkhū piṇḍāya caritvā na yāpenti, ayaṃmahāsamayo. Yadā yokoci pabbajito bhattena nimanteti, ayaṃsamaṇabhattasamayo,etesu samayesu bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati.

gaṇabhojane: at a group meal. Here, gaṇo means four or more bhikkhus, and it refers to any of the five staple foods, such as rice, obtained through their invitation or request. Here is the ruling on this matter: if any four bhikkhus approach someone and invite them in some way, either directly or indirectly, by mentioning the name of one of the five staple foods, such as "I invite you with rice, please accept my rice," and so on, and if they, having been invited in this way either together or separately, go and accept it together, and afterwards eat it together or separately, it is considered a group meal. The acceptance is the key factor here. If, having mentioned the name of rice etc., they request it either together or separately and then go and accept it together, this too is a group meal. For both of these cases, there is a dukkaṭa for accepting it, and a pācittiya for each mouthful consumed. gilānasamayo (time of illness): when even the feet are affected by illness and it is impossible to go for alms. cīvaradānasamayo (time of robe-giving): five months for those who spread the kathina cloth, or the month of Kattika for others. cīvarakārasamayo (time of robe-making): when one is engaged in some task related to the robe that needs to be done. addhānagamanasamayo (time of journeying): when one intends to travel, is traveling, or has traveled a distance of half a yojana. The same principle applies to the nāvābhiruhanasamaye (time of embarking on a boat). mahāsamayo (time of great need): when four bhikkhus are unable to sustain themselves by going for alms in the village for alms-gathering. samaṇabhattasamayo (time of monk's meal): when any renunciant invites for a meal; it is permissible to eat during these times.

Rājagahe devadattaṃ ārabbha viññāpetvā bhuñjanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘aññatra samayā’’ti ayamettha sattavidhā anupaññatti, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, nagaṇabhojane gaṇabhojanasaññissa vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ. Nagaṇabhojanasaññissa pana, ye ca dve tayo ekato gaṇhanti, bahūnaṃ piṇḍāya caritvā ekato bhuñjantānaṃ, niccabhattikādīsu, pañca bhojanāni ṭhapetvā sabbattha, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Gaṇabhojanatā, samayābhāvo, ajjhoharaṇanti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasadisānevāti.

Established in Rājagaha concerning the matter of eating after requesting, related to Devadatta; the phrase "except in times of emergency" is the seven-fold additional allowance here, it is a common rule, unactionable, a three-fold pācittiya, and a dukkaṭa for one who perceives it as not a group meal when it is a group meal, or for one who is uncertain. However, for one who perceives it as not a group meal, for those who accept together in groups of two or three, for many who go for alms and eat together, in the case of regular meal providers and so on, everywhere except for the five staple foods, and for an insane person, etc., there is no offense. The factors here are three: it being a group meal, the absence of an emergency, and the consumption. The arising and so on are similar to those of the goat-hair training rule.

Gaṇabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Group-Meal Training Rule is Complete.

3. Paramparabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Successive-Meal Training Rule

paramparabhojaneti gaṇabhojane vuttanayeneva pañcahi bhojanehi nimantitassa yena yena paṭhamaṃ nimantito, tassa tassa bhojanato uppaṭipāṭiyā vā avikappetvā vā parassa parassa bhojane. Tasmā yo bhikkhu pañcasu sahadhammikesu aññatarassa ‘‘mayhaṃ bhattapaccāsaṃ tuyhaṃ dammī’’ti vā ‘‘vikappemī’’ti vā evaṃ sammukhā vā ‘‘itthannāmassa dammī’’ti (pāci. 226) vā ‘‘vikappemī’’ti vā evaṃ parammukhāvā paṭhamanimantanaṃ avikappetvā pacchā nimantitakule laddhabhikkhato ekasitthampi ajjhoharati, pācittiyaṃ. Samayā vuttanayā eva.

paramparabhojane: at a successive meal, meaning being invited for a meal consisting of the five staple foods in the manner described under group meals, and then eating in successive houses without transferring or alternating the invitation. Therefore, if a bhikkhu, without transferring the initial invitation, eats even a single mouthful from alms obtained in a house to which someone else was subsequently invited, either by saying to one of the five co-religionists, "I give my expectation of food to you," or "I am alternating," either face-to-face or by saying, "I will give it to so-and-so" or "I am alternating," behind their back, incurs a pācittiya. The times of emergency are as previously stated.

Vesāliyaṃ sambahule bhikkhū ārabbha aññatra nimantitabhojanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘aññatra samayā’’ti ayamettha tividhā anupaññatti, parivāre pana vikappanampi gahetvā ‘‘catasso anupaññattiyo’’ti (pari. 86) vuttaṃ, asādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, naparamparabhojane paramparabhojanasaññino vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ. Naparamparabhojanasaññissa pana, yo ca samaye vā vikappetvā vā ekasaṃsaṭṭhāni vā dve tīṇi nimantanāni ekato vā katvā bhuñjati, nimantanappaṭipāṭiyā bhuñjati, sakalena gāmena vā pūgena vā nimantito tesu yatthakatthaci bhuñjati, nimantiyamāno vā ‘‘bhikkhaṃ gahessāmī’’ti vadati, tassa, niccabhattikādīsu, pañca bhojanāni ṭhapetvā sabbattha, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Paramparabhojanatā, samayābhāvo, ajjhoharaṇanti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamakathinasadisāneva, idaṃ pana kiriyākiriyanti.

Established in Vesālī concerning many bhikkhus, related to the matter of invited meals, the phrase "except in times of emergency" is the three-fold additional allowance here, but in the Parivāra, including the transferring of the invitation, it is stated as "four additional allowances" (pari. 86); it is an extraordinary rule, unactionable, a three-fold pācittiya, and a dukkaṭa for one who perceives it as not a successive meal when it is a successive meal, or for one who is uncertain. However, for one who perceives it as not a successive meal, or for one who eats during a time of emergency or after alternating, or combining two or three invitations into one, or eats according to the order of invitations, or is invited by an entire village or guild and eats wherever he pleases among them, or says "I will collect alms" when being invited, for him, in the case of regular meal providers and so on, everywhere except for the five staple foods, and for an insane person, etc., there is no offense. The factors here are three: it being a successive meal, the absence of an emergency, and the consumption. The arising and so on are similar to those of the first kathina training rule, but this is an action and non-action.

Paramparabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Eating in Series is Finished.

4. Kāṇamātāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Kāṇamātā Training Rule

pūvehīti paheṇakatthāya paṭiyattehi atirasakamodakasakkhalikādīhi yehi kehici khajjakehi.Manthehīti pātheyyatthāya paṭiyattehi yehi kehici sattutilataṇḍulādīhi.Dvattipattapūrāti mukhavaṭṭiyā heṭṭhimalekhaṃ anatikkantā dve vā tayo vā pattapūrā.Tato ce uttarīti sacepi tatiyaṃ pattaṃ thūpīkataṃ gaṇhāti, mukhavaṭṭiyā heṭṭhimalekhato upariṭṭhitapūvagaṇanāya pācittiyaṃ.Dvattipattapūre paṭiggahetvāti ettha yena dve gahitā honti, tena bahi bhikkhuṃ disvā ‘‘ettha mayā dve pattapūrā gahitā, tvaṃ ekaṃ gaṇheyyāsī’’ti vattabbaṃ, tenāpi aññaṃ passitvā ‘‘paṭhamaṃ āgatena dve pattapūrā gahitā, mayā eko gahito, tvaṃ mā gaṇhī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Yena paṭhamaṃ eko gahito, tassāpi paramparārocane eseva nayo. Yena pana sayameva tayo gahitā, tena aññaṃ disvā ‘‘mā kho tvaṃ ettha paṭiggaṇhīti vattabbaṃ, avadantassa dukkaṭaṃ, taṃ sutvā gaṇhantassāpi dukkaṭameva.Tato nīharitvā bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ saṃvibhajitabbanti laddhaṭṭhānato sabbāsannaṃ āsanasālaṃ vā vihāraṃ vā yattha vā pana nibaddhaṃ paṭikkamati, tattha gantvā ekaṃ pattapūraṃ attano ṭhapetvā sesaṃ bhikkhusaṅghassa dātabbaṃ. Yathāmittaṃ pana dātuṃ na labbhati. Yena eko gahito, na tena kiñci akāmā dātabbaṃ, yathāruci kātabbaṃ.

Pūvehi: With any kind of edibles, such as various tasty sweetmeats and sugar-cakes, prepared for the purpose of a gift. Manthehi: With any kind of provisions, such as sesame seeds, husked rice, etc., prepared for the purpose of a journey. Dvattipattapūrā: Two or three bowlfuls not exceeding the lower rim of the mouth of the bowl. Tato ce uttarī: Even if he takes a third bowl heaped up, there is a Pācittiya for counting the sweets placed above the lower rim of the mouth of the bowl. Dvattipattapūre paṭiggahetvā: Here, one who has taken two should, seeing another bhikkhu outside, say, "I have taken two bowlfuls here, you should take one." Even he, seeing another, should say, "The first one who came took two bowlfuls, I took one, you should not take any." For the one who took one first, this is the same method for announcing the series. But one who has taken three himself should say, seeing another, "You should not take any here," there is a

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahule bhikkhū ārabbha na mattaṃ jānitvā paṭiggahaṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, ūnakadvattipattapūre atirekasaññissa vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ. Ūnakasaññissa pana, na paheṇakatthāya na pātheyyatthāya vā paṭiyattaṃ, tadatthāya paṭiyattasesakaṃ vā, gamane vā paṭippassaddhe, ñātakappavāritānaṃ vā dentānaṃ, attano dhanena gaṇhantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Vuttalakkhaṇapūvamanthatā, asesakatā, appaṭippassaddhagamanatā, anaññātakāditā, atirekappaṭiggahaṇanti imānettha pañca aṅgāni, samuṭṭhānādīni sañcarittasadisānevāti.

Established in Sāvatthi concerning many bhikkhus, regarding the instance of receiving without knowing the measure, it is a general rule, not commanded, a three-fold Pācittiya. For one who is doubtful or has the perception of excess in less than two or three bowlfuls, there is a Dukkaṭa. But there is no offense for one who has the perception of less, or what is not prepared for the purpose of a gift or for the purpose of provisions, or the remainder prepared for that purpose, or when the journey has been given up, or to those giving to relatives or those who have been invited, or for one taking with his own wealth, or for the insane, etc. Here, the five factors are: sweets and gruel of the stated characteristics, being the remainder, the journey not being given up, not being an uninvited relative, and receiving in excess. The origin, etc., are similar to those of Sañcaritta.

Kāṇamātāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Kāṇamātā Training Rule is Finished.

5. Paṭhamapavāraṇāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the First Invitation Training Rule

bhuttāvīti bhuttavā, yena pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ sāsapamattampi ajjhoharitaṃ, so evaṃ vuccati.Pavāritoti ‘‘asanaṃ paññāyati, bhojanaṃ paññāyati, hatthapāse ṭhito abhiharati, paṭikkhepo paññāyatī’’ti (pāci. 239) evaṃ pāḷiyaṃ vuttapañcaṅgavasena katappavāraṇo, katappaṭikkhepoti attho. Tattha yasmā ‘‘asanaṃ paññāyatī’’ti iminā vippakatabhojano ‘pavārito’ti vutto. Yo ca vippakatabhojano, tena kiñci bhuttaṃ, kiñci abhuttaṃ, yañca bhuttaṃ, taṃ sandhāya ‘bhuttāvī’tipi saṅkhaṃ gacchati. Tasmā ‘bhuttāvī’tivacanena visuṃ kiñci atthasiddhiṃ na passāma, ‘‘dirattatiratta’’ntiādīsu (pāci. 52) pana dirattādivacanaṃ viya pavāritapadassa parivārabhāvena byañjanasiliṭṭhatāya cetaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.

Bhuttāvī: One who has eaten; one who has ingested even a mustard seed's worth of the five foods is called this. Pavārito: One who has made an invitation according to the five factors stated in the Pāḷi, "Food is apparent, meal is apparent, standing within arm's reach, he offers, rejection is apparent" (pāci. 239); that is, one who has made a rejection. There, since one whose meal is interrupted is called 'invited' by this, "Food is apparent," and one whose meal is interrupted has eaten some and not eaten some, and what has been eaten is also counted as 'one who has eaten.' Therefore, we do not see any distinct attainment of meaning by the expression 'one who has eaten'; however, it should be understood that this is stated for the sake of the elegance of the expression, as a surrounding of the term 'invited,' like the term 'two or three nights' (pāci. 52), etc.

asanaṃ paññāyatīti vippakatabhojanaṃ dissati, taṃ bhuñjamāno cesa puggalo hotīti attho.Bhojanaṃ paññāyatīti pavāraṇappahonakaṃ bhojanaṃ dissati, odanādīnaṃ ce aññataraṃ paṭikkhipitabbaṃ bhojanaṃ hotīti attho.Hatthapāse ṭhitoti pavāraṇappahonakaṃ ce bhojanaṃ gaṇhitvā dāyako aḍḍhateyyahatthappamāṇe okāse ṭhito hotīti attho.Abhiharatīti so ce dāyako tassa taṃ bhojanaṃ kāyena abhisaṃharatīti attho.Paṭikkhepo paññāyatīti paṭikkhepo dissati, taṃ ce abhihaṭaṃ so bhikkhu kāyena vā vācāya vā paṭikkhipatīti attho. Evaṃ pañcannaṃ aṅgānaṃ vasena pavārito hoti.

Asanaṃ paññāyati: Interrupted food is seen; that is, this person is one who is eating it. Bhojanaṃ paññāyati: A meal suitable for invitation is seen; that is, one of the foods, such as rice, is a meal to be rejected. Hatthapāse ṭhito: A giver, having taken a meal suitable for invitation, is standing in a space measuring one and a half cubits. Abhiharati: That giver offers that meal to him with his body. Paṭikkhepo paññāyati: Rejection is seen; that is, that bhikkhu rejects what has been offered with body or speech. Thus, he is invited by way of the five factors.

odanonāma sāli vīhi yavo godhumo kaṅgu varako kudrūsakoti imesaṃ sattannaṃ dhaññānaṃ taṇḍule gahetvā ‘‘bhattaṃ pacāmā’’ti vā ‘‘yāguṃ pacāmā’’ti vā yaṃkiñci sandhāya pacantu, sace uṇhaṃ vā sītalaṃ vā bhuñjantānaṃ bhojanakāle gahitagahitaṭṭhāne odhi paññāyati, odano hoti, pavāraṇaṃ janeti. Yo pana pāyāso vā ambilayāgu vā uddhanato otāritamattā abbhuṇhā sakkā hoti āvijjhitvā pivituṃ, sā yassa hatthena gahitokāsepi odhi na paññāyati, pavāraṇaṃ na janeti. Sace pana usumāya vigatāya ghanabhāvaṃ gacchati, odhiṃ dasseti, puna pavāraṇaṃ janeti, pubbe tanukabhāvo na rakkhati. Sacepi bahū paṇṇaphalakaḷīre pakkhipitvā muṭṭhimattāpi taṇḍulā pakkhittā honti, bhojanakāle ce odhi paññāyati, pavāraṇaṃ janeti. Ayāguke nimantane ‘‘yāguṃ dassāmā’’ti bhatte udakakañjikakhīrādīni ākiritvā ‘‘yāguṃ gaṇhathā’’ti denti, kiñcāpi tanukā hoti, pavāraṇaṃ janetiyeva. Sace pana pakkuthitesu udakādīsu pakkhipitvā pacitvā denti, yāgusaṅgahameva gacchati. Sace yāguyāpi sāsapamattampi macchamaṃsakkhaṇḍaṃ vā nhāru vā pakkhittaṃ hoti, pavāraṇaṃ janeti. Ṭhapetvā sānulomānaṃ vuttadhaññānaṃ taṇḍule aññehi veḷutaṇḍulādīhi vā kandamūlaphalehi vā yehi kehici katabhattaṃ pavāraṇaṃ na janeti.Kummāsonāma yavehi kato. Aññehi pana muggādīhi katakummāso pavāraṇaṃ na janeti.Sattunāma satta dhaññāni bhajjitvā kato. Antamaso kharapākabhajjitānaṃ vīhīnaṃ taṇḍule koṭṭetvā katacuṇṇampi kuṇḍakampi sattusaṅgahameva gacchati. Samapākabhajjitānaṃ pana ātapasukkhānaṃ kuṇḍakaṃ vā, ye keci taṇḍulā vā lājā vā, lājehi katabhattasattuādīni vā na pavārenti.Macchamaṃsesusace yāguṃ pivantassa yāgusitthamattāneva dve macchakkhaṇḍāni vā maṃsakkhaṇḍāni vā ekabhājane vā nānābhājane vā denti, tāni ce akhādanto aññaṃ pavāraṇappahonakaṃ yaṃkiñci paṭikkhipati, na pavāreti. Tato ekaṃ khāditaṃ, ekaṃ hatthe vā patte vā hoti, sace aññaṃ paṭikkhipati pavāreti. Dvepi khāditāni honti, mukhe sāsapamattampi avasiṭṭhaṃ natthi, sacepi aññaṃ paṭikkhipati, na pavāreti. Yo pana akappiyamaṃsaṃ kuladūsanavejjakammauttarimanussadhammārocanasāditarūpiyādīhi nibbattaṃ akappiyabhojanañca aññaṃ kappiyaṃ vā akappiyaṃ vā khādanto paṭikkhipati, na pavāreti.

Odano: Namely, having taken the grains of these seven kinds of corn— Sāli rice, Vīhi rice, barley, wheat, Kaṅgu millet, Varako millet, and Kudrūsa millet— whether they cook intending "We will cook rice" or "We will cook gruel," if, while eating, a trace is apparent in the place where it is taken from at mealtimes, whether it is hot or cold, it is rice; it generates an invitation. But rice-milk or sour gruel, which, as soon as it is taken down from the hearth, is so lukewarm that it is possible to sip it after sprinkling it, does not generate an invitation, since a trace is not apparent even in the space taken with the hand. But if it becomes solid when the heat has gone, it shows a trace; again, it generates an invitation; the former thinness does not protect it. Even if many leaves, fruits, and shoots have been put in, and even a handful of grains has been put in, if a trace is apparent at mealtimes, it generates an invitation. At an invitation for gruel, if they pour water-gruel, rice-gruel, milk, etc., into the rice and give it, saying, "Take the gruel," even though it is thin, it generates an invitation. But if they put water, etc., into husked rice, cook it, and give it, it goes into the category of gruel itself. If even a mustard seed's worth of fish or meat or tendon has been put into the gruel, it generates an invitation. Except for the grains of the stated corn, which are suitable, rice made with other things, such as bamboo rice, root-tubers, or fruits, does not generate an invitation. Kummāso: Namely, made with barley. But Kummāsa made with other things, such as Muggā beans, does not generate an invitation. Sattu: Namely, made by frying the seven grains. Even powder ground from grains of rice parched hard, at the very least, goes into the category of Sattu. But parched flour of sun-dried rice parched to a uniform degree, or any kind of rice, or parched grain, or rice-Sattu food made with parched grain, etc., do not cause one to be invited. Macchamaṃsesu: If, when one is drinking gruel, they give two pieces of fish or meat equal to the residue of gruel, in one or separate dishes, and if he rejects any food suitable for invitation without eating them, he is not invited. Then, if one has been eaten and one is in the hand or bowl, he is invited if he rejects another. If both have been eaten, and not even a mustard seed's worth remains in the mouth, he is not invited even if he rejects another. But one who rejects while eating food that is not allowable, produced by things such as defiling a family, medical treatment, declaring a superior human state, or longing for silver, and other allowable or unallowable food, is not invited.

Evaṃ yañca asnāti, yañca bhojanaṃ hatthapāse ṭhitena abhihaṭaṃ paṭikkhipanto pavāraṇaṃ janeti, taṃ ñatvā idāni yathā āpajjati, tassa jānanatthaṃ ayaṃ vinicchayo veditabbo – ‘‘asanaṃ bhojana’’nti ettha tāva yena ekasitthampi ajjhohaṭaṃ hoti, so sace pattamukhahatthesu yatthakatthaci bhojane sati sāpekkhova aññaṃ vuttalakkhaṇaṃ bhojanaṃ paṭikkhipati, pavāreti. Sace pana nirapekkho hoti, yaṃ pattādīsu avasiṭṭhaṃ, taṃ na ca ajjhoharitukāmo, aññassa vā dātukāmo, aññatra vā gantvā bhuñjitukāmo, so paṭikkhipantopi na pavāreti. ‘‘Hatthapāse ṭhito’’ti ettha pana sace bhikkhu nisinno hoti, ānisadassa pacchimantato paṭṭhāya, sace ṭhito, paṇhīnaṃ antato paṭṭhāya, sace nipanno, yena passena nipanno, tassa pārimantato paṭṭhāya dāyakassa nisinnassa vā ṭhitassa vā nipannassa vā ṭhapetvā pasāritahatthaṃ yaṃ āsannataraṃ aṅgaṃ, tassa orimantena paricchinditvā aḍḍhateyyahattho ‘hatthapāso’ti veditabbo. Tasmiṃ ṭhatvā abhihaṭaṃ paṭikkhipantasseva pavāraṇā hoti, na tato paraṃ. ‘Abhiharatī’ti hatthapāsabbhantare ṭhito gahaṇatthaṃ upanāmeti. Sace pana anantaranisinnopi bhikkhu hatthe vā ādhārake vā ṭhitaṃ pattaṃ anabhiharitvāva ‘‘bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadati, taṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā natthi. Bhattapacchiṃ ānetvā purato bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapetvā evaṃ vuttepi eseva nayo. Īsakaṃ pana uddharitvā vā apanāmetvā vā ‘gaṇhathā’ti vutte taṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā hoti. Bhattapacchiṃ gahetvā parivisantassa añño ‘‘ahaṃ dhāressāmī’’ti gahitamattameva karoti, parivesakoyeva pana taṃ dhāreti, tasmā sā abhihaṭāva hoti, tato dātukāmatāya gaṇhantaṃ paṭikkhipantassa pavāraṇā hoti. Sace pana parivesakena phuṭṭhamattāva hoti, itarova naṃ dhāreti, tato dātukāmatāya gaṇhantaṃ paṭikkhipantassa pavāraṇā na hoti. Kaṭacchunā uddhaṭe pana hoti, dvinnaṃ samabhārepi paṭikkhipanto pavāretiyeva. Anantarassa diyyamāne itaro pattaṃ pidahati, aññassa abhihaṭaṃ nāma paṭikkhittaṃ hoti, tasmā pavāraṇā natthi. ‘Paṭikkhepo’ti ettha vācāya abhihaṭe paṭikkhepo na ruhati, kāyena abhihaṭaṃ pana aṅgulicalanādinā kāyavikārena vā ‘‘alaṃ, mā dehī’’tiādinā vacīvikārena vā paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā hoti.

Having known thus what generates an invitation by rejecting what is eaten and what is food offered by one standing within arm's reach, now this decision should be understood for the purpose of knowing how one incurs (the offense): In this connection, in "food and meal," if one who has ingested even one drop rejects another meal of the stated characteristics while still having an appetite, with food present anywhere in the mouth, bowl, or hand, he is invited. But if he is without appetite, and does not wish to ingest what remains in the bowl, etc., or wishes to give it to another, or wishes to go elsewhere and eat, even though he rejects it, he is not invited. In this connection, in "standing within arm's reach," if the bhikkhu is sitting, from the rear end of the seat onwards; if standing, from the end of the heels onwards; if lying down, from the edge of the side he is lying on onwards, having excluded the giver sitting, standing, or lying down, the closer limb with the hand stretched out is to be reckoned as "arm's reach," measured as one and a half cubits. Invitation occurs only for one rejecting what is offered while standing there, not beyond that. 'Offers': He brings it near for taking, standing inside arm's reach. But if a bhikkhu, even though sitting close by, only says "Take the rice," without offering the bowl placed in the hand or on a stand, there is no invitation for one rejecting it. This is the same method even if a rice container is brought and placed on the ground in front and he says this. But there is an invitation for one rejecting it when it is said after slightly raising it or moving it away, "Take it." When someone is distributing, holding the rice container, another only does the act of taking it, saying, "I will hold it"; however, the distributor holds it; therefore, that is offered; therefore, there is an invitation for one rejecting one who is taking it intending to give. But if it is only touched by the distributor, the other holds it himself; therefore, there is no invitation for one rejecting one who is taking it intending to give. When it has been lifted with a ladle, even when the burden is equal for two, one who rejects is indeed invited. When something is being given to one close by, the other closes the bowl; what is offered to another is said to be rejected; therefore, there is no invitation. In this connection, in 'rejection,' rejection by speech does not apply to what is offered; however, there is an invitation for one rejecting what is offered by body, by a bodily gesture, such as moving a finger, or by a verbal gesture, such as "Enough, do not give."

Eko samaṃsakaṃ rasaṃ abhiharati, ‘‘rasaṃ paṭiggaṇhathā’’ti vadati, taṃ sutvā paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā natthi. ‘Maṃsarasa’nti vutte pana paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā hoti. ‘‘Imaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vuttepi hotiyeva. Maṃsaṃ visuṃ katvā ‘maṃsarasa’nti vuttepi sace sāsapamattampi khaṇḍaṃ atthi, paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā hoti. Sace natthi, vaṭṭati. Kaḷīrapanasādīhi missetvā macchamaṃsaṃ pacanti, taṃ gahetvā ‘‘kaḷīrasūpaṃ gaṇhatha, panasabyañjanaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadati, evampi na pavāreti. Kasmā? Apavāraṇārahassa nāmena vuttattā. ‘‘Macchamaṃsaṃ byañjana’’nti vā ‘‘imaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vā vutte pana pavāreti, ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana samantapāsādikāyaṃ vutto. Gamanādīsu pana yasmiṃ iriyāpathe pavāreti, taṃ avikopenteneva bhuñjitabbaṃ.

One offers broth mixed with meat, saying, "Take the broth"; there is no invitation for one rejecting it after hearing that. But there is an invitation for one rejecting it when "meat broth" is said. It is the same when "Take this" is said. Even when the meat is separated and "meat broth" is said, if there is even a mustard seed's worth of a piece, there is an invitation for one rejecting it. If there is not, it is permissible. They cook fish and meat mixed with shoots and jackfruit, and taking that, he says, "Take shoot soup, take jackfruit curry"; even then, he is not invited. Why? Because it is stated by the name of something unworthy of invitation. But there is an invitation for one rejecting it when "fish and meat curry" is said, or when "Take this" is said; this is a summary here, but the detailed account is stated in the Samantapāsādikā. In connection with going, etc., one should eat without changing the posture in which one is invited.

Anatirittanti na atirittaṃ, na adhikanti attho. Taṃ pana kappiyakatādīhi sattahi vinayakammākārehi akataṃ vā gilānassa anadhikaṃ vā hoti. Tasmā padabhājane (pāci. 239) ‘akappiyakata’ntiādi vuttaṃ, tattha yaṃ phalaṃ vā kandamūlādi vā pañcahi samaṇakappiyehi kappiyaṃ akataṃ, yañca akappiyamaṃsaṃ vā akappiyabhojanaṃ vā, etaṃ akappiyaṃ nāma, taṃ akappiyaṃ ‘‘alametaṃ sabba’’nti evaṃ atirittaṃ kataṃakappiyakatanti veditabbaṃ.Appaṭiggahitakatanti bhikkhunā appaṭiggahitaṃyeva purimanayena atirittaṃ kataṃ.Anuccāritakatanti kappiyaṃ kāretuṃ āgatena bhikkhunā īsakampi anukkhittaṃ vā anapanāmitaṃ vā kataṃ.Ahatthapāse katanti kappiyaṃ kāretuṃ āgatassa hatthapāsato bahi ṭhitena kataṃ.Abhuttāvinā katanti yo atirittaṃ karoti, tena pavāraṇappahonakaṃ bhojanaṃ abhuttena kataṃ.Bhuttāvinā pavāritena āsanā vuṭṭhitena katanti idaṃ uttānameva.‘‘Alametaṃ sabba’’nti avuttanti vacībhedaṃ katvā evaṃ avuttaṃ hoti. Iti imehi sattahi vinayakammākārehi yaṃ atirittaṃ kappiyaṃ akataṃ, yañca pana na gilānātirittaṃ, tadubhayampi anatirittaṃ. Atirittaṃ pana tasseva paṭipakkhanayena veditabbaṃ.

Anatirittaṃ: Not excess; that is, not more. But that is either not made by the seven modes of allowable making, etc., or is not more for the sick. Therefore, in the section on training rules (pāci. 239), "not made allowable," etc., is stated. There, fruit or root-tubers, etc., not made allowable by the five requisites for a Samaṇa, and unallowable meat or unallowable food, this is called unallowable; that unallowable, made excessive, saying, "This is all enough," should be understood as akappiyakataṃ. Appaṭiggahitakataṃ: What has not been received by a bhikkhu, made excessive in the aforementioned way. Anuccāritakataṃ: What is made by a bhikkhu who has come to make it allowable, without even slightly raising or moving it. Ahatthapāse kataṃ: What is made by one standing outside arm's reach of one who has come to make it allowable. Abhuttāvinā kataṃ: What is made by one who is not an eater, a meal suitable for invitation. Bhuttāvinā pavāritena āsanā vuṭṭhitena kataṃ: This is self-explanatory. ‘‘Alametaṃ sabba’’nti avuttaṃ: Having made a distinction in speech, it is not said thus. Thus, of the seven modes of allowable making, what is unallowable and not made allowable, and what is not more than what is suitable for the sick, both of these are not excessive. But what is excessive should be understood in the opposite way to that.

bhuttāvinā kataṃ hotīti (pāci. 239) antamaso anantaranisinnassa pattato ekampi sitthaṃ vā maṃsahīraṃ vā khāditvā katampi bhuttāvinā kataṃ hoti, yo pātova evaṃ bhuttāvī pavārito nisīdatiyeva, so upakaṭṭhepi kāle abhihaṭaṃ piṇḍaṃ bhikkhunā upanītaṃ kappiyaṃ kātuṃ labhati. Sace pana tasmiṃ kappiye kate bhuñjantassa aññaṃ āmisaṃ ākiranti, taṃ so puna kātuṃ na labhati. Yañhi akataṃ, taṃ kātabbaṃ. Yena ca akataṃ, tena ca kātabbanti (pāci. aṭṭha. 238-9) vuttaṃ, tasmā tasmiṃ bhājane kariyamāne paṭhamakatena saddhiṃ kataṃ hotīti taṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Aññasmiṃ pana bhājane tena vā aññena vā kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Evaṃ kataṃ paṭhamakatena missetvāpi bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati, na kevalañca tassa yena pana kataṃ, taṃ ṭhapetvā aññesaṃ pavāritānampi bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Yathā pana akatena missaṃ na hoti, evaṃ mukhañca hatthañca suddhaṃ katvā bhuñjitabbaṃ.Gilānātirittaṃpana na kevalaṃ gilānassa bhuttāvasesameva, atha kho yaṃkiñci gilānaṃ uddissa ‘‘ajja vā sve vā yadā vā icchati, tadā khādissatī’’ti āhaṭaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ ‘gilānātiritta’nti veditabbaṃ.Khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vāti yaṃkiñci yāvakālikaṃ.Khādeyya vā bhuñjeyya vā pācittiyanti ettha vuttanayena pavāritassa anatirittaṃ yaṃkiñci āmisaṃ ajjhoharaṇatthāya paṭiggaṇhato gahaṇe dukkaṭaṃ, ajjhohāre ajjhohāre pācittiyaṃ.

'It is done having eaten' (pāci. 239): Even if one eats just a single grain of rice or a piece of meat, having bitten or chewed it from a bowl of someone who hasn't finished eating, it is considered 'done having eaten'. If one, having eaten in the morning, sits being invited (pavārita), even near mealtime, he can make allowable any alms food brought to him by a bhikkhu. But if, while he is making it allowable and eating, another piece of meat is scattered into it, he cannot make it allowable again. For what is not yet done should be made allowable, and it should be made allowable by whom it has not been made allowable (pāci. aṭṭha. 238-9), it is said. Therefore, while it is being made allowable in that bowl, along with the first making allowable, it is considered 'done', so it is not proper to make it allowable. But it is proper to make it allowable in another bowl, either by him or by another. Having made it allowable in this way, it is also proper to eat it mixed with the first making allowable. And not only that, it is also proper for others who are invited to eat, except for the one by whom it was made allowable. Just as it should not be mixed with what is unallowable, so too, having made the mouth and hands clean, one should eat. 'Except for an invalid': However, it is not only the leftover food of an invalid, but whatever has been brought intending it for an invalid, saying, "He will eat it today or tomorrow or whenever he wishes," all of that should be understood as 'except for an invalid.' 'Either chewable or edible': Whatever is permissible only until the next day (yāvakālika). 'Should eat or consume, there is a pācittiya': Here, for one who is invited (pavārita), anything not extra (anatiritta) which is meat (āmisa), according to the method stated, for the purpose of consuming, upon receiving, there is a dukkata for the receiving; for each act of consuming, there is a pācittiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahule bhikkhū ārabbha aññatra bhuñjanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘anatiritta’’nti ayamettha anupaññatti, asādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, yāmakālikādīni āhāratthāya gaṇhato, nirāmisāni ajjhoharato ca dukkaṭaṃ, tathā atiritte anatirittasaññino ceva vematikassa ca. Atirittasaññino pana, ‘‘atirittaṃ kārāpetvā bhuñjissāmī’’ti gaṇhantassa, aññassatthāya gaṇhantassa, yāmakālikādīni tesaṃ anuññātaparibhogavasena nirāmisāni paribhuñjantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Pavāritabhāvo, āmisassa anatirittatā, kālena ajjhoharaṇanti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamakathinasadisāneva, idaṃ pana kiriyākiriyanti.

Concerning many bhikkhus in Sāvatthī, it was established in relation to the subject of eating at another time, "not extra" is an additional rule here, a non-common rule, a non-command, a three-pācittiya, a dukkata for taking yāmakālika and other foods for the purpose of nourishment, and for consuming non-meat items, as well as for one who perceives what is extra as not extra, and for one who is doubtful. But for one who perceives it as extra, if he takes it thinking, "I will have what is extra made allowable and then eat," or for one who takes it for the sake of another, or for one who uses yāmakālika and other foods according to the permitted use for them, and for an insane person and so on, there is no offense. Being invited, the non-extra nature of the meat, and consuming within the time, these are the three factors here. The origin and so on are similar to the first kathina, but this is doing and not doing.

Paṭhamapavāraṇāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the First Invitation Training Rule is Finished.

6. Dutiyapavāraṇāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Second Invitation Training Rule

abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāreyyāti abhiharitvā ‘‘handa, bhikkhu khāda vā bhuñja vā’’ti evaṃ pavāreyya.Jānanti sutvā vā disvā vā tassa pavāritabhāvaṃ jānanto.Āsādanāpekkhoti āsādanaṃ codanaṃ maṅkukaraṇabhāvaṃ apekkhamāno.Bhuttasmiṃ pācittiyanti ettha abhihāre tāva dukkaṭaṃ, sace so taṃ gaṇhāti, puna abhihārakassa dukkaṭaṃ, tasmiṃ pana bhuñjante abhihārakassa tassa ajjhohāre ajjhohāre dukkaṭaṃ, bhojanapariyosāne pācittiyaṃ.

'He should invite (pavāreyya) after bringing it': He should invite, having brought it, saying, "Here, bhikkhu, eat or consume." 'Knowing': Knowing, either having heard or having seen, his state of being invited. 'Awaiting offense': Awaiting offense, accusation, the state of being made ashamed. 'When he has eaten, there is a pācittiya': Here, first there is a dukkata for bringing it; if he takes that, there is again a dukkata for the one who brought it. But while he is eating it, for each act of consuming by the one who brought it, there is a dukkata; at the end of the meal, there is a pācittiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ aññataraṃ bhikkhuṃ ārabbha anatirittena bhojanena abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāraṇāvatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, asādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, pavārite pavāritasaññino pācittiyaṃ. Vematikassa, yāmakālikādīni āhāratthāya abhiharantassa, tesañca paṭiggahaṇaajjhohāresu, appavārite ca pavāritasaññino, vematikassa ca dukkaṭaṃ. Appavāritasaññissa pana, yo ca atirittaṃ kārāpetvā deti, ‘‘kārāpetvā vā bhuñjāhī’’ti deti, yo vā ‘‘aññassatthāya haranto gacchāhī’’ti deti, yo ca yāmakālikādīni ‘‘sati paccaye paribhuñjāhī’’ti deti, tassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Pavāritatā, pavāritasaññitā, āsādanāpekkhatā, anatirittena abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāraṇatā, bhojanapariyosānanti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāni, idaṃ pana dukkhavedananti.

Concerning a certain bhikkhu in Sāvatthī, it was established in relation to the subject of inviting with food that is not extra, a non-common rule, a non-command, a pācittiya for one who is invited, perceiving himself as invited. For one who is doubtful, a dukkata for bringing yāmakālika and other foods for the purpose of nourishment, and for the receiving and consuming of those, and for one who is not invited perceiving himself as invited, and for one who is doubtful. But for one who perceives himself as not invited, and for one who gives what is extra, having had it made allowable, gives it, or gives it saying, "Having had it made allowable, eat," or for one who gives it saying, "Go, carrying it for the sake of another," or for one who gives yāmakālika and other foods saying, "Use them when there is a reason," for him, and for an insane person and so on, there is no offense. Being invited, perceiving oneself as invited, awaiting offense, inviting with what is not extra after bringing it, and the end of the meal, these are the five factors here. The origin and so on are similar to not giving what is not given, but this is painful feeling.

Dutiyapavāraṇāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Second Invitation Training Rule is Finished.

7. Vikālabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. The Training Rule on Eating at the Wrong Time

vikāleti vigate kāle, majjhanhikātikkamanato yāva aruṇuggamanāti adhippāyo. Tasmā yo bhikkhu etasmiṃ antare yaṃkiñci vanamūlaphalaṃ upādāya āmaṃ vā pakkaṃ vā āmisasaṅkhepagataṃ khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā ajjhoharaṇatthāya paṭiggaṇhāti, tassa paṭiggahaṇe dukkaṭaṃ, ajjhohāre ajjhohāre pācittiyaṃ.

'At the wrong time': When the time has passed, the intention is from the passing of midday until the rising of dawn. Therefore, for any bhikkhu who, within this interval, taking any root or fruit from the forest, whether raw or cooked, which falls under the classification of meat, either chewable or edible, receives it for the purpose of consuming, for him there is a dukkata for receiving; for each act of consuming, there is a pācittiya.

Rājagahe sattarasavaggiye bhikkhū ārabbha vikāle bhojanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, yāmakālikādīni āhāratthāya paṭiggahaṇaajjhohāresu, kāle vikālasaññissa, vematikassa ca dukkaṭaṃ, kāle kālasaññissa yāmakālikādīni sati paccaye paribhuñjantassa ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, romaṭṭhakassa romaṭṭhaṃ, na ca bhikkhave bahimukhadvārā nīharitvā ajjhoharitabba’’nti (cūḷava. 273) anuññātanayena romaṭṭhakassāpi anāpatti. Vikālatā, yāvakālikatā, ajjhoharaṇanti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasadisānīti.

Concerning the bhikkhus of the group of seventeen in Rājagaha, it was established in relation to the subject of eating at the wrong time, a common rule, a non-command, a three-pācittiya, a dukkata for receiving and consuming yāmakālika and other foods for the purpose of nourishment, for one who perceives it as the wrong time at the right time, and for one who is doubtful; for one who perceives it as the right time at the right time, for one who uses yāmakālika and other foods when there is a reason, and for an insane person and so on, there is no offense. "I allow, bhikkhus, the romaṭṭha for one who has a hairy body, but, bhikkhus, it should not be taken out through the outer door and then consumed" (cūḷava. 273), according to the manner of allowance, there is also no offense for romaṭṭha. Being the wrong time, being permissible only until the next day (yāvakālika), and consuming, these are the three factors here. The origin and so on are similar to goat's hair.

Vikālabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Eating at the Wrong Time is Finished.

8. Sannidhikārakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. The Training Rule on Storing Up

sannidhikārakanti kāro karaṇaṃ kiriyāti atthato ekaṃ, sannidhi kāro assāti sannidhikāraṃ, sannidhikārameva sannidhikārakaṃ, paṭiggahetvā ekarattiṃ vītināmitassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Tasmā evaṃ sannidhikataṃ yaṃkiñci yāvakālikaṃ vā yāmakālikaṃ vā ‘ajjhoharissāmī’ti gaṇhantassa paṭiggahaṇe dukkaṭaṃ, ajjhohāre ajjhohāre pācittiyaṃ. Sacepi patto duddhoto hoti, yaṃ aṅguliyā ghaṃsantassa lekhā paññāyati, gaṇṭhikapattassa vā gaṇṭhikantare sneho paviṭṭho hoti, yo uṇhe otāpentassa paggharati, uṇhayāguyā vā gahitāya sandissati, tādise pattepi punadivase bhuñjantassa pācittiyaṃ. Yaṃ pana bhikkhu nirapekkho sāmaṇerānaṃ pariccajitvā tehi nihitaṃ labhitvā bhuñjati, taṃ vaṭṭati. Sayaṃ paṭiggahetvā apariccattameva hi dutiyadivase kappiyabhojanaṃ bhuñjantassa pācittiyaṃ. Akappiyesu pana manussamaṃse thullaccayena saddhiṃ pācittiyaṃ, sesesu pana dukkaṭena saddhiṃ. Yāmakālikaṃ sati paccaye ajjhoharato pācittiyaṃ, āhāratthāya ajjhoharato dukkaṭena saddhiṃ. Yo pana pavārito hutvā anatirittakataṃ ajjhoharati, tassa sabbavikappesu aparampi pācittiyaṃ vaḍḍhati. Sace vikāle ajjhoharati, anatirittapaccayā sabbavikappesu anāpatti, sati paccaye vikālapaccayā yāmakālikādīsu ca anāpatti. Avasesesu vikālapaccayā pācittiyaṃ vaḍḍhatiyeva. Bhikkhussa pana sannidhi bhikkhuniyā vaṭṭati, bhikkhuniyā ca sannidhi bhikkhussa vaṭṭati, bhikkhunikkhandhake (cūḷava. 421-422) anuññātattā vaṭṭatīti.

'Storing up': The term kāra means doing, performing, action; in meaning they are the same. Sannidhi kāro assāti sannidhikāraṃ, sannidhikārameva sannidhikārakaṃ: this is the name for what has been received and has passed one night. Therefore, for one who takes anything that has been stored up in this way, either yāvakālika or yāmakālika, thinking "I will consume it," there is a dukkata for receiving; for each act of consuming, there is a pācittiya. Even if the bowl is poorly washed, so that when one rubs it with a finger a mark is visible, or if there is grease stuck in the joints of a bowl with ridges, which drips when one heats it, or if it sticks when hot rice gruel is taken, there is a pācittiya for eating from such a bowl on the next day. But what is proper is for a bhikkhu, being unconcerned, to give it away to the novices, and having obtained what was put away by them, to eat it. Indeed, there is a pācittiya for eating allowable food on the second day only if one has received it oneself and not given it away. But for unallowable things, along with thullaccaya for human meat, and along with dukkata for the rest. There is a pācittiya for consuming yāmakālika when there is a reason, and along with a dukkata for consuming it for the purpose of nourishment. But for one who, having been invited (pavārita), consumes what has been made not extra (anatiritta), in all variations, yet another pācittiya increases. If he consumes it at the wrong time, there is no offense in all variations due to the reason of not extra, and due to the reason of the wrong time, and for yāmakālika and other foods when there is a reason. In the remaining cases, a pācittiya certainly increases due to the reason of the wrong time. However, what is stored up by a bhikkhu is proper for a bhikkhuni, and what is stored up by a bhikkhuni is proper for a bhikkhu, because it is allowed in the Bhikkhuni Khandhaka (cūḷava. 421-422), it is proper.

Sāvatthiyaṃ āyasmantaṃ belaṭṭhasīsaṃ ārabbha sannidhikārakabhojanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, sattāhakālika yāvajīvikānaṃ pana āhāratthāya paṭiggahaṇe ajjhohāre ca dukkaṭaṃ. Yathā cetāni āhāratthāya na kappanti, evaṃ yāvakālikādīhi saṃsaṭṭhānipi, vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yāvakālikena, bhikkhave, yāmakālikaṃ tadahupaṭiggahitaṃ kāle kappati, vikāle na kappatī’’tiādi (mahāva. 305). Tasmā sacepi taṃ taṃ tena tena saddhiṃ saṃsaṭṭhaṃ labhati, sace asambhinnarasaṃ vā hoti sudhotaṃ vā, yathā itarena saṃsaggo na paññāyati, attano kālānurūpena paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati.

Concerning the venerable Belaṭṭhasīsa in Sāvatthī, it was established in relation to the subject of food stored up, a common rule, a non-command, a three-pācittiya, a dukkata for receiving and consuming things that last a week and things that last for life for the purpose of nourishment. Just as these are not allowable for the purpose of nourishment, so too things mixed with yāvakālika and other foods are not allowable, for it was said, "Bhikkhus, yāmakālika is allowable at the right time, having been received together with yāvakālika on the same day, but it is not allowable at the wrong time" and so on (mahāva. 305). Therefore, even if one obtains that which is mixed together with that, if it is of unmixed flavor or thoroughly cleaned, so that the mixing with the other is not evident, it is proper to use it according to its appropriate time.

akappiyakuṭināma saṅghassa vā upasampannapuggalassa vā santakaṃ vasanatthāya katagehaṃ, tattha sahaseyyappahonake padese vuṭṭhaṃ yāvakālikañca yāmakālikañca saṅghikaṃ vā upasampannapuggalassa vā santakaṃantovuṭṭhaṃnāma hoti, tattha pakkaṃantopakkaṃnāma, yattha katthaci pana sayaṃ pakkaṃsāmaṃ pakkaṃnāma, taṃ sabbaṃ anajjhoharaṇīyaṃ. Tena tena saddhiṃ saṃsaṭṭhampi taṃgatikameva, sabbaṃ ajjhoharantassa dukkaṭaṃ. Tasmā antovuṭṭhaantopakkamocanatthaṃ bhagavatā catasso kappiyabhūmiyo (mahāva. 295) anuññātā, tāsaṃ vinicchayo samantapāsādikāyaṃ (mahāva. aṭṭha. 295) vutto. Yattha panetā na santi, tattha anupasampannassa santakaṃ katvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Sāmaṃ pākampi punapākaṃ vaṭṭati, asannidhikārake sannidhikārakasaññino, vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ. Asannidhikārakasaññino, yāvakālikādīni tīṇi nidahitvā sakaṃ sakaṃ kālaṃ anatikkamitvā, yāvajīvikaṃ sadāpi sati paccaye paribhuñjantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Āmisaṃ, sannidhibhāvo, tassa ajjhoharaṇanti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasadisānevāti.

An unallowable dwelling is a house made for dwelling that belongs to the Saṅgha or to an ordained individual. That which remains in a place suitable for shared occupancy, and yāvakālika and yāmakālika belonging to the Saṅgha or to an ordained individual, is called remained inside. What is cooked there is called cooked inside. But what is cooked by oneself anywhere is called cooked by oneself, all of that is not to be consumed. Even what is mixed with that is of the same nature, for all consuming it, there is a dukkata. Therefore, in order to remove the fault of remained inside and cooked inside, the Blessed One allowed four allowable grounds (mahāva. 295), the judgment of these has been stated in the Samantapāsādikā (mahāva. aṭṭha. 295). But where these do not exist, it is proper to make it the property of one who is not ordained and use it. Also, re-cooking what was cooked by oneself is proper. For one who perceives what is not stored up as stored up, or for one who is doubtful, there is a dukkata. For one who perceives it as not stored up, for those who put away the three, yāvakālika and other foods, without transgressing their respective times, for one who always uses what lasts for life when there is a reason, and for an insane person and so on, there is no offense. Meat, being stored up, and the consuming of that, these are the three factors here. The origin and so on are similar to goat's hair.

Sannidhikārakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Storing Up is Finished.

9. Paṇītabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. The Training Rule on Choice Food

paṇītabhojanānīti paṇītasaṃsaṭṭhāni sattadhaññanibbattāni bhojanāni. Yathā hi ājaññayutto ratho ‘ājaññaratho’ti vuccati, evamidhāpi paṇītasaṃsaṭṭhāni bhojanāni paṇītabhojanānīti. Yehi pana paṇītehi saṃsaṭṭhāni, tāni ‘paṇītabhojanānī’ti vuccanti, tesaṃ pabhedadassanatthaṃseyyathidaṃ sappi navanītantiādimāha, tatthasappiādīni bhesajjasikkhāpade (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. bhesajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) vuttalakkhaṇeneva veditabbāni. Macchādīsu pana sabbopi ‘odako’ti (pāci. 260) vuttalakkhaṇo macchomacchoyeva. Yesaṃ pana maṃsaṃ kappati, tesaṃmaṃsañcakhīradadhīnica idhādhippetāni.Evarūpāni paṇītabhojanānīti yāni etehi sappiādīhi saṃsaṭṭhattā ‘paṇītabhojanānī’ti vuccanti, tathārūpāni paṇītabhojanāni.Agilānoti yassa tehi vināpi phāsu hoti.Attano atthāya viññāpetvāti ettha pana yo agilāno suddhāni sappiādīni bhesajjatthāya viññāpeti, so mahānāmasikkhāpadena (pāci. 303) kāretabbo, macchādīni cattāri viññāpento sūpodanaviññattiyā (pāci. 612-613) kāretabbo, sappiādīhi saṃsaṭṭhabhojanāni viññāpento iminā kāretabbo. Tatrāyaṃ vinicchayo – ‘‘sappinā bhattaṃ dehi, sappiṃ ākiritvā dehi, sappimissakaṃ katvā dehi, saha sappinā dehi, sappiñca bhattañca dehī’’ti evaṃ viññāpentassa tāva viññattiyā dukkaṭaṃ, paṭiggahaṇe dukkaṭaṃ, ajjhoharaṇe ajjhoharaṇe pācittiyaṃ. ‘‘Sappibhattaṃ dehī’’ti vutte pana yasmā sālibhattaṃ viya sappibhattaṃ nāma natthi, tasmā sūpodanaviññattiyā dukkaṭameva hoti. Sace pana ‘‘sappinā bhattaṃ dehī’’ti vutte bhattaṃ datvā ‘‘sappiṃ katvā bhuñjāhī’’ti navanītakhīrādīni vā kappiyabhaṇḍaṃ vā deti ‘‘iminā sappiṃ gahetvā bhuñjāhī’’ti, yathāvatthukameva. ‘‘Gosappinā bhattaṃ dehī’’ti vutte pana gosappiṃ vā detu, tasmiṃ asati purimanayena navanītādīni vā, gāviṃyeva vā detu ‘‘ito sappinā bhuñjāhī’’ti, yathāvatthukameva. Sace pana ‘‘gosappinā dehī’’ti yācito ajikāsappiādīhi deti, visaṅketaṃ. Evañhi sati aññaṃ yācitena aññaṃ dinnaṃ nāma hoti, tasmā anāpatti, esa nayo ‘‘ajikāsappinā dehī’’tiādīsupi. ‘‘Kappiyasappinā dehī’’ti vutte akappiyasappinā deti, visaṅketameva. ‘‘Akappiyasappinā dehī’’ti vutte akappiyasappināva deti, paṭiggahaṇepi paribhogepi dukkaṭameva. Iminā nayena sabbapadesu vinicchayo veditabbo. Sace pana sabbehipi sappiādīhi ekaṭṭhāne vā nānāṭṭhāne vā viññāpetvā paṭiladdhaṃ ekato sambhinnarasaṃ katvā tato kusaggena ekabindumpi ajjhoharati, nava pācittiyāni.

Paṇītabhojanānī means foods mixed with delicacies, derived from the seven grains. Just as a chariot yoked with a thoroughbred is called a 'thoroughbred chariot,' so too, foods mixed with delicacies are called paṇītabhojanānī. However, to show the variety of those delicacies with which they are mixed, he says "seyyathidaṃ sappi navanīta" etc. There, sappi and the others should be understood with the characteristics described in the Bhesajja Sikkhāpada (Kaṅkhā. Aṭṭha. Bhesajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā). Among fish and the like, all fish of the characteristic described as ‘odako’ (pāci. 260) is simply maccho (fish). For those for whom meat is allowable, maṃsa (meat) and khīradadhīni (milk and curds) are intended here. Evarūpāni paṇītabhojanānī means such fine foods, which are called 'paṇītabhojanānī' because they are mixed with these sappi, etc., such fine foods. Agilāno means one who is comfortable even without these. Attano atthāya viññāpetvā means, here, if a healthy person requests pure sappi etc. for medicinal purposes, he should be dealt with according to the Mahānāma Sikkhāpada (pāci. 303); if requesting the four, fish etc., he should be dealt with according to the Sūpodana Viññatti (pāci. 612-613); if requesting foods mixed with sappi etc., he should be dealt with according to this. Here is the judgment: To one who requests, "Give me rice with sappi, give me (rice) sprinkled with sappi, make it mixed with sappi, give it with sappi, give me sappi and rice," there is a dukkaṭa for the request, a dukkaṭa for receiving, and a pācittiya for each act of consuming. But if he says, "Give me sappibhattaṃ," since there is no such thing as sappibhattaṃ, like sālibhattaṃ, it is only a dukkaṭa according to the Sūpodana Viññatti. If, however, when asked, "Give me rice with sappi," he gives rice and says, "Eat it with sappi," or gives navanīta, khīra, etc., or allowable goods, saying, "Take sappi with this and eat," it is according to the actual circumstance. If, when asked, "Give me rice with cow's sappi," he gives cow's sappi, or if that is not available, navanīta, etc., in the manner described above, or gives a cow itself, saying, "Eat with sappi from this," it is according to the actual circumstance. If, however, when asked, "Give me cow's sappi," he gives goat's sappi, etc., it is a deception. In this case, something different is given than what was asked for, therefore there is no offense; this rule applies to "Give me goat's sappi," etc. If, when asked, "Give me allowable sappi," he gives unallowable sappi, it is simply a deception. If, when asked, "Give me unallowable sappi," he gives unallowable sappi, there is a dukkaṭa both for receiving and for using. According to this method, the judgment should be understood in all instances. If, however, having requested all the sappi, etc., in one place or in different places, and having obtained them, he makes them into a mixed flavor, and then consumes even one drop with a blade of kusa grass, there are nine pācittiyas.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye bhikkhū ārabbha paṇītabhojanaviññattivatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘agilāno’’ti ayamettha anupaññatti, asādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, gilānassa agilānasaññino, vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ. Gilānasaññissa, gilānakāle viññāpetvā agilānassa bhuñjato, gilānassa sesake, ñātakappavāritaṭṭhānato, aññassatthāya viññatte, attano dhanena gahite, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Paṇītabhojanatā, agilānatā, kataviññattiyā paṭilābho, ajjhoharaṇanti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Addhānasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.

It was promulgated in Sāvatthi concerning the monks of the Group of Six, in the matter of requesting fine foods. "Agilāno" (healthy) here is an anupaññatti, a sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, a tikapācittiyaṃ. For one who is ill, but perceives himself as healthy, or for one who is doubtful, there is a dukkaṭa. For one who perceives himself as ill, for one who requests when ill but eats when healthy, for a sick person's leftovers, from the place of relatives or those who have invited, for what is requested for another's sake, for what is bought with one's own wealth, and for the insane, etc., there is no offense. Being fine food, being healthy, obtaining by request, consuming, these are the four factors here. Addhānasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.

Paṇītabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Paṇītabhojana Sikkhāpada is finished.

10. Dantaponasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Dantapona Sikkhāpada Vaṇṇanā

adinnanti kāyena vā kāyappaṭibaddhena vā gaṇhantassa hatthapāse ṭhatvā kāyakāyappaṭibaddhanissaggiyānaṃ aññatarena na dinnaṃ, appaṭiggahitakassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Appaṭiggahitakañhi bhikkhuno attano santakampi ajjhoharituṃ na vaṭṭati. Paṭiggahitaṃ antamaso vissāsikasantakampi vaṭṭati, tassa lakkhaṇaṃ vuttavipallāsena veditabbaṃ. Sace hi yo koci anupasampanno antamaso tiracchānopi bhikkhussa vā bhikkhuniyā vā hatthapāse ṭhito kāyādīnaṃ aññatarena deti, tañce bhikkhunā yena kenaci sarīrāvayavena vā, tappaṭibaddhena vā, saṃhārimena ca antamaso mañcenāpi, dhāretuṃ samatthena ca antamaso atatthajātakarukkhapaṇṇenāpi, sūciyā parāmaṭṭhamattenāpi paṭiggahitaṃ, paṭiggahitameva hoti. Paṭibaddhappaṭibaddhaṃ nāma idha natthi, yampi natthukaraṇiyā diyyamānaṃ nāsikāya, akallako vā mukhena paṭiggaṇhāti, sabbaṃ vaṭṭati, ābhogamattameva hettha pamāṇaṃ. Pubbābhoge ca sati pacchā niddāyantassa patte dinnampi hatthapāse sati paṭiggahitameva hoti. Yampi ‘‘pattena paṭiggaṇhissāmī’’ti nisinnasseva hatthe patati, taṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Abhihaṭabhājanato patitarajampi vaṭṭati, tattha ṭhitanisinnanipannānaṃ pavāraṇāsikkhāpade vuttanayeneva hatthapāso veditabbo.

Adinnaṃ means not given by one of the bodily acts or by relinquishing something connected to the body, while standing within arm's reach, in the case of something that must be relinquished through bodily means or through something connected to the body; this is the name for something unreceived. For a bhikkhu, even something belonging to himself is not allowable to consume if it is unreceived. What is received, even from someone with whom there is trust, is allowable; its characteristic should be understood by the opposite of what has been said. If any non-ordained person, even an animal, standing within arm's reach of a bhikkhu or bhikkhunī, gives by one of the bodily acts, etc., and if that is received by the bhikkhu by any part of the body, or by something connected to it, or by a carrying device, even a bed, and by something capable of holding, even a leaf of a castor plant, or by even touching with a needle, it is indeed received. There is no such thing here as something connected to something connected. Even if something being given for blowing the nose is received by the nose, or a fool receives it with his mouth, all is allowable; only the initial offering is the measure here. If there is an initial offering, even if something given into the bowl of one who is subsequently sleeping is considered received if he is within arm's reach. Even if something falls into the hand of one who is sitting, saying, "I will receive with the bowl," that is indeed allowable. Even dust falling from a raised container is allowable; there, the arm's reach for those standing, sitting, or lying down should be understood in the manner stated in the Pavāraṇā Sikkhāpada.

Sace pana dāyakappaṭiggāhakesu eko ākāse hoti, eko bhūmiyaṃ, bhūmaṭṭhassa sīsena ākāsaṭṭhassa ca ṭhapetvā dātuṃ vā gahetuṃ vā pasāritahatthaṃ yaṃ āsannataraṃ aṅgaṃ, tassa orimantena hatthapāsappamāṇaṃ paricchinditabbaṃ. Sacepi eko kūpe hoti, eko kūpataṭe, eko vā rukkhe, eko pathaviyaṃ, vuttanayeneva hatthapāsappamāṇaṃ paricchinditabbaṃ. Tasmiṃ ṭhatvā sacepi dve tayo vā sāmaṇerā yaṃ majjhimo puriso ukkhipituṃ sakkoti, evarūpaṃ bhāraṃ pavaṭṭentā bhikkhuno bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapitahatthaṃ āropenti, ukkhipitvā vā bhikkhuno pasāritahatthe ekadesenāpi ṭhapenti, taṃ paṭiggahitameva hoti. Yaṃ pana piṇḍāya carantassa patte rajaṃ patati, taṃ appaṭiggahitameva hoti, tasmā paṭiggahetvāva bhikkhā gaṇhitabbā. Appaṭiggahetvā gaṇhantassa vinayadukkaṭaṃ, taṃ pana puna paṭiggahetvā bhuñjantassa anāpatti. Sace ‘‘paṭiggahetvā dethā’’ti vutte vacanaṃ assutvā vā anādiyitvā vā bhikkhaṃ dentiyeva, vinayadukkaṭā muccati, puna paṭiggahetvā aññā bhikkhā paṭiggahetabbā. Sace mahāvāto tato tato rajaṃ pāteti, na sakkā hoti bhikkhaṃ gahetuṃ, ‘‘anupasampannassa dassāmī’’ti suddhacittena ābhogaṃ katvā gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati. Taṃ anupasampannassa datvā puna tena dinnaṃ vā tassa vissāsena vā paṭiggahetvā bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Assukheḷasiṅghāṇikādīsu yaṃ ṭhānato cavitvā hatthe vā patte vā patati, taṃ paṭiggahetabbaṃ, aṅgalaggaṃ paṭiggahitameva. Patantampi vocchinnañce antarā na gahetabbaṃ, uggahitakaṃ nāma hoti, taṃ pacchā paṭiggahitampi na vaṭṭati. Yaṃ pana bhesajjaṃ vā mūlaphalaṃ vā mātādīnaṃ atthāya gahetvā chāyatthāya vā phalinisākhaṃ ukkhipitvā gacchati, tato yaṃ icchati, taṃ puna paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Yo pana tattha jātakaphalinisākhāya vā valliyā vā gahetvā cāleti. Tassa tato laddhaṃ phalaṃ na vaṭṭati, durupaciṇṇadukkaṭañca āpajjati, aññassa taṃ vaṭṭati, phalirukkhaṃ pana apassayituṃ vā ālambituṃ vā vaṭṭati, paṭiggahetvā ṭhapite yaṃ aññaṃ aṅkurādi uppajjati, paṭiggahitameva taṃ. Yāva hi hatthato mutte nirapekkho na hoti, nirapekkhatāya vā hatthato na muccati, tāva na paṭiggahaṇaṃ vijahati, ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana samantapāsādikāyaṃ vutto.

If, however, one of the giver and receiver is in the air and one is on the ground, the closest limb to the outstretched hand for giving or receiving, after placing (the object) on the head of the one on the ground and on the one in the air, the measure of arm's reach should be determined by the inner limit of that. Even if one is in a well and one is on the edge of the well, or one is in a tree and one is on the ground, the measure of arm's reach should be determined in the manner stated. Standing there, even if two or three novices, while pushing a load that a middle-sized person can lift, place it on the ground with the bhikkhu's hand placed on it, or having lifted it, place it even partially on the bhikkhu's outstretched hand, that is indeed received. However, when one is walking for alms and dust falls into the bowl, that is unreceived; therefore, alms should be taken only after receiving. For one who takes without receiving, there is a Vinaya dukkaṭa, but there is no offense for consuming it after receiving it again. If, when told, "Give it after receiving," they give alms without hearing the words or disregarding them, he is freed from the Vinaya dukkaṭa; other alms should be received again after receiving (these). If a great wind blows dust from here and there, and it is not possible to take alms, it is allowable to take it with a pure mind, intending, "I will give it to a non-ordained person." After giving that to a non-ordained person, it is allowable to receive it again from him or to consume it with his trust. Among phlegm, saliva, mucus, etc., what falls from its place onto the hand or bowl should be received; what is attached to the finger is indeed received. Even what is falling should not be taken in between if it is severed, it is called "taken up," and even if that is later received, it is not allowable. However, if one takes medicine or roots and fruits for the sake of one's mother, etc., or lifts up a branch with fruit for shade, and then goes away, it is allowable to receive and use whatever he wants from that again. But if one shakes a branch or vine with fruit that grows there, the fruit obtained from that is not allowable for him; he incurs a durupaciṇṇadukkaṭa, but it is allowable for another. However, it is allowable to lean against or support a fruit tree. When another sprout, etc., arises in what has been received and placed, that is indeed received. As long as he is not detached from what is released from the hand, or it is not released from the hand due to non-detachment, the receiving does not cease; this is the summary here, but the detail is stated in the Samantapāsādikā.

Mukhadvāranti galanāḷikaṃ. Mukhena vā hi paviṭṭhaṃ hotu, nāsikāya vā, galena ajjhoharaṇīyatāya sabbampi taṃ mukhadvāraṃ pavesitameva hoti.Āhāranti yaṃkiñci yāvakālikaṃ vā yāmakālikaṃ vā sattāhakālikaṃ vā yāvajīvikaṃ vā. Sabbañhetaṃ ajjhoharaṇīyattā ‘āhāro’ti vuccati, tattha sabbampi dhaññaṃ vā dhaññānulomaṃ vā tālanāḷikerapanasalabujaalābukumbhaṇḍapussaphalatipusaphalaeḷālukasaṅkhātaṃ navavidhaṃ mahāphalañceva aparaṇṇañca, yañcaññaṃ vanamūlapattapupphaphalādi āhāratthaṃ pharati, taṃ sabbaṃ yāva majjhanhikakālo, tāva paribhuñjitabbatoyāvakālikaṃnāma. Ambapānaṃ jambupānaṃ cocapānaṃ mocapānaṃ madhukapānaṃ muddikapānaṃ sālūkapānaṃ phārusakapānanti imāni aṭṭha pānāni, yāni ca tesaṃ anulomāni vettatintiṇikamātuluṅgakapiṭṭhakosambakaramandādikhuddakaphalapānāni, etāni sabbāni anupasampannehi sītodakena madditvā katāni ādiccapākāni vā yāva rattiyā pacchimayāmaṃ nidahitvā paribhuñjitabbatoyāmakālikānināma. Avasesesu anuññātaphalapattapuppharasesupi eseva nayo. Sappiādīni pañca bhesajjāni sattāhaṃ nidahitvā paribhuñjitabbatosattāhakālikānināma. Idaṃ pana yāvakālikādittayaṃ kālavimuttañca udakaṃ ṭhapetvā avasesamūlaphalāphalādi yaṃ neva khādanīyatthaṃ na bhojanīyatthaṃ pharati, taṃ yāvajīvaṃ nidahitvā sati paccaye paribhuñjitabbatoyāvajīvikaṃnāma.Āhareyyāti paveseyya.Aññatra udakadantaponāti idaṃ anāhārepi udake āhārasaññāya, dantapone ca ‘‘mukhadvāraṃ āhaṭaṃ ida’’nti saññāya kukkuccāyantānaṃ kukkuccavinodanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Udakañhi yathāsukhaṃ pātuṃ, dantakaṭṭhañca dantaponaparibhogena paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Ṭhapetvā pana idaṃ dvayaṃ avasesaṃ ajjhoharaṇatthāya gaṇhato gahaṇe dukkaṭaṃ, ajjhohāre ajjhohāre pācittiyaṃ, sacepi dantakaṭṭharaso ajānantassa anto pavisati, pācittiyameva.

Mukhadvāra means the throat passage. Whether it enters through the mouth or through the nose, since all of it is to be consumed through the throat, all of it is indeed brought into the mouth. Āhāra means anything that is yāvakālika, yāmakālika, sattāhakālika, or yāvajīvika. All of this is called ‘āhāra’ because it is to be consumed. There, all grains or what accords with grains, the nine kinds of large fruits counted as tāla, nāḷikera, pana, salabuja, alābu, kumbhaṇḍa, pussaphala, tipusaphala, eḷāluka, as well as aparaṇṇa, and whatever else, roots, leaves, flowers, fruits, etc., that serve for the purpose of food, all of that is called yāvakālika because it should be consumed until noon. Ambapānaṃ, jambupānaṃ, cocapānaṃ, mocapānaṃ, madhukapānaṃ, muddikapānaṃ, sālūkapānaṃ, phārusakapānaṃ, these eight drinks, and whatever small fruit drinks accord with them, such as vetta, tintiṇīka, mātuluṅga, kapiṭṭha, kosamba, karamanda, etc., all of these, made by non-ordained persons crushing with cold water, or heated by the sun, are called yāmakālikāni because they should be kept until the last watch of the night and consumed. The same method applies to the remaining allowed fruit, leaf, and flower juices. The five medicines, sappi etc., are called sattāhakālikāni because they should be kept for seven days and consumed. However, setting aside this triad of yāvakālika, etc., and water, which is free from time restrictions, the remaining roots, fruits, etc., which do not serve for the purpose of either edibles or foods, are called yāvajīvikaṃ because they should be kept for as long as life lasts and consumed when there is a reason. Āhareyya means should bring in. Aññatra udakadantaponā this was said to eliminate the doubt of those who are doubtful thinking that water is food, even though it is not, and that the dantapona is "something brought into the mouth." Water is indeed allowable to drink as desired, and a tooth-stick is allowable to use by using it for cleaning the teeth. However, setting aside these two, when one takes the remainder for the purpose of consumption, there is a dukkaṭa for taking, and a pācittiya for each act of consuming. Even if the taste of the tooth-stick enters unknowingly, it is a pācittiya.

Vesāliyaṃ aññataraṃ bhikkhuṃ ārabbha adinnaṃ āhāraṃ āharaṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘aññatra udakadantaponā’’ti ayamettha anupaññatti, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, paṭiggahitake appaṭiggahitasaññino, vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ. Paṭiggahitasaññissa, udakadantapone, cattāri mahāvikaṭāni sati paccaye asati kappiyakārake sāmaṃ gahetvā paribhuñjantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Ettha dubbacopi asamatthopi kappiyakārako asantapakkheyeva tiṭṭhati, chārikāya asati sukkhadāruṃ jhāpetvā, tasmiñca asati alladāruṃ rukkhato chinditvāpi kātuṃ, mattikatthāya ca pathaviṃ khaṇitumpi vaṭṭati, idaṃ pana catubbidhampi mahāvikaṭaṃ kālodissaṃ nāma sappadaṭṭhakkhaṇeyeva sāmaṃ gahetuṃ vaṭṭati, aññadā paṭiggāhāpetvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ. Appaṭiggahitakatā, ananuññātatā, dhūmādiabbohārikābhāvo, ajjhoharaṇanti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasadisānīti.

It was promulgated in Vesālī concerning a certain bhikkhu, in the matter of bringing in ungiven food. "Aññatra udakadantaponā" (except for water and a tooth-cleaner) here is an anupaññatti, a sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, a tikapācittiyaṃ. For one who is receiving but perceives it as unreceived, or for one who is doubtful, there is a dukkaṭa. For one who perceives it as received, for water and a tooth-cleaner, for the four mahāvikaṭas, when there is a reason, and when there is no allowable maker, for one himself taking and using, and for the insane, etc., there is no offense. Here, even a difficult or incapable allowable maker remains in the absence of (such a person). In the absence of ash, it is allowable to burn dry wood, and in the absence of that, to cut green wood from a tree and make it, and even to dig earth for the sake of clay. However, all four of these mahāvikaṭas are called kālodissaṃ, it is allowable to take them oneself at the very moment of a snake bite, otherwise they should be used after having them received. Being unreceived, being unallowed, the absence of smoke, etc., the impossibility of consumption, consuming, these are the four factors here. Samuṭṭhāna, etc., are similar to eḷakaloma.

Dantaponasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Dantapona Sikkhāpada is finished.

Bhojanavaggo catuttho.

The fourth, Bhojana Vagga.

5. Acelakavaggo

5. Acelaka Vagga

1. Acelakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Acelaka Sikkhāpada Vaṇṇanā

Acelakavaggassa paṭhame etesaṃ acelakādīnaṃ aññatitthiyānaṃ yaṃkiñci āmisaṃ ekappayogena dentassa ekaṃ pācittiyaṃ, avacchinditvā avacchinditvā dentassa payoge payoge pācittiyaṃ.

In the first of the Acelaka Vagga, for giving any offering to these Acelakas, etc., non-Buddhist sectarians, with a single effort, there is one pācittiya; for giving by separating and separating, there is a pācittiya for each effort.

Vesāliyaṃ āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ ārabbha paribbājikāya dve pūve dānavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, asādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, udakadantaponaṃ dentassa, atitthiye titthiyasaññissa, vematikassa ca dukkaṭaṃ. Atitthiye atitthiyasaññissa, anupasampannena dāpentassa, tesaṃ santike bhājanaṃ nikkhipitvā ‘‘idaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti bhaṇantassa, tesaṃ vā nikkhittabhājane dentassa, bāhiralepaṃ dentassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Aññatitthiyatā, ananuññātatā, ajjhoharaṇīyaṃ ajjhoharaṇatthāya sahatthā anikkhittabhājane dānanti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasadisānīti.

Regarding Venerable Ānanda in Vesālī, it was established concerning a gift of two cakes to a female wanderer, an unshared regulation, not commanded, a triple pācittiya, and a dukkata for giving water for rinsing teeth to a non-believer who thinks of himself as a believer, and for one who is uncertain. No offense for one who thinks of himself as a non-believer, having it given by one who is not fully ordained, saying "Take this" after placing the bowl near them, giving to them in the placed bowl, giving external application, and for the insane, etc. These are the three factors here: being a member of another sect, not being authorized, and giving food meant to be consumed with one's own hand into an unplaced bowl. The origin etc., are similar to a lock of sheep's wool.

Acelakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Acelaka Training Rule is Finished.

2. Uyyojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Incitement Training Rule

dāpetvā vā adāpetvā vāti yaṃkiñci āmisaṃ dāpetvā vā na dāpetvā vā.Uyyojeyyāti mātugāmena saddhiṃ hasanakīḷanarahonisajjādīni kattukāmo ‘gacchā’tiādīni vatvā uyyojeyya.Etadevāti etaṃ anācārameva paccayaṃ karitvā, na aññaṃ patirūpaṃ kāraṇaṃ.Pācittiyanti uyyojanamatte tāva dukkaṭaṃ, yadā panassa so dassanūpacāraṃ vā savanūpacāraṃ vā ekena pādena vijahati, aparaṃ dukkaṭaṃ, dutiyena vijahite pācittiyaṃ. Ettha ca dassanūpacārassa ajjhokāse ṭhatvā dvādasahatthappamāṇaṃ, tathā savanūpacārassa. Sace pana antarā kuṭṭadvārapākārādayo honti, tehi antaritabhāvoyeva upacārātikkamo.

Having given or not having given: Having given or not having given any kind of material thing. Should incite: Desiring to engage in laughing, playing, secluded sitting, etc., with a woman, he should incite her by saying "Go," etc. For this very reason: Making this very misconduct the reason, not another suitable cause. Pācittiya: A dukkata immediately upon incitement, but when he abandons visual contact or auditory contact by one foot, another dukkata; when he abandons it by the second, a pācittiya. Here, for visual contact, it is about twelve handbreadths while standing in the open; likewise for auditory contact. But if there are walls, doors, ramparts, etc., in between, the very fact of being obstructed by them is a transgression of contact.

Sāvatthiyaṃ upanandaṃ ārabbha uyyojanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, uyyojanāṇattikāya sāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, anupasampanne tikadukkaṭaṃ, ubhinnampi kalisāsanāropane dukkaṭameva, ‘‘ubho ekato na yāpessāmā’’ti evamādīhi patirūpakāraṇehi uyyojentassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Anācāraṃ ācaritukāmatā, tadatthameva upasampannassa uyyojanaṃ, evaṃ uyyojitassa upacārātikkamoti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisānīti.

Regarding Upananda in Sāvatthī, it was established concerning the matter of incitement, a shared regulation, commanded for the incitement training rule, a triple pācittiya, a triple dukkata for one not fully ordained, and merely a dukkata for both in the case of accusations of moral offense, no offense for one who incites with suitable reasons such as "We will not live together," and for the insane, etc. These are the three factors here: the desire to engage in misconduct, the incitement of a fully ordained monk for that very purpose, and the transgression of contact by the one thus incited. The origin etc., are similar to not giving and stealing.

Uyyojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Incitement Training Rule is Finished.

3. Sabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Shared Meal Training Rule

sabhojanaṃ,tasmiṃ sabhojane. Atha vāsabhojaneti sabhoge, rāgapariyuṭṭhitapurisassa hi itthī bhogo, itthiyā ca puriso, tenevassa padabhājane ‘‘itthī ceva hoti, puriso cā’’tiādi (pāci. 281) vuttaṃ.Anupakhajja nisajjaṃ kappeyyāti anupavisitvā nisīdeyya, yaṃ tasmiṃ kule sayanigharaṃ, tassa mahācatussālādīsu katassa mahallakassa piṭṭhasaṅghāṭato hatthapāsaṃ vijahitvā antosayanassa āsanne ṭhāne, khuddakassa vā vemajjhaṃ atikkamitvā nisīdeyyāti attho, evaṃ nisinnassa pācittiyaṃ.

Shared meal: In that shared meal. Or, shared meal means shared enjoyment; for a man overcome by lust, a woman is an enjoyment, and for a woman, a man; therefore, it was said in the section on terms, "There is a woman and there is a man," etc. (pāci. 281). Should make an inappropriate sitting by going close: He should sit down without entering, abandoning the distance of an arm's reach from the large platform of seats made in the large hall, etc., of that family's sleeping room, in a place near the inner sleeping area, or for a small one, he should sit down after crossing the middle; this is the meaning. For one sitting thus, a pācittiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ upanandaṃ ārabbha anupakhajja nisajjanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, asayanighare sayanigharasaññino, vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ. Nasayanigharasaññissa, vuttalakkhaṇaṃ padesaṃ anatikkamitvā nisinnassa, bhikkhusmiṃ dutiyake sati, ubhosu nikkhantesu vā, vītarāgesu vā nisīdantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Avītarāgajāyampatikānaṃ sannihitatā, sayanigharatā, dutiyassa bhikkhuno abhāvo, anupakhajja nisīdananti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamapārājikasadisānīti.

Regarding Upananda in Sāvatthī, it was established concerning the matter of sitting inappropriately close, a shared regulation, not commanded, a triple pācittiya, and a dukkata for one who is uncertain or for one who perceives it as not being a sleeping room. No offense for one who perceives it as not being a sleeping room, for one sitting without transgressing the described area, when there is a second bhikkhu, when both have left, for those sitting free from lust, and for the insane, etc. These are the four factors here: the presence of a couple not free from lust, it being a sleeping room, the absence of a second bhikkhu, and sitting inappropriately close. The origin etc., are similar to the first pārājika.

Sabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Shared Meal Training Rule is Finished.

4-5. Rahopaṭicchanna-rahonisajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4-5. Explanation of the Secluded Covered Place and Secluded Sitting Training Rules

Catutthapañcamāni sāvatthiyaṃ upanandaṃ ārabbha paṭicchannāsane ca, raho ca nisajjanavatthusmiṃ paññattāni, sādhāraṇapaññattiyo, etesampi samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamapārājikasadisāneva. Seso kathānayo aniyatadvaye vuttanayeneva veditabbo.

The fourth and fifth were established regarding Upananda in Sāvatthī, concerning a covered seat and sitting in secret; shared regulations, the origin, etc., of these are similar to the first pārājika. The remaining narrative method should be understood in the same way as described in the two indefinite rules.

Rahopaṭicchanna-rahonisajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Secluded Covered Place and Secluded Sitting Training Rules is Finished.

6. Cārittasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Conduct Training Rule

nimantitoti pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññatarena nimantito.Sabhatto samānoti teneva nimantanabhattena sabhatto samāno.Santaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchāti antoupacārasīmāya dassanūpacāre bhikkhuṃ disvā yaṃ sakkā hoti pakativacanena āpucchituṃ, tādisaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ itthannāmassa gharaṃ gacchāmī’’ti vā ‘‘cārittaṃ āpajjāmī’’ti vā īdisena vacanena anāpucchitvā.Purebhattaṃ vā pacchābhattaṃ vāti yena bhattena nimantito, tasmiṃ bhutte vā abhutte vā.Kulesu cārittaṃ āpajjeyyāti yasmiṃ kule nimantito, tato aññāni kulāni paviseyya.Aññatra samayā pācittiyanti sace so bhikkhu vuttalakkhaṇaṃ duvidhampi samayaṃ ṭhapetvā avītivatte majjhanhike aññaṃ kulaṃ pavisati, athassa gharūpacārokkamane dukkaṭaṃ, paṭhamapādena ummāraṃ atikkamantassa aparampi dukkaṭaṃ, dutiyapādena atikkame pācittiyaṃ.

Invited: Invited to one of the five kinds of meals. Being satisfied with the meal: Being satisfied with that very invited meal. Without asking a bhikkhu who is present: Seeing a bhikkhu within the boundary of approach in the area of visibility, whom it is possible to ask with ordinary words, without asking with such words as "I am going to such and such a house" or "I am going to engage in conduct." Before the meal or after the meal: Whether the meal for which he was invited has been eaten or not. Should engage in conduct in families: He should enter families other than the family to which he was invited. Except at the proper time, a pācittiya: If that bhikkhu, setting aside the specified two kinds of proper time, enters another family at midday when it has not passed, then upon transgressing the boundary of the house, a dukkata; another dukkata for crossing the threshold with the first foot; a pācittiya for crossing with the second foot.

Rājagahe upanandaṃ ārabbha cārittāpajjanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘santaṃ bhikkhuṃ, anāpucchā, purebhattaṃ pacchābhattaṃ, aññatra samayā’’ti ayamettha catubbidhā anupaññatti, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, animantite nimantitasaññissa, vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ. Tasmiṃ animantitasaññissa, samaye santaṃ bhikkhuṃ āpucchitvā, asantaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchitvā pavisato, aññassa gharena vā gharūpacārena vā maggo hoti, tena gacchato, antarārāmabhikkhunupassayatitthiyaseyyapaṭikkamanabhattiyagharāni gacchato, āpadāsu, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññatarena nimantanasādiyanaṃ, santaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchanā, bhattiyagharato aññagharappavisanaṃ, majjhanhikānatikkamo, samayassa vā āpadānaṃ vā abhāvoti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamakathinasadisāneva, idaṃ pana kiriyākiriyanti.

Regarding Upananda in Rājagaha, it was established concerning the matter of engaging in conduct, this fourfold supplementary rule: "without asking a bhikkhu who is present, before the meal, after the meal, except at the proper time," a shared regulation, not commanded, a triple pācittiya, and a dukkata for one who perceives himself as invited when he is not invited, or for one who is uncertain. No offense for one who perceives himself as not invited, for one who enters after asking a bhikkhu who is present at the proper time, or without asking a bhikkhu who is not present, for one who goes through another's house or the boundary of a house when it is a path, for one who goes to monasteries, bhikkhuni residences, places of pilgrimage, reception halls, or invitation houses in between, in times of distress, and for the insane, etc. These are the five factors here: accepting an invitation to one of the five kinds of meals, not asking a bhikkhu who is present, entering a house other than the invitation house, not transgressing midday, and the absence of the proper time or of times of distress. The origin etc., are similar to the first kathina, but this is an act of doing and non-doing.

Cārittasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Conduct Training Rule is Finished.

7. Mahānāmasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Mahānāma Training Rule

catumāsappaccayapavāraṇāti cattāro māse gilānappaccayapavāraṇā, sabbañcetaṃ vatthuvasena vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha attho – catumāsapavāraṇā vā hotu, punapavāraṇā vā, niccapavāraṇā vā, sabbāpi sāditabbā, ‘‘idāni mama rogo natthī’’ti na paṭikkhipitabbā, ‘‘roge pana sati viññāpessāmī’’ti adhivāsetabbāti.Tato ce uttari sādiyeyyāti ettha sace tattha rattīhi vā bhesajjehi vā paricchedo kato hoti ‘‘ettakāyeva rattiyo, ettakāni vā bhesajjāni viññāpetabbānī’’ti, atha tato rattipariyantato vā bhesajjapariyantato vā uttari, na bhesajjakaraṇīyena vā bhesajjaṃ, aññabhesajjakaraṇīyena vā aññaṃ bhesajjaṃ viññāpentassa pācittiyaṃ.

Four-month allowance of requisites: A four-month allowance of requisites for the sick; all of this was stated in terms of the subject matter. But this is the meaning here: whether it is a four-month allowance, a renewed allowance, or a continuous allowance, all should be accepted; it should not be refused with "Now I have no illness," but it should be accepted with the understanding "But I will inform [you] if there is an illness." If he should accept more than that: Here, if a limit has been made there in terms of nights or medicines, "Only so many nights or so many medicines should be requested," then for one who requests more than that limit of nights or limit of medicines, either medicine when there is no reason to take medicine, or another medicine when there is reason to take another medicine, a pācittiya.

Sakkesu chabbaggiye ārabbha bhesajjaviññāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, natatuttari tatuttarisaññino, vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ. Natatuttari natatuttarisaññissa, yehi bhesajjehi pavārito, tato aññehi vā adhikatarehi vā atthe sati, yāsu ca rattīsu pavārito, tā atikkamitvāpi atthe sati yathābhūtaṃ ācikkhitvā viññāpentassa, ye ca ñātake vā puggalikappavāraṇāya pavārite vā apariyantapavāraṇāya vā pavārite, aññassa vā atthāya, attano vā dhanena viññāpenti, tesaṃ, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Saṅghapavāraṇatā, tato bhesajjaviññatti, agilānatā, pariyantātikkamoti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni sañcarittasadisānīti.

Regarding the Group-of-Six in the Sakyan country, it was established concerning the matter of requesting medicine, a shared regulation, not commanded, a triple pācittiya, and a dukkata for one who perceives there is more when there is not more, or for one who is uncertain. No offense for one who perceives there is not more when there is not more, for one who, having been given an allowance of certain medicines, requests others or more of them when there is a need, or for one who, even after those nights for which an allowance was given have passed, requests after truthfully explaining when there is a need, and for those who request medicine with their own wealth, either for a relative or for one granted a personal allowance or for one granted an unlimited allowance, or for the sake of another, and for the insane, etc. These are the four factors here: it being a sangha allowance, the request for medicine thereafter, not being ill, and transgressing the limit. The origin etc., are similar to that of wandering about.

Mahānāmasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Mahānāma Training Rule is Finished.

8. Uyyuttasenāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Arrayed Army Training Rule

uyyuttanti katauyyogaṃ, gāmato nikkhantanti attho.Senanti caturaṅginiṃ.Aññatra tathārūpappaccayāti tathārūpe kāraṇe asati kevalaṃ senaṃ dassanatthāya gacchato pade pade dukkaṭaṃ, dassanūpacāre ṭhatvā passato pācittiyaṃ.Dassanūpacāronāma yattha ṭhito passati, taṃ pana vijahitvā punappunaṃ passato payoge payoge pācittiyaṃ.

Arrayed: Having made an array, having gone out from the village; this is the meaning. Army: The fourfold army. Except for a proper reason: Without a proper reason of that kind, a dukkata at each step for one who goes merely to see the army; a pācittiya for one who stands within sight and looks on. Area of visibility: Namely, the place where he stands and sees; but having abandoned that, a pācittiya with each effort for one who looks again and again.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye ārabbha senādassanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘aññatra tathārūpappaccayā’’ti ayamettha anupaññatti, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, hatthiādīsu ekamekaṃ dassanāya gamane vuttanayeneva dukkaṭaṃ, tathā anuyyutte uyyuttasaññino, vematikassa ca dukkaṭaṃ. Anuyyuttasaññino pana, ārāme ṭhatvā attano ṭhitokāsaṃ āgataṃ, paṭipathaṃ āgacchantañca passato, tathārūpappaccaye, āpadāsu, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Uyyuttasenaṃ dassanatthāya gamanaṃ, anuññātokāsato aññatra dassanaṃ, tathārūpappaccayassa āpadāya vā abhāvoti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasadisāni, idaṃ pana lokavajjaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, tivedananti.

Regarding the Group-of-Six in Sāvatthī, it was established concerning the matter of seeing an army, this supplementary rule: "except for a proper reason," a shared regulation, not commanded, a triple pācittiya, and in the case of going to see each elephant, etc., a dukkata in the manner described above; likewise, a dukkata for one who perceives it as arrayed when it is not arrayed, and for one who is uncertain. But no offense for one who perceives it as not arrayed, for one who sees it coming into his own standing space while standing in the monastery, or coming along the road, for a proper reason of that kind, in times of distress, and for the insane, etc. These are the four factors here: going to see an arrayed army, seeing from a place other than the authorized space, and the absence of a proper reason of that kind or of a time of distress. The origin etc., are similar to a lock of sheep's wool, but this is worldly wrong, unwholesome thought, and threefold.

Uyyuttasenāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Arrayed Army Training Rule is Finished.

9. Senāvāsasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Army Encampment Training Rule

tato ce uttarīti tirattato uttari catutthadivase atthaṅgate sūriye senāya tiṭṭhatu vā nisīdatu vā sayatu vā, sacepi ākāse iddhiyā kañci iriyāpathaṃ kappeti, pācittiyameva.

If he should stay longer than that: Longer than three nights, on the fourth day, whether he stands, sits, or lies down in the army after sunset, even if he maintains some posture in the sky by means of psychic power, it is still a pācittiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye ārabbha atirekatirattaṃ senāya vasanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, ūnakatiratte atirekasaññino, vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ. Ūnakasaññissa, tatiyāya rattiyā purāruṇā nikkhamitvā puna vasato, gilānassa vā gilānakaraṇīyena vā vasato, paṭisenāruddhāya senāya, kenaci palibuddhassa, āpadāsu, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Tirattātikkamo, senāya sūriyassa atthaṅgamo, gilānatādīnaṃ abhāvoti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasadisānevāti.

Regarding the Group-of-Six in Sāvatthī, it was established concerning the matter of dwelling in an army longer than three nights, a shared regulation, not commanded, a triple pācittiya, and a dukkata for one who perceives it as being longer than three nights when it is less, or for one who is uncertain. No offense for one who perceives it as less, for one who leaves before dawn on the third night and dwells there again, for one who dwells there due to illness or for the sake of an ill person, for an army obstructed by another army, for one obstructed by someone, in times of distress, and for the insane, etc. These are the three factors here: the transgression of three nights, the setting of the sun in the army, and the absence of illness, etc. The origin etc., are similar to a lock of sheep's wool.

Senāvāsasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Army Encampment Training Rule is Finished.

10. Uyyodhikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Battle Array Training Rule

uyyodhikaṃ,sampahāraṭṭhānassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Balassa aggaṃ jānanti etthātibalaggaṃ,balagaṇanaṭṭhānanti attho. Senāya viyūhaṃsenābyūhaṃ,senānivesassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Anīkassa dassanaṃanīkadassanaṃ. Anīkaṃnāma ‘‘dvādasapuriso hatthī, tipuriso asso, catuppuriso ratho’’tiiminā (pāci. 314) lakkhaṇena tayo hatthī pacchimakaṃ hatthānīkaṃ, assānīkarathānīkesupi eseva nayo. Cattāro pana āvudhahatthā purisā pacchimakaṃ pattānīkaṃ. Etesu yaṃkiñci dassanāya gacchato pade pade dukkaṭaṃ, dassanūpacāre ṭhatvā passato pācittiyaṃ, upacāraṃ pana vijahitvā punappunaṃ passato payoge payoge pācittiyaṃ. Sesaṃ uyyuttasenāsikkhāpade vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ, āpattibhedo panettha natthevāti.

Battle array: This is a name for the place of fighting. The vanguard of the army: The place for counting the strength of the army; this is the meaning. The disposition of the army: The name for the army's encampment. Seeing the array: Array means three elephants with the characteristic that "an elephant is twelve men, a horse is three men, a chariot is four men" (pāci. 314), the rear elephant array; the same method applies for the horse array and the chariot array. But four men with weapons in hand are the rear infantry array. A dukkata at each step for one who goes to see any of these; a pācittiya for one who stands within sight and looks on, but a pācittiya with each effort for one who looks again and again after abandoning the area of visibility. The rest should be understood in the same way as described in the Arrayed Army Training Rule; there is no difference in the offenses here.

Uyyodhikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Battle Array Training Rule is Finished.

Acelakavaggo pañcamo.

The Fifth Chapter, Acelakavagga, is Finished.

6. Surāpānavaggo

6. Surāpāna Chapter

1. Surāpānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Surāpāna Training Rule

surāmerayapāneti ettha piṭṭhādīhi kataṃ majjaṃ surā, pupphādīhi kato āsavo merayaṃ, tadubhayampi bījato paṭṭhāya kusaggenāpi pivato payoge payoge pācittiyaṃ.

Drinking surā and meraya: Here, surā is intoxicant made from flour, etc., meraya is liquor made from flowers, etc.; for both of these, a pācittiya with each effort for one who drinks even with a blade of kusa grass, starting from the seed.

Kosambiyaṃ sāgatattheraṃ ārabbha majjapivanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, amajje majjasaññissa, vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ. Amajjasaññissa, amajjaṃ majjavaṇṇagandharasaṃ loṇasovīrakaṃ vā suttaṃ vā pivato, vāsaggāhāpanatthaṃ īsakaṃ majjaṃ pakkhipitvā sūpādīni pacanti, tesu sūpasampākādīsu, āmalakarasādīhi amajjaṃ majjasadisaṃ ariṭṭhaṃ karonti, taṃ pivato, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Majjabhāvo, tassa pānañcāti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasadisāni, idaṃ pana lokavajjaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, tivedananti.

This was established at Kosambi regarding Sāgata Thera in connection with the drinking of intoxicants; it is a general rule, not a command, a threefold pācittiya, for one who thinks non-intoxicant is intoxicant, or for one who is doubtful, a dukkaṭa. For one who thinks it is non-intoxicant, if one drinks non-intoxicant that has the color, smell, or taste of intoxicant, or salted sovīraka or surā, or if they add a little intoxicant to soup etc. to enhance the flavor, and cook such soups, etc., or if they make ariṭṭha similar to intoxicant with emblic myrobalan juice, etc., and drink it, or for an insane person, etc., there is no offense. The state of being an intoxicant, and the drinking of it, these are the two factors here. The origins, etc., are like an eḷakaloma, but this is worldly wrong, unwholesome thought, it is known as threefold.

Surāpānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Intoxicant-Drinking Training Rule is Finished.

2. Aṅgulipatodakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. The Explanation of the Training Rule on Prodding with a Finger

aṅgulipatodaketi aṅgulīhi upakacchakādighaṭṭanaṃ vuccati, apica yena kenaci sarīrāvayavena hasādhippāyassa upasampannaṃ phusato pācittiyaṃ.

aṅgulipatodake: means touching with the fingers, such as rubbing the armpit, etc. Furthermore, a pācittiya for touching a fully ordained monk with any part of the body with the intention of causing laughter.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye ārabbha aṅgulipatodakena hasanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, anupasampanne tikadukkaṭaṃ, idha pana bhikkhunīpi bhikkhussa, bhikkhu ca bhikkhuniyā anupasampanno eva, kāyappaṭibaddhādīsu sabbattha dukkaṭameva. Na hasanādhippāyassa, sati karaṇīye āmasato, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Hasādhippāyatā, upasampannassa kāyena kāyāmasananti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamapārājikasadisānevāti.

This was established at Sāvatthi regarding the group-of-six monks in connection with causing laughter by prodding with a finger; it is a general rule, not a command, a threefold pācittiya, for one who is not fully ordained, a threefold dukkaṭa, here even a nun to a monk, and a monk to a nun, is just not fully ordained, in all instances relating to bodily contact, etc., it is only a dukkaṭa. If there is no intention to cause laughter, if there is a need to touch, or for an insane person, etc., there is no offense. The intention to cause laughter, and touching the body of a fully ordained monk with the body, these are the two factors here. The origins, etc., are similar to the first pārājika.

Aṅgulipatodakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Prodding with a Finger is Finished.

3. Hasadhammasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. The Explanation of the Training Rule on Jesting

udake hasadhammeti udakakīḷā vuccati. Tasmā yo bhikkhu uparigopphake udakeyeva gacchanto hasādhippāyo nimujjati vā ummujjati vā, tassa nimujjanādīnaṃ atthāya otarantassa hatthavāre padavāre dukkaṭaṃ, nimujjanummujjanesu payoge payoge pācittiyaṃ, nimujjitvā antoudakeyeva gacchantassa hatthavārapadavāresu, tarantassa vā yena yena aṅgena tarati, tassa tassa payoge payoge pācittiyaṃ.

udake hasadhamme: means playing in the water. Therefore, if a monk, going only up to the upper ankle in water, dives or emerges with the intention of jesting, there is a dukkaṭa for the hand movement or foot movement of one descending for the purpose of diving, etc., a pācittiya for each effort in diving and emerging, for one going along underwater after diving, in hand movements and foot movements, or for one swimming, a pācittiya for each effort of whatever limb he swims with.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sattarasavaggiye bhikkhū ārabbha udake kīḷanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, udake ahasadhamme hasadhammasaññino, vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ, tathā nāvāya kīḷato hatthena vā pādena vā kaṭṭhena vā kathalāya vā udakaṃ paharato, bhājanagataṃ udakaṃ vā kañjikādīni vā cikkhallaṃ vā khipanakīḷāya kīḷato dukkaṭaṃ. Atthajotakaṃ pana akkharaṃ chindituṃ vaṭṭati. Na hasādhippāyassa, sati karaṇīye otaritvā nimujjanādīni karontassa, pāraṃ gacchato, āpadāsu, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Uparigopphakatā, hasādhippāyena kīḷananti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamapārājikasadisānīti.

This was established at Sāvatthi regarding the seventeen-group of monks in connection with playing in the water; it is a general rule, not a command, a threefold pācittiya, for one who thinks there is jesting in water which is not for jesting, or for one who is doubtful, a dukkaṭa, likewise for one playing in a boat by striking the water with a hand or a foot or a piece of wood or a potsherd, or for one playing a throwing game with water or sour gruel, etc., in a vessel or with mud, a dukkaṭa. But it is permissible to cut off a letter that illuminates the meaning. If there is no intention to jest, if there is a need to descend and dive, etc., or for one going to the other shore, in times of danger, or for an insane person, etc., there is no offense. The water reaching above the upper ankle, and playing with the intention of jesting, these are the two factors here. The origins, etc., are similar to the first pārājika.

Hasadhammasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Jesting is Finished.

4. Anādariyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. The Explanation of the Training Rule on Disrespect

anādariyeti puggalassa vā dhammassa vā anādarakaraṇe. Tasmā yo bhikkhu upasampannena paññattena vuccamāno tassa vā vacanaṃ akattukāmatāya, taṃ vā dhammaṃ asikkhitukāmatāya anādariyaṃ karoti, tassa tasmiṃ anādariye pācittiyaṃ.

anādariye: in showing disrespect towards a person or a Dhamma. Therefore, if a monk, being addressed by a fully ordained monk with something that has been prescribed, shows disrespect for that person's words out of unwillingness to do it, or for that Dhamma out of unwillingness to learn it, there is a pācittiya for that disrespect.

Kosambiyaṃ channattheraṃ ārabbha anādariyakaraṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, anupasampanne tikadukkaṭaṃ, upasampannena vā anupasampannena vā ‘‘idaṃ na sallekhāya saṃvattatī’’tiādinā nayena apaññattena vuccamānassa anādariyepi dukkaṭameva. Paveṇiāgataṃ pana uggahaṃ gahetvā ‘‘evaṃ amhākaṃ ācariyānaṃ uggaho paripucchā’’ti (pāci. 344) bhaṇantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Upasampannassa paññattena vacanaṃ, anādariyakaraṇanti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāni, idaṃ pana dukkhavedananti.

This was established at Kosambi regarding Channa Thera in connection with showing disrespect; it is a general rule, not a command, a threefold pācittiya, for one who is not fully ordained, a threefold dukkaṭa, even for showing disrespect towards something not prescribed by a fully ordained monk or one not fully ordained, being addressed in a way such as "this does not lead to expunging," etc., it is only a dukkaṭa. But for one who, having taken up a tradition that has come down, says "this is how the teaching and questioning of our teachers was" (pāci. 344), or for an insane person, etc., there is no offense. A statement prescribed by a fully ordained monk, and showing disrespect, these are the two factors here. The origins, etc., are similar to taking what is not given, but this is a painful feeling.

Anādariyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Disrespect is Finished.

5. Bhiṃsāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. The Explanation of the Training Rule on Frightening

bhiṃsāpeyyāti bhiṃsāpanatthaṃ rūpādīni upasaṃhareyya, bhayānakakathaṃ vā katheyya. So pana bhāyatu vā, mā vā, itarassa pācittiyaṃ.

bhiṃsāpeyya: would bring forward forms, etc., for the purpose of frightening, or would tell a terrifying story. Whether he becomes frightened or not, there is a pācittiya for the other one.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye bhikkhū ārabbha bhiṃsāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ. Anupasampanne tikadukkaṭaṃ, na bhiṃsāpetukāmassa tathā karoto, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Upasampannatā, tassa dassanasavanavisaye bhiṃsāpetukāmatāya vāyāmananti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni anantarasikkhāpadasadisānevāti.

This was established at Sāvatthi regarding the group-of-six monks in connection with frightening; it is a general rule, not a command, a threefold pācittiya. For one who is not fully ordained, a threefold dukkaṭa, if one does so without intending to frighten, or for an insane person, etc., there is no offense. Being fully ordained, and making an effort to frighten within the range of his sight or hearing, these are the two factors here. The origins, etc., are similar to the immediately preceding training rule.

Bhiṃsāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Frightening is Finished.

6. Jotisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. The Explanation of the Training Rule on Fire

visibbanāpekkhoti tappitukāmo.Samādaheyyāti jāleyya,aññatra tathārūpappaccayāti padīpujjālanaṃ vā pattapacanādīsu jotikaraṇaṃ vāti evarūpaṃ paccayaṃ vinā. Tatrāyaṃ vinicchayo – sayaṃ samādahantassa araṇisaṇṭhāpanato paṭṭhāya yāva jālā na uṭṭhahati, tāva sabbappayogesu dukkaṭaṃ, jāluṭṭhāne pācittiyaṃ. Samādahāpentassa āṇattiyā dukkaṭaṃ, sakiṃ āṇattena bahumpi samādahite ekameva pācittiyaṃ.

visibbanāpekkho: desiring to extinguish. Samādaheyyā: would kindle, aññatra tathārūpappaccayā: without such a condition as lighting a lamp or making a light for cooking food, etc. Here is the judgment in this case: for one kindling it oneself, from the setting up of the fire-drill until a flame arises, a dukkaṭa for all efforts, a pācittiya when the flame arises. For one ordering it to be kindled, a dukkaṭa for the command, even if much is kindled with one command, there is only one pācittiya.

Bhaggesu sambahule bhikkhū ārabbha jotiṃ samādahitvā visibbanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘agilāno, aññatra tathārūpappaccayā’’ti imānettha dve anupaññattiyo, sādhāraṇapaññatti, sāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, gilānassa agilānasaññino, vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ, tathā paṭilātaṃ ukkhipantassa, tañca avijjhātaṃ ukkhipitvā yathāṭhāne ṭhapentassa. Vijjhātaṃ pana jālayato pācittiyameva. Gilānassa gilānasaññissa, aññena kataṃ vā vītaccitaṅgāraṃ vā visibbentassa, padīpajotikajantāgharādike tathārūpappaccaye, āpadāsu, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Agilānatā, anuññātakāraṇābhāvo, visibbetukāmatā, samādahananti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni sañcaritte vuttanayeneva veditabbānīti.

This was established at Bhagga regarding many monks kindling a fire and seeking warmth; the two additional rules here are "not being ill, without such a condition"; it is a general rule, a command, a threefold pācittiya, for one who is ill, thinking he is not ill, or for one who is doubtful, a dukkaṭa, likewise for one lifting up a burning cinder, and also for one who, having lifted up an unlit cinder, puts it back in its place. But for one who lights a lit one, it is only a pācittiya. For one who is ill, thinking he is ill, or for one extinguishing something done by another or a glowing ember, for such a condition as a lamp, a fire-powered bathhouse, etc., in times of danger, or for an insane person, etc., there is no offense. Being not ill, the absence of a permitted reason, the desire to extinguish, and kindling, these are the four factors here. The origins, etc., should be understood in the same way as stated for sañcaritta.

Jotisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Fire is Finished.

7. Nahānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. The Explanation of the Training Rule on Bathing

nahāyeyyāti yo bhikkhu majjhimadese nahānadivasato paṭṭhāya addhamāse apuṇṇe aññatra samayā ‘‘nahāyissāmī’’ti cuṇṇaṃ vā mattikaṃ vā abhisaṅkharoti, tassa tato paṭṭhāya sabbappayogesu dukkaṭaṃ, nahānapariyosāne pācittiyaṃ. Samayesu pariveṇasammajjanamattampikammasamayo,addhayojanaṃ gantukāmassa, gacchato, gatassa vāaddhānagamanasamayo,sarajena vātena okiṇṇassa dvīsu vā tīsu vā udakaphusitesu kāye patitesuvātavuṭṭhisamayoti veditabbo. Sesaṃ uttānameva.

nahāyeyyā: if a monk, from the bathing day in the Middle Country, before half a month is complete, without a reason, prepares powder or clay, thinking "I will bathe," there is a dukkaṭa for all efforts from then on, a pācittiya at the conclusion of the bathing. In the cases of a reason, even the sweeping of the monastery is a work reason; for one intending to go half a league, or for one going, or for one who has gone, a journey reason; when one is covered by dusty wind or two or three drops of water have fallen on the body, a wind-and-rain reason should be understood. The rest is clear from the wording.

Rājagahe sambahule bhikkhū ārabbha na mattaṃ jānitvā nahāyanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘aññatra samayā’’ti ayamettha chabbidhā anupaññatti, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, atirekaddhamāse ūnakasaññino, vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ. Atirekasaññissa, samaye vā nahāyantassa, yo vā nadīpāraṃ gacchanto vālukaṃ ukkiritvā kataāvāṭesupi nahāyati, tassa, paccantime janapade sabbesaṃ, āpadāsu, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Majjhimadeso, ūnakaddhamāse nahānaṃ, samayānaṃ vā nadīpāragamanassa vā āpadānaṃ vā abhāvoti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasadisānevāti.

This was established at Rājagaha regarding many monks in connection with bathing without knowing the limit; this sixfold additional rule here is "without a reason"; it is a general rule, not a command, a threefold pācittiya, for one who thinks it is less when it is more than half a month, or for one who is doubtful, a dukkaṭa. For one who thinks it is more, or for one bathing at the wrong time, or for one who, going across a river, bathes even in pits dug by scooping out sand, for all in a frontier district, in times of danger, or for an insane person, etc., there is no offense. The Middle Country, bathing less than half a month, or the absence of a reason, or going across a river, or dangers, these are the three factors here. The origins, etc., are similar to an eḷakaloma.

Nahānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Bathing is Finished.

8. Dubbaṇṇakaraṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. The Explanation of the Training Rule on Discoloration

navaṃcīvaralābhenāti vuttaṃ, paṭiladdhanavacīvarenāti attho. Majjhe ṭhitapadadvayepanāti nipātamattaṃ.Bhikkhunāti yena laddhaṃ, tassa nidassanaṃ, sesaṃ padatthato uttānameva. Ayaṃ panettha vinicchayo – nivāsanapārupanupagaṃ cīvaraṃ labhitvā tassa niṭṭhitarajanassa yasmiṃ vā tasmiṃ vā padese kaṃsanīlena vā pattanīlena vā kaddamena vā yena kenaci kāḷakena vā morakkhimaṇḍalamaṅgulapiṭṭhīnaṃ aññatarappamāṇaṃ kappabinduṃ ādiyitvā taṃ cīvaraṃ paribhuñjitabbaṃ, anādiyitvā paribhuñjantassa pācittiyaṃ.

navaṃcīvaralābhenā: has been said, meaning with a newly obtained robe. The word panā in the middle of the two terms is just a particle. Bhikkhunā: an example of who obtained it, the rest is clear from the meaning of the words. Here is the judgment in this case: having obtained a robe suitable for wearing as an inner or outer garment, a monk should take a marking of the size of one of the morakkhimaṇḍala, aṅgulapiṭṭhī, and having finished dyeing it in whatever place with blue dye from a pot or bowl, or with mud, or with any black dye, that robe must be used, there is a pācittiya for using it without applying the marking.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahule bhikkhū ārabbha attano cīvaraajānanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, ādinne anādinnasaññino, vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ. Ādinnasaññissa, kappe naṭṭhe, kappakatokāse jiṇṇe, kappakatena akappakate saṃsibbite, pacchā āropitesu aggaḷaanuvātaparibhaṇḍesu taṃ paribhuñjantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Vuttappakārassa cīvarassa akatakappakatā, na naṭṭhacīvarāditā, nivāsanaṃ vā pārupanaṃ vāti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasadisāni, idaṃ pana kiriyākiriyanti.

This was established at Sāvatthi regarding many monks in connection with not recognizing their own robes; it is a general rule, not a command, a threefold pācittiya, for one who thinks it is not marked when it is marked, or for one who is doubtful, a dukkaṭa. For one who thinks it is marked, when the marking has disappeared, when the place where the marking was made is worn out, when an unmarked part is sewn onto a marked part, for one using it after it has been put on door-bars, window-shutters, or other places, or for an insane person, etc., there is no offense. The robe being of the kind mentioned and not having a marking, and not having lost the robe, or using it as an inner or outer garment, these are the three factors here. The origins, etc., are similar to an eḷakaloma, but this is action and inaction.

Dubbaṇṇakaraṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Discoloration is Finished.

9. Vikappanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. The Explanation of the Training Rule on Assigning

vikappetvāti ettha dve vikappanā sammukhāvikappanā parammukhāvikappanā ca. Kathaṃsammukhāvikappanāhoti? Cīvarānaṃ ekabahubhāvaṃ sannihitāsannihitabhāvañca ñatvā ‘imaṃ cīvara’nti vā ‘imāni cīvarānī’ti vā ‘etaṃ cīvara’nti vā ‘etāni cīvarānī’ti vā vatvā ‘tuyhaṃ vikappemī’ti vattabbaṃ, ayamekā sammukhāvikappanā. Ettāvatā nidhetuṃ vaṭṭati, paribhuñjituṃ pana vissajjetuṃ vā adhiṭṭhātuṃ vā na vaṭṭati. ‘‘Mayhaṃ santakaṃ, mayhaṃ santakāni paribhuñja vā vissajjehi vā yathāpaccayaṃ karohī’’ti (pāci. 374) evaṃ pana vutte paccuddhāro nāma hoti, tato pabhuti paribhogādayopi vaṭṭanti. Aparo nayo, tatheva cīvarānaṃ ekabahubhāvaṃ sannihitāsannihitabhāvañca ñatvā tasseva bhikkhuno santike ‘imaṃ cīvara’nti vā ‘imāni cīvarānī’ti vā ‘etaṃ cīvara’nti vā ‘etāni cīvarānī’ti vā vatvā pañcasu sahadhammikesu aññatarassa attanā abhirucitassa yassa kassaci nāmaṃ gahetvā ‘‘tissassa bhikkhuno vikappemī’’ti vā ‘‘tissāya bhikkhuniyā, sikkhamānāya, sāmaṇerassa, tissāya sāmaṇeriyā vikappemī’’ti vā vattabbaṃ, ayaṃ aparāpi sammukhāvikappanā. Ettāvatā nidhetuṃ vaṭṭati, paribhogādīsu ekampi na vaṭṭati. Tena pana bhikkhunā ‘‘tissassa bhikkhuno santakaṃ…pe… tissāya sāmaṇeriyā santakaṃ paribhuñja vā vissajjehi vā yathāpaccayaṃ karohī’’ti vutte paccuddhāro nāma hoti, tato pabhuti paribhogādayopi vaṭṭanti.

vikappetvā: here there are two assignments: assignment in the presence, and assignment in the absence. How is assignment in the presence done? Having known the one-or-many-ness of the robes, and their presence or absence, one should say 'this robe' or 'these robes' or 'that robe' or 'those robes,' and should say 'I assign to you,' this is one assignment in the presence. Up to this point it is permissible to store it, but it is not permissible to use it, or to give it away, or to determine it. But if it is said "it is mine, they are mine, use it, or give it away, do as you please" (pāci. 374), this is called revocation, from then on use and so on are also permissible. Another method: just as before, having known the one-or-many-ness of the robes, and their presence or absence, one should say to that very monk 'this robe' or 'these robes' or 'that robe' or 'those robes,' and having taken the name of one of the five co-religionists, whomever he likes, he should say "I assign it to Tissa the monk," or "to Tissa the nun, the trainee, the novice, to Tissa the female novice," this is another assignment in the presence. Up to this point it is permissible to store it, but not even one of use etc. is permissible. But when that monk says "it is Tissa the monk's…pe… it is Tissa the female novice's, use it, or give it away, do as you please," this is called revocation, from then on use and so on are also permissible.

parammukhāvikappanāhoti? Cīvarānaṃ tatheva ekabahubhāvaṃ sannihitāsannihitabhāvañca ñatvā ‘imaṃ cīvara’nti vā ‘imāni cīvarānī’ti vā ‘etaṃ cīvara’nti vā ‘etāni cīvarānī’ti vā vatvā ‘‘tuyhaṃ vikappanatthāya dammī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Tena vattabbo ‘‘ko te mitto vā sandiṭṭho vā’’ti. Tato itarena purimanayeneva ‘tisso bhikkhū’ti vā…pe… ‘tissā sāmaṇerī’ti vā vattabbaṃ. Puna tena bhikkhunā ‘‘ahaṃ tissassa bhikkhuno dammī’’ti vā…pe… ‘‘tissāya sāmaṇeriyā dammī’’ti vā vattabbaṃ, ayaṃ parammukhāvikappanā. Ettāvatā nidhetuṃ vaṭṭati, paribhogādīsu ekampi na vaṭṭati. Tena pana bhikkhunā dutiyasammukhāvikappanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva ‘‘itthannāmassa santakaṃ paribhuñja vā vissajjehi vā yathāpaccayaṃ karohī’’ti vutte paccuddhāro nāma hoti, tato pabhuti paribhogādayopi vaṭṭantīti. Pattavikappanāyampi eseva nayo. Iti imāsu dvīsu vikappanāsu yāya kāyaci vikappanāya pañcasu sahadhammikesu yassa kassaci cīvaraṃ vikappetvā vuttanayena akatappaccuddhāraṃ vā yena vinayakammaṃ kataṃ, tassa vā vissāsena aggahetvā paribhuñjantassa pācittiyaṃ.

parammukhāvikappanā occurs? Having known the state of being one or many, present or absent, of the robes, just as before, one should say, either ‘This robe,’ or ‘These robes,’ or ‘That robe,’ or ‘Those robes,’ and say, “I give (this) to you for the purpose of setting aside.” He should be asked, “Who is your friend or acquaintance?” Then the other should say, in the manner as before, either ‘Three monks,’ or …pe… ‘Three novices.’ Then that monk should say, “I give to such-and-such a monk,” or …pe… “I give to such-and-such a novice.” This is parammukhāvikappanā. With just this much, it is allowable to store away, but not even one of the uses, etc. But when that monk says in the manner as before in the second sammukhāvikappanā, “Use or dispose of the property of so-and-so as is suitable,” that is called paccuddhāra, from then on, the uses, etc., are also allowable. This same method applies to setting aside a bowl. Thus, in these two ways of setting aside, having set aside a robe for anyone among the five co-religious, by whichever setting aside, without doing paccuddhāra in the manner stated, or using it without taking permission from one for whom the vinayakamma has been done, a pācittiya results.

Sāvatthiyaṃ upanandaṃ ārabbha appaccuddhāraṇaṃ paribhuñjanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, taṃ pana adhiṭṭhahantassa vā vissajjentassa vā dukkaṭaṃ, tathā paccuddhāraṇe appaccuddhāraṇasaññissa vematikassa vā. Paccuddhāraṇasaññissa pana vissāsena paribhuñjantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Sāmaṃ vikappitassa appaccuddhāro, vikappanupagacīvaratā, paribhogoti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamakathinasadisāneva, idaṃ pana kiriyākiriyanti.

It was proscribed in Sāvatthī regarding Upananda, in the case of using something without paccuddhāra. It is a general proscription, non-delegated, a tikapācittiya. But it is a dukkaṭa for one undertaking it or disposing of it, and likewise for one who is doubtful or perceives something as not having been subject to paccuddhāra. But there is no offense for one perceiving that paccuddhāra has been done and using it with confidence, nor for an insane person, etc. Not doing paccuddhāra of what has been set aside oneself, the state of a robe not subject to vikappanā, and using: these are the three factors involved here. The origination, etc., are just like the first kathina discourse, but this is volitional action.

Vikappanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Sikkhāpada on Setting Aside is Finished.

10. Apanidhānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Sikkhāpada on Hiding Away

pattanti adhiṭṭhānupagaṃ.Cīvaranti vikappanupagaṃ.Nisīdanaṃnāma sadasaṃ vuccati.Sūcigharaṃnāma sasūcikaṃ vā asūcikaṃ vā.Kāyabandhanaṃnāma paṭṭikā vā sūkarantakaṃ vā.Apanidheyyāti apanetvā nidaheyya.Hasāpekkhoti hasādhippāyo.Pācittiyanti sayaṃ apanidhentassa pācittiyaṃ, aññaṃ āṇāpentassa āṇattiyā dukkaṭaṃ, tena apanihite itarassa pācittiyaṃ.

Bowl: (This means) one not subject to undertaking. Robe: (This means) one not subject to setting aside. Nisīdana: Is called one with or without a border. Needle case: (This means) one with or without a needle. Kāyabandhana: (This means) either a belt or a small knife.Should hide away: Should take away and hide. Intending amusement: With the intention of amusement. Pācittiya: For oneself hiding away, there is a pācittiya; for ordering another, there is a dukkaṭa by the order; when it is hidden away by him, there is a pācittiya for the other.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye ārabbha apanidhānavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, sāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, anupasampanne tikadukkaṭaṃ, vuttappakārāni pana pattādīni ṭhapetvā aññaṃ parikkhāraṃ upasampannassa vā anupasampannassa vā santakaṃ apanidhentassa dukkaṭameva. Dunnikkhittaṃ paṭisāmentassa, ‘‘dhammakathaṃ katvā dassāmī’’ti paṭisāmentassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Upasampannassa santakānaṃ pattādīnaṃ apanidhānaṃ, vihesetukāmatā vā hasādhippāyatā vāti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisānīti.

It was proscribed in Sāvatthī regarding the Group-of-Six monks, in the case of hiding away. It is a general proscription, delegated, a tikapācittiya; for one not fully ordained, a tikadukkaṭa. But, having put away the stated types of bowls, etc., concealing other requisites belonging to one ordained or not ordained, there is only a dukkaṭa. There is no offense for one returning something placed badly, for one returning it saying, “I will give a Dhamma talk and then give it back,” nor for an insane person, etc. Hiding away bowls, etc., belonging to an ordained person, the desire to cause trouble or the intention of amusement: these are the two factors involved here. The origination, etc., are similar to taking what is not given.

Apanidhānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Sikkhāpada on Hiding Away is Finished.

Surāpānavaggo chaṭṭho.

The Sixth Surāpāna Chapter.

7. Sappāṇakavaggo

7. The Living-Being Chapter

1. Sañciccasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Sikkhāpada on Intentionally

pāṇoti tiracchānagatapāṇo adhippeto. Taṃ khuddakampi mahantampi mārentassa pācittiyameva, mahante pana upakkamamahantatāya akusalaṃ mahantaṃ hoti.

Living being: A living being gone to the animal realm is intended. For one killing that, whether small or large, there is just a pācittiya; but for a large one, because of the greatness of the effort, the unwholesomeness is great.

Sāvatthiyaṃ udāyittheraṃ ārabbha pāṇaṃ jīvitā voropanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, sāṇattikaṃ, pāṇe vematikassa, apāṇe pāṇasaññino, vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ. Apāṇasaññissa, asañcicca, ajānantassa, namaraṇādhippāyassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Sesaṃ manussaviggahe vuttanayamevāti.

It was proscribed in Sāvatthī regarding the Elder Udāyi, in the case of depriving a being of life. It is a general proscription, delegated; for one who is doubtful about a living being, or who perceives a non-living thing as a living being, or is doubtful, there is a dukkaṭa. There is no offense for one who perceives a non-living thing as such, unintentionally, without knowing, without intending to kill, nor for an insane person, etc. The remainder is just as stated in the case of a human being.

Sañciccasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Sikkhāpada on Intentionally is Finished.

2. Sappāṇakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Sikkhāpada on Living-Beings

sappāṇakanti ye pāṇakā paribhogena maranti, tehi sappāṇakaṃ, tādisañhi jānaṃ paribhuñjantassa payoge payoge pācittiyaṃ.

With living beings: Water with those living beings who die through using it; for one knowing and using such water, there is a pācittiya with each act of use.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye ārabbha jānaṃ sappāṇakaṃ udakaṃ paribhuñjanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sesamettha siñcanasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva veditabbanti.

It was proscribed in Sāvatthī regarding the Group-of-Six monks, in the case of knowingly using water with living beings. The remainder here should be understood in the manner stated in the sikkhāpada on watering.

Sappāṇakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Sikkhāpada on Living-Beings is Finished.

3. Ukkoṭanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Sikkhāpada on Re-opening

yathādhammanti yo yassa adhikaraṇassa vūpasamāya dhammo vutto, teneva dhammena.Nihatādhikaraṇanti nihataṃ adhikaraṇaṃ, samathakkhandhake (cūḷava. 185 ādayo) satthārā vuttadhammeneva vūpasamitanti attho, vūpasamananayaṃ panassa adhikaraṇasamathesu dassayissāma.Punakammāya ukkoṭeyyāti tassa tassa bhikkhuno santikaṃ gantvā ‘‘akataṃ kamma’’ntiādīni (pāci. 394) vadanto punakaraṇatthāya uccāleyya. Yathāṭhitabhāvena patiṭṭhātuṃ na dadeyya, tassevaṃ karontassa pācittiyaṃ. Yaṃ pana dhammena adhikaraṇaṃ nihataṃ, taṃ sunihatameva. Sace vippakate kamme paṭikkosati, taṃ saññāpetvā kātabbaṃ. Itarathā kammañca kuppati, kārakānañca āpatti.

According to the Dhamma: With just that Dhamma which was stated for the settling of whichever case. A settled case: A case that is settled, meaning settled by the Dhamma stated by the Teacher in the Samathakkhandhaka (Cūḷava. 185 ff); but we will show the method of settling in the treatment of settling cases. Should re-open for a further action: Going to the presence of each of those monks, he stirs up (the case) for the purpose of doing it again, saying, “The action was not done,” etc. (pāci. 394). He would not allow it to stand as it was properly established; for one doing thus, there is a pācittiya. But a case which has been settled according to the Dhamma is well-settled. If, when an action is incomplete, he objects, it should be done having informed (the Sangha). Otherwise, the action is spoiled, and there is an offense for those doing it.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye bhikkhū ārabbha ukkoṭanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, dhammakamme vematikassa, adhammakamme dhammakammasaññino, vematikassa vā dukkaṭaṃ. Ubhayesu adhammakammasaññissa, ‘‘adhammena vā vaggena vā akammārahassa vā kammaṃ kata’’nti jānantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Yathādhammaṃ nihatabhāvo, jānanā, ukkoṭanāti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāni, idaṃ pana dukkhavedananti.

It was proscribed in Sāvatthī regarding the Group-of-Six monks, in the case of re-opening a case. It is a general proscription, non-delegated; for one who is doubtful about a dhammakamma, or who perceives an unlawful action as a dhammakamma, or is doubtful, there is a dukkaṭa. There is no offense for one who perceives both as unlawful actions, knowing that “The action was done unlawfully or by a faction or for one who is unfit for the action,” nor for an insane person, etc. The state of being settled according to the Dhamma, knowing, re-opening: these are the three factors involved here. The origination, etc., are similar to taking what is not given, but this is painful feeling.

Ukkoṭanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Sikkhāpada on Re-opening is Finished.

4. Duṭṭhullasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Sikkhāpada on Serious Offenses

duṭṭhullanti saṅghādisesaṃ adhippetaṃ, taṃ yena kenaci upāyena ñatvā paṭicchādentassa pācittiyaṃ. Sacepi ‘‘na dāni naṃ kassaci bhikkhuno ārocessāmī’’ti dhuraṃ nikkhipitvā pacchā āroceti, pācittiyaṃ, āpajjitvāva ārocessati. Sace pana evaṃ dhuraṃ nikkhipitvā paṭicchādanatthameva aññassa āroceti, sopi aññassāti etenupāyena samaṇasatampi āpajjatiyeva tāva, yāva koṭi na chijjati. Kathaṃ pana koṭi chijjati? Sace hi āpanno ekassa āroceti, sopi aññassa āroceti, so nivattitvā yenassa ārocitaṃ, tasseva āroceti, evaṃ tatiyena puggalena dutiyassa ārocite koṭi chinnā hoti.

Serious offense: A saṅghādisesa is intended; for one knowing it by whatever means and concealing it, there is a pācittiya. Even if, having set aside the responsibility, thinking, “I will not now tell any monk about him,” he afterwards tells, there is a pācittiya; he only tells after incurring (the offense). But if, having set aside the responsibility thus, he tells another just for the purpose of concealing (it), and he (tells) another, in this way, even a hundred monks incur just that offense until the end is cut off. But how is the end cut off? If, indeed, the offender tells one, and he tells another, if he turns back and tells the same one to whom it was told, thus, when the second is told by the third person, the end is cut off.

Sāvatthiyaṃ aññataraṃ bhikkhuṃ ārabbha duṭṭhullāpattipaṭicchādanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, asādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, duṭṭhullāya āpattiyā ādipade pācittiyaṃ, itaresu dvīsu dukkaṭaṃ, aduṭṭhullāya tikadukkaṭaṃ, anupasampannassa duṭṭhulle vā aduṭṭhulle vā ajjhācāre dukkaṭameva. ‘‘Saṅghassa bhaṇḍanādīni bhavissantī’’ti (pāci. 401) vā ‘‘ayaṃ kakkhaḷo pharuso jīvitantarāyaṃ vā brahmacariyantarāyaṃ vā karissatī’’ti vā anārocentassa, patirūpaṃ bhikkhuṃ apassato, na chādetukāmassa, ‘‘paññāyissati sakena kammenā’’ti anārocentassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Upasampannassa duṭṭhullāpattijānanaṃ, ‘‘paṭicchādetukāmatāya nārocessāmī’’ti dhuranikkhepoti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni samanubhāsanasaasānevāti.

It was proscribed in Sāvatthī regarding a certain monk, in the case of concealing a serious offense. It is a non-general proscription, non-delegated; for the initial offense of a duṭṭhulla, there is a pācittiya; for the other two, a dukkaṭa; for a non-duṭṭhulla, a tikadukkaṭa; for one not fully ordained, there is just a dukkaṭa for a duṭṭhulla or non-duṭṭhulla transgression. There is no offense for one not telling, thinking, “There will be quarrels, etc., in the Sangha” (pāci. 401), or “This one is harsh and rough, he will cause danger to life or danger to the spiritual life,” for one not seeing a suitable monk, not wishing to conceal it, or not telling, thinking, “It will become known by his own action,” nor for an insane person, etc. An ordained person knowing of a duṭṭhullāpatti, setting aside the responsibility, thinking, “I will not tell it for the purpose of concealing (it)”: these are the two factors involved here. The origination, etc., are similar to reporting a boundary.

Duṭṭhullasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Sikkhāpada on Serious Offenses is Finished.

5. Ūnavīsativassasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Sikkhāpada on Under Twenty Years

ūnavīsativassanti paṭisandhiggahaṇato paṭṭhāya aparipuṇṇavīsativassaṃ.Upasampādeyyāti upajjhāyo hutvā upasampādeyya.So ca puggalo anupasampannoti jānantenāpi ajānantenāpi upasampādito anupasampannova. Sace pana so dasavassaccayena aññaṃ upasampādeti, tañce muñcitvā gaṇo pūrati, sūpasampanno. Sopi yāva na jānāti, tāva tassa neva saggantarāyo na mokkhantarāyo, ñatvā pana puna upasampajjitabbaṃ.Te ca bhikkhū gārayhāti ṭhapetvā upajjhāyaṃ avasesā gārayhā honti, sabbe dukkaṭaṃ āpajjanti.Idaṃ tasmiṃ pācittiyanti yo pana upajjhāyo hutvā upasampādeti, tasmiṃyeva puggale idaṃ pācittiyaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tasmā yo ‘‘evaṃ upasampādessāmī’’ti gaṇaṃ vā ācariyaṃ vā pattaṃ vā cīvaraṃ vā pariyesati, sīmaṃ vā sammannati (pāci. 404), udakukkhepaṃ vā paricchindati, so etesu sabbakiccesu ñattiyā, dvīsu ca kammavācāsu dukkaṭāni āpajjitvā kammavācāpariyosāne pācittiyaṃ āpajjati.

Under twenty years: From the moment of conception up to (one’s) incomplete twentieth year. Should ordain: He should ordain as a preceptor. And that person is not ordained: Whether he knows or does not know, the one ordained is not ordained. But if he ordains another after ten years have passed, and if the assembly becomes full excluding him, he is well ordained. As long as he does not know, there is no obstacle to heaven or obstacle to liberation for him; but having known, he must be ordained again. And those monks are blameworthy: Excluding the preceptor, the remaining ones are blameworthy; all incur a dukkaṭa. In this, there is a pācittiya for him: This pācittiya should be understood as applying only to that person who ordains as preceptor. Therefore, one who seeks an assembly or a teacher or a bowl or a robe, thinking, “I will ordain thus,” or approves a boundary (pāci. 404), or determines the water for sprinkling, in all these activities, having incurred dukkaṭas with the proclamation and the two formal motions, incurs a pācittiya at the conclusion of the formal motion.

Rājagahe sambahule bhikkhū ārabbha ūnavīsativassaṃ upasampādanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, asādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, ūnavīsativasse vematikassa, paripuṇṇavīsativasse ūnakasaññino, vematikassa ca dukkaṭaṃ. Ubhayattha paripuṇṇasaññissa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Ūnavīsativassatā, ūnakasaññitā, upasampādananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāni, idaṃ pana paṇṇattivajjaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.

It was proscribed in Rājagaha regarding many monks, in the case of ordaining one under twenty years. It is a non-general proscription, non-delegated; for one who is doubtful about one under twenty years, or who perceives one fully twenty years old as underage, or is doubtful, there is a dukkaṭa. There is no offense for one who perceives both as fully aged, nor for an insane person, etc. Being under twenty years of age, perceiving as underage, ordaining: these are the three factors involved here. The origination, etc., are similar to taking what is not given, but this is an offense by prescription, threefold consciousness, threefold feeling.

Ūnavīsativassasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Sikkhāpada on Under Twenty Years is Finished.

6. Theyyasatthasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Sikkhāpada on Thieves

theyyasatthasaññino tassa theyyasatthabhāvaṃ ñatvā tena saddhiṃ saṃvidhāya gacchantassa saṃvidhāne ca gamane ca ovādavagge vuttanayena āpattivinicchayo veditabbo.

Knowing that he is in company with thieves, determining the application of offenses, in the manner stated in the chapter on instruction, should be understood for one who goes in agreement with him.

Sāvatthiyaṃ aññataraṃ bhikkhuṃ ārabbha theyyasatthena saddhiṃ saṃvidhāya ekaddhānamaggaṃ paṭipajjanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, manussesu asaṃvidahantesu sayameva saṃvidahitvā gacchantassa, theyyasatthe vematikassa, atheyyasatthe theyyasatthasaññino, vematikassa ca dukkaṭaṃ. Atheyyasatthasaññissa, asaṃvidahitvā vā kālavisaṅketena vā, āpadāsu vā, gacchantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Theyyasatthabhāvo, jānanaṃ, saṃvidhānaṃ, avisaṅketena gamananti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Theyyasatthasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.

It was proscribed in Sāvatthī regarding a certain monk, in the case of undertaking a long journey in agreement with thieves. It is a general proscription, non-delegated; for one who goes having made an agreement himself, when (others) have not made an agreement among the people, for one who is doubtful about thieves, or who perceives non-thieves as thieves, or is doubtful, there is a dukkaṭa. There is no offense for one who perceives non-thieves as such, or who goes without agreement or with a signal of time, or in times of danger, nor for an insane person, etc. The state of being thieves, knowing, agreement, going without a signal: these are the four factors involved here. Origination from thieves, volitional action, release by perception, intentional, an offense by prescription, bodily action, verbal action, threefold consciousness, threefold feeling.

Theyyasatthasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Sikkhāpada on Thieves is Finished.

7. Saṃvidhānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Sikkhāpada on Agreement

Sattame sāvatthiyaṃ aññataraṃ bhikkhuṃ ārabbha mātugāmena saddhiṃ ekaddhānamaggaṃ paṭipajjanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sesamettha bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ saṃvidhānasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva veditabbanti.

In the seventh, it was proscribed in Sāvatthī regarding a certain monk, in the case of undertaking a long journey in agreement with a woman. The remainder here should be understood in the manner stated in the sikkhāpada on agreement with a nun.

Saṃvidhānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Sikkhāpada on Agreement is Finished.

8. Ariṭṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Ariṭṭha Sikkhāpada

antarāyikā,te kammakilesavipākaupavādapaññattivītikkamanavasena pañcavidhā. Tesu mudukānaṃ attharaṇādīnaṃ phasso viya itthisamphassopi vaṭṭatīti methunavītikkamane dosaṃ adisvā paññattivītikkamantarāyike sandhāya ‘‘yeme antarāyikā dhammā vuttā bhagavatā, te paṭisevato nālaṃ antarāyāyā’’ti vuttaṃ.Anekapariyāyenāti ‘‘aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamā kāmā’’tiādīhi (ma. ni. 2.42; pāci. 417; cūḷani. khaggavisāṇasuttaniddesa 147) nekehi kāraṇehi.So bhikkhu bhikkhūhīti ye passanti vā suṇanti vā, tehi tikkhattuṃ evaṃ vattabbo ‘‘mā āyasmā evaṃ avaca…pe… alañca pana te paṭisevato antarāyāyā’’ti. Evaṃ vutte appaṭinissajjantassa dukkaṭaṃ, sutvā avadantānampi dukkaṭaṃ. Puna saṅghamajjhampi ākaḍḍhitvā tatheva vattabbo, tatrāpi tassa appaṭinissajjane, itaresañca avacane dukkaṭameva. Evampi appaṭinissajjanto puna ñatticatutthena kammena yāvatatiyaṃ samanubhāsitabbo, athassa appaṭinissajjato puna ñattiyā ca dvīhi ca kammavācāhi dukkaṭaṃ, kammavācāpariyosāne pācittiyaṃ.

antarāyikā: These are fivefold, based on the transgression of the act, defilement of action, result of action, accusation, and precept. Among these, even physical contact with a woman, like touching something spread out, is permissible, therefore, not seeing fault in transgressing sexual intercourse, and in reference to the obstacle consisting of the transgression of a precept, it was said, "These things declared by the Blessed One as obstacles are not enough of an obstacle for one who indulges in them." Anekapariyāyena: In many ways, meaning with several reasons, such as "Desires are like a skeleton," etc. (ma. ni. 2.42; pāci. 417; cūḷani. Khaggavisāṇasuttaniddesa 147). So bhikkhu bhikkhūhi: That monk should be addressed three times by those who see or hear, "May the venerable one not speak thus...indeed, it is enough of an obstacle for one who indulges in them." If, when spoken to thus, he does not relinquish (the view), there is a dukkaṭa; also, for those who hear and do not speak, there is a dukkaṭa. Again, having brought (him) into the midst of the Saṅgha, he should be addressed in the same way. Even there, if he does not relinquish (the view) and the others do not speak, it is still a dukkaṭa. Even if he does not relinquish in this way, he should be formally admonished up to three times with a ñatticatuttha-kamma. If, even then, he does not relinquish, there is a dukkaṭa for each of the ñatti and the two kammavācā, and a pācittiya at the conclusion of the kammavācā.

Sāvatthiyaṃ ariṭṭhaṃ ārabbha pāpikāya diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissajjanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, adhammakamme tikadukkaṭaṃ. Asamanubhāsiyamānassa, paṭinissajjantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Dhammakammatā, samanubhāsanā, appaṭinissajjananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni samanubhāsanasadisānevāti.

It was established in Sāvatthī concerning Ariṭṭha, regarding the non-relinquishment of a sinful view. It is a general precept, not commanded, a tika-pācittiya; in an unlawful act, a tika-dukkaṭa. There is no offense for one not being admonished, for one who relinquishes (the view), and for the insane, etc. Being a lawful act, admonishment, and non-relinquishment are the three factors here. The originations, etc., are similar to those of admonishment.

Ariṭṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Ariṭṭha Training Rule is concluded.

9. Ukkhittasambhogasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Commentary on the Training Rule on Association with the Suspended

tathāvādināti ‘‘tathāhaṃ bhagavatā dhamma’’ntiādivādinā.Akatānudhammenāti anudhammo vuccati āpattiyā adassane vā appaṭikamme vā pāpikāya diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissagge vā dhammena vinayena ukkhittakassa anulomavattaṃ disvā kataosāraṇā, so osāraṇasaṅkhāto anudhammo yassa na kato, ayaṃ akatānudhammo nāma, tādisena saddhinti attho.Sambhuñjeyya vāti āmisasambhogaṃ vā dhammasambhogaṃ vā kareyya.Saṃvaseyya vāti uposathādikaṃ saṅghakammaṃ kareyya.Saha vā seyyaṃ kappeyyāti nānūpacārepi ekacchanne nipajjeyya. Tattha āmisaparibhoge ekappayogena bahūpi dadato vā gaṇhato vā ekaṃ pācittiyaṃ, vicchindane sati payoge payoge pācittiyaṃ. Dhammasambhoge padādīhi uddisantassa vā uddisāpentassa vā padasodhamme vuttanayena, saṃvāse kammapariyosānavasena, sahaseyyāya ekasmiṃ nipanne itarassa nipajjanappayogavasena āpattiparicchedo veditabbo.

tathāvādinā: By one who speaks thus, "Thus have I understood the Dhamma from the Blessed One," etc. Akatānudhammena: Anudhamma is said to be the observance of practices in accordance with the Dhamma and the Vinaya for one who has been suspended by the Dhamma and Vinaya for not seeing an offense, not making amends, or not relinquishing a sinful view, after seeing conduct befitting such a suspended monk. One for whom that anudhamma consisting of reinstatement has not been done is called akatānudhamma. This means association with such a one. Sambhuñjeyya vā: Should partake of material things or share in Dhamma. Saṃvaseyya vā: Should perform Saṅgha actions like the Uposatha, etc. Saha vā seyyaṃ kappeyyā: Should lie down under the same roof even without proper space between. Here, regarding the use of material things, giving or taking much in a single effort constitutes one pācittiya; if there is interruption, a pācittiya for each effort. Regarding sharing in the Dhamma, when reciting the words, etc., in the manner stated in the explanation of the individual words; regarding dwelling together, according to the conclusion of the kamma; regarding sleeping together, the determination of offense should be understood as based on the effort of the other lying down after one has already lain down.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye ārabbha ariṭṭhena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ sambhuñjanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, ukkhittake vematikassa, anukkhittake ukkhittakasaññino ceva vematikassa ca dukkaṭaṃ. Ubhosu anukkhittakasaññissa, ‘‘osārito’’ti vā ‘‘taṃ diṭṭhiṃ paṭinissaṭṭho’’ti vā jānantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Akatānudhammatā, jānanā, sambhogādikaraṇanti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāni, idaṃ pana paṇṇattivajjaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.

It was established in Sāvatthī concerning the group of six, regarding the matter of associating with the monk Ariṭṭha. It is a general precept, not commanded; for one who is doubtful about the suspended monk, and for one who perceives a non-suspended monk as suspended, as well as for one who is doubtful, there is a dukkaṭa. There is no offense for one who perceives both as non-suspended, for one who knows that he has been reinstated or that he has relinquished that view, and for the insane, etc. Being one for whom anudhamma has not been done, knowing (him to be suspended), and engaging in association, etc., are the three factors here. The originations, etc., are similar to those of theft, but this is an offense by regulation, ticitta, tivedana.

Ukkhittasambhogasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Training Rule on Association with the Suspended is concluded.

10. Kaṇṭakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. The Kaṇṭaka Training Rule

samaṇuddesoti sāmaṇero.Carāti gaccha.Pireti para amāmaka.Vinassāti nassa, yattha taṃ na passāma, tattha gacchāti vuttaṃ hoti.Tathānāsitantiettha saṃvāsanāsanā liṅganāsanā daṇḍakammanāsanāti tisso nāsanā. Tattha āpattiyā adassanādīsu ukkhepanāsaṃvāsanāsanānāma. Dūsako nāsetabbo (pārā. 66), mettiyaṃ bhikkhuniṃ nāsethāti (cūḷava. 193; pārā. 384) ayaṃliṅganāsanānāma. ‘‘Ajjatagge te, āvuso samaṇuddesa, na ceva so bhagavā satthā apadisitabbo’’ti (pāci. 429) ayaṃdaṇḍakammanāsanānāma, ayaṃ idhādhippetā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tathānāsita’’nti.Upalāpeyyāti ‘‘pattaṃ vā cīvaraṃ vā uddesaṃ vā paripucchaṃ vā dassāmī’’ti saṅgaṇheyya.Upaṭṭhāpeyyāti cuṇṇamattikādīni sādiyanto tena attano upaṭṭhānaṃ kārāpeyya. Sambhogasahaseyyā anantarasikkhāpade vuttanayā eva, tasmā āpattiparicchedopettha tasmiṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbo.

samaṇuddeso: A novice. Carā: Go. Pire: Another, not mine. Vinassā: Be lost; it means it is said that, go where we do not see him. Tathānāsita: Here, there are three expulsions: expulsion from association, expulsion of insignia, and expulsion by disciplinary action. Among these, expulsion due to suspension for not seeing an offense, etc., is called saṃvāsanāsanā. A corrupter is to be expelled (pārā. 66), Mettiya should expel the bhikkhunī (cūḷava. 193; pārā. 384); this is called liṅganāsanā. "From today, friend novice, neither should that Blessed One be designated as your teacher" (pāci. 429); this is called daṇḍakammanāsanā; this is what is intended here. Therefore, it is said, "tathānāsita". Upalāpeyya: Should entice, meaning should win over by saying, "I will give you a bowl or a robe, or instruction, or questioning". Upaṭṭhāpeyya: Should have his attendance done by him, enjoying powder, earth, and the like. Association and sleeping together have been stated in the preceding training rule, therefore, the determination of offense here should be understood in the manner stated there.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye bhikkhū ārabbha kaṇṭakasamaṇuddesaupalāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sesaṃ ariṭṭhasikkhāpade vuttasadisamevāti.

It was established in Sāvatthī concerning the group-of-six monks, regarding the matter of enticing the novice Kaṇṭaka. The rest is similar to what was said in the Ariṭṭha Training Rule.

Kaṇṭakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Kaṇṭaka Training Rule is concluded.

Sappāṇakavaggo sattamo.

The Seventh Chapter, Sappāṇakavagga, is concluded.

8. Sahadhammikavaggo

8. Sahadhammikavagga

1. Sahadhammikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Commentary on the Sahadhammika Training Rule

sahadhammikaṃ vuccamānoti imassattho dubbacasikkhāpade vutto.Etasmiṃ sikkhāpadeti etasmiṃ sikkhāpade yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ na tāva sikkhissāmīti attho.Pācittiyanti ettha pana anādariyabhayā lesena evaṃ vadantassa vācāya vācāya pācittiyaṃ veditabbaṃ.Sikkhamānenāti ovādaṃ sirasā sampaṭicchitvā sikkhitukāmeneva hutvā.Aññātabbanti ājānitabbaṃ.Paripucchitabbanti ‘‘imassa ko attho’’ti paripucchitabbaṃ.Paripañhitabbanti cintetabbaṃ tulayitabbaṃ.

sahadhammikaṃ vuccamāno: The meaning of this was stated in the Dubbacasikkhāpada. Etasmiṃ sikkhāpade: The meaning is, "What is stated in this training rule, I will not learn that now." Pācittiya: Here, however, a pācittiya should be understood for each utterance of one who speaks thus out of disrespect or deceptively. Sikkhamānena: By one who is learning, having respectfully accepted the advice with his head, being truly desirous of learning. Aññātabbaṃ: Should be known. Paripucchitabbaṃ: Should be asked, "What is the meaning of this?". Paripañhitabbaṃ: Should be pondered and weighed.

Kosambiyaṃ channattheraṃ ārabbha evaṃ bhaṇanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, anupasampanne tikadukkaṭaṃ, ubhohipi ‘‘idaṃ na sallekhāyā’’tiādinā (pāci. 436) nayeneva appaññattena vuccamānassāpi evaṃ vadato dukkaṭameva. ‘‘Jānissāmi sikkhissāmī’’ti bhaṇantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Upasampannassa paññattena vacanaṃ, asikkhitukāmatāya evaṃ vacananti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāni, idaṃ pana dukkhavedananti.

It was established in Kosambī concerning the Elder Channa, regarding the matter of speaking thus. It is a general precept, not commanded, a tika-pācittiya; for one not fully ordained, a tika-dukkaṭa; for both, if speaking thus regarding something not prescribed in the same way as "This is not conducive to expunging," etc. (pāci. 436), there is a dukkaṭa. There is no offense for one who says, "I will know, I will learn," and for the insane, etc. Speaking about what has been prescribed for a fully ordained monk, and speaking thus with no desire to learn, are the two factors here. The originations, etc., are similar to those of theft, but this is an experience of pain.

Sahadhammikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Sahadhammika Training Rule is concluded.

2. Vilekhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. The Vilekhana Training Rule

uddissamāneti ācariyena antevāsikassa vuccamāne vā sajjhāyavasena parivattiyamāne vā.Khuddānukhuddakehīti khuddakehi ca anukhuddakehi ca.Yāvadevāti tesaṃ saṃvattanamariyādaparicchedavacanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – etāni hi ye uddisanti vā uddisāpenti vā sajjhāyanti vā, tesaṃ tāva saṃvattanti, yāva ‘‘kappati nu kho, na kappati nu kho’’ti kukkuccavippaṭisāro, vihesā, vicikicchā manovilekhā ca uppajjantiyeva. Atha vāyāvadevāti atisayavavatthāpanaṃ. Tassa ‘saṃvattantī’tiiminā sambandho, kukkuccāya vihesāya vilekhāya ativiya saṃvattantiyevāti vuttaṃ hoti.Sikkhāpadavivaṇṇaketi evaṃ sikkhāpadānaṃ vivaṇṇake garahaṇe pācittiyaṃ hotīti attho.

uddissamāne: When being recited by the teacher to the student, or when being repeated in the manner of recitation. Khuddānukhuddakehi: By the minor and sub-minor (rules). Yāvadeva: A statement of the limit of what they lead to. This is what is said: for those who recite or cause to be recited or repeat these, they lead to scrupulousness, remorse, vexation, doubt, and mental disturbance, which arise even up to the point of "Is this allowable? Is this not allowable?". Alternatively, yāvadeva is a determination of excess. Its connection is with "saṃvattanti", meaning it is said that they lead very much to scrupulousness, vexation, and disturbance. Sikkhāpadavivaṇṇake: The meaning is that in this way, there is a pācittiya for criticizing and disparaging the training rules.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye ārabbha vinayavivaṇṇanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, anupasampannassa vivaṇṇane tikadukkaṭaṃ, ubhinnampi aññadhammavivaṇṇane dukkaṭameva. Na vivaṇṇetukāmassa, ‘‘iṅgha tāva suttante vā gāthāyo vā abhidhammaṃ vā pariyāpuṇassu, pacchāpi vinayaṃ pariyāpuṇissasī’’ti bhaṇato, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Garahitukāmatā ca, upasampannassa santike sikkhāpadavivaṇṇanañcāti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāni, idaṃ pana dukkhavedananti.

It was established in Sāvatthī concerning the group of six, regarding the matter of disparaging the Vinaya. It is a general precept, not commanded, a tika-pācittiya; for one not fully ordained, there is a tika-dukkaṭa for disparaging; for both, there is a dukkaṭa for disparaging another Dhamma. There is no offense for one who does not intend to disparage, for one who says, "Come, first learn the Suttantas or the verses or the Abhidhamma, afterwards you can learn the Vinaya," and for the insane, etc. Intent to disparage, and disparaging a training rule in the presence of a fully ordained monk, are the two factors here. The originations, etc., are similar to those of theft, but this is an experience of pain.

Vilekhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Vilekhana Training Rule is concluded.

3. Mohanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. The Mohana Training Rule

anvaḍḍhamāsanti anupaṭipāṭiyā addhamāse addhamāse.Uddissamāneti uposathavasena uddisiyamāne.Yañca tattha āpattiṃ āpannoti yaṃ so anācāraṃ ācaritvā aññāṇakena āpannabhāvaṃ jānāpetukāmo evamāha, tasmiṃ anācāre yaṃ āpattiṃ āpanno.Tañca yathādhammo kāretabboti aññāṇakena āpannattā mokkho natthi, yathā pana dhammo ca vinayo ca ṭhito, tathā taṃ āpattiṃ kāretabbo, desanāgāminiyā desāpetabbo, vuṭṭhānagāminiyā vuṭṭhāpetabboti attho.Uttari cassa moho āropetabboti yathādhammakaraṇato ca uttari ‘‘tassa te, āvuso’’tiādivacanehi ninditvā tassa puggalassa ñattidutiyakammena moho āropetabbo.Idaṃ tasmiṃ mohanake pācittiyanti yo evaṃ āropite mohe puna moheti, tasmiṃ mohanake puggale idaṃ pācittiyaṃ veditabbaṃ, na anāropite moheti attho.

anvaḍḍhamāsa: Every half-month in sequence. Uddissamāne: When being recited in the manner of the Uposatha. Yañca tattha āpattiṃ āpanno: The offense which he has incurred there, the āpatti which he has incurred in that misconduct, since he, acting unseemly, wishes to make known that he has incurred an offense out of ignorance. Tañca yathādhammo kāretabbo: Since there is no release due to having incurred the offense out of ignorance, that offense should be dealt with according to what is in accordance with the Dhamma and the Vinaya; he should be made to confess by that which leads to confession, he should be made to emerge by that which leads to emergence. Uttari cassa moho āropetabbo: And further, beyond acting according to the Dhamma, blame should be cast on that individual by saying, "For you, friend," etc., and confusion should be imposed on that person by means of a ñattidutiyakamma. Idaṃ tasmiṃ mohanake pācittiya: This pācittiya should be understood as applying to that individual who causes confusion after confusion has been imposed in this way, not to one who causes confusion when confusion has not been imposed.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye ārabbha mohanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, adhammakamme tikadukkaṭaṃ, anāropite mohe dukkaṭameva. Yena na vitthārena sutaṃ, ūnakadvattikkhattuṃ vā vitthārena sutaṃ, ye ca na mohetukāmā tesaṃ, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Mohāropanaṃ, mohetukāmatā, vuttanayena sutabhāvo, mohananti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāni, idaṃ pana dukkhavedananti.

It was established in Sāvatthī concerning the group of six, regarding the matter of causing confusion. It is a general precept, not commanded, a tika-pācittiya; in an unlawful act, a tika-dukkaṭa; there is a dukkaṭa for causing confusion when confusion has not been imposed. There is no offense for those who have not heard it in detail, or who have heard it in detail less than twice or thrice, or who do not intend to cause confusion, and for the insane, etc. Imposition of confusion, intent to cause confusion, having heard as stated, and confusion are the four factors here. The originations, etc., are similar to those of theft, but this is an experience of pain.

Mohanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Mohana Training Rule is concluded.

4. Pahārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. The Pahāra Training Rule

pahāraṃ dadeyyāti ettha paharitukāmatāya pahāre dinne sacepi marati, pācittiyameva.

pahāraṃ dadeyyā: Here, if a blow is given with the intention of striking, even if (the victim) dies, it is only a pācittiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye ārabbha pahāradānavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, anupasampanne tikadukkaṭaṃ, virūpakaraṇādhippāyena pana upasampannassapi kaṇṇādicchedane dukkaṭameva. Kenaci viheṭhiyamānassa pana mokkhādhippāyassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Kupitatā, na mokkhādhippāyatā, upasampannassa pahāradānanti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamapārājikasadisāni, idaṃ pana dukkhavedananti.

It was established in Sāvatthī concerning the group of six, regarding the matter of giving a blow. It is a general precept, not commanded, a tika-pācittiya; for one not fully ordained, a tika-dukkaṭa; but for a fully ordained monk, even with the intention of disfiguring, cutting off an ear, etc., there is only a dukkaṭa. However, there is no offense for one who intends to escape when being harassed by someone, and for the insane, etc. Being angry, not intending to escape, and giving a blow to a fully ordained monk are the three factors here. The originations, etc., are similar to those of the first pārājika, but this is an experience of pain.

Pahārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Pahāra Training Rule is concluded.

5. Talasattikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. The Talasattika Training Rule

talasattikaṃ uggireyyāti pahāradānākāraṃ dassento kāyaṃ vā kāyappaṭibaddhaṃ vā uccāreyya. Ettha ca uggiraṇapaccayā pācittiyaṃ. Sace pana uggiritvā viraddho pahāraṃ deti, na paharitukāmatāya dinnattā dukkaṭameva, tena pahārena hatthādīsu yaṃkiñci bhijjati, dukkaṭameva. Sesamettha sabbaṃ purimasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva veditabbanti.

talasattikaṃ uggireyyā: Should make a gesture of striking, should raise a hand or something connected to the body. Here, there is a pācittiya due to the gesture. But if, having made the gesture, he then gives a blow out of anger, there is only a dukkaṭa because it was not given with the intention of striking. If anything is broken on the hands, etc., due to that blow, there is only a dukkaṭa. The rest here should all be understood in the manner stated in the previous training rule.

Talasattikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Talasattika Training Rule is concluded.

6. Amūlakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. The Amūlaka Training Rule

amūlakenāti diṭṭhādimūlavirahitena.Anuddhaṃseyyāti codeyya vā codāpeyya vā.Pācittiyanti sace cuditako taṅkhaṇaññeva ‘‘codeti ma’’nti jānāti, codakassa pācittiyaṃ.

amūlakena: Without a basis of seeing, etc. Anuddhaṃseyyā: Should accuse or cause to be accused. Pācittiya: If the accused knows at that very moment that he is being accused, there is a pācittiya for the accuser.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye ārabbha amūlakena saṅghādisesena anuddhaṃsanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, sāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, ācāravipattiyā vā diṭṭhivipattiyā vā anuddhaṃsane dukkaṭaṃ, anupasampanne tikadukkaṭaṃ. Tathāsaññissa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Upasampannatā, saṅghādisesassa amūlakatā, anuddhaṃsanā, taṅkhaṇavijānanāti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāni, idaṃ pana dukkhavedananti.

It was established in Sāvatthī concerning the group of six, regarding the matter of accusing of a groundless Saṅghādisesa offense. It is a general precept, commanded, a tika-pācittiya; there is a dukkaṭa for accusing of a transgression of conduct or a transgression of view; for one not fully ordained, a tika-dukkaṭa. There is no offense for one who perceives it as true, and for the insane, etc. Being fully ordained, the groundlessness of the Saṅghādisesa, the accusation, and the knowing at that very moment are the four factors here. The originations, etc., are similar to those of theft, but this is an experience of pain.

Amūlakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Amūlaka Training Rule is concluded.

7. Sañciccasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. The Sañcicca Training Rule

kukkuccaṃ upadaheyyāti ‘‘ūnavīsativasso tvaṃ maññe’’tiādīni (pāci. 466) bhaṇanto uppādeyya. Evaṃ aññasmiṃ uppādanapaccaye asati sañcicca uppādentassa vācāya vācāya pācittiyaṃ.

kukkuccaṃ upadaheyyā: Should create scrupulousness by saying, "I think you are less than twenty years old," etc. (pāci. 466). Thus, if, in the absence of another cause for its arising, he intentionally creates it, there is a pācittiya for each utterance.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye ārabbha kukkuccauppādanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, anupasampanne tikadukkaṭaṃ. Nauppādetukāmassa, kevalaṃ hitesitāya tathā vadantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Upasampannatā, aphāsukāmatā, kukkuccuppādananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni anantarasadisānevāti.

This was prescribed at Sāvatthī, concerning the Group of Six monks, in the situation of causing scruples, it is a general rule, not commanded, a triple pācittiya, and for one not fully ordained, a triple dukkata. There is no offense for one who does not intend to cause scruples, but speaks thus solely out of a desire for their welfare, or for an insane person, etc. Being fully ordained, desiring discomfort, and causing scruples, these are the three factors involved here. The origin, etc., are similar to the preceding.

Sañciccasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Sañcicca Sikkhāpada is complete.

8. Upassutisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Upassuti Sikkhāpada

vivādāpannānanti bhaṇḍanakalahehi vivaḍḍhitaṃ vivādādhikaraṇaṃ āpannānaṃ.Upassutinti sutisamīpaṃ, yattha ṭhatvā sakkā hoti tesaṃ vacanaṃ sotuṃ, tattha tiṭṭheyyāti attho. ‘‘Tattha sossāmī’’ti codetukāmatāya gacchato pade pade dukkaṭaṃ, turitagamanepi ohīyamānepi eseva nayo. Yattha pana ṭhito suṇāti, tattha ṭhitassa pācittiyaṃ, attano ṭhitokāsaṃ āgantvā tesu mantayamānesupi ukkāsitvā, ‘‘ahaṃ etthā’’ti vā vatvā jānāpetabbaṃ, evaṃ akarontassāpi savane pācittiyameva.

vivādāpannānaṃ: to those who have entered into a dispute that has escalated into quarrels and contentions, those who have entered into a dispute-adjudication. Upassuti: near the sound; the meaning is that one should stand where it is possible to hear their speech. For one who goes intending to accuse them, thinking, "I will listen there," there is a dukkata for each step; even if going quickly, or while backing away, the same principle applies. But if one stands where one hears, there is a pācittiya for the one standing there. Even if they come to the place where one is standing and confer, one should clear one's throat or say, "I am here," and make it known. Even if one does not do so, merely hearing it is a pācittiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye ārabbha upassutiṭṭhānavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, anupasampanne tikadukkaṭaṃ, ‘‘imesaṃ sutvā oramissāmi viramissāmi vūpasamissāmi attānaṃ parimocessāmī’’ti (pāci. 473) gacchato, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Upasampannatā, codanādhippāyo, savananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Theyyasatthasamuṭṭhānaṃ idaṃ pana siyā kiriyaṃ, siyā akiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.

This was prescribed at Sāvatthī, concerning the Group of Six monks, in the situation of standing to eavesdrop; it is a general rule, not commanded, a triple pācittiya, and for one not fully ordained, a triple dukkata. There is no offense for one who goes thinking, "Having heard these, I will desist, abstain, and refrain, and free myself" (pāci. 473), or for an insane person, etc. Being fully ordained, having the intention to accuse, and hearing, these are the three factors involved here. Its origin is from theft; however, this may be an action or non-action, involving release from perception, intentional, a world offense, a bodily action, a verbal action, unwholesome intention, and painful feeling.

Upassutisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Upassuti Sikkhāpada is complete.

9. Kammappaṭibāhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Kammappaṭibāhana Sikkhāpada

dhammikānaṃ kammānanti dhammena vinayena satthusāsanena katānaṃ apalokanakammaṃ ñattikammaṃ ñattidutiyakammaṃ ñatticatutthakammanti imesaṃ catunnaṃ kammānaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepato kammavinicchayo – tatraapalokanakammaṃnāma samaggassa saṅghassa anumatiyā taṃ taṃ vatthuṃ kittetvā ‘‘ruccati saṅghassā’’ti tikkhattuṃ sāvetvā kattabbaṃ kammaṃ vuccati. Samaggasseva pana saṅghassa anumatiyā ekāya ñattiyā kattabbaṃ kammaṃñattikammaṃnāma. Ekāya ñattiyā ceva anussāvanāya ca kattabbaṃ kammaṃñattidutiyakammaṃnāma. Ekāya pana ñattiyā tīhi ca anussāvanāhi kattabbaṃ kammaṃñatticatutthakammaṃnāma.

dhammikānaṃ kammānaṃ: Concerning lawful kammas performed according to the Dhamma, the Vinaya, and the Teacher’s instructions; that is, the four kammas of apalokanakamma, ñattikamma, ñattidutiyakamma, and ñatticatutthakamma. Here is a summary determination of those kammas: Among them, apalokanakamma means a kamma to be performed after announcing each item and having it proclaimed three times, "The Sangha approves," with the consent of the entire Sangha. Ñattikamma is a kamma to be performed with a single motion, with the consent of the entire Sangha. Ñattidutiyakamma is a kamma to be performed with one motion and one announcement. Ñatticatutthakamma is a kamma to be performed with one motion and three announcements.

nissāraṇā,tādisaṃyeva sammāvattantaṃ disvā pavesanā‘osāraṇā’ti veditabbā. Pabbajjāpekkhassa kesacchedanāpucchanaṃbhaṇḍukammaṃ(mahāva. 98) nāma. Mukharassa bhikkhuno bhikkhū duruttavacanehi ghaṭṭentassa ‘‘itthannāmo bhikkhu mukharo bhikkhū duruttavacanehi ghaṭṭento viharati, so bhikkhu yaṃ iccheyya, taṃ vadeyya, bhikkhūhi itthannāmo bhikkhu neva vattabbo, na ovādānusāsaniṃ kattabbo, na ovaditabbo’’ti ‘‘saṅghaṃ, bhante, pucchāmi ‘itthannāmassa bhikkhuno brahmadaṇḍassa dānaṃ ruccati saṅghassā’ti, dutiyampi pucchāmi, tatiyampi pucchāmi ‘itthannāmassa, bhante, bhikkhuno brahmadaṇḍassa dānaṃ ruccati saṅghassā’’’ti evaṃ kattabbaṃ kammaṃbrahmadaṇḍaṃ(cūḷava. 445) nāma. Yaṃ pana bhagavatā bhikkhunīnaṃ ūruṃ vivaritvā dassanādivatthūsu ‘‘avandiyo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bhikkhunisaṅghena kātabbo’’ti (cūḷava. 411) evaṃ avandiyakammaṃ anuññātaṃ, yaṃ bhikkhunīhi ‘‘ayye, asuko nāma ayyo bhikkhunīnaṃ appasādanīyaṃ dasseti, etassa ayyassa avandiyakaraṇaṃ ‘ruccati bhikkhunisaṅghassā’’’ti evaṃ upassaye nisinnāheva bhikkhunīhi kattabbaṃ, evarūpaṃ kammaṃ yasmā tassa kammaṃyeva lakkhaṇaṃ na osāraṇādīni, tasmākammalakkhaṇanti vuccati. Idañca kammalakkhaṇaṃ nāma bhikkhunimūlakaṃ paññattaṃ, apica bhikkhūnampi labbhati, tasmā bhikkhūhipi acchinnacīvarakādīnaṃ cīvarādīni vā dentehi, paribhuñjitabbāni apanetabbānipi vatthūni paribhuñjantehi vā, apanentehi vā, tathārūpaṃ vā dhammikaṃ katikaṃ karontehi tikkhattuṃ sāvetvā apalokanakammaṃ kātabbaṃ, sabbañhetaṃ kammalakkhaṇameva pavisati, iti apalokanakammaṃ pañca ṭhānāni gacchati.

nissāraṇā, Expulsion; the act of causing to enter again after seeing him behaving properly is known as ‘osāraṇā’. The questioning about cutting the hair of one seeking ordination is called bhaṇḍukamma (mahāva. 98). The kamma to be done to a bhikkhu who is talkative, harassing other bhikkhus with harsh words is as follows: "The bhikkhu named so-and-so is talkative, living harassing bhikkhus with harsh words. Let that bhikkhu say whatever he likes; that bhikkhu should not be spoken to by the bhikkhus, nor given instruction or advice, nor should he be admonished." Then, "Venerable sirs, I ask the Sangha, 'Does the Sangha approve the giving of the brahmadaṇḍa to the bhikkhu named so-and-so?' I ask a second time. I ask a third time, 'Venerable sirs, does the Sangha approve the giving of the brahmadaṇḍa to the bhikkhu named so-and-so?'" This is called brahmadaṇḍa (cūḷava. 445). The avandiyakamma that the Blessed One allowed concerning the showing of the genitals to bhikkhunis, etc., saying, "That bhikkhu, bhikkhus, is to be made 'unvenerable' by the Bhikkhuni Sangha" (cūḷava. 411), and that which the bhikkhunis do, saying, "Venerable sirs, the bhikkhu named so-and-so shows what is displeasing to the bhikkhunis; does the Bhikkhuni Sangha approve the doing of 'unvenerable' to this venerable sir?" while seated in the upassaya, such a kamma is called kammalakkhaṇa because that kamma itself is the characteristic, not osāraṇā, etc. This kammalakkhaṇa is prescribed based on the bhikkhunis, but it is also available to the bhikkhus. Therefore, even when bhikkhus are giving robes, etc., to those whose robes have been torn off, or when those things which should be used up or removed are being used up or removed, or when making such a lawful agreement, an apalokanakamma should be done after proclaiming it three times; all of this falls under the kammalakkhaṇa. Thus, apalokanakamma goes to five places.

osāraṇānāma. ‘‘Suṇantu me āyasmantā, ayaṃ itthannāmo bhikkhu dhammakathiko, imassa neva suttaṃ āgacchati, no suttavibhaṅgo, so atthaṃ asallakkhetvā byañjanacchāyāya atthaṃ paṭibāhati, yadāyasmantānaṃ pattakallaṃ, itthannāmaṃ bhikkhuṃ vuṭṭhāpetvā avasesā imaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasameyyāmā’’ti evaṃ ubbhāhikavinicchaye (cūḷava. 233) dhammakathikassa bhikkhuno nissāraṇānissāraṇānāma. ‘‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho, ajjuposatho…pe… uposathaṃ kareyyā’’ti evaṃ uposathakammavasena ṭhapitā ñattiuposathonāma. ‘‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho, ajja pavāraṇā pannarasī, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho pavāreyyā’’ti (mahāva. 210) evaṃ pavāraṇākammavasena ṭhapitā ñattipavāraṇānāma. ‘‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho, itthannāmo itthannāmassa upasampadāpekkho, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, ahaṃ itthannāmaṃ anusāseyya’’nti, ‘‘yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, itthannāmo itthannāmaṃ anusāseyyā’’ti (mahāva. 126) evaṃ attānaṃ vā paraṃ vā sammannituṃ ṭhapitā ñattisammutināma. ‘‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho, imaṃ cīvaraṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno nissaggiyaṃ saṅghassa nissaṭṭhaṃ, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho imaṃ cīvaraṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno dadeyyā’’ti (pārā. 464) evaṃ nissaṭṭhacīvarapattādīnaṃ dānaṃdānaṃnāma. ‘‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho, ayaṃ itthannāmo bhikkhu āpattiṃ sarati vivarati uttāniṃ karoti deseti, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, ahaṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno āpattiṃ paṭiggaṇheyya’’nti, tena vattabbo ‘passasī’ti, ‘āma, passāmī’ti, ‘‘āyatiṃ saṃvareyyāsī’’ti (cūḷava. 239) evaṃ āpattippaṭiggahopaṭiggahonāma. ‘‘Suṇantu me āyasmantā āvāsikā, yadāyasmantānaṃ pattakallaṃ, idāni uposathaṃ kareyyāma, pātimokkhaṃ uddiseyyāma, āgame kāle pavāreyyāmā’’ti (mahāva. 240) evaṃ katappavāraṇappaccukkaḍḍhanāpaccukkaḍḍhanānāma. Tiṇavattārakasamathe (cūḷava. 212) sabbasaṅgāhikañatti, ekekasmiṃ pakkhe ekekā ñatti cāti tissopi ñattiyokammalakkhaṇaṃnāma. Iti ñattikammaṃ nava ṭhānāni gacchati.

osāraṇā means readmission. The natti that is established in the context of the uposatha kamma, saying, "Venerable sirs, may the Sangha hear me. Today is the uposatha…" etc., "…may perform the uposatha," is called uposatho. The natti that is established in the context of the pavāraṇā kamma, saying, "Venerable sirs, may the Sangha hear me. Today is the fifteenth pavāraṇā; if it is the Sangha's pleasure, may the Sangha perform pavāraṇā" (mahāva. 210), is called pavāraṇā. The natti that is established for the purpose of being appointed, oneself or another, saying, "Venerable sirs, may the Sangha hear me. The bhikkhu named so-and-so is seeking full ordination from the bhikkhu named so-and-so; if it is the Sangha's pleasure, I would instruct the bhikkhu named so-and-so," or, "If it is the Sangha's pleasure, the bhikkhu named so-and-so would instruct the bhikkhu named so-and-so" (mahāva. 126), is called sammuti. The giving of robes, bowls, etc., that have been forfeited, saying, "Venerable sirs, may the Sangha hear me. This robe of the bhikkhu named so-and-so is forfeit, relinquished to the Sangha; if it is the Sangha's pleasure, the Sangha would give this robe to the bhikkhu named so-and-so" (pārā. 464), is called dānaṃ. The acceptance of an offense, saying, "Venerable sirs, may the Sangha hear me. This bhikkhu named so-and-so remembers an offense, discloses it, reveals it, confesses it; if it is the Sangha's pleasure, I would accept the offense from the bhikkhu named so-and-so," and he should be asked, "Do you see it?"; he says, "Yes, I see it"; "May you restrain yourself in the future" (cūḷava. 239), is called paṭiggaho. The withdrawal of the pavāraṇā that has been done, saying, "Venerable sirs, may the resident bhikkhus hear me. If it is the venerable sirs' pleasure, now we would perform the uposatha, recite the Pātimokkha, and perform the pavāraṇā at the proper time" (mahāva. 240), is called paccukkaḍḍhanā. The three ñattis in the tiṇavatthārakasamatha (cūḷava. 212), the sabbasaṅgāhikanatti, and one natti in each side, are called kammalakkhaṇaṃ. Thus, ñattikamma goes to nine places.

nissāraṇānāma. Tasseva sammāvattantassa pattukkujjanavasenaosāraṇāca veditabbā, sā khuddakakkhandhake vaḍḍhalicchavivatthusmiṃ (cūḷava. 265-266) vuttā. Sīmāsammuti ticīvarena avippavāsasammutisanthatasammutibhattuddesakasenāsanaggāhāpakabhaṇḍāgārikacīvarappaṭiggāhakayāgubhājakaphalabhājakakhajjabhājakaappamattakavissajjakasāṭiyaggāhapakapattaggāhāpakaārāmikapesakasāmaṇerapesakasammutīti etāsaṃ sammutīnaṃ vasenasammutiveditabbā. Kathinacīvaramatakacīvaradānavasenadānaṃveditabbaṃ. Kathinuddhāravasenauddhāroveditabbo. Kuṭivatthuvihāravatthudesanāvasenadesanāveditabbā. Yā pana tiṇavatthārakasamathe (cūḷava. 212 ādayo) ekasmiṃ pakkhe ekā, ekasmiṃ pakkhe ekāti dve ñattidutiyakammavācā vuttā, yā ca mohāropanādīsu kammavācā (pāci. 446) vuttā, tāsaṃ vasenakammalakkhaṇaṃveditabbaṃ, iti ñattidutiyakammaṃ satta ṭhānāni gacchati.

nissāraṇā means expulsion. Also to be known is osāraṇā, the reinstatement of the very same person who has behaved well. This is mentioned in the Vaḍḍhalicchavi incident in the Khuddakakkhandhaka (cūḷava. 265-266). sammuti is to be understood in terms of granting of boundary, granting permission regarding the three robes, not being away from one's robes, granting a spread, granting a food distributor, granting a dwelling place taker, granting a storehouse keeper, granting a robe receiver, granting a rice-gruel distributor, granting a fruit distributor, granting a snack distributor, granting an apportioner of small things, granting a cloth receiver, granting a bowl receiver, granting a monastery attendant, granting a novice attendant. dānaṃ is to be understood in terms of giving kaṭhina robes and robes for the dead. uddhāro is to be understood in terms of the withdrawal of the kathina. desanā is to be understood in terms of designating the site for a hut and the site for a monastery. The two ñattidutiyakammavācās that are mentioned in the tiṇavatthārakasamatha (cūḷava. 212 ff), one in one side and one in one side, and the kammavācā mentioned in the imposition of delusion, etc. (pāci. 446), kammalakkhaṇaṃ is to be understood in terms of those. Thus, ñattidutiyakamma goes to seven places.

nissāraṇā,tesaṃyeva kammānaṃ paṭippassambhanavasenaosāraṇāca veditabbā, bhikkhunovādakasammutivasena (pāci. 146-147)sammuti,parivāsadāna(caūḷava. 102) mānattadānavasena (cūḷava. 105)dānaṃ,mūlāyapaṭikassanavasena (cūḷava. 110)niggaho,ukkhittānuvattikā, aṭṭha yāvatatiyakā, ariṭṭho (pāci. 417), caṇḍakāḷī (pāci. 709) cāti ime te yāvatatiyakāti imāsaṃ ekādasannaṃ samanubhāsanānaṃ vasenasamanubhāsanā,upasampadākammaabbhānakammavasenakammalakkhaṇaṃveditabbaṃ. Iti ñatticatutthakammaṃ satta ṭhānāni gacchati.

nissāraṇā, means expulsion; osāraṇā is to be understood as the rehabilitation of those very same kammas; sammuti in terms of granting permission to a bhikkhu to admonish (pāci. 146-147); dānaṃ in terms of granting parivāsa (caūḷava. 102) and granting mānatta (cūḷava. 105); niggaho in terms of reversal from the root (cūḷava. 110); samanubhāsanā, in terms of the eleven proclamations, namely: exclusion, the eight that go up to the third time, Ariṭṭha (pāci. 417), and Caṇḍakāḷī (pāci. 709); these are those that go up to the third time. kammalakkhaṇaṃ is to be understood in terms of the upasampadākamma and the abbhānakamma. Thus, ñatticatutthakamma goes to seven places.

dhammikānināma honti, iti etesaṃ dhammikānaṃkammānaṃ chandaṃ datvā pacchā khīyanadhammaṃāpajjantassa vācāya vācāya pācittiyaṃ.

dhammikāni namely, are lawful; thus, for one who, having given his approval to these lawful kammas, later falls into a state of displeasure, there is a pācittiya for each utterance.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye ārabbha khīyanadhammāpajjanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, dhammakamme vematikassa, adhammakamme dhammakammasaññino, vematikassa ca dukkaṭaṃ. Adhammakammasaññissa, ‘‘adhammena vā vaggena vā nakammārahassa vā kammaṃ karontī’’ti ñatvā khīyantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Dhammakammatā, dhammakammasaññitā, chandaṃ datvā khīyananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāneva, idaṃ pana dukkhavedananti.

This was prescribed at Sāvatthī, concerning the Group of Six monks, in the situation of falling into a state of displeasure; it is a general rule, not commanded, a dukkata for one who is doubtful about a lawful kamma, and for one who perceives a kamma as lawful when it is unlawful, and for one who is doubtful. There is no offense for one who, perceiving a kamma as unlawful, knows that "they are doing a kamma unlawfully or by a faction or by one who is unfit for kamma" and is displeased, or for an insane person, etc. The lawfulness of the kamma, perceiving a kamma as lawful, and giving approval and then being displeased, these are the three factors involved here. The origin, etc., are similar to theft, but this involves painful feeling.

Kammappaṭibāhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Kammappaṭibāhana Sikkhāpada is complete.

10. Chandaṃadatvāgamanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Chandaṃadatvāgamana Sikkhāpada

vinicchayakathāyāti yāva ārocitaṃ vatthu avinicchikaṃ, ñattiṃ vā ṭhapetvā kammavācā aniṭṭhāpitā, tāva vinicchayakathāvattamānānāma hoti. Yo bhikkhu etasmiṃ antare kammaṃ kopetukāmatāya parisāya hatthapāsaṃ vijahati, tassa vijahane dukkaṭaṃ, vijahite pācittiyaṃ.

vinicchayakathāyā: As long as the matter that has been announced has not been decided, or the motion has been established but the kammavācā has not been completed, so long as the discussion of adjudication is vattamānā going on. If a bhikkhu, in this interval, withdraws from the assembly's reach with the intention of disrupting the kamma, there is a dukkata for withdrawing, and a pācittiya for having withdrawn.

Sāvatthiyaṃ aññataraṃ bhikkhuṃ ārabbha chandaṃ adatvā pakkamanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, dhammakamme vematikassa, adhammakamme dhammakammasaññino, vematikassa ca dukkaṭaṃ. Adhammakammasaññissa pana, yo ca ‘‘saṅghassa bhaṇḍanādīni vā bhavissanti, adhammena vā vaggena vā nakammārahassa vā kammaṃ karissantī’’ti (pāci. 483) ñatvā, gilāno vā hutvā, gilānassa vā karaṇīyena, uccārādīhi vā pīḷito, na ca kammaṃ kopetukāmo ‘‘puna paccāgamissāmī’’ti gacchati, tassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Vinicchayakathāya vattamānatā, dhammakammatā, dhammakammasaññitā, samānasīmāyaṃ ṭhitatā, samānasaṃvāsakatā, kopetukāmatāya hatthapāsavijahananti imānettha cha aṅgāni. Samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kiriyākiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.

This was prescribed at Sāvatthī, concerning a certain bhikkhu, in the situation of leaving without giving his approval; it is a general rule, not commanded, a dukkata for one who is doubtful about a lawful kamma, and for one who perceives a kamma as lawful when it is unlawful, and for one who is doubtful. But there is no offense for one who, perceiving a kamma as unlawful, and also for one who knows that "there will be quarrels, etc., in the Sangha, or they will do a kamma unlawfully or by a faction or by one who is unfit for kamma" (pāci. 483), or for one who is ill, or for one who has something to do for the sick, or for one who is afflicted by excretion, etc., and does not intend to disrupt the kamma, but leaves thinking, "I will return again," or for an insane person, etc. The discussion of adjudication being in progress, the lawfulness of the kamma, perceiving a kamma as lawful, being situated within the same boundary, sharing the same dwelling, and withdrawing from the assembly's reach with the intention of disrupting, these are the six factors involved here. Its origin is from proclamation, action and non-action, release from perception, intentional, a world offense, a bodily action, a verbal action, unwholesome intention, and painful feeling.

Chandaṃadatvāgamanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Chandaṃadatvāgamana Sikkhāpada is complete.

11. Dubbalasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
11. Explanation of the Dubbala Sikkhāpada

samaggena saṅghenāti samānasaṃvāsakena samānasīmāyaṃ ṭhitena saṅghena saddhiṃ cīvaraṃ datvā.Yathāsanthutanti yo yo mittasandiṭṭhasambhattavasena santhuto, tassa tassāti attho.Pācittiyanti evaṃ saṅghena saddhiṃ sayameva senāsanapaññāpanādivasena sammatassa bhikkhuno cīvaraṃ datvā pacchā khīyantassa vācāya vācāya pācittiyaṃ.

samaggena saṅghena: Having given a robe together with the Sangha that is in concord, sharing the same dwelling, and situated within the same boundary. Yathāsanthuta: Whichever one is familiar with in terms of friendship, intimacy, and association, to that one. Pācittiya: Thus, for one who, having given a robe to a bhikkhu who has been authorized by the Sangha in terms of arranging lodgings, etc., and then is displeased, there is a pācittiya for each utterance.

vissajjiyavebhaṅgiyonāma ṭhapetvā pañca garubhaṇḍāni avaseso. Rāsivasena hi pañca garubhaṇḍāni vuttāni, tattha ārāmo ārāmavatthūti ekaṃ, vihāro vihāravatthūti dutiyaṃ, mañco pīṭhaṃ bhisi bimbohananti tatiyaṃ, lohakumbhī lohabhāṇakaṃ lohavārako lohakaṭāhaṃ vāsi parasu kuṭhārī kudālo nikhādananti catutthaṃ, valli veḷu muñjaṃ pabbajaṃ tiṇaṃ mattikā dārubhaṇḍaṃ mattikābhaṇḍanti pañcamaṃ. Etāni hi pañca saṅghasantakāni neva saṅghassa, na gaṇapuggalānaṃ vissajjetuṃ vā vibhajituṃ vā vaṭṭanti, vissajjitavibhattānipi saṅghikāneva honti. Thāvarena pana thāvaraṃ, itarena ca akappiyena mahagghakappiyena vā itaraṃ saṅghassa upakāraṃ sallakkhetvā kappiyaparivattanena parivattetuṃ vaṭṭati, varasenāsanādīnaṃ saṃrakkhaṇatthaṃ lāmakāni vissajjetuṃ vissajjetvā paribhuñjituñca vaṭṭati. Ettha ca purimesu tīsu rāsīsu agarubhaṇḍaṃ nāma kiñci natthi, catutthe lohakumbhī arañjarasaṇṭhānaṃ lohabhāṇakaṃ lohakaṭāhanti imāni tīṇi antamaso pasatamattaudakaggaṇhanakānipi garubhaṇḍāni. Lohavārako pana kāḷalohatambalohakaṃsalohavaṭṭalohānaṃ yena kenaci kato sīhaḷadīpe pādaggaṇhanako bhājetabbo,pādoca nāma magadhanāḷiyā pañcanāḷimattaṃ gaṇhāti, tato atirekaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ, imāni tāva pāḷiyaṃ āgatāni lohabhājanāni.

Regarding the Vissajjiyavebhaṅga (Analysis of Giving Away), everything else is considered agarubhaṇḍa (light item) except for five garubhaṇḍa (heavy items). Indeed, these five heavy items are stated as a group: Firstly, an ārāma (park) and the land of the ārāma; secondly, a vihāra (monastery) and the land of the vihāra; thirdly, a bed, a seat, a cushion, and a pillow; fourthly, a metal pot, a metal bowl, a metal tray, or a metal cauldron, an axe, a hatchet, an adze, and a digging tool; fifthly, creeping vines, bamboo, muñja grass, pabbaja grass, thatch grass, clay, wooden tools, and clay tools. These five, belonging to the Saṅgha, are not suitable for either the Saṅgha or individual persons to give away or distribute; even if given away or distributed, they still belong to the Saṅgha. However, it is suitable to exchange a fixed item for another fixed item, or an unsuitable item for another suitable expensive item, considering what is beneficial to the Saṅgha, through a suitable exchange. For the protection of esteemed dwelling places and so on, it is suitable to give away inferior items and to use them after giving them away. Here, in the first three groups, there is nothing that is agarubhaṇḍa; in the fourth, a metal pot shaped like a lotus root, a metal bowl, and a metal cauldron—these three, even if they can hold only a pasata measure of water, are garubhaṇḍa. However, a metal tray made of black iron, copper, brass, or round iron, made in any way, should be divided in the island of Sri Lanka by measuring pāda. A pāda is equivalent to five nāḷi measures in the Magadhan standard. Anything more than that is garubhaṇḍa. These are the metal vessels mentioned in the Pali texts.

Pāḷiyaṃ pana anāgatānipi bhiṅgārapaṭiggahauḷuṅkadabbikaṭacchupāti taṭṭakasarakasamuggaaṅgārakapalladhūmakaṭacchuādīni khuddakānipi garubhaṇḍāneva, ayapatto ayathālakaṃ tambalohathālakanti imāni pana bhājanīyāni, kaṃsalohavaṭṭalohabhājanavikati saṅghikaparibhogena vā gihivikaṭā vā vaṭṭati, puggalikaparibhogena na vaṭṭati. Ṭhapetvā pana taṃ bhājanavikatiṃ aññasmimpi kappiyalohabhaṇḍe añjanī añjanisalākā natthudānaṃ kaṇṇamalaharaṇī sūci khuddako pipphaliko khuddakaṃ ārakaṇṭakaṃ kuñcikā tāḷaṃ kattarayaṭṭhi vedhako bhindivālako yathātathāghanakatalohaṃvippakatalohabhaṇḍañca sabbaṃ bhājanīyaṃ. Dhūmanettaphāladīparukkhadīpakapallikaolambakadīpaitthipurisatiracchānarūpakāni pana aññāni vā bhitticchadanakavāṭādīsu upanetabbāni, antamaso lohakhilakaṃ upādāya sabbānipi lohabhaṇḍāni garubhaṇḍāniyeva, attanā laddhāni pariharitvāpi puggalikaparibhogena na paribhuñjitabbāni, saṅghikaparibhogena vā gihivikaṭāni vā vaṭṭanti, tipubhaṇḍepi eseva nayo. Khīrapāsāṇamayāni taṭṭakasarakādīni garubhaṇḍāniyeva.

Even those not mentioned in the Pali texts, such as a water filter, a bowl, an uḷuṅka (small pot), a dabbi (spoon), a kaṭacchu (ladle), a pāti (bowl), a taṭṭaka (plate), a saraka (small bowl), a samugga (casket), an aṅgārakapalla (charcoal shovel), a dhūmakaṭacchu (smoke ladle) and other small items, are garubhaṇḍa. However, an iron bowl, an iron plate, and a copper plate—these can be divided. Selling metal or round iron bowls, either through Saṅgha use or to laypeople, is permissible, but not through personal use. Except for the selling of those bowls, other suitable metal items like an añjanī (ointment container), an añjanisalākā (ointment applicator), a natthudāna (nasal medication container), a kaṇṇamalaharaṇī (earwax remover), a needle, a small pipphaliko (case), a small ārakaṇṭaka (awl), a key, a lock, a scissors handle, a vedhaka (drill), a bhindivālako (chisel), and any other kind of dense or openwork metal item can all be divided. However, smoke-net supports, torch stands, lamp stands, lamp holders, hanging lamps, and figures of men, women, or animals, or other similar items that are attached to walls, roofs, doors, etc., including even a small metal nail, are all garubhaṇḍa. Items acquired by oneself should be avoided and not used for personal use; they are permissible through Saṅgha use or sold to laypeople. The same principle applies to tin items. Plates, bowls, etc., made of soapstone or stone are also garubhaṇḍa.

Ghaṭako pana telabhājanaṃ vā pādaggaṇhanakato atirekameva garubhaṇḍaṃ, suvaṇṇarajataārakūṭajātiphalikabhājanāni gihivikaṭānipi na vaṭṭanti. Senāsanaparibhoge pana āmāsampi anāmāsampi sabbaṃ vaṭṭati.

However, a ghaṭako (water pot) larger than what is needed for washing feet is a garubhaṇḍa. Vessels made of gold, silver, or imitation gold, or crystal vessels cannot be sold even to laypeople. Regarding the use of senāsana (lodging), everything is permissible, both with and without reservation.

Vāsiyādīsu pana yāya vāsiyā dantakaṭṭhacchedanaucchutacchanamattato aññaṃ mahākammaṃ kātuṃ na sakkā, ayaṃ bhājanīyā. Sesā yena kenaci ākārena katā garubhaṇḍaṃ, parasu pana antamaso vejjānaṃ sirāvedhakopi garubhaṇḍameva, tathā kuṭhārī. Yā pana āvudhasaṅkhepena katā, ayaṃ anāmāsā, kudālo daṇḍabandhanikhādanaṃ vā agarubhaṇḍaṃ nāma natthi. Sammuñjanidaṇḍakhaṇanakaṃ pana adaṇḍakaṃ phalamattakameva, yaṃ sakkā sipāṭikāya pakkhipitvā pariharituṃ, taṃ bhājanīyaṃ. Sikharampi nikhādaneneva saṅgahitaṃ, yehi manussehi vihāre vāsiādīni dinnāni honti, te ce ghare daḍḍhe vā vilutte vā ‘‘detha no, bhante, upakkhare, puna āharissāmā’’ti vadanti, dātabbā. Sace haranti, na vāretabbā, anāharantāpi na codetabbā.

Among axes and so on, if an axe cannot perform any major task other than cutting toothpicks or trimming sugarcane, it is bhājanīya (divisible). The rest, made in any way, are garubhaṇḍa. A parasu (hatchet), even one used by physicians for bloodletting, is garubhaṇḍa, as is a kuṭhārī (adze). However, one made as a weapon is anāmāsā (not to be touched without permission). There is nothing agarubhaṇḍa about a kudālo (hoe) for attaching handles or digging. However, a broom for sweeping, without a handle, just the head, which can be kept by wrapping it in a sipāṭika (strip of bark), is bhājanīya. A sikharam (chisel) is included with the nikhādana (digging tool). If people who have given axes etc. to the monastery have their houses burned or looted, and they say, "Give us the tools, Bhante, we will bring them back later," they should be given. If they take them, they should not be stopped, and if they do not bring them back, they should not be reprimanded.

Kammārataṭṭakāracundakāranaḷakāramaṇikārapattabandhakānaṃ adhikaraṇimuṭṭhisaṇḍāsatulādīni sabbāni lohamayāni upakaraṇāni saṅghe dinnakālato paṭṭhāya garubhaṇḍāni. Tipukoṭṭakasuvaṇṇakāracammakāraupakaraṇesupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana viseso, tipukoṭṭakaupakaraṇesu tipucchedanakasatthakaṃ, suvaṇṇakāraupakaraṇesu suvaṇṇacchedanakasatthakaṃ, cammakāraupakaraṇesu kataparikammacammacchedanakhuddakasatthanti imāni bhājanīyāni. Nhāpitatunnakāraupakaraṇesupi ṭhapetvā mahākattariṃ mahāsaṇḍāsaṃ mahāpipphalikañca sabbaṃ vaṭṭati, itarāni garubhaṇḍāni.

All the metal tools of blacksmiths, carpenters, turners, leather workers, jewelers, and bookbinders, such as anvils, tongs, vices, scales, etc., are garubhaṇḍa from the time they are given to the Saṅgha. The same principle applies to the tools of goldsmiths, leather workers and those who make boxes. However, there is a distinction: among the tools for making boxes, a knife for cutting the tip; among the tools for goldsmiths, a knife for cutting gold; and among the tools for leather workers, a small knife for cutting prepared leather are bhājanīya. Among the tools of barbers and tailors, everything is permissible except for large scissors, large tongs, and large pipphalika (cases); the rest are garubhaṇḍa.

Valliādīsu vettavalliādikā yā kāci aḍḍhabāhuppamāṇā valli saṅghassa dinnā vā tatthajātakā vā rakkhitagopitāva garubhaṇḍaṃ, sā saṅghakamme ca cetiyakamme ca kate sace atirekā hoti, puggalikakammepi upanetuṃ vaṭṭati, suttamakacivākanāḷikerahīracammamayā rajjukā vā yottāni vā vāke ca nāḷikerahīre ca vaṭṭetvā katā ekavaṭṭā vā dvivaṭṭā vā saṅghassa santakā garubhaṇḍaṃ. Suttaṃ pana avaṭṭetvā dinnaṃ makacivākanāḷikerahīrā ca bhājanīyā. Yehi panetāni rajjukādīni dinnāni honti, te attano karaṇīyena harantā na vāretabbā.

Among creeping vines and so on, any creeper such as rattan vine, about half a cubit in length, given to the Saṅgha or grown there, is protected and guarded as garubhaṇḍa. If it is extra after doing Saṅgha work or cetiya (shrine) work, it is permissible to use it for personal work. Ropes or cords made of thread, makaci fibers, vāka fibers, coconut fiber, leather, or cords made by twisting vāke or coconut fiber into single or double strands, belonging to the Saṅgha, are garubhaṇḍa. However, thread given without twisting, and makaci fibers, vāka fibers, and coconut fiber are bhājanīya. Those who have given these ropes and so on should not be prevented from taking them for their own needs.

Yo koci aṭṭhaṅgulasūcidaṇḍakamattopi veḷu saṅghassa dinno vā tatthajātako vā rakkhitagopito garubhaṇḍaṃ, sopi saṅghassa kamme ca cetiyakamme ca kate atireko puggalikakamme dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Pādaggaṇhanakatelanāḷi pana kattarayaṭṭhi upāhanadaṇḍako chattadaṇḍo chattasalākāti idamettha bhājanīyabhaṇḍaṃ, daḍḍhagehamanussā gaṇhitvā gacchantā na vāretabbā.

Any piece of bamboo, even just the length of an eight-aṅgula needle case, given to the Saṅgha or grown there, protected and guarded, is garubhaṇḍa. If it is extra after doing Saṅgha work or cetiya work, it is permissible to give it for personal work. A telanāḷi (oil container) that fits in the palm of the hand, a scissors handle, a walking stick, a parasol handle, and parasol ribs are bhājanīya here. People whose houses have burned down should not be prevented from taking them.

Muñjañca pabbajañca avasesañca chadanatiṇaṃ muṭṭhippamāṇampi chadanatiṇasaṅkhepagatesu tālapaṇṇādīsu yaṃkiñci ekapaṇṇampi saṅghassa dinnaṃ vā tatthajātakaṃ vā bahiārāme saṅghike tiṇavatthusmiṃ jātakaṃ vā rakkhitagopitaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ, tampi saṅghakamme ca cetiyakamme ca kate atirekaṃ puggalikakamme dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Daḍḍhagehamanussā gahetvā gacchantā na vāretabbā, aṭṭhaṅgulappamāṇopi rittakapotthako garubhaṇḍameva.

Muñja grass, pabbaja grass, and any remaining thatch grass, even a handful, among things used for roofing, such as palm leaves and so on, even a single leaf, given to the Saṅgha or grown there, or grown in Saṅgha-owned grassy land outside the monastery, protected and guarded, is garubhaṇḍa. If it is extra after doing Saṅgha work or cetiya work, it is permissible to give it for personal work. People whose houses have burned down should not be prevented from taking them. Even an eight-aṅgula empty book cover is garubhaṇḍa.

Mattikā pakatimattikā vā hotu pañcavaṇṇā vā sudhā vā sajjurasakaṅguṭṭhasilesādīsu vā yaṃkiñci dullabhaṭṭhāne ānetvā vā dinnaṃ tatthajātakaṃ vā rakkhitagopitaṃ tālapakkamattaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ hoti, tampi saṅghakamme ca cetiyakamme ca kate atirekaṃ puggalikakamme dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Hiṅguhiṅgulakaharitālamanosilañjanādīni pana bhājanīyāni.

Clay, whether natural clay or five-colored clay, or whitewash, or anything brought or grown in a remote place among sajjurasaka (red chalk), kaṅguṭṭha stone, or silesā stone, protected and guarded, even the size of a tālapakka fruit, is garubhaṇḍa. If it is extra after doing Saṅgha work or cetiya work, it is permissible to give it for personal work. However, hiṅgu (red ochre), hiṅgulaka (cinnabar), haritāla (orpiment), manosila (realgar), añjana (collyrium), and so on are bhājanīya.

Dārubhaṇḍe yo koci veḷumhi vuttappamāṇo dārubhaṇḍako saṅghassa dinno vā tatthajātako vā rakkhitagopito garubhaṇḍaṃ, api ca sabbāpi dāruveḷucammapāsāṇādivikati dārubhaṇḍena saṅgahitā, tattha mañcapīṭhehi asaṅgahitāni āsandikādīni antamaso coḷena vā palālehi vā paṇṇehi vā katapīṭhaṃ upādāya sabbāni āsanāni.

Among wooden tools, any piece of wood of the size mentioned for bamboo, given to the Saṅgha or grown there, protected and guarded, is garubhaṇḍa. Moreover, all items made of wood, bamboo, leather, stone, etc., are included under wooden tools. Among them, all seating furniture not included with beds and seats, such as chairs and so on, including even a seat made of coḷa fibers, straw, or leaves, are included.

Vaṅkaphalakaṃ dīghaphalakaṃ cīvaradhovanaphalakaṃ ghaṭṭanaphalakaṃ ghaṭṭanamuggaro dantakaṭṭhacchedanagaṇṭhikā daṇḍamuggaro nāvā ambaṇaṃ rajanadoṇi udakapaṭicchako dārumayo vā dantamayo vā veḷumayo vā sapādakopi apādakopi samuggo mañjūsā pādaggaṇhanakato atirekappamāṇo karaṇḍo udakadoṇi udakakaṭāhaṃ uḷuṅko kaṭacchupānīyasarāvaṃ pānīyasaṅkhoti etesu yaṃkiñci saṅghe dinnaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ. Saṅkhathālakaṃ pana bhājanīyaṃ, tathā dārumayo udakatumbo.

A vaṅkaphalaka (curved plank), a dīghaphalaka (long plank), a cīvaradhovanaphalaka (robe-washing plank), a ghaṭṭanaphalaka (rubbing plank), a ghaṭṭanamuggaro (rubbing mallet), a dantakaṭṭhacchedanagaṇṭhikā (toothpick cutter), a daṇḍamuggaro (stick mallet), a boat, a trough, a dyeing vat, a water strainer, whether made of wood or ivory or bamboo, a box with or without legs, a casket, a karaṇḍo (basket) larger than what fits in the palm of the hand, a water trough, a water cauldron, an uḷuṅko (small pot), a kaṭacchupānīyasarāvaṃ (ladle for water), and a pānīyasaṅkha (water conch)—any of these given to the Saṅgha is garubhaṇḍa. However, a saṅkhathālaka (conch plate) is bhājanīya, as is a wooden water gourd.

Pādakathalikamaṇḍalaṃ dārumayaṃ vā hotu coḷapaṇṇādimayaṃ vā sabbaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ. Ādhārako pattapidhānaṃ tālavaṇṭaṃ bījanī caṅkoṭakaṃ pacchi yaṭṭhisammuñjanī muṭṭhisammuñjanīti etesupi yaṃkiñci khuddakaṃ vā mahantaṃ vā dāruveḷupaṇṇacammādīsu yena kenaci kataṃ garubhaṇḍameva.

A pādakathalikamaṇḍalaṃ (footstool), whether made of wood or coḷa fibers or leaves, is all garubhaṇḍa. An ādhārako (stand), a pattapidhānaṃ (bowl lid), a tālavaṇṭaṃ (palm-leaf fan), a bījanī (fan), a caṅkoṭakaṃ (small box), a pacchi (basket), a yaṭṭhisammuñjanī (handled broom), and a muṭṭhisammuñjanī (hand broom)—any of these, whether small or large, made of wood, bamboo, leaves, leather, or anything else, is garubhaṇḍa.

kurundiyaṃpana sabbaṃ mañcappamāṇaṃ cammaṃ garubhaṇḍanti vuttaṃ.

In the Kurundi, it is stated that all leather the size of a bed is garubhaṇḍa.

Udukkhalaṃ musalaṃ suppaṃ nisadaṃ nisadapoto pāsāṇadoṇi pāsāṇakaṭāhaṃ sabbaṃ kasibhaṇḍampi garubhaṇḍaṃ, sabbaṃ cakkayuttayānaṃ garubhaṇḍameva. Mañcapīṭhānaṃ pādā ca aṭaniyo ca vāsiparasuādīnaṃ daṇḍā cāti etesu yaṃkiñci aniṭṭhitaṃ bhājanīyaṃ, tacchitamaṭṭhaṃ pana garubhaṇḍaṃ hoti, anuññātavāsiyā daṇḍo chattaṃ muṭṭhipaṇṇaṃ kattarayaṭṭhi upāhanā araṇisahitaṃ dhammakaraṇo pādaggaṇhanakato anatirittaṃ āmalakatumbaṃ āmalakaghaṭo lābukatumbaṃ lābukaghaṭo visāṇatumbanti sabbametaṃ bhājanīyaṃ, tato paraṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ.

Hatthidanto vā yaṃkiñci visāṇaṃ vā atacchitaṃ yathāgatameva bhājanīyaṃ, tehi katamañcapīṭhapādādīsu purimasadisova vinicchayo. Tacchitaniṭṭhitopi hiṅgukaraṇḍako añjanikaraṇḍako gaṇṭhikā vidho añjanī añjanisalākā udakapuñchanīti idaṃ sabbaṃ bhājanīyameva.

An elephant tusk or any horn, uncarved in its natural state, is bhājanīya. Regarding bed legs etc. made from them, the judgment is the same as before. Even a carved but unfinished hiṅgu karaṇḍaka (red ochre container), an añjanī karaṇḍaka (collyrium container), a gaṇṭhikā (case), a vidho (drill), an añjanī (collyrium container), an añjanisalākā (collyrium applicator), and a udakapuñchanī (water strainer) are all bhājanīya.

Mattikābhaṇḍe sabbaṃ manussānaṃ upabhogaparibhogaṃ ghaṭapiṭharādikulālabhājanaṃ, pattakaṭāhaṃ aṅgārakaṭāhaṃ dhūmadānakaṃ dīparukkhako dīpakapallikā cayaniṭṭhakā chadaniṭṭhakā thupikāti sabbaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ, etesu pana vuttanayesu garubhaṇḍesu yaṃkiñci veḷuādiṃ attano atthāya gaṇhantena samakaṃ vā atirekaṃ vā phātikammaṃ katvā gahetabbaṃ. Pādaggaṇhanakato anatirittappamāṇo pana ghaṭako patto thālakaṃ kañcanako kuṇḍikāti idamettha bhājanīyaṃ, yathā ca mattikābhaṇḍe evaṃ lohabhaṇḍepi kuṇḍikā bhājanīyakoṭṭhāsameva bhajati. Iti yaṃ bhājanīyaṃ vissajjanīyampi taṃ evaṃ vissajjiyavebhaṅgiyasaṅkhātaṃ aññaṃ parikkhāraṃ datvā khīyantassa dukkaṭaṃ, itaraṃ pana dātumeva na vaṭṭati. Issaravatāya dento thullaccayaṃ āpajjati, theyyacittena gaṇhanto bhaṇḍaṃ agghāpetvā kāretabbo. Yathā ca aññaṃ parikkhāraṃ datvā khīyantassa dukkaṭaṃ, tathā saṅghena asammatassa cīvaraṃ vā aññaṃ vā parikkhāraṃ datvā khīyantassa dukkaṭameva, anupasampanne sabbattha tikadukkaṭaṃ. Pakatiyā pana chandādivasena (pāci. 488) karontaṃ disvā ‘‘ko attho tassa dinnena, laddhāpi vinipātessati, na sammā upanessatī’’ti khīyantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Upasampannatā, dhammena laddhasammutitā, saṅghena saddhiṃ vikappanupagacīvaradānaṃ, pacchā khīyitukāmatāya khīyanāti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāni, idaṃ pana dukkhavedananti.

Among clay tools, everything used for human enjoyment and consumption, such as pots, pitchers, and other pottery, patta (bowls), kaṭāha (cauldrons), aṅgārakaṭāha (charcoal braziers), dhūmadānakaṃ (incense burners), dīparukkhako (lamp stands), dīpakapallikā (lamp holders), cayaniṭṭhakā (bricks for building), chadaniṭṭhakā (roofing tiles), and thupikā (finials) are all garubhaṇḍa. However, among these garubhaṇḍa mentioned in the preceding sections, anyone taking bamboo etc. for their own use should perform some phātikamma (work in return), either equal to or exceeding the value of what they take. However, a ghaṭako (water pot), patto (bowl), thālakaṃ (plate), kañcanako (small bowl), and kuṇḍikā (water pot), not larger than what fits in the palm of the hand, are bhājanīya here. Just as with clay tools, a metal kuṇḍikā (water pot) also belongs to the category of bhājanīya. Thus, whatever is bhājanīya is also vissajjanīya (may be given away). Giving away other possessions while diminishing what one owns incurs a dukkaṭa (wrongdoing), but giving away the items mentioned above is not permissible at all. Giving them away due to a sense of authority incurs a thullaccaya (grave offense), and taking them with the intention to steal requires one to compensate for the value of the item. Just as giving away other possessions while diminishing what one owns incurs a dukkaṭa, giving away a robe or other possession without the Saṅgha's consent also incurs a dukkaṭa. In the case of one who is not fully ordained, a triple dukkaṭa is incurred in all instances. However, there is no offense for one who sees someone acting out of desire etc. (pāci. 488) and thinks, "What is the point of giving to him? Even if he receives it, he will destroy it and not use it properly," or for those who are insane etc. Here, there are four factors: being fully ordained, having obtained consent according to the Dhamma, giving robes without making a formal assignment with the Saṅgha, and diminishing one's possessions with the intention of doing so. The origin etc. are similar to those of taking what is not given, but this involves dukkhavedanā (feeling of suffering).

Dubbalasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Dubbala Sikkhāpada is concluded.

12. Pariṇāmanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
12. Pariṇāmana Sikkhāpada Vaṇṇanā (Commentary on the Sikkhāpada concerning Alteration)

Dvādasame sabbaṃ tiṃsakakaṇḍe pariṇāmanasikkhāpade vuttanayameva. Ayameva hi viseso, tattha attano pariṇāmitattā nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ, idha puggalassa pariṇāmitattā suddhikapācittiyanti.

In the twelfth, in the section on all thirty, the Pariṇāmana Sikkhāpada is as stated before. The only difference is that there, because one alters something for oneself, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya (an offense entailing forfeiture and expiation), but here, because one alters something for another person, it is a suddhika pācittiya (a simple offense entailing expiation).

Pariṇāmanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Pariṇāmana Sikkhāpada is concluded.

Sahadhammikavaggo aṭṭhamo.

The eighth section, Sahadhammika Vagga, is concluded.

9. Ratanavaggo

9. Ratana Vagga (Section on Treasures)

1. Antepurasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Antepurasikkhāpada

khattiyassāti khattiyajātikassa,muddhābhisittassāti khattiyābhisekena muddhani abhisittassa. Anikkhanto rājā itoti anikkhantarājakaṃ, tasmiṃanikkhantarājake,sayanighareti attho.Ratanaṃvuccati mahesī,niggatanti nikkhantaṃ, aniggataṃ ratanaṃ itoti aniggataratanakaṃ, tasmiṃaniggataratanake,sayanighareti attho.Indakhīlaṃatikkameyyāti ettha attano āgatabhāvaṃ ajānāpetvā sayanigharassa ummāraṃ paṭhamaṃ pādaṃ atikkāmentassa dukkaṭaṃ, dutiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

Khattiyassāti: of a Khattiya by birth; muddhābhisittassāti: whose head has been anointed with the Khattiya anointment. Anikkhanto rājā itoti anikkhantarājakaṃ: "a king who has not gone out," hence anikkhantarājake: in the king's private chamber, is the meaning. Ratanaṃ is said of the chief queen; niggatanti: gone out; aniggataṃ ratanaṃ itoti aniggataratanakaṃ: "a queen who has not gone out," hence aniggataratanake: in the queen's private chamber, is the meaning. Indakhīlaṃ atikkameyyāti: here, for one who, without making known his arrival, first steps over the threshold of the private chamber, there is a dukkata; for the second step, a pācittiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ ārabbha rañño antepurappavisanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, asādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, paṭisaṃvidite appaṭisaṃviditasaññino, vematikassa ca dukkaṭaṃ. Paṭisaṃviditasaññissa, na khattiyassa vā, na khattiyābhisekena abhisittassa vā, ubhosu vā, ubhinnaṃ vā aññatarasmiṃ nikkhante sayanigharaṃ pavisantassa, asayanighare, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Khattiyatā, abhisittatā, ubhinnampi sayanigharato anikkhantatā, appaṭisaṃviditatā, indakhīlātikkamoti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamakathinasadisāni, idaṃ pana kiriyākiriyanti.

This was promulgated in Sāvatthi regarding the incident of the king entering the inner chambers, concerning the venerable Ānanda. It is a non-common promulgation, a non-command, a three-pācittiya, and there is a dukkata for one who is not mindful and for one who is doubtful. For one who is mindful, or for one who enters the private chamber after either the Khattiya or the one anointed with the Khattiya anointment or both, or either of the two, has departed, or in a place that is not a private chamber, there is no offense for the insane, etc. Being a Khattiya, being anointed, both not having left the private chamber, not being mindful, and stepping over the indakhīla—these are the five factors here. The origin, etc., are similar to the first kathina; however, this is an action and non-action.

Antepurasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Antepurasikkhāpada is complete.

2. Ratanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Ratanasikkhāpada

ratananti muttādidasavidhaṃ.Ratanasammatanti yaṃkiñci manussānaṃ upabhogaparibhogaṃ.Ajjhārāme vāti parikkhittassa antopaṭikkhepe aparikkhittassa dvinnaṃ leḍḍupātānaṃ anto.Ajjhāvasatheti parikkhittassa antopaṭikkhepe, aparikkhittassa musalapātabbhantare. Ayaṃ panettha vinicchayo – jātarūparajataṃ attano atthāya uggaṇhantassa vā uggaṇhāpentassa vā nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ. Saṅghagaṇapuggalacetiyanavakammānaṃ atthāya dukkaṭaṃ, avasese muttādiratane sabbesampi atthāya dukkaṭameva. Kappiyavatthuṃ vā akappiyavatthuṃ vā antamaso mātusantakampi bhaṇḍāgārikasīsena paṭisāmentassa pācittiyaṃ, tādisaṃ pana attano santakaṃ katvā paṭisāmetuṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Idaṃ paṭisāmethā’’ti vutte pana ‘‘na vaṭṭatī’’ti paṭikkhipitabbaṃ. Sace kupitā pātetvā gacchanti, palibodho nāma hoti, paṭisāmetabbaṃ. Vihāre kammaṃ karontā vaḍḍhakīādayo vā rājavallabhā vā ‘‘yaṃkiñci upakaraṇaṃ vā sayanabhaṇḍaṃ vā paṭisāmetvā dethā’’ti vadanti, chandenapi bhayenapi na kātabbameva, guttaṭṭhānaṃ pana dassetuṃ vaṭṭati.

Ratananti: gems such as pearls, etc., of various kinds. Ratanasammatanti: anything used or consumed by people. Ajjhārāme vāti: within the boundary of a defined area, or within two leḍḍupāta (stone's throw) of an undefined area. Ajjhāvasatheti: within the boundary of a defined area, or within musalapāta (pestle's throw) of an undefined area. The judgment here is as follows: for one who picks up or has picked up gold or silver for his own sake, there is a nissaggiya pācittiya. For the sake of the Saṅgha, a group, an individual, a shrine, or new construction, there is a dukkata; in other cases, for all purposes, there is only a dukkata for gems such as pearls, etc. There is a pācittiya for one who returns allowable or unallowable items, even those belonging to his mother, under the supervision of the treasurer; however, it is proper to return such items after making them his own. But when told, "Return this," it should be refused, saying, "It is not proper." If they become angry and throw it down and leave, it is called an encumbrance and should be returned. If carpenters or royal favorites doing work in the monastery say, "Return whatever equipment or bedding there is," it should not be done, even out of desire or fear; however, it is proper to point out a safe place.

Ajjhārāmaajjhāvasathesupi yādise ṭhāne ‘‘bhikkhūhi vā sāmaṇerehi vā gahitaṃ bhavissatī’’ti āsaṅkā uppajjati, tādiseyeva ṭhāne uggahetvā vā uggahāpetvā vā saññāṇaṃ katvā nikkhipitabbaṃ, ‘‘yassa bhaṇḍaṃ naṭṭhaṃ, so āgacchatū’’ti ca ācikkhitabbaṃ. Atha yo āgacchati, so ‘‘kīdisaṃ te bhaṇḍaṃ naṭṭha’’nti pucchitabbo, sace saññāṇena sampādeti, dātabbaṃ. No ce, ‘vicināhī’ti vattabbo. Tamhā āvāsā pakkamantena patirūpānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ hatthe, tesu asati patirūpānaṃ gahapatikānaṃ hatthe nikkhipitvā pakkamitabbaṃ. Yo pana neva pakkamati, na sāmikaṃ passati, tena thāvaraṃ senāsanaṃ vā cetiyaṃ vā pokkharaṇiṃ vā kāretabbo. Sace dīghassa addhuno accayena sāmiko āgacchati, taṃ dassetvā ‘anumodāhī’ti vattabbo. Sace nānumodati, ‘‘dehi me dhana’’nti codeti, samādapetvā dātabbaṃ.

Even in a monastery or dwelling, in such a place where the thought arises, "It will be taken by monks or novices," having picked it up or having had it picked up, a sign should be made and it should be deposited, and it should be announced, "Whoever has lost an item, let him come." Then, whoever comes should be asked, "What kind of item did you lose?" If he confirms the sign, it should be given. If not, he should be told, "Look for it." One departing from that residence should deposit it in the hands of suitable monks, or if there are none, in the hands of suitable householders. But one who neither departs nor sees the owner should have a permanent dwelling or shrine or pond built. If the owner comes after a long time, having shown it, he should be told, "Approve." If he does not approve and demands, "Give me the property," having reconciled, it should be given.

Sāvatthiyaṃ aññataraṃ bhikkhuṃ ārabbha ratanauggaṇhanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘aññatra ajjhārāmā vā, ajjhāvasathā vā’’ti ayamettha duvidhā anupaññatti, sādhāraṇapaññatti, sāṇattikaṃ, anuññātaṭṭhāne anādariyena uggahetvā anikkhipantassa dukkaṭaṃ. Anuññātaṭṭhāne gahetvā nikkhipantassa, yaṃ hoti āmāsaṃ ratanasammataṃ, taṃ vissāsaṃ vā tāvakālikaṃ vā uggaṇhantassa, paṃsukūlasaññāya gaṇhato, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Ananuññātakaraṇaṃ, parasantakatā, vissāsaggāhapaṃsukūlasaññānaṃ abhāvo, uggahaṇaṃ vā uggahāpanaṃ vāti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni sañcarittasadisānīti.

This was promulgated in Sāvatthi regarding an incident of a monk picking up a gem, the statement "elsewhere than in a monastery or dwelling" is a two-fold amendment here, a common promulgation, a command, and there is a dukkata for one who picks up in a permitted place without care and does not deposit it. For one who picks up and deposits in a permitted place, for one who picks up something considered a gem without trust or temporarily, for one who takes it with the perception of rag-robe, and there is no offense for the insane, etc. Not doing in an unpermitted place, being another's property, the absence of the perception of taking with trust or rag-robe, picking up or having it picked up—these are the four factors here. The origin, etc., are similar to those of sañcaritta.

Ratanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Ratanasikkhāpada is complete.

3. Vikālagāmappavesanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Vikālagāmappavesanasikkhāpada

santaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchāti idaṃ cāritte vuttanayameva.Vikāleti majjhanhikātikkamato paṭṭhāya antoaruṇe, etasmiṃ antare ‘‘vikāle gāmappavesanaṃ āpucchāmī’’ti vā, ‘‘gāmaṃ pavisissāmī’’ti vā anāpucchitvā asati tathārūpe accāyike karaṇīye parikkhittassa gāmassa parikkhepaṃ atikkamantassa, aparikkhittassa upacāraṃ okkamantassa paṭhamapāde dukkaṭaṃ, dutiyapāde pācittiyaṃ. Sacepi sambahulā kenaci kammena gāmaṃ pavisanti, sabbehi aññamaññaṃ āpucchitabbaṃ. ‘‘Tasmiṃ gāme taṃ kammaṃ na sampajjatī’’ti aññaṃ gāmaṃ gacchantānaṃ puna āpucchanakiccaṃ natthi. Sace pana ussāhaṃ paṭippassambhetvā vihāraṃ gacchantā antarā aññaṃ gāmaṃ pavisitukāmā honti, āpucchitabbameva. Kulaghare vā āsanasālāyaṃ vā bhattakiccaṃ katvā telabhikkhāya vā sappibhikkhāya vā caritukāmena sace passe bhikkhu atthi, āpucchitabbo, asante ‘natthī’ti gantabbaṃ. Vīthiṃ otaritvā pana bhikkhuṃ disvāpi āpucchanakiccaṃ natthi. Yo pana gāmamajjhena maggo hoti, sace tena gacchantassa ‘‘telādīnaṃ atthāya carissāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppajjati, passe bhikkhuṃ disvā āpucchitabbaṃ. Maggā anokkamma carantassa pana āpucchanakiccaṃ natthi, okkamantassa vuttanayeneva pācittiyaṃ.

Santaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchāti: this is in the same manner as stated in the rules of conduct. Vikāleti: from after midday until dawn, in this interval, without asking permission, saying, "I ask permission to enter the village at the wrong time" or "I will enter the village," without such an urgent reason, for one who crosses the boundary of a defined village, or for one who steps into the vicinity of an undefined village, there is a dukkata for the first step and a pācittiya for the second step. Even if many enter a village for some work, all should ask permission from each other. If they are going to another village because "that work is not accomplished in that village," there is no need to ask permission again. But if, having abandoned the effort, they are going to the monastery and want to enter another village in between, permission must be asked. Having done the meal duties in a family house or assembly hall, if one wants to go for oil alms or ghee alms, if there is a monk present, he should be asked; if there is no one, he should go thinking, "There is no one." However, having descended into the street, there is no need to ask permission even if one sees a monk. But if there is a road through the middle of the village, if the thought arises, "I will go for oil etc.," while going on it, one should ask permission if one sees a monk. However, for one who goes without deviating from the road, there is no need to ask permission; for one who deviates, there is a pācittiya in the manner stated.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye ārabbha vikāle gāmappavesanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘santaṃ bhikkhu’’nti ca ‘‘anāpucchā’’ti ca ‘‘aññatra tathārūpā accāyikā karaṇīyā’’ti ca imā panettha tisso anupaññattiyo, asādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, kāle vikālasaññino, vematikassa ca dukkaṭaṃ. Kālasaññino pana, yo ca accāyike vā karaṇīye, santaṃ vā āpucchitvā, asantaṃ vā anāpucchitvā pavisati, antarārāmabhikkhunupassayatitthiyaseyyapaṭikkamanesu vā aññataraṃ gacchati, tassa, gāmena maggo hoti, tena gacchato, āpadāsu, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Santaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchatā, anuññātakāraṇābhāvo, vikāle gāmappavisananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni kathinasadisāneva, idaṃ pana kiriyākiriyanti.

This was promulgated in Sāvatthi regarding the six-group monks in the incident of entering the village at the wrong time; and "a monk being present," and "without asking permission," and "except for such an urgent reason"—these are the three amendments here, a non-common promulgation, a non-command, a three-pācittiya, and there is a dukkata for one who perceives it as the wrong time during the right time and for one who is doubtful. But for one who perceives it as the right time, and for one who enters with an urgent reason, or having asked permission if a monk is present, or without asking permission if a monk is not present, or goes to one of the places such as the interior of the monastery, a nunnery, a place of ascetics, or to a lodging, there is no offense for him, or if there is a road through the village and he goes on it, in times of danger, and for the insane, etc. A monk being present and not asking permission, the absence of a permitted reason, entering the village at the wrong time—these are the three factors here. The origin, etc., are similar to kathina, but this is an action and non-action.

Vikālagāmappavesanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Vikālagāmappavesanasikkhāpada is complete.

4. Sūcigharasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Sūcigharasikkhāpada

bhedanakaṃ. Tasmā evarūpe sūcighare karaṇakārāpanesu dukkaṭaṃ, paṭilābhena pana taṃ bhinditvā pācittiyaṃ desetabbaṃ.

Bhedanakaṃ: Therefore, in such needle cases, there is a dukkata for making or having it made, but having received it, one should break it and confess the pācittiya.

Sakkesu sambahule bhikkhū ārabbha bahusūcigharaviññāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, sāṇattikaṃ, attanā vippakataṃ attanā vā, parehi vā, parehi vippakatampi attanā vā, parehi vā pariyosāpetvā labhantassa catukkapācittiyaṃ. Aññassatthāya karaṇakārāpanesu, aññena kataṃ paṭilabhitvā paribhuñjane dukkaṭaṃ. Gaṇṭhike araṇike vidhe añjaniyā añjanisalākāya vāsijaṭe udakapuñchaniyāti etesu yaṃkiñci aṭṭhiādīhi karontassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Sūcigharatā, aṭṭhimayāditā, attano atthāya karaṇaṃ vā kārāpetvā vā paṭilābhoti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni sañcarittasadisānīti.

This was promulgated in the Sakyas regarding many monks in the incident of requesting many needle cases, a common promulgation, a command, and for one who obtains a needle case that is completed by oneself, or by others, or completed by oneself or by others even if it was begun by others, there is a four-pācittiya. There is a dukkata for making or having it made for another, or for using it after receiving one made by another. There is no offense for one who makes any of these—a fastener, a fire-drill, a file, an eye-ointment, an eye-ointment stick, a wood-plane, or a water-wiper—from bone, etc., and for the insane, etc. Being a needle case, being made of bone, etc., making or having it made for oneself, or obtaining it—these are the three factors here. The origin, etc., are similar to those of sañcaritta.

Sūcigharasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Sūcigharasikkhāpada is complete.

5. Mañcapīṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Mañcapīṭhasikkhāpada

mañcanti masārakādīsu aññataraṃ.Pīṭhampi tādisameva, taṃ pana mañco viya atidīghaṃ, āsandiko viya ca samaṃ caturassaṃ na hoti.Chedanakaṃbhedanakasadisameva.

Mañcanti: any of the various kinds such as a masāraka. Pīṭhampi: is also similar, but it is not as long as a couch, nor is it a perfect square like a chair. Chedanakaṃ: is similar to bhedanaka.

Sāvatthiyaṃ upanandaṃ ārabbha ucce mañce sayanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, pamāṇikaṃ karontassa, pamāṇātikkantaṃ labhitvā chinditvā yathā pamāṇameva upari dissati, evaṃ nikhaṇitvā vā, uttānaṃ vā katvā, aṭṭakaṃ vā bandhitvā paribhuñjantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Pamāṇātikkantamañcapīṭhatā, attano atthāya karaṇaṃ vā kārāpetvā vā paṭilābhoti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ sūcigharasikkhāpadasadisamevāti.

This was promulgated in Sāvatthi regarding Upananda in the incident of sleeping on a high couch; there is no offense for one who makes it according to the standard, or having obtained one exceeding the standard, cuts it and uses it after making it according to the standard by digging it in, or turning it over, or tying a frame, and for the insane, etc. Being a couch or chair exceeding the standard, making or having it made for oneself, or obtaining it—these are the two factors here. All the rest is similar to the Sūcigharasikkhāpada.

Mañcapīṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Mañcapīṭhasikkhāpada is complete.

6. Tūlonaddhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Tūlonaddhasikkhāpada

tūlonaddhaṃ,cimilikaṃ pattharitvā tūlaṃ pakkhipitvā upari cimilikāya onaddhanti vuttaṃ hoti.Uddālanakaṃbhedanakasadisameva.

Tūlonaddhaṃ: spreading a cīmilikā (fabric), placing cotton inside, and covering it with the cīmilikā on top—this is what is meant. Uddālanakaṃ: is similar to bhedanaka.

Bimbohanañcettha sīsappamāṇameva vaṭṭati, sīsappamāṇaṃ nāma yassa vitthārato tīsu koṇesu dvinnaṃ antaraṃ vidatthicaturaṅgulaṃ hoti, majjhe muṭṭhiratanaṃ, dīghato diyaḍḍharatanaṃ vā dviratanaṃ vā. Tūlonaddhamañcapīṭhatā, attano atthāya karaṇaṃ vā kārāpetvā vā paṭilābhoti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbanti.

Here, bimbohana is suitable only if it is head-sized; a head-size means that the distance between two of the three corners is a span and four finger-widths in breadth, a fist and a cubit in the middle, and one and a half or two cubits in length. Being a cotton-filled couch or chair, making or having it made for oneself, or obtaining it—these are the two factors here. The rest should be understood in the manner stated.

Tūlonaddhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Tūlonaddhasikkhāpada is complete.

7. Nisīdanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Nisīdanasikkhāpada

nisīdananti santhatasadisaṃ santharitvā ekasmiṃ ante sugatavidatthippamāṇaṃ dvīsu ṭhānesu phāletvā katāhi tīhi dasāhi yuttassa parikkhārassetaṃ nāmaṃ.

Nisīdananti: this is the name for a spread-like covering, spread out, with the edge made by cutting out two places, each the size of the Sugata's span, on one side and joined with three borders.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye ārabbha appamāṇikāni nisīdanāni dhāraṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘dasā vidatthī’’ti ayamettha anupaññatti, asādhāraṇapaññatti, pamāṇikaṃ vā ūnakaṃ vā karontassa, aññena kataṃ pamāṇātikkantaṃ paṭilabhitvā chinditvā paribhuñjantassa, vitānādīsu yaṃkiñci karontassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Nisīdanassa pamāṇātikkantatā, attano atthāya karaṇaṃ vā kārāpetvā vā paṭilābhoti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbanti.

This was promulgated in Sāvatthi regarding the six-group monks in the incident of possessing non-standard nisīdana; the statement "ten spans" is an amendment here, a non-common promulgation, for one who makes it according to the standard or smaller, or for one who, having obtained one made by another exceeding the standard, cuts it and uses it, or for one who makes anything such as a canopy, and for the insane, etc., there is no offense. The nisīdana exceeding the standard, making or having it made for oneself, or obtaining it—these are the two factors here. The rest should be understood in the manner stated.

Nisīdanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Nisīdanasikkhāpada is complete.

8. Kaṇḍuppaṭicchādisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Kaṇḍuppaṭicchādisikkhāpada

kaṇḍuppaṭicchādinti adhonābhiubbhajāṇumaṇḍalaṃ kaṇḍupīḷakaassāvathullakacchābādhānaṃ paṭicchādanatthaṃ anuññātaṃ cīvaraṃ.

Kaṇḍuppaṭicchādinti: a cloth allowed for covering below the navel and above the knees, for the purpose of covering itches, sores, roughness, armpit ailments.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye ārabbha appamāṇikāyo kaṇḍuppaṭicchādikāyo dhāraṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, sesaṃ nisīdane vuttanayeneva veditabbanti.

This was promulgated in Sāvatthi regarding the six-group monks in the incident of possessing non-standard kaṇḍuppaṭicchādika; a common promulgation, the rest should be understood in the manner stated in the nisīdana.

Kaṇḍuppaṭicchādisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Kaṇḍuppaṭicchādisikkhāpada is complete.

9. Vassikasāṭikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Vassikasāṭikasikkhāpada

Navame sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye ārabbha appamāṇikāyo vassikasāṭikāyo dhāraṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sesamettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ nisīdane vuttanayamevāti.

In the ninth, this was promulgated in Sāvatthi regarding the six-group monks in the incident of possessing non-standard vassikasāṭika; what should be said here is just as stated in the nisīdana.

Vassikasāṭikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Vassikasāṭikasikkhāpada is complete.

10. Nandasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Nandasikkhāpada

Dasame sāvatthiyaṃ āyasmantaṃ nandaṃ ārabbha sugatacīvarappamāṇaṃ cīvaraṃ dhāraṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sādhāraṇapaññatti, sesaṃ nisīdane vuttanayamevāti.

In the tenth, this was promulgated in Sāvatthi regarding the venerable Nanda in the incident of possessing a robe the size of the Sugata's robe; a common promulgation, the rest should be understood in the manner stated in the nisīdana.

Nandasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Nandasikkhāpada is complete.

Ratanavaggo navamo.

The ninth Ratanavagga.

Kaṅkhāvitaraṇiyā pātimokkhavaṇṇanāya

In the Kaṅkhāvitaraṇī's Pātimokkhavaṇṇanā

Suddhapācittiyavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Pure Pācittiya is complete.

Pāṭidesanīyakaṇḍo

The Pāṭidesanīya Section

1. Paṭhamapāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. The Commentary on the First Pāṭidesanīya Training Rule

antaragharaṃ paviṭṭhāyāti vacanato sace tassā antarārāmādīsu ṭhatvāpi dadamānāya hatthato sayaṃ rathiyābyūhasiṅghāṭakagharānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ ṭhitopi gaṇhāti, doso natthi. Tassā pana rathiyādīsu ṭhatvā dadamānāya, rathiyādīsu vā, antarārāmādīsu vā ṭhatvāpi yaṃkiñci āmisaṃ ajjhoharaṇatthāya gaṇhato paṭiggahaṇe dukkaṭaṃ, ajjhohāre ajjhohāre pāṭidesanīyaṃ. Tassa desetabbākārogārayhaṃ āvusotiādinā nayena sikkhāpade dassitoyeva.

Regarding the statement "Having entered inside the house," even if she, while standing in places such as inside a monastery, gives, and he takes from her hand while standing in one of the places such as a street intersection, a public square, or a house, there is no offense. But if she gives while standing in the street, etc., or if he, even while standing inside a monastery, etc., takes any kind of food for the purpose of consuming it, there is a dukkaṭa in the acceptance, and a pāṭidesanīya for each act of consuming. The way to declare it is shown in the training rule itself, in the manner "Reprehensible, friend," etc.

Sāvatthiyaṃ aññataraṃ bhikkhuṃ ārabbha aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā antaragharaṃ paviṭṭhāya hatthato āmisaṃ paṭiggahaṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, asādhāraṇapaññatti, anāṇattikaṃ, yathā cetaṃ, tathā sesānipi, tikapāṭidesanīyaṃ, yāmakālikādīsu paṭiggahaṇepi ajjhoharaṇepi dukkaṭaṃ, ekatoupasampannāya yāvakālikepi tatheva, ñātikāya aññātikasaññivematikānampi eseva nayo. Ñātikasaññino pana, ñātikāya vā dāpentiyā, upanikkhipitvā vā dadamānāya, yā ca antarārāmabhikkhunupassayatitthiyaseyyapaṭikkamanesu ṭhatvā gāmato bahi nīharitvā, yāmakālikādīni vā ‘‘sati paccaye paribhuñjā’’ti deti, tassa, sikkhamānasāmaṇerīnañca hatthato gahetvā paribhuñjantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Paripuṇṇūpasampannatā, aññātikatā, antaraghare ṭhitāya hatthato sahatthā paṭiggahaṇaṃ, yāvakālikatā, ajjhoharaṇanti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasadisānīti.

It was established in Sāvatthī concerning a certain bhikkhu and the case of accepting food from the hand of a bhikkhunī who is not a relative, having entered inside a house. It is a non-common enactment, not authorized. Just as this is, so are the remaining ones. It is a tikapāṭidesanīya. There is a dukkaṭa both in accepting and consuming something that is yāmakālika, etc. It is the same even for one fully ordained when it is yāvakālika. This same method applies to one who is a relative, one who has doubt about whether she is a relative or not. But for one who perceives her as a relative, or when she is made to give by a relative, or when giving after setting it down, or when standing in places such as inside a monastery, at a bhikkhunī’s dwelling, at a heretical hermitage, or at a place of retreat, and bringing out yāmakālika etc. from the village, saying "use it when there is a reason," to him, and to a female trainee (sikkhamānā) or a novice (sāmaṇerī) taking and using it from the hand, and to an insane person, etc., there is no offense. Being fully ordained, being a non-relative, accepting with one's own hand from the hand of one standing inside a house, being yāvakālika, and consuming are the five factors in this case. The origination, etc., are like elaka wool.

Paṭhamapāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the First Pāṭidesanīya Training Rule is complete.

2. Dutiyapāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. The Commentary on the Second Pāṭidesanīya Training Rule

idha sūpantiādi vosāsanākāradassanaṃ.Apasakka tāva bhaginītiādi apasādetabbākāradassanaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ vinicchayo – ekenāpi bhikkhunā anapasādite ajjhoharaṇatthāya āmisaṃ gaṇhantānaṃ paṭiggahaṇe dukkaṭaṃ, ajjhohāre ajjhohāre pāṭidesanīyanti.

"Here is soup," etc., shows the manner of relinquishing. "Step aside, sister," etc., shows the manner of being told to step aside. Here is the judgment in this case: If even one bhikkhu does not cause them to step aside, there is a dukkaṭa in the acceptance of those who are accepting food for the purpose of consuming it, and a pāṭidesanīya for each act of consuming.

Rājagahe chabbaggiye ārabbha bhikkhuniyā vosāsantiyā nanivāraṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, tikapāṭidesanīyaṃ, ekatoupasampannāya vosāsantiyā nanivārentassa dukkaṭaṃ, tathā anupasampannāya upasampannasaññino vematikassa ca. Anupasampannasaññino, pana yo ca attano vā bhattaṃ dāpentiyā, aññesaṃ vā bhattaṃ dentiyā, yaṃ vā na dinnaṃ, taṃ dāpentiyā, yattha vā na dinnaṃ, tattha, sabbesaṃ vā samakaṃ dāpentiyā, sikkhamānāya vā sāmaṇeriyā vā vosāsantiyā paṭiggahetvā bhuñjati, tassa, pañca bhojanāni ṭhapetvā sabbattha, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Paripuṇṇūpasampannatā, pañcabhojanatā, antaraghare anuññātapakārato aññathā vosāsanā, anivāraṇā, ajjhoharaṇanti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni kathinasadisānīti.

It was established in Rājagaha concerning the group of six and the case of not preventing a bhikkhunī who is relinquishing. It is a tikapāṭidesanīya. There is a dukkaṭa for one fully ordained who does not prevent one who is relinquishing, and likewise for one not fully ordained, and for one who has doubt about whether she is fully ordained or not. But for one who perceives her as not fully ordained, and for one who makes his own food be given, or for one who makes food be given to others, or for one who makes what has not been given be given, or in a place where it has not been given, for one who makes it be given equally to all, or for a sikkhamānā or sāmaṇerī who is relinquishing, and he accepts and eats, except for the five foods, everywhere, and to an insane person, etc., there is no offense. Being fully ordained, being one of the five foods, relinquishing in a house in a way other than the way that is allowed, not preventing, and consuming are the five factors in this case. The origination, etc., are like the kaṭhina.

Dutiyapāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Second Pāṭidesanīya Training Rule is complete.

3. Tatiyapāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. The Commentary on the Third Pāṭidesanīya Training Rule

sekkhasammatānīti laddhasekkhasammutikāni.Pubbe animantitoti gharūpacārokkamanato paṭhamataraṃ upacāraṃ anokkamanteyeva pubbe animantito.Agilānonāma yo sakkoti piṇḍāya carituṃ.Pāṭidesanīyanti gharūpacāraṃ okkamitvā āmisaṃ gaṇhantassa paṭiggahaṇe tāva dukkaṭaṃ, taṃ gahetvā yatthakatthaci bhuñjantassa ajjhohāre ajjhohāre pāṭidesanīyanti.

sekha-approved means those who have received sekha approval. Not previously invited means not approaching the house before the house approach, without approaching the approach earlier. Not ill means one who is able to go for alms. Pāṭidesanīya means that for one approaching a house and accepting food, there is a dukkaṭa immediately upon acceptance, and a pāṭidesanīya for each act of consuming by one taking that and eating it anywhere.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahule bhikkhū ārabbha na mattaṃ jānitvā paṭiggahaṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘pubbe animantito, agilāno’’ti imā panettha dve anupaññattiyo, tikapāṭidesanīyaṃ, yāmakālikādīsu paṭiggahaṇepi ajjhohārepi dukkaṭaṃ, tathā asekkhasammate sekkhasammatasaññino vematikassa ca. Asekkhasammatasaññino, pana yo ca pubbe nimantito vā gilāno vā aññassa vā tesaṃ ghare paññattaṃ bhikkhaṃ gaṇhāti, yassa ca gharato nīharitvā, āsanasālādīsu vā bhikkhuṃ adisvā paṭhamaṃyeva nīharitvā, dvāramūle vā ṭhapitaṃ denti, tassa taṃ bhuñjantassa, niccabhattake, salākabhatte, pakkhike, uposathike, pāṭipadike, yāmakālikādiṃ ‘‘sati paccaye paribhuñjā’’ti dinnaṃ paribhuñjantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Sekkhasammatatā, pubbe animantitatā, agilānatā, gharūpacārokkamanaṃ, ṭhapetvā niccabhattakādīni aññaṃ āmisaṃ gahetvā bhuñjananti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasadisānīti.

It was established in Sāvatthī concerning many bhikkhus and the case of not knowing the proper amount and accepting. "Not previously invited, not ill" these two are additional enactments in this case. It is a tikapāṭidesanīya. There is a dukkaṭa both in accepting and consuming something that is yāmakālika, etc. It is the same for one who is not sekha-approved, and for one who has doubt about whether he is sekha-approved or not. But for one who perceives himself as not sekha-approved, or one who is previously invited, or is ill, or takes the alms food appointed in the house of another, and for one from whose house, after taking it out, or without seeing a bhikkhu in the assembly hall, etc., taking it out earlier, or it is placed at the doorway and given, to him, when he eats that, to one eating regular food (niccabhatta), ticket food (salākabhatta), fortnightly food (pakkhika), Uposatha food (uposathika), first day food (pāṭipadike), and consuming yāmakālika, etc., given with the words "use it when there is a reason," and to an insane person, etc., there is no offense. Being sekha-approved, being not previously invited, being not ill, approaching a house, and taking and consuming food other than regular food, etc., are the five factors in this case. The origination, etc., are like elaka wool.

Tatiyapāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Third Pāṭidesanīya Training Rule is complete.

4. Catutthapāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. The Commentary on the Fourth Pāṭidesanīya Training Rule

yāni kho pana tāni āraññakānītiādi cīvaravippavāsasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.Pubbe appaṭisaṃviditanti ettha yaṃ itthiyā vā purisena vā gahaṭṭhena vā pabbajitena vā ārāmaṃ vā ārāmūpacāraṃ vā pavisitvā ‘‘itthannāmassa, bhante, kulassa khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā āhariyissatī’’ti (pāci. 573) ārocitaṃ, taṃ pacchā yathāārocitameva vā āhariyatu, tassa parivāraṃ katvā aññaṃ vā tena saddhiṃ bahukampi, ‘‘itthannāmaṃ kulaṃ paṭisaṃviditaṃ katvā khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā gahetvā gacchatī’’ti sutvā aññāni vā kulāni tehi saddhiṃ āharantu, taṃ sabbaṃpaṭisaṃviditaṃnāma. Yaṃ pana evaṃ anārocitaṃ anāhaṭañca, taṃappaṭisaṃviditaṃnāma.Agilānonāma yo sakkoti piṇḍāya gantuṃ.Pāṭidesanīyanti evarūpaṃ antamaso ārāmamajjhena gacchantehi addhikehi dinnampi ārāme vā ārāmūpacāre vā paṭiggahetvā ajjhoharantassa paṭiggahaṇe dukkaṭaṃ, ajjhohāre ajjhohāre pāṭidesanīyanti.

Those forest dwellings that are etc., should be understood in the same way as stated in the training rule on abandoning robes. Not previously arranged for here, whatever is announced by a woman or a man, a householder or a renunciant, having entered a monastery or the vicinity of a monastery, "Food or edibles will be brought for the family named such-and-such, venerable sir" (pāci. 573), let that be brought later just as announced, or, making a group around that, let other families bring much more with them, hearing "Having arranged for the family named such-and-such, he is going taking edibles or food," all of that is called arranged for. But whatever is not announced in this way and not brought is called not arranged for. Not ill means one who is able to go for alms. Pāṭidesanīya means that for one accepting and consuming such a thing, even when given by travelers going through the middle of the monastery, either in the monastery or in the vicinity of the monastery, there is a dukkaṭa in the acceptance, and a pāṭidesanīya for each act of consuming.

Sakkesu sambahule bhikkhū ārabbha ārāme core paṭivasante anārocanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘agilāno’’ti ayamettha ekā anupaññatti, tikapāṭidesanīyaṃ, yāmakālikādīsu āhāratthāya paṭiggahaṇepi ajjhohārepi dukkaṭameva, tathā paṭisaṃvidite appaṭisaṃviditasaññino vematikassa ca, paṭisaṃviditasaññino, pana gilānassa, yo ca paṭisaṃviditaṃ katvā āhaṭaṃ vā gilānāvasesakaṃ vā bahārāme vā paṭiggahitaṃ, tatthajātakameva vā mūlaphalādiṃ, yāmakālikādīsu vā yaṃkiñci ‘‘sati paccaye paribhuñjā’’ti laddhaṃ paribhuñjantassa, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti. Yathāvuttaāraññakasenāsanatā, yāvakālikassa atatthajātakatā, agilānatā, agilānāvasesakatā, appaṭisaṃviditatā, ajjhārāme paṭiggahaṇaṃ, ajjhoharaṇanti imānettha satta aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni kathinasadisāneva, idaṃ pana kiriyākiriyanti.

It was established among the Sakyans concerning many bhikkhus and the case of not announcing when thieves were dwelling in a monastery. "Not ill" this is an additional enactment in this case. It is a tikapāṭidesanīya. There is a dukkaṭa both in accepting for the sake of food and in consuming something that is yāmakālika, etc. It is the same for one who has doubt about whether it is arranged for, and one who perceives it as not arranged for. But for one who perceives it as arranged for, or one who is ill, and for one who consumes what is arranged for and brought, or what remains from the ill, or what is accepted in the outer monastery, or just the roots, fruits, etc. that grew there, or anything whatsoever from yāmakālika etc. given with the words "use it when there is a reason," and to an insane person, etc., there is no offense. Being a forest dwelling as described, being not produced there of what is yāvakālika, being not ill, being what remains from the ill, being not arranged for, accepting in the middle of a monastery, and consuming are the seven factors in this case. The origination, etc., are just like the kaṭhina, but this is action and non-action.

Catutthapāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Fourth Pāṭidesanīya Training Rule is complete.

Kaṅkhāvitaraṇiyā pātimokkhavaṇṇanāya

In the Kaṅkhāvitaraṇī commentary on the Pātimokkha,

Pāṭidesanīyavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Pāṭidesanīya is complete.

Sekhiyakaṇḍo

The Sekhiya Section

1. Parimaṇḍalasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. The Parimaṇḍala Training Rule

parimaṇḍalanti samantato maṇḍalaṃ.Sikkhā karaṇīyāti ‘‘evaṃ nivāsessāmī’’ti ārāmepi antaragharepi sabbattha sikkhā kātabbā, ettha ca yasmā vattakkhandhake vuttavattānipi sikkhitabbattā sekhiyāneva honti, tasmā pārājikādīsu viya paricchedo na kato. Cārittavinayadassanatthañca ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu olambento nivāseyya, dukkaṭa’’nti evaṃ āpattināmena avatvā ‘‘sikkhā karaṇīyā’’ti evaṃ sabbasikkhāpadesu pāḷi āropitā, padabhājane (pāci. 576) pana ‘‘āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vuttattā sabbattha anādariyakaraṇe dukkaṭaṃ veditabbaṃ.

Parimaṇḍala means completely round. Training should be done means "I will wear it in this way," training should be done everywhere, both in the monastery and inside the house. And here, since the duties stated in the section on duties are also sekhiya since they are to be trained in, therefore a boundary is not made as in the Pārājikas, etc. And to show the code of conduct, the Pāḷi is imposed in all the training rules in this way "Training should be done," without saying "The bhikkhu who wears it dangling commits a dukkaṭa," thus, since it is said in the word analysis (pāci. 576) "There is an offense of dukkaṭa," it should be understood that there is a dukkaṭa everywhere when doing it disrespectfully.

parimaṇḍalanti ettha nābhimaṇḍalaṃ paṭicchādetvā jāṇumaṇḍalassa heṭṭhā jaṅghaṭṭhikato paṭṭhāya aṭṭhaṅgulamattaṃ nivāsanaṃ otāretvā nivāsentena parimaṇḍalaṃ nivatthaṃ nāma hoti, evaṃ anivāsetvā anādariyena purato vā pacchato vā olambetvā nivāsentassa dukkaṭaṃ. Na kevalañca tasseva, ye caññe ‘‘tena kho pana samayena chabbaggiyā gihinivatthaṃ nivāsenti, hatthisoṇḍakaṃ macchavālakaṃ catukkaṇṇakaṃ tālavaṇṭakaṃ satavalikaṃ nivāsenti, saṃvalliyaṃ nivāsentī’’ti khandhake (cūḷava. 280) nivāsanadosā vuttā, tathā nivāsentassapi dukkaṭameva.

Here, in parimaṇḍala, having covered the navel area, having let down the lower garment eight fingerbreadths from the shinbone below the kneecap, the wearing is called wearing in a parimaṇḍala manner. By not wearing in this way, there is a dukkaṭa for one wearing it disrespectfully, dangling in front or behind. And not only for that one, but also for others "At that time the group of six were wearing the clothes of householders, wearing them in the style of an elephant's trunk, a fish's tail, a four-cornered style, a palm-leaf fan style, a hundred-fold style, wearing it tightly," the faults of wearing that are stated in the Khandhaka (cūḷava. 280), there is also a dukkaṭa for one wearing it in that way.

hatthisoṇḍakaṃnāma nābhimūlato hatthisoṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ olambakaṃ katvā nivatthaṃ coḷikaitthīnaṃ nivāsanaṃ viya.Macchavālakaṃnāma ekatodasantaṃ ekato pāsantaṃ olambetvā nivatthaṃ.Catukkaṇṇakaṃnāma upari dve, heṭṭhato dveti evaṃ cattāro kaṇṇe dassetvā nivatthaṃ.Tālavaṇṭakaṃnāma tālavaṇṭākārena sāṭakaṃ olambetvā nivatthaṃ.Satavalikaṃnāma dīghasāṭakaṃ anekakkhattuṃ obhujitvā ovaṭṭikaṃ karontena nivatthaṃ, vāmadakkhiṇapassesu vā nirantaraṃ valiyo dassetvā nivatthaṃ. Sace pana jāṇuto paṭṭhāya ekā vā dve vā valiyo paññāyanti, vaṭṭati.Saṃvalliyanti mallakammakārādīhi viya kacchaṃ bandhitvā nivatthaṃ. Evaṃ nivāsetuṃ gilānassāpi maggappaṭipannassāpi na vaṭṭati. Yampi maggaṃ gacchantā ekaṃ vā dve vā kaṇṇe ukkhipitvā antaravāsakassa upari lagganti, anto vā ekaṃ kāsāvaṃ tathā nivāsetvā bahi aparaṃ nivāsenti, sabbaṃ na vaṭṭati.

Elephant's trunk means wearing the lower garment by making a hanging fold in the shape of an elephant's trunk from the navel area, like the wearing of clothes by Coḷika women. Fish's tail means wearing the lower garment by letting one edge hang down and one edge cover. Four-cornered means wearing the lower garment by showing four corners, two above and two below. Palm-leaf fan means wearing the lower garment by letting the cloth hang down in the shape of a palm-leaf fan. Hundred-fold means wearing the long cloth by folding it many times, and wearing it while making it round, or wearing it showing uninterrupted folds on the left and right sides. But if one or two folds are apparent starting from the knee, it is allowable. Tightly means wearing the lower garment by tying it at the armpit, like those who work in wrestling, etc. It is not allowable for even a sick person or one traveling on the road to wear it in this way. And when going on the road, if they lift one or two corners and stick them on top of the undergarment, or wear one yellow robe in that way inside and wear another outside, all of that is not allowable.

Gilāno pana antokāsāvassa ovaṭṭikaṃ dassetvā aparaṃ upari nivāsetuṃ labhati, agilānena dve nivāsentena saguṇaṃ katvā nivāsetabbāni. Iti imaṃ khandhake paṭikkhittañca olambakañca sabbaṃ vivajjetvā vuttalakkhaṇasampannaṃ nibbikāraṃ parimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsetabbaṃ, tathā anivāsetvā yaṃkiñci vikāraṃ karontassa dukkaṭaṃ.

But a sick person is allowed to wear another robe on top, showing the round fold of the inner robe. When two are wearing robes, one who is not sick should wear them having made a saguṇa. Thus, having avoided all of this that is rejected in the Khandhaka and the dangling, one should wear it impeccably, completely round, with the characteristics stated. Doing any kind of alteration without wearing it in that way results in a dukkaṭa.

‘‘Nidānaṃ puggalaṃ vatthu’’ntiādike (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā ) pana vinicchaye surusurukārakaṃ kosambiyaṃ paññattaṃ, sāmisena hatthena pānīyathālakasasitthakapattadhovanapaṭisaṃyuttadvayaṃ bhaggesu sambahule bhikkhū ārabbha, sesāni sabbāneva sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiye ārabbha olambetvā nivāsanādivatthusmiṃ paññattāni. Sūpodanaviññattiyaṃ dhammadesanādīsu ca gilānavasena ekā anupaññatti, sabbāni sādhāraṇapaññattiyo, anāṇattikāni, sabbesu dukkaṭameva, añño āpattibhedo natthi, vipattivicāraṇā vuttāyeva, samuṭṭhānādīni sabbesaṃ avasāne dassayissāma. Anāpattimattaṃ pana aṅgañca sabbattha vattabbaṃ, tayidaṃ vuccati. Imasmiṃ tāva sikkhāpade asañcicca, assatiyā, ajānantassa, gilānassa, āpadāsu, ummattakādīnañca anāpatti.

In the judgment "Origin, person, thing," etc. (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā), the surusuru-maker was established in Kosambī, the pair connected with washing the bowl with water and with food-remnants with a hand mixed with food was concerning many bhikkhus among the Bhagges. All the remaining ones were established in Sāvatthī concerning the group of six and the case of wearing robes while dangling, etc. In the invitation for soup and rice, and in giving a Dhamma talk, etc., there is one additional enactment due to sickness. All are common enactments, not authorized. There is a dukkaṭa in all of them, there is no other kind of offense. The examination of adversity has already been stated. We will show the origination, etc., at the end of all of them. But only the non-offense and the factor should be stated everywhere. So this is said. In this training rule, there is no offense for one who is unintentional, unmindful, not knowing, sick, in times of danger, and for an insane person, etc.

asañciccāti ‘‘aparimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsessāmī’’ti evaṃ asañcicca, atha kho ‘‘parimaṇḍalaṃyeva nivāsessāmī’’ti virajjhitvā aparimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsentassa anāpatti.Assatiyāti aññāvihitassāpi tathā nivāsentassa anāpatti.Ajānantassāti parimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsetuṃ ajānantassa anāpatti, apica nivāsanavattaṃ uggahetabbaṃ. Yo pana sukkhajaṅgho vā hoti mahāpiṇḍikamaṃso vā, tassa sāruppatthāya aṭṭhaṅgulādhikampi otāretvā nivāsetuṃ vaṭṭati.Gilānassāti yassa jaṅghāya vā pāde vā vaṇo hoti, tassa ukkhipitvā vā otāretvā vā nivāsetuṃ vaṭṭati.Āpadāsūti vāḷā vā corā vā anubandhanti, evarūpāsu āpadāsu anāpatti.Ummattakādayo vuttanayā eva. Anādariyaṃ, anāpattikāraṇābhāvo, aparimaṇḍalanivāsananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Yathā cettha, evaṃ sabbattha purimāni dve tattha tattha vuttappaṭipakkhakaraṇañcāti tīṇiyeva honti, tasmā ito paraṃ tānipi avatvā anāpattimattameva vakkhāmāti.

Asañcicca: "I will not wear it in a completely round manner," without intending thus; but if, intending, "I will wear it completely round," then failing to do so and wearing it in an incomplete round manner, there is no offense. Assatiyā: Due to forgetfulness, even if one wears it thus, there is no offense. Ajānantassa: Not knowing how to wear it in a completely round manner, there is no offense; moreover, the proper way of wearing the lower robe should be learned. However, for one who has thin shanks or large calf muscles, it is allowable to lower it even eight finger-widths more for the sake of proper appearance. Gilānassa: For one who has a wound on their shank or foot, it is allowable to lift it up or lower it when wearing it. Āpadāsu: When dangers such as wild beasts or thieves are pursuing, in such emergencies, there is no offense. Ummattakā, etc., are as previously stated. Disrespect, absence of a reason for offense, and wearing it in an incomplete round manner—these are the three factors involved here. As it is here, so it is everywhere else, only the former two and the doing of the opposite of what is stated in each case—these are the three; therefore, from now on, without stating those, I will speak only of the non-offense.

2. Dutiyaparimaṇḍalasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Second Training Rule on Wearing it Completely Round

parimaṇḍalapārupanaṃnāma, tattha yaṃkiñci setapaṭapārutaṃ paribbājakapārutaṃ ekasāṭakapārutaṃ surāsoṇḍapārutaṃ antepurikapārutaṃ mahājeṭṭhapārutaṃ kuṭippavesakapārutaṃ brāhmaṇapārutaṃ pāḷikārakapārutanti evamādi parimaṇḍalalakkhaṇato aññathā pārutaṃ, sabbametaṃgihipārutaṃnāma. Tasmā yathā setapaṭā aḍḍhapālakanigaṇṭhā pārupanti, yathā ca ekacce paribbājakā uraṃ vivaritvā dvīsu aṃsakūṭesu pāvuraṇaṃ ṭhapenti, yathā ca ekasāṭakā manussā nivatthasāṭakassa ekena antena piṭṭhiṃ pārupitvā ubho kaṇṇe ubhosu aṃsakūṭesu ṭhapenti, yathā ca surāsoṇḍādayo sāṭakena gīvaṃ parikkhipitvā ubho ante ure vā olambenti, piṭṭhiyaṃ vā khipanti, yathā ca antepurikāyo akkhitārakamattaṃ dassetvā oguṇṭhitaṃ pārupanti, yathā ca mahājeṭṭhā dīghasāṭakaṃ nivāsetvā tasseva ekenantena sakalasarīraṃ pārupanti, yathā ca kassakā khettakuṭiṃ pavisantā sāṭakaṃ paliveṭhetvā upakacchake pakkhipitvā tasseva ekenantena sarīraṃ pārupanti, yathā ca brāhmaṇā ubhinnaṃ upakacchakānaṃ antare sāṭakaṃ pavesetvā aṃsakūṭesu pakkhipanti, yathā ca pāḷikārako bhikkhu ekaṃsapārupanena pārutaṃ vāmabāhuṃ vivaritvā cīvaraṃ aṃsakūṭe āropeti, evaṃ apārupitvā sabbepi ete, aññe ca evarūpe pārupanadose vajjetvā nibbikāraṃ parimaṇḍalaṃ pārupitabbaṃ. Tathā apārupitvā ārāme vā antaraghare vā anādarena yaṃkiñci vikāraṃ karontassa dukkaṭaṃ, anāpatti purimasadisāyeva, yathā cettha, evaṃ sabbattha. Yattha pana viseso bhavissati, tattha vakkhāmāti.

Parimaṇḍalapārupanaṃ means the act of completely covering oneself. Here, any covering such as a white cloth covering, a wanderer's covering, a single-cloth covering, a drunkard's covering, a palace woman's covering, a headman's covering, a hut-entering covering, a brahmin's covering, a scribe's covering—all these coverings that are different from the characteristics of a complete circle are all called gihipārutaṃ, a layperson's covering. Therefore, one should avoid all such covering defects and cover oneself completely in an unaltered manner, such as how those white-clothed Aḍḍhapālakanigaṇṭhas cover themselves, or how some wanderers expose their chests and place the covering on both shoulder joints, or how people with single cloths cover the back with one end of the lower cloth and place both edges on both ears and shoulder joints, or how drunkards wrap a cloth around their necks and hang both ends on their chests or throw them behind, or how palace women show only the whites of their eyes and cover themselves in a veiled manner, or how headmen wear a long cloth and cover their entire body with one end of it, or how farmers entering a field hut wrap a cloth around themselves, tuck it into their armpits, and cover their body with one end of it, or how brahmins insert a cloth between both armpits and tuck it into the shoulder joints, or how a scribe bhikkhu, wearing a single upper robe, exposes his left arm and places the robe on his shoulder joint. Without covering oneself in these ways, one should avoid all these covering defects and cover oneself completely in an unaltered manner. Thus, if one uncovers oneself and behaves in a careless manner in the monastery or inside a building, there is a dukkata offense. Non-offenses are similar to those previously mentioned; as it is here, so it is everywhere else. Wherever there will be a difference, I will speak of it.

3-4. Suppaṭicchannasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3-4. Explanation of the Training Rule on Being Well-Covered

suppaṭicchannoti suṭṭhu paṭicchanno, gaṇṭhikaṃ paṭimuñcitvā anuvātantena gīvaṃ paṭicchādetvā ubho kaṇṇe samaṃ katvā paṭisaṅgharitvā yāva maṇibandhaṃ paṭicchādetvā antaraghare gamissāmīti attho, tathā akatvā pana jāṇuṃ vā uraṃ vā vivaritvā gacchantassa dukkaṭaṃ.

Suppaṭicchanno means well-covered, that is, after fastening the clasp and covering the neck with the under-cloth, making both ears even, arranging it properly, and covering oneself down to the wrists, intending to go inside the dwelling. However, if one does not do so, but goes exposing a knee or chest, there is a dukkata offense.

suppaṭicchannonāma hoti, ettha pana vāsūpagatassa anāpatti.

Suppaṭicchanno means one is well-covered, but here, there is no offense for one who has entered residence for the rains.

5-6. Susaṃvutasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5-6. Explanation of the Training Rule on Being Well-Restrained

susaṃvutoti hatthaṃ vā pādaṃ vā akīḷāpento suvinītoti attho. Chaṭṭhepi eseva nayo.

Susaṃvuto means well-restrained, not fidgeting with the hands or feet, meaning well-behaved. The same method applies in the sixth rule as well.

7-8. Okkhittacakkhusikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7-8. Explanation of the Training Rule on Downcast Eyes

okkhittacakkhūti heṭṭhā khittacakkhu hutvā purato yugamattaṃ bhūmibhāgaṃ pekkhamāno, ekasmiṃ pana ṭhāne ṭhatvā hatthiassādiparissayābhāvaṃ oloketuṃ vaṭṭati. Aṭṭhamepi eseva nayo.

Okkittacakkhū means with downcast eyes, looking at a distance of a yoke-length ahead on the ground. However, standing in one place, it is allowable to look around to see if there is any danger from elephants, horses, etc. The same method applies in the eighth rule as well.

9-10. Ukkhittakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9-10. Explanation of the Training Rule on Not Throwing up the Robe

ukkhittakāyāti ukkhepena, itthambhūtalakkhaṇe karaṇavacanaṃ, ekato vā ubhato vā ukkhittacīvaro hutvāti attho, anto indakhīlato paṭṭhāya evaṃ na gantabbaṃ.

Ukkhittakāyāti ukkhepena, "with the body thrown up"; this is a karaṇavacanaṃ (instrumental case) indicating a characteristic state, meaning having the robe thrown up on one side or on both sides. One should not walk thus starting from inside the indakhīla (city gate post).

Dasame nisinnakāle dhamakaraṇaṃ nīharantenāpi cīvaraṃ anukkhipitvāva nīharitabbaṃ, vāsūpagatassa pana anāpatti.

In the tenth rule, even when removing a phlegm-cloth while seated, one should remove it without lifting the robe up. However, there is no offense for one who has entered residence for the rains.

11-12. Ujjagghikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
11-12. Explanation of the Training Rule on Not Laughing Loudly

ujjagghikāyāti mahāhasitaṃ hasantoti attho. Idhāpi hi itthambhūtalakkhaṇeyeva karaṇavacanaṃ.

Ujjagghikāyā means laughing a great laugh. Here too, the karaṇavacanaṃ is indeed in the sense of indicating a characteristic state.

Dvādasamepi eseva nayo. Ubhayattha hasanīyasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ mihitamattaṃ karontassa anāpatti.

The same method applies in the twelfth rule as well. In both cases, there is no offense for one who only smiles at a laughable matter.

13-14. Uccasaddasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
13-14. Explanation of the Training Rule on Not Making Loud Noises

appasaddoti na uccāsaddamahāsaddo hutvā. Cuddasamepi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ panettha appasaddatāparicchedo – sace dvādasahatthe gehe ādimhi saṅghatthero, majjhe dutiyatthero, ante tatiyattheroti evaṃ nisinnesu yaṃ saṅghatthero dutiyattherena saddhiṃ manteti, dutiyatthero ca tassa saddaṃ suṇāti, kathañca vavatthapeti. Tatiyatthero pana saddameva suṇāti, kathaṃ na vavatthapeti, ettāvatāappasaddohoti. Sace pana tatiyatthero kathañca vavatthapeti,mahāsaddonāma hoti.

Appasaddo means not being a loud or great noise. The same method applies in the fourteenth rule as well. Here is the demarcation of quietness: If, in a dwelling twelve hattha (cubits) in length, the Saṅgha Elder is sitting at the beginning, the second Elder in the middle, and the third Elder at the end, and the Saṅgha Elder discusses something with the second Elder, and the second Elder hears that sound and understands the meaning, but the third Elder only hears the sound and does not understand the meaning, this is considered appasaddo, a quiet noise. However, if the third Elder understands the meaning, it is called mahāsaddo, a great noise.

15…Pe…20. kāyappacālakādisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
15…Pe…20. Explanation of the Training Rule on Not Waggling the Body, etc.

kāyappacālakanti kāyaṃ cāletvā cāletvā, esa nayo sabbattha. Tasmā kāyādīni paggahetvā niccalāni ujukāni ṭhapetvā gantabbañceva nisīditabbañca, nisīdanappaṭisaṃyuttesu tīsu vāsūpagatassa anāpatti.

Kāyappacālakanti means repeatedly moving the body; this is the method everywhere. Therefore, having straightened and stilled the body, etc., one should walk and sit. In the three connected with sitting, there is no offense for one who has entered residence for the rains.

21-22. Khambhakatasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
21-22. Explanation of the Training Rule on Not Supporting Oneself on a Pillar

khambhakatoti kaṭiyaṃ hatthaṃ ṭhapetvā katakhambho.

Khambhakato means with the hand placed on the hip, making a pillar.

23-24. Oguṇṭhitasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
23-24. Explanation of the Training Rule on Not Covering the Head

oguṇṭhitoti sasīsaṃ pāruto.

Oguṇṭhito means covered with the head covered.

25. Ukkuṭikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
25. Explanation of the Training Rule on Not Squatting on the Heels

ukkuṭikāvuccati paṇhiyo ukkhipitvā aggapādeheva, aggapāde vā ukkhipitvā paṇhīhiyeva bhūmiyaṃ phusantassa gamanaṃ, karaṇavacanaṃ panettha vuttalakkhaṇameva.

Ukkuṭikā is called walking while lifting up the heels and touching the ground only with the tips of the toes, or lifting up the tips of the toes and touching the ground only with the heels; here, the karaṇavacanaṃ has the meaning as stated.

26. Pallatthikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
26. Explanation of the Training Rule on Not Sitting with Legs Entwined

na pallatthikāyāti hatthapallatthikāya vā dussapallatthikāya vā na nisīditabbaṃ. Anādarena nisīdantassa dukkaṭaṃ, vāsūpagatassa pana idhāpi purimesu ca dvāvīsacatuvīsesu anāpatti.

Na pallatthikāyā means one should not sit with the legs entwined with the hands or with a cloth. There is a dukkata offense for one who sits carelessly, but here too, in this and the twenty-second and twenty-fourth rules, there is no offense for one who has entered residence for the rains.

Chabbīsatisāruppasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the twenty-six Sāruppa training rules is complete.

27. Sakkaccapaṭiggahaṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
27. Explanation of the Training Rule on Receiving Respectfully

sakkaccanti satiṃ upaṭṭhāpetvā.

Sakkaccaṃ means establishing mindfulness.

28. Pattasaññīpaṭiggahaṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
28. Explanation of the Training Rule on Receiving with Awareness of the Bowl

pattasaññī,attano bhājane upanibaddhasaññī hutvāti attho.

Pattasaññī means having awareness fixed on one's own bowl.

29. Samasūpakapaṭiggahaṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
29. Explanation of the Training Rule on Receiving Soup in Proportion

samasūpakonāma yattha muggamāsehi vā kulatthādīhi vā kato hatthahāriyo sūpo bhattassa catutthabhāgappamāṇo hoti, tato hi adhikaṃ gaṇhantassa dukkaṭaṃ. Ṭhapetvā pana sūpaṃ avasesā sabbāpi sūpeyyabyañjanavikatirasarasonāma hoti, tasmiṃ rasarase, ñātakānaṃ vā pavāritānaṃ vā aññassatthāya vā attano dhanena vā idha anāpatti.

Samasūpako means when the soup made with green grams, black grams, or other such things that can be carried in the hand is about one-fourth the amount of the rice; there is a dukkata offense for taking more than that. However, setting aside the soup, all the remaining kinds of soup, relish, and variations are called rasaraso—savory flavors; in those savory flavors, there is no offense here for relatives or invited guests, or for the sake of another, or with one's own wealth.

30…Pe…32. samatittikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
30…Pe…32. Explanation of the Training Rule on Receiving so that it is Level with the Rim

samatittikanti samapuṇṇaṃ samabharitaṃ adhiṭṭhānupagapattassa antomukhavaṭṭilekhaṃ anatikkamitvā racitaṃ.Piṇḍapātanti yaṃkiñci yāvakālikaṃ. Anadhiṭṭhānupage pana yāvakālikaṃ yāmakālikādīni ca yatthakatthaci thūpīkatānipi vaṭṭanti, yaṃ pana dvīsu pattesu gahetvā ekaṃ pūretvā vihāraṃ harati, yaṃ vā pakkhipiyamānaṃ pūvaucchukkhaṇḍaphalāphalādi heṭṭhā orohati, takkolavaṭaṃsakādayo vā upari ṭhapetvā diyyanti, yañca paṇṇe vā thālake vā pakkhipitvā pattamatthake ṭhapitaṃ hoti, na taṃ thūpīkataṃ nāma, tasmā taṃ sabbaṃ vaṭṭati. Idha pana gilānassāpi anāpatti natthi, tasmā tenapi samatittikoyeva gahetabbo. Sabbattha pana paṭiggahetumeva na vaṭṭati, paṭiggahitaṃ pana suppaṭiggahitaṃ paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Pañcamachaṭṭhāni vuttanayāneva.

Samatittikaṃ means level full, filled equally, arranged without exceeding the inner circular line of the bowl that has been designated. Piṇḍapāta means anything allowable for the duration of the day. However, it is allowable to have any of the allowable-for-the-day foods, allowable-for-a-watch foods, etc., piled up in places where there has been no designation. But what is taken in two bowls and carried to the monastery after filling one, or what is piled up with pastries, sugarcane pieces, fruits, etc., that fall down below when being put in, or what is placed on top with takkolavaṭaṃsaka (cinnamomum tamala) and given, or what is put into a leaf or tray and placed on top of the bowl—that is not called "piled up"; therefore, all of that is allowable. Here, however, there is no non-offense for even a sick person; therefore, even he should take only what is level with the rim. In all cases, it is not allowable to receive it in that manner, but it is allowable to consume what has been received and well-received. The fifth and sixth rules are as previously stated.

33-34. Sapadānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
33-34. Explanation of the Training Rule on Receiving Methodically

sapadānanti tattha tattha odhiṃ akatvā anupaṭipāṭiyā. Yo pana aññesaṃ vā dento, aññabhājane vā ākiranto tato tato omasati, tassa, uttaribhaṅgañca uppaṭipāṭiyā gaṇhantassāpi idha anāpatti. Aṭṭhamaṃ vuttanayameva.

Sapadānaṃ means without making a break here and there, in an unbroken sequence. However, there is no offense here for one who gives to others or scatters into another's bowl, gleaning from here and there, nor for one who takes the uttaribhaṅga (extra food) in an unbroken sequence. The eighth rule is as previously stated.

35. Thūpakatasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
35. Explanation of the Training Rule on Receiving it Piled Up

thūpakatoti matthakato vemajjhatoti attho. Yo pana parittake sese ekato saṅkaḍḍhitvā omadditvā bhuñjati, tassāpi anāpatti.

Thūpakato means piled up to make a peak in the middle. However, there is no offense for one who, when little remains, gathers it to one side, presses it down, and eats it.

36. Odanappaṭicchādanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
36. Explanation of the Training Rule on Covering the Rice with Relish

Dasame yassa bhattasāmikā māghātasamayādīsu byañjanaṃ paṭicchādetvā denti, yo ca na bhiyyokamyatāya paṭicchādeti, tesaṃ anāpatti, gilānassa pana anāgatattā āpattiyeva.

In the tenth rule, there is no offense for those whose meal-providers cover the relish and give it during times like the Māgha festival, or who cover it without intending to ask for more; however, there is an offense for a sick person because it is not in the future tense.

37. Sūpodanaviññattisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
37. Explanation of the Training Rule on Asking for Soup or Rice

Ekādasame ñātakānaṃ vā pavāritānaṃ vā aññassatthāya attano dhanenāti idaṃ anāpattiyaṃ adhikaṃ.

In the eleventh rule, this is additional in the non-offense clause: "for relatives or invited guests, or for the sake of another, or with one's own wealth."

38. Ujjhānasaññīsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
38. Explanation of the Training Rule on Being Mindful of Disparagement

ujjhānasaññī. Idhāpi gilāno na muccati, ‘‘dassāmī’’ti vā, ‘‘dāpessāmī’’ti vā olokentassa pana, na ujjhānasaññissa ca anāpatti.

Ujjhānasaññī. Here too, a sick person is not exempt; however, there is no offense for one who looks intending "I will give" or "I will have it given," and not being mindful of disparagement.

39. Kabaḷasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
39. Explanation of the Training Rule on the Morsel

nātimahantanti mayūraṇḍaṃ atimahantaṃ, kukkuṭaṇḍaṃ atikhuddakaṃ, tesaṃ vemajjhappamāṇaṃ. Mūlakhādanīyādibhede pana sabbakhajjake phalāphale ca anāpatti.

Nātimahantaṃ—a peacock's egg is too large, a hen's egg is too small; their intermediate size is the proper measure. However, there is no offense with regard to all kinds of edibles, such as root foods and other foods, and fruits.

40. Ālopasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
40. Explanation of the Alms Ball

parimaṇḍalanti adīghaṃ. Idha pana khajjakaphalāphalehi saddhiṃ uttaribhaṅgepi anāpatti.

Parimaṇḍalaṃ means not long. Here, however, there is no offense with extra portions of edibles and fruits.

41-42. Anāhaṭasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
41-42. Explanation of the Training Rule on Not Bringing it Near

anāhaṭeti anāharite, mukhadvāraṃ asampatteti attho. Soḷasamesabbahatthanti sakalaṃ hatthaṃ.

Anāhaṭe means not brought near, meaning not reaching the mouth's opening. In the sixteenth rule, sabbahatthaṃ means the entire hand.

43. Sakabaḷasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
43. Explanation of the Training Rule on Speaking with a Mouthful

sakabaḷenāti ettha yattakena vacanaṃ aparipuṇṇaṃ hoti, tattake sati kathentassa āpatti. Yo pana dhammaṃ kathento hariṭakādīni mukhe pakkhipitvā katheti, yattakena vacanaṃ aparipuṇṇaṃ na hoti, tattake mukhamhi sati vaṭṭati.

Sakabaḷenā means, here, there is an offense if one speaks when the speech is incomplete. However, it is allowable if one speaks while teaching the Dhamma with harītakī fruits, etc., in the mouth, as long as the speech is not incomplete.

44. Piṇḍukkhepakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
44. Explanation of the Training Rule on Throwing Alms Food into the Bowl

piṇḍukkhepakanti piṇḍaṃ ukkhipitvā ukkhipitvā, idhāpi khajjakaphalāphalesu anāpatti.

Piṇḍukkhepakaṃ means repeatedly throwing alms food into the bowl; here too, there is no offense with regard to edibles and fruits.

45. Kabaḷāvacchedakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
45. Explanation of the Training Rule on Cutting Morsels

kabaḷāvacchedakanti kabaḷaṃ avacchinditvā avacchinditvā, idha khajjakaphalāphalehi saddhiṃ uttaribhaṅgepi anāpatti.

Kabaḷāvacchedakaṃ means repeatedly cutting morsels; here too, there is no offense with regard to edibles and fruits, along with uttaribhaṅga.

46. Avagaṇḍakārakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
46. Explanation of the Training Rule on Making Cheek Pouches

avagaṇḍakārakanti makkaṭo viya gaṇḍe katvā katvā, idha phalāphalamattake anāpatti.

Avagaṇḍakārakaṃ means repeatedly making pouches in the cheeks, like a monkey; here, there is no offense only with regard to fruits.

47. Hatthaniddhunakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
47. Explanation of the Training Rule on Shaking off the Hand

hatthaniddhunakanti hatthaṃ niddhunitvā niddhunitvā, anāpattiyaṃ panettha ‘‘kacavaraṃ chaḍḍento hatthaṃ niddhunātī’’ti (pāci. 623) idaṃ adhikaṃ.

Hatthaniddhunakaṃ means repeatedly shaking off the hand; here, in the non-offense clause, this is additional: "when throwing away rubbish, he shakes off his hand" (pāci. 623).

48. Sitthāvakārakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
48. Explanation of the Training Rule on Throwing away Leftovers

sitthāvakārakanti sitthāni avakiritvā avakiritvā, idhāpi ‘‘kacavaraṃ chaḍḍento sitthaṃ chaḍḍayatī’’ti (pāci. 623) idaṃ anāpattiyaṃ adhikaṃ.

Sitthāvakāraka means scattering and scattering remnants of food. Here also, "when throwing away rubbish, he throws away remnants of food" (pāci. 623), this is additional in non-offense.

49. Jivhānicchārakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
49. Explanation of the Training Rule on Flicking the Tongue

jivhānicchārakanti jivhaṃ nicchāretvā nicchāretvā.

Jivhānicchāraka means flicking and flicking the tongue.

50-51. Capucapukārakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
50-51. Explanation of the Training Rule on Making Capu Capu Sounds

capucapukārakanti capu capūti evaṃ saddaṃ katvā katvā. Pañcavīsatimepi eseva nayo.

Capucapukāraka means making sounds like "capu capu." The same method applies in the twenty-fifth rule.

52…Pe…54. hatthanillehakādisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
52…Pe…54. Explanation of the Training Rule on Licking the Hand, etc.

hatthanillehakanti hatthaṃ nillehitvā nillehitvā. Bhuñjantena hi aṅgulimattampi nillehituṃ na vaṭṭati. Ghanayāguphāṇitapāyāsādike pana aṅgulīhi gahetvā aṅguliyo mukhe pavesetvā bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati, sattavīsatimaaṭṭhavīsatimesupi eseva nayo. Tasmā ekaṅguliyāpi patto na nillehitabbo, ekaoṭṭhopi ca jivhāya na nillehitabbo, oṭṭhamaṃsehi eva pana gahetvā anto pavesetuṃ vaṭṭati.

Hatthanillehaka means licking and licking the hand. Indeed, it is not proper for one who is eating to lick even the tip of a finger. However, it is proper to take thick rice gruel, molasses, or pāyāsa with the fingers and put the fingers into the mouth and eat. The same method applies in the twenty-seventh and twenty-eighth rules. Therefore, one should not lick a bowl even with one finger, nor should one lick even one lip with the tongue; however, it is proper to take it with the lip flesh and put it inside.

55. Sāmisasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
55. Explanation of the Training Rule on Food with Meat

na sāmisenāti etaṃ paṭikūlavasena paṭikkhittaṃ, tasmā saṅghikampi puggalikampi gihisantakampi attano santakampi saṅkhopi sarāvakampi thālakampi na gahetabbameva, gaṇhantassa dukkaṭaṃ. Sace pana hatthassa ekadeso āmisamakkhito na hoti, tena padesena gahetuṃ vaṭṭati, idha ‘‘dhovissāmīti vā, dhovāpessāmīti vā paṭiggaṇhātī’’ti (pāci. 631) idaṃ anāpattiyaṃ adhikaṃ.

Na sāmisenā—this is rejected due to its repulsiveness. Therefore, one should not take a bowl or a dish that belongs to the Saṅgha, to an individual, to a householder, or to oneself, even if it is only a small bowl or a potsherd; for one who takes it, there is an offense of dukkata. But if one part of the hand is not smeared with meat, it is proper to take it with that part. Here, "if he accepts, thinking, 'I will wash it' or 'I will have it washed'" (pāci. 631), this is additional in non-offense.

56. Sasitthakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
56. Explanation of the Training Rule on Food Mixed with Rice

uddharitvā vāti sitthāni udakato uddharitvā, ekasmiṃ ṭhāne rāsiṃ katvā udakaṃ chaḍḍeti.Bhinditvā vāti sitthāni bhinditvā udakagatikāni katvā chaḍḍeti.Paṭiggahe vāti paṭiggahena paṭicchantānaṃ paṭiggahe chaḍḍeti.Nīharitvāti bahi nīharitvā chaḍḍeti, evaṃ chaḍḍentassa anāpatti.

Uddharitvā vā—having lifted the grains of rice from the water, having made a pile of them in one place, he throws away the water. Bhinditvā vā—having broken the grains of rice, having made them flow with the water, he throws them away. Paṭiggahe vā—he throws them into the receptacle of those who are receiving alms. Nīharitvā—having taken them outside, he throws them away. There is no offense for one who throws them away in this way.

Tiṃsabhojanappaṭisaṃyuttasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the thirty training rules connected with food is finished.

57. Chattapāṇisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
57. Explanation of the Training Rule on Holding an Umbrella

chattapāṇi. So taṃ chattaṃ yatthakatthaci sarīrāvayave ṭhapetvāpi yāva hatthena na muñcati, tāvassa dhammaṃ desetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sace panassa añño chattaṃ dhāreti, passe vā ṭhitaṃ hoti, hatthato apagatamatte chattapāṇi nāma na hoti, tassa desetuṃ vaṭṭati. Dhammaparicchedo cettha padasodhamme vuttanayeneva veditabbo.

Chattapāṇi: As long as he does not release that umbrella from his hand, even if he has placed it on some part of his body, it is not proper for him to teach the Dhamma. But if another person holds the umbrella for him, or it is standing nearby, as soon as it is out of his hand, he is not called "holding an umbrella," and it is proper for him to teach. The limitation of the Dhamma here should be understood in the same way as stated in the Padasodhamma.

58-59. Daṇḍapāṇisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
58-59. Explanation of the Training Rule on Holding a Stick

daṇḍonāma majjhimassa purisassa catuhatthappamāṇo, daṇḍapāṇibhāvo panassa chattapāṇimhi vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Tatiyepi eseva nayo. Asiṃ sannahitvā ṭhitopi hi satthapāṇisaṅkhyaṃ na gacchati.

Daṇḍo is the name for a stick measuring four cubits for a man of medium height. The state of holding a stick should be understood in the same way as stated for holding an umbrella. The same method applies in the third rule. Indeed, one who is standing having put on a sword is not considered to be holding a weapon.

60. Āvudhapāṇisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
60. Explanation of the Training Rule on Holding a Weapon

āvudhanti veditabbā, tasmā saddhiṃ vā sarena dhanuṃ gahetvā, suddhadhanuṃ vā suddhasaraṃ vā sajiyadhanuṃ vā nijjiyadhanuṃ vā gahetvā ṭhitassa vā nisinnassa vā dhammaṃ desetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sace panassa dhanu khandhepi paṭimukkaṃ hoti, yāva na gaṇhāti, tāva vaṭṭati.

Āvudha should be understood. Therefore, it is not proper for one who is standing or sitting holding a bow together with an arrow, or a bare bow, or a bare arrow, or a strung bow, or an unstrung bow, to teach the Dhamma. But if the bow is slung over his shoulder, it is proper as long as he does not take it up.

61-62. Pādukasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
61-62. Explanation of the Training Rule on Footwear

pādukāruḷhassāti chattadaṇḍake aṅgulantarikaṃ appavesetvā kevalaṃ akkantassa vā, pavesetvā ṭhānavasena paṭimukkassa vā. Chaṭṭhepi eseva nayo. Idha pana yvāyaṃ paṇhikabandhaṃ omuñcitvā ṭhānavasena ‘‘omukko’’ti vuccati, tassāpi na vaṭṭati.

Pādukāruḷhassa means one who merely steps on footwear without inserting his toes between the straps, or one who has inserted them but has taken them off by way of position. The same method applies in the sixth rule. Here, however, it is not proper even for one whose ankle strap has been loosened and is called "loosened" by way of position.

63. Yānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
63. Explanation of the Training Rule on a Vehicle

yānagatotveva saṅkhaṃ gacchati. Sace pana dvepi ekayāne nisinnā honti, vaṭṭati. Visuṃ nisinnesupi ucce yāne nisinnena nīce nisinnassa desetuṃ vaṭṭati, samappamāṇepi vaṭṭati, tathā purime nisinnena pacchime nisinnassa. Pacchime pana uccatarepi nisinnena desetuṃ na vaṭṭati.

He is counted as yānagato. But if two people are sitting in the same vehicle, it is proper. Even if they are sitting separately, it is proper for one sitting in a high vehicle to teach one sitting in a low one, and it is proper if they are of equal height, and likewise for one sitting in the front to teach one sitting in the back. However, it is not proper for one sitting in the back, even if higher, to teach.

64. Sayanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
64. Explanation of the Training Rule on a Bed

sayanagatassāti antamaso kaṭasārakepi pakatibhūmiyampi nipannassa uccepi mañce vā pīṭhe vā bhūmippadese vā ṭhitena nisinnena vā desetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sayanagatena pana sayanagatassa uccatare vā samappamāṇe vā nipannena desetuṃ vaṭṭati. Nipannena pana ṭhitassa vā nisinnassa vā nipannassa vā, nisinnena ca ṭhitassa vā nisinnassa vā, ṭhitena ṭhitasseva vaṭṭati.

Sayanagatassā means to one lying down on the bare ground, even on a mat of grass. It is not proper for one standing or sitting on a high couch or chair or on the ground to teach one lying down. However, it is proper for one lying down to teach another lying down who is higher or of equal height. But it is proper for one standing or sitting to teach one lying down; for one sitting to teach one standing or sitting; and for one standing to teach one standing.

65. Pallatthikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
65. Explanation of the Training Rule on Sitting with Crossed Legs

Navame hatthapallatthikādīsu yāya kāyaci nisinnassa desetuṃ na vaṭṭati.

In the ninth rule, it is not proper to teach one who is sitting in any way whatsoever, such as with crossed legs.

66. Veṭhitasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
66. Explanation of the Training Rule on a Covered Head

veṭhitasīsassāti dussaveṭhena vā moḷiādīhi vā yathā kesanto na dissati, evaṃ veṭhitasīsassa, tenevassa anāpattiyaṃ ‘‘kesantaṃ vivarāpetvā desetī’’ti (pāci. 643) vuttaṃ.

Veṭhitasīsassā means one whose head is covered with a cloth wrapping or with a turban, etc., such that the hairline is not visible. Therefore, it is stated in the non-offense clause, "having uncovered the hairline, he teaches" (pāci. 643).

67. Oguṇṭhitasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
67. Explanation of the Training Rule on an Enveloped Head

oguṇṭhitasīsassāti sasīsaṃ pārutassa, anāpattiyaṃ panettha ‘‘sīsaṃ vivarāpetvā desetī’’ti (pāci. 644) adhikaṃ.

Oguṇṭhitasīsassā means one who has completely covered his head. Here, in the non-offense clause, "having uncovered the head, he teaches" (pāci. 644) is additional.

68. Chamāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
68. Explanation of the Training Rule on the Ground

chamāyaṃ nisīditvāti bhūmiyaṃ nisīditvā.Āsaneti antamaso vatthampi tiṇānipi santharitvā nisinnassa.

Chamāyaṃ nisīditvā means sitting on the ground. Āsane means even if he is sitting having spread out at least a cloth or grass.

69. Nīcāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
69. Explanation of the Training Rule on a Low Seat

ucce āsaneti antamaso bhūmippadesepi unnatappadese nisinnassa.

Ucche āsane means even if he is sitting on an elevated place, at least on a raised area on the ground.

70. Ṭhitasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
70. Explanation of the Training Rule on Standing

na ṭhito nisinnassāti sace therassa upaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā ṭhitaṃ daharaṃ āsane nisinno mahāthero pañhaṃ pucchati, na kathetabbaṃ. Gāravena pana theraṃ ‘‘uṭṭhahitvā pucchā’’ti vattuṃ na sakkā, tasmā ‘‘passe ṭhitassa bhikkhuno kathessāmī’’ti kathetuṃ vaṭṭati.

Na ṭhito nisinnassā—if a young monk, having gone to attend on a senior monk, stands, and the senior monk, sitting on a seat, asks a question, it should not be answered. However, out of respect, it is not possible to say to the senior monk, "having stood up, ask." Therefore, it is proper to say, "I will speak to the monk standing nearby."

71. Pacchatogamanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
71. Explanation of the Training Rule on Walking Behind

Pannarasame sace purato gacchanto pañhaṃ pucchati, tassa taṃ akathetvā ‘‘pacchimassa bhikkhuno kathessāmī’’ti kathetabbaṃ. Saddhiṃ uggahitadhammaṃ pana sajjhāyituṃ, samadhurena vā gacchantassa kathetuṃ vaṭṭati.

In the fifteenth rule, if one is walking in front and asks a question, without speaking to him, it should be said, "I will speak to the monk behind." However, it is proper to recite together the Dhamma that has been learned, or to speak to one who is walking at the same pace.

72. Uppathenagamanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
72. Explanation of the Training Rule on Walking off the Path

na uppathenāti ettha sace dvepi sakaṭamaggasmiṃ ekekacakkapathena vā uppathena vā samadhuraṃ gacchanti, vaṭṭati.

Na uppathenā—here, if two people are walking at the same pace on a cart track, either on one wheel track or off the path, it is proper.

73. Ṭhitouccārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
73. Explanation of the Training Rule on Urinating While Standing

Sattarasame ‘‘asañciccā’’ti anāpattiyaṃ sace paṭicchannaṭṭhānaṃ gacchantassa sahasā uccāro vā passāvo vā nikkhamati, asañcicca kato nāma hoti.

In the seventeenth rule, "unintentionally" is a non-offense. If, while going to a concealed place, urine or excrement suddenly comes out, it is called unintentional.

74. Hariteuccārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
74. Explanation of the Training Rule on Urinating on Greenery

Aṭṭhārasame yampi jīvamānarukkhassa mūlaṃ pathaviyaṃ dissamānaṃ gacchati, sākhā vā bhūmilaggā gacchati, sabbaṃ haritasaṅkhātameva. Khandhe nisīditvā pana appaharitaṭṭhāne pātetuṃ vaṭṭati. Sace appaharitaṭṭhānaṃ olokentasseva sahasā nikkhamati, gilānaṭṭhāne ṭhito hoti, ‘‘appaharite kato haritaṃ ottharatī’’ti (pāci. 652) idamettha anāpattiyaṃ adhikaṃ. Tattha sacepi appaharitaṃ alabhantena tiṇaṇḍupakaṃ vā palalaṇḍupakaṃ vā ṭhapetvā kato pacchā haritaṃ ottharati, vaṭṭatiyeva. Kheḷena cettha siṅghāṇikāpi saṅgahitā.

In the eighteenth rule, whatever is the root of a living tree that goes visibly into the ground, or a branch that goes touching the ground, all that is reckoned as greenery. However, it is proper to sit on the trunk and discharge in a non-green area. If it suddenly comes out while looking for a non-green area, he is standing in a sick person's place; "having discharged in a non-green area, he covers the greenery" (pāci. 652)—this is additional in the non-offense clause here. There, even if, not finding a non-green area, he discharges on a tuft of grass or a tuft of straw and afterwards covers the greenery, it is indeed proper. Here, phlegm is included with snot.

75. Udakeuccārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
75. Explanation of the Training Rule on Urinating in Water

na udaketi etaṃ paribhogaudakameva sandhāya vuttaṃ, vaccakuṭisamuddādiudakesu pana aparibhogesu anāpatti. Deve vassante samantato udakoghe jāte anudakaṭṭhānaṃ alabhantena udake kātuṃ vaṭṭati, idhāpi ‘‘thale kato udakaṃ ottharatī’’ti (pāci. 654) idaṃ anāpattiyaṃ adhikaṃ, sesaṃ sabbasikkhāpadesu uttānameva.

Na udake—this is said having in mind only water for use; however, there is no offense in water that is not for use, such as water in a toilet or the ocean. When the gods are raining, and a flood of water arises on all sides, it is proper to discharge in the water when one cannot find a place without water. Here also, "having discharged on land, he covers the water" (pāci. 654)—this is additional in the non-offense clause; the rest is self-explanatory in all the training rules.

Samuṭṭhānādidīpanatthāya panettha idaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃ – ujjagghikauccāsaddappaṭisaṃyuttāni cattāri, sakabaḷena mukhena byāharaṇaṃ ekaṃ, chamānīcāsananisinnaṭhitapacchatogamanauppathagamanappaṭisaṃyuttāni pañcāti imāni dasa sikkhāpadāni samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhānāni, ekekamettha kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedanaṃ. Sūpodanaviññattisikkhāpadaṃ theyyasatthasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedanaṃ. Chattapāṇidaṇḍapāṇisatthapāṇiāvudhapāṇipādukāupāhanayānasayanapallatthikaveṭhitaoguṇṭhitanāmakāni ekādasa dhammadesanāsamuṭṭhānāni, kiriyākiriyāni, saññāvimokkhāni, sacittakāni, lokavajjāni, vacīkammāni, akusalacittāni, dukkhavedanāni. Sesāni tepaṇṇāsa paṭhamapārājikasamauṭṭhānādibhedānīti.

Here, for the purpose of showing the origin, etc., this is a miscellaneous collection: four are connected with loud laughter and noise; one is speaking with a mouthful of food; these ten training rules connected with sitting on the ground, sitting on a low seat, standing, walking behind, and walking off the path are of common expiation origin, each is an action, involves intention, is intentional, is a worldy offense, is a bodily action, is a verbal action, is an unwholesome thought, is a painful feeling. The training rule on requesting soup and rice has a stealing origin, is an action, involves intention, is intentional, is a worldly offense, is a bodily action, is a verbal action, is an unwholesome thought, is a painful feeling. The eleven training rules named holding an umbrella, holding a stick, holding a weapon, holding a weapon, footwear, shoes, a vehicle, a bed, sitting with crossed legs, a covered head, and an enveloped head, are of Dhamma teaching origin, are both actions and non-actions, involve intention, are intentional, are worldly offenses, are verbal actions, are unwholesome thoughts, are painful feelings. The remaining fifty-three are of the division beginning with the origin of the first pārājika offense, etc.

Ekūnavīsatidhammadesanāpaṭisaṃyuttasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the nineteen training rules connected with teaching the Dhamma is finished.

Kaṅkhāvitaraṇiyā pātimokkhavaṇṇanāya

In the Kaṅkhāvitaraṇī, the explanation of the Pātimokkha,

Sekhiyavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Sekhiya rules is finished.

Adhikaraṇasamathavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Adhikaraṇa-samatha

sattāti tesaṃ gaṇanaparicchedo. Adhikaraṇāni samenti vūpasamentītiadhikaraṇasamathā. Uddesaṃ āgacchantīti āpattādhikaraṇasaṅkhātāsu ca avasesādhikaraṇattayapaccayāsu ca āpattīsu parisuddhabhāvaṃ pucchanatthaṃ uddisitabbataṃ āgacchanti.Uppannuppannānanti uppannānaṃ uppannānaṃ.Adhikaraṇānanti vivādādhikaraṇaṃ anuvādādhikaraṇaṃ āpattādhikaraṇaṃ kiccādhikaraṇanti imesaṃ catunnaṃ.Samathāya vūpasamāyāti samanatthañceva vūpasamanatthañca sammukhāvinayo dātabbo…pe… tiṇavatthārakoti ime satta samathā dātabbā. Tatrāyaṃ vinicchayo – adhikaraṇesu tāva ‘‘dhammo’’ti vā, ‘‘adhammo’’ti vā aṭṭhārasahi vatthūhi vivadantānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ yo vivādo, idaṃvivādādhikaraṇaṃnāma. Sīlavipattiyā vā ācāradiṭṭhiājīvavipattiyā vā anuvadantānaṃ yo anuvādo upavadanā ceva codanā ca, idaṃanuvādādhikaraṇaṃnāma. Mātikāya āgatā pañca, vibhaṅge dveti sattapi āpattikkhandhāāpattādhikaraṇaṃ, nāma. Yaṃ saṅghassa apalokanādīnaṃ catunnaṃ kammānaṃ karaṇaṃ, idaṃkiccādhikaraṇaṃnāma.

Sattā means the enumeration and limitation of them. Adhikaraṇasamathā means they settle and appease the disputes. Uddesaṃ āgacchantī means they come to be recited for the purpose of asking for purification in offenses that are counted as disputes and in the remaining three kinds of disputes. Uppannuppannāna means of those that have arisen, of those that have arisen. Adhikaraṇāna means of these four: disputes, accusations, offenses, and duties. Samathāya vūpasamāyā means for the purpose of settling and appeasing; the Vinaya in the presence [of the Saṅgha] should be given…pe… the covering over with grass should be given—these seven settlements should be given. Here is the judgment in regard to disputes: that dispute of monks who are quarreling over eighteen grounds, saying, "It is the Dhamma" or "It is not the Dhamma," this is called vivādādhikaraṇa. That accusation and censure and reproof of those who are accusing over transgression of morality or transgression of conduct, view, or livelihood, this is called anuvādādhikaraṇa. The five groups of offenses that come in the Mātikā and the two in the Vibhaṅga, these seven groups of offenses are called āpattādhikaraṇa. That doing of the four kinds of acts beginning with the motion of approval of the Saṅgha, this is called kiccādhikaraṇa.

vivādādhikaraṇaṃ(cūḷava. 228) dvīhi samathehi sammati sammukhāvinayena ca yebhuyyasikāya ca, sammukhāvinayeneva sammamānaṃ yasmiṃ vihāre uppannaṃ, tasmiṃyeva vā, aññattha vūpasametuṃ gacchantānaṃ antarāmagge vā, yattha gantvā saṅghassa niyyātitaṃ, tattha saṅghena vā vūpasametuṃ asakkonte tattheva ubbāhikāya sammatapuggalehi vā vinicchitaṃ sammati, evaṃ sammamāne ca pana tasmiṃ yā saṅghasammukhatā dhammasammukhatā vinayasammukhatā puggalasammukhatā ayaṃsammukhāvinayonāma. Tattha ca kārakasaṅghassa saṅghasāmaggivasena sammukhībhāvosaṅghasammukhatā,sametabbassa vatthuno bhūtatādhammasammukhatā,yathā taṃ sametabbaṃ, tathevassa samanaṃvinayasammukhatā,yo ca vivadati, yena ca vivadati, tesaṃ ubhinnaṃ atthapaccatthikānaṃ sammukhībhāvopuggalasammukhatā. Ubbāhikāya vūpasamane panettha saṅghasammukhatā parihāyati, evaṃ tāva sammukhāvinayeneva sammati.

Vivādādhikaraṇa (cūḷava. 228) is settled by two settlements: by the Vinaya in the presence [of the Saṅgha] and by the majority vote. The sammukhāvinayo is so called because the quarrel that is settled by the Vinaya in the presence [of the Saṅgha] is settled in the same monastery in which it arose, or on the road in between for those who are going to settle it elsewhere, or by the Saṅgha in the place where it has been handed over to the Saṅgha, or, if they are unable to settle it there, it is settled by persons authorized by the Saṅgha by means of the procedure of taking it outside. And in that settlement, the presence of the Saṅgha, the presence of the Dhamma, the presence of the Vinaya, the presence of the individual—this is called sammukhāvinayo. And there, the presence of the Sangha as the acting Sangha is in concord—saṅghasammukhatā; the truth of the matter to be settled—dhammasammukhatā; the settling of it just as it should be settled—vinayasammukhatā; and the presence of both the plaintiff and the defendant who are disputing—puggalasammukhatā. Here, in the settlement by the procedure of taking it outside, the presence of the Saṅgha is lost. Thus, it is settled by the Vinaya in the presence [of the Saṅgha].

yebhuyyasikānāma, evaṃ vivādādhikaraṇaṃ dvīhi samathehi sammati.

Yebhuyyasikā—thus, the dispute is settled by two settlements.

Anuvādādhikaraṇaṃ(cūḷava. 236) catūhi samathehi sammati sammukhāvinayena ca sativinayena ca amūḷhavinayena ca tassapāpiyasikāya ca. Sammukhāvinayeneva sammamānaṃ yo ca anuvadati, yañca anuvadati, tesaṃ vacanaṃ sutvā sace kāci āpatti natthi, ubho khamāpetvā, sace atthi, ‘‘ayaṃ nāmettha āpattī’’ti evaṃ vinicchitaṃ vūpasammati, tattha sammukhāvinayalakkhaṇaṃ vuttanayameva. Yadā pana khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno amūlikāya sīlavipattiyā anuddhaṃsitassa sativinayaṃ yācamānassa saṅgho ñatticatutthena kammena sativinayaṃ deti, tadā sammukhāvinayena ca sativinayena ca vūpasantaṃ hoti, dinne pana sativinaye puna tasmiṃ puggale kassaci anuvādo na ruhati. Yadā ummattako bhikkhu ummādavasena gate assāmaṇake ajjhācāre ‘‘saratāyasmā evarūpiṃ āpatti’’nti bhikkhūhi codiyamāno ‘‘ummattakena me, āvuso, etaṃ kataṃ, nāhaṃ taṃ sarāmī’’ti bhaṇantopi bhikkhūhi codiyamānova puna acodanatthāya amūḷhavinayaṃ yācati, saṅgho cassa ñatticatutthena kammena amūḷhavinayaṃ deti. Tadā sammukhāvinayena ca amūḷhavinayena ca vūpasantaṃ hoti, dinne pana amūḷhavinaye puna tasmiṃ puggale kassaci tappaccayā anuvādo na ruhati.

Adjudication of Disputes (Anuvādādhikaraṇaṃ) (cūḷava. 236) is settled by these four means of pacification: by presence, by mindfulness, by sanity, and acknowledging the fault. If, while settling it by the rule of presence, one accuses, and another is accused, having heard their words, if there is no offense, having them both ask forgiveness; if there is an offense, "this is the offense here," thus having decided, it is settled. There, the characteristic of the rule of presence is as stated before. But when the Sangha, with a motion and three announcements, grants the rule of mindfulness to a bhikkhu who is an arahant, who has not been accused of a baseless violation of conduct, and who asks for the rule of mindfulness, then it is settled by the rule of presence and by the rule of mindfulness. But once the rule of mindfulness has been given, no accusation against that person arises again. When a mad bhikkhu, due to his madness, commits an unseemly act, and when bhikkhus, accusing him, say, "Venerable sir, you committed such an offense," and he, even while saying, "Friends, I did this because of madness; I do not remember it," is still accused by the bhikkhus, he then asks for the rule of sanity to avoid further accusation, and the Sangha, with a motion and three announcements, grants him the rule of sanity. Then it is settled by the rule of presence and by the rule of sanity. But once the rule of sanity has been given, no accusation arises again against that person due to that cause.

Yadā pana pārājikena vā pārājikasāmantena vā codiyamānassa aññenaññaṃ paṭicarato pāpussannatāya pāpiyassa puggalassa ‘‘sacāyaṃ acchinnamūlo bhavissati, sammā vattitvā osāraṇaṃ labhissati, sace chinnamūlo, sayamevassa nāsanā bhavissatī’’ti maññamāno saṅgho ñatticatutthena kammena tassapāpiyasikaṃ kammaṃ karoti, tadā sammukhāvinayena ca tassapāpiyasikāya ca vūpasantaṃ hoti, evaṃ anuvādādhikaraṇaṃ catūhi samathehi sammati.

But when the Sangha, thinking that the person accused of a pārājika or an offense close to a pārājika, who avoids (answering one accusation) with another, is corrupted and wicked, that "if this one is not cut off at the root, he will be able to obtain release by behaving well; if he is cut off at the root, his destruction will occur by himself," performs the act of further condemnation with a motion and three announcements, then it is settled by the rule of presence and by the act of further condemnation. Thus, the adjudication of disputes is settled by these four means of pacification.

Āpattādhikaraṇaṃ(cūḷava. 239) tīhi samathehi sammati sammukhāvinayena ca paṭiññātakaraṇena ca tiṇavatthārakena ca. Tassa sammukhāvinayeneva vūpasamo natthi, yadā pana ekassa vā bhikkhuno, nissaggiyavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayena saṅghagaṇamajjhesu vā bhikkhu lahukaṃ āpattiṃ deseti, tadā āpattādhikaraṇaṃ sammukhāvinayena ca paṭiññātakaraṇena ca vūpasammati. Tattha sammukhāvinaye tāva yo ca deseti, yassa ca deseti, tesaṃ sammukhībhāvo puggalasammukhatā, sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Puggalassa ca gaṇassa ca desanākāle saṅghasammukhatā parihāyati.

Adjudication of Offenses (Āpattādhikaraṇaṃ) (cūḷava. 239) is settled by these three means of pacification: by presence, by acknowledgement, and by covering over. Its settlement is not only by the rule of presence. But when one bhikkhu, or bhikkhus in an assembly, declare a minor offense, in the manner stated in the explanation of forfeitures, then the adjudication of offenses is settled by the rule of presence and by acknowledgement. There, in the rule of presence, the being face-to-face of the one who declares and the one to whom it is declared is personal presence; the rest is as stated before. The presence of the Sangha is lacking at the time of declaration by an individual or a group.

Yā panettha ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, itthannāmaṃ āpattiṃ āpanno’’ti ca, ‘‘passasī’’ti, ‘‘āma passāmī’’ti ca paṭiññā, tāya ‘‘āyatiṃ saṃvareyyāsī’’ti karaṇaṃ paṭiññātakaraṇaṃ nāma. Saṅghādisese parivāsādiyācanā paṭiññā, parivāsādīnaṃ dānaṃ paṭiññātakaraṇaṃ nāma. Dvepakkhajātā pana bhaṇḍanakārakā bhikkhū bahuṃ assāmaṇakaṃ ajjhācāraṃ caritvā puna lajjidhamme uppanne ‘‘sace mayaṃ imāhi āpattīhi aññamaññaṃ karissāma, siyāpi taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ kakkhaḷatthāya vāḷatthāya saṃvatteyyā’’ti aññamaññaṃ āpattiyā kārāpane dosaṃ disvā yadā tiṇavatthārakakammaṃ karonti, tadā āpattādhikaraṇaṃ sammukhāvinayena ca tiṇavatthārakena ca sammati. Tatra hi yattakā hatthapāsūpagatā ‘‘na metaṃ khamatī’’ti evaṃ diṭṭhāvikammaṃ akatvā niddampi okkamantā honti, sabbesaṃ ṭhapetvā thullavajjañca gihippaṭisaṃyuttañca sabbāpattiyo vuṭṭhahanti, evaṃ āpattādhikaraṇaṃ tīhi samathehi sammati.

Here, the acknowledgement is the statement "Venerable sir, I have committed such-and-such an offense," and "Do you see it?", "Yes, I see it," and the act of "you should restrain yourself in the future" is called acknowledgement. In the case of saṅghādisesa, the request for parivāsa etc., is acknowledgement; the granting of parivāsa etc., is called the act of acknowledgement. But when bhikkhus who cause disputes, divided into two factions, having engaged in much unseemly behavior, and then, when shame arises, seeing the fault in causing each other to be charged with offenses, thinking that "if we deal with each other regarding these offenses, that adjudication might lead to harshness or violence," perform the covering-over act, then the adjudication of offenses is settled by the rule of presence and by covering over. Here, all those within arm's reach who do not express disagreement by saying, "This is not suitable for me," and even fall asleep, setting aside the serious offenses and those connected with laypersons, all offenses are abandoned. Thus, the adjudication of offenses is settled by these three means of pacification.

Kiccādhikaraṇaṃ(cūḷava. 242) ekena samathena sammati sammukhāvinayeneva. Iti imāni cattāri adhikaraṇāni yathānurūpaṃ imehi sattahi samathehi sammanti, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘uppannuppannānaṃ adhikaraṇānaṃ samathāya vūpasamāya sammukhāvinayo dātabbo…pe… tiṇavatthārako’’ti. Ayamettha vinicchayanayo, vitthāro pana samathakkhandhake āgatoyeva, vinicchayopissa samantapāsādikāyaṃ vutto.

Adjudication of Duties (Kiccādhikaraṇaṃ) (cūḷava. 242) is settled by one means of pacification: by the rule of presence only. Thus, these four adjudications are settled appropriately by these seven means of pacification. Therefore, it was said, "For the appeasement and settlement of adjudications that arise, the rule of presence should be given…pe… covering over." This is the method of decision here. But the detailed explanation has already come in the Samathakkhandhaka, and its decision is stated in the Samantapāsādikā.

Tatthāyasmante pucchāmi, kaccittha parisuddhāti tesu sattasu adhikaraṇasamathesu kaccittha parisuddhā, natthi vo kiñci samathehi vūpasametabbanti pucchāmi, etena sabbāpattīhi parisuddhabhāvo pucchito hoti.

Therein I ask the venerable ones, are you purified? In these seven means of pacifying adjudications, I ask whether you are purified, whether there is anything for you to be settled by the means of pacification. By this, the state of being purified from all offenses is asked.

Uddiṭṭhaṃ kho āyasmanto nidānantiādi nigamanavacanaṃ. Tatthaettakanti ettakaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ.Suttāgatanti sutte pātimokkhe āgataṃ.Suttapariyāpannanti tattheva antogadhaṃ.Anvaddhamāsaṃ uddesaṃ āgacchatīti addhamāse addhamāse uposathavasena uddisitabbataṃ āgacchati.Samaggehīti kāyasāmaggivasena samaggehi.Sammodamānehīti cittasāmaggivasena ekajjhāsayatāya suṭṭhu modamānehi.Avivadamānehīti aṭṭhārasasu vivādavatthūsu aññataravasenāpi avivadamānehi.Sikkhitabbanti taṃ taṃ sikkhāpadaṃ avītikkamantehi adhisīlasikkhā sampādetabbā. Antarantarā pana yaṃ na vuttaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ purime purime sikkhāpade vuttattā ceva uttānatthattā cāti.

The source has been recited, venerable ones, etc., is the concluding statement. There, so much means so many training rules. Come in the Sutta means come in the Pātimokkha in the Sutta. Included in the Sutta means included therein. Comes for recitation every half-month means it comes to be recited every half-month in the manner of the uposatha. By those who are united means by those who are united in bodily unity. Rejoicing together means rejoicing well in unity of mind, with a single intention. Not quarreling means not quarreling even by means of any of the eighteen grounds for dispute. Should be trained means that training rule should be accomplished without transgressing it in higher morality training. But what is not stated in between is because it has been stated in the previous training rules and because the meaning is clear.

Adhikaraṇasamathavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Means of Pacifying Adjudications is Finished.

Kaṅkhāvitaraṇiyā pātimokkhavaṇṇanāya

In the Kaṅkhāvitaraṇī Commentary on the Pātimokkha,

Bhikkhupātimokkhavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Bhikkhu Pātimokkha is Finished.

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammasambuddhassa

Homage to the Blessed One, the Worthy One, the Perfectly Enlightened One.

Bhikkhunīpātimokkhavaṇṇanā

Commentary on the Bhikkhunī Pātimokkha

Pārājikakaṇḍo

The Pārājika Section

Bhikkhunīnaṃ hitatthāya, pātimokkhaṃ pakāsayi;

For the benefit of the bhikkhunīs,
The Pātimokkha was proclaimed by the Lord;
The order of explanation has come, as it was given by him.

Sādhāraṇapārājikaṃ

Shared Pārājika

1…Pe…4. methunadhammasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1…Pe…4. Explanation of the Training Rule on Sexual Intercourse

suṇātu metiādīnaṃ bhikkhupātimokkhavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Kevalañhi, bhante, ayyetiādivasena tasmiñca idha ca abhilāpamattameva liṅgabhedamattañca viseso. Yasmā ca bhikkhuniyā sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ nāma natthi, tasmā bhikkhunīnaṃ ‘‘sikkhāsājīvasamāpannā sikkhaṃ apaccakkhāya dubbalyaṃ anāvikatvā’’ti avatvāyā pana bhikkhunī chandaso methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭiseveyyāti vuttaṃ. Tatthachandasoti methunarāgappaṭisaṃyuttena chandena ceva ruciyā ca. Chande pana asati balakkārena padhaṃsitāya anāpatti, tasmā yā paripuṇṇūpasampadā bhikkhunī manussāmanussatiracchānajātīsu purisaubhatobyañjanakapaṇḍakānaṃ yassa kassaci sajīvassa vā nijjīvassa vā santhatassa vā asanthatassa vā akkhāyitassa vā yebhuyyena akkhāyitassa vā aṅgajātassa attano vaccamaggapassāvamaggamukhesu tīsu yatthakatthaci santhate vā asanthate vā pakativātena asaṃphuṭṭhe allokāse antamaso tilaphalamattampi padesaṃ chandaso paveseti, parena vā pavesiyamānā pavesanapaviṭṭhaṭṭhitauddharaṇesu yaṃkiñci sādiyati, ayaṃ pārājikā hoti. Sesamettha ito paresu ca sādhāraṇasikkhāpadesu vuttanayānusāreneva veditabbaṃ.

The meaning of suṇātu me, etc., should be understood in the manner stated in the Commentary on the Bhikkhu Pātimokkha. The only difference is the mere expression and gender difference in that, such as "bhante, ayye," here and there. And because there is no renunciation of training for a bhikkhunī, therefore, instead of saying to bhikkhunīs, "Having undertaken the training and livelihood, without renouncing the training, without declaring weakness," it is said, "Whatever bhikkhunī should engage in sexual intercourse intentionally." There, chandaso means with intention and desire, combined with sexual passion. But if she is violated by force without intention, there is no offense. Therefore, whatever bhikkhunī who has full ordination intentionally inserts a place even the size of a sesame seed into any of the three orifices—the anal passage, the urinary passage, or the mouth—of a male, a hermaphrodite, or a paṇḍaka among humans, non-humans, or animals, whether alive or dead, covered or uncovered, exposed or mostly unexposed, whether touching or not touching due to the natural wind in an appropriate place; or if, while someone else is inserting it, she enjoys any of the acts of insertion, penetration, staying, or removal, she is defeated. The rest here and in the shared training rules after this should be understood according to the method stated.

Asādhāraṇapārājikaṃ

Unshared Pārājika

5. Ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalikāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Training Rule on Touching Above the Knees

avassutāti kāyasaṃsaggarāgena tintā, kilinnāti attho. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo.Purisapuggalassāti kāyasaṃsaggaṃ samāpajjituṃ viññussa manussajātikassa purisasaṅkhātassa puggalassa.Adhakkhakanti attano akkhakānaṃ adho.Ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalanti jāṇumaṇḍalānaṃ upari, ettha ca ubbhakapparampi ubbhajāṇumaṇḍaleneva saṅgahitaṃ.Āmasananti āmajjanaṃ phuṭṭhokāsaṃ anatikkamitvā tattheva saṅghaṭṭanaṃ.Parāmasananti ito cito ca sañcaraṇaṃ.Gahaṇanti gahitamattaṃ.Chupananti asaṅghaṭṭetvā phuṭṭhamattaṃ.Paṭipīḷananti aṅge gahetvā nippīḷanaṃ.Sādiyeyyāti yā bhikkhunī attano yathāparicchinne kāye purisassa etaṃ āmasanādiṃ sādiyati, sayaṃ vā pana tena kāyena purisassa yaṃkiñci kāyappadesaṃ sādayamānā chupati, ayaṃ ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalikā nāma pārājikāti ayamettha saṅkhepo.

Avassutā means drenched with the lust of bodily contact, that is, wet. The same method applies to the second instance of the word. Purisapuggalassa means of a person, known as a male, of human birth, who is conscious, in order to engage in bodily contact. Adhakkhaka means below her collarbones. Ubbhajāṇumaṇḍala means above the knees, and here, even the area above the thighs is included in "above the knees." Āmasana means touching, rubbing there without going beyond the range of contact. Parāmasana means moving here and there. Gahaṇa means merely grasping. Chupana means merely touching without rubbing. Paṭipīḷana means squeezing the body after grasping it. Sādiyeyyā means whatever bhikkhunī enjoys this touching, etc., of a male on her body as defined, or if she herself touches any part of the male's body with her own body while enjoying it, she is defeated for touching above the knees. This is the summary here.

‘‘Nidānaṃ puggalaṃ vatthu’’ntiādike (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā) tena vitthāravinicchaye yasmā sabbāneva asādhāraṇapaññattiyo honti, tasmā ito paṭṭhāya santiṃ anupaññattiṃ vatvā sādhāraṇapaññattīti vā asādhāraṇapaññattīti vā na vakkhāma, āṇattiyaṃ yattha āṇatti natthi, tattha kiñci avatvā yattha atthi, tattheva vakkhāma, vipattivicāraṇā vuttāyeva.

Since all the unshared rules are in the detailed decision beginning with "source, person, object," etc. (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā), from here on, we will not say whether it is a shared rule or an unshared rule after stating the subsequent rule. Where there is a command in the command, we will say only where there is a command, without saying anything where there is no command. The examination of misfortune has already been stated.

Avasesaṃ pana sabbattha vattabbaṃ, tayidaṃ vuccati, idaṃ tāva sikkhāpadaṃ sāvatthiyaṃ sundarīnandaṃ ārabbha kāyasaṃsaggaṃ samāpajjanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ekatoavassute yathāparicchinnena kāyena purisassa kāyaṃ, ubhatoavassutepi kāyena kāyappaṭibaddhaṃ, yathāparicchinnakāyappaṭibaddhena vā avasesakāyena vā tassa kāyaṃ āmasantiyā thullaccayaṃ, yakkhapetapaṇḍakatiracchānagatamanussaviggahānaṃ ubhatoavassute yathāparicchinnena kāyena kāyaṃ āmasantiyāpi thullaccayaṃ, sace pana purisassa kāyasaṃsaggarāgo natthi, pārājikakkhettepi thullaccayameva. Avasese pana kāyappaṭibaddhena kāyappaṭibaddhādibhede, methunarāgagehasitapemesu ca sabbattha dukkaṭaṃ. Asañcicca, assatiyā, ajānantiyā, asādiyantiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Aṅgāni samuṭṭhānādīni ca bhikkhupātimokkhe kāyasaṃsagge vuttanayeneva veditabbānīti.

But the remainder should be stated everywhere, and this is said: This training rule was established in Sāvatthī regarding Sundarī Nanda concerning the incident of engaging in bodily contact. If one who is wet on one side touches the body of a male with her body as defined, or if one who is wet on both sides touches the body with the body related to the body, or with the remaining body with the defined body-related body, she commits a thullaccaya; if she touches the body of a yakkha, a ghost, a paṇḍaka, an animal, a human corpse with the defined body if she is wet on both sides, she commits a thullaccaya; but if there is no lust for bodily contact on the part of the male, she commits only a thullaccaya even in the pārājika area. But in the remaining distinction of the body-related body with the body-related body, etc., and in all cases of lust, house-clinging, and affection, there is a dukkaṭa. There is no offense for one who is unintentional, unmindful, unknowing, unenjoying, insane, etc. The elements, origin, etc., should be understood in the same way as stated in the Bhikkhu Pātimokkha regarding bodily contact.

Ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalikāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Touching Above the Knees is Finished.

6. Vajjappaṭicchādikāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Training Rule on Concealing a Serious Offense

gaṇassāti aññāsaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ.Ṭhitāti saliṅge ṭhitā.Cutāti kālaṅkatā.Nāsitāti liṅganāsanāya sayaṃ vā naṭṭhā, aññehi vā nāsitā.Avassaṭāti titthāyatanaṃ saṅkantā.Pubbevāhaṃ ayye aññāsinti idaṃ tassā vacanakāladassanaṃ, saliṅge ṭhitāya pana pārājikabhāvaṃ ñatvā ‘‘na dāni naṃ kassaci ārocessāmī’’ti dhure nikkhittamatteyeva ayaṃ vajjappaṭicchādikā nāma pārājikā hotīti.

Gaṇassa means to other bhikkhunīs. Ṭhitā means remaining in the order. Cutā means having died. Nāsitā means destroyed by the destruction of the gender, either destroyed by herself or destroyed by others. Avassaṭā means having gone to another sect. Pubbevāhaṃ ayye aññāsi means this is the expression of the time of her speech. But as soon as she knows that one remaining in the order has committed a pārājika and immediately takes on the burden of thinking, "Now I will not tell anyone," she is defeated for concealing a serious offense.

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha nevaattanāpaṭicodanā nagaṇassa ārocanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sesamettha sappāṇakavaggamhi duṭṭhullāpattippaṭicchādanasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Tatra hi pācittiyaṃ, idha pārājikanti ayameva viseso, sesaṃ tādisamevāti.

This was established in Sāvatthī regarding Thullanandā concerning the incident of neither accusing herself nor announcing it to the group. The rest here should be understood in the same way as stated in the training rule on concealing a grave offense in the Chapter on Living Beings. There, it is a pācittiya, here it is a pārājika; this is the only difference; the rest is the same.

Vajjappaṭicchādikāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Concealing a Serious Offense is Finished.

7. Ukkhittānuvattikāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Training Rule on Following an Suspended Bhikkhuṇī

ukkhittanti āpattiyā adassanādīsu ukkhittaṃ.Dhammenāti bhūtena vatthunā.Vinayenāti codetvā sāretvā.Satthusāsanenāti idhāpi codetvā sāretvā karaṇameva satthusāsanaṃ nāma.Anādaranti yena saṅghena ukkhepaniyakammaṃ kataṃ, tasmiṃ vā, tattha pariyāpannagaṇe vā ekapuggale vā tasmiṃ vā kamme ādaravirahitaṃ, sammāvattanāya avattamānanti attho.Appaṭikāranti paṭikārarahitaṃ, anosāritanti attho.Akatasahāyanti ekakammādike saṃvāse saha ayanabhāvena samānasaṃvāsakā bhikkhū sahāyā nāma, yassa pana so saṃvāso tehi saddhiṃ natthi na tena te sahāyā katā honti, iti so akatasahāyo nāma, taṃ akatasahāyaṃ, samānasaṃvāsakabhāvaṃ anupagatanti attho.Tamanuvatteyyāti taṃ ukkhittakaṃ ukkhittakabhāveyeva ṭhitaṃ bhikkhuṃ yā bhikkhunī yaṃdiṭṭhiko so hoti, tāya diṭṭhiyā gahaṇabhāvena anuvatteyya. Sā bhikkhunī bhikkhunīhi saṅghabhedasikkhāpadādīsu vuttanayena visuṃ saṅghamajjhe ca vuccamānā taṃ vatthuṃ appaṭinissajjantī samanubhāsanakammapariyosāne ukkhittānuvattikā nāma pārājikā hotīti.

Ukkhitta means suspended for not seeing an offense, etc. Dhammenā means with a real fact. Vinayenā means having accused and reminded. Satthusāsanenā means here too, having accused and reminded, the very act is called the Teacher's instruction. Anādara means without respect for that Sangha by which the act of suspension was done, or for a single individual in that group included therein, or for that act, not behaving properly, meaning not behaving rightly. Appaṭikāra means without remedy, meaning not making amends. Akatasahāya means those bhikkhus who have a shared residence in one activity etc., by way of being together, are called companions; but one who does not have that residence with them, they are not made companions by her, thus she is called one without companions, meaning not approaching a state of shared residence. Tamanuvatteyyā means whatever bhikkhunī follows that suspended bhikkhu, remaining in the state of being suspended, by way of taking up whatever view he holds. That bhikkhunī, when being spoken to by the bhikkhunīs in the middle of the Sangha separately in the manner stated in the training rule on splitting the Sangha, etc., not abandoning that thing, at the end of the act of admonishment, is defeated for following a suspended bhikkhunī.

yya-kārappattāya tatiyakammavācāya pārājikaṃ, adhammakamme tikadukkaṭaṃ, sesaṃ saṅghabhedasikkhāpadādīsu vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.

With the third kammavācā that leads to the state of expulsion (yya-kārappattāya), it is a pārājika; in an unlawful act (adhammakamma), it is a triple dukkaṭa; the rest should be understood in the same way as stated in the Saṅghabhedasikkhāpada, etc.

Ukkhittānuvattikāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Ukkhittānuvattikāsikkhāpada is finished.

8. Aṭṭhavatthukāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Aṭṭhavatthukāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

avassutāti lokassādamittasanthavavasena kāyasaṃsaggarāgena tintā. Ayameva hi attho sīhaḷamātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ vutto, samantapāsādikāyaṃ (pāci. aṭṭha. 675) panassa vicāraṇā katā, dutiyapadepi eseva nayo.Purisapuggalassa hatthaggahaṇaṃ vātiādīsu pana yaṃ purisapuggalena hatthe gahaṇaṃ kataṃ, taṃ ‘‘purisapuggalassa hatthaggahaṇa’’nti vuttaṃ, eseva nayo saṅghāṭikaṇṇaggahaṇepi.Hatthaggahaṇanti ettha ca yassa kassaci apārājikakkhettabhūtassa aṅgassa gahaṇaṃ hatthaggahaṇaṃ, yassa kassaci nivatthassa vā pārutassa vā gahaṇaṃsaṅghāṭikaṇṇaggahaṇaṃ. Santiṭṭheyya vātiādīsu kāyasaṃsaggasaṅkhātassa asaddhammassa paṭisevanatthāya purisassa hatthapāse santiṭṭheyya vā, tattha ṭhitā sallapeyya vā, purisena vā ‘‘itthannāmaṃ ṭhānaṃ āgacchā’’ti vuttā taṃ saṅketaṃ gaccheyya, tassa vā purisassa abbhāgamanaṃ sādiyeyya, yena kenaci vā paṭicchannaṃ okāsaṃ paviseyya, purisassa hatthapāse ṭhatvā kāyaṃ upasaṃhareyyāti evamattho daṭṭhabbo.Ayampi pārājikāti yathā purimāyo, evaṃ ayampi bhikkhunī etassa kāyasaṃsaggasaṅkhātassa asaddhammassa paṭisevanatthāya etāni aṭṭha vatthūni paṭipāṭiyā vā uppaṭipāṭiyā vā pūretvā aṭṭhavatthukā nāma pārājikā hotīti.

Avassutā: means soaked with lustful bodily contact (kāyasaṃsaggarāga) through familiarity and intimacy with worldly pleasures. This very meaning is stated in the Sinhalese commentary (sīhaḷamātikāṭṭhakathā); however, its analysis has been done in the Samantapāsādikā (pāci. aṭṭha. 675); the same method applies to the second term as well. Purisapuggalassa hatthaggahaṇaṃ vā: In these instances, the act of taking hold of the hand by a male individual is called "Purisapuggalassa hatthaggahaṇaṃ"; the same method applies to taking hold of the edge of the outer robe (saṅghāṭikaṇṇaggahaṇaṃ). Hatthaggahaṇaṃ: Here, the taking hold of any part of the body that is not in the pārājika category is hatthaggahaṇaṃ; the taking hold of any worn or wrapped garment is saṅghāṭikaṇṇaggahaṇaṃ. Santiṭṭheyya vā: In these instances, she might stand near a man for the purpose of engaging in unrighteous behavior that is synonymous with bodily contact; while standing there, she might converse; or, when a man says, "Come to such and such a place," she might go to that rendezvous; or she might approve of the man's arrival; or she might enter a concealed place by any means; or she might draw her body close while standing near the man—such a meaning should be understood. Ayampi pārājikā: Just as the previous one, so too, this bhikkhunī, by fulfilling these eight grounds (aṭṭha vatthūni) in order or out of order, for the purpose of engaging in unrighteous behavior synonymous with bodily contact, is said to have committed the aṭṭhavatthukā pārājika.

gaṇanūpikāāpatti veditabbā, ‘‘idāni nāpajjissāmī’’ti hi dhuranikkhepaṃ katvā desitā gaṇanūpikā, desitagaṇanaṃ upeti, pārājikassa aṅgaṃ na hoti. Tasmā yā ekaṃ āpannā dhuranikkhepaṃ katvā desetvā puna kilesavasena āpajjati, punapi deseti, evaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ paripūrentīpi pārājikā na hoti. Yā pana āpajjitvā ‘‘punapi aññaṃ vatthuṃ āpajjissāmī’’ti saussāhāva deseti, tassā sā āpatti agaṇanūpikā, desitāpi adesitā hoti, pārājikassa aṅgaṃ hoti. Asañcicca, assatiyā, ajānantiyā asādiyantiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Kāyasaṃsaggarāgo, saussāhatā, aṭṭhamassa vatthussa pūraṇanti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kiriyākiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dvivedananti.

Gaṇanūpikā: The offense (āpatti) should be understood as "subject to counting" (gaṇanūpikā); for the offense that is confessed after making the dismissal of burden (dhuranikkhepa) is said to be subject to counting; it is not a factor for pārājika. Therefore, the one who commits one offense, dismisses the burden, confesses, and then offends again due to defilements (kilesavasena), and confesses again; even if she completes the eighth in this way, she does not commit a pārājika. But the one who, having committed an offense, confesses with the intention of "I will commit another ground again," for her that offense is not subject to counting (agaṇanūpikā); even if confessed, it is unconfessed, and it is a factor for pārājika. There is no offense for one acting unintentionally (asañcicca), unmindfully (assatiyā), unknowingly (ajānantiyā), disapprovingly (asādiyantiyā), or for one who is insane (ummattikādīnañca). Lustful bodily contact (kāyasaṃsaggarāgo), intention (saussāhatā), and fulfillment of the eighth ground—these are the three factors here. Concerning the arising from investigation (samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhānaṃ), it is both an action and not an action (kiriyākiriyaṃ), release from perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional (sacittakaṃ), a fault of the world (lokavajjaṃ), bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), unwholesome thought (akusalacittaṃ), of two kinds (dvivedananti).

Aṭṭhavatthukāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Aṭṭhavatthukāsikkhāpada is finished.

Uddiṭṭhā kho ayyāyo aṭṭha pārājikā dhammāti bhikkhū ārabbha paññattā sādhāraṇā cattāro, ime cattāroti evaṃ pātimokkhuddesamaggena aṭṭha pārājikā dhammā uddiṭṭhāti evamettha attho veditabbo, sesaṃ bhikkhupātimokkhavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayamevāti.

Uddiṭṭhā kho ayyāyo aṭṭha pārājikā dhammā: The four general rules (sādhāraṇā cattāro) that are prescribed concerning the monks, and these four—in this way, with the method of the pātimokkhuddesa, the eight pārājika rules are recited; the meaning here should be understood in this way; the rest is just as stated in the explanation of the Bhikkhupātimokkha.

Kaṅkhāvitaraṇiyā pātimokkhavaṇṇanāya

In the Kaṅkhāvitaraṇī's Pātimokkavaṇṇanā,

Bhikkhunipātimokkhe

In the Bhikkhunipātimokkha,

Pārājikavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Pārājikavaṇṇanā is finished.

Saṅghādisesakaṇḍo

Saṅghādisesakaṇḍo

1. Ussayavādikāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Ussayavādikāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

ussayavādikāti mānussayavasena kodhussayavasena aḍḍakaraṇatthāya vinicchayamahāmattānaṃ santike vivadamānā.Gahapatinā vātiādīhi ṭhapetvā pañca sahadhammike avasesā gahaṭṭhapabbajitā saṅgahitā.Ayaṃ bhikkhunī paṭhamāpattikanti ādimhi paṭhamaṃ āpatti etassāti paṭhamāpattiko, vītikkamakkhaṇeyeva āpajjitabboti attho, taṃ paṭhamāpattikaṃ.Āpannāti aḍḍapariyosāne āpannā. Bhikkhuniṃ saṅghato nissāretītinissāraṇīyo,taṃ nissāraṇīyaṃ.Saṅghādisesanti evaṃnāmakaṃ.

Ussayavādikā: Disputing in the presence of the judges (vinicchayamahāmattānaṃ santike) for the sake of winning the case (aḍḍakaraṇatthāya) due to the sway of pride (mānussayavasena) or the sway of anger (kodhussayavasena). Gahapatinā vā: Except for the five co-religionists (sahadhammike), the remaining laypersons and renunciants are included. Ayaṃ bhikkhunī paṭhamāpattikaṃ: "The first offense (paṭhamāpattikaṃ)" means the first offense is for her; the meaning is that it should be committed at the very moment of transgression; that is the first offense. Āpannā: She has committed an offense at the conclusion of the case. Bhikkhunīṃ saṅghato nissāretīti:nissāraṇīyo: means one who removes a bhikkhunī from the Saṅgha, that is, "liable to be expelled" (nissāraṇīyaṃ). Saṅghādisesa: Means "of such a name."

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha ussayavādikavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sāṇattikaṃ, ‘‘aḍḍaṃ karissāmī’’ti yaṃkiñci dutiyikaṃ vā sakkhiṃ vā sahāyaṃ vā pariyesantiyā pariyesane dukkaṭaṃ, yattha ṭhitāya ‘‘aḍḍaṃ kātuṃ gacchāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppajjati, tato paṭṭhāya gacchantiyā pade pade dukkaṭaṃ, yatthakatthaci antamaso bhikkhunupassayaṃ āgatepi vohārike disvā attano kathaṃ ārocentiyā dukkaṭaṃ. Itarena attano kathāya ārocitāya bhikkhuniyā thullaccayaṃ, paṭhamaṃ itarena pacchā bhikkhuniyā ārocanepi eseva nayo. Sace pana bhikkhunī taṃ vadati ‘‘mama ca tava ca kathaṃ tvaṃyeva ārocehī’’ti, so attano vā kathaṃ paṭhamaṃ ārocetu, tassā vā, paṭhamārocane bhikkhuniyā dukkaṭaṃ, dutiye thullaccayaṃ, tena evaṃ vuttāya bhikkhuniyā ārocanepi eseva nayo. Sace pana bhikkhunī aññena kathāpeti, tatrāpi eseva nayo. Yathā vā tathā vā hi ārociyamāne paṭhamārocane bhikkhuniyā dukkaṭaṃ, dutiye thullaccayaṃ. Ubhinnaṃ pana kathaṃ sutvā vohārikehi vinicchaye kate aḍḍapariyosānaṃ nāma hoti, tasmiṃ aḍḍapariyosāne bhikkhuniyā jayepi parājayepi saṅghādiseso.

It was prescribed in Sāvatthī concerning Thullanandā in the matter of the ussayavādika incident; it is subject to probation (sāṇattikaṃ); while seeking any second party, witness, or ally with the intention of "I will win the case," there is a dukkaṭa in the seeking; from the place where the thought arises, "I will go to win the case," there is a dukkaṭa at every step as she goes; wherever she is, even if she comes to a nunnery (bhikkhunupassayaṃ), there is a dukkaṭa for announcing her case upon seeing a litigant. If the other party announces her case, there is a thullaccaya for the bhikkhunī; the same method applies if the bhikkhunī announces it after the other party. But if the bhikkhunī says to her, "You yourself announce my case and yours," whether that person announces her own case first or the bhikkhunī's, there is a dukkaṭa for the bhikkhunī in the first announcement, and a thullaccaya in the second; by that, the same method applies when the bhikkhunī announces it through someone who was told in this way. If the bhikkhunī has someone else speak, the same method applies there as well. However it may be, when it is announced, there is a dukkaṭa for the bhikkhunī in the first announcement and a thullaccaya in the second. But when the litigants make a decision after hearing both cases, it is called the conclusion of the case; at that conclusion of the case, there is a saṅghādisesa for the bhikkhunī whether she wins or loses.

Yā pana paccatthikamanussehi dūtaṃ vā pahiṇitvā, sayaṃ vā āgantvā ‘‘ehi, ayye’’ti ākaḍḍhiyamānā gacchati, yā vā upassaye aññehi kataṃ anācāraṃ anodissa ācikkhantī rakkhaṃ yācati, yāya ca kiñci avuttā vohārikā aññato sutvā sayameva aḍḍaṃ pariyosāpenti, tassā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Aññehi anākaḍḍhitāya aḍḍakaraṇaṃ, aḍḍapariyosānanti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamakathinasadisāni, idaṃ pana kiriyamevāti.

But if, being drawn by opposing people saying, "Come, venerable," either by sending a messenger or by coming herself, she goes; or she asks for protection while recounting misconduct done by others in the nunnery without specifying the perpetrator; and if she herself concludes the case after the litigants have heard something from elsewhere without her saying anything, there is no offense for her, or for those who are insane, etc. Undertaking to win the case without being drawn by others (aññehi anākaḍḍhitāya aḍḍakaraṇaṃ), and the conclusion of the case (aḍḍapariyosānaṃ)—these are the two factors here. The arising, etc. (samuṭṭhānādīni) are similar to the first kathina; however, this is purely an action (kiriyamevāti).

Ussayavādikāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Ussayavādikāsikkhāpada is finished.

2. Corivuṭṭhāpikāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Corivuṭṭhāpikāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

corīnāma, taṃ coriṃ.Vajjhaṃ viditanti tena kammena ‘‘vadhārahā aya’’nti evaṃ viditaṃ.Anapaloketvāti anāpucchā.Gaṇanti mallagaṇabhaṭiputtagaṇādikaṃ.Pūganti dhammagaṇaṃ.Seṇinti gandhikaseṇidussikaseṇiādikaṃ. Yattha yattha hi rājāno gaṇādīnaṃ gāmanigame niyyātenti ‘‘tumheva ettha anusāsathā’’ti, tattha tattha teyeva issarā honti, tasmā te sandhāya idaṃ vuttaṃ. Ettha ca rājānaṃ vā gaṇādike vā apaloketvāpi bhikkhunisaṅgho apaloketabbova.Aññatra kappāti titthiyesu vā aññabhikkhunīsu vā pabbajitapubbā kappā nāma, taṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ upasampādentiyā gaṇaācarinī pattacīvarapariyesanesu sīmāsammutiyā ñattiyā ca dukkaṭaṃ, dvīhi kammavācāhi thullaccayaṃ, kammavācāpariyosāne saṅghādiseso.

Corī means a thief, that is, "a thief" (coriṃ). Vajjhaṃ viditaṃ: Known in this way by that action, "This one is worthy of execution" (vadhārahā aya). Anapaloketvā: Without asking permission (anāpucchā). Gaṇa: A group of wrestlers, a group of soldiers, or a group of sons, etc. (mallagaṇabhaṭiputtagaṇādikaṃ). Pūga: A group of those who follow the Dhamma (dhammagaṇaṃ). Seṇi: A guild of perfumers, a guild of cloth merchants, etc. (gandhikaseṇidussikaseṇiādikaṃ). For wherever kings entrust villages and towns to groups, etc., saying, "You yourselves should govern here," there they themselves are the rulers; therefore, this is said in reference to them. Here, even after seeking permission from the king or groups, etc., the Saṅgha of bhikkhunīs should definitely be asked for permission. Aññatra kappā: One who has previously renounced among the Titthiyas or among other bhikkhunīs is called a "valid candidate" (kappā nāma); excluding that one, when ordaining another, there is a dukkaṭa for the preceptress (gaṇaācarinī) in the seeking of bowl and robes, the demarcation of the boundary (sīmāsammutiyā), and the announcement (ñattiyā); a thullaccaya with two formal acts (kammavācā), and a saṅghādisesa at the conclusion of the formal act (kammavācāpariyosāne).

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha coriṃ vuṭṭhāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, coriyā vematikāya dukkaṭaṃ, tathā acoriyā corisaññāya ceva vematikāya ca. Acorisaññāya, ajānantiyā, apaloketvā vuṭṭhāpentiyā, kappaṃ vuṭṭhāpentiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Coritā, corisaññitā, aññatra anuññātakāraṇā vuṭṭhāpananti, imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Corivuṭṭhāpanasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kiriyākiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.

It was prescribed in Sāvatthī concerning Thullanandā in the matter of reinstating a thief; there is a dukkaṭa for being doubtful about a thief, as well as about one who is not a thief with the perception of a thief, and also for being doubtful. There is no offense for one who ordains without the perception of a thief, unknowingly, without asking permission, ordaining a valid candidate, or for those who are insane, etc. Being a thief (coritā), being perceived as a thief (corisaññitā), and ordaining without a permitted reason (aññatra anuññātakāraṇā vuṭṭhāpananti)—these are the three factors here. Concerning the arising from the reinstatement of a thief (corivuṭṭhāpanasamuṭṭhānaṃ), it is both an action and not an action (kiriyākiriyaṃ), release from perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional (sacittakaṃ), a fault by way of ordinance (paṇṇattivajjaṃ), bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), of three thoughts (ticittaṃ), of three kinds (tivedananti).

Corivuṭṭhāpikāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Corivuṭṭhāpikāsikkhāpada is finished.

3. Ekagāmantaragamanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Ekagāmantaragamanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

gāmantarantiādīsu sakagāmato tāva nikkhamantiyā anāpatti, nikkhamitvā pana aññaṃ gāmaṃ gacchantiyā pade pade dukkaṭaṃ, ekena pādena itarassa gāmassa parikkhepe vā upacāre vā atikkante thullaccayaṃ, dutiyena atikkantamatte saṅghādiseso, tato nikkhamitvā puna sakagāmaṃ pavisantiyāpi eseva nayo. Sace pana khaṇḍapākārena vā vaticchiddena vā bhikkhunivihārabhūmiṃyeva sakkā hoti pavisituṃ, evaṃ pavisamānāya kappiyabhūmiyā paviṭṭhā nāma hoti, tasmā vaṭṭati. Bahigāme ṭhatvā yaṃkiñci sakagāmaṃ vā paragāmaṃ vā akappiyabhūmiṃ padasā pavisantiyā āpattīti ayamettha saṅkhepo.

Gāmantara: There is no offense for merely going out from one's own village; but upon going out and going to another village, there is a dukkaṭa at every step; upon crossing the boundary or the vicinity of the other village with one foot, there is a thullaccaya; as soon as the second foot crosses, there is a saṅghādisesa; the same method applies when going out from there and entering one's own village again. But if it is possible to enter the land of the bhikkhunī monastery (bhikkhunivihārabhūmiṃyeva) through a broken wall or a hole in the fence, when entering in this way, she is said to have entered permissible ground, therefore it is allowable. While standing outside the village, there is an offense for entering any impermissible ground in one's own village or another village with one's feet; this is the summary here.

Nadipāragamane vuttalakkhaṇāya nadiyā dutiyikaṃ vinā paratīraṃ gacchantiyā vā antarānadiyaṃ dutiyikāya saddhiṃ bhaṇḍitvā puna orimatīrameva paccuttarantiyā vā paṭhamapādaṃ uddharitvā tīre ṭhapitakkhaṇe thullaccayaṃ, dutiyapāduddhāre saṅghādiseso. Iddhisetuyānanāvāhi pana paratīraṃ otarituṃ, nahānādikāraṇena ca otiṇṇāya orimatīraṃ padasāpi paccuttarituṃ vaṭṭati.

In crossing a river, if one goes to the opposite bank without a companion in a river of the aforementioned characteristics, or if, after quarreling with a companion in the middle of the river, one returns again to the near bank, there is a thullaccaya at the moment of lifting up the first foot and placing it on the bank, and a saṅghādisesa upon lifting up the second foot. But it is allowable to descend on the opposite bank by means of psychic power, a bridge, a vehicle, or a boat; and it is also allowable to return to the near bank on foot after descending for the sake of bathing, etc.

Rattivippavāse ‘‘purearuṇeyeva dutiyikāya hatthapāsaṃ okkamissāmī’’ti ābhogaṃ vinā ekagabbhepi dutiyikāya hatthapāsātikkame ṭhatvā aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpentiyā āpatti.

In overnight separation, there is an offense if she causes dawn to arise while standing beyond the arm's reach of her companion even in a single dwelling without intending to come within arm's reach of her companion before dawn.

Ekā vā gaṇamhāti ettha pana ekā bhikkhunīpi gaṇoyeva.Ohīyeyyāti avahīyeyya, dassanūpacāraṃ vā savanūpacāraṃ vā vijaheyyāti attho. Tasmā indakhīlātikkamato paṭṭhāya bahigāme rukkhathambhasāṇipākārādiantaritabhāvenāpi dutiyikāya dassanūpacāre vijahite sacepi savanūpacāro atthi, āpattiyeva. Ajjhokāse pana dūrepi dassanūpacāro hoti, tattha maggamūḷhasaddena viya dhammassavanārocanasaddena viya ca ‘ayye’ti saddāyantiyā saddassavanātikkame āpattiyeva. Sace pana maggaṃ gacchantī ohīyitvā ‘‘idāni pāpuṇissāmī’’ti saussāhā anubandhati, vaṭṭati.

Ekā vā gaṇamhā: Here, even one bhikkhunī is a group. Ohīyeyya: Means should be separated; that is, should abandon the range of sight or the range of hearing. Therefore, beginning from crossing the boundary pillar (indakhīlātikkamato), even if the range of hearing is present, there is still an offense if the range of sight of the companion is abandoned by being obstructed by a tree, pillar, or wall, etc., outside the village. But in an open space, the range of sight is even at a distance; there, as if by the sound of being lost on the road, or as if by the sound of announcing the Dhamma, there is still an offense upon exceeding the hearing of the sound when calling out "Venerable." But if, while going on the road, she is separated and pursues with the intention of "I will reach it now," it is allowable.

Sāvatthiyaṃ aññataraṃ bhikkhuniṃ ārabbha gāmantaragamanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘ekā vā nadipāra’’ntiādikā ettha tividhā anupaññatti, pure aruṇe sakagāmato nikkhamitvā aruṇuggamanakāle gāmantarapariyāpannaṃ nadipāraṃ okkamanantiyā pana catassopi āpattiyo ekakkhaṇeyeva honti. Vuttampi cetaṃ –

It was prescribed in Sāvatthī concerning a certain bhikkhunī in the matter of going to another village; "ekā vā nadipāra," etc. are the three kinds of subsequent prescriptions here; but for one who goes out of her own village before dawn and descends on the far bank of a river that is included in another village at the time of sunrise, all four offenses occur in a single moment.

‘‘Sikkhāpadā buddhavarena vaṇṇitā;

"The precepts are described by the Buddha;
Four Saṅghādisesas would occur;
One might commit all with a single effort;
These are questions considered by the skilled." (pari. 479);

Etenupāyena tiṇṇaṃ, dvinnañca ekatobhāvo veditabbo. Dutiyikāya pana pakkantāya vā vibbhantāya vā kālaṅkatāya vā pakkhasaṅkantāya vā āpadāsu vā gāmantaragamanādīni karontiyā ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Antarāyena ekatobhāvo, gāmantaragamanādīsu aññataratāpajjanaṃ, āpadāya abhāvoti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamapārājikasadisāni, idaṃ pana paṇṇattivajjaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.

By this method, the occurrence of three or two together should be understood. But there is no offense for one who is doing going to another village, etc., when her companion has departed, become distracted, died, moved to another side, or is in danger, or for those who are insane, etc. The occurrence of being together due to an obstacle (antarāyena ekatobhāvo), the commission of any one of going to another village, etc. (gāmantaragamanādīsu aññataratāpajjanaṃ), and the absence of danger (āpadāya abhāvoti)—these are the three factors here. The arising, etc. (samuṭṭhānādīni) are similar to the first pārājika; however, this is a fault by way of ordinance (paṇṇattivajjaṃ), of three thoughts (ticittaṃ), of three kinds (tivedananti).

Ekagāmantaragamanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Ekagāmantaragamanasikkhāpada is finished.

4. Ukkhittakaosāraṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Ukkhittakaosāraṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

ukkhittanti āpattiyā adassanādīsu ukkhittaṃ.Anaññāya gaṇassachandanti tasseva kārakasaṅghassa chandaṃ ajānitvā.Osāreyyāti osāraṇakammaṃ kareyya. Tassā evaṃ karontiyā, gaṇapariyesane sīmāsammutiyā ñattiyā ca dukkaṭaṃ, dvīhi kammavācāhi thullaccayaṃ, kammavācāpariyosāne saṅghādiseso.

Ukkhitta: Expelled for not seeing the offense, etc. (āpattiyā adassanādīsu ukkhittaṃ). Anaññāya gaṇassa chandaṃ: Without knowing the consent of the group that is performing the action. Osāreyya: Should perform the act of reinstatement (osāraṇakammaṃ kareyya). While she is doing this, there is a dukkaṭa in the seeking of the group, the demarcation of the boundary, and the announcement; a thullaccaya with two formal acts, and a saṅghādisesa at the conclusion of the formal act.

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha evaṃ osāraṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, tikasaṅghādisesaṃ, adhammakamme tikadukkaṭaṃ, kārakasaṅghaṃ vā āpucchitvā, gaṇassa vā chandaṃ jānitvā, vatte vā vattantiṃ, asante kārakasaṅghe osārentiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Dhammakammena ukkhittatā, aññatra anuññātakāraṇā osāraṇanti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni saṅghabhedasikkhāpade vuttanayāneva, idaṃ pana kiriyākiriyanti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning Thullanandā, in the case of expulsion, a Saṅghādisesa offense, with an unlawful act, a triple dukkata, after asking the officiating Saṅgha or knowing the consent of the group, or acting according to the procedure, if there is no officiating Saṅgha, there is no offense for one who is insane, etc. Being expelled through a lawful act, and expelling without a justifiable reason, these are the two factors here. The origin, etc., should be understood in the same way as stated in the Saṅghabheda training rule, but this is an action that is not an action.

Ukkhittakaosāraṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Ukkhittakaosāraṇa Training Rule is Finished.

5. Bhojanappaṭiggahaṇapaṭhamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the First Training Rule on Receiving Food

avassutāti chandarāgena tintā.Avassutassāti tādisasseva.Khādeyya vā bhuñjeyya vāti ettha paṭiggahaṇe thullaccayaṃ, ajjhohāre ajjhohāre saṅghādiseso.

Avassutā: Drenched with desire and attachment. Avassutassa: To one who is similarly drenched. Khādeyya vā bhuñjeyya vā: Here, upon receiving, there is a thullaccaya offense; upon each swallowing, a Saṅghādisesa offense.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sundarīnandaṃ ārabbha avassutāya avassutassa hatthato āmisappaṭiggahaṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ekatoavassute paṭiggahaṇe dukkaṭaṃ, ajjhohāre ajjhohāre thullaccayaṃ, yakkhapetapaṇḍakatiracchānagatamanussaviggahānaṃ hatthato ubhatoavassutepi sati eseva nayo. Tattha pana ekatoavassute sati dukkaṭaṃ, sabbattha udakadantaponaggahaṇepi paribhogepi dukkaṭameva. Ubhosu anavassutesu, ‘‘anavassuto’’ti vā ñatvā gaṇhantiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Udakadantaponato aññaṃ ajjhoharaṇīyaṃ, ubhatoavassutatā, sahatthā gahaṇaṃ, ajjhoharaṇanti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamapārājikasadisānīti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning Sundarīnandā, in the case of receiving food from the hand of a woman who is infatuated by a man who is infatuated, if one is infatuated, upon receiving, there is a dukkata offense; upon each swallowing, a thullaccaya offense; the same rule applies even if both are infatuated, receiving from the hand of a yakkha, a peta, a paṇḍaka, an animal, or a disfigured human. However, in that case, if one is infatuated, there is a dukkata offense; in all cases, in taking water, a toothpick, or a betel quid, and in using them, it is only a dukkata offense. If both are not infatuated, or knowing that "he is not infatuated," there is no offense for one who is insane, etc. Something that can be swallowed other than water and a toothpick, both being infatuated, receiving with one's own hand, and swallowing, these are the four factors here. The origin, etc., are similar to the first pārājika.

Bhojanappaṭiggahaṇapaṭhamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the First Training Rule on Receiving Food is Finished.

6. Bhojanappaṭiggahaṇadutiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Second Training Rule on Receiving Food

yato tvanti yasmā tvaṃ.Iṅghāti uyyojanatthe nipāto.Ayampīti yā evaṃ uyyojeti, sā evaṃ uyyojanena ca tena vacanena itarissā paṭiggahaṇena ca dukkaṭāni, ajjhohāragaṇanāya thullaccayāni ca āpajjitvā bhojanapariyosāne saṅghādisesaṃ āpajjati.

Yato tvaṃ: Because you. Iṅgha: A particle used in the sense of urging. Ayampī: She who urges in this way incurs dukkata offenses through that urging and through the other's receiving, and thullaccaya offenses counted by each swallow, and at the end of the meal, she incurs a Saṅghādisesa offense.

Sāvatthiyaṃ aññataraṃ bhikkhuniṃ ārabbha evaṃ uyyojanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sāṇattikameva, purisassa vā yakkhādīnaṃ vā hatthato udakadantaponappaṭiggahaṇuyyojane ca tesaṃ paribhoge ca dukkaṭaṃ, esa nayo yakkhādīnaṃ hatthato avasesaggahaṇatthaṃ uyyojane, tesaṃ gahaṇe, ajjhohāre ca. Bhojanapariyosāne pana thullaccayaṃ. ‘‘Anavassuto’’ti ñatvā vā, ‘‘kupitā na paṭiggaṇhatī’’ti vā, ‘‘kulānuddayatāya na paṭiggaṇhatī’’ti vā uyyojentiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Manussapurisatā, aññatra anuññātakāraṇā, ‘‘khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ gahetvā bhuñjā’’ti uyyojanā, tena vacanena gahetvā itarissā bhojanapariyosānanti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisānīti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning a certain bhikkhunī, in the case of urging. It is only an instigation; there is a dukkata offense for urging the receiving of water or a toothpick from the hand of a man or a yakkha, etc., and for their use of it; the same method applies for urging the receiving of the remaining things from the hand of a yakkha, etc., and for their receiving and swallowing. However, at the end of the meal, it is a thullaccaya offense. If she urges knowing that "he is not infatuated," or "she does not receive because she is angry," or "she does not receive out of compassion for the family," there is no offense for one who is insane, etc. Being a human male, other than for a permissible reason, urging "take and eat the edibles and food," receiving through that urging, and the end of the meal for the other bhikkhunī, these are the three factors here. The origin, etc., are similar to taking what is not given.

Bhojanappaṭiggahaṇadutiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Second Training Rule on Receiving Food is Finished.

7-8-9. Sañcarittādisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7-8-9. Explanation of the Sañcaritta, etc., Training Rules

Sattamaaṭṭhamanavamasikkhāpadānaṃ sañcarittādittaye vuttanayeneva vinicchayo veditabbo.

The judgment for the seventh, eighth, and ninth training rules should be understood in the same way as stated in the triad beginning with Sañcaritta.

Sañcarittādisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Sañcaritta, etc., Training Rules is Finished.

10. Sikkhaṃpaccācikkhaṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Training Rule on Renouncing the Training

kiṃnumāva samaṇiyoti kiṃnu imā eva samaṇiyo.Tāsāhanti tāsaṃ ahaṃ.Yāvatatiyakapadattho bhikkhupātimokkhavaṇṇanāyaṃ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. nigamanavaṇṇanā), avasesavinicchayo ca tattheva saṅghabhedasikkhāpadavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbo, idaṃ pana sāvatthiyaṃ caṇḍakāḷibhikkhuniṃ (pāci. 709) ārabbha ‘‘buddhaṃ paccācikkhāmī’’tiādivacanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, evaṃ vacanameva cettha catūsu aṅgesu paṭhamaṃ aṅganti ayaṃ viseso, sesaṃ tādisamevāti.

Kiṃnumāva samaṇiyo: Are these truly samaṇas? Tāsāhaṃ: I am of those. The meaning of the phrase yāvatatiyaka is in the explanation of the Bhikkhu Pāṭimokkha (Kaṅkhā. Aṭṭha. Nigamanavaṇṇanā), and the remaining judgment should be understood in the same way as stated in the explanation of the Saṅghabheda training rule there; however, this was established in Sāvatthī concerning the bhikkhunī Caṇḍakāḷī (pāci. 709), in the case of saying "I renounce the Buddha," etc., saying such a statement itself is the first among the four factors here, this is the difference, the rest is the same.

Sikkhaṃpaccācikkhaṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Renouncing the Training is Finished.

11. Adhikaraṇakupitasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
11. Explanation of the Training Rule on Being Angry in a Dispute

kismiñcideva adhikaraṇeti catunnaṃ aññatarasmiṃ.Paccākatāti parājitā. Idampi sāvatthiyaṃ caṇḍakāḷiṃ ārabbha ‘‘chandagāminiyo ca bhikkhuniyo’’tiādivacanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sesaṃ dasame vuttanayeneva veditabbanti.

Kismiñcideva adhikaraṇe: In any of the four kinds of disputes. Paccākatā: Defeated. This too was established in Sāvatthī concerning Caṇḍakāḷī, in the case of saying "the bhikkhunīs who are biased by desire," etc., the rest should be understood in the same way as stated in the tenth.

Adhikaraṇakupitasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Being Angry in a Dispute is Finished.

12. Pāpasamācārapaṭhamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
12. Explanation of the First Training Rule on Wrong Conduct

saṃsaṭṭhāti pabbajitānaṃ ananulomena gihīnaṃ koṭṭanapacanasāsanaharaṇādinā kāyikavācasikena missībhūtā. Pāpo kāyikavācasiko ācāro etāsantipāpācārā. Pāpo kittisaddo etāsantipāpasaddā. Pāpo ājīvasaṅkhāto siloko etāsantipāpasilokā.Bhikkhunisaṅghassa vihesikāti aññamaññissā kamme kariyamāne paṭikkosanena vihesikā.Vajjappaṭicchādikāti khuddānukhuddakassa vajjassa paṭicchādikā.

Saṃsaṭṭhā: Mingled physically and verbally with laypeople in a way not conforming to those who have gone forth, through activities such as pounding, cooking, and carrying messages. Pāpācārā: Those whose conduct is evil. Pāpasaddā: Those whose reputation is evil. Pāpasilokā: Those whose livelihood is evil. Bhikkhunisaṅghassa vihesikā: Causing trouble to the Saṅgha of bhikkhunīs by objecting when a task is being done by another. Vajjappaṭicchādikā: Concealing even small faults.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahulā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha saṃsaṭṭhavihāravatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sesametthāpi dasame vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ, samanubhāsanakammakāle pana dvetisso ekato samanubhāsitabbāti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning many bhikkhunīs, in the case of a dwelling that is mingled. The rest here should also be understood in the same way as stated in the tenth, but during the time of the act of admonition, two or three should be admonished together.

Pāpasamācārapaṭhamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the First Training Rule on Wrong Conduct is Finished.

13. Pāpasamācāradutiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
13. Explanation of the Second Training Rule on Wrong Conduct

evaṃ vadeyyāti tā samanubhaṭṭhā bhikkhuniyo evaṃ vadeyya.Evācārāti evaṃācārā, yādiso tumhākaṃ ācāro, tādiso ācāroti attho, esa nayo sabbattha.Uññāyāti avaññāya nīcaṃ katvā jānanāya.Paribhavenāti ‘‘kiṃ imā karissantī’’ti evaṃ paribhavitvā jānanena.Akkhantiyāti asahanatāya, kodhenāti attho.Vebhassiyāti balavantassa bhāvena, attano balappakāsanena samutrāsenāti attho.Dubbalyāti tumhākaṃ dubbalabhāvena, sabbattha uññāya ca paribhavena cāti evaṃ samuccayattho daṭṭhabbo.Viviccathāti nānā hotha, ananulomikaṃ kāyikavācasikasaṃsaggaṃ pajahathāti attho.

Evaṃ vadeyyā: The bhikkhunīs who have been admonished should say thus. Evācārā: Those whose conduct is thus, meaning conduct like yours. This method applies everywhere. Uññāya: Knowing in a belittling way, making low. Paribhavena: Knowing in a contemptuous way, thinking "what will these do?" Akkantiyā: Through intolerance, meaning anger. Vebhassiyā: Through the state of being powerful, meaning through agitation by showing one's own strength. Dubbalyā: Through your state of weakness; everywhere, the meaning should be understood as a combination of belittling and contempt. Viviccatha: Be separate, abandon physical and verbal mingling that is unconforming, is the meaning.

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha ‘‘saṃsaṭṭhāva, ayye, tumhe viharatha, mā tumhe nānā viharitthā’’ti uyyojanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sesametthāpi dasame vuttanayeneva veditabbanti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning Thullanandā, in the case of urging "you live mingled, venerable ones, do not live separately," the rest here should also be understood in the same way as stated in the tenth.

Pāpasamācāradutiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Second Training Rule on Wrong Conduct is Finished.

14. Saṅghabhedakādisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
14. Explanation of the Saṅghabhedaka, etc., Training Rule

Uddiṭṭhā kho ayyāyo sattarasa saṅghādisesā dhammāti bhikkhū ārabbha paññattā sādhāraṇā satta, asādhāraṇā dasāti evaṃ sattarasa.Ubhatosaṅghe pakkhamānattaṃ caritabbanti bhikkhuniyā hi āpattiṃ chādentiyāpi parivāso nāma natthi, chādanapaccayāpi na dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati, tasmā chādetvāpi achādetvāpi ekaṃ pakkhamānattameva caritabbaṃ. Taṃ bhikkhunīhi attano sīmaṃ sodhetvā vihārasīmāya vā, sodhetuṃ asakkontīhi khaṇḍasīmāya vā sabbantimena paricchedena catuvaggaṃ gaṇaṃ sannipātāpetvā dātabbaṃ. Sace ekā āpatti hoti, ekissā vasena, sace dve vā tisso vā sambahulā vā ekavatthukā vā nānāvatthukā vā, tāsaṃ tāsaṃ vasena bhikkhupātimokkhavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttavatthugottanāmaāpattibhedesu yaṃ yaṃ icchati, taṃ taṃ ādāya yojanā kātabbā.

Uddiṭṭhā kho ayyāyo sattarasa saṅghādisesā dhammā: Venerable ones, seventeen Saṅghādisesa Dhammas have been recited; seven common ones established concerning monks, and ten uncommon ones, thus seventeen. Ubhatosaṅghe pakkhamānattaṃ caritabbaṃ: For a bhikkhunī who conceals an offense, there is no parivāsa; she does not incur a dukkata offense even due to the cause of concealment, therefore, whether concealing or not concealing, only one pakkhamānatta should be performed. It should be given by the bhikkhunīs after purifying their own sīmā or the sīmā of the monastery, or, being unable to purify it, after assembling a group of four, with the last segment, in a khaṇḍasīmā. If there is one offense, it is based on one; if there are two or three or many, either of the same kind or of different kinds, the application should be done by taking whatever is desired among the divisions of object, gotra name, and offense stated in the explanation of the Bhikkhu Pāṭimokkha.

Tatridaṃ paṭhamāpattivasena mukhamattanidassanaṃ – tāya āpannāya bhikkhuniyā bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā vuḍḍhānaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ pāde vanditvā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā evamassavacanīyo ‘‘ahaṃ, ayye, ekaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjiṃ ussayavādaṃ, sāhaṃ, ayye, saṅghaṃ ekissā āpattiyā ussayavādāya pakkhamānattaṃ yācāmī’’ti, evaṃ tikkhattuṃ yācāpetvā byattāya bhikkhuniyā paṭibalāya saṅgho ñāpetabbo –

Here, this is a mere introduction, a sample statement, based on the first offense – that bhikkhunī who has committed the offense should approach the Saṅgha of bhikkhunīs, arrange her upper robe over one shoulder, pay homage at the feet of the senior bhikkhunīs, sit in a squatting posture, hold her hands together in añjali, and say this: "Venerable ones, I have committed an offense, ussayavāda. I ask the Saṅgha for pakkhamānatta for that one offense, ussayavāda." After having her asked thus three times, a capable and competent bhikkhunī should inform the Saṅgha:

‘‘Suṇātu me, ayye, saṅgho, ayaṃ itthannāmā bhikkhunī ekaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjiṃ ussayavādaṃ, sā saṅghaṃ ekissā āpattiyā ussayavādāya pakkhamānattaṃ yācati, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho itthannāmāya bhikkhuniyā ekissā āpattiyā ussayavādāya pakkhamānattaṃ dadeyya, esā ñatti.

"Venerable ones, may the Saṅgha hear me. This bhikkhunī named so-and-so has committed one offense, ussayavāda. She asks the Saṅgha for pakkhamānatta for that one offense, ussayavāda. If it seems appropriate to the Saṅgha, the Saṅgha should grant pakkhamānatta for that one offense, ussayavāda, to the bhikkhunī named so-and-so. This is the motion.

‘‘Suṇātu me, ayye, saṅgho, ayaṃ itthannāmā bhikkhunī…pe… dutiyampi…pe… tatiyampi etamatthaṃ vadāmi, suṇātu me, ayye, saṅgho…pe… sā bhāseyya. Dinnaṃ saṅghena itthannāmāya bhikkhuniyā ekissā āpattiyā ussayavādāya pakkhamānattaṃ. Khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmī’’ti.

"Venerable ones, may the Saṅgha hear me. This bhikkhunī named so-and-so... repeats... For the second time... repeats... For the third time I say this matter. Venerable ones, may the Saṅgha hear me... repeats... She should speak. The Saṅgha has granted pakkhamānatta for that one offense, ussayavāda, to the bhikkhunī named so-and-so. It is pleasing to the Saṅgha, therefore it is silent. Thus I hold it."

Kammavācāpariyosāne ‘‘vattaṃ samādiyāmi, mānattaṃ samādiyāmī’’ti samādiyitvā saṅghassa ārocetvā nikkhittavattena tāva vasitukāmāya tattheva saṅghamajjhe vā pakkantāsu bhikkhunīsu ekabhikkhuniyā vā dutiyikāya vā santike ‘‘vattaṃ nikkhipāmi, mānattaṃ nikkhipāmī’’ti nikkhipitabbaṃ. Aññissā pana āgantukāya santike ārocetvā nikkhipitabbaṃ, nikkhittakālato paṭṭhāya pakatattaṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati, tato purearuṇeyeva catūhi bhikkhunīhi taṃ bhikkhuniṃ gahetvā gāmūpacārato ca bhikkhūnaṃ vihārūpacārato ca dve leḍḍupāte atikkamitvā mahāmaggā okkamma gumbavatiādīhi paṭicchanne okāse nisīditabbaṃ. Catūhi bhikkhūhipi tattha gantabbaṃ, gantvā bhikkhunīnaṃ avidūre visuṃ nisīditabbaṃ. Atha tāya bhikkhuniyā vuttanayeneva vattaṃ samādiyitvā bhikkhunisaṅghassa tāva evaṃ ārocetabbaṃ –

At the end of the kammavācā, after undertaking "I undertake the vatta, I undertake the mānatta" and informing the Saṅgha, for one desiring to live with the vatta set aside for now, either there in the middle of the Saṅgha or among the bhikkhunīs who have departed, to one bhikkhunī or to a second bhikkhunī, it should be set aside saying "I set aside the vatta, I set aside the mānatta". However, it should be announced and set aside to another bhikkhunī who has come as a visitor. From the time of setting aside, she stands in a state of normalcy. Then, before dawn, taking that bhikkhunī with four bhikkhunīs, after passing two leḍḍupātas beyond the boundary of the village and the monastery of the monks, going off the main road and sitting in a covered place with trees, etc. Four monks should also go there, and after going, they should sit separately not far from the bhikkhunīs. Then that bhikkhunī, after undertaking the vatta in the way stated, should announce thus to the Saṅgha of bhikkhunīs:

‘‘Ahaṃ, ayye, ekaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjiṃ ussayavādaṃ, sāhaṃ saṅghaṃ ekissā āpattiyā ussayavādāya pakkhamānattaṃ yāciṃ, tassā me saṅgho ekissā āpattiyā ussayavādāya pakkhamānattaṃ adāsi, sāhaṃ mānattaṃ carāmi, vedayāmahaṃ, ayye, ‘vedayatī’ti maṃ saṅgho dhāretū’’ti.

"Venerable ones, I committed one offense, ussayavāda. I asked the Saṅgha for pakkhamānatta for that one offense, ussayavāda. The Saṅgha granted me pakkhamānatta for that one offense, ussayavāda. I am performing mānatta. I announce it, venerable ones. May the Saṅgha remember me as ‘she is announcing.’"

Tato bhikkhusaṅghassa santikaṃ gantvā evaṃ ārocetabbaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ, ayyā, ekaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjiṃ…pe… vedayāmahaṃ, ayyā, ‘vedayatī’ti maṃ saṅgho dhāretū’’ti. Ārocetvā bhikkhunisaṅghasseva santike nisīditabbaṃ, tato paṭṭhāya bhikkhūsu vā, dutiyikaṃ ṭhapetvā bhikkhunīsu vā pakkantāsupi ubhatosaṅghe mānattaṃ ciṇṇameva hoti. Yāva aruṇaṃ na uṭṭhahati, tāva yaṃ paṭhamaṃ passati bhikkhuṃ vā bhikkhuniṃ vā, tassā ārocetabbaṃ. Uṭṭhite aruṇe vattaṃ nikkhipitvā upassayaṃ gantabbaṃ, evaṃ pañcadasa aruṇā gahetabbā.

Then, going to the presence of the Saṅgha of monks, it should be announced thus: "Venerable ones, I committed one offense... repeats... I announce it, venerable ones. May the Saṅgha remember me as ‘she is announcing.’" After announcing, she should sit in the presence of the Saṅgha of bhikkhunīs only; from then on, even if the monks or bhikkhunīs, except for the second bhikkhunī, have departed, the mānatta is still considered performed in both Saṅghas. As long as dawn does not break, it should be announced to whichever monk or bhikkhunī she sees first. When dawn breaks, after setting aside the vatta, she should go to the upassaya. Thus, fifteen dawns should be taken.

ciṇṇamānattāya bhikkhuniyāti yadā evaṃ ciṇṇamānattā bhikkhunī hoti, athassāyattha siyā vīsatigaṇo bhikkhunisaṅghoti vuttanayeneva abbhānakammaṃ kātabbaṃ, sesaṃ uttānamevāti.

Ciṇṇamānattāya bhikkhuniyā: When a bhikkhunī has thus performed mānatta, then the act of rehabilitation should be done for her yattha siyā vīsatigaṇo bhikkhunisaṅgho, in the way stated; the rest is straightforward.

Kaṅkhāvitaraṇiyā pātimokkhavaṇṇanāya

In the Kaṅkhāvitaraṇī Commentary on the Pāṭimokkha

Bhikkhunipātimokkhe

In the Bhikkhunī Pāṭimokkha

Saṅghādisesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Saṅghādisesa Explanation is Finished.

Nissaggiyakaṇḍo

The Nissaggiya Section

1. Pattasannicayasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Training Rule on Accumulating Bowls

pattasannicayaṃ kareyyāti pattasannidhiṃ kareyya, ekāhaṃ anadhiṭṭhahitvā vā avikappetvā vā adhiṭṭhānupagaṃ pattaṃ ṭhapeyyāti attho.

Pattasannicayaṃ kareyyā: One should make an accumulation of bowls, meaning one should keep a bowl without determining or dispensing with it for one day, or keeping a bowl in a place that is not for determining, is the meaning.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiyā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha pattasannicayavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sesakathāmaggo bhikkhupātimokkhavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbo, tatra hi dasāhātikkame āpatti, idha ekāhātikkameti ettakameva tassa ca imassa ca nānākaraṇaṃ, sesaṃ tādisamevāti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning the nuns of the group of six, regarding the instance of accumulating bowls (pāci. 239). The rest of the narrative method should be understood in the same way as stated in the commentary on the Bhikkhu Pāṭimokkha; for there, the offense occurs upon exceeding ten days, while here, it's upon exceeding one day. This is the only difference between that and this; the rest is the same.

Pattasannicayasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Bowl Accumulation Training Rule is Concluded.

2. Akālacīvarasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Untimely Robe Training Rule

akālacīvaranti atthate kathine kathinamāsehi, anatthate cīvaramāsato aññasmiṃ kāle uppannaṃ, yaṃ vā pana kālepi ādissa dinnaṃ.Ādissa dinnaṃnāma ‘‘sampattā bhājentū’’ti vatvā vā, ‘‘idaṃ gaṇassa, idaṃ tumhākaṃ dammī’’ti vatvā vā, dātukāmatāya pādamūle ṭhapetvā vā dinnaṃ. Iccetaṃ akālacīvaraṃ ‘‘kālacīvara’’nti adhiṭṭhahitvā bhājāpentiyā payoge dukkaṭaṃ, yaṃ attanā laddhaṃ, taṃ nissaggiyaṃ hoti. Nissaṭṭhaṃ paṭilabhitvāpi yathādāneyeva upanetabbaṃ, aññasmimpi evarūpe sikkhāpade eseva nayo.

Akālacīvara (untimely robe) means arising at a time other than the robe month, whether there is kathina or in the kathina month. Or, indeed, one that is given having been set aside even in season. Ādissa dinnaṃ (given having been set aside) means having said, "Let them share when [the kathina] has arrived," or having said, "I will give this to the Sangha, I will give this to you," or having placed it at the foot of [a bhikkhu/bhikkhuni] intending to give it. Thus, that untimely robe, if [a bhikkhuni], having decided, "it is a timely robe," shares it, there is a dukkata for each effort, that which is obtained by herself, that is subject to forfeiture. Even after retrieving what has been forfeited, it should be used only as it was given; this same method applies to any training rule of this kind.

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha akālacīvaraṃ ‘‘kālacīvara’’nti adhiṭṭhahitvā bhājanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, akālacīvare vematikāya, kālacīvare akālacīvarasaññāya ceva vematikāya ca dukkaṭaṃ. Ubhosu kālacīvarasaññāya, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Akālacīvaratā, tathāsaññitā, ‘‘kālacīvara’’nti adhiṭṭhāya lesena bhājāpanaṃ, paṭilābhoti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisānīti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning Thullanandā, regarding the instance of sharing a robe having decided that an untimely robe is a "timely robe"; if there is doubt regarding an untimely robe, and also a dukkata for perceiving a timely robe as an untimely robe, or for having doubt. There is no offense in both cases if perceiving it as a timely robe, or for the insane, etc. Untimeliness of the robe, perceiving it as such, deciding "it is a timely robe," sharing it deceitfully, and retrieval—these are the four factors here. Origination, etc., are similar to theft.

Akālacīvarasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Untimely Robe Training Rule is Concluded.

3. Cīvaraparivattanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Robe Exchanging Training Rule

handāti gaṇha.Acchindeyyāti sayaṃ acchindantiyā bandhitvā ṭhapitesu bahūsupi ekāpatti, itaresu vatthugaṇanāya āpattiyo. Acchindāpane pana ekāya āṇattiyā bahūsu acchinnesupi ekāvāpatti.

Handā means take. Acchindeyyā (should seize): if she herself seizes it, there is one offense even if there are many that have been tied up and put away; for the rest, there are offenses according to the number of items. But if [she] causes [someone] to seize [it], even if many are seized by one command, there is only one offense.

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha cīvaraṃ parivattetvā acchindanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, aññasmiṃ parikkhāre tikadukkaṭaṃ, anupasampannāya cīvarepi tikadukkaṭameva. Yā pana tāya vā diyyamānaṃ, tassā vā vissāsaṃ gaṇhāti, tassā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Upasampannatā, parivattitacīvarassa vikappanupagatā, sakasaññāya acchindanaṃ vā acchindāpanaṃ vāti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāni, idaṃ pana dukkhavedananti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning Thullanandā, regarding the instance of exchanging robes and seizing them; it is a sāṇattika, a triple pācittiya; for another requisite, it is a triple dukkata; for a non-ordained [person] even for a robe, it is a triple dukkata. But there is no offense for her who is giving or for her who takes with trust, or for the insane, etc. Being ordained, the exchanged robe not being subject to relinquishment, seizing or causing to seize with one's own perception—these are the three factors here. Origination, etc., are similar to theft; but this is painful feeling.

Cīvaraparivattanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Robe Exchanging Training Rule is Concluded.

4. Aññaviññāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Requesting Another Training Rule

viññāpetvāti jānāpetvā, ‘‘idaṃ nāma āharā’’ti yācitvā vā.Aññaṃ viññāpeyyāti yaṃ pubbe ‘‘kinte, ayye, aphāsu, kiṃ āhariyatū’’ti vuttāya viññāpitaṃ, taṃ paṭikkhipitvā tañceva aññañca gahetukāmā tato aññaṃ viññāpeyya, tassā viññattiyā dukkaṭaṃ, paṭilābhena nissaggiyaṃ hoti.

Viññāpetvā (having informed) means having made known, or having asked, "Bring such and such." Aññaṃ viññāpeyyā (should request another): having rejected that which was requested after having said previously, "What is not comfortable for you, venerable? What should be brought?", she should request another thing different from that, wishing to take that very thing or something else; there is a dukkata for that request, and it becomes subject to forfeiture upon obtaining it.

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha aññaṃ viññāpetvā aññaṃ viññāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, anaññe dvikadukkaṭaṃ. Anaññe anaññasaññāya pana, tasmiṃ appahonte puna taññeva, aññenapi atthe sati tena saddhiṃ aññañca, yañca viññattaṃ, tato ce aññaṃ samagghataraṃ hoti, imaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā suddhaṃ aññameva ca viññāpentiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Lesena gahetukāmatā, aññassa viññāpanaṃ, paṭilābhoti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni sañcarittasadisānīti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning Thullanandā, regarding the instance of requesting one thing and then requesting another; it is a triple pācittiya; if it is not another, it is a double dukkata. But if it is not another with the perception of not another, if the same [item] is not sufficient, again the same [item], or if there is another need, another together with that, and if that which is requested is more valuable than that, showing this advantage, and if she requests only something different that is pure, and there is no offense for the insane, etc. The intention to take deceitfully, requesting another, and obtaining—these are the three factors here. Origination, etc., are similar to roaming about.

Aññaviññāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Requesting Another Training Rule is Concluded.

5. Aññacetāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Getting Another Exchanged Training Rule

aññaṃ cetāpetvāti attano kappiyabhaṇḍena ‘‘idaṃ nāma āharā’’ti aññaṃ parivattāpetvā.Aññaṃ cetāpeyyāti ‘‘evaṃ me idaṃ datvā aññampi āharissatī’’ti maññamānā ‘‘na me iminā attho, idaṃ nāma me āharā’’ti tato aññaṃ cetāpeyya. Tassā cetāpanappayoge dukkaṭaṃ, paṭilābhena tena vā aññena vā mūlena āhaṭaṃ nissaggiyaṃ hoti, sesaṃ catutthasadisamevāti.

Aññaṃ cetāpetvā (having had another exchanged) means having had another exchanged by means of one's own allowable goods, saying, "Bring such and such." Aññaṃ cetāpeyyā (should have another exchanged) means thinking, "Having given this to me, she will bring another," she should have another exchanged, saying, "I don't need this, bring such and such to me." There is a dukkata for the effort of having [it] exchanged, and what is brought with that or another root becomes subject to forfeiture, the rest is just like the fourth.

Aññacetāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Getting Another Exchanged Training Rule is Concluded.

6. Paṭhamasaṅghikacetāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the First Getting Exchanged with Sangha Property Training Rule

aññadatthikenāti aññassatthāya dinnena.Aññuddisikenāti aññaṃ uddisitvā dinnena.Saṅghikenāti saṅghassa pariccattena.Parikkhārenāti kappiyabhaṇḍena.Aññaṃ cetāpeyyāti ‘‘idaṃ nāma paribhuñjeyyāthā’’ti yaṃ uddisitvā niyametvā yo parikkhāro dinno, tato aññaṃ parivattāpeyya, tassā payoge dukkaṭaṃ, paṭilābhena nissaggiyaṃ.

Aññadatthikenā (for another purpose) means given for another's purpose. Aññuddisikenā (for another's designation) means given designating another. Saṅghikenā (belonging to the Sangha) means by relinquishment to the Sangha. Parikkhārenā (with a requisite) means with allowable goods. Aññaṃ cetāpeyyā (should have another exchanged): if she has another exchanged from that requisite that was given designating and specifying, "you should use such and such," there is a dukkata for the effort, and it is subject to forfeiture upon obtaining [it].

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahulā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha tādisena parikkhārena aññaṃ cetāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, anaññadatthike dvikadukkaṭaṃ. Tasmiṃ pana anaññadatthikasaññāya, sesakaṃ upanentiyā, ‘‘tumhehi etadatthāya dinno, amhākañca iminā nāma attho’’ti sāmike apaloketvā upanentiyā, yadā bhikkhuniyo vihārampi chaḍḍetvā pakkamanti, evarūpāsu āpadāsu upanentīnaṃ, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Sesaṃ catutthasadisamevāti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning many nuns, regarding the instance of having another exchanged with such a requisite; it is a triple pācittiya; if it is not for another's purpose, it is a double dukkata. But if it is with the perception of not for another's purpose, when handing over the remainder, when handing [it] over having informed the owner, saying, "it was given by you for this purpose, and we need this"; when the nuns even abandon the monastery and leave, there is no offense for those handing [it] over in such dangers, or for the insane, etc. The rest is just like the fourth.

Paṭhamasaṅghikacetāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the First Getting Exchanged with Sangha Property Training Rule is Concluded.

7. Dutiyasaṅghikacetāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Second Getting Exchanged with Sangha Property Training Rule

saññācikenāti sayaṃ yācitakenāpi. Etadevettha nānākaraṇaṃ, sesaṃ chaṭṭhasadisamevāti.

Saññācikenā (by requesting oneself) means even by requesting oneself. This alone is the distinction here, the rest is just like the sixth.

Dutiyasaṅghikacetāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Second Getting Exchanged with Sangha Property Training Rule is Concluded.

8. Paṭhamagaṇikacetāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the First Getting Exchanged with Group Property Training Rule

mahājanikenāti gaṇassa pariccattena, idamettha chaṭṭhato nānākaraṇaṃ.

Mahājanikenā (belonging to the group) means by relinquishment to the group; this is the distinction here from the sixth.

Paṭhamagaṇikacetāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the First Getting Exchanged with Group Property Training Rule is Concluded.

9. Dutiyagaṇikacetāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Second Getting Exchanged with Group Property Training Rule

saññācikenāti idaṃ aṭṭhamato atirittaṃ, sesaṃ dvīsupi chaṭṭhasikkhāpadasadisamevāti.

Saññācikenā (by requesting oneself): this is additional to the eighth, the rest in both is just like the sixth training rule.

Dutiyagaṇikacetāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Second Getting Exchanged with Group Property Training Rule is Concluded.

10. Puggalikacetāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Getting Exchanged with Individual Property Training Rule

puggalikenāti ekabhikkhuniyā pariccattena.Saññācikenāti sayaṃ yācitakena ca.Aññaṃ cetāpeyyāti yaṃ uddisitvā dinnaṃ, tato aññaṃ cetāpentiyā payoge dukkaṭaṃ, paṭilābhena nissaggiyaṃ hoti.

Puggalikenā (belonging to an individual) means by relinquishment to one bhikkhuni. Saññācikenā (by requesting oneself) and by requesting oneself. Aññaṃ cetāpeyyā (should have another exchanged): if she has another exchanged from that which was given designating, there is a dukkata for the effort, and it is subject to forfeiture upon obtaining [it].

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha tādisena parikkhārena aññaṃ cetāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sesaṃ chaṭṭhasadisamevāti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning Thullanandā, regarding the instance of having another exchanged with such a requisite; the rest is just like the sixth.

Puggalikacetāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Getting Exchanged with Individual Property Training Rule is Concluded.

Pattavaggo paṭhamo.

The First Chapter on Bowls.

11. Garupāvuraṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
11. Explanation of the Heavy Blanket Training Rule

garupāvuraṇanti sītakāle pāvuraṇaṃ.Catukkaṃsaparamantikaṃsonāma catukkahāpaṇiko hoti, tasmā soḷasakahāpaṇagghanakaṃ.Cetāpetabbanti ṭhapetvā sahadhammike ca ñātakappavārite ca aññena kismiñcideva guṇe parituṭṭhena ‘‘vadethāyye, yenattho’’ti vuttāya viññāpetabbaṃ.Tato ce uttarīti tatuttari viññāpentiyā dukkaṭaṃ, paṭiladdhaṃ nissaggiyaṃ hoti.

Garupāvuraṇa (heavy blanket) means a blanket in the cold season. Catukkaṃsaparama (of utmost four kaṃsas): kaṃsa means four kahāpaṇas, therefore, up to sixteen kahāpaṇas in value. Cetāpetabba (should have [it] exchanged): having excluded co-religious and relatives who have been granted permission, it should be requested of another who is pleased with some quality or other, if [she] has been told, "Say, venerable, what is needed." Tato ce uttarī (if more than that): there is a dukkata for requesting more than that, and what is obtained is subject to forfeiture.

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha rājānaṃ kambalaṃ viññāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, ūnakacatukkaṃse dvikadukkaṭaṃ. Tasmiṃ pana ūnakasaññāya, catukkaṃsaparamaṃ cetāpentiyā, ñātakappavārite vā, aññassa vā atthāya, attano vā dhanena, mahagghaṃ cetāpentaṃ appagghaṃ cetāpentiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Garupāvuraṇatā, atirekacatukkaṃsatā, ananuññātaṭṭhāne viññatti, paṭilābhoti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni sañcarittasadisānīti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning Thullanandā, regarding the instance of requesting a blanket from the king; it is a triple pācittiya; if it is less than four kaṃsas, it is a double dukkata. But if it is with the perception of less than that, having [something] exchanged that is of utmost four kaṃsas, or for a relative who has been granted permission, or for another's purpose, or with one's own wealth, when having something inexpensive exchanged when having something expensive exchanged, and there is no offense for the insane, etc. Being a heavy blanket, being more than four kaṃsas, requesting in an unpermitted place, and obtaining—these are the four factors here. Origination, etc., are similar to roaming about.

Garupāvuraṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Heavy Blanket Training Rule is Concluded.

12. Lahupāvuraṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
12. Explanation of the Light Blanket Training Rule

lahupāvuraṇanti uṇhakāle pāvuraṇaṃ.Aḍḍhateyyakaṃsaparamanti dasakahāpaṇagghanakaṃ, sesaṃ paṭhamasadisamevāti.

Lahupāvuraṇa (light blanket) means a blanket in the hot season. Aḍḍhateyyakaṃsaparama (of utmost one and a half kaṃsas) means up to ten kahāpaṇas in value, the rest is just like the first.

Lahupāvuraṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Light Blanket Training Rule is Concluded.

Ito parāni imasmiṃ vagge aṭṭha, tatiyavagge dasāti imāni aṭṭhārasa sikkhāpadāni bhikkhupātimokkhavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbānīti.

From here on, the eight in this chapter, and the ten in the third chapter, these eighteen training rules should be understood in the same way as stated in the commentary on the Bhikkhu Pāṭimokkha.

Jātarūpavaggo tatiyo.

The Third Chapter on Gold and Silver.

Uddiṭṭhā kho ayyāyo tiṃsa nissaggiyā pācittiyā dhammāti bhikkhū ārabbha paññattā sādhāraṇā aṭṭhārasa, asādhāraṇā dvādasāti evaṃ tiṃsa. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

Uddiṭṭhā kho ayyāyo tiṃsa nissaggiyā pācittiyā dhammā (venerables, the thirty Nissaggiya Pācittiya Dhammas have been recited): eighteen common ones established concerning the bhikkhus, and twelve uncommon ones, thus [there are] thirty. The rest is clear everywhere.

Kaṅkhāvitaraṇiyā pātimokkhavaṇṇanāya bhikkhunipātimokkhe

In the Kaṅkhāvitaraṇīya Commentary on the Pātimokkha, in the Bhikkhuni Pātimokkha,

Nissaggiyapācittiyavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Nissaggiya Pācittiya is Concluded.

Pācittiyakaṇḍo

Pācittiya Section

1. Lasuṇavaggo

1. The Garlic Chapter

1. Lasuṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Garlic Training Rule

lasuṇanti magadharaṭṭhe jātaṃ āmakaṃ bhaṇḍikalasuṇameva, na ekadvitimiñjakaṃ. Tañhi ‘‘khādissāmī’’ti paṭiggaṇhantiyā dukkaṭaṃ, ajjhohāre ajjhohāre pācittiyaṃ.

Lasuṇa (garlic) means raw garlic that grows in the Magadha country, only bulb garlic, not single, double, or triple cloves. For indeed, there is a dukkata for [a bhikkhuni] accepting it thinking, "I will eat [it]", there is a pācittiya for each swallow.

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha lasuṇaṃ harāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, alasuṇe dvikadukkaṭaṃ. Tasmiṃ pana alasuṇasaññāya, palaṇḍuke, bhañjanake, haritake, cāpalasuṇe, sūpasampāke, maṃsasampāke, telasampāke, sāḷave, uttaribhaṅge, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Āmakalasuṇañceva, ajjhoharaṇañcāti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasadisānīti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning Thullanandā, regarding the instance of carrying off garlic; it is a triple pācittiya; if it is not garlic, it is a double dukkata. But if it is with the perception of not garlic, for onions, ginger, haritaki, shallots, soup seasoning, meat seasoning, oil seasoning, gruel, upper class foods, and there is no offense for the insane, etc. Being raw garlic, and swallowing—these are the two factors here. Origination, etc., are similar to goat's hair.

Lasuṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Garlic Training Rule is Concluded.

2. Sambādhalomasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Thick Hair Training Rule

sambādheti paṭicchannokāse, upakacchakesu ca muttakaraṇe cāti attho.Saṃharāpeyyāti ettha khurasaṇḍāsakattariādīsu yena kenaci saṃharāpentiyā payogagaṇanāya pācittiyaṃ, na lomagaṇanāya.

Sambādhe (in a thicket) means in a covered place, and it also means in the armpits and in the pubic area. Saṃharāpeyyā (should have [it] removed): here, for having [it] removed with a razor, tweezers, scissors, etc., there is a pācittiya for each effort, not according to the number of hairs.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiyā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha sambādhe lomaṃ saṃharāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, attano atthāya aññaṃ āṇāpentiyā sāṇattikaṃ, āpattibhedonatthi. Ābādhapaccayā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Ābādhābhāvo, sambādhe lomasaṃharaṇanti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ ekaddhānamaggagamanasikkhāpadasadisānīti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning the group-of-six nuns, regarding the instance of having hair removed in a thicket; if she commands another for her own sake, it is a sāṇattika; there is no difference in the offense. Because of illness, and there is no offense for the insane, etc. Absence of illness, removing hair in a thicket—these are the two factors here. Origination, etc., are similar to the training rule of a bhikkhuni traveling on a road for a long distance with [another] bhikkhuni.

Sambādhalomasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Thick Hair Training Rule is Concluded.

3. Talaghātakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Hand-Slapping Training Rule

talaghātaketi antamaso uppalakesarenāpi muttakaraṇassa talaghātane muttakaraṇamhi pahāradāne pācittiyanti attho.

Talaghātake (hand-slapping) means striking the pubic area, at the very least, with the pistil of a lotus, there is a pācittiya for dealing a blow to the pubic area.

Sāvatthiyaṃ dve bhikkhuniyo ārabbha talaghātakaraṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, purimanayeneva sāṇattikaṃ, āpattibhedo natthi. Ito paraṃ pana yattha natthi, tattha avatvāva gamissāma. Ābādhapaccayā gaṇḍaṃ vā vaṇaṃ vā paharantiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Ābādhābhāvo, muttakaraṇe pahāradānaṃ, phassasādiyananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamapārājikasadisānīti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning two bhikkhunis, regarding the instance of hand-slapping; it is a sāṇattika in the same way as before; there is no difference in the offense. But from here on, where there is not, we will go on without saying [it]. Because of illness, for striking a boil or wound, and there is no offense for the insane, etc. Absence of illness, dealing a blow to the pubic area, enjoying the touch—these are the three factors here. Origination, etc., are similar to the first pārājika.

Talaghātakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Hand-Slapping Training Rule is Concluded.

4. Jatumaṭṭhakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Jatumaṭṭhakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

jatumaṭṭhaketi jatunā kate maṭṭhadaṇḍake. Vatthuvasenetaṃ vuttaṃ, kāmarāgena pana uppalakesarampi pavesentiyā āpatti.

Jatumaṭṭhaka: A handle made of wax. This is stated in terms of a specific object, but if one inserts even an Uppala-flower's stamen due to lust, there is an offense.

Sāvatthiyaṃ aññataraṃ bhikkhuniṃ ārabbha jatumaṭṭhakasādiyanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sesaṃ tatiyasadisamevāti.

This was prescribed in Sāvatthī concerning a certain bhikkhunī in relation to the event of enjoying a wax handle. The rest is similar to the third.

Jatumaṭṭhakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Jatumaṭṭhakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā is complete.

5. Udakasuddhikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Udakasuddhikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

udakasuddhikanti muttakaraṇassa dhovanaṃ.Ādiyamānāyāti karontiyā.Dvaṅgulapabbaparamaṃādātabbanti dvīsu aṅgulīsu ekekaṃ katvā dvaṅgulapabbaparamaṃ ādātabbaṃ.Taṃ atikkāmentiyāti sace dhovanakāle rāgavasena vitthārato tatiyāya aṅguliyā aggapabbaṃ, gambhīrato ekissāva aṅguliyā tatiyapabbaṃ paveseti pācittiyaṃ.

Udakasuddhika: The washing of the organ of generation. Ādiyamānāya: While doing (it). Dvaṅgulapabbaparamaṃ ādātabbaṃ: It should be taken up to the limit of two finger-joints, reckoning one joint for each of the two fingers. Taṃ atikkāmentiyā: If, during the washing, due to lust, she inserts the tip of the first joint of the third finger in width or the third joint of just one finger in depth, there is a pācittiya.

Sakkesu aññataraṃ bhikkhuniṃ ārabbha atigambhīraṃ udakasuddhikaṃ ādiyanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, ūnakadvaṅgulapabbe dvikadukkaṭaṃ. Tasmiṃ pana ūnakasaññāya, dvaṅgulapabbaparamaṃ ādiyantiyā, ābādhapaccayā atirekampi, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti, sesaṃ tatiyasadisamevāti.

This was prescribed among the Sakyans concerning a certain bhikkhunī in relation to the event of taking up udakasuddhika too deeply. There is a triple pācittiya, and a double dukkata for less than two finger-joints. But, in that case, if she perceives it as less, if she takes up to the limit of two finger-joints, due to sickness, even more than that, and for an insane person, etc., there is no offense. The rest is similar to the third.

Udakasuddhikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Udakasuddhikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā is complete.

6. Upatiṭṭhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Upatiṭṭhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

bhuñjantassāti pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññataraṃ bhuñjato.Pānīyenāti suddhena vā udakena, takkādīsu vā aññatarena.Vidhūpanenāti yāya kāyaci bījaniyā.Upatiṭṭheyyāti yā etesu dvīsu aññataraṃ gahetvā hatthapāse tiṭṭhati, tassā pācittiyaṃ.

Bhuñjantassa: To one who is eating one of the five foods. Pānīyena: With pure water or with buttermilk, etc. Vidhūpanena: With any fan whatsoever. Upatiṭṭheyyā: Whoever stands in proximity, taking one of these two, for her there is a pācittiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ aññataraṃ bhikkhuniṃ ārabbha bhuñjantassa evaṃ tiṭṭhanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, hatthapāsaṃ vijahitvā khādanīyaṃ khādantassa upatiṭṭhantiyā dukkaṭaṃ, anupasampanne tikadukkaṭaṃ. ‘‘Imaṃ pivatha, iminā bījathā’’ti evaṃ dentiyā vā, dāpentiyā vā, anupasampannaṃ vā upatiṭṭhāpanatthaṃ āṇāpentiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Bhuñjantassa bhikkhuno hatthapāse ṭhānaṃ, pānīyassa vā vidhūpanassa vā gahaṇanti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasadisānīti.

This was prescribed in Sāvatthī concerning a certain bhikkhunī in relation to the event of standing thus while (someone) was eating. There is a triple pācittiya. If she stands attending to one who is eating chewable food after moving away from hand-reach, there is a dukkata. A triple dukkata for one who is not fully ordained. There is no offense for one who gives or causes to give (saying), "Drink this, fan with this," or for one who orders an unordained person to attend, or for an insane person, etc. Standing within reach of the hand of the eating bhikkhu and taking either water or a fan, these are the two factors here. The origin, etc., are similar to the eḷakaloma.

Upatiṭṭhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Upatiṭṭhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā is complete.

7. Āmakadhaññasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Āmakadhaññasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

viññatvāti antamaso mātarampi yācitvā.Bhuñjeyyāti ajjhohareyya. Ettha ca viññatti ceva bhojanañca pamāṇaṃ, tasmā sayaṃ viññatvā aññāya bhajjanādīni kārāpetvā vā, aññāya viññāpetvā sayaṃ bhajjanādīni katvā vā paṭiggahaṇato paṭṭhāya yāva dantehi saṃkhādanaṃ, tāva pubbappayogesu dukkaṭāni, ajjhohāre ajjhohāre pācittiyaṃ.

Viññatvā: Having requested, even from one's mother. Bhuñjeyya: Should consume. Here, both the requesting and the eating are the measure. Therefore, having requested oneself and having another prepare the dishes, etc., or having another request and oneself prepare the dishes, etc., from the moment of receiving until the chewing with the teeth, there are dukkata for the initial efforts; for each act of swallowing, a pācittiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahulā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha āmakadhaññaṃ viññāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sayaṃ vā aññāya vā aviññattiyā laddhaṃ bhajjanādīni katvā vā kāretvā vā bhuñjantiyā dukkaṭaṃ, aññāya viññattiyā laddhaṃ pana sayaṃ bhajjanādīni katvāpi kāretvāpi bhuñjantiyā dukkaṭameva. Ābādhe sati sedakammādīnaṃ atthāya viññāpentiyā, aviññattiyā labbhamānaṃ navakammatthāya sampaṭicchantiyā, ñātakappavāritaṭṭhāne muggamāsādiaparaṇṇaṃ viññāpentiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Sattannaṃ dhaññānaṃ aññatarassa viññāpanaṃ vā viññāpāpanaṃ vā, paṭilābho, bhajjanādīni katvā vā kāretvā vā ajjhoharaṇanti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni addhānamaggasikkhāpadasadisānīti.

This was prescribed in Sāvatthī concerning many bhikkhunīs in relation to the event of requesting raw grain. If she eats that which she has obtained without requesting, whether by herself or by another, whether having prepared it or having it prepared, there is a dukkata. However, if she eats that which she has obtained by another's request, even having prepared it herself or having it prepared, there is only a dukkata. If, when there is sickness, she requests for the purpose of fomentation, etc., if she accepts for new construction something that can be obtained without requesting, if she requests green grams, kidney beans, etc., at a place where she has been invited as a relative, and for an insane person, etc., there is no offense. Requesting or causing to request one of the seven grains, the obtaining, preparing or having prepared, and the consuming, these are the three factors here. The origin, etc., are similar to the addhānamagga training rule.

Āmakadhaññasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Āmakadhaññasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā is complete.

8. Paṭhamauccārachaḍḍanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Paṭhamauccārachaḍḍanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

saṅkāranti kacavaraṃ.Vighāsanti yaṃkiñci paribhuttāvasesaṃ ucchiṭṭhodakampi dantakaṭṭhampi, aṭṭhikacalakesu pana vattabbameva natthi.Tirokuṭṭe vā tiropākāre vāti yassakassaci kuṭṭassa vā pākārassa vā parato.Chaḍḍeyya vā chaḍḍāpeyya vāti sabbānipetāni ekato chaḍḍentiyā ekappayoge ekāpatti, sakiṃ āṇattiyā bahukepi chaḍḍite ekāva.

Saṅkāra: Rubbish. Vighāsa: Whatever is left over from being consumed, even leftover water and a toothpick; there is certainly no need to speak of bones and splinters. Tirokuṭṭe vā tiropākāre vā: Beyond any wall or enclosure whatsoever. Chaḍḍeyya vā chaḍḍāpeyya vā: If she throws all these things down together, there is one offense for one effort; even if many are thrown after one order, there is only one.

Sāvatthiyaṃ aññataraṃ bhikkhuniṃ ārabbha uccāraṃ tirokuṭṭe chaḍḍanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sāṇattikaṃ, bhikkhussa dukkaṭaṃ, oloketvā vā avalañje vā chaḍḍentiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Uccārādibhāvo, anolokanaṃ, valañjanaṭṭhānaṃ, tirokuṭṭatiropākāratā, chaḍḍanaṃ vā chaḍḍāpanaṃ vāti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni sañcarittasadisāni, idaṃ pana kiriyākiriyanti.

This was prescribed in Sāvatthī concerning a certain bhikkhunī in relation to the event of throwing excrement over a wall. It is with command, a dukkata for the bhikkhu. There is no offense for one who throws after looking, or into a pit, or for an insane person, etc. The state of being excrement, etc., not looking, a place for digging, being beyond a wall or enclosure, throwing or causing to throw, these are the five factors here. The origin, etc., are similar to the sañcaritta, but this is action and non-action.

Paṭhamauccārachaḍḍanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṭhamauccārachaḍḍanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā is complete.

9. Dutiyauccārachaḍḍanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Dutiyauccārachaḍḍanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

hariteti khette vā nāḷikerādiārāme vā yatthakatthaci ropimaharitaṭṭhāne. Tāni vatthūni chaḍḍentiyā vā chaḍḍāpentiyā vā purimanayeneva āpatti, tādise ṭhāne nisīditvā antamaso udakaṃ pivitvā matthakacchinnaṃ nāḷikerampi chaḍḍentiyā āpattiyeva.

Harite: In a field or a park of coconut palms, etc., or wherever there is a place planted with greenery. For throwing or causing to throw those things, the offense is in accordance with the previous method. Even if, after sitting in such a place, she drinks water and throws away a coconut with the top cut off, there is an offense.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahulā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha uccārādīni harite chaḍḍanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sāṇattikaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, bhikkhuno dukkaṭaṃ, bhikkhuniyāpi nikkhittabīje khette yāva aṅkuro na uṭṭhahati, tāva dukkaṭaṃ, aharite dvikadukkaṭaṃ. Tasmiṃ pana aharitasaññāya chaḍḍitakhette vā, sāmike apaloketvā vā chaḍḍentiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Sesaṃ aṭṭhamasadisamevāti.

This was prescribed in Sāvatthī concerning many bhikkhunīs in relation to the event of throwing excrement, etc., in a green place. It is with command, a triple pācittiya, a dukkata for the bhikkhu, and for the bhikkhunī too, in a field where seeds have been sown, until a sprout has not yet arisen, there is a dukkata; a double dukkata in a non-green place. But in that case, if she perceives it as a non-green place, or throws it in a sown field after asking permission from the owner, and for an insane person, etc., there is no offense. The rest is similar to the eighth.

Dutiyauccārachaḍḍanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Dutiyauccārachaḍḍanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā is complete.

10. Naccagītasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Naccagītasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

naccanti antamaso moranaccampi.Gītanti antamaso dhammabhāṇakagītampi.Vāditanti antamaso udakabherivāditampi.Dassanāyāti etesu yaṃkiñci dassanāya gacchantiyā pade pade dukkaṭaṃ, yattha ṭhitā passati vā suṇāti vā, ekappayoge ekāpatti, taṃ taṃ disaṃ olokentiyā payoge payoge āpatti.

Nacca: Dancing, even a peacock dance. Gīta: Singing, even the singing of a Dhamma-reciter. Vādita: Playing, even the playing of a water-drum. Dassanāya: For the sake of seeing, for one who goes to see any of these, there is a dukkata for each step. Wherever she stands and sees or hears, there is one offense for one effort; for one who looks in that direction, there is an offense for each effort.

Rājagahe chabbaggiyā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha naccādīni dassanāya gamanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sayaṃ tāni vatthūni karontiyā, aññaṃ vā āṇāpentiyā, ‘‘cetiyassa upahāraṃ dethā’’ti īdisena pariyāyena vā bhaṇantiyā, ‘‘cetiyassa upahāraṃ karomā’’ti vā vutte ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchantiyā ca pācittiyamevāti sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu (pāci. aṭṭha. 835-837) vuttaṃ, bhikkhuno sabbattha dukkaṭaṃ. ‘‘Tumhākaṃ cetiyassa upaṭṭhānaṃ karomā’’ti vutte pana ‘‘upaṭṭhānakaraṇaṃ nāma sundara’’nti īdisaṃ pariyāyaṃ bhaṇantiyā, ārāme ṭhatvā passantiyā vā suṇantiyā vā, tathā attano ṭhitokāsaṃ āgantvā payojitaṃ paṭipathaṃ gacchantiyā sammukhībhūtaṃ salākabhattādike sati karaṇīye gantvā, āpadāsu vā samajjaṭṭhānaṃ pavisitvāpi passantiyā vā suṇantiyā vā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Naccādīnaṃ aññataratā, aññatra anuññātakāraṇā gamanaṃ, dassanaṃ vā savanaṃ vāti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasadisāni, idaṃ pana lokavajjaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, tivedananti.

This was prescribed in Rājagaha concerning the Chabbaggiyā bhikkhunīs in relation to the event of going to see dancing, etc. In all the commentaries it is stated that for doing those things oneself, or ordering another, or saying with such a pretext as, "Give an offering to the shrine," or saying "sādhu" when (someone) says, "Let us make an offering to the shrine," there is only a pācittiya (pāci. aṭṭha. 835-837); for a bhikkhu, a dukkata in all cases. But if she says such a pretext as, "Let us do service to your shrine," saying "The doing of service is beautiful," or if she stands in the monastery and sees or hears, likewise, if she goes along the path to something performed after coming to her standing-place, if she goes to a lottery-meal, etc., when there is something to be done, or if, in times of danger, she enters a festival place and sees or hears, and for an insane person, etc., there is no offense. Being one of the dances, etc., going for a reason other than one that is allowed, seeing or hearing, these are the three factors here. The origin, etc., are similar to the eḷakaloma; but this is a worldly fault, an unwholesome thought, and a triple cause.

Naccagītasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Naccagītasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā is complete.

Lasuṇavaggo paṭhamo.

Lasuṇavaggo, the first, is complete.

2. Rattandhakāravaggo

2. Rattandhakāravaggo

1. Rattandhakārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Rattandhakārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

rattandhakāreti rattiandhakāre.Appadīpeti pajjotacandasūriyaaggīsu ekekenāpi anobhāsite.Purisenāti santiṭṭhituṃ sallapituñca viññunā manussapurisena saddhiṃ.Santiṭṭheyya vāti hatthapāse ṭhitamattāya pācittiyaṃ.Sallapeyyāti tattha ṭhatvā gehasitakathaṃ kathentiyāpi pācittiyameva.

Rattandhakāre: In the darkness of night. Appadīpe: Where it is not illuminated by even one of the lamp, moon, sun, or fire. Purisena: With a human male who is intelligent enough to converse and stay close. Santiṭṭheyya vā: Merely by standing within reach of the hand, there is a pācittiya. Sallapeyyā: Even by staying there and telling household tales, there is only a pācittiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ aññataraṃ bhikkhuniṃ ārabbha evaṃ santiṭṭhanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, purisassa hatthapāsaṃ vijahitvā, yakkhādīnaṃ hatthapāsaṃ avijahitvāpi santiṭṭhantiyā, sallapentiyā vā dukkaṭaṃ, yaṃkiñci viññuṃ dutiyaṃ gahetvā evaṃ karontiyā, arahopekkhāya, aññavihitāya, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Rattandhakāratā, purisassa hatthapāse ṭhānaṃ vā sallapanaṃ vā, sahāyābhāvo, rahopekkhatāti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Theyyasatthasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, tivedananti.

This was prescribed in Sāvatthī concerning a certain bhikkhunī in relation to the event of standing thus. If she stands or converses after moving away from the hand-reach of the male, even without moving away from the hand-reach of a yakkha, etc., there is a dukkata. If she does thus after taking any intelligent second person, through indifference to seclusion, through the doing of another, and for an insane person, etc., there is no offense. Being the darkness of night, standing or conversing within hand-reach of a male, absence of a companion, indifference to seclusion, these are the four factors here. It arises from theft, assault, action, non-delusion, intentional, a worldly fault, action of body, action of speech, unwholesome thought, and a triple cause.

Rattandhakārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Rattandhakārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā is complete.

2. Paṭicchannokāsasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Paṭicchannokāsasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

paṭicchanne okāseti kuṭṭādīsu yena kenaci paṭicchanne, idamevettha nānattaṃ.

Paṭicchanne okāse: In a covered place, covered by a wall, etc.; this alone is the difference here.

Paṭicchannokāsasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṭicchannokāsasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā is complete.

3. Ajjhokāsasallapanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Ajjhokāsasallapanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

ajjhokāseti nānaṃ, sesaṃ ubhayatthāpi paṭhamasadisamevāti.

Ajjhokāse: In the open; the rest is similar to the first in both cases.

Ajjhokāsasallapanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Ajjhokāsasallapanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā is complete.

4. Dutiyikauyyojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Dutiyikauyyojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

rathikāyāti racchāyaṃ.Byūheti anividdharacchāyaṃ.Siṅghāṭaketi caccare.Nikaṇṇikaṃ vā jappeyyāti kaṇṇamūle kiñci jappeyya.Uyyojeyyāti anācāraṃ caritukāmatāya ‘‘gaccha tva’’nti dutiyikaṃ uyyojeyya.Pācittiyanti purimanayeneva tāva santiṭṭhanādīsu tīṇi pācittiyāni, uyyojentiyā pana uyyojane ca hatthapāsavijahane ca dukkaṭaṃ, vijahite pācittiyaṃ.

Rathikāya: In a street. Byūhe: In a non-thoroughfare street. Siṅghāṭake: At a crossroads. Nikaṇṇikaṃ vā jappeyyā: Should whisper something in the root of the ear. Uyyojeyyā: Should send away a go-between, wishing to practice improper conduct, (saying,) "Go you." Pācittiyaṃ: In accordance with the previous method, there are three pācittiyas for standing, etc.; but for one who sends away, there is a dukkata for the sending away and the moving away from hand-reach; when (hand-reach) is moved away, there is a pācittiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha evaṃ santiṭṭhanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sesaṃ purimattayasadisameva. Anāpattiyaṃ pana ‘‘na anācāraṃ ācaritukāmā, sati karaṇīye dutiyikaṃ bhikkhuniṃ uyyojetī’’ti (pāci. 852) ettakaṃ adhikanti.

This was prescribed in Sāvatthī concerning Thullanandā in relation to the event of standing thus. The rest is just like the previous three. But in the case of no offense, there is this much more: "Not wishing to practice improper conduct, she sends away a second bhikkhunī when there is something to be done" (pāci. 852).

Dutiyikauyyojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Dutiyikauyyojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā is complete.

5. Anāpucchāpakkamanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Anāpucchāpakkamanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

purebhattanti aruṇuggamanaṃ upādāya yāva majjhanhikaṃ.Āsaneti pallaṅkassokāsabhūte.Sāmike anāpucchāti tasmiṃ kule yaṃkiñci viññuṃ manussaṃ anāpucchā.Pakkameyyāti ettha channassa anto nisīditvā anovassakaṃ ajjhokāse upacāraṃ atikkāmentiyā paṭhamapāde dukkaṭaṃ, dutiye pācittiyaṃ.

Purebhatta: From the rising of the dawn until noon. Āsane: On a seat that is a place for a couch. Sāmike anāpucchā: Without asking any intelligent person in that family. Pakkameyyā: Here, for one who sits inside a covered (area) and goes beyond the boundary in an open space where it does not rain, there is a dukkata for the first step, a pācittiya for the second.

Sāvatthiyaṃ aññataraṃ bhikkhuniṃ ārabbha anāpucchā pakkamanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, pallaṅkassa anokāse dukkaṭaṃ, tathā āpucchite anāpucchitasaññāya ceva vematikāya ca. Āpucchitasaññāya pana, asaṃhārime, gilānāya, āpadāsu, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Purebhattatā, antaraghare nisajjā, āsanassa pallaṅkokāsatā, aññatra anuññātakāraṇā anāpucchanaṃ, vuttaparicchedātikkamoti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni kathinasadisāni, idaṃ pana kiriyākiriyanti.

This was prescribed in Sāvatthī concerning a certain bhikkhunī in relation to the event of leaving without asking permission. There is a triple pācittiya, a dukkata in a place that is not for a couch, and likewise, when asked permission, if she perceives it as not asked or is doubtful. But if she perceives it as asked, in a place that is not enclosed, for a sick person, in times of danger, and for an insane person, etc., there is no offense. Being before the meal, sitting inside a house, the seat being a place for a couch, not asking permission for a reason other than one that is allowed, going beyond the stated boundary, these are the five factors here. The origin, etc., are similar to the kathina; but this is action and non-action.

Anāpucchāpakkamanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Anāpucchāpakkamanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā is complete.

6. Anāpucchāabhinisīdanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Anāpucchāabhinisīdanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

pacchābhattanti majjhanhike vītivatte yāva sūriyassa atthaṅgamā.Abhinisīdeyya vāti ādimhi nisīditvā gacchantiyā ekā āpatti, anisīditvā nipajjitvāva gacchantiyāpi ekā, nisīditvā nipajjantiyā dve.

Pacchābhatta means after midday, until the sun sets. Abhinisīdeyya vā, if she sits down at the beginning and leaves, there is one offense; if she does not sit down but lies down and then leaves, there is also one offense; if she sits down and then lies down, there are two offenses.

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha āsane abhinisīdanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sesaṃ pañcamasadisameva. Yathā pana tattha asaṃhārime, evamidha dhuvapaññatte anāpattīti.

This was established in Sāvatthī regarding Thullanandā, concerning the matter of sitting down on a seat, the rest is just like the fifth. However, just as there is no offense in the case of an asaṃhārima seat there, so here, there is no offense regarding a fixed designated (seat).

Anāpucchāabhinisīdanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Anāpucchāabhinisīdana Sikkhāpada is Finished.

7. Anāpucchāsantharaṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Anāpucchāsantharaṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

vikāleti atthaṅgate sūriye.Seyyanti antamaso paṇṇasanthārampi, sesaṃ chaṭṭhasadisameva.

Vikāle means after the sun has set. Seyya means even a leaf-bed, the rest is just like the sixth.

Idaṃ pana sāvatthiyaṃ sambahulā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha vikāle kulāni upasaṅkamitvā sāmike anāpucchitvā seyyaṃ santharitvā abhinisīdanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, anāpattiyañcettha dhuvapaññattaṃ nāma natthīti.

This was established in Sāvatthī regarding numerous bhikkhunis who, approaching families at the wrong time, spread out a bed without asking the owner and sat down, concerning that matter; and here, there is no fixed designated (seat) in the case of no offense.

Anāpucchāsantharaṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Anāpucchāsantharaṇa Sikkhāpada is Finished.

8. Paraujjhāpanakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Paraujjhāpanakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

duggahitena dūpadhāritenāti yaṃ vuttaṃ, tato aññathā gahitena ca upadhāritena ca.Paranti ‘‘ahaṃ kirayye ayyaṃ na sakkaccaṃ upaṭṭhahāmī’’tiādinā (pāci. 869) nayena upasampannaṃ ujjhāpentiyā pācittiyaṃ.

Duggahitena dūpadhāritena means what is grasped and retained differently from what was said. Para means if she disparages a fully ordained (bhikkhuni) in the manner of "Indeed, I do not attend to Venerable Sir respectfully," etc. (pāci. 869), there is a pācittiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ aññataraṃ bhikkhuniṃ ārabbha evaṃ paraṃ ujjhāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, anupasampannāya tikadukkaṭaṃ, ummattikādīnaṃyeva anāpatti. Duggahitatā, ujjhāpanaṃ, yaṃ ujjhāpeti, tassā upasampannatāti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāni, idaṃ pana dukkhavedananti.

This was established in Sāvatthī regarding a certain bhikkhuni, concerning the matter of disparaging another in this way; it is a triple pācittiya; to one not fully ordained, it is a triple dukkata; there is no offense only for an insane person, etc. Being ill-grasped, disparagement, the one who is disparaged, and the full ordination of that one: these are the three factors here. The origin, etc., are similar to the case of taking what is not given, but this is painful feeling.

Paraujjhāpanakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Paraujjhāpanaka Sikkhāpada is Finished.

9. Paraabhisapanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Paraabhisapanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

abhisapeyyāti sapathaṃ kareyya. Tattha ‘‘niraye upapajjāmi, niraye upapajjatū’’tievamādīni vadamānānirayena abhisapatināma, akkosatīti attho. ‘‘Gihinī homi, gihinī hotū’’tievamādīni vadamānābrahmacariyena. Tassā vācāya vācāya pācittiyaṃ.

Abhisapeyya means to make an oath. There, saying things such as, "May I be reborn in hell, may he/she be reborn in hell," she is said to curse with hell, meaning she reviles. Saying things such as, "May I become a householder, may he/she become a householder," she (curses) with the spiritual life. For each utterance, there is a pācittiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ caṇḍakāḷiṃ ārabbha evaṃ abhisapanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, anupasampannāya tikadukkaṭaṃ, tiracchānayoniyā vā pettivisayena vā manussadobhaggena vā abhisapane dukkaṭaṃ. Atthadhammānusāsanipurekkhārānaṃ ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Nirayena vā brahmacariyena vā abhisapanaṃ, upasampannatā, atthadhammapurekkhārādīnaṃ abhāvoti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni aṭṭhamasadisānevāti.

This was established in Sāvatthī regarding Caṇḍakāḷi, concerning the matter of cursing in this way; it is a triple pācittiya; to one not fully ordained, it is a triple dukkata; if she curses with rebirth in the animal realm or concerning the realm of the departed or with human misfortune, there is a dukkata. There is no offense for one who is intent on instruction in the Dhamma and the meaning, or for an insane person, etc. Cursing with hell or the spiritual life, full ordination, and the absence of being intent on the Dhamma and the meaning, etc.: these are the three factors here. The origin, etc., are just like the eighth.

Paraabhisapanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Paraabhisapana Sikkhāpada is Finished.

10. Rodanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Rodanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

vadhitvāti hatthādīhi paharitvā, ubhayaṃ karontiyāva pācittiyaṃ.

Vadhitvā means having struck with hands, etc.; there is a pācittiya only when doing both.

Sāvatthiyaṃ caṇḍakāḷiṃ ārabbha attānaṃ vadhitvā rodanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, kevalaṃ vadhantiyā vā rodantiyā vā dukkaṭameva. Ñātirogabhogabyasanehi phuṭṭhāya kevalaṃ rodantiyā eva na vadhantiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Attānaṃ vadhanañceva, rodanañcāti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni samanubhāsanasadisāni, idaṃ pana kiriyamevāti.

This was established in Sāvatthī regarding Caṇḍakāḷi, concerning the matter of striking herself and weeping; there is only a dukkata for merely striking or merely weeping. There is no offense for one afflicted by relatives, disease, loss of possessions, or misfortune who is merely weeping and not striking, or for an insane person, etc. Striking oneself and weeping: these are the two factors here. The origin, etc., are similar to samanubhāsana, but this is merely an action.

Rodanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Rodana Sikkhāpada is Finished.

Rattandhakāravaggo dutiyo.

The Second Chapter, the Rattandhakāravagga, is Finished.

3. Naggavaggo

3. Naggavaggo

1. Naggasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Naggasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

naggāti anivatthā vā apārutā vā. Evañhi nahāyantiyā sabbappayogesu dukkaṭaṃ, nahānapariyosāne pācittiyaṃ.

Naggā means unclothed or uncovered. Thus, for one bathing in this way, there is a dukkata for all attempts, and a pācittiya at the end of the bathing.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahulā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha evaṃ nahānavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, udakasāṭikacīvare acchinne vā naṭṭhe vā, ‘‘mahagghaṃ idaṃ disvā corāpi hareyyu’’nti evarūpāsu āpadāsu vā nahāyantiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Naggatā, anuññātakāraṇābhāvo, nahānapariyosānanti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasadisānīti.

This was established in Sāvatthī regarding numerous bhikkhunis, concerning the matter of bathing in this way; there is no offense for one bathing when the water-robe or cloth is torn or lost, or in such dangers as "even thieves might steal this upon seeing it is valuable," or for an insane person, etc. Nudity, absence of a permitted reason, and the end of bathing: these are the three factors here. The origin, etc., are similar to eḷakaloma.

Naggasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Nagga Sikkhāpada is Finished.

2. Udakasāṭikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Udakasāṭikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

Dutiye sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiyā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha appamāṇikāyo udakasāṭikāyo dhāraṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sesamettha sabbaṃ ratanavagge nisīdanasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva veditabbanti.

In the second (sikkhāpada), this was established in Sāvatthī regarding the group-of-six bhikkhunis, concerning the wearing of water-robes of immoderate size; everything else here should be understood in the same way as stated in the Nisīdana Sikkhāpada of the Ratanavagga.

Udakasāṭikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Udakasāṭika Sikkhāpada is Finished.

3. Cīvarasibbanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Cīvarasibbanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

visibbetvāti dussibbitaṃ punasibbanatthāya visibbetvā.Anantarāyikinīti dasasu antarāyesu ekekasmimpi asati.Aññatra catūhapañcāhāti visibbitadivasato pañca divase atikkāmetvā ‘‘neva sibbissāmi, na sibbāpanāya ussukkaṃ karissāmī’’ti dhuraṃ nikkhittamatte pācittiyaṃ.

Visibbetvā means having unsewn a badly sewn cloth for the purpose of sewing it again. Anantarāyikinī means when there is not a single one of the ten hindrances. Aññatra catūhapañcāhā means having passed five days from the day of unsewing, there is a pācittiya as soon as she dismisses the burden, (thinking) "I will neither sew nor make effort to have it sewn."

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha cīvaraṃ visibbetvā na sibbanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, anupasampannāya tikadukkaṭaṃ, tathā ubhinnampi aññasmiṃ parikkhāre. Yā pana antarāyikinī vā hoti, pariyesitvā vā kiñci na labhati, karontī vā pañcāhaṃ atikkāmeti, tassā ca, gilānāya ca, āpadāsu ca, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Nivāsanapārupanupagacīvaratā, upasampannāya santakatā, sibbanatthāya visibbanaṃ vā visibbāpanaṃ vā, aññatra anuññātakāraṇā pañcāhātikkamo, dhuranikkhepoti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni samanubhāsanasadisānīti.

This was established in Sāvatthī regarding Thullanandā, concerning the matter of unsewing a robe and not sewing it; it is a triple pācittiya; to one not fully ordained, it is a triple dukkata; likewise for both in regard to another requisite. But there is no offense for one who is hindered, or who, having searched, does not find anything, or who, while working, passes five days, or for a sick person, or in dangers, or for an insane person, etc. Being a robe for wearing or outer robe or an additional robe, being owned by one who is fully ordained, unsewing or having it unsewn for the purpose of sewing, passing five days without a permitted reason, and dismissing the burden: these are the five factors here. The origin, etc., are similar to samanubhāsana.

Cīvarasibbanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Cīvarasibhana Sikkhāpada is Finished.

4. Saṅghāṭicārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Saṅghāṭicārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

pañcāhikaṃ. Saṅghāṭīnaṃ cārosaṅghāṭicāro,paribhogavasena vā otāpanavasena vā saṅghaṭitaṭṭhena ‘saṅghāṭī’ti laddhanāmaṃ ticīvaraṃ, udakasāṭikā, saṃkaccikāti imesaṃ pañcannaṃ cīvarānaṃ parivattananti attho.Atikkāmeyya pācittiyanti chaṭṭhe aruṇuggamane ekasmiṃ cīvare vuttanayena aparivattite ekā āpatti, pañcasu pañca.

Pañcāhikaṃ. The circulation of the saṅghāṭi is saṅghāṭicāro, the three robes, called 'saṅghāṭī' because of being joined together, either through use or through airing, the water-robe, and the saṃkacchikā: the meaning is the rotation of these five robes. Atikkāmeyya pācittiya, if, at the dawn of the sixth day, one robe has not been rotated in the manner stated, there is one offense; for five, there are five.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahulā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha cīvaraṃ nikkhipitvā santaruttarena janapadacārikaṃ pakkamanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, pañcāhānatikkante dvikadukkaṭaṃ. Tasmiṃ pana anatikkantasaññāya, pañcamaṃ divasaṃ pañca cīvarāni nivāsentiyā vā pārupantiyā vā otāpentiyā vā, gilānāya, ‘‘idaṃ me cīvaraṃ mahagghaṃ īdise corabhaye na sakkā dhāretu’’nti evarūpāsu āpadāsu, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Pañcannaṃ cīvarānaṃ aññataratā, pañcāhātikkamo, anuññātakāraṇābhāvo, aparivattananti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni kathinasadisānīti.

This was established in Sāvatthī regarding numerous bhikkhunis, concerning the matter of putting away a robe and departing to wander in the countryside with only the undergarment; it is a triple pācittiya; there is a double dukkata for not exceeding five days. But if there is the perception of not exceeding that, or if she wears, puts on, or airs the five robes on the fifth day, or for a sick person, or in such dangers as "I cannot keep this valuable robe in such fear of thieves," or for an insane person, etc., there is no offense. Being one of the five robes, exceeding five days, absence of a permitted reason, and non-rotation: these are the four factors here. The origin, etc., are similar to kathina.

Saṅghāṭicārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Saṅghāṭicāra Sikkhāpada is Finished.

5. Cīvarasaṅkamanīyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Cīvarasaṅkamanīyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

cīvarasaṅkamanīyanti saṅkametabbaṃ cīvaraṃ, aññissā santakaṃ anāpucchā gahitaṃ puna paṭidātabbaṃ pañcannaṃ aññataraṃ cīvaranti attho.Dhāreyyāti sace taṃ nivāseti vā pārupati vā pācittiyaṃ.

Cīvarasaṅkamanīya means a robe to be transferred, meaning one of the five robes belonging to another, taken without permission, and to be returned. Dhāreyyā, if she wears or puts it on, there is a pācittiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ aññataraṃ bhikkhuniṃ ārabbha bhikkhuniyā cīvaraṃ ādāya anāpucchā pārupanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, anupasampannāya tikadukkaṭaṃ. Yā pana tāya vā dinnaṃ, taṃ vā āpucchā, acchinnanaṭṭhacīvarikā vā hutvā, ‘‘idaṃ me cīvaraṃ mahagghaṃ īdise corabhaye na sakkā dhāretu’’nti evarūpāsu āpadāsu vā dhāreti, tassā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Cīvarasaṅkamanīyatā, upasampannāya santakatā, anuññātakāraṇābhāvo, dhāraṇanti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamakathinasadisāni, idaṃ pana kiriyākiriyanti.

This was established in Sāvatthī regarding a certain bhikkhuni, concerning the matter of taking a bhikkhuni's robe and putting it on without permission; it is a triple pācittiya; to one not fully ordained, it is a triple dukkata. But there is no offense for one to whom it was given by her, or with her permission, or who, being one with torn or lost robes, wears it in such dangers as "I cannot keep this valuable robe in such fear of thieves," or for an insane person, etc. Being a robe to be transferred, being owned by one who is fully ordained, absence of a permitted reason, and wearing it: these are the four factors here. The origin, etc., are similar to the first kathina, but this is action and inaction.

Cīvarasaṅkamanīyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Cīvarasaṅkamanīya Sikkhāpada is Finished.

6. Gaṇacīvarasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Gaṇacīvarasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

gaṇassāti bhikkhunisaṅghassa.Cīvaralābhanti vikappanupagampi pacchimaṃ labhitabbaṃ cīvaraṃ.Antarāyaṃ kareyyāti yathā te dātukāmā na denti, evaṃ parakkameyya.Pācittiyanti sace tassā vacanena te na denti, bhikkhuniyā pācittiyaṃ.

Gaṇassa means of the Saṅgha of bhikkhunis. Cīvaralābha means the last robe to be obtained, even if it is not subject to assignment. Antarāyaṃ kareyyā means she should act in such a way that they do not give it as they wish to give it. Pācittiya, if they do not give it because of her words, there is a pācittiya for the bhikkhuni.

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha gaṇassa cīvaralābhantarāyakaraṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, aññasmiṃ parikkhāre dukkaṭaṃ, sambahulānaṃ pana ekabhikkhuniyā vā cīvaralābhepi dukkaṭameva. ‘‘Samagghakāle dassathā’’ti evaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā nivārentiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Vikappanupagapacchimatā, saṅghassa pariṇatabhāvo, vinā ānisaṃsadassanena antarāyakaraṇanti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisānīti.

This was established in Sāvatthī regarding Thullanandā, concerning the matter of obstructing the Saṅgha's gain of a robe; there is a dukkata for another requisite, but even for the gain of a robe by one bhikkhuni from among many, there is only a dukkata. There is no offense for one who prevents, showing the benefit, (saying) "You should give it at a favorable time," or for an insane person, etc. Being the last (robe) not subject to assignment, being allocated to the Saṅgha, and obstructing without showing the benefit: these are the three factors here. The origin, etc., are similar to taking what is not given.

Gaṇacīvarasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Gaṇacīvara Sikkhāpada is Finished.

7. Paṭibāhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Paṭibāhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

dhammikaṃ cīvaravibhaṅganti samaggena saṅghena sannipatitvā karīyamānaṃ cīvaravibhaṅga.Paṭibāheyyāti paṭisedheyya, evaṃ paṭisedhentiyā pācittiyaṃ.

Dhammikaṃ cīvaravibhaṅga means the distribution of robes being done by the Saṅgha in concord, having assembled. Paṭibāheyyā means she should object; there is a pācittiya for one objecting in this way.

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha dhammikaṃ cīvaravibhaṅgaṃ paṭibāhanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, dhammike vematikāya, adhammike dhammikasaññāya ceva vematikāya ca dukkaṭaṃ. Ubhayattha adhammikasaññāya, ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā paṭibāhantiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Cīvaravibhaṅgassa dhammikatā, dhammikasaññitā, vinā ānisaṃsena paṭibāhananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisānevāti.

This was established in Sāvatthī regarding Thullanandā, concerning the matter of objecting to a just distribution of robes; there is a dukkata for a just (distribution) about which she is doubtful, and for an unjust (distribution) with the perception of justness and with doubt. There is no offense in both cases with the perception of unjustness, or for one who prevents, showing the benefit, or for an insane person, etc. The justness of the distribution of robes, the perception of justness, and objecting without showing the benefit: these are the three factors here. The origin, etc., are just like taking what is not given.

Paṭibāhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Paṭibāhana Sikkhāpada is Finished.

8. Cīvaradānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Cīvaradānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

samaṇacīvaranti kappakataṃ nivāsanapārupanupagaṃ, evarūpaṃ ṭhapetvā pañca sahadhammike mātāpitaro ca yassa kassaci gahaṭṭhassa vā pabbajitassa vā pariccajitvā dentiyā pācittiyaṃ.

Samaṇacīvara means a robe made according to the rules, for wearing or as an outer robe or additional robe; setting aside such (robes), if she gives away to anyone—a householder or a renunciant—other than five Dhamma-companions and her parents, there is a pācittiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha agārikassa samaṇacīvaradānavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, bhikkhuno dukkaṭaṃ. Mātāpitūnaṃ pariccajitvāpi, aññesaṃ tāvakālikameva dentiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Samaṇacīvaratā, ṭhapetvā sahadhammike ca mātāpitaro ca aññesaṃ dānaṃ, atāvakālikatāti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni sañcarittasadisānīti.

This was established in Sāvatthī regarding Thullanandā, concerning the matter of giving a monastic robe to a layperson; there is a dukkata for a bhikkhu. There is no offense for one who gives (robes) even after giving (them) to her parents, or for one who gives (robes) to others only temporarily, or for an insane person, etc. Being a monastic robe, giving to others other than five Dhamma-companions and her parents, and non-temporarily: these are the three factors here. The origin, etc., are similar to sañcaritta.

Cīvaradānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Cīvaradāna Sikkhāpada is Finished.

9. Kālaatikkamanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Kālaatikkamanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

dubbalacīvarapaccāsāyāti dubbalāya cīvarapaccāsāya, ‘‘sace sakkoma dassāmā’’ti ettakamattaṃ sutvā uppāditāya āsāyāti attho.Cīvarakālasamayaṃ atikkāmeyyāti vassaṃvuṭṭhabhikkhunīhi kālacīvare bhājiyamāne ‘‘āgameyyātha, ayye, atthi saṅghassa cīvarapaccāsā’’ti vatvā taṃ cīvaravibhaṅgaṃ cīvarakālaṃ atikkāmeyya, tassā anatthate kathine vassānassa pacchimamāsaṃ, atthate kathine kathinubbhāradivasaṃ atikkāmentiyā pācittiyaṃ.

Dubbalacīvarapaccāsāyā means in the expectation of a poor robe, the meaning is in the hope that has arisen from hearing merely "if we are able, we will give." Cīvarakālasamayaṃ atikkāmeyyā, when the seasonable robes are being distributed by bhikkhunis who have spent the rains, if she says, "Wait, Venerable Ladies, there is an expectation of robes for the Saṅgha," and thereby causes that distribution of robes to exceed the robe-season, if there is no kathina, the last month of the rains, if there is a kathina, she commits a pācittiya by allowing (the season) to pass beyond the kathina-raising day, without benefit (to the Saṅgha).

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha dubbalacīvarapaccāsāya cīvarakālasamayaṃ atikkamanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, dubbalacīvare vematikāya, adubbalacīvare dubbalacīvarasaññāya ceva vematikāya ca dukkaṭaṃ. Ubhayattha adubbalacīvarasaññāya, kiñcāpi ‘na sakkomā’ti vadanti, ‘‘idāni pana tesaṃ kappāso vā uppajjissati, saddho vā puriso āgamissati, tasmiṃ āgate addhā dassantī’’ti evaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā nivārentiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Dubbalacīvaratā, dubbalasaññitā, vinā ānisaṃsena nivāraṇanti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisānīti.

This was promulgated in Sāvatthī regarding Thullanandā, concerning the transgression of the time for robes in anticipation of a flimsy robe. If there is doubt about a flimsy robe, or the perception of a flimsy robe in the case of a non-flimsy robe, and also doubt, there is an offense of dukkaṭa. In both cases, if there is perception of a non-flimsy robe, even if they say, "We are not able," if they prevent, showing the benefit thus, "Now, perhaps cotton will arise for them, or a faithful man will come, when he comes, he will surely give," there is no offense for the insane, etc. Being a flimsy robe, having the perception of flimsy, preventing without showing the benefit, these are the three factors involved here. Originating causes, etc., are similar to those for taking what is not given.

Kālaatikkamanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Transgression of Time is Finished.

10. Kathinuddhārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Training Rule on Withdrawal of the Kathina

dhammikaṃ kathinuddhāranti sabbāsaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ akālacīvaraṃ dātukāmena upāsakena yattako atthāramūliko ānisaṃso, tato adhikaṃ vā samakaṃ vā datvā yācitena samaggena bhikkhunisaṅghena yaṃ kathinaṃ ñattidutiyakammena antarā uddharīyati, tassa so uddhāro ‘dhammiko’ti vuccati, evarūpaṃ kathinuddhāranti attho.Paṭibāheyyāti nivāreyya, tassa evarūpaṃ kathinuddhāraṃ nivārentiyā pācittiyaṃ.

dhammikaṃ kathinuddhāra: when a lay follower, wishing to give untimely robes to all the nuns, having given as much benefit based on need, or more, or equal, the Kathina that is withdrawn in the middle by the Saṅgha of bhikkhunīs in unison with a motion and a second announcement, that withdrawal is called 'dhammika' (lawful); the meaning is such a withdrawal of the Kathina. Paṭibāheyyā: should prevent; to the one preventing such a withdrawal of the Kathina, there is a pācittiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha kathinuddhāraṃ paṭibāhanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sesaṃ sattame vuttanayeneva veditabbanti.

This was promulgated in Sāvatthī regarding Thullanandā, concerning the event of preventing the withdrawal of the Kathina. The rest should be understood in the same manner as stated in the seventh rule.

Kathinuddhārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on the Withdrawal of the Kathina is Finished.

Naggavaggo tatiyo.

The Third Chapter on Nakedness.

4. Tuvaṭṭavaggo

4. The Tuvaṭṭa Chapter

1. Ekamañcatuvaṭṭanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Training Rule on Lying Down on One Bed

tuvaṭṭeyyunti nipajjeyyuṃ. Tāsu pana ekāya vā nipannāya aparā nipajjatu, dvepi vā saheva nipajjantu, dvinnampi pācittiyaṃ.

tuvaṭṭeyyuṃ: should lie down. But of those, if one has already lain down, let another lie down, or let two lie down together, there is a pācittiya for both.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahulā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha dvinnaṃ ekamañce tuvaṭṭanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sace pana ekāya nipannāya ekā nisīdati, ubho vā nisīdanti, tāsaṃ, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Ekamañcatā, dvinnaṃ tuvaṭṭananti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasadisānīti.

This was promulgated in Sāvatthī regarding many bhikkhunīs, concerning the event of two lying down on one bed. But if one has already lain down, one sits down, or both sit down, there is no offense for them, nor for the insane, etc. Being one bed, two lying down, these are the two factors involved here. Originating causes, etc., are similar to those for goat's hair.

Ekamañcatuvaṭṭanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Lying Down on One Bed is Finished.

2. Ekattharaṇatuvaṭṭanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Training Rule on Lying Down on One Covering

ekattharaṇapāvuraṇā,saṃhārimānaṃ pāvārattharaṇakaṭasārakādīnaṃ ekaṃ antaṃ attharitvā ekaṃ pārupitvā tuvaṭṭentīnametaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Pācittiyanti taṃyeva attharitvā taṃ pārupitvā nipajjantīnaṃ pācittiyaṃ.

ekattharaṇapāvuraṇā: this is a term for those who, taking one of the spread-coverings such as a mat of esparto grass, reed grass, or rush grass, spread one end and cover themselves with one end. Pācittiya: for those who lie down having spread and covered themselves with that same thing, there is a pācittiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahulā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha evaṃ tuvaṭṭanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, attharaṇe vā pāvuraṇe vā ekasmiṃ dukkaṭaṃ, nānattharaṇapāvuraṇe dvikadukkaṭaṃ. Tasmiṃ pana nānattharaṇapāvuraṇasaññāya, vavatthānaṃ dassetvā nipajjantiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Sesaṃ paṭhamasadisamevāti.

This was promulgated in Sāvatthī regarding many bhikkhunīs, concerning the event of lying down thus. There is a triple pācittiya; for one covering or spread, there is a dukkaṭa; with different spread and covering, there is a double dukkaṭa. But in that case, with the perception of different spread and covering, for one who lies down after showing a distinction, and for the insane, etc., there is no offense. The rest is just like the first.

Ekattharaṇatuvaṭṭanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Lying Down on One Covering is Finished.

3. Aphāsukaraṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Training Rule on Causing Discomfort

aphāsunti ‘‘iminā imissā aphāsu bhavissatī’’ti anāpucchā purato caṅkamanaṭṭhānanissajjādayo vā uddisauddisāpanaparipucchanasajjhāyaṃ vā karontiyā caṅkamane nivattanagaṇanāya, ṭhānādīsu payogagaṇanāya, uddesādīsu padagaṇanāya pācittiyaṃ.

aphāsu: "by this, there will be discomfort for her," without asking, doing walking, standing, excretion, etc., in front, or doing recitation of memorized texts, or questioning, or studying, for counting the returns in walking, for counting the effort in standing, etc., for counting the words in memorization, etc., there is a pācittiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha sañcicca aphāsukaraṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, anupasampannāya tikadukkaṭaṃ, na aphāsukāmatāya, āpucchā purato caṅkamanādīni karontiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Upasampannatā, aphāsukāmatā, aphāsukaraṇaṃ, anāpucchananti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāni, idaṃ pana kiriyākiriyaṃ, dukkhavedananti.

This was promulgated in Sāvatthī regarding Thullanandā, concerning the event of intentionally causing discomfort. There is a triple pācittiya; for one who is not fully ordained, there is a triple dukkaṭa; there is no offense for one not desiring discomfort, for doing walking, etc., in front after asking, and for the insane, etc. Being fully ordained, desiring discomfort, causing discomfort, not asking, these are the four factors involved here. Originating causes, etc., are similar to those for taking what is not given, but this is inaction-action, painful feeling.

Aphāsukaraṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Causing Discomfort is Finished.

4. Naupaṭṭhāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Training Rule on Not Attending

dukkhitanti gilānaṃ.Sahajīvininti saddhivihāriniṃ.Neva upaṭṭhaheyyāti tassā upaṭṭhānaṃ sayaṃ vā akarontiyā, parehi vā akārentiyā dhuraṃ nikkhittamatte pācittiyaṃ.

dukkhita: sick. Sahajīvini: one who dwells together, a co-resident. Neva upaṭṭhaheyyā: by not attending to her, either by not doing the attending oneself, or by not having others do it, as soon as the responsibility is abandoned, there is a pācittiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha dukkhitaṃ sahajīviniṃ anupaṭṭhānavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, antevāsiniyā vā anupasampannāya vā dukkaṭaṃ, dasasu aññatarantarāye sati pariyesitvā alabhantiyā, gilānāya, āpadāsu, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Gilānatā, saddhivihāritā, anuññātakāraṇābhāvo, upaṭṭhāne dhuranikkhepoti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni samanubhāsanasadisānīti.

This was promulgated in Sāvatthī regarding Thullanandā, concerning the event of not attending to a sick co-resident. There is a dukkaṭa for a pupil or one who is not fully ordained; if there is one of ten kinds of hindrances, while searching and not finding, for the sick, in dangers, and for the insane, etc., there is no offense. Being sick, being a co-resident, absence of a known reason, abandoning responsibility for attendance, these are the four factors involved here. Originating causes, etc., are similar to those for formal accusation.

Naupaṭṭhāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Not Attending is Finished.

5. Nikkaḍḍhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Training Rule on Dragging Out

upassayaṃ datvāti sakavāṭabaddhaṃ attano puggalikavihāraṃ datvā.Nikkaḍḍheyyāti bahūnipi dvārāni ekappayogena nikkaḍḍhentiyā ekā āpatti, nānāpayogehi payogagaṇanāya āpattiyo, āṇattiyampi eseva nayo. Sace pana ‘‘imañcimañca dvāraṃ atikkāmehī’’ti āṇāpeti, ekāya āṇattiyā eva dvāragaṇanāya āpattiyo.

upassayaṃ datvā: having given her own personal dwelling with its door fastened. Nikkaḍḍheyyā: for one who drags out even many doors with a single effort, there is one offense; with various efforts, there are offenses according to the count of the efforts; the same method applies to ordering. But if she orders, "Pass beyond this and this door," there are offenses according to the count of the doors with a single order.

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha etādise vatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, akavāṭabaddhato dukkaṭaṃ, anupasampannāya tikadukkaṭaṃ, sakavāṭabaddhato vā akavāṭabaddhato vā ubhinnampi parikkhāranikkaḍḍhane dukkaṭameva, sesaṃ saṅghikavihāranikkaḍḍhanasikkhāpade vuttanayamevāti.

This was promulgated in Sāvatthī regarding such an event. There is a triple pācittiya; there is a dukkaṭa if the door is not fastened; there is a triple dukkaṭa for one who is not fully ordained; there is only a dukkaṭa for dragging out requisites from both a fastened or unfastened door; the rest is just like the manner stated in the training rule on dragging out a Saṅgha dwelling.

Nikkaḍḍhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Dragging Out is Finished.

6. Saṃsaṭṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Training Rule on Association

Chaṭṭhaṃ uttānapadatthameva. Sāvatthiyaṃ caṇḍakāḷiṃ ārabbha saṃsaṭṭhavihāravatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sesamettha paṭhamaariṭṭhasikkhāpade vuttavinicchayasadisamevāti.

The sixth has only obvious word meanings. This was promulgated in Sāvatthī regarding Caṇḍakāḷī, concerning the event of associated dwellings. The rest here is just like the determination stated in the first Ariṭṭha training rule.

Saṃsaṭṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Association is Finished.

7. Antoraṭṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Training Rule on Within the Territory

antoraṭṭheti yassa vijite viharati, tassa raṭṭhe.Asatthikā cārikanti vinā satthena gacchantiyā, gāmantaragaṇanāya, agāmake araññe addhayojanagaṇanāya pācittiyaṃ.

antoraṭṭhe: in the territory of the one in whose realm she dwells. Asatthikā cārika: for one going on tour without a caravan, there is a pācittiya according to the count of villages; in the wilderness, which is not a village, according to the count of half a yojana.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahulā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha vuttanayeneva desacārikaṃ pakkamanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ. Satthena saha gacchantiyā, kheme appaṭibhaye, āpadāsu, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Antoraṭṭhatā, akhematā, anuññātakāraṇābhāvo, cārikaṃ pakkamananti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasadisānīti.

This was promulgated in Sāvatthī regarding many bhikkhunīs, concerning the event of departing on a tour of the country in the manner stated above. There is no offense for one going with a caravan, in safety, without danger, in dangers, and for the insane, etc. Being within the territory, being unsafe, absence of a known reason, departing on tour, these are the four factors involved here. Originating causes, etc., are similar to those for goat's hair.

Antoraṭṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Within the Territory is Finished.

8. Tiroraṭṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Training Rule on Outside the Territory

tiroraṭṭheti yassa vijite viharati, taṃ ṭhapetvā aññassa raṭṭhe. Sesaṃ sattame vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ, nagaraṃ panettha rājagahanti.

tiroraṭṭhe: in the territory of another, leaving aside the one in whose realm she dwells. The rest should be understood in the same manner as stated in the seventh rule; here the city is Rājagaha.

Tiroraṭṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Outside the Territory is Finished.

9. Antovassasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Training Rule on Within the Rains

antovassanti purimaṃ vā temāsaṃ, pacchimaṃ vā temāsaṃ avasitvā tassa vassassa antoyeva. Idha sattāhakaraṇīyena vā kenaci ubbaḷhāya vā āpadāsu vā gacchantiyā ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Sesaṃ aṭṭhamasadisamevāti.

antovassa: having dwelt either for the first three months or for the last three months, only within those rains. Here, there is no offense for one going due to some task needing to be done within a week, or due to an urgent matter, or in dangers, and for the insane, etc. The rest is just like the eighth rule.

Antovassasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Within the Rains is Finished.

10. Cārikanapakkamanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Training Rule on Not Departing on Tour

vassaṃvuṭṭhāti purimaṃ vā temāsaṃ, pacchimaṃ vā temāsaṃ vuṭṭhā.Chappañcayojanānīti ettha pavāretvā pañca yojanāni gantumpi vaṭṭati, chasu vattabbameva natthi. Sace pana tīṇi gantvā teneva maggena paccāgacchati, na vaṭṭati, aññena āgantuṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Vuttappamāṇaṃ addhānaṃ na gacchissāmī’’ti dhure nikkhittamatte pācittiyaṃ.

vassaṃvuṭṭhā: having dwelt for either the first three months or the last three months. Chappañcayojanānī: here, it is permissible to go five yojanas after inviting, there is certainly no need to speak of six. But if she goes three and returns by the same path, it is not permissible, it is permissible to come by another path. As soon as the responsibility is abandoned, thinking, "I will not go the distance stated," there is a pācittiya.

Rājagahe sambahulā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha vassaṃ vasitvā cārikaṃ apakkamanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ. Antarāye sati, pariyesitvā dutiyikaṃ bhikkhuniṃ alabhantiyā, gilānāya, āpadāsu, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Vassaṃvuṭṭhatā, anuññātakāraṇābhāvo, pañcayojanānatikkamoti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamapārājikasadisāni, idaṃ pana akiriyaṃ, dukkhavedananti.

This was promulgated in Rājagaha regarding many bhikkhunīs, concerning the event of not departing on tour after dwelling for the rains. If there is an impediment, while searching and not finding a second bhikkhunī, for the sick, in dangers, and for the insane, etc., there is no offense. Having dwelt for the rains, absence of a known reason, not exceeding five yojanas, these are the three factors involved here. Originating causes, etc., are similar to those for the first pārājika, but this is inaction, painful feeling.

Cārikanapakkamanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Not Departing on Tour is Finished.

Tuvaṭṭavaggo catuttho.

The Fourth Chapter on Tuvaṭṭa.

5. Cittāgāravaggo

5. The Cittāgāra Chapter

1. Rājāgārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Training Rule on the Royal Residence

rājāgāranti rañño kīḷanagharaṃ.Cittāgāranti kīḷanacittasālaṃ.Ārāmanti kīḷanaupavanaṃ.Uyyānanti kīḷanuyyānaṃ.Pokkharaṇinti kīḷanapokkharaṇiṃ.Dassanāyāti ‘‘etesu yaṃkiñci passissāmī’’ti gacchantiyā pade pade dukkaṭaṃ, yattha ṭhatvā passati, tattha padaṃ anuddharitvā pañcāpi passantiyā ekāva āpatti. Sace pana taṃ taṃ viloketvā passati, gīvaṃ parivattanappayogagaṇanāya āpattiyo, na ummīlanagaṇanāya.

rājāgāra: the king's pleasure house. Cittāgāra: a picture gallery for pleasure. Ārāma: a pleasure garden. Uyyāna: a pleasure park. Pokkharaṇi: a pleasure pond. Dassanāyā: for one going thinking, "I will see any of these," there is a dukkaṭa at each step; if she sees all five without lifting her foot from where she stands, there is only one offense. But if she sees after looking at each one, there are offenses according to the count of efforts of turning the neck, not according to the count of blinking.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiyā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha cittāgāraṃ dassanāya gamanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, bhikkhussa sabbattha dukkaṭaṃ, avaseso vinicchayo naccadassanasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva veditabboti.

This was promulgated in Sāvatthī regarding the group-of-six bhikkhunīs, concerning the event of going to see a picture gallery. There is a dukkaṭa everywhere for a bhikkhu; the remaining determination should be understood in the same manner as stated in the training rule on seeing dancing.

Rājāgārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on the Royal Residence is Finished.

2. Āsandiparibhuñjanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Training Rule on Using a Chair

āsandīnāma atikkantappamāṇā vuccati.Pallaṅkonāma saṃhārimena vāḷena katoti vutto.Paribhuñjeyyāti ettha pana nisīdananipajjanappayogagaṇanāya pācittiyaṃ veditabbaṃ.

āsandī (chair) is called that which exceeds the standard size. Pallaṅko (couch) is said to be made with prepared reeds. Paribhuñjeyyā: here, a pācittiya should be understood according to the count of efforts of sitting and lying down.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahulā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha āsandipallaṅkaparibhogavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, āsandiyā pāde chinditvā, pallaṅkassa vāḷe bhinditvā paribhuñjantiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Āsandipallaṅkatā, nisīdanaṃ nipajjanaṃ vāti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasadisānīti.

This was promulgated in Sāvatthī regarding many bhikkhunīs, concerning the event of using a chair or couch. There is no offense for one who uses a chair or couch after cutting off the legs of the chair, or breaking the reeds of the couch, and for the insane, etc. Being a chair or couch, sitting and lying down, these are the two factors involved here. Originating causes, etc., are similar to those for goat's hair.

Āsandiparibhuñjanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Using a Chair is Finished.

3. Suttakantanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Training Rule on Spinning Thread

suttanti channaṃ aññataraṃ.Kanteyyāti ettha yattakaṃ hatthena añchitaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ takkamhi veṭhite ekā āpatti. Idañhi sandhāya padabhājanīye (pāci. 988) ‘‘ujjavujjave’’ti vuttaṃ.

sutta: one of the six. Kanteyyā: here, there is one offense for as much as is combed with the hand when wound on that spindle. For this reason, it was said in the word analysis (pāci. 988), "ujjavujjave."

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiyā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha suttaṃ kantanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, kantanato pubbe kappāsavicinanaṃ ādiṃ katvā sabbappayogesu hatthavāragaṇanāya dukkaṭaṃ. Kantitasuttaṃ kantantiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Akantitatā, kantananti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasadisānīti.

This was promulgated in Sāvatthī regarding the group-of-six bhikkhunīs, concerning the event of spinning thread. Before spinning, starting with picking cotton, there is a dukkaṭa for the count of hand movements in all efforts. There is no offense for one spinning spun thread, and for the insane, etc. Being unspun, spinning, these are the two factors involved here. Originating causes, etc., are similar to those for goat's hair.

Suttakantanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Spinning Thread is Finished.

4. Gihiveyyāvaccasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Training Rule on Service to Laypeople

gihiveyyāvaccanti gihīnaṃ veyyāvaccaṃ. Sacepi hi mātāpitaro attano kiñci kammaṃ akārāpetvā tesaṃ yāgupacanādīni karonti, pubbappayogesu payogagaṇanāya dukkaṭāni āpajjitvā yāguādīsu bhājanagaṇanāya, khādanīyādīsu pūvagaṇanāya pācittiyaṃ āpajjati.

Gihiveyyāvacca means service to laypeople. Even if mothers and fathers, without having their own work done, perform services like preparing gruel for them, they incur dukkaṭas for each effort in preliminary actions, and a pācittiya for each serving of gruel, and for each offering of edibles and so on.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahulā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha gihīnaṃ veyyāvaccakaraṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, manussehi saṅghassa yāgupāne vā bhatte vā cetiyapūjāya vā karīyamānāya tesaṃ sahāyabhāvena yāgupacanādīni, attano veyyāvaccakarassa ca tāniyeva karontiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Gihiveyyāvaccakaraṇaṃ, anuññātakāraṇābhāvoti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasadisānevāti.

It was established in Sāvatthī concerning many nuns in relation to the incident of performing services for laypeople. When people are having gruel, drinks, or food prepared for the Saṅgha, or for the sake of offering to a shrine, if they assist as friends by preparing gruel, etc., or if they do the same for someone who serves them, there is no offense for those who are insane, etc. Performing service for laypeople, and the absence of a permitted reason, these are the two factors involved here. The origin, etc., are similar to sheep's wool.

Gihiveyyāvaccasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Service to Laypeople is finished.

5. Adhikaraṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā

adhikaraṇanti catunnaṃ aññataraṃ.Pācittiyanti idha cīvarasibbane viya dhuraṃ nikkhittamatte pācittiyaṃ, ekāhampi parihāro natthi.

Adhikaraṇa means one of the four legal issues. Pācittiya here means that as soon as the burden is laid down, as in the case of sewing robes, a pācittiya is incurred, and there is not even a single day of dispensation.

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha adhikaraṇaṃ navūpasamanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sesamettha cīvarasibbanasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva veditabbanti.

It was established in Sāvatthī concerning Thullanandā, in relation to the incident of newly settling a legal issue. The rest here should be understood in the same manner as stated in the training rule on sewing robes.

Adhikaraṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Training Rule on Legal Issues is finished.

6. Bhojanadānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Training Rule on Giving Food

sahatthāti kāyena vā kāyappaṭibaddhena vā nissaggiyena vā ṭhapetvā pañcasahadhammike avasesānaṃ aññatra udakadantaponā yaṃkiñci ajjhoharaṇīyaṃ dadantiyā pācittiyaṃ.

Sahatthā means that if she gives anything consumable, other than water and a toothpick, with her body or something attached to her body, or after setting it down, to non-relatives who do not share the same precepts, she incurs a pācittiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha agārikassa khādanīyabhojanīyadānavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, udakadantapone dukkaṭaṃ. Yā pana dāpeti na deti, upanikkhipitvā deti, bāhiralepaṃ deti, tassā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Aññatra udakadantaponā ajjhoharaṇiyaṃ, ṭhapetvā pañca sahadhammike aññassa sahatthā dānanti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasadisānīti.

It was established in Sāvatthī concerning Thullanandā, in relation to the incident of giving edibles and food to a householder. Dukkaṭa is incurred for water and toothpicks. But if she has someone else give it, does not give it herself, gives it after placing it down, or gives external applications, there is no offense for her, or for those who are insane, etc. Giving something consumable other than water and a toothpick, setting it down and giving it with her own hand to someone who does not share the same precepts, these are the two factors involved here. The origin, etc., are similar to sheep's wool.

Bhojanadānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Training Rule on Giving Food is finished.

7. Āvasathacīvarasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Training Rule on Residence-Cloth

āvasathacīvaranti ‘‘utuniyo bhikkhuniyo paribhuñjantū’’ti dinnacīvaraṃ.Anissajjitvāti catutthe divase dhovitvā aññissā antamaso sāmaṇeriyāpi utuniyā adatvā.Pācittiyanti evaṃ anissajjitvā paribhuñjantiyā pācittiyaṃ.

Āvasathacīvara means the cloth given with the intention "let the menstrual nuns use this." Anissajjitvā means without giving it away on the fourth day after washing it to another menstrual nun, even if it is only a female novice. Pācittiya means a pācittiya is incurred for using it without giving it away in this way.

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha āvasathacīvaraṃ anissajjitvā paribhuñjanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, nissajjite dvikadukkaṭaṃ. Tasmiṃ pana nissajjitasaññāya, puna pariyāyena vā, aññāsaṃ utunīnaṃ abhāvena vā, acchinnanaṭṭhacīvarikāya vā, āpadāsu vā paribhuñjantiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Āvasathacīvaratā, catutthadivasatā, dhovitvā anissajjanaṃ, anuññātakāraṇābhāvoti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni kathinasadisāni, idaṃ pana kiriyākiriyanti.

It was established in Sāvatthī concerning Thullanandā, in relation to the incident of using the residence-cloth without giving it away. A three-fold pācittiya is incurred, and a two-fold dukkaṭa if it is given away. But if she uses it with the perception that it has been given away, or again in turn, or because there are no other menstrual nuns, or for a nun whose robe has been torn or destroyed, or in emergencies, there is no offense for her, or for those who are insane, etc. That it is a residence-cloth, that it is the fourth day, that it is not given away after washing, and the absence of a permitted reason, these are the four factors involved here. The origin, etc., are similar to the kathina, but this is an action and inaction.

Āvasathacīvarasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Training Rule on Residence-Cloth is finished.

8. Āvasathavihārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Training Rule on Residence-Dwelling

āvasathanti kavāṭabaddhavihāraṃ.Anissajjitvāti rakkhaṇatthāya adatvā, ‘‘idaṃ jaggeyyāsī’’ti evaṃ anāpucchitvāti attho.Cārikaṃ pakkameyya pācittiyanti ettha sakagāmato aññaṃ gāmaṃ ekarattivāsatthāyapi pakkamantiyā parikkhittassa āvasathassa parikkhepaṃ, aparikkhittassa upacāraṃ paṭhamapādena atikkantamatte dukkaṭaṃ, dutiyena pācittiyaṃ.

Āvasatha means a dwelling with a door that can be closed. Anissajjitvā means without giving it over for protection, without asking, "Someone should watch over this." Cārikaṃ pakkameyya pācittiya means here, when leaving one's own village for another village even for one night, a dukkaṭa is incurred as soon as she crosses the boundary of a dwelling with a boundary, or as soon as she leaves the vicinity of a dwelling without a boundary with the first step, and a pācittiya with the second.

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha āvasathaṃ anissajjitvā cārikaṃ pakkamanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, akavāṭabaddhe dukkaṭaṃ, nissajjite dvikadukkaṭaṃ. Tasmiṃ pana nissajjitasaññāya, sati antarāye, paṭijaggikaṃ pariyesitvā alabhantiyā, gilānāya, āpadāsu, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Sakavāṭabaddhatā, vuttanayena pakkamanaṃ, anuññātakāraṇābhāvoti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni kathinasadisānīti, idaṃ pana kiriyākiriyanti.

It was established in Sāvatthī concerning Thullanandā, in relation to the incident of setting out on tour without assigning the residence. A three-fold pācittiya is incurred, a dukkaṭa for a dwelling without a door, and a two-fold dukkaṭa if it is given away. But if she leaves with the perception that it has been given away, when there is an emergency, when she cannot find someone to watch over it after searching, when she is ill, in emergencies, there is no offense for her, or for those who are insane, etc. That it has a door that can be closed, the departure in the manner stated, and the absence of a permitted reason, these are the three factors involved here. The origin, etc., are similar to the kathina, but this is an action and inaction.

Āvasathavihārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Training Rule on Residence-Dwelling is finished.

9. Tiracchānavijjāpariyāpuṇanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Training Rule on Learning Worldly Skills

tiracchānavijjanti yaṃkiñci bāhirakaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ hatthiassarathadhanutharusippaāthabbaṇakhilanavasīkaraṇasosāpanamantāgadappayogādibhedaṃ parūpaghātakaraṃ vijjaṃ.Pariyāpuṇeyyāti ettha yassa kassaci santike taṃ padādivasena pariyāpuṇantiyā padagaṇanāya ceva akkharagaṇanāya ca pācittiyanti.

Tiracchānavijja means any external knowledge that is connected with what is useless, such as the skills of elephants, horses, chariots, bows, knives, and various magical practices, mantras for subduing, bewitching, causing to wither, and harmful applications that cause harm to others. Pariyāpuṇeyyā means here, if she learns it from anyone, phrase by phrase, a pācittiya is incurred for each phrase and for each syllable.

Tiracchānavijjāpariyāpuṇanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Training Rule on Learning Worldly Skills is finished.

10. Tiracchānavijjāvācanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Training Rule on Teaching Worldly Skills

vāceyyāti padaṃ viseso. Ubhayampi sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiyā ceva sambahulā bhikkhuniyo ca ārabbha tiracchānavijjaṃ pariyāpuṇanavācanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ. Lekhe, dhāraṇāya ca, guttatthāya ca yakkhaparittanāgamaṇḍalādike sabbaparitte, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Tiracchānavijjatā, pariyāpuṇanavācanā, anuññātakāraṇābhāvoti imānettha dvīsupi tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni padasodhammasadisānīti.

Vāceyyā means a phrase is a distinction. Both were established in Sāvatthī concerning the Group-of-Six and many nuns, in relation to the incident of learning and teaching worldly skills. There is no offense for writing, memorizing, or for protective purposes in all protective spells such as yaksha-protective circles and nāga-mandalas, or for those who are insane, etc. That it is worldly knowledge, learning and teaching, and the absence of a permitted reason, these are the three factors involved in both. The origin, etc., are similar to the Padasodhamma.

Tiracchānavijjāvācanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Training Rule on Teaching Worldly Skills is finished.

Cittāgāravaggo pañcamo.

The Fifth Chapter, The Citta-house, is finished.

6. Ārāmavaggo

6. The Chapter on Monasteries

1. Ārāmapavisanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Training Rule on Entering a Monastery

sabhikkhukaṃ ārāmanti yattha bhikkhū rukkhamūlepi vasanti, taṃ padesaṃ.Anāpucchāti ettha bhikkhusāmaṇeraārāmikesu yaṃkiñci anāpucchā, parikkhittassa ārāmassa parikkhepaṃ atikkamantiyā, aparikkhittassa upacāraṃ okkamantiyā paṭhamapāde dukkaṭaṃ, dutiyapāde pācittiyaṃ.

Sabhikkhukaṃ ārāma means that place where monks dwell, even at the foot of a tree. Anāpucchā means here, without asking any monk, novice, or monastery attendant, a dukkaṭa is incurred as soon as she crosses the boundary of a monastery with a boundary, or as soon as she enters the vicinity of a monastery without a boundary with the first step, and a pācittiya with the second step.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahulā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha anāpucchā ārāmaṃ pavisanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘santaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchā’’ti ca ‘‘jānaṃ sabhikkhuka’’nti ca imānettha dve anupaññattiyo, sabhikkhuke vematikāya, abhikkhuke sabhikkhukasaññāya ceva vematikāya ca dukkaṭaṃ. Tasmiṃ pana duvidhepi abhikkhukasaññāya, santaṃ bhikkhuṃ āpucchā pavisantiyā, paṭhamappaviṭṭhānaṃ vā bhikkhunīnaṃ sīsaṃnulokikāya, yattha vā bhikkhuniyo sannipatitā, tattha ‘‘tāsaṃ santikaṃ gacchāmī’’ti saññāya, ārāmena vā maggo hoti, tena gacchantiyā, āpadāsu, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Sabhikkhukārāmatā, sabhikkhukasaññitā, vuttaparicchedātikkamo, anuññātakāraṇābhāvoti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samanubhāsanasamauṭṭhānaṃ, kiriyākiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.

It was established in Sāvatthī concerning many nuns, in relation to the incident of entering a monastery without asking. "Without asking a monk who is present" and "knowing that it has monks" these are the two additional stipulations here; a dukkaṭa is incurred if she is in doubt about whether it has monks, and a dukkaṭa if she perceives it as having monks or if she is in doubt. But if she enters with the perception that it is without monks in both cases, or after asking a monk who is present, or if she is going to meet nuns who have entered first to offer a head massage, or if she is going to where the nuns have gathered with the intention, "I will go to them," or if there is a path through the monastery and she is going that way, in emergencies, there is no offense for her, or for those who are insane, etc. That it is a monastery with monks, that it is perceived as having monks, crossing the boundary as stated, and the absence of a permitted reason, these are the four factors involved here. It has the same origin as requiring admonition, it is an action and inaction, it has no perception of release, it is unintentional, it is an offense by rule, it is a bodily action, it is a verbal action, it is a three-arising, it is a three-feeling.

Ārāmapavisanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Training Rule on Entering a Monastery is finished.

2. Bhikkhuakkosanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Training Rule on Reviling a Monk

akkoseyyāti dasannaṃ akkosavatthūnaṃ aññatarena sammukhā vā parammukhā vā akkoseyya.Paribhāseyyāti bhayamassa upadaṃseyya.Pācittiyanti tassā evaṃ karontiyā pācittiyaṃ.

Akkoseyyā means she reviles with one of the ten grounds for reviling, whether face to face or behind his back. Paribhāseyyā means she makes him afraid. Pācittiya means a pācittiya is incurred for her doing so.

Vesāliyaṃ chabbaggiyā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha āyasmantaṃ upāliṃ akkosanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, anupasampanne tikadukkaṭaṃ, atthadhammaanusāsanipurekkhārāya, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Upasampannatā, akkosanaparibhāsanaṃ, atthapurekkhāratādīnaṃ abhāvoti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāni, idaṃ pana dukkhavedananti.

It was established in Vesālī concerning the Group-of-Six nuns, in relation to the incident of reviling the venerable Upāli. A three-fold pācittiya is incurred, and a three-fold dukkaṭa for reviling one who is not fully ordained. There is no offense for the sake of instruction in meaning and the Dhamma, or for those who are insane, etc. That he is fully ordained, reviling and scolding, and the absence of intending to instruct in meaning etc., these are the three factors involved here. The origin, etc., are similar to theft, but this is a painful feeling.

Bhikkhuakkosanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Training Rule on Reviling a Monk is finished.

3. Gaṇaparibhāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Training Rule on Reviling a Group

caṇḍikatāti kuddhā.Gaṇanti bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ.Paribhāseyyāti ettha ‘‘bālā etā abyattā etā, netā jānanti kammaṃ vā kammadosaṃ vā kammasampattiṃ vā kammavipattiṃ vā’’ti evaṃ yattha katthaci paribhāsantiyā pācittiyaṃ.

Caṇḍikatā means angry. Gaṇa means the Saṅgha of nuns. Paribhāseyyā means here, a pācittiya is incurred for reviling in any way, such as "These ones are foolish, these ones are incompetent, they do not know action, fault in action, success in action, or failure in action."

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha gaṇaṃ paribhāsanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sambahulā vā ekaṃ vā anupasampannaṃ vā paribhāsantiyā dukkaṭaṃ. Sesaṃ dutiyasadisamevāti.

It was established in Sāvatthī concerning Thullanandā, in relation to the incident of reviling a group. A dukkaṭa is incurred for reviling many or one who is not fully ordained. The rest is just like the second.

Gaṇaparibhāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Training Rule on Reviling a Group is finished.

4. Pavāritasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Training Rule on Invitation

nimantitā,pavāraṇāsikkhāpade vuttanayenapavāritāveditabbā.Pācittiyanti tassā purebhattaṃ ṭhapetvā yāguñceva sesāni ca tīṇi kālikāni aññaṃ yaṃkiñci āmisaṃ ajjhoharaṇatthāya paṭiggaṇhantiyā gahaṇe dukkaṭaṃ, ajjhohāre ajjhohāre pācittiyaṃ.

Nimantitā, pavāritā should be understood in the manner stated in the invitation training rule. Pācittiya means a pācittiya is incurred for accepting gruel and the remaining three kinds of food permissible for a limited time, or anything else to be consumed, other than before the meal, and a dukkaṭa for each acceptance and a pācittiya for each consumption.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahulā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha aññatra bhuñjanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, tīṇi kālikāni āhāratthāya paṭiggaṇhantiyāpi ajjhoharantiyāpi dukkaṭaṃ. Yā pana nimantitā appavāritā yāguṃ pivati, sāmike apaloketvā bhuñjati, tīṇi kālikāni sati paccaye paribhuñjati, tassā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Nimantitā vā pavāritā vā taṃ ubhayaṃ vā, purebhattaṃ vuttalakkhaṇassa āmisassa ajjhohāro, sāmikānaṃ anāpucchananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Addhānasamuṭṭhānaṃ, nimantitāya anāpucchā bhuñjantiyā āpattisambhavato siyā kiriyākiriyaṃ, pavāritāya kappiyaṃ kāretvāpi akāretvāpi paribhuñjantiyā āpattisambhavato siyā kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.

It was established in Sāvatthī concerning many nuns, in relation to the incident of eating elsewhere. A dukkaṭa is incurred for accepting or consuming the three kinds of food permissible for a limited time for the sake of nourishment. But if she drinks gruel when invited but not given leave, or eats after informing the owner, or partakes of the three kinds of food permissible for a limited time when there is a reason, there is no offense for her, or for those who are insane, etc. Whether invited or given leave or both, consumption of food as defined above other than before the meal, and not asking the owners, these are the three factors involved here. It has an Addhāna-origin, since an offense is possible for one who eats without asking when invited, it may be an action and inaction; since an offense is possible for one who partakes of permissible food even after having it made allowable or not, it may be an action, it has no perception of release, it is unintentional, it is an offense by rule, it is a bodily action, it is a verbal action, it is a three-arising, it is a three-feeling.

Pavāritasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Training Rule on Invitation is finished.

5. Kulamaccharinīsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Training Rule on Being a Family Detractor

kulamaccharinī. Assāti yā īdisī bhaveyya.Pācittiyanti tassā ‘‘yaṃ kulaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ paccaye dātukāmaṃ, kathaṃ nāma tattha bhikkhuniyo na gaccheyyu’’nti bhikkhunīnaṃ vā santike kulassa, ‘‘kathaṃ nāma ime tāsaṃ kiñci na dajjeyyu’’nti kulassa vā santike bhikkhunīnaṃ avaṇṇaṃ bhāsantiyā pācittiyaṃ.

Kulamaccharinī. Assā means she should be such a one. Pācittiya means a pācittiya is incurred for speaking disparagingly of a family to nuns or of nuns to a family, saying, "Why would the nuns not go to the family that wants to give requisites?" or "Why would they not give anything to those ones?"

Sāvatthiyaṃ aññataraṃ bhikkhuniṃ ārabbha kulamaccharāyanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ. Amaccharāyitvā santaṃyeva ādīnavaṃ ācikkhantiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Bhikkhunīnaṃ alābhakāmatā, kulassa vā santike bhikkhunīnaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ vā santike kulassa avaṇṇabhaṇananti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāni, idaṃ pana dukkhavedananti.

It was established in Sāvatthī concerning a certain nun, in relation to the incident of being a family detractor. There is no offense for pointing out an existing fault without being a detractor, or for those who are insane, etc. The desire for the nuns to be without gain, and speaking disparagingly of the nuns to a family or of a family to the nuns, these are the two factors involved here. The origin, etc., are similar to theft, but this is a painful feeling.

Kulamaccharinīsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Training Rule on Being a Family Detractor is finished.

6. Abhikkhukāvāsasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Training Rule on a Dwelling Without Monks

abhikkhukonāmaāvāso. Tattha ‘‘vassaṃ vasissāmī’’ti senāsanapaññāpanapānīyaupaṭṭhāpanādīni karontiyā dukkaṭaṃ, saha aruṇuggamanā pācittiyaṃ. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana samantapāsādikāyaṃ (pāci. aṭṭha. 144 ādayo) vutto.

Abhikkhuko means a dwelling without monks. There, a dukkaṭa is incurred for preparing a seat, providing water, etc., with the intention "I will spend the rains here," and a pācittiya with the rising of the dawn. This is a summary here, but the detailed explanation is stated in the Samantapāsādikā (pāci. aṭṭha. 144 ff.).

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahulā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha abhikkhuke āvāse vassaṃ vasanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, yattha pana vassūpagatā bhikkhū pakkantā vā honti vibbhantā vā kālaṅkatā vā pakkhasaṅkantā vā tattha vasantiyā, āpadāsu, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Abhikkhukāvāsatā, vassūpagamanaṃ, aruṇuggamananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasadisānevāti.

It was established in Sāvatthī concerning many nuns, in relation to the incident of spending the rains in a dwelling without monks. But if she dwells where the monks who had entered the rains residence have departed or been scattered or died or moved elsewhere, in emergencies, there is no offense for her, or for those who are insane, etc. That it is a dwelling without monks, entering the rains residence, and the rising of the dawn, these are the three factors involved here. The origin, etc., are similar to sheep's wool.

Abhikkhukāvāsasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Training Rule on a Dwelling Without Monks is finished.

7. Apavāraṇāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Apavāraṇā Training Rule

vassaṃvuṭṭhāti purimaṃ vā pacchimaṃ vā temāsaṃ vuṭṭhā.Ubhatosaṅgheti bhikkhunisaṅghe ceva bhikkhusaṅghe ca. Ayaṃ panettha vinicchayakathā – bhikkhunīhi cātuddaseyeva sannipatitvā ‘‘suṇātu me, ayye, saṅgho, ajja pavāraṇā cātuddasī, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho pavāreyyā’’ti evaṃ sabbasaṅgāhikañattiṃ vā, ‘‘tevācikaṃ pavāreyyā’’ti evaṃ tevācikañattiṃ vā, sati antarāye ‘‘dvevācikaṃ, ekavācikaṃ, samānavassikaṃ pavāreyyā’’ti evaṃ dvevācikādiñattiṃ vā ṭhapetvā sabbasaṅgāhikañatti ce ṭhapitā, ‘‘saṅghaṃ, ayye, pavāremi diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadantu maṃ ayyāyo anukampaṃ upādāya, passantī paṭikarissāmī’’ti (cūḷava. 427) evaṃ sakiṃ vā, ‘‘dutiyampi, ayye, saṅghaṃ…pe… tatiyampi, ayye, saṅghaṃ…pe… paṭikarissāmī’’ti evaṃ dvattikkhattuṃ vā vatvā paṭipāṭiyā pavāretabbaṃ. Tevācikāya ñattiyā vacanaṃ na hāpetabbaṃ, dvevācikādīsu vaḍḍhetuṃ vaṭṭati, hāpetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Evaṃ bhikkhunisaṅghe pavāretvā tattheva ekā bhikkhunī bhikkhunikkhandhake (cūḷava. 427) vuttena ñattidutiyakammena bhikkhunisaṅghassatthāya bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pavāretuṃ sammannitabbā. Tāya sammatāya bhikkhuniyā pannarase bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ ādāya bhikkhusaṅghaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā evamassa vacanīyo ‘‘bhikkhunisaṅgho ayya bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pavāreti diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadatāyya bhikkhusaṅgho bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissati, dutiyampi ayya…pe… tatiyampi ayya…pe… passanto paṭikarissatī’’ti evaṃ pavāretabbaṃ.

Vassaṃvuṭṭhā: Having spent the rains, whether it be the earlier or later three months. Ubhatosaṅghe: In both the community of bhikkhunīs and the community of bhikkhus. Here is the analysis in this matter: Bhikkhunīs, having assembled on the fourteenth day, should establish either a formal motion encompassing all, saying, "Let the Sangha hear me, Venerable Ones, today is the Pavāraṇā of the fourteenth day. If it is agreeable to the Sangha, the Sangha should perform Pavāraṇā," or a formal motion involving three utterances, saying, "Let them perform Pavāraṇā with three utterances." If there is an obstacle, they should establish a formal motion with two utterances, one utterance, or performed by those of equal seniority, saying, "Let them perform Pavāraṇā with two utterances," etc. If a formal motion encompassing all has been established, then they should perform Pavāraṇā in order, saying once, "Venerable Ones, I invite the Sangha to point out anything seen, heard, or suspected concerning me. Out of compassion, Venerable Ones, please speak to me. Seeing it, I will rectify it" (cūḷava. 427), or twice or three times, saying, "For a second time, Venerable Ones, I invite the Sangha...pe... For a third time, Venerable Ones, I invite the Sangha...pe... I will rectify it." The utterance in the formal motion involving three utterances should not be reduced, but in formal motions involving two utterances, etc., it is appropriate to increase, but not appropriate to reduce. Having performed Pavāraṇā in the community of bhikkhunīs in this way, then one bhikkhunī should be appointed by a motion with announcement as second, as described in the Bhikkhunī Khandhaka (cūḷava. 427), for the purpose of performing Pavāraṇā to the community of bhikkhus on behalf of the community of bhikkhunīs. That appointed bhikkhunī, on the fifteenth, taking the community of bhikkhunīs, should approach the community of bhikkhus, arrange the upper robe over one shoulder, raise the joined palms, and say thus: "Venerable Sirs, the community of bhikkhunīs invites the venerable community of bhikkhus to point out anything seen, heard, or suspected concerning the community of bhikkhunīs. Out of compassion, venerable sirs, please speak to the community of bhikkhunīs. Seeing it, they will rectify it. For a second time, venerable sirs...pe... For a third time, venerable sirs...pe... Seeing it, they will rectify it." In this way, Pavāraṇā should be performed.

Sace pañcavaggo bhikkhunisaṅgho na pūrati, catūhi vā tīhi vā gaṇañattiṃ ṭhapetvā, dvīhi vinā ñattiyā aññamaññaṃ pavāretabbaṃ. Ekāya ‘‘ajja me pavāraṇā’’ti adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ.

If a community of bhikkhunīs of five is not complete, having established a motion for a quorum with four or three, Pavāraṇā should be performed mutually by two without a motion. By one, it should be resolved, "Today is my Pavāraṇā."

Vihāraṃ pana gantvā ‘‘bhikkhuniyo, ayya, bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pavārenti diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadatāyya bhikkhusaṅgho bhikkhuniyo anukampaṃ upādāya, passantiyo paṭikarissantī’’ti ca, ‘‘ahaṃ, ayya, bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pavāremi diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadatu maṃ, ayya, bhikkhusaṅgho anukampaṃ upādāya, passantī paṭikarissāmī’’ti ca evaṃ tikkhattuṃ vattabbaṃ.

Going to the monastery, one should say three times, "Venerable Sirs, the bhikkhunīs invite the community of bhikkhus to point out anything seen, heard, or suspected concerning them. Out of compassion, venerable sirs, please speak to the bhikkhunīs. Seeing it, they will rectify it," and "Venerable Sirs, I invite the community of bhikkhus to point out anything seen, heard, or suspected concerning me. Out of compassion, venerable sirs, please speak to me. Seeing it, I will rectify it."

Sace bhikkhusaṅgho na pūrati, ‘‘bhikkhunisaṅgho, ayya, ayye pavāreti diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadantu ayyā bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissatī’’ti ca, ‘‘bhikkhunisaṅgho, ayya, ayyaṃ pavāreti diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadatāyyo bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissatī’’ti ca evaṃ tikkhattuṃ vattabbaṃ.

If the community of bhikkhus is not complete, one should say three times, "Venerable Sirs, the community of bhikkhunīs invites the venerable ones to point out anything seen, heard, or suspected concerning them. Out of compassion, venerable ones, please speak to the community of bhikkhunīs. Seeing it, they will rectify it," and "Venerable Sirs, the community of bhikkhunīs invites the venerable one to point out anything seen, heard, or suspected concerning them. Out of compassion, venerable ones, please speak to the community of bhikkhunīs. Seeing it, they will rectify it."

Ubhinnaṃ aparipūriyā ‘‘bhikkhuniyo, ayyā, ayye pavārenti diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadantāyyā bhikkhuniyo anukampaṃ upādāya, passantiyo paṭikarissantī’’ti ca, ‘‘bhikkhuniyo, ayya, ayyaṃ pavārenti diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadatāyyo bhikkhuniyo anukampaṃ upādāya, passantiyo paṭikarissantī’’ti ca, ‘‘ahaṃ, ayyā, ayye pavāremi diṭṭhena vā sutena vā…pe… vadantu maṃ, ayyā, anukampaṃ upādāya, passantī paṭikarissāmī’’ti ca, ‘‘ahaṃ, ayya, ayyaṃ pavāremi diṭṭhena vā sutena vā…pe… vadatu maṃ, ayyo, anukampaṃ upādāya, passantī paṭikarissāmī’’ti ca evaṃ tikkhattuṃ vattabbaṃ. Sabbāheva hi iminā nayena ubhatosaṅghe pavāritā hoti, yā pana vassaṃvuṭṭhā ‘‘ubhatosaṅghe evaṃ na pavāressāmī’’ti dhuraṃ nikkhipati, tassā saha dhuranikkhepena pācittiyaṃ.

If both are incomplete, one should say three times, "Venerable Ones, the bhikkhunīs invite the venerable ones to point out anything seen, heard, or suspected concerning them. Out of compassion, venerable ones, please speak to the bhikkhunīs. Seeing it, they will rectify it," and "Venerable Sirs, the bhikkhunīs invite the venerable one to point out anything seen, heard, or suspected concerning them. Out of compassion, venerable ones, please speak to the bhikkhunīs. Seeing it, they will rectify it," and "Venerable Ones, I invite the venerable ones to point out anything seen, heard, or suspected concerning me...pe... Out of compassion, venerable ones, please speak to me. Seeing it, I will rectify it," and "Venerable Sirs, I invite the venerable one to point out anything seen, heard, or suspected concerning me...pe... Out of compassion, venerable sirs, please speak to me. Seeing it, I will rectify it." For truly, in all ways, Pavāraṇā is performed in both communities by this method. However, for one who has spent the rains and discards the burden, saying, "I will not perform Pavāraṇā in both communities in this way," for her, with the discarding of the burden, there is a pācittiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahulā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha vassaṃ vasitvā na pavāraṇāvatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ. Antarāye pana sati, pariyesitvā bhikkhū alabhantiyā, gilānāya, āpadāsu, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Vassaṃvuṭṭhatā, na ubhatosaṅghe pavāraṇā, anuññātakāraṇābhāvoti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni samanubhāsanasadisānīti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning many bhikkhunīs who, having spent the rains, did not perform Pavāraṇā. However, when there is an obstacle, there is no offense for one who, having searched, does not find bhikkhus, or for one who is ill, in danger, or insane, etc. Having spent the rains, not performing Pavāraṇā in both communities, and the absence of a permitted reason are the three factors here. The origination, etc., are similar to the formal expulsions.

Apavāraṇāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Apavāraṇā Training Rule is Finished.

8. Ovādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Exhortation Training Rule

ovādāyāti garudhammassavanatthāya.Saṃvāsāyāti uposathapucchanatthāya ceva pavāraṇatthāya ca.Pācittiyanti ‘‘etesaṃ atthāya na gacchāmī’’ti dhuraṃ nikkhittamatte pācittiyaṃ.

Ovādāya: For the purpose of hearing the garudhamma. Saṃvāsāya: For the purpose of asking about the Uposatha and for the purpose of Pavāraṇā. Pācittiyaṃ: As soon as one discards the burden, saying, "I will not go for these purposes," there is a pācittiya.

Sakkesu chabbaggiyā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha ovādāya agamanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ. Antarāye pana sati, pariyesitvā dutiyikaṃ alabhantiyā, gilānāya, āpadāsu, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Ovādasaṃvāsānaṃ atthāya agamanaṃ, anuññātakāraṇābhāvoti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamapārājikasadisāni, idaṃ pana akiriyaṃ, dukkhavedananti.

This was established concerning the group-of-six bhikkhunīs among the Sakyans, in the case of not going for exhortation. However, when there is an obstacle, there is no offense for one who, having searched, does not find a companion, or for one who is ill, in danger, or insane, etc. Not going for the sake of exhortation and association, and the absence of a permitted reason are the two factors here. The origination, etc., are similar to the first pārājika, but this is a non-action and painful feeling.

Ovādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Exhortation Training Rule is Finished.

9. Ovādūpasaṅkamanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Going-for-Exhortation Training Rule

anvaddhamāsanti addhamāse addhamāse.Uposathapucchakanti uposathapucchanaṃ.Ovādūpasaṅkamananti ovādatthāya upasaṅkamanaṃ.Taṃ atikkāmentiyāti ettha bhikkhunīhi terase vā cātuddase vā ārāmaṃ gantvā ‘‘ayaṃ uposatho cātuddaso pannaraso’’ti pucchitabbaṃ, uposathadivase nidānavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayena ovādūpasaṅkamanaṃ yācitabbaṃ. Yā bhikkhunī vuttappakāre kāle tadubhayaṃ na karoti, sā taṃ atikkāmeti nāma, tassā ‘‘uposathampi na pucchissāmi, ovādampi na yācissāmī’’ti dhuraṃ nikkhittamatte pācittiyaṃ.

Anvaddhamāsa: Every half-month. Uposathapucchaka: Asking about the Uposatha. Ovādūpasaṅkamana: Approaching for the sake of exhortation. Taṃ atikkāmentiyā: Here, bhikkhunīs, having gone to the monastery on the thirteenth or fourteenth day, should ask, "Is this Uposatha the fourteenth or fifteenth?" On the day of the Uposatha, they should request going for exhortation in the manner described in the nidāna story. The bhikkhunī who does not do both of these in the manner described and at the time, she is said to transgress that. For her, as soon as she discards the burden, saying, "I will neither ask about the Uposatha nor request exhortation," there is a pācittiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahulā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha uposathaovādānaṃ apucchanaayācanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, anāpatti aṭṭhamasadisāyeva. Uposathovādānaṃ apucchanaayācanāyaṃ dhuranikkhepo, anuññātakāraṇābhāvoti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni samanubhāsanasadisānīti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning many bhikkhunīs, in the case of not asking and requesting about the Uposatha and exhortation. The non-offense is just like the eighth. Discarding the burden regarding not asking and requesting about the Uposatha and exhortation, and the absence of a permitted reason are the two factors here. The origination, etc., are similar to the formal expulsions.

Ovādūpasaṅkamanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Going-for-Exhortation Training Rule is Finished.

10. Pasākhejātasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Pasākhejāta Training Rule

pasākheti nābhiyā heṭṭhā jāṇumaṇḍalānaṃ uparipadese. Tato hi yasmā rukkhassa sākhā viya ubho ūrū pabhijjitvā gatā, tasmā so ‘‘pasākho’’ti vuccati, tasmiṃ pasākhe.Gaṇḍanti yaṃkiñci gaṇḍaṃ.Rudhitanti vaṇaṃ.Bhedāpeyya vātiādīsu sace ‘‘bhinda phālehī’’ti sabbāni āṇāpeti, so ca tatheva karoti, cha dukkaṭāni cha ca pācittiyāni. Athāpi ‘‘yaṃkiñci ettha kattabbaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ karohī’’ti evaṃ āṇāpeti, so ca sabbānipi bhedanādīni karoti, ekavācāya cha dukkaṭāni cha ca pācittiyāni. Sace pana bhedanādīsu ekaṃyeva ‘‘idaṃ nāma karohī’’ti āṇāpeti, so ca sabbāni karoti. Yaṃ āṇattaṃ, tasseva karaṇe pācittiyaṃ.

Pasākhe: In the region below the navel and above the kneecaps. For since the two thighs have split apart and gone like branches of a tree from there, therefore, it is called "pasākha," in that pasākha. Gaṇḍa: Whatever boil. Rudhita: A sore. Bhedāpeyya vā: In "or should have it cut open," etc., if she orders all, saying, "Cut it open, split it," and he does just that, there are six wrongdoings and six pācittiyas. But if she orders, saying, "Whatever should be done here, do all of that," and he does all of the cutting open, etc., with one utterance, there are six wrongdoings and six pācittiyas. But if she orders only one of the cutting open, etc., saying, "Do this," and he does all of it. With the doing of what was ordered, there is a pācittiya.

Sāvatthiyaṃ aññataraṃ bhikkhuniṃ ārabbha pasākhe jātaṃ gaṇḍaṃ purisena bhedāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, apaloketvā vā viññuṃ vā yaṃkañci dutiyikaṃ gahetvā evaṃ karontiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Pasākhe jātatā, anapalokanaṃ, dutiyikābhāvo, purisena bhedādīnaṃ kārāpananti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni kathinasadisāni, idaṃ pana kiriyākiriyanti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning a certain bhikkhunī in the case of having a boil that arose in the pasākha cut open by a man. There is no offense for one who does so after informing or taking some knowledgeable companion, or for one who is insane, etc. Having arisen in the pasākha, not informing, the absence of a companion, and having a man cause the cutting open, etc., are the four factors here. The origination, etc., are similar to the kathina, but this is action and non-action.

Pasākhejātasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Pasākhejāta Training Rule is Finished.

Ārāmavaggo chaṭṭho.

The Sixth Chapter, the Ārāma Section.

7. Gabbhinīvaggo

7. The Gabbhinī Section

1. Gabbhinīsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Pregnant-Woman Training Rule

‘‘gabbhinī’’ti jānitvā upajjhāyāya vuṭṭhāpentiyā gaṇapariyesanādīsu ca ñattikammavācādvaye ca dukkaṭaṃ, kammavācāpariyosāne pācittiyaṃ.

"Gabbhinī": Knowing (that she is) pregnant, there is a wrongdoing in the undertaking by the preceptor, in the search for a group, etc., and in both the motion and the declaration of the action, and a pācittiya at the conclusion of the declaration of the action.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahulā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha gabbhiniṃ vuṭṭhāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, gabbhiniyā vematikāya agabbhiniyā gabbhinisaññāya ceva vematikāya ca dukkaṭaṃ. Ubhosu agabbhinisaññāya, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Gabbhinitā, ‘gabbhinī’ti jānanaṃ, vuṭṭhāpananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāni, idaṃ pana paṇṇattivajjaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning many bhikkhunīs in the case of ordaining a pregnant woman. There is a wrongdoing for one who is doubtful about a pregnant woman, for one who has the perception of a pregnant woman about one who is not pregnant, and for one who is doubtful. In both cases, there is no offense for one who has the perception of not being pregnant, or for one who is insane, etc. Being pregnant, knowing that (she is) "pregnant," and ordaining (her) are the three factors here. The origination, etc., are similar to taking what is not given, but this is an offense by ordinance, tri-citta, and tri-vedanā.

Gabbhinīsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Pregnant-Woman Training Rule is Finished.

2. Pāyantīsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Nursing-Mother Training Rule

pāyantinti thaññaṃ pāyamānaṃ, yaṃ pāyeti, tassa mātā vā, dhāti vā. Idaṃ vatthumattamevettha viseso, sesaṃ paṭhamasikkhāpadasadisamevāti.

Pāyanti: A nursing mother, the mother or nurse of the one whom she nurses. Here, only this much is the distinction in the story, the rest is just like the first training rule.

Pāyantīsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Nursing-Mother Training Rule is Finished.

3. Paṭhamasikkhamānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the First Sikkhamānā Training Rule

dve vassānīti pavāraṇāvasena dve saṃvaccharāni.Chasu dhammesūti pāṇātipātāveramaṇiādīsu vikālabhojanāveramaṇipariyosānesu chasu sikkhāpadesu.Asikkhitasikkhanti padabhājane (pāci. 1077) vuttanayeneva adinnasikkhaṃ vā kupitasikkhaṃ vā.Sikkhamānaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyyāti tesu chasu dhammesu sikkhanato, te vā sikkhāsaṅkhāte dhamme mānanato evaṃladdhanāmaṃ anupasampannaṃ upasampādeyya.Pācittiyanti paṭhamasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva kammavācāpariyosāne pācittiyaṃ.

Dve vassāni: Two years according to Pavāraṇā. Chasu dhammesū: In the six training rules ending with abstinence from untimely food, beginning with abstinence from killing living beings. Asikkhitasikkha: In the manner described in the word analysis (pāci. 1077), either untrained in the training or trained improperly. Sikkhamānaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya: Should ordain one who is called thus, who is not yet fully ordained, either due to not training in those six principles or due to slighting the Dhamma consisting of training. Pācittiyaṃ: In the manner described in the first training rule, there is a pācittiya at the conclusion of the declaration of the action.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahulā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha evarūpaṃ sikkhamānaṃ vuṭṭhāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, dhammakamme tikapācittiyaṃ, adhammakamme tikadukkaṭaṃ. Dve vassāni chasu dhammesu sikkhitasikkhaṃ sikkhamānaṃ vuṭṭhāpentiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Vuttanayena asikkhitasikkhatā, dhammakammatā, kammavācāpariyosānanti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhame vuttanayānevāti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning many bhikkhunīs in the case of ordaining a sikkhamānā of this sort. There is a triple pācittiya in a proper action, and a triple wrongdoing in an improper action. There is no offense for one who ordains a sikkhamānā who is trained improperly in the six principles for two years, or for one who is insane, etc. Being untrained in the training in the manner described, being a proper action, and the conclusion of the declaration of the action are the three factors here. The origination, etc., are just as described in the first.

Paṭhamasikkhamānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the First Sikkhamānā Training Rule is Finished.

4. Dutiyasikkhamānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Second Sikkhamānā Training Rule

saṅghena asammatanti yassā saṅghena antamaso upasampadāmāḷakepi padabhājane (pāci. 1086) vuttā upasampadāsammuti na dinnā hoti, taṃ imā dvepimahāsikkhamānānāma. Idha saṅghena sammataṃ vuṭṭhāpentiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Sesaṃ tatiye vuttasadisameva, idaṃ pana kiriyākiriyaṃ hotīti.

Saṅghena asammata: Not approved by the Sangha. Both of these, the one for whom the Sangha has not given approval for ordination, even in the ordination enclosure, as described in the word analysis (pāci. 1086), are called mahāsikkhamānā. Here, there is no offense for one who ordains one approved by the Sangha, or for one who is insane, etc. The rest is just like what was said in the third, but this is action and non-action.

Dutiyasikkhamānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Second Sikkhamānā Training Rule is Finished.

5. Paṭhamagihigatasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the First Gihigata Training Rule

gihigatanti purisantaragataṃ, idhāpi idaṃ vatthumattameva viseso. Ūnadvādasavassañca paripuṇṇasaññāya vuṭṭhāpentiyā kiñcāpi anāpatti, sā pana anupasampannāva hoti. Sesaṃ paṭhamasikkhāpadasadisamevāti.

Gihigata: Gone to another man. Here too, only this much is the distinction in the story. Although there is no offense for one who ordains one who is less than twelve years old with the perception of being complete, she is still not ordained. The rest is just like the first training rule.

Paṭhamagihigatasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the First Gihigata Training Rule is Finished.

6-7. Dutiyatatiyagihigatasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6-7. Explanation of the Second and Third Gihigata Training Rules

Chaṭṭhe sabbaṃ tatiye vuttanayena. Sattamepi sabbaṃ catutthe vuttanayeneva veditabbanti.

In the sixth, everything (is) in the manner described in the third. In the seventh too, everything should be understood in just the manner described in the fourth.

Dutiyatatiyagihigatasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Second and Third Gihigata Training Rules is Finished.

8. Paṭhamasahajīvinisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the First Sahajīvinī Training Rule

sahajīvininti saddhivihāriniṃ.Neva anuggaṇheyyāti sayaṃ uddesādīhi nānuggaṇheyya.Na anuggaṇhāpeyyāti ‘‘imissā, ayye, uddesādīni dehī’’ti evaṃ na aññāya anuggaṇhāpeyya.Pācittiyanti dhure nikkhittamatte pācittiyaṃ.

Sahajīvinīti: A saddhivihārinī. Neva anuggaṇheyyā: She should not herself support with offering recitations, etc. Na anuggaṇhāpeyyā: She should not encourage another by saying, "Venerable, give her recitations, etc." Pācittiyaṃ: The offense of expiation occurs immediately upon the intention of performing the act.

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha evarūpe vatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, sesamettha tuvaṭṭavagge dukkhitasahajīvinisikkhāpade vuttasadisamevāti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning Thullanandā, regarding a similar incident as described in the Dukkkhitasahajīvinī training rule in the Tuvatṭa Vagga.

Paṭhamasahajīvinisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the First Sahajīvinī Training Rule is Complete.

9. Nānubandhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Nānubandhana Training Rule

vuṭṭhāpitaṃ pavattininti vuṭṭhāpitaṃ pavattiniṃ yāya upasampāditā, taṃ upajjhāyininti attho.Nānubandheyyāti cuṇṇena mattikāya dantakaṭṭhena mukhodakenāti evaṃ tena tena karaṇīyena na upaṭṭhaheyya.Pācittiyanti nānubandhissanti dhure nikkhittamatte pācittiyaṃ.

Vuṭṭhāpitaṃ pavattininti: A pavattinī by whom she was ordained, meaning the preceptor. Nānubandheyyā: She should not attend to her by providing powder, clay, tooth sticks, or water for the mouth, etc., with whatever is to be done. Pācittiyaṃ: The offense of expiation occurs immediately upon the intention of not attending.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahulā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha nānubandhanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ. Bālaṃ pana alajjiniṃ vā ananubandhantiyā, gilānāya, āpadāsu, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Vuṭṭhāpitappavattinitā, dve vassāni ananubandhane dhuranikkhepo, anuññātakāraṇābhāvoti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamapārājikasadisāni, idaṃ pana akiriyaṃ, dukkhavedananti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning several bhikkhunīs, regarding an incident of not attending. There is no offense for not attending to one who is foolish or shameless, or to one who is ill, in times of danger, or to one who is insane, etc. Regarding the vuṭṭhāpitapavattinī, the abandonment of attendance for two years, and the absence of a permitted reason, these are the three factors here. The origination, etc., are similar to the first pārājika, but this is non-action, and is a painful feeling.

Nānubandhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Nānubandhana Training Rule is Complete.

10. Dutiyasahajīvinisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Second Sahajīvinī Training Rule

neva vūpakāseyyāti na gahetvā gaccheyya.Na vūpakāsāpeyyāti ‘‘imaṃ, ayye, gahetvā gacchāhī’’ti aññaṃ na āṇāpeyya.Pācittiyanti dhure nikkhittamatte pācittiyaṃ.

Neva vūpakāseyyā: She should not take and go. Na vūpakāsāpeyyā: She should not command another, saying, "Venerable, take this and go." Pācittiyaṃ: The offense of expiation occurs immediately upon the intention of performing the act.

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha sahajīviniyā avūpakāsanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ. Sati pana antarāye, pariyesitvā dutiyikaṃ alabhantiyā, gilānāya, āpadāsu, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Sahajīvinitā, vūpakāsavūpakāsāpane dhuranikkhepo, anuññātakāraṇābhāvoti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni samanubhāsanasadisānīti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning Thullanandā, regarding an incident of not carrying something for a sahajīvinī. However, there is no offense when there is an obstruction, when she cannot find a second person after searching, or for one who is ill, in times of danger, or for one who is insane, etc. Regarding the sahajīvinī, the intention of carrying and causing to carry, and the absence of a permitted reason, these are the three factors here. The origination, etc., are similar to the formal accusation.

Dutiyasahajīvinisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Second Sahajīvinī Training Rule is Complete.

Gabbhinīvaggo sattamo.

The Seventh Section, the Gabbhinī Vagga, is Complete.

8. Kumāribhūtavaggo

8. The Kumāribhūta Vagga

1-2-3. Paṭhamakumāribhūtādisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1-2-3. Explanation of the First Kumāribhūtādi Training Rule

Kumāribhūtavaggassa paṭhamadutiyatatiyāni tīhi gihigatasikkhāpadehi sadisāneva. Yā pana tā sabbapaṭhamā dve mahāsikkhamānā, tā atikkantavīsativassāti veditabbā. Tā hi gihigatā vā hontu, agihigatā vā, sammutikammādīsu ‘‘sikkhamānā’’icceva vattabbā, ‘‘gihigatā’’ti vā ‘‘kumāribhūtā’’ti vā na vattabbā. Gihigatāya dasavassakāle sikkhāsammutiṃ datvā dvādasavassakāle upasampadā kātabbā, ekādasavassakāle datvā terasavassakāle kātabbā, dvādasaterasacuddasapannarasasoḷasasattarasaaṭṭhārasavassakāle sikkhāsammutiṃ datvā vīsativassakāle upasampadā kātabbā. Aṭṭhārasavassakālato paṭṭhāya ca panāyaṃ ‘‘gihigatā’’tipi ‘‘kumāribhūtā’’tipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Yā panāyaṃ ‘‘kumāribhūtā’’ti vuttā sāmaṇerī, sā ‘‘gihigatā’’ti na vattabbā, ‘‘kumāribhūtā’’icceva vattabbā. Sikkhāsammutidānavasena pana sabbāpi ‘‘sikkhamānā’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti.

The first, second, and third training rules of the Kumāribhūta Vagga are just similar to the three training rules concerning those remaining in lay life. However, the first two mahāsikkhamānās must be known as having completed twenty years. Whether they remain in lay life or not, in matters of formal agreement, etc., they should only be referred to as "sikkhamānās," and should not be referred to as "remaining in lay life" or "kumāribhūtās." For one remaining in lay life, having given the training agreement at the age of ten years, ordination should be done at the age of twelve years; having given it at the age of eleven years, it should be done at the age of thirteen years; having given the training agreement at the age of twelve, thirteen, fourteen, fifteen, sixteen, seventeen, or eighteen years, ordination should be done at the age of twenty years. But from the age of eighteen years onwards, it is allowable to refer to her as "remaining in lay life" or "kumāribhūtā." However, a sāmaṇerī who is called "kumāribhūtā" should not be referred to as "remaining in lay life," but should only be referred to as "kumāribhūtā." However, in terms of giving the training agreement, all can be referred to as "sikkhamānās."

Paṭhamakumāribhūtādisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the First Kumāribhūtādi Training Rule is Complete.

4. Ūnadvādasavassasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Ūnadvādasavassa Training Rule

ūnadvādasavassāti upasampadāvasena aparipuṇṇadvādasavassā.Pācittiyanti upajjhāyā hutvā vuṭṭhāpentiyā vuttanayeneva dukkaṭāni antarā, kammavācāpariyosāne pācittiyanti.

Ūnadvādasavassā: One whose twelve years are not complete in terms of ordination. Pācittiyaṃ: For one who ordains, being an upajjhāyā, there are offenses of wrong-doing in the same way as stated above, and the offense of expiation occurs at the conclusion of the Kammavācā.

Ūnadvādasavassasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Ūnadvādasavassa Training Rule is Complete.

5. Paripuṇṇadvādasavassasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Paripuṇṇadvādasavassa Training Rule

saṅghena asammatāti yassā saṅghena padabhājane (pāci. 1132) vuttā vuṭṭhāpanasammuti na dinnā. Sesaṃ ubhayatthāpi mahāsikkhamānāsikkhāpadadvayasadisamevāti.

Saṅghena asammatā: One for whom the Saṅgha has not given approval for ordination, as stated in the Padabhājana (pāci. 1132). The rest is similar in both cases to the two mahāsikkhamānā training rules.

Paripuṇṇadvādasavassasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Paripuṇṇadvādasavassa Training Rule is Complete.

6. Khīyanadhammasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Khīyanadhamma Training Rule

alaṃ tāva te ayye vuṭṭhāpitenāti vuccamānāti vuṭṭhāpanasammutiyā yācitāya saṅghena upaparikkhipitvā ‘‘yasmā bālā abyattā ca alajjinī ca hoti, tasmā alaṃ tāva tuyhaṃ upasampāditenā’’ti evaṃ nivārīyamānā.Pacchā khīyanadhammanti pacchā aññāsaṃ byattānaṃ lajjinīnaṃ vuṭṭhāpanasammutiṃ diyyamānaṃ disvā ‘‘ahameva nūna bālā’’tiādīni bhaṇamānā yattha katthaci khīyeyya.Pācittiyanti evaṃ khīyanadhammaṃ āpajjantiyā pācittiyaṃ.

Alaṃ tāva te ayye vuṭṭhāpitenāti vuccamānā: When ordination is requested and the Saṅgha, having investigated, refuses, saying, "Since she is foolish, incapable, and shameless, it is enough that you are ordained." Pacchā khīyanadhammaṃ: Afterwards, seeing the ordination approval being given to other capable and conscientious ones, if she complains somewhere, saying "Am I foolish?", etc. Pācittiyaṃ: The offense of expiation occurs to one who engages in such complaining.

Sāvatthiyaṃ caṇḍakāḷiṃ ārabbha evaṃ khīyanadhammaṃ āpajjanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, pakatiyā chandādīnaṃ vasena karontīnaṃ khīyantiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Vuṭṭhāpanasammutiyā yācanaṃ, upaparikkhitvā na chandādivasena paṭikkhittāya ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭissavo, pacchākhīyananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni adinnādānasadisāni, idaṃ pana dukkhavedananti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning Caṇḍakāḷī, regarding an incident of engaging in such complaining. There is no offense for one who complains naturally due to desire, etc., or for one who is insane, etc. Requesting ordination approval, investigation and a promise of "good" after being rejected not due to desire, etc., and subsequent complaining, these are the three factors here. The origination, etc., are similar to taking what is not given, but this is a painful feeling.

Khīyanadhammasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Khīyanadhamma Training Rule is Complete.

7-8. Sikkhamānanavuṭṭhāpanapaṭhamadutiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7-8. Explanation of the Sikkhamānanavuṭṭhāpana First and Second Training Rules

sā pacchāti sikkhamānāya upasampadāya yāciyamānāya sā bhikkhunī evaṃ vatvā laddhe cīvare pacchā asati antarāye ‘‘neva vuṭṭhāpessāmi, na vuṭṭhāpanāya ussukkaṃ karissāmī’’ti dhuraṃ nikkhipeyya, tassā saha dhuranikkhepena pācittiyanti. Aṭṭhamepi eseva nayo.

Sā pacchā: When a sikkhamānā requests ordination, that bhikkhunī, having said thus and having received robes, afterwards, in the absence of an obstruction, abandons the endeavor, thinking, "I will not ordain, nor will I strive for ordination," the offense of expiation occurs to her simultaneously with the abandonment. The same method applies to the eighth as well.

Ubhayampi sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha etesu vatthūsu paññattaṃ, dvīsupi sati antarāye, pariyesitvā alabhantiyā, gilānāya, āpadāsu, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Ubhayattha ‘‘evāhaṃ taṃ vuṭṭhāpessāmī’’ti paṭiññā, ākaṅkhitanipphatti, pacchā dhuranikkhepo, anuññātakāraṇābhāvoti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni samanubhāsanasadisānīti.

Both were established in Sāvatthī concerning Thullanandā, regarding these incidents. In both cases, there is no offense when there is an obstruction, when she cannot find someone after searching, or for one who is ill, in times of danger, or for one who is insane, etc. In both instances, the promise "I will ordain you," the expected result, subsequent abandonment, and the absence of a permitted reason, these are the four factors here. The origination, etc., are similar to the formal accusation.

Sikkhamānanavuṭṭhāpanapaṭhamadutiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Sikkhamānanavuṭṭhāpana First and Second Training Rules is Complete.

9. Sokāvāsasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Sokāvāsa Training Rule

sokāvāsanti saṅketaṃ katvā āgacchamānā purisānaṃ antosokaṃ pavesetīti sokāvāsā, taṃ sokāvāsaṃ. Atha vā gharaṃ viya gharasāmikā ayampi purisasamāgamaṃ alabhamānā sokaṃ āvisati, iti yaṃ āvisati, svāssā āvāso hotīti sokāvāsā. Tenevassa padabhājane (pāci. 1160) ‘‘sokāvāsā nāma paresaṃ dukkhaṃ uppādeti, sokaṃ āvisatī’’ti dvidhā attho vutto.Pācittiyanti evarūpaṃ vuṭṭhāpentiyā vuttanayeneva kammavācāpariyosāne upajjhāyāya pācittiyaṃ.

Sokāvāsa: One who, having made a signal, leads the minds of men who come into inner sorrow, is a sokāvāsa, that is, a place of sorrow. Or, just as a house is to a householder, this one, not obtaining the association of men, enters into sorrow; thus, that which she enters is her dwelling, therefore she is a sokāvāsa. Therefore, in the Padabhājana (pāci. 1160), two meanings are given: "sokāvāsā means she causes sorrow to others, and she enters into sorrow." Pācittiyaṃ: For one who ordains such a one, in the same way as stated above, the offense of expiation occurs to the preceptor at the conclusion of the Kammavācā.

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha evarūpaṃ sikkhamānaṃ vuṭṭhāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ. Ajānantiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Sokāvāsatā, jānanaṃ, vuṭṭhāpananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni gabbhinivuṭṭhāpanasadisānevāti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning Thullanandā, regarding such an incident of ordaining a sikkhamānā. There is no offense for one who does not know, or for one who is insane, etc. Being a place of sorrow, knowing, and ordaining, these are the three factors here. The origination, etc., are just similar to ordaining a pregnant woman.

Sokāvāsasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Sokāvāsa Training Rule is Complete.

10. Ananuññātasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Ananuññāta Training Rule

mātāpitūhīti vijātamātarā ca janakapitarā ca.Sāmikenāti yena pariggahitā, tena.Ananuññātanti upasampadatthāya ananuññātaṃ. Dvikkhattuñhi bhikkhunīhi āpucchitabbaṃ, pabbajjākāle ca upasampadākāle ca, bhikkhūnaṃ pana sakiṃ āpucchitepi vaṭṭati. Tasmā yā upasampadākāle anāpucchā upasampādeti, tassā vuttanayeneva pācittiyaṃ.

Mātāpitūhī: By the mother who gave birth and by the father who begot. Sāmikenā: By the one by whom she is possessed. Ananuññātaṃ: Without permission for the purpose of ordination. Indeed, bhikkhunīs must ask twice, at the time of going forth and at the time of ordination, but for bhikkhus, it is sufficient to ask once. Therefore, for one who ordains without asking at the time of ordination, the offense of expiation occurs in the same way as stated above.

Sāvatthiyaṃ thullanandaṃ ārabbha ananuññātavuṭṭhāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ. Apaloketvā vuṭṭhāpentiyā, tesaṃ atthibhāvaṃ ajānantiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Anapalokanaṃ, atthibhāvajānanaṃ, vuṭṭhāpananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Ananuññātasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kiriyākiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning Thullanandā, regarding an incident of ordaining without permission. There is no offense for one who ordains without informing, for one who does not know of their existence, or for one who is insane, etc. Not informing, not knowing of their existence, and ordaining, these are the three factors here. The origination of not being permitted is inactive, not associated with perception, not intentional, an offense by regulation, bodily action, verbal action, three cittas, and three feelings.

Ananuññātasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Ananuññāta Training Rule is Complete.

11. Pārivāsikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
11. Explanation of the Pārivāsika Training Rule

pārivāsikachandadānenāti pārivāsiyena chandadānena. Tattha catubbidhaṃ pārivāsiyaṃ parisapārivāsiyaṃ rattipārivāsiyaṃ chandapārivāsiyaṃ ajjhāsayapārivāsiyanti.

Pārivāsikachandadānenā: With the giving of consent by one undergoing penance. Therein, penance is of four kinds: penance limited to the assembly, penance limited to the night, penance limited to consent, and penance limited to intention.

parisapārivāsiyaṃnāma, kiñcāpi parisapārivāsiyaṃ, chandassa pana avissaṭṭhattā kammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati.

Parisapārivāsiyaṃ means penance limited to the assembly, but even though it is penance limited to the assembly, it is allowable to perform the act because the consent is not separate.

rattipārivāsiyaṃnāma.

Rattipārivāsiyaṃ means penance limited to the night.

chandapārivāsiyañcevaajjhāsayapārivāsiyañca. Etasmiṃ pārivāsiye puna chandapārisuddhiṃ anāharitvā kammaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati, idaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘pārivāsikachandadānenā’’ti.Pācittiyanti evaṃ vuṭṭhāpentiyā vuttanayeneva kammavācāpariyosāne pācittiyaṃ.

Chandapārivāsiyaṃ as well as ajjhāsayapārivāsiyaṃ. In this penance, it is not allowable to perform the act without bringing forward consent for purity again; referring to this, it was said, "With the giving of consent by one undergoing penance." Pācittiyaṃ: For one who ordains thus, the offense of expiation occurs to the preceptor at the conclusion of the Kammavācā in the same way as stated above.

Rājagahe thullanandaṃ ārabbha evaṃ vuṭṭhāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ. Chandaṃ avissajjetvāva avuṭṭhitāya parisāya vuṭṭhāpentiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Pārivāsikachandadānatā, vuṭṭhāpananti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni gambhinisikkhāpadasadisānevāti.

This was established in Rājagaha concerning Thullanandā, regarding such an incident of ordination. There is no offense for one who ordains without the assembly that is undergoing penance having given consent, or for one who is insane, etc. Being the giving of consent by one undergoing penance, and ordaining, these are the two factors here. The origination, etc., are just similar to the training rule concerning pregnant women.

Pārivāsikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Pārivāsika Training Rule is Complete.

12. Anuvassasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
12. Explanation of the Anuvassa Training Rule

anuvassanti anusaṃvaccharaṃ. Evaṃ vuṭṭhāpentiyāpi vuttanayeneva pācittiyaṃ.

Anuvassaṃ: Every year. For one who ordains thus, the offense of expiation occurs in the same way as stated above.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahulā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha anuvassaṃ vuṭṭhāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ. Ekantarikaṃ vuṭṭhāpentiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Anuvassatā, vuṭṭhāpananti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni ekādasame vuttanayānevāti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning several bhikkhunīs, regarding an incident of ordaining every year. There is no offense for one who ordains with an interval, or for one who is insane, etc. Being every year, and ordaining, these are the two factors here. The origination, etc., are the same as stated in the eleventh.

Anuvassasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Anuvassa Training Rule is Complete.

13. Ekavassasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
13. Explanation of the Ekavassa Training Rule

Terasame ekantarikaṃ ekaṃ vuṭṭhāpentiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Sesaṃ dvādasamena sadisamevāti.

In the thirteenth, there is no offense for one who ordains one with an interval, or for one who is insane, etc. The rest is just similar to the twelfth.

Ekavassasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Ekavassa Training Rule is Complete.

Kumāribhūtavaggo aṭṭhamo.

The Eighth Section, the Kumāribhūta Vagga, is Complete.

9. Chattupāhanavaggo

9. The Chattupāhana Vagga

1. Chattupāhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Chattupāhana Training Rule

chattupāhananti padabhājane (pāci. 1178-1182) vuttalakkhaṇaṃ chattañca upāhanāyo ca.Dhāreyyāti paribhogavasena maggagamane ekappayogeneva divasampi dhārentiyā ekā āpatti. Sace pana tādisaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvā chattampi apanāmetvā upāhanāpi omuñcitvā punappunaṃ dhāreti, payogagaṇanāya pācittiyaṃ.

Chattupāhana: An umbrella and shoes with the characteristics stated in the Padabhājana (pāci. 1178-1182). Dhāreyyā: For one who wears it for the sake of using it on a journey, even for a whole day with a single application, there is one offense. But if, having reached such a place, she takes off the umbrella and also takes off the shoes and wears them again and again, there is an offense of expiation for each application.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiyā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha chattupāhanadhāraṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘agilānā’’ti ayamettha anupaññatti, chattasseva upāhanānaṃyeva vā dhāraṇe dukkaṭaṃ, agilānāya tikapācittiyaṃ, gilānāya dvikadukkaṭaṃ. Gilānasaññāya pana, ārāme ārāmūpacāre dhārentiyā, āpadāsu, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Ubhinnaṃ dhāraṇaṃ, anuññātakāraṇābhāvoti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasadisānīti.

This was established in Sāvatthī concerning the group-of-six bhikkhunīs, regarding an incident of wearing an umbrella and shoes. "When not ill" is an additional regulation here; there is an offense of wrong-doing for wearing only an umbrella or only shoes; there is an offense of expiation for one who is not ill, and two offenses of wrong-doing for one who is ill. However, there is no offense for one who wears them with the perception of being ill, in the monastery or the vicinity of the monastery, in times of danger, or for one who is insane, etc. Wearing both, and the absence of a permitted reason, these are the two factors here. The origination, etc., are similar to goat's hair.

Chattupāhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Slippers is Finished.

2. Yānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Training Rule on Vehicles

yānenāti vayhādinā. Etthāpi orohitvā punappunaṃ abhiruhantiyā payogagaṇanāya pācittiyaṃ. Anāpattiyaṃ ‘‘ārāme ārāmūpacāre’’ti natthi, sesaṃ paṭhame vuttanayeneva veditabbanti.

Yānena (by vehicle) means by a carrying device, etc. Here too, a Pācittiya offense occurs for each attempt of repeatedly dismounting and mounting. The exception, "in the monastery, in the vicinity of the monastery," is not present; the remainder should be understood in the same manner as stated in the first one.

Yānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Vehicles is Finished.

3. Saṅghāṇisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Training Rule on a Waist Girdle

saṅghāṇinti yaṃkiñci kaṭūpagaṃ.Dhāreyyāti kaṭiyaṃ paṭimuñceyya. Etthāpi omuñcitvā omuñcitvā dhārentiyā payogagaṇanāya pācittiyaṃ.

Saṅghāṇi (waist girdle) means anything used as a belt. Dhāreyya (should wear) means should fasten around the waist. Here too, a Pācittiya offense occurs for each attempt of loosening and wearing it.

Sāvatthiyaṃ aññataraṃ bhikkhuniṃ ārabbha saṅghāṇiṃ dhāraṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ. Ābādhapaccayā kaṭisuttaṃ dhārentiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ, idaṃ pana akusalacittanti.

The rule against wearing a waist girdle was established in Sāvatthi concerning a certain bhikkhuni. There is no offense for wearing a waist cord due to illness, or for an insane bhikkhuni, etc. The remainder should be understood in the same manner as stated previously, but this is an unwholesome thought.

Saṅghāṇisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on a Waist Girdle is Finished.

4. Itthālaṅkārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Training Rule on Women’s Ornament

itthālaṅkāranti sīsūpagādīsu aññataraṃ yaṃkiñci piḷandhanaṃ. Idha tassa tassa vasena vatthugaṇanāya āpatti veditabbā.

Itthālaṅkāra (woman’s ornament) means any kind of adornment, such as for the head, etc. Here, the offense should be understood as reckoned by the item.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiyā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha itthālaṅkāraṃ dhāraṇavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ābādhapaccayā kiñcideva dhārentiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Sesaṃ vuttasadisamevāti.

The rule against wearing women’s ornaments was established in Sāvatthi concerning the group-of-six bhikkhunis. There is no offense for wearing a small item due to illness, or for an insane bhikkhuni, etc. The remainder is similar to what was stated above.

Itthālaṅkārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Women’s Ornament is Finished.

5. Gandhavaṇṇakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Training Rule on Perfume or Coloring

gandhavaṇṇakenāti yenakenaci gandhena ca vaṇṇakena ca. Idha gandhādiyojanato paṭṭhāya pubbapayoge dukkaṭaṃ, nahānapariyosāne pācittiyaṃ. Ābādhapaccayā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Sesaṃ catutthasadisamevāti.

Gandhavaṇṇakena (with perfume or coloring) means with any kind of perfume or coloring. Here, from the beginning of applying the perfume, etc., there is a Dukkaṭa for the initial attempt, and a Pācittiya at the completion of bathing. There is no offense due to illness, or for an insane bhikkhuni, etc. The remainder is similar to the fourth.

Gandhavaṇṇakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Perfume or Coloring is Finished.

6. Vāsitakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Training Rule on Scented Powder

vāsitakenāti gandhavāsitakena.Piññākenāti tilapiṭṭhena. Sesaṃ pañcamasadisamevāti.

Vāsitakena (with scented powder) means with powder scented with perfume. Piññākena (with oil-cake powder) means with sesame-seed powder. The remainder is similar to the fifth.

Vāsitakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Scented Powder is Finished.

7. Bhikkhuniummaddāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Training Rule on Having a Bhikkhuni Massaged

ummaddāpeyyāti ubbaṭṭāpeyya.Parimaddāpeyyāti sambāhāpeyya. Ettha ca hatthaṃ amuñcitvā ubbaṭṭane ekāva āpatti, mocetvā mocetvā ubbaṭṭane payogagaṇanāya āpattiyo. Sambāhanepi eseva nayo.

Ummaddāpeyya (should have massaged) means should have rubbed. Parimaddāpeyya (should have kneaded) means should have massaged. Here, there is only one offense for rubbing without lifting the hand; if rubbing by lifting and replacing the hand each time, there are offenses for each attempt. The same method applies to massaging.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahulā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha bhikkhuniyā ummaddāpanaparimaddāpanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, gilānāya, āpadāsu, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Idha maggagamanaparissamopi gelaññaṃ, corabhayādīhi sarīrakampanādayopi āpadā. Sesaṃ catutthe vuttanayeneva veditabbanti.

The rule against having a bhikkhuni massaged or kneaded was established in Sāvatthi concerning several bhikkhunis. There is no offense for a sick bhikkhuni, in times of danger, or for an insane bhikkhuni, etc. Here, exhaustion from walking on a journey is also considered sickness, and shaking of the body due to fear of thieves, etc., is also considered danger. The remainder should be understood in the same manner as stated in the fourth.

Bhikkhuniummaddāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Having a Bhikkhuni Massaged is Finished.

8-9-10. Sikkhamānaummaddāpanādisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8-9-10. Explanation of the Training Rules on Having a Sikkhamānā Massaged, etc.

Aṭṭhamanavamadasamesupi sikkhamānāya sāmaṇeriyā gihiniyāti ettakameva nānaṃ. Sesaṃ sattamasadisamevāti.

In the eighth, ninth, and tenth, the only difference is sikkhamānā, sāmaṇeri, and laywoman. The remainder is similar to the seventh.

Sikkhamānaummaddāpanādisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rules on Having a Sikkhamānā Massaged, etc., is Finished.

11. Anāpucchāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
11. Explanation of the Training Rule on Not Asking Permission

bhikkhussa puratoti na abhimukhamevāti attho, idaṃ pana upacāraṃ sandhāya kathitanti veditabbaṃ. Tasmā bhikkhussa upacāre antamaso chamāyapi ‘‘nisīdāmi, ayyā’’ti anāpucchitvā nisīdantiyā pācittiyaṃ.

Bhikkhussa purato (in front of a bhikkhu) does not mean directly facing, but it should be understood as spoken with regard to proximity. Therefore, if a bhikkhuni sits down in a bhikkhu's vicinity, even on the ground, without asking, "May I sit down, Venerable?", there is a Pācittiya offense.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahulā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha anāpucchā nisīdanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, tikapācittiyaṃ, āpucchite dvikadukkaṭaṃ. Tasmiṃ āpucchitasaññāya, gilānāya, āpadāsu, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Bhikkhussa anāpucchā, upacāre nisajjā, anuññātakāraṇābhāvoti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni kathinasadisāni, idaṃ pana kiriyākiriyanti.

The rule against sitting down without asking permission was established in Sāvatthi concerning several bhikkhunis, a three-fold Pācittiya, and a two-fold Dukkaṭa if permission is asked. There is no offense if she perceives that permission has been asked, if she is ill, in times of danger, or for an insane bhikkhuni, etc. The three factors here are: not asking a bhikkhu, sitting down in his vicinity, and the absence of a permitted reason. The origin, etc., are similar to the Kathina; however, this is an action that involves both action and non-action (kiriyākiriya).

Anāpucchāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Not Asking Permission is Finished.

12. Pañhāpucchanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
12. Explanation of the Training Rule on Asking Questions

anokāsakatanti ‘‘asukasmiṃ nāma ṭhāne pucchāmī’’ti evaṃ akataokāsaṃ, tasmā suttante okāsaṃ kārāpetvā vinayaṃ vā abhidhammaṃ vā pucchantiyā pācittiyaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo, sabbaso akārite pana vattabbameva natthi.

Anokāsakata (without having made an opportunity) means without having made an opportunity by saying, "May I ask in such-and-such place?" Therefore, if she asks about the Suttanta, Vinaya, or Abhidhamma without first making an opportunity, there is a Pācittiya offense. The same method applies to the remaining cases; however, if no opportunity is made at all, there is nothing to be said.

Sāvatthiyaṃ sambahulā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha anokāsakataṃ bhikkhuṃ pañhaṃ pucchanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ. Tattha tattha okāsaṃ kārāpetvā pucchantiyā, anodissa okāsaṃ kārāpetvā yattha katthaci pucchantiyā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Bhikkhussa anokāsakārāpanaṃ, pañhaṃ pucchananti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni padasodhammasadisāni, idaṃ pana kiriyākiriyanti.

The rule against asking a bhikkhu a question without having made an opportunity was established in Sāvatthi concerning several bhikkhunis. There is no offense for asking after having made an opportunity in each instance, for having made a general opportunity and asking anywhere, or for an insane bhikkhuni, etc. The two factors here are: not making an opportunity for the bhikkhu and asking a question. The origin, etc., are similar to the Padasodhamma; however, this is an action that involves both action and non-action (kiriyākiriya).

Pañhāpucchanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Asking Questions is Finished.

13. Asaṃkaccikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
13. Explanation of the Training Rule on Going Without the Saṃkacchikā

asaṃkaccikāti adhakkhakaubbhanābhimaṇḍalasaṅkhātassa sarīrassa paṭicchādanatthaṃ anuññātasaṃkaccikavirahitā.Gāmaṃ paviseyyāti ettha parikkhittassa gāmassa parikkhepaṃ, aparikkhittassa upacāraṃ atikkamantiyā vā okkamantiyā vā paṭhamapāde dukkaṭaṃ, dutiye pācittiyaṃ.

Asaṃkaccikā (without the saṃkacchikā) means without the saṃkacchikā, which is allowed for the purpose of covering the body, namely the region of the breasts and navel. Gāmaṃ paviseyyā (should enter a village): here, when crossing or stepping over the boundary of a village that has a defined boundary, or the vicinity of one that does not, there is a Dukkaṭa on the first step and a Pācittiya on the second.

Sāvatthiyaṃ aññataraṃ bhikkhuniṃ ārabbha asaṃkaccikāya gāmaṃ pavisanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ. Yassā pana saṃkaccikacīvaraṃ acchinnaṃ vā naṭṭhaṃ vā, tassā, gilānāya, āpadāsu, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Asaṃkaccikatā, vuttaparicchedātikkamo, anuññātakāraṇābhāvoti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni eḷakalomasadisānīti.

The rule against entering a village without the saṃkacchikā was established in Sāvatthi concerning a certain bhikkhuni. However, there is no offense for one whose saṃkacchikā-robe is torn or lost, or for one who is ill, in times of danger, or for an insane bhikkhuni, etc. The three factors here are: being without the saṃkacchikā, transgression of the stated boundary, and the absence of a permitted reason. The origin, etc., are similar to goat's hair.

Asaṃkaccikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Going Without the Saṃkacchikā is Finished.

Chattupāhanavaggo navamo.

The Ninth Chapter, Chattupāhana Vagga, is Finished.

10…Pe…16. musāvādādivaggo

10…Pe…16. The Musāvāda (False Speech) Chapter, etc.

Musāvādādisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Training Rules on False Speech, etc.

Ito paresu musāvādavaggādīsu sattasu vaggesu bhikkhupātimokkhavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva vinicchayo veditabboti.

In the seven chapters from the Musāvāda Vagga onwards, the determination should be understood in the same manner as stated in the explanation of the Bhikkhu Pātimokkha.

Soḷasamavaggo.

The Sixteenth Chapter.

Uddiṭṭhākho ayyāyo chasaṭṭhisatā pācittiyā dhammāti bhikkhū ārabbha paññattā sādhāraṇā sattati, asādhāraṇā channavutīti evaṃ chasaṭṭhisatā. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

Uddiṭṭhā kho ayyāyo chasaṭṭhisatā pācittiyā dhammā (These 166 Pācittiya rules have been recited, ladies): of these, seventy are common to bhikkhus, and ninety-six are specific; thus, there are one hundred and sixty-six. The remainder is self-explanatory everywhere.

Kaṅkhāvitaraṇiyā pātimokkhavaṇṇanāya

In the Kaṅkhāvitaraṇī commentary

Bhikkhunipātimokkhe

On the Bhikkhuni Pātimokkha,

Suddhapācittiyavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Suddha Pācittiya is Finished.

Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepato asādhāraṇasikkhāpadesu samuṭṭhānavinicchayo – giraggasamajjā cittāgārasikkhāpadaṃ saṅghāṇī itthālaṅkāro gandhavaṇṇako vāsitakapiññāko bhikkhuniādīhi ummaddanaparimaddanāti imāni dasa sikkhāpadāni acittakāni lokavajjāni akusalacittāni. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo, vināpi cittena āpajjitabbattā acittakāni, citte pana sati akusaleneva āpajjitabbattā lokavajjāni ceva akusalacittāni cāti. Avasesāni sacittakāni paṇṇattivajjāneva. Corivuṭṭhāpanaṃ gāmantaraṃ ārāmasikkhāpadaṃ gabbhinivagge ādito paṭṭhāya satta, kumāribhūtavagge ādito paṭṭhāya pañca purisādisaṃsaṭṭhaṃ pārivāsikachandadānaṃ anuvassavuṭṭhāpanaṃ ekantarikavuṭṭhāpananti imāni ekūnavīsati sikkhāpadāni sacittakāni paṇṇattivajjāni. Avasesāni sacittakāni lokavajjānevāti.

Here, in brief, is the determination of origin for the training rules specific [to bhikkhunis]: the training rule on going to hilltops and festivals, the building of a Citta's pavilion, the waist girdle, women's ornaments, perfume or coloring, scented oil-cake powder, having a bhikkhuni, etc., massaged and kneaded—these ten training rules are non-volitional, worldly offenses, and unwholesome thoughts. The intention here is that they are non-volitional because they can be committed without intention, but when intention is present, they are necessarily worldly offenses and unwholesome thoughts. The remaining ones are volitional and solely rule-based offenses. The training rules on inciting a thief, going to another village, the monastery training rule, the seven from the chapter on pregnant women beginning from the first, the five from the chapter on young women beginning from the first, association with a man, giving parivāsa and chanda, expelling for the rains residence, and expelling one in between—these nineteen training rules are volitional and solely rule-based offenses. The remaining ones are volitional and solely worldly offenses.

Pāṭidesanīyakaṇḍo

The Pāṭidesanīya Section

1. Sappiviññāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Training Rule on Requesting Ghee

sappinti pubbe vuttavinicchayaṃ pāḷiāgataṃ (pāci. 1230) gosappiādimeva.Viññāpetvā bhuñjeyyāti ettha ‘‘viññattiyā paṭiladdhaṃ bhuñjissāmī’’ti gahaṇe dukkaṭaṃ, gahitassa ajjhohāre ajjhohāre pāṭidesanīyaṃ.

Sappi (ghee) means only ghee made from cow's milk, etc., according to the determination stated previously and found in the Pāḷi (pāci. 1230). Viññāpetvā bhuñjeyyā (having requested, should eat): here, there is a Dukkaṭa for receiving, thinking "I will eat what is obtained through the request," and a Pāṭidesanīya for each mouthful that is consumed.

Sāvatthiyaṃ chabbaggiyā bhikkhuniyo ārabbha sappiṃ viññāpetvā bhuñjanavatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, ‘‘agilānā’’ti ayamettha anupaññatti, tikapāṭidesanīyaṃ, gilānāya dvikadukkaṭaṃ. Yā pana gilānā gilānasaññā, gilānakāle vā viññāpetvā pacchā agilānā hutvā bhuñjati, gilānāya vā sesakaṃ, ñātakappavāritaṭṭhānato vā viññattaṃ, aññassa vā atthāya, attano vā dhanena gahitaṃ bhuñjati, tassā, ummattikādīnañca anāpatti. Vuttalakkhaṇasappitā, anuññātakāraṇābhāvo, viññatti, ajjhohāroti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Samuṭṭhānādīni addhānasadisānīti.

The rule against requesting ghee and eating it was established in Sāvatthi concerning the group-of-six bhikkhunis; the clause "not being ill" is an additional prescription here, a threefold Pāṭidesanīya, and a twofold Dukkaṭa for one who is ill. However, there is no offense for one who is ill and perceives herself as ill, for one who requests it while ill and eats it after becoming not ill, for eating what is left over by one who is ill, for what is requested from a relative or one who has been invited, for the sake of another, or for eating what is obtained with one's own wealth, or for an insane bhikkhuni, etc. The four factors here are: ghee of the stated characteristics, the absence of a permitted reason, a request, and consumption. The origin, etc., are similar to a journey.

Sappiviññāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rule on Requesting Ghee is Finished.

2. Telaviññāpanādisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Training Rules on Requesting Oil, etc.

telādīni pubbe vuttavinicchayāni pāḷiyaṃ (pāci. 1236) āgatāneva, pāḷiyaṃ anāgatesu pana aṭṭhasupi dukkaṭameva. Sesaṃ sabbattha paṭhame vuttasadisamevāti.

Telā (oil), etc., are only those that have been previously determined and appear in the Pāḷi (pāci. 1236); however, there is only a Dukkaṭa even for the eight items not mentioned in the Pāḷi. The remainder is similar to what was stated in the first one everywhere.

Telaviññāpanādisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Training Rules on Requesting Oil, etc., is Finished.

Kaṅkhāvitaraṇiyā pātimokkhavaṇṇanāya

In the Kaṅkhāvitaraṇī commentary

Bhikkhunipātimokkhe

On the Bhikkhuni Pātimokkha,

Pāṭidesanīyavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Pāṭidesanīya is Finished.

1. Parimaṇḍalādisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Training Rules on Wearing the Robe Properly, etc.

Ito paraṃ pana sekhiyāni ceva adhikaraṇasamathā ca sabbapakārato bhikkhupātimokkhavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbāti.

From here on, both the Sekhiya rules and the Adhikaraṇasamatha should be understood in the same manner as stated in the explanation of the Bhikkhu Pātimokkha in every way.

Kaṅkhāvitaraṇiyā pātimokkhavaṇṇanāya

In the Kaṅkhāvitaraṇī commentary

Bhikkhunipātimokkhavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Bhikkhuni Pātimokkha is Finished.

Nigamanakathā
Concluding Remarks

Ettāvatā ca

By this much

soṇattherenayācito;

Requested by Soṇa Thera,
Desiring to dispel the doubts of those who have doubts in the Vinaya.

Ārabhiṃ yamahaṃ sabbaṃ, sīhaḷaṭṭhakathānayaṃ;

I have begun this entire work, following the way of the Sinhalese commentary,
Based on the recitation tradition of the residents of the Mahāvihāra.

Nissāya sā ayaṃ niṭṭhaṃ, gatā ādāya sabbaso;

Relying on that, this has reached completion entirely,
Having taken all the essence of the commentaries and the pure meaning of the Pāḷi.

Na hettha taṃ padaṃ atthi, yaṃ virujjheyya pāḷiyā;

There is not a single word here that would contradict the Pāḷi,
Or the ancient commentaries of the residents of the Mahāvihāra.

Yasmā tasmā akatvāva, ettha kaṅkhaṃ hitesinā;

Therefore, without having any doubt here, by one who desires benefit,
This is the Kaṅkhāvitaraṇī.

Yathā ca niṭṭhaṃ sampattā, kaṅkhāvitaraṇī ayaṃ;

And just as this Kaṅkhāvitaraṇī has reached completion,
With a size of twenty-two bhāṇavāras of Pāḷi.

Evaṃ anantarāyena, niṭṭhaṃ kalyāṇanissitā;

May it thus reach completion without obstacles,
Beneficial and auspicious, may all the wishes of all beings be fulfilled soon.

buddhaghosoti garūhi gahitanāmadheyyena therena katā ayaṃkaṅkhāvitaraṇīnāma pātimokkhavaṇṇanā –

This Kaṅkhāvitaraṇī by the Thera whose name is accepted by the teachers as Buddhaghosa, is a commentary on the Pātimokkha—

Tāva tiṭṭhatu lokasmiṃ, lokanittharaṇesinaṃ;

May it last in the world for as long as those who desire to deliver the world,
Showing the method of purity of conduct to the sons of good families.

Yāva ‘‘buddho’’ti nāmampi, suddhacittassa tādino;

As long as even the name "Buddha" of the pure-minded and steadfast one,
The greatest being in the world, the great sage, exists in the world.

Kaṅkhāvitaraṇī-aṭṭhakathā niṭṭhitā.

The Kaṅkhāvitaraṇī Commentary is Finished.